Instructions For CX Programmer

Cat. No.
W340-E2-16A
SYSMAC CS Series
CS1G/H-CPU_-EV1,
CS1G/H-CPU_H,
CS1D-CPU_H, CS1D-CPU_S
SYSMAC CJ Series
CJ1H-CPU_H-R,
CJ1G-CPU_, CJ1G/H-CPU_H, CJ1G-CPU_P,
CJ1M-CPU_,
SYSMAC One NSJ Series
Programmable Controllers
INSTRUCTIONS
REFERENCE MANUAL
SYSMAC CS Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@S
SYSMAC CJ Series
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ1G-CPU@@
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@P
CJ1M-CPU@@
SYSMAC One NSJ Series
Programmable Controllers
Instructions Reference Manual
Revised August 2008
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures
by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this
manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed pre-
cautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also
capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not
it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON
products, often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in
this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, how-
ever, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Control-
ler.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you
locate different types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera-
tion of the product.
1,2,3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series CPU Units
Unit Versions A “unit version” has been introduced to manage CPU Units in the CS/CJ
Series according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
This applies to the CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units.
Notation of Unit Versions The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the
on Products products for which unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Product nameplate
CS1H-CPU67H
CPU UNIT
Lot No. Unit version

Example for Unit version 3.0
Lot No. 040715 0000 Ver.3.0
OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN
• CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units manufactured on or before Novem-

ber 4, 2003 do not have a unit version given on the CPU Unit (i.e., the
location for the unit version shown above is blank).
• The unit version of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units begins at version 4.0.
• The unit version of the CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units, as well as
the CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU Systems, begins at version 2.0.
• The unit version of the CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems, begins
at version 1.1.
• CPU Units for which a unit version is not given are called Pre-Ver. @.@
CPU Units, such as Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units and Pre-Ver. 1.1 CPU Units.
Confirming Unit Versions CX-Programmer version 4.0 can be used to confirm the unit version using one
with Support Software of the following two methods.
• Using the PLC Information
• Using the Unit Manufacturing Information (This method can be used for
Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units as well.)
Note CX-Programmer version 3.3 or lower cannot be used to confirm unit versions.
PLC Information
• If you know the device type and CPU type, select them in the Change
PLC Dialog Box, go online, and select PLC - Edit - Information from the
menus.
• If you don't know the device type and CPU type, but are connected
directly to the CPU Unit on a serial line, select PLC - Auto Online to go
online, and then select PLC - Edit - Information from the menus.
In either case, the following PLC Information Dialog Box will be displayed.
vi
Unit version
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit.
Unit Manufacturing Information
In the IO Table Window, right-click and select Unit Manufacturing informa-
tion - CPU Unit.
The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed.
vii
Unit version
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit connected
online.
Using the Unit Version The following unit version labels are provided with the CPU Unit.
Labels
These labels can be attached to the front of previous CPU Units to differenti-
ate between CPU Units of different unit versions.
viii
Unit Version Notation In this manual, the unit version of a CPU Unit is given as shown in the follow-
ing table.
Product nameplate CPU Units on which no unit version is Units on which a version is given
given (Ver. @.@)
Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX Ver. @ .@
OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN
Meaning
Designating individual Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS1-H CPU Units CS1H-CPU67H CPU Unit Ver. @.@
CPU Units (e.g., the
CS1H-CPU67H)
Designating groups of Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS1-H CPU Units CS1-H CPU Units Ver. @.@
CPU Units (e.g., the
CS1-H CPU Units)
Designating an entire Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS-series CPU Units CS-series CPU Units Ver. @.@
series of CPU Units
(e.g., the CS-series CPU
Units)
ix
Unit Versions
CS Series
Units Models Unit version
CS1-H CPU Units CS1@-CPU@@H Unit version 4.2
Unit version 4.0
Unit version 3.0
Unit version 2.0
Pre-Ver. 2.0
CS1D CPU Units Duplex-CPU Systems Unit version 1.2
CS1D-CPU@@H Unit version 1.1
Pre-Ver. 1.1
Single-CPU Systems Unit version 2.0
CS1D-CPU@@S
CS1 CPU Units CS1@-CPU@@ No unit version.
CS1 Version-1 CPU Units CS1@-CPU@@-V1 No unit version.
CJ Series
Units Models Unit version
CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1H-CPU@@H-R Unit version 4.0
CJ1@-CPU@@H Unit version 4.0
CJ1@-CPU@@P Unit version 3.0
Unit version 2.0
Pre-Ver. 2.0
CJ1M CPU Units CJ1M-CPU12/13 Unit version 4.0
CJ1M-CPU22/23 Unit version 3.0
Unit version 2.0
Pre-Ver. 2.0
CJ1M-CPU11/21 Unit version 4.0
Unit version 3.0
Unit version 2.0
NSJ Series
Units Unit version
NSJ@-TQ@@(B)-G5D Unit version 3.0
NSJ@-TQ@@(B)-M3D
x
Function Support by Unit Version
• Functions Supported for Unit Version 4.0 or Later

CX-Programmer 7.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions
added for unit version 4.0.
CS1-H CPU Units
Function CS1@-CPU@@H
Unit version 4.0 or Other unit versions
later
Online editing of function blocks OK ---
Note This function cannot be used for simulations on the CX-Sim-
ulator.
Input-output variables in function blocks OK ---
Text strings in function blocks OK ---
New application Number-Text String Conversion Instructions: OK ---
instructions NUM4, NUM8, NUM16, STR4, STR8, and STR16
TEXT FILE WRITE (TWRIT) OK ---
CS1D CPU Units

Unit version 4.0 is not supported.
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Units

Function CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1@-CPU@@H,
CJ1G-CPU@@P, CJ1M-CPU@@
later
Online editing of function blocks OK ---
Note This function cannot be used for simulations on the CX-Sim-
ulator.
Input-output variables in function blocks OK ---
Text strings in function blocks OK ---
New application Number-Text String Conversion Instructions: OK ---
instructions NUM4, NUM8, NUM16, STR4, STR8, and STR16
TEXT FILE WRITE (TWRIT) OK ---
User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit
version 4.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit ver-
sion 3.0 or earlier. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to
download programs containing unit version 4.0 functions to a CPU Unit with a
unit version of 3.0 or earlier, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a CPU
Unit with a unit version of 3.0 or earlier, a program error will occur when oper-
ation is started or when the unit version 4.0 function is executed, and CPU
Unit operation will stop.
xi
CS1-H CPU Units
Function CS1@-CPU@@H
later
Function blocks OK ---
Serial Gateway (converting FINS commands to CompoWay/F OK ---
commands at the built-in serial port)
Comment memory (in internal flash memory) OK ---
Expanded simple backup data OK ---
New application TXDU(256), RXDU(255) (support no-protocol OK ---
instructions communications with Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later)
Model conversion instructions: XFERC(565), OK ---
DISTC(566), COLLC(567), MOVBC(568),
BCNTC(621)
Special function block instructions: GETID(286) OK ---
Additional TXD(235) and RXD(236) instructions (support OK ---
instruction func- no-protocol communications with Serial Commu-
tions nications Boards with unit version 1.2 or later)
CS1D CPU Units

Unit version 3.0 is not supported.

Function CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1@-CPU@@H,
CJ1G-CPU@@P, CJ1M-CPU@@
later
Function blocks OK ---
Serial Gateway (converting FINS commands to CompoWay/F OK ---
commands at the built-in serial port)
Comment memory (in internal flash memory) OK ---
Expanded simple backup data OK ---
New application TXDU(256), RXDU(255) (support no-protocol OK ---
instructions communications with Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later)
Model conversion instructions: XFERC(565), OK ---
DISTC(566), COLLC(567), MOVBC(568),
BCNTC(621)
Special function block instructions: GETID(286) OK ---
Additional PRV(881) and PRV2(883) instructions: Added OK ---
instruction func- high-frequency calculation methods for calculat-
tions ing pulse frequency. (CJ1M CPU Units only)
xii
version 3.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit ver-
sion 2.0 or earlier. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to
download programs containing unit version 3.0 functions to a CPU Unit with a
unit version of 2.0 or earlier, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a CPU
Unit with a unit version of 2.0 or earlier, a program error will occur when oper-
ation is started or when the unit version 3.0 function is executed, and CPU
Unit operation will stop.
xiii
CS1-H CPU Units
Function CS1-H CPU Units
(CS1@-CPU@@H)
later
Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks OK ---
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords OK ---
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to OK ---
CPU Units via Networks
Online Network Connections without I/O Tables OK ---
Communications through a Maximum of 8 Net- OK ---
work Levels
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs OK OK from lot number 030201
Setting First Slot Words OK for up to 64 groups OK for up to 8 groups
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a OK ---
Parameter File
Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation Method for --- ---
Automatic Transfer at Power ON
Operation Start/End Times OK ---
New Application MILH, MILR, MILC OK ---
Instructions =DT, <>DT, <DT, <=DT, >DT, OK ---
>=DT
BCMP2 OK ---
GRY OK OK from lot number 030201
TPO OK ---
DSW, TKY, HKY, MTR, 7SEG OK ---
EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR, OK ---
ECHRD, ECHWR
Reading/Writing CPU Bus OK OK from lot number 030418
Units with IORD/IOWR
PRV2 --- ---
xiv
CS1D CPU Units
Function CS1D CPU Units for CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU
Single-CPU Systems Systems (CS1D-CPU@@H)
(CS1D-CPU@@S)
Unit version 2.0 Unit version 1.1 or Pre-Ver. 1.1
later
Functions Duplex CPU Units --- OK OK
unique to CS1D Online Unit Replacement OK OK OK
CPU Units
Duplex Power Supply Units OK OK OK
Duplex Controller Link OK OK OK
Units
Duplex Ethernet Units --- OK OK
Unit removal without a Pro- --- OK (Unit version 1.2 or ---
gramming Device later)
Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks OK --- ---
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords OK --- ---
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent OK --- ---
to CPU Units via Networks
Online Network Connections without I/O OK --- ---
Tables
Communications through a Maximum of 8 OK --- ---
Network Levels
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series OK --- ---
PTs
Setting First Slot Words OK for up to 64 groups --- ---
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a OK --- ---
Parameter File
Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation Method --- --- ---
for Automatic Transfer at Power ON
Operation Start/End Times OK OK ---
New Applica- MILH, MILR, MILC OK --- ---
tion Instructions =DT, <>DT, <DT, <=DT, OK --- ---
>DT, >=DT
BCMP2 OK --- ---
GRY OK --- ---
TPO OK --- ---
DSW, TKY, HKY, MTR, OK --- ---
7SEG
EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR, OK --- ---
ECHRD, ECHWR
Reading/Writing CPU Bus OK --- ---
PRV2 OK --- ---
xv
Function CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1M CPU Units
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ1M-
CJ1@-CPU@@H CJ1M-CPU12/13/22/23
CPU11/21
CJ1G-CPU@@P
Unit version Other unit Unit version Other unit Other unit
2.0 or versions 2.0 or versions versions
later later
Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks OK --- OK --- OK
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords OK --- OK --- OK
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent OK --- OK --- OK
to CPU Units via Networks
Online Network Connections without I/O OK --- OK --- OK
Tables (Supported if (Supported if
I/O tables are I/O tables are
automatically automatically
generated at generated at
startup.) startup.)
Communications through a Maximum of 8 OK --- OK --- OK
Network Levels
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series OK OK from lot OK OK from lot OK
PTs number number
030201 030201
Setting First Slot Words OK for up to OK for up to 8 OK for up to OK for up to 8 OK for up to
64 groups groups 64 groups groups 64 groups
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a OK --- OK --- OK
Parameter File
Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation Method --- --- --- --- ---
for Automatic Transfer at Power ON
Operation Start/End Times OK --- OK --- OK
New Applica- MILH, MILR, MILC OK --- OK --- OK
tion Instructions =DT, <>DT, <DT, <=DT, OK --- OK --- OK
>DT, >=DT
BCMP2 OK --- OK OK OK
GRY OK OK from lot OK OK from lot OK
number number
030201 030201
TPO OK --- OK --- OK
DSW, TKY, HKY, MTR, OK --- OK --- OK
7SEG
EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR, OK --- OK --- OK
ECHRD, ECHWR
Reading/Writing CPU Bus OK --- OK --- OK
PRV2 --- --- OK, but only --- OK, but only
for CPU Units for CPU Units
with built-in with built-in
I/O I/O
version 2.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units.
An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to download pro-
grams containing unit version s.0 functions to a Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Unit, and
the download will not be possible.
xvi
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a Pre-
Ver. 2.0 CPU Unit, a program error will occur when operation is started or
when the unit version 2.0 function is executed, and CPU Unit operation will
stop.
xvii
Unit Versions and Programming Devices
The following tables show the relationship between unit versions and CX-Pro-
grammer versions.
Unit Versions and Programming Devices
CPU Unit Functions (See note 1.) CX-Programmer Program-
Ver. 3.3 Ver. 4.0 Ver. 5.0 Ver. 7.0 ming Con-
or lower or higher sole
Ver. 6.0
CS/CJ-series unit Functions added Using new functions --- --- --- OK (See No
Ver. 4.0 for unit version note 2 restrictions
4.0 and 3.)
Not using new functions OK OK OK OK
CS/CJ-series unit Functions added Using new functions --- --- OK OK
Ver. 3.0 for unit version Not using new functions OK OK OK OK
3.0
CS/CJ-series unit Functions added Using new functions --- OK OK OK
Ver. 2.0 for unit version Not using new functions OK OK OK OK
2.0
CS1D CPU Units Functions added Using new functions --- OK OK OK
for Single-CPU for unit version Not using new functions
Systems, unit Ver. 2.0
2.0
CS1D CPU Units Functions added Using function blocks --- OK OK OK
for Duplex-CPU for unit version Not using function blocks OK OK OK OK
Systems, unit 1.1
Ver.1.
Note 1. As shown above, there is no need to upgrade to CX-Programmer version

as long as the functions added for unit versions are not used.
2. CX-Programmer version 7.1 or higher is required to use the new functions
added for unit version 4.0 of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units. CX-Programmer ver-
sion 7.22 or higher is required to use unit version 4.1 of the CJ1-H-R CPU
Units. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher is required to use unit version
4.2 of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units. You can check the CX-Programmer version
using the About menu command to display version information.
3. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher is required to use the functional im-
provements made for unit version 4.0 of the CS/CJ-series CPU Units. With
CX-Programmer version 7.2 or higher, you can use even more expanded
functionality.
xviii
Device Type Setting The unit version does not affect the setting made for the device type on the
CX-Programmer. Select the device type as shown in the following table
regardless of the unit version of the CPU Unit.
Series CPU Unit group CPU Unit model Device type setting on
CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or higher
CS Series CS1-H CPU Units CS1G-CPU@@H CS1G-H
CS1H-CPU@@H CS1H-H
CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems CS1D-CPU@@H CS1D-H (or CS1H-H)
CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU Systems CS1D-CPU@@S CS1D-S
CJ Series CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1G-CPU@@H CJ1G-H
CJ1G-CPU@@P
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R CJ1H-H
(See note.)
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CJ1M CPU Units CJ1M-CPU@@ CJ1M
Note Select one of the following CPU types: CPU67-R, CPU66-R, CPU65-R, or
CPU64-R.
xix
Troubleshooting Problems with Unit Versions on the CX-Programmer
Problem Cause Solution
An attempt was made to down- Check the program or change
load a program containing to a CPU Unit with a later unit
instructions supported only by version.
later unit versions or a CPU Unit
to a previous unit version.
After the above message is displayed, a compiling

error will be displayed on the Compile Tab Page in the
Output Window.
An attempt was to download a Check the settings in the PLC
PLC Setup containing settings Setup or change to a CPU Unit
supported only by later unit ver- with a later unit version.
sions or a CPU Unit to a previous
unit version.
“????” is displayed in a program transferred from the An attempt was made to upload a New instructions cannot be
PLC to the CX-Programmer. program containing instructions uploaded to lower versions of
supported only by higher versions CX-Programmer. Use a higher
of CX-Programmer to a lower ver- version of CX-Programmer.
sion.
xx
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii
3 Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1-1 General Instruction Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-2 Instruction Execution Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SECTION 2
Summary of Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2-1 Instruction Classifications by Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2-2 Instruction Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2-3 Alphabetical List of Instructions by Mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2-4 List of Instructions by Function Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SECTION 3
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3-1 Notation and Layout of Instruction Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
3-2 Instruction Upgrades and New Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
3-3 Sequence Input Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3-4 Sequence Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
3-5 Sequence Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
3-6 Timer and Counter Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
3-7 Comparison Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
3-8 Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
3-9 Data Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
3-10 Increment/Decrement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
3-11 Symbol Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
3-12 Conversion Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
3-13 Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
3-14 Special Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
3-15 Floating-point Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
3-16 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D Only) . . . . 651
3-17 Table Data Processing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
3-18 Data Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
3-19 Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
3-20 Interrupt Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
xxi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3-21 High-speed Counter/Pulse Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
3-22 Step Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
3-23 Basic I/O Unit Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
3-24 Serial Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
3-25 Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
3-26 File Memory Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
3-27 Display Instructions: DISPLAY MESSAGE: MSG(046) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
3-28 Clock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
3-29 Debugging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
3-30 Failure Diagnosis Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
3-31 Other Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
3-32 Block Programming Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
3-33 Text String Processing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
3-34 Task Control Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
3-35 Model Conversion Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
SECTION 4
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps. . . . . . . 1281
4-1 CS-series Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
4-2 CJ-series Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
Appendix
A ASCII Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
xxii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the ladder diagram programming instructions of the CPU Units for CS/CJ-
series Programmable Controllers (PLCs). The CS Series, CJ Series and NSJ Series are subdivided as
shown in the following figure.
CS Series CJ Series NSJ Series
CS1-H CPU Units CJ2 CPU Units NSJ Controllers
CS1H-CPU@@H CJ2H-CPU@@-@@@ NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-G5D

CS1G-CPU@@H NSJ5-SQ@@(B)-G5D
NSJ8-TV@@(B)-G5D
NSJ10-TV@@(B)-G5D
CJ1-H CPU Units NSJ12-TS@@(B)-G5D
CS1 CPU Units
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CS1H-CPU@@(-V1)
CJ1H-CPU@@H NSJ Controllers
CS1G-CPU@@(-V1)
CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1G -CPU@@P
(Loop-control CPU Units) NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-M3D
NSJ5-SQ@@(B)-M3D
CS1D CPU Units
NSJ8-TV@@(B)-M3D
CS1D CPU Units for
Duplex Systems
CJ1M CPU Units
CS1D-CPU@@H
CJ1M-CPU@@
CS1D CPU Units for
Simplex Systems
CS1D-CPU@@S
CJ1 CPU Units
CS1D Process-control CPU Units

CJ1G-CPU@@
CS1D-CPU@@P
CS-series Basic I/O Units CJ-series Basic I/O Units NSJ-series Expansion Units
CS-series Special I/O Units CJ-series Special I/O Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units CJ-series CPU Bus Units
CS-series Power Supply Units CJ-series Power Supply Units

Note: A special Power Supply Unit must
be used for CS1D CPU Units.
NSJ-series Controller Notation

For information in this manual on the Controller Section of NSJ-series Controllers, refer to the informa-
tion of the equivalent CJ-series PLC. The following models are equivalent.
NSJ-series Controllers Equivalent CJ-series CPU Unit
NSJ@-TQ@@(B)-G5D CJ1G-CPU45H CPU Unit with unit version 3.0
NSJ@-TQ@@(B)-M3D CJ1G-CPU45H CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 (See note.)
Note: The following points differ between the NSJ@-TQ@@(B)-M3D and the CJ1G-CPU45H.
Item CJ-series CPU Unit Controller Section in
CJ1G-CPU45H NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
I/O capacity 1280 points 640 points
Program capacity 60 Ksteps 20 Ksteps
No. of Expansion Racks 3 max. 1 max.
EM Area 32 Kwords x 3 banks None
E0_00000 to E2_32767
Function blocks Max. No. of definitions 1024 128
Max. No. of instances 2048 256
Capacity in built-in FB program memory 1024 KB 256 KB
file memory Variable tables 128 KB 64K KB
Please read this manual and all related manuals listed in the table on the next page and be sure you
understand information provided before attempting to program or use CS/CJ-series CPU Units in a
PLC System.
xxiii
Section 1 introduces the CS/CJ-series PLCs in terms of the instruction set that they support.
Section 2 provides various lists of instructions that can be used for reference.
Section 3 individually describes the instructions in the CS/CJ-series instruction set.
Section 4 provides instruction execution times and the number of steps for each CS/CJ-series instruc-
tion.
xxiv
About this Manual, Continued
Name Cat. No. Contents
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series W340 Describes the ladder diagram programming
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H-CPU@@H, instructions supported by CS/CJ/NSJ-series
CS1D-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, PLCs. (This manual)
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@P,
CJ1M-CPU@@, NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D,
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series W394 This manual describes programming and other
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H-CPU@@H, methods to use the functions of the CS/CJ/NSJ-
CS1D-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, series PLCs.
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@P,
CJ1M-CPU@@, NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D,
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
SYSMAC CS Series W339 Provides an outlines of and describes the design,
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H-CPU@@H installation, maintenance, and other basic opera-
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual tions for the CS-series PLCs.
SYSMAC CJ Series W393 Provides an outlines of and describes the design,
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@P, installation, maintenance, and other basic opera-
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@ tions for the CJ-series PLCs.
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CJ Series W395 Describes the functions of the built-in I/O for
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 CJ1M CPU Units.
Built-in I/O Functions Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS Series W405 Provides an outline of and describes the design,
CS1D-CPU@@H CPU Units installation, maintenance, and other basic opera-
CS1D-CPU@@S CPU Units tions for a Duplex System based on CS1D CPU
CS1D-DPL1 Duplex Unit Units.
CS1D-PA207R Power Supply Unit
Duplex System Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series W341 Provides information on how to program and
CQM1H-PRO01-E, C200H-PRO27-E, CQM1-PRO01-E operate CS/CJ-series PLCs using a Programming
Programming Consoles Operation Manual Console.
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series W342 Describes the C-series (Host Link) and FINS
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, communications commands used with CS/CJ-
CS1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@S, series PLCs.
CJ1M-CPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@P,
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1W-SCB@@-V1,
CS1W-SCU@@-V1, CJ1W-SCU@@-V1, CP1H-X@@@@-@,
CP1H-XA@@@@-@, CP1H-Y@@@@-@,
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D, NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Communications Commands Reference Manual
xxv
Name Cat. No. Contents
NSJ Series W452 Provides the following information about the NSJ-
NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-G5D, NSJ5-SQ@@(B)-G5D, series NSJ Controllers:
NSJ8-TV@@(B)-G5D, NSJ10-TV@@(B)-G5D, Overview and features
NSJ12-TS@@(B)-G5D Designing the system configuration
Operation Manual Installation and wiring
I/O memory allocations
Troubleshooting and maintenance
Use this manual in combination with the following
manuals: SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual
(W339), SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual
(W393), SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming
Manual (W394), and NS-V1/-V2 Series Setup
Manual (V083)
SYSMAC WS02-CX@@-V@ W446 Provides information on how to use the CX-Pro-
CX-Programmer Operation Manual grammer for all functionality except for function
blocks.
SYSMAC WS02-CX@@-V@ W447 Describes the functionality unique to the CX-Pro-
CX-Programmer Ver. 7.0 Operation Manual grammer and CP-series CPU Units or CS/CJ-
Function Blocks series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later
(CS1G-CPU@@H, CS1H-CPU@@H, based on function blocks. Functionality that is the
same as that of the CX-Programmer is described
CJ1G-CPU@@H, CJ1H-CPU@@H,
in W446 (enclosed).
CJ1M-CPU@@, CP1H-X@@@@-@,
CP1H-XA@@@@-@, CP1H-Y@@@@-@
CPU Units)
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series W336 Describes the use of Serial Communications Unit
CS1W-SCB@@-V1, CS1W-SCU@@-V1, and Boards to perform serial communications
CJ1W-SCU@@-V1 with external devices, including the usage of stan-
Serial Communications Boards/Units Operation Manual dard system protocols for OMRON products.
SYSMAC WS02-PSTC1-E W344 Describes the use of the CX-Protocol to create
CX-Protocol Operation Manual protocol macros as communications sequences
to communicate with external devices.
CXONE-AL@@C-V3/AL@@D-V3 W464 Describes operating procedures for the CX-Inte-
CX-Integrator Operation Manual grator Network Configuration Tool for CS-, CJ-,
CP-, and NSJ-series Controllers.
CXONE-AL@@C-V3/AL@@D-V3 W463 Installation and overview of CX-One FA Inte-
CX-One Setup Manual grated Tool Package.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per-
sonal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xxvi
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability

WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-

INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS

REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xxvii
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xxviii
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xxix
xxx
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS/CJ-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable
Controllers. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate a PLC system.
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii

2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii
3 Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
6-1 Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
6-2 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
6-3 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxix
6-4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxix
xxxi
Intended Audience 1
1 Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2 General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica-
tions described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amuse-
ment machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equip-
ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man-
ual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci-
fied purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned appli-
cations.
3 Safety Precautions
!WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I/O even when the program is stopped (i.e., even in
PROGRAM mode). Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the
status of any part of memory allocated to I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or CPU
Bus Units. Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unex-
pected operation of the loads connected to the Unit. Any of the following oper-
ation may result in changes to memory status.
• Transferring I/O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming

Device.
• Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device.
• Force-setting/-resetting bits from a Programming Device.
• Transferring I/O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to
the CPU Unit.
• Transferring I/O memory from a host computer or from another PLC on a
network.
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
xxxii
Safety Precautions 3
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of
the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a counter-
measure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-V-DC output (service power supply to the PLC) is over-
loaded or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs
being turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external
safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!Caution Confirm safety before transferring data files stored in the file memory (Mem-
ory Card or EM file memory) to the I/O area (CIO) of the CPU Unit using a
peripheral tool. Otherwise, the devices connected to the output unit may mal-
function regardless of the operation mode of the CPU Unit.
!Caution Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes. Serious accidents may
result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided.
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
!Caution The CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units automatically back up the
user program and parameter data to flash memory when these are written to
the CPU Unit. I/O memory (including the DM, EM, and HR Areas), however, is
not written to flash memory. The DM, EM, and HR Areas can be held during
power interruptions with a battery. If there is a battery error, the contents of
these areas may not be accurate after a power interruption. If the contents of
the DM, EM, and HR Areas are used to control external outputs, prevent inap-
propriate outputs from being made whenever the Battery Error Flag (A40204)
is ON.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to

another node or changing contents of the I/O memory area. Doing either of
these without confirming safety may result in injury.
xxxiii
Operating Environment Precautions 4
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in
burning or malfunction.
!Caution Do not touch the Power Supply Unit when power is being supplied or immedi-
ately after the power supply is turned OFF. The Power Supply Unit will be hot
and you may be burned.
!Caution Be careful when connecting personal computers or other peripheral devices

to a PLC to which is mounted a non-insulated Unit (CS1W-CLK12/52(-V1) or
CS1W-ETN01) connected to an external power supply. A short-circuit will be
created if the 24 V side of the external power supply is grounded and the 0 V
side of the peripheral device is grounded. When connecting a peripheral
device to this type of PLC, either ground the 0 V side of the external power
supply or do not ground the external power supply at all.
4 Operating Environment Precautions

!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.

• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem-
perature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in

the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified condi-
tions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system.
5 Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PLC System.
• You must use the CX-Programmer (programming software that runs on
Windows) if you need to program more than one task. A Programming
Console can be used to program only one cyclic task plus interrupt tasks.
xxxiv
Application Precautions 5
A Programming Console can, however, be used to edit multitask pro-

grams originally created with the CX-Programmer.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not
connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• A ground of 100 Ω or less must be installed when shorting the GR and LG
terminals on the Power Supply Unit.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of
the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction
or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units, In-
ner Boards, or any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the PLC or the system, or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
• The user program and parameter area data in the CS1-H, CS1D, CJ1-H,
and CJ1M CPU Units are backed up in the built-in flash memory. The
BKUP indicator will light on the front of the CPU Unit when the backup
operation is in progress. Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU
Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. The data will not be backed up if
power is turned OFF.
• When using a CS-series CS1 CPU Unit for the first time, install the
CS1W-BAT1 Battery provided with the Unit and clear all memory areas
from a Programming Device before starting to program. When using the
internal clock, turn ON power after installing the battery and set the clock
from a Programming Device or using the DATE(735) instruction. The clock
will not start until the time has been set.
• When the CPU Unit is shipped from the factory, the PLC Setup is set so
that the CPU Unit will start in the operating mode set on the Programming
Console mode switch. When a Programming Console is not connected, a
CS-series CS1 CPU Unit will start in PROGRAM mode, but a CS1-H,
CS1D, CJ1, CJ1-H, or CJ1M CPU Unit will start in RUN mode and opera-
tion will begin immediately. Do not advertently or inadvertently allow oper-
ation to start without confirming that it is safe.
• When creating an AUTOEXEC.IOM file from a Programming Device (a
Programming Console or the CX-Programmer) to automatically transfer
data at startup, set the first write address to D20000 and be sure that the
size of data written does not exceed the size of the DM Area. When the
data file is read from the Memory Card at startup, data will be written in
the CPU Unit starting at D20000 even if another address was set when
the AUTOEXEC.IOM file was created. Also, if the DM Area is exceeded
(which is possible when the CX-Programmer is used), the remaining data
will be written to the EM Area.
xxxv
• Always turn ON power to the PLC before turning ON power to the control
system. If the PLC power supply is turned ON after the control power sup-
ply, temporary errors may result in control system signals because the
output terminals on DC Output Units and other Units will momentarily turn
ON when power is turned ON to the PLC.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event that outputs from Output Units remain ON as a result of internal cir-
cuit failures, which can occur in relays, transistors, and other elements.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external cir-
cuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the
customer.
• Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC when data is being trans-
ferred. In particular, do not turn OFF the power supply when reading or
writing a Memory Card. Also, do not remove the Memory Card when the
BUSY indicator is lit. To remove a Memory Card, first press the memory
card power supply switch and then wait for the BUSY indicator to go out
before removing the Memory Card.
• If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be
turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is
switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure
that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this
occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced
with the FALS(007) instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned
OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
• The contents of the DM, EM, and HR Areas in the CPU Unit are backed
up by a Battery. If the Battery voltage drops, this data may be lost. Provide
countermeasures in the program using the Battery Error Flag (A40204) to
re-initialize data or take other actions if the Battery voltage drops.
• When supplying power at 200 to 240 V AC with a CS-series PLC, always
remove the metal jumper from the voltage selector terminals on the Power
Supply Unit (except for Power Supply Units with wide-range specifica-
tions). The product will be destroyed if 200 to 240 V AC is supplied while
the metal jumper is attached.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-cir-
cuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-cir-
cuiting may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input volt-
age. Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of
the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in
burning.
xxxvi
• Separate the line ground terminal (LG) from the functional ground termi-
nal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit before performing withstand voltage
tests or insulation resistance tests. Not doing so may result in burning.
• Install the Units properly as specified in the operation manuals. Improper
installation of the Units may result in malfunction.
• With CS-series PLCs, be sure that all the Unit and Backplane mounting
screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals.
Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Be sure that all terminal screws, and cable connector screws are tight-
ened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening
torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis-
sipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Wire all connections correctly.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors com-
pletely.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and
other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper
locking may result in malfunction.
• Check switch settings, the contents of the DM Area, and other prepara-
tions before starting operation. Starting operation without the proper set-
tings or data may result in an unexpected operation.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected opera-
tion.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the
startup operating mode).
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.
Doing either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so
may break the cables.
• Do not use commercially available RS-232C personal computer cables.
Always use the special cables listed in this manual or make cables
according to manual specifications. Using commercially available cables
may damage the external devices or CPU Unit.
• Never connect pin 6 (5-V power supply) on the RS-232C port on the CPU
Unit to any device other than an NT-AL001 or CJ1W-CIF11 Adapter. The
external device or the CPU Unit may be damaged.
xxxvii
Conformance to EC Directives 6
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is
correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunc-
tion or damage.
• When transporting or storing circuit boards, cover them in antistatic mate-
rial to protect them from static electricity and maintain the proper storage
temperature.
• Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your
bare hands. There are sharp leads and other parts on the boards that
may cause injury if handled improperly.
• Do not short the battery terminals or charge, disassemble, heat, or incin-
erate the battery. Do not subject the battery to strong shocks. Doing any
of these may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or ignition of the
battery. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or oth-
erwise subjected to excessive shock. Batteries that have been subjected
to shock may leak if they are used.
• UL standards require that batteries be replaced only by experienced tech-
nicians. Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries.
• Dispose of the product and batteries according to local ordi-
nances as they apply. Have qualified specialists properly dis-
pose of used batteries as industrial waste.
• With a CJ-series PLC, the sliders on the tops and bottoms of the Power
Supply Unit, CPU Unit, I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
must be completely locked (until they click into place). The Unit may not
operate properly if the sliders are not locked in place.
• With a CJ-series PLC, always connect the End Plate to the Unit on the
right end of the PLC. The PLC will not operate properly without the End
Plate
• Unexpected operation may result if inappropriate data link tables or
parameters are set. Even if appropriate data link tables and parameters
have been set, confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely
affected before starting or stopping data links.
• CPU Bus Units will be restarted when routing tables are transferred from
a Programming Device to the CPU Unit. Restarting these Units is required
to read and enable the new routing tables. Confirm that the system will
not be adversely affected before allowing the CPU Bus Units to be reset.
6 Conformance to EC Directives
6-1 Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-2 Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
xxxviii
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by

the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc-
tives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61131-2 (CS-series)/
EN61000-6-2 (CJ-series)
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference): EN61000-6-4
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75
to 1,500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).
6-3 Conformance to EC Directives

The CS/CJ-series PLCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the
machine or device in which the CS/CJ-series PLC is used complies with EC
Directives, the PLC must be installed as follows:
1,2,3... 1. The CS/CJ-series PLC must be installed within a control panel.
2. You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power
supplies used for the communications power supply and I/O power sup-
plies.
3. CS/CJ-series PLCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the
Common Emission Standard (EN61000-6-4). Radiated emission charac-
teristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the
control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring,
and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine
or equipment complies with EC Directives.
6-4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods

The CS/CJ-series PLCs conforms to the Common Emission Standards
(EN61000-6-4) of the EMC Directives. However, noise generated by relay out-
put switching may not satisfy these Standards. In such a case, a noise filter
must be connected to the load side or other appropriate countermeasures
must be provided external to the PLC.
Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the
devices on the load side, wiring, configuration of machines, etc. Following are
examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise.
Countermeasures
(Refer to EN61000-6-4 for more details.)
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PLC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole
system with the PLC included is more than 5 times per minute.
xxxix
Countermeasure Examples
When switching an inductive load, connect an surge protector, diodes, etc., in
parallel with the load or contact as shown below.
Circuit Current Characteristic Required element
AC DC
CR method Yes Yes If the load is a relay or solenoid, thereThe capacitance of the capacitor must
is a time lag between the moment the be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of
circuit is opened and the moment the 1 A and resistance of the resistor must
load is reset. be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of 1 V.
Inductive
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, These values, however, vary with the

load
insert the surge protector in parallel load and the characteristics of the
Power relay. Decide these values from experi-
supply with the load. If the supply voltage is
100 to 200 V, insert the surge protector ments, and take into consideration that
between the contacts. the capacitance suppresses spark dis-
charge when the contacts are sepa-
rated and the resistance limits the
current that flows into the load when
the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is an
AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
Diode method No Yes The diode connected in parallel with The reversed dielectric strength value
the load changes energy accumulated of the diode must be at least 10 times
by the coil into a current, which then as large as the circuit voltage value.
Inductive
flows into the coil so that the current The forward current of the diode must
will be converted into Joule heat by the be the same as or larger than the load
load
Power resistance of the inductive load. current.

supply
This time lag, between the moment the The reversed dielectric strength value
circuit is opened and the moment the of the diode may be two to three times
load is reset, caused by this method is larger than the supply voltage if the
longer than that caused by the CR surge protector is applied to electronic
method. circuits with low circuit voltages.
Varistor method Yes Yes The varistor method prevents the impo- ---
sition of high voltage between the con-
tacts by using the constant voltage
characteristic of the varistor. There is
Inductive
time lag between the moment the cir-

load
cuit is opened and the moment the load

Power
supply is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V,
insert the varistor in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the varistor between the
contacts.
When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent

lamp, suppress the inrush current as shown below.
Countermeasure 1 Countermeasure 2
R
OUT OUT
R
COM COM
Providing a dark current of Providing a limiting resistor
approx. one-third of the rated
value through an incandescent
lamp
xl
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section provides information on general instruction characteristics as well as the errors that can occur during
instruction execution.
1-1 General Instruction Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1-1-1 Program Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-1-2 Differentiated Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1-1-3 Instruction Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1-1-4 Instruction Location and Execution Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-1-5 Inputting Data in Operands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-1-6 Data Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1-2 Instruction Execution Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1-2-1 Errors Occurring at Instruction Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1-2-2 Fatal Errors (Program Errors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1
General Instruction Characteristics Section 1-1
1-1 General Instruction Characteristics

1-1-1 Program Capacity
The program capacity tells the size of the user program area in the CPU Unit
and is expressed as the number of program steps. The number of steps
required in the user program area for each of the CS/CJ-series instructions
varies from 1 to 7 steps, depending upon the instruction and the operands
used with it.
CS Series
The following tables show the maximum number of steps that can be pro-
grammed in each CS-series CPU Unit.
• CS1-H CPU Units
Model Program capacity I/O points
CS1H-CPU67H 250K steps 5,120
CS1H-CPU66H 120K steps
CS1G-CPU45H 60K steps
CS1G-CPU44H 30K steps 1,280
CS1G-CPU43H 20K steps 960
CS1G-CPU42H 10K steps
• CS1 CPU Units

CS1H-CPU67-E 250K steps 5,120
CS1H-CPU66-E 120K steps
CS1G-CPU45-E 60K steps
CS1G-CPU44-E 30K steps 1,280
CS1G-CPU43-E 20K steps 960
CS1G-CPU42-E 10K steps
• CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU Systems

CS1D-CPU67H 250K steps 5,120
CS1D-CPU65H 60K steps
CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems

CS1D-CPU42S 10K steps 960
CS1D-CPU44S 30K steps 1,280
CS1D-CPU65S 60K steps 5,120
CS1D-CPU67S 250K steps
CJ Series
The following tables show the maximum number of steps that can be pro-
grammed in each CJ-series CPU Unit.
2
• CJ1-H CPU Units

CJ1H-CPU67H-R 250K steps 2,560
CJ1H-CPU66H-R 120K steps
CJ1H-CPU67H 250K steps
CJ1G-CPU45H 60K steps 1,280
CJ1G-CPU44H 30K steps
CJ1G-CPU43H 20K steps 960
CJ1G-CPU42H 10K steps
• CJ1 CPU Units

CJ1G-CPU45 60K steps 1,280
CJ1G-CPU44 30K steps
• CJ1M CPU Units

CJ1M-CPU23 20K steps 640
Note Program capacity for CS/CJ-series PLCs is measured in steps, whereas pro-
gram capacity for previous OMRON PLCs, such as the C-series and CV-
series PLCs, was measured in words. Basically speaking, 1 step is equivalent
to 1 word. The amount of memory required for each instruction, however, is
different for some of the CS/CJ-series instructions, and inaccuracies will occur
if the capacity of a user program for another PLC is converted for a CS/CJ-
series PLC based on the assumption that 1 word is 1 step. Refer to the infor-
mation at the end of SECTION 4 Instruction Execution Times and Number of
Steps for guidelines on converting program capacities from previous OMRON
PLCs.
The number of steps in a program is not the same as the number of instruc-
tions. For example, LD and OUT require 1 step each, but MOV(021) requires
3 steps. Other instructions require up to 15 steps each. The number of steps
required by an instruction is also increased by one step for each double-
length operand used in it. For example, MOVL(498) normally requires 3 steps,
but 4 steps will be required if a constant is specified for the source word oper-
and, S. Refer to SECTION 4 Instruction Execution Times and Number of
Steps for the number of steps required for each instruction.
1-1-2 Differentiated Instructions

Most instructions in CS/CJ-series PLCs are provided with both non-differenti-
ated and upwardly differentiated variations, and some are also provided with a
downwardly differentiated variation.
• A non-differentiated instruction is executed every time it is scanned.
3
• An upwardly differentiated instruction is executed only once after its exe-

cution condition goes from OFF to ON.
• A downwardly differentiated instruction is executed only once after its exe-
cution condition goes from ON to OFF.
Variation Instruction type Operation Format Example
Non- Output instructions The instruction is exe- Output instruction
differentiated (instructions requiring cuted every cycle while executed each cycle MOV
an execution condi- the execution condition is

tion) true (ON).
Input instructions The bit processing (such Input instruction
executed each cycle
(instructions used as as read, comparison, or
execution conditions) test) is performed every
cycle. The execution con-
dition is true while the
result is ON.
Upwardly Output instructions The instruction is exe- Instruction executed
differentiated cuted just once when the once for upward @MOV
differentiation
(with @ prefix) execution condition goes MOV(021) executed once
from OFF to ON. for each OFF to ON transi-
tion in CIO 000102.
Input instructions The bit processing (such Upwardly differentiated

input instruction
(instructions used as as read, comparison, or
execution conditions) test) is performed every ON execution condition created
for one cycle only for each OFF
cycle. The execution con- to ON transition in CIO 000103.
dition is true for one cycle
when the result goes
from OFF to ON.
Downwardly Output instructions The instruction is exe- %Instruction 0001
differentiated cuted just once when the executed once for 02 %SET
downward SET executed once for
(with % prefix) execution condition goes differentiation each ON to OFF transition
from ON to OFF. in CIO 000102.
Input instructions The bit processing (such Downwardly differentiated 0001

(instructions used as as read, comparison, or input instruction 03
execution conditions) test) is performed every

cycle. The execution con-
dition is true for one cycle ON execution condition created
for one cycle only for each ON to
when the result goes OFF transition in CIO 000103.
from ON to OFF.
Note The downwardly differentiated option (%) is available only for the LD, AND,
OR, and RSET instructions. To create downwardly differentiated variations of
other instructions, control the execution of the instruction with work bits con-
trolled with DIFD(014) or DOWN(522).
1-1-3 Instruction Variations

The variation prefixes (@, %, and !) can be added to an instruction to create a
differentiated instruction or provide immediate refreshing.
Variation Prefix Operation
DifferentiationUpwardly dif- @ Creates an upwardly differentiated instruc-
ferentiated tion.
Downwardly % Creates a downwardly differentiated instruc-
differentiated tion.
Immediate refreshing ! The instruction’s operand data in the I/O
Area will be refreshed when the instruction
is executed.
4
! @ MOV
Instruction mnemonic
Up-differentiation variation
Immediate-refreshing variation
1-1-4 Instruction Location and Execution Conditions

The following table shows the locations in which instructions can be pro-
grammed. The table also shows when an instruction requires an execution
condition and when it does not. Refer to SECTION 2 Summary of Instructions
for details on specific instructions.
Instruction type Location Execution Format Examples
condition
Input Instructions At the left bus or at Not required LD, LD TST, and input com-
that start the start of an parison instructions such as
logic instruction block LD >
conditions
Connecting Between a starting Required AND, OR, AND TST, input
instructions instruction and out- comparison instructions such
put instruction as AND >, UP, DOWN, NOT
Output At the right bus Required The majority of instructions
(such as OUT and MOV)
Not required Instructions such as END,

JME, FOR, and ILC
In addition to these instructions, the CS/CJ-series PLCs are equipped with

block programming instructions. Refer to the description of the block program-
ming instructions for details.
Note If an execution condition does not precede an instruction that requires one, a
program error will occur when the program is checked from a Peripheral
Device.
1-1-5 Inputting Data in Operands
Operands are parameters that are set in advance with the I/O memory
addresses or constants to be used when the instruction is executed. There
are basically three kinds of operands: Source operands, destination oper-
ands, and numbers.
MOV JMP
#0000 S (Source) &3 N (Number)
D00000 D (Destination)
Operand Usual Contents

code
Source Address containing S Source Source data other than
the data or the data operand control data
itself C Control Control data with a bit
data or bits controlling
instruction execution
Destination Address where the D ---
data will be stored
Number Contains a number N ---
such as a jump num-
ber or subroutine
number.
5
Note An instruction’s operands may also be referred to by their position in the

instruction (first operand, second operand, ...). The codes used for the oper-
and vary with the specific function of the operand.
MOV
#0000 First operand
D00000 Second operand
Specifying Bit Addresses

Description Example Instruction example
To specify a bit address, specify the word 0001 02 0001
02
address and bit address directly.
Bit 02
@@@@ @@ Word CIO 0001
Bit number
Word address
Note The word address + bit number format is
not used for Timer/Counter Completion
Flags or Task Flags.
Specifying Word Addresses

To specify a word address, specify the word 0003 MOV 0003 D00200
address directly. Word CIO 0003
@@@@ D00200
Word address Word D00200
Specifying Indirect DM/EM Addresses in Binary Mode

When the @ prefix is input before a DM or EM --- ---
address, the contents of that word specifies
another word that is used as the operand. The
contents can be 0000 to 7FFF (0 to 32,767),
corresponding to the desired word address in the
DM or EM Area.
@D@@@@@
Content 00000 to 32767

(0000 to 7FFF)
When the contents of @D@@@@@ is between @D00300 MOV #0001

0000 and 7FFF (00000 to 32,767), the corre- @D00300
sponding word between D00000 and D32767 is 0 1 0 0
specified.
Decimal: 256
Specifies D00256.
Add the @ prefix.
6

When the contents of @D@@@@@ is between @D00300 ---
8000 and FFFF (32,768 to 65,535), the corre-
sponding word between E0_00000 and E0_32767 8 0 0 1
in EM bank 0 is specified.
Decimal: 32,769
Specifies E0_00001.
When the contents of @En@_@@@@@ is between @E1_00200 MOV #0001

0000 and 7FFF (00000 to 32,767), the corre- @E1_00200
sponding word between En@_00000 and 0 1 0 1
En@_32767 is specified.
Decimal: 257
Specifies E1_00257.
When the contents of @En@_@@@@@ is between @E1_00200

8000 and FFFF (32,768 to 65,535), the corre-
sponding word between E (@+1) _00000 and E 8 0 0 2
(@+1) _32767 (in the next EM bank) is specified.
Decimal: 32770
Specifies E2_00002.
Note When binary mode is selected in the PLC Setup, the DM Area and current EM
bank addresses (bank 0 to C) are treated as consecutive memory addresses.
A word in EM bank 0 will be specified if an indirectly addressed DM word con-
tains a value greater than 32,767. For example, E00000 in bank 0 will be
specified when the indirect-addressing DM word contains a hexadecimal
value of 8000 (32,768).
A word in the next EM bank will be specified if an indirectly addressed EM
word contains a value greater than 32,767. For example, E3_00000 will be
specified when the indirect-addressing EM word in bank 2 contains a hexa-
decimal value of 8000 (32,768).
Specifying Indirect DM/EM Addresses in BCD Mode

Method Description Example Instruction example
Indirect DM/EM When the * prefix is input before a DM *D00200 MOV #0001 *D00200
addressing or EM address, the BCD contents of
(BCD mode) that word specify another word that is 0 1 0 0
used as the operand. The contents can
be 0000 to 9999, corresponding to the
desired word address in the DM or EM Specifies D00100.
Area.
Add the * prefix.
*D@@@@@
Content 0000 to 9999

(BCD)
7
Addressing Index Registers

Method Description Example Instruction example
Directly MOVR(560) moves the PLC memory address of a IR0 MOVR 0010 IR0
addressing word or bit to an Index Register (IR0 to IR15). IR2 Stores the PLC memory address
Index Registers (MOVRW(561) moves the PLC memory address of of CIO 0010 in IR0.
a timer or counter PV to an Index Register.) MOVR 000102 IR2
Stores the PLC memory address
of CIO 000102 in IR2.
Indirect Basic opera- The word or bit at the I/O memory ,IR0 LD ,IR0
addressing with tion (no offset) address contained in IR@ is used ,IR1 Loads the status of the bit at the
Index Registers as the operand. Input a comma I/O memory address contained in
before the Index Register to indi- IR0.
cate indirect addressing. MOV #0001, IR1
(The bit/word designation can be Moves #0001 to the word at the
determined by the instruction or I/O memory address contained in
operand.) IR1.
Constant offset The offset value (–2,048 to +5 ,IR0 LD +5 ,IR0
+2,047) is added to the I/O mem- +31 ,IR1 Adds 5 to the I/O memory
ory address contained in IR@ and address contained in IR0 and
the resulting address is used as loads the status of the bit at that
the operand. address.
(The offset is converted to binary MOV #0001 +31 ,IR1
when the instruction is executed.) Adds 31 to the I/O memory
address contained in IR1 and
moves #0001 to the word at that
address.
DR offset The signed binary content of the DR0 ,IR0 LD DR0 ,IR0
Data Register is added to the I/O DR0 ,IR1 Adds the content of DR0 to the
memory address contained in I/O memory address contained in
IR@ and the resulting address is IR0 and loads the status of the bit
used as the operand. at that address.
MOV #0001 DR0 ,IR1
Adds the content of DR0 to the
I/O memory address contained in
IR1 and moves #0001 to the word
at that address.
Auto-increment After the I/O memory address is ,IR0 + + LD ,IR0 + +
read from IR@, the content of the ,IR1 + Loads the status of the bit at the
Index Register is incremented by I/O memory address contained in
one or two. IR0 and then increments the reg-
Increment by 1: ,R@+ ister by two.
Increment by 2: ,IR@++ MOV #0001 ,IR1 +
Note Index registers will be incre- Moves #0001 to the word at the
mented when the instruction I/O memory address contained in
is executed even if an error IR1 and then increments the reg-
occurs and the Error Flag ister by one.
turns ON.
Auto-decre- The content of IR@ is decre- , – – IR0 LD , – – IR0
ment mented by one or two and then , – IR1 Decrements the content of IR0 by
the I/O memory address in the two and then loads the status of
register is used as the operand. the bit at that I/O memory
Decrement by 1: ,– IR@ address.
Decrement by 2: ,– –IR@ MOV #0001 , – IR1
Note Index registers will be dec- Decrements the content of IR0 by
remented when the instruc- one and then moves #0001 to the
tion is executed even if an word at that I/O memory address.
error occurs and the Error
Flag turns ON.
Note Make sure that the contents of index registers indicate valid I/O memory
addresses.
8
Specifying Constants
Method Applicable Data Code Range Example
operands format
Constant All binary data Unsigned # #0000 to #FFFF MOV #0100 D00000
(16-bit data) and binary data binary Stores #0100 hex (&256 decimal)
within a range in D00000.
+#0009 #0001 D00001
Stores #000A hex (&10 decimal)
in D00001.
Signed dec- ± –32,768 to +32,767 MOV −100 D00000
imal Stores −100 decimal (#FF9C hex)
in D00000.
+−9 −1 D00001
Stores −10 decimal (#FFF6 hex)
in D00001.
Unsigned & &0 to &66,535 MOV &256 D00000
decimal Stores −256 decimal (#0100 hex)
in D00000.
+&9 &1 D00001
Stores −10 decimal (#000A hex)
in D00001.
All BCD data BCD # #0000 to #9999 MOV #0100 D00000
and BCD data Stores #0100 (BCD) in D00000.
within a range +B #0009 #0001 D00001
Stores #0010 (BCD) in D00001.
Constant All binary data Unsigned # #0000 0000 to MOVL #12345678 D00000
(32-bit data) and binary data binary #FFFF FFFF Stores #12345678 hex in D00000
within a range and D00001.
D0001 D00000
1234 5678
Signed dec- + –2,147,483,648 to MOVL −12345678 D00000

imal – +2,147,483,647 Stores −12345678 decimal in
D00000 and D00001.
Unsigned & &0 to &4,294,967,295 MOVL &12345678 D00000
decimal Stores &12345678 decimal in
D00000 and D00001.
All BCD data BCD # #0000 0000 to MOVL #12345678 D00000
and BCD data #9999 9999 Stores #12345678 (BCD) in
within a range D00000 and D00001
Specifying Text Strings

Method Description Code Examples Instruction example
Text strings Text is stored in ASCII (1 byte/ "ABCDE" MOV$ D00100 D00200
character excluding special 41 42
"A" "B" D00100
characters) starting with the
"C" "D" D00101 43 44
lower byte of the lowest word
in the range. "E" NUL D00102 45 00
If there is an odd number of 41 42
characters, 00 (NULL) is 43 44
stored in the higher byte of the D00200 41 42
45 00 43 44
last word in the range. D00201
"ABCD" D00202 45 00
If there is an even number of
characters, 0000 (two NULLs) "A" "B"
are stored in the word after the "C" "D"
last in the range. NUL NUL
41 42
43 44
00 00
9
The following diagram shows the characters that can be expressed in ASCII.
Leftmost bit
SP
Rightmost bit
Note The following instructions are executed even when the input conditions are
OFF. Therefore, when indirect memory addresses are specified using auto-
incrementing or auto-decrementing (,IR+ or ,IR-) in an operand of any of
these instructions, the value in the Index Register (IR) is refreshed each cycle
regardless of the input condition (increases or decreases one every cycle).
This must be considered when writing a program.
Classification Instructions
Sequence input LD, LD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR, OR NOT, LD TST(350),
instructions LD TSTN(351), AND TST(350), AND TSTN(351), OR
TST(350), OR TSTN(351)
Sequence output OUT, OUT NOT, DIFU(013), DIFD(014)
instructions
Sequence control JMP(004), FOR(512)
instructions
Timer and counter TIM/TIMX(550), TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551), TMHH(540)/
instructions TMHHX(552), TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556), TMUH(544)/
TMUHX(557), TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555), TIML(542)/
TIMLX(553), MTIM(533)/MTIMX(554), CNT/CNTX(546),
CNTR(012)/CNTRX(548)
Comparison instruc- Symbol comparison instructions (LD, AND, OR =, etc.(func-
tions tion codes: 300, 305, 310, 320, and 325))
Single-precision float- Single-precision floating-point data comparison (LD, AND,
ing-point math instruc- OR = F, etc.(function codes: 329 to 334))
tions
Double-precision float- Double-precision floating-point data comparison (LD, AND,
ing-point math instruc- OR = D, etc.(function codes: 335 to 340))
tions
10
Classification Instructions
Block programming BPPS(811), BPRS(812), EXIT(806), EXIT(806) NOT,
instructions IF(802), IF(802) NOT, WAIT(805), WAIT(805) NOT,
TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816), CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818),
TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817), LEND(810), LEND(810) NOT
Text string processing STRING COMPARISON (LD, AND, OR = $, etc. (function
instructions codes: 670 to 675))
The following ladder programming examples show how the index registers are
treated.
Example 1
Ladder Program:
LD P_Off
OUT, IR0+
Operation: When the PLC memory address 000013 is stored in IR0.
The input condition is OFF (P_Off is the Always OFF Flag), so the OUT
instruction sets 000013, which is indirectly addressed by IR0, to OFF. The
OUT instruction is executed, so IR0 is incremented. As a result, the PLC
memory address 000014, which was incremented by +1 in the IR0, is stored.
Therefore, in the following cycle the OUT instruction turns OFF 000014.
Example 2
Ladder Program:
LD P_Off
SET, IR0+
Operation: When the PLC memory address 000013 is stored in IR0.
The input condition is OFF (P_Off is the Always OFF Flag), so the SET
instruction is not executed. Therefore, IR0 is not incremented and the value
stored in IR0 remains PLC memory address 000013.
1-1-6 Data Formats

The following table shows the data formats that can be used in CS/CJ-series
PLCs.
Name Format Decimal Hexadecimal
range range
Unsigned 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 to 0000 to FFFF
binary 65,535
data
Binary 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Decimal 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Hexa- 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
decimal
Signed 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 –32,768 8000 to 7FFF

binary to
data +32,767
Binary 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Decimal -32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Hexa- 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
decimal
Sign bit
0: Positive
1: Negative
11
Name Format Decimal Hexadecimal

range range
BCD data 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 to 9,999 0000 to 9999
BCD 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
Decimal 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
Floating- 31 30 29 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 3 2 1 0 --- ---

point deci-
mal
Sign of Exponent Mantissa

Binary
mantissa
Value = (−1)Sign x 1.[Mantissa] x 2Exponent

Sign (bit 31) 1: negative or 0: positive
Mantissa The mantissa includes 23 bits from bit 00 to bit 22
and indicates this portion below the decimal point
in 1.@@@..... in binary.
Exponent The exponent includes 8 bits from bit 23 to bit 30
and indicates n plus 127 in 2n in binary.
Note This format conforms to IEEE754 standards for single-precision floating-point data
and is used only with instructions that convert or calculate floating-point data. It can
be used to set or monitor from the I/O memory Edit and Monitor Screen on the CX-
Programmer (not supported by the Programming Consoles). As such, users do not
need to know this format although they do need to know that the formatting takes up
two words.
Double- 63 62 61 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 3 2 1 0 --- ---

precision
floating-
point deci-
mal Sign of Exponent Mantissa
mantissa Binary
Value = (−1)Sign x 1.[Mantissa] x 2Exponent

Sign (bit 63) 1: negative or 0: positive
Mantissa The 52 bits from bit 00 to bit 51 contain the mantissa,
i.e., the portion below the decimal point in 1.@@@.....,
in binary.
Exponent The 11 bits from bit 52 to bit 62 contain the exponent
The exponent is expressed in binary as 1023 plus n in
2n.
Note This format conforms to IEEE754 standards for double-precision floating-point
data and is used only with instructions that convert or calculate floating-point
data. It can be used to set or monitor from the I/O memory Edit and Monitor
Screen on the CX-Programmer (not supported by the Programming
Consoles). As such, users do not need to know this format although they do
need to know that the formatting takes up four words.
Signed Binary Numbers Negative signed-binary numbers are expressed as the 2’s complement of the
absolute hexadecimal value. For a decimal value of –12,345, the absolute
value is equivalent to 3039 hexadecimal. The 2’s complement is 10000 – 3039
(both hexadecimal) or CFC7.
To convert from a negative signed binary number (CFC7) to decimal, take the
2’s complement of that number (10000 – CFC7 = 3039), convert to decimal
(3039 hexadecimal = 12,345 decimal), and add a minus sign (–12,345).
12
Instruction Execution Checks Section 1-2
1-2 Instruction Execution Checks

1-2-1 Errors Occurring at Instruction Execution
An instruction’s operands and placement are checked when an instruction is
input from a Peripheral Device or a program check is performed from a
Peripheral Device (other than a Programming Console), but these are not final
checks. The following four errors can occur when an instruction is executed.
Instruction Processing Error (ER Flag ON)
Normally, Instruction Processing Errors are non-fatal errors, but the PLC
Setup can be set to treat Instruction Processing Errors as fatal errors. If this
setting has been made, the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A29508) will be
turned ON and program execution will stop when an Instruction Processing
Error occurs.
Access Error (AER Flag ON)
Normally, Access Errors are non-fatal errors, but the PLC Setup can be set to
treat these errors as fatal errors. If this setting has been made, the Illegal
Access Error Flag (A29510) and the Indirect DM/EM BCD Error Flag
(A29509) will be turned ON and program execution will stop when an Access
Error occurs.
Illegal Instruction Error
The Illegal Instruction Error Flag (A29514) will be turned ON and program
execution will stop when this error occurs.
UM (User Program Memory) Overflow Error
The UM Overflow Error Flag (A29515) will be turned ON and program execu-
tion will stop when this error occurs.
1-2-2 Fatal Errors (Program Errors)

Program execution will be stopped when one of the following program errors
occurs. When a program error has occurred, the task number of the task that
was being executed when program execution was stopped is written to A294
and the program address is written to A298 and A299.
Use the contents of these words to locate the program error and correct it as
necessary.
Address Description
A294 The task number of the current task is written to this word when pro-
gram execution is stopped because of a program error.
Cyclic tasks have task numbers 0000 to 001F (cyclic tasks 0 to 31).
Interrupt tasks have task numbers 8000 to 80FF (interrupt tasks 0 to
255).
A298 and The current program address is written to these words when program
A299 execution is stopped because of a program error.
A299 contains the leftmost digits of the program address and A298
contains the rightmost digits of the program address.
13
Instruction Execution Checks Section 1-2
All errors for which the Error Flag or Access Error Flag turns ON is treated as
a program error The following table lists program errors. The PLC Setup can
be set to stop program execution when one of these errors occurs.
Error type Description Related flags
No END Instruction There is no END(001) instruction in the program. No END Error Flag
(A29511)
Task Error There are three possible causes of a task error: Task Error Flag (A29512)
1) There is not an executable cyclic task.
2) There is not a program allocated to the task.
3) An interrupt was generated but the corresponding interrupt
task does not exist.
Instruction Processing The CPU attempted to execute an instruction, but the data Error (ER) Flag,
Error* provided in the instruction’s operand was incorrect. Instruction Processing
*If the PLC Setup has been set to treat instruction errors as Error Flag (A29508)
fatal errors (program errors), the Instruction Processing Error
Flag (A29508) will be turned ON and program execution will
stop.
Access Error* There are five possible causes of an access error: Access Error (AER) Flag,
1) Reading/writing to the parameter area. Illegal Access Error Flag
2) Writing to memory that is not installed. (A29510)
3) Reading/writing to an EM bank that is EM file memory.
4) Writing to a read-only area.
5) The contents of a DM/EM word was not BCD although the
PLC is set for BCD indirect addressing.
*If the PLC Setup has been set to treat instruction errors as
fatal errors (program errors), the Illegal Access Error Flag
(A29510) will be turned ON and program execution will stop.
Indirect DM/EM BCD The contents of a DM/EM word was not BCD although the Access Error (AER) Flag,
Error* PLC is set for BCD indirect addressing. Indirect DM/EM BCD Error
*If the PLC Setup has been set to treat instruction errors as Flag (A29509)
fatal errors (program errors), the Indirect DM/EM BCD Error
Flag (A29509) will be turned ON and program execution will
stop.
Differentiation Overflow Differentiated instructions were repeatedly inserted and Differentiation Overflow
Error deleted during online editing (over 31,072 times). Error Flag (A29513)
UM Overflow Error The last address in UM (user program memory) has been UM Overflow Error Flag
exceeded. (A29515)
Illegal Instruction Error The program contains an instruction that cannot be executed. Illegal Instruction Error
Flag (A29514)
14
SECTION 2
Summary of Instructions
This section provides a summary of instructions used with CS/CJ-series PLCs.
2-1 Instruction Classifications by Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2-2 Instruction Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2-2-1 Sequence Input Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2-2-2 Sequence Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2-2-3 Sequence Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2-2-4 Timer and Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2-2-5 Comparison Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2-2-6 Data Movement Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2-2-7 Data Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2-2-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2-2-9 Symbol Math Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2-2-10 Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2-2-11 Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2-2-12 Special Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2-2-13 Floating-point Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2-2-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2-2-15 Table Data Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2-2-16 Data Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2-2-17 Subroutine Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2-2-18 Interrupt Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2-2-19 High-speed Counter and Pulse Output Instructions
(CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2-2-20 Step Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2-2-21 Basic I/O Unit Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2-2-22 Serial Communications Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2-2-23 Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2-2-24 File Memory Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2-2-25 Display Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2-2-26 Clock Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2-2-27 Debugging Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2-2-28 Failure Diagnosis Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2-2-29 Other Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2-2-30 Block Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2-2-31 Text String Processing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2-2-32 Task Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2-2-33 Model Conversion Instructions (CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only) . 112
2-2-34 Special Function Block Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2-3 Alphabetical List of Instructions by Mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2-4 List of Instructions by Function Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
15
Instruction Classifications by Function Section 2-1
2-1 Instruction Classifications by Function

The following table lists the CS/CJ-series instructions by function. (The
instructions appear by order of their function in Section 3 Instructions.)
*Instructions or instruction groups marked with a single asterisk are supported
by CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units only.
**Instructions or instruction groups marked with two asterisks are supported
by CJ1M CPU Units only.
***Instructions or instruction groups marked with three asterisks are not sup-
ported by CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems.
Note 1. CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later only

2. CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
3. CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later only
4. CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later only
CJ1M CPU Unit (Pre-Ver. 2.0 or Unit Ver. 2.0 or later)
Classifica- Sub-class Mnemonic Instruction Mnemonic Instruction Mnemonic Instruction
tion
Basic Input LD LOAD LD NOT LOAD NOT AND AND
instructions
AND NOT AND NOT OR OR OR NOT OR NOT
AND LD AND LOAD OR LD OR LOAD --- ---
Output OUT OUTPUT OUT NOT OUTPUT NOT --- ---
Sequence --- NOT NOT UP CONDITION DOWN CONDITION
input ON OFF
instructions
Bit test LD TST LD BIT TEST LD TSTN LD BIT TEST AND TST AND BIT
NOT TEST NOT
AND TSTN AND BIT OR TST OR BIT TEST OR TSTN OR BIT TEST
TEST NOT NOT
Sequence --- KEEP KEEP DIFU DIFFERENTI- DIFD DIFFERENTI-
output ATE UP ATE DOWN
instructions
OUTB* SINGLE BIT --- --- --- ---
OUTPUT
Set/Reset SET SET RSET RESET SETA MULTIPLE
BIT SET
RSTA MULTIPLE SETB* SINGLE BIT RSTB* SINGLE BIT
BIT RESET SET RESET
Sequence --- END END NOP NO OPERA- --- ---
control TION
instructions
Interlock IL INTERLOCK ILC INTERLOCK MILH MULTI-INTER-
CLEAR LOCK DIF-
FERENTIATIO
N HOLD
MILR MULTI-INTER- MILC MULTI-INTER- --- ---
(See note 1.) LOCK DIF- (See note 1.) LOCK CLEAR
FERENTIATIO
N RELEASE
Jump JMP JUMP JME JUMP END CJP CONDI-
TIONAL
JUMP
CJPN CONDI- JMP0 MULTIPLE JME0 MULTIPLE
TIONAL JUMP JUMP END
JUMP
Repeat FOR FOR-NEXT BREAK BREAK LOOP NEXT FOR-NEXT
LOOPS LOOPS
16

tion
Timer and BCD Timer TIM HUNDRED- TIMH TEN-MS TMHH ONE-MS
counter (with MS TIMER TIMER TIMER
instructions timer
numbers) TIMU TENTH-MS TMUH HUN- TTIM ACCUMULA-
(See note 2.) TIMER (See note 2.) DREDTH-MS TIVE TIMER
TIMER
Timer TIML LONG TIMER MTIM MULTI-OUT- --- ---
(without PUT TIMER
timer
numbers)
Counter CNT COUNTER CNTR REVERSIBLE CNR RESET
(with TIMER TIMER/
counter COUNTER
numbers)
Binary* Timer TIMX HUNDRED- TIMHX TEN-MS TMHHX ONE-MS
(with MS TIMER TIMER TIMER
timer
numbers) TIMUX TENTH-MS TMUHX HUN- TTIMX ACCUMULA-
(See note 2.) TIMER (See note 2.) DREDTH-MS TIVE TIMER
TIMER
Timer TIMLX LONG TIMER MTIMX MULTI-OUT- --- ---
(without PUT TIMER
timer
numbers)
Counter CNTX COUNTER CNTRX REVERSIBLE CNRX RESET
(with TIMER TIMER/
counter COUNTER
numbers)
Comparison Symbol LD, AND, OR Symbol com- LD, AND, OR Symbol com- LD, AND, OR Symbol
instructions comparison + parison + parison (dou- + comparison
=, <>, <, <=, >, (unsigned) =, <>, <, <=, >, ble-word, =, <>, <, <=, >, (signed)
>= >= + L unsigned) >= +S
LD, AND, OR Symbol com- LD, AND, OR Time compari- --- ---
+ parison (dou- + son
=, <>, <, <=, >, ble-word, = DT, <> DT, <
>= + SL signed) DT, <= DT, >
DT, >= DT
(See note 1.)
Data CMP UNSIGNED CMPL DOUBLE CPS SIGNED
comparison COMPARE UNSIGNED BINARY
(Condition Flags) COMPARE COMPARE
CPSL DOUBLE ZCP* AREA RANGE ZCPL* DOUBLE
SIGNED COMPARE AREA RANGE
BINARY COMPARE
COMPARE
Table MCMP MULTIPLE TCMP TABLE COM- BCMP UNSIGNED
compare COMPARE PARE BLOCK COM-
PARE
BCMP2 EXPANDED --- --- --- ---
(See note 3.) BLOCK COM-
PARE
Data Single/ MOV MOVE MOVL DOUBLE MVN MOVE NOT
movement double-word MOVE
instructions
MVNL DOUBLE --- --- --- ---
MOVE NOT
Bit/digit MOVB MOVE BIT MOVD MOVE DIGIT --- ---
Exchange XCHG DATA XCGL DOUBLE --- ---
EXCHANGE DATA
EXCHANGE
Block/bit transfer XFRB MULTIPLE XFER BLOCK BSET BLOCK SET
BIT TRANS- TRANSFER
FER
Distribute/ collect DIST SINGLE COLL DATA COL- --- ---
WORD DIS- LECT
TRIBUTE
Index register MOVR MOVE TO MOVRW MOVE TIMER/ --- ---
REGISTER COUNTER PV
TO REGIS-
TER
17

tion
Data shift 1-bit shift SFT SHIFT REG- SFTR REVERSIBLE ASLL DOUBLE
instructions ISTER SHIFT REG- SHIFT LEFT
ISTER
ASL ARITHMETIC ASR ARITHMETIC ASRL DOUBLE
SHIFT LEFT SHIFT RIGHT SHIFT RIGHT
0000 hex asynchro- ASFT ASYNCHRO- --- --- --- ---
nous NOUS SHIFT
REGISTER
Word shift WSFT WORD SHIFT --- --- --- ---
1-bit rotate ROL ROTATE LEFT ROLL DOUBLE RLNC ROTATE LEFT
ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT
CARRY
RLNL DOUBLE ROR ROTATE RORL DOUBLE
ROTATE LEFT RIGHT ROTATE
WITHOUT RIGHT
CARRY
RRNC ROTATE RRNL DOUBLE --- ---
RIGHT WITH- ROTATE
OUT CARRY RIGHT WITH-
OUT CARRY
1 digit shift SLD ONE DIGIT SRD ONE DIGIT --- ---
SHIFT LEFT SHIFT RIGHT
Shift n-bit data NSFL SHIFT N-BIT NSFR SHIFT N-BIT --- ---
DATA LEFT DATA RIGHT
Shift n-bit NASL SHIFT N-BITS NSLL DOUBLE NASR SHIFT N-BITS
LEFT SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT
LEFT
NSRL DOUBLE --- --- --- ---
SHIFT N-BITS
RIGHT
Increment/ BCD ++B INCREMENT ++BL DOUBLE – –B DECRE-
decrement BCD INCREMENT MENT BCD
instructions BCD
– –BL DOUBLE --- --- --- ---
DECRE-
MENT BCD
Binary ++ INCREMENT ++L DOUBLE –– DECRE-
BINARY INCREMENT MENT
BINARY BINARY
– –L DOUBLE --- --- --- ---
DECRE-
MENT
BINARY
18

tion
Symbol Binary add + SIGNED +L DOUBLE +C SIGNED
math BINARY ADD SIGNED BINARY ADD
instructions WITHOUT BINARY ADD WITH CARRY
CARRY WITHOUT
CARRY
+CL DOUBLE --- --- --- ---
SIGNED
BINARY ADD
WITH CARRY
BCD add +B BCD ADD +BL DOUBLE BCD +BC BCD ADD
WITHOUT ADD WITH CARRY
CARRY WITHOUT
CARRY
+BCL DOUBLE BCD --- --- --- ---
ADD WITH
CARRY
Binary subtract – SIGNED –L DOUBLE –C SIGNED
BINARY SUB- SIGNED BINARY
TRACT BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
CARRY WITHOUT
CARRY
–CL DOUBLE --- --- --- ---
SIGNED
BINARY WITH
CARRY
BCD subtract –B BCD –BL DOUBLE BCD –BC BCD
SUBTRACT SUBTRACT SUBTRACT
WITHOUT WITHOUT WITH CARRY
CARRY CARRY
–BCL DOUBLE BCD --- --- --- ---
SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
Binary multiply * SIGNED *L DOUBLE *U UNSIGNED
BINARY SIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY BINARY MULTIPLY
MULTIPLY
*UL DOUBLE --- --- --- ---
UNSIGNED
BINARY
MULTIPLY
BCD multiply *B BCD *BL DOUBLE BCD --- ---
MULTIPLY MULTIPLY
Binary divide / SIGNED /L DOUBLE /U UNSIGNED
BINARY SIGNED BINARY
DIVIDE BINARY DIVIDE
DIVIDE
/UL DOUBLE --- --- --- ---
UNSIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
BCD divide /B BCD DIVIDE /BL DOUBLE BCD --- ---
DIVIDE
19

tion
Conversion BCD-binary con- BIN BCD TO BINL DOUBLE BCD BCD BINARY TO
instructions versions BINARY TO DOUBLE BCD
BINARY
BCDL DOUBLE NEG 2’S COMPLE- NEGL DOUBLE 2’S
BINARY TO MENT COMPLE-
DOUBLE BCD MENT
SIGN 16-BIT TO --- --- --- ---
32-BIT
SIGNED
BINARY
Decoder/ encoder MLPX DATA DMPX DATA --- ---
DECODER ENCODER
ASCII-hexadecimal ASC ASCII CON- HEX ASCII TO HEX --- ---
conversions VERT
Line-column con- LINE COLUMN TO COLM LINE TO --- ---
versions LINE COLUMN
Signed binary-BCD BINS SIGNED BCD BISL DOUBLE BCDS SIGNED
conversions TO BINARY SIGNED BCD BINARY TO
TO BINARY BCD
BDSL DOUBLE GRY GRAY CODE --- ---
SIGNED (See note 1.) CONVER-
BINARY TO SION
BCD
Number-ASCII con- STR4 FOUR-DIGIT STR8 EIGHT-DIGIT STR16 SIXTEEN-
versions NUMBER TO NUMBER TO DIGIT NUM-
ASCII ASCII BER TO ASCII
NUM4 ASCII TO NUM8 ASCII TO NUM16 ASCII TO SIX-
FOUR-DIGIT EIGHT-DIGIT TEEN-DIGIT
NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
Logic Logical AND/OR ANDW LOGICAL ANDL DOUBLE ORW LOGICAL OR
instructions AND LOGICAL
AND
ORWL DOUBLE XORW EXCLUSIVE XORL DOUBLE
LOGICAL OR OR EXCLUSIVE
OR
XNRW EXCLUSIVE XNRL DOUBLE --- ---
NOR EXCLUSIVE
NOR
Complement COM COMPLE- COML DOUBLE --- ---
MENT COMPLE-
MENT
Special --- ROTB BINARY ROOT BCD SQUARE APR ARITHMETIC
math ROOT ROOT PROCESS
instructions
FDIV FLOATING BCNT BIT --- ---
POINT COUNTER
DIVIDE
20

tion
Floating- Floating point/ FIX FLOATING TO FIXL FLOATING TO FLT 16-BIT TO
point math binary convert 16-BIT 32-BIT FLOATING
instructions
FLTL 32-BIT TO --- --- --- ---
FLOATING
Floating- point +F FLOATING- –F FLOATING- /F FLOATING-
basic math POINT ADD POINT POINT
SUBTRACT DIVIDE
*F FLOATING- --- --- --- ---
POINT
MULTIPLY
High-speed trigo- SINQ HIGH-SPEED CONQ HIGH-SPEED TANQ HIGH-SPEED
nometric functions SINE COSINE TANGENT
(See note 2.)
Floating- point RAD DEGREES TO DEG RADIANS TO SIN SINE
trigonometric func- RADIANS DEGREES
tions
COS COSINE TAN TANGENT ASIN ARC SINE
ACOS ARC COSINE ATAN ARC TAN- --- ---
GENT
Floating- point SQRT SQUARE EXP EXPONENT LOG LOGARITHM
math ROOT
PWR EXPONEN- --- --- --- ---
TIAL POWER
Symbol compari- LD, AND, OR Symbol com- FSTR* FLOATING- FVAL* ASCII TO
son and conver- + parison (sin- POINT TO FLOATING-
sion* =, <>, <, <=, >, gle-precision ASCII POINT
>= + F floating point)
Single-precision MOVF MOVE FLOAT- --- --- --- ---
floating point move ING-POINT
(See note 2.) (SINGLE)
Double-pre- Floating point/ FIXD DOUBLE FIXLD DOUBLE DBL 16-BIT TO
cision float- binary convert FLOATING TO FLOATING TO DOUBLE
ing- point 16-BIT 32-BIT FLOATING
instruc-
tions* DBLL 32-BIT TO --- --- --- ---
DOUBLE
FLOATING
Floating- point +D DOUBLE –D DOUBLE /D DOUBLE
basic math FLOATING- FLOATING- FLOATING-
POINT ADD POINT POINT
SUBTRACT DIVIDE
*D DOUBLE --- --- --- ---
FLOATING-
POINT
MULTIPLY
Floating- point RADD DOUBLE DEGD DOUBLE SIND DOUBLE
trigonometric func- DEGREES TO RADIANS TO SINE
tions RADIANS DEGREES
COSD DOUBLE TAND DOUBLE ASIND DOUBLE ARC
COSINE TANGENT SINE
ACOSD DOUBLE ARC ATAND DOUBLE ARC --- ---
COSINE TANGENT
Floating- point SQRTD DOUBLE EXPD DOUBLE LOGD DOUBLE
math SQUARE EXPONENT LOGARITHM
ROOT
PWRD DOUBLE --- --- --- ---
EXPONEN-
TIAL POWER
Symbol compari- LD, AND, OR Symbol com- --- --- --- ---
son + parison (dou-
=, <>, <, <=, >, ble-precision
>= + D floating point)
21

tion
Table data Stack SSET SET STACK PUSH PUSH ONTO LIFO LAST IN
processing processing STACK FIRST OUT
instructions
FIFO FIRST IN SNUM* STACK SIZE SREAD* STACK DATA
FIRST OUT READ READ
SWRIT* STACK DATA SINS* STACK DATA SDEL* STACK DATA
OVERWRITE INSERT DELETE
1-record/ DIM DIMENSION SETR SET RECORD GETR GET
multiple-word pro- RECORD LOCATION RECORD
cessing TABLE NUMBER
Record-to- word SRCH DATA MAX FIND MIN FIND
processing SEARCH MAXIMUM MINIMUM
SUM SUM FCS FRAME --- ---
CHECKSUM
Byte SWAP SWAP BYTES --- --- --- ---
processing
Data control --- PID PID CON- PIDAT* PID CON- LMT LIMIT
instructions TROL TROL WITH CONTROL
AUTOTUNING
BAND DEAD BAND ZONE DEAD ZONE TPO TIME-PRO-
CONTROL CONTROL (See note 1.) PORTIONAL
OUTPUT
SCL SCALING SCL2 SCALING 2 SCL3 SCALING 3
AVG AVERAGE --- --- --- ---
Subroutines --- SBS SUBROU- MCRO MACRO SBN SUBROU-
instructions TINE CALL TINE ENTRY
RET SUBROU- GSBS* GLOBAL GSBN* GLOBAL
TINE SUBROU- SUBROU-
RETURN TINE CALL TINE ENTRY
GRET* GLOBAL --- --- --- ---
SUBROU-
TINE
RETURN
Interrupt --- MSKS*** SET MSKR*** READ INTER- CLI*** CLEAR
control INTERRUPT RUPT MASK INTERRUPT
instructions MASK
DI DISABLE EI ENABLE --- ---
INTERRUPTS INTERRUPTS
High-speed --- INI MODE CON- PRV HIGH-SPEED PRV2 COUNTER
counter/ TROL COUNTER PV (See note 2.) FREQUENCY
pulse out- READ CONVERT
put instruc- CTBL COMPARI- SPED SPEED OUT- PULS SET PULSES
tions** SON TABLE PUT
LOAD
PLS2 PULSE OUT- ACC ACCELERA- ORG ORIGIN

PUT TION Control SEARCH
Step --- PWM PULSE WITH STEP STEP DEFINE SNXT STEP START
instructions VARIABLE
DUTY FAC-
TOR
Basic I/O --- IORF I/O REFRESH FIORF SPECIAL I/O DLNK* CPU BUS
Unit instruc- (See note 2.) UNIT I/O UNIT I/O
tions REFRESH REFRESH
SDEC 7-SEGMENT DSW DIGITAL TKY TEN KEY
DECODER (See note 1.) SWITCH (See note 1.) INPUT
INPUT
HKY HEXADECI- MTR MATRIX 7SEG 7-SEGMENT
(See note 1.) MAL KEY (See note 1.) INPUT (See note 1.) DISPLAY
INPUT OUTPUT
IORD INTELLI- IOWR INTELLI- DLNK* CPU BUS
GENT I/O GENT I/O UNIT I/O
READ WRITE REFRESH
22

tion
Serial com- --- PMCR PROTOCOL TXD TRANSMIT RXD RECEIVE
munica- MACRO
tions
instructions STUP CHANGE --- --- --- ---
SERIAL PORT
SETUP
Network --- SEND NETWORK RECV NETWORK CMND DELIVER
instructions SEND RECEIVE COMMAND
EXPLT SEND GEN- EGATR EXPLICIT ESATR EXPLICIT
(See note 1.) ERAL (See note 1.) GET (See note 1.) SET
EXPICIT ATTRIBUTE ATTRIBUTE
ECHRD EXPLICIT ECHWR EXPLICIT --- ---
(See note 1.) WORD READ (See note 1.) WORD
WRITE
Display --- MSG DISPLAY --- --- --- ---
instructions MESSAGE
File mem- --- FREAD READ DATA FWRIT WRITE DATA TWRIT WRITE TEXT
ory instruc- FILE FILE FILE
tions
Clock --- CADD CALENDAR CSUB CALENDAR SEC HOURS TO
instructions ADD SUBTRACT SECONDS
HMS SECONDS TO DATE CLOCK --- ---
HOURS ADJUST-
MENT
Debugging --- TRSM TRACE --- --- --- ---
instructions MEMORY
SAMPLING
Failure --- FAL FAILURE FALS SEVERE FPD FAILURE
diagnosis ALARM FAILURE POINT
instructions ALARM DETECTION
Other --- STC SET CARRY CLC CLEAR EMBC SELECT EM
instructions CARRY BANK
WDT EXTEND CCS* SAVE CONDI- CCL* LOAD CONDI-
MAXIMUM TION FLAGS TION FLAGS
CYCLE TIME
FRMCV* CONVERT TOCV* CONVERT IOSP*** DISABLE
ADDRESS ADDRESS TO PERIPH-
FROM CV CV ERAL SER-
VICING
IORS*** ENABLE --- --- --- ---
PERIPH-
ERAL SER-
VICING
23

tion
Block Define block pro- BPRG BLOCK PRO- BEND BLOCK PRO- --- ---
program- gram area GRAM BEGIN GRAM END
ming
instructions Block BPPS BLOCK BPRS BLOCK --- ---
program start/stop PROGRAM PROGRAM
PAUSE RESTART
EXIT EXIT Conditional EXIT NOT Conditional input_condition Conditional
bit_address END bit_address END NOT EXIT END
IF branch IF CONDI- IF NOT CONDI- ELSE CONDI-
processing bit_address TIONAL bit_address TIONAL TIONAL
BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK
BRANCHING BRANCHING BRANCHING
(NOT) (ELSE)
IEND CONDI- --- --- --- ---
TIONAL
BLOCK
BRANCHING
END
WAIT WAIT ONE CYCLE WAIT NOT ONE CYCLE input_condition ONE CYCLE
bit_address AND WAIT bit_address AND WAIT WAIT AND WAIT
NOT
Timer/ BCD TIMW HUNDRED- CNTW COUNTER TMHW TEN-MS
counter MS TIMER WAIT TIMER WAIT
WAIT
Binary* TIMWX HUNDRED- CNTWX COUNTER TMHWX TEN-MS
MS TIMER WAIT TIMER WAIT
WAIT
Repeat LOOP LOOP BLOCK LEND LOOP BLOCK LEND NOT LOOP BLOCK
bit_address END bit_address END NOT
input_ LOOP BLOCK --- --- --- ---
condition END
LEND
Text string --- MOV$ MOV STRING +$ CONCATE- LEFT$ GET STRING
processing NATE LEFT
instructions STRING
RIGHT$ GET STRING MID$ GET STRING FIND$ FIND IN
RIGHT MIDDLE STRING
LEN$ STRING RPLC$ REPLACE IN DEL$ DELETE
LENGTH STRING STRING
XCHG$ EXCHANGE CLR$ CLEAR INS$ INSERT INTO
STRING STRING STRING
LD, AND, OR STRING --- --- --- ---
+ COMPARI-
=$, <>$, <$, SON
<=$, >$, >=$
Task control --- TKON TASK ON TKOF TASK OFF --- ---
instructions
24
Instruction Functions Section 2-2
2-2 Instruction Functions

2-2-1 Sequence Input Instructions
*1
: Not supported by CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems.
*2
: Supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units only.
*3
: Supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units only.
Instruction Symbol/Operand Function Location Page
Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
LOAD Bus bar Indicates a logical start and creates an ON/OFF execution condition Start of logic 161
LD based on the ON/OFF status of the specified operand bit. Not required
@LD
%LD
!LD*1
!@LD*1 Starting
!%LD*1 point of
block
LOAD NOT Indicates a logical start and creates an ON/OFF execution condition Start of logic 163
Bus bar based on the reverse of the ON/OFF status of the specified operand
LD NOT Not required
bit.
@LD NOT*2
%LD NOT*2
!LD NOT*1
!@LD NOT*3 Starting
!%LD NOT*3 point of
block
AND Takes a logical AND of the status of the specified operand bit and the Continues on 165
AND current execution condition. rung
@AND Required
%AND
!AND*1
!@AND*1
!%AND*1
AND NOT Reverses the status of the specified operand bit and takes a logical Continues on 167
AND NOT AND with the current execution condition. rung
@AND NOT*2 Required
%AND NOT*2
!AND NOT*1
!@AND NOT*3
!%AND NOT*3
OR Bus bar Takes a logical OR of the ON/OFF status of the specified operand bit Continues on 169
OR and the current execution condition. rung
@OR Required
%OR
!OR*1
!@OR*1
!%OR*1
OR NOT Bus bar Reverses the status of the specified bit and takes a logical OR with the Continues on 171
OR NOT current execution condition rung
@OR NOT*2 Required
%OR NOT*2
!OR NOT*1
!@OR NOT*3
!%OR NOT*3
25

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
AND LOAD Logic block Logic block Takes a logical AND between logic blocks. Continues on 172
AND LD rung
LD Required
Logic block A
to
LD
Logic block B
to
AND LD Serial connection between logic block A and

logic block B.
OR LOAD Takes a logical OR between logic blocks. Continues on 174

OR LD Logic block rung
LD Required
Logic block Logic block A
to
LD
Logic block B
to
OR LD Parallel connection between logic block A

and logic block B.
NOT --- Reverses the execution condition. Continues on 180

NOT rung
520 Required
CONDITION ON UP(521) turns ON the execution condition for one cycle when the exe- Continues on 181
UP UP(521) cution condition goes from OFF to ON. rung
521 Required
CONDITION OFF DOWN(522) turns ON the execution condition for one cycle when the Continues on 181
DOWN(522) execution condition goes from ON to OFF. rung
DOWN
522 Required
BIT TEST LD TST(350), AND TST(350), and OR TST(350) are used in the pro- Continues on 182
TST(350) gram like LD, AND, and OR; the execution condition is ON when the rung
LD TST
specified bit in the specified word is ON and OFF when the bit is OFF. Not required
350 S
N
S: Source word
N: Bit number
BIT TEST LD TSTN(351), AND TSTN(351), and OR TSTN(351) are used in the Continues on 182
LD TSTN TSTN(351) program like LD NOT, AND NOT, and OR NOT; the execution condition rung
351 is OFF when the specified bit in the specified word is ON and ON when Not required
S the bit is OFF.
N
S: Source word
N: Bit number
AND TST AND TST(350) gram like LD, AND, and OR; the execution condition is ON when the rung
specified bit in the specified word is ON and OFF when the bit is OFF. Required
350 S
N
S: Source word
N: Bit number
AND TSTN AND TSTN(351) program like LD NOT, AND NOT, and OR NOT; the execution condition rung
is OFF when the specified bit in the specified word is ON and ON when Required
351 S the bit is OFF.
N
S: Source word
N: Bit number
26

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
OR TST TST(350) gram like LD, AND, and OR; the execution condition is ON when the rung
specified bit in the specified word is ON and OFF when the bit is OFF. Required
350 S
N
S: Source word
N: Bit number
OR TSTN TSTN(351) program like LD NOT, AND NOT, and OR NOT; the execution condition rung
is OFF when the specified bit in the specified word is ON and ON when Required
351 S the bit is OFF.
N
S: Source word
N: Bit number
2-2-2 Sequence Output Instructions

*1
Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
OUTPUT Outputs the result (execution condition) of the logical processing to the Output 185
OUT specified bit. Required
!OUT*1
OUTPUT NOT Reverses the result (execution condition) of the logical processing, and Output 187
OUT NOT outputs it to the specified bit. Required
!OUT NOT*1
KEEP Operates as a latching relay. Output 188

S (Set) KEEP(011)
KEEP Required
B Set
!KEEP*1
R (Reset)
011
B: Bit
Reset
S execution
condition
R execution
condition
Status of B
DIFFERENTIATE DIFU(013) turns the designated bit ON for one cycle when the Output 193
UP DIFU(013) execution condition goes from OFF to ON (rising edge). Required
DIFU B
!DIFU*1
B: Bit Execution condition
013
Status of B
One cycle
27

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DIFFERENTIATE DIFD(014) turns the designated bit ON for one cycle when the Output 193
DOWN DIFD(014) Required
execution condition goes from ON to OFF (falling edge).
DIFD B
!DIFD*1
Execution condition
B: Bit
014
Status of B
One cycle
SET SET turns the operand bit ON when the execution condition is ON. Output 195
SET SET Required
@SET B Execution condition
%SET of SET
!SET*1 B: Bit
!@SET*1
!%SET*1 Status of B
RESET RSET turns the operand bit OFF when the execution condition is ON. Output 195
RSET RSET Required
@RSET Execution condition
%RSET B
of RSET
!RSET*1 B: Bit
!@RSET*1
Status of B
!%RSET*1
MULTIPLE BIT SETA(530) turns ON the specified number of consecutive bits. Output 198
SET SETA(530) Required
SETA D
@SETA
530 N1 N2 bits are set to 1
(ON).
N2
D: Beginning
word
N1: Beginning bit
N2: Number of
bits
MULTIPLE BIT RSTA(531) turns OFF the specified number of consecutive bits. Output 198
RESET RSTA(531) Required
RSTA
@RSTA D
531 N1 N2 bits are reset to
0 (OFF).
N2
D: Beginning
word
N1: Beginning bit
N2: Number of
bits
SINGLE BIT SET SETB(532) turns ON the specified bit in the specified word when the exe- Output 201
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, SETB(532) cution condition is ON. Required
CJ1M, or CS1D Unlike the SET instruction, SETB(532) can be used to set a bit in a DM or
only) D EM word.
SETB N
@SETB
*1 D: Word address
!SETB
!@SETB*1 N: Bit number
28

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SINGLE BIT RSTB(533) turns OFF the specified bit in the specified word when the Output 201
RESET (CS1-H, RSTB(533) execution condition is ON. Required
CJ1-H, CJ1M, or Unlike the RSET instruction, RSTB(533) can be used to reset a bit in a
CS1D only) D DM or EM word.
RSTB N
@RSTB
*1
!RSTB D: Word address
!@RSTB*1 N: Bit number
SINGLE BIT OUTB(534) outputs the result (execution condition) of the logical pro- Output 204
OUTPUT (CS1-H, OUTB(534) cessing to the specified bit. Required
CJ1-H, CJ1M, or Unlike the OUT instruction, OUTB(534) can be used to control a bit in a
CS1D only) D DM or EM word.
OUTB N
@OUTB
!OUTB *1
D: Word address
N: Bit number
29
2-2-3 Sequence Control Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
END Indicates the end of a program. Output 206
END END(001) Not required
END(001) completes the execution of a program for that cycle. No
001 instructions written after END(001) will be executed. Execution
proceeds to the program with the next task number. When the
program being executed has the highest task number in the program,
END(001) marks the end of the overall main program.
Task 1 Program A
To the next task number
Task 2 Program B
Task n Program Z
End of the main program
I/O refreshing
NO OPERATION This instruction has no function. (No processing is performed for Output 207
NOP NOP(000).) Not required
000
INTERLOCK Interlocks all outputs between IL(002) and ILC(003) when the Output 210
IL IL(002) execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. IL(002) and ILC(003) are Required
002 normally used in pairs.
Execution Execution
Execution condition ON condition OFF
condition
Interlocked section Normal Outputs

of the program execution interlocked.
30

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
INTERLOCK All outputs between IL(002) and ILC(003) are interlocked when the Output 210
CLEAR ILC(003) execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. IL(002) and ILC(003) are nor- Not required
ILC mally used in pairs.
003
MULTI-INTER- When the execution condition for MILH(517) is OFF, the outputs for all Output 214
LOCK DIFFER- MILH (517) instructions between that MILH(517) instruction and the next Required
ENTIATION MILC(519) instruction are interlocked. MILH(517) and MILC(519) are
HOLD N used as a pair.
MILH D MILH(517)/MILC(519) interlocks can be nested (e.g., MILH(517)—
517 MILH(517)—MILC(519)—MILC(519)).
CS/CJ-series CPU N: Interlock number If there is a differentiated instruction (DIFU, DIFD, or instruction with a
Unit Ver. 2.0 or later D: Interlock Status Bit @ or% prefix) between MILH(517) and the corresponding MILC(519),
only that instruction will be executed after the interlock is cleared if the dif-
ferentiation condition of the instruction was established while it was
interlocked.
MULTI-INTER- When the execution condition for MILR(518) is OFF, the outputs for all Output 214
LOCK DIFFER- MILR (518) instructions between that MILR(518) instruction and the next Required
ENTIATION MILC(519) instruction are interlocked.MILR(518) and MILC(519) are
RELEASE N used as a pair.
MILR D MILR(518)/MILC(519) interlocks can be nested (e.g., MILR(518)—
518 MILR(518)—MILC(519)—MILC(519)).
CS/CJ-series CPU N: Interlock number If there is a differentiated instruction (DIFU, DIFD, or instruction with a
Unit Ver. 2.0 or later D: Interlock Status Bit @ or % prefix) between MILR(518) and the corresponding MILC(519),
only that instruction will not be executed after the interlock is cleared even if
the differentiation condition of the instruction was established.
MULTI-INTER- Clears an interlock started by an MILH(517) or MILR(518) with the Output 214
LOCK CLEAR MILC (519) same interlock number. Not required
MILC N All outputs between MILH(517)/MILR(518) and the corresponding
519 MILC(519) with the same interlock number are interlocked when the
N: Interlock number execution condition for MILH(517)/MILR(518) is OFF.
CS/CJ-series CPU
Unit Ver. 2.0 or later
only
JUMP When the execution condition for JMP(004) is OFF, program Output 228
JMP JMP(004) execution jumps directly to the first JME(005) in the program with Required
004 N the same jump number. JMP(004) and JME(005) are used in pairs.
N: Jump number Execution condition

Instructions
jumped
Instructions in this section
are not executed and out-
put status is maintained.
Instructions The instruction execution
executed time for these instructions
is eliminated.
CONDITIONAL The operation of CJP(510) is the basically the opposite of JMP(004). Output 232
JUMP CJP(510) When the execution condition for CJP(510) is ON, program execution Required
CJP jumps directly to the first JME(005) in the program with the same jump
N
510 number. CJP(510) and JME(005) are used in pairs.
N: Jump number
Execution Execution
condition OFF condition ON
Instructions
jumped

Instructions are not executed and out-
put status is maintained.
executed The instruction execution
time for these instructions
is eliminated.
31

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
JUMP END Indicates the end of a jump initiated by JMP(004) or CJP(510). Output 228
JME JME(005) Not required
005 N
N: Jump number
CONDITIONAL The operation of CJPN(511) is almost identical to JMP(004). Output 232

JUMP CJPN(511) When the execution condition for CJP(004) is OFF, program execution Not required
CJPN jumps directly to the first JME(005) in the program with the same jump
N
511 number. CJPN(511) and JME(005) are used in pairs.
N: Jump number
Execution Execution
condition ON condition OFF
Instructions
jumped

are not executed and out-
Instructions put status is maintained.
executed The instruction execution
time for these instructions
is eliminated.
MULTIPLE JUMP When the execution condition for JMP0(515) is OFF, all instructions Output 236
JMP0 JMP0(515) from JMP0(515) to the next JME0(516) in the program are processed Required
515 as NOP(000). Use JMP0(515) and JME0(516) in pairs. There is no
limit on the number of pairs that can be used in the program.
Execution Execution
condition a ON condition a OFF
Instructions
jumped
Instructions
executed
Jumped instructions
are processed as
Execution Execution NOP(000). Instruction
condition b ON condition b OFF execution times are
the same as
NOP(000).
Instructions
executed
Instructions
jumped
MULTIPLE JUMP When the execution condition for JMP0(515) is OFF, all instructions Output 236
END JME0(516) from JMP0(515) to the next JME0(516) in the program are processed Not required
JME0 as NOP(000). Use JMP0(515) and JME0(516) in pairs. There is no
limit on the number of pairs that can be used in the program.
516
32

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
FOR-NEXT The instructions between FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are repeated a Output 238
LOOPS FOR(512) specified number of times. FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are used in Not required
FOR pairs.
N
512
N: Number of Repeated N times
loops
Repeated program section
BREAK LOOP Programmed in a FOR-NEXT loop to cancel the execution of the loop Output 241
BREAK BREAK(514) for a given execution condition. The remaining instructions in the loop Required
514 are processed as NOP(000) instructions.
Condition a ON
N repetitions
Repetitions
forced to end.
Processed as
NOP(000).
FOR-NEXT The instructions between FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are repeated a Output 238
LOOPS NEXT(513) specified number of times. FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are used in Not required
NEXT pairs.
513
33
2-2-4 Timer and Counter Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
HUNDRED-MS TIM/TIMX(550) operates a decrementing timer with units of 0.1-s. Output 245
TIMER TIM Required
The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 999.9 s for BCD
TIM
(BCD) N and 0 to 6,553.5 s for binary (decimal or hexadecimal).
S Timer input
TIMX
(Binary) N: Timer number
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, S: Set value Timer PV SV
CJ1M, or CS1D
only)
TIMX(550) Completion
N Flag
S
Timer input
N: Timer number
S: Set value
Timer PV SV
Completion
Flag
TEN-MS TIMER TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) operates a decrementing timer with units of Output 249
TIMH TIMH(015) 10-ms. The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 99.99 s for BCD Required
and 0 to 655.35 s for binary (decimal or hexadecimal).
015 N
(BCD)
S Timer input
TIMHX
N: Timer number
551 SV
(Binary) S: Set value Timer PV
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D
only) TIMHX(551)
Completion
N Flag
S
Timer input
N: Timer number
S: Set value
Timer PV SV
Completion
Flag
ONE-MS TIMER TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552) operates a decrementing timer with units of Output 253
TMHH TMHH(540) 1-ms. The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 9.999 s for BCD Required
and 0 to 65.535 s for binary (decimal or hexadecimal).
540 N
(BCD)
S Timer input
TMHHX
N: Timer number SV
552 Timer PV
(BCD) S: Set value
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D
only) TMHHX(552)
Completion
N Flag
S
Timer input
N: Timer number
S: Set value SV
Timer PV
Completion
Flag
34

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
TENTH-MS TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) operates an decrementing timer with units of Output 256
TIMU(541)
TIMER (CJ1-H-R 0.1-s. The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 0.999 s for BCD Required
only) N and 0 to 6,553.5 s for binary (decimal or hexadecimal).
TIMU S ON
541 Timer input OFF
(BCD) N: Timer number
S: Set value SV
Timer PV 0
TIMUX
TIMUX(556)
556
(BCD) N Completion ON
S Flag OFF
N: Timer number
S: Set value
Timer Input Turns OFF before Completion Flag Turns ON
ON
Timer input OFF
SV
Timer PV 0
Completion ON
Flag OFF
Note: The timer’s present value cannot be accessed for a TENTH-MS
TIMER instruction.
HUNDREDTH-MS TMUH(554)/TMUHX(557) operates an decrementing timer with units of Output 259
TMUH(554)
TIMER (CJ1-H-R 0.01-s. The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 0.0999 s for BCD Required
only) N and 0 to 0.65535 s for binary (decimal or hexadecimal).
TMUH S ON
554 Timer input OFF
N: Timer number
(BCD) S: Set value
SV
Timer PV 0
TMUHX
TMUHX(557)
557
N Completion ON
(BCD)
S Flag OFF
N: Timer number
S: Set value
Timer Input Turns OFF before Completion Flag Turns ON
ON
Timer input OFF
SV
Timer PV
0
Completion ON
Flag OFF
Note: The timer’s present value cannot be accessed for a HUN-
DREDTH-MS TIMER instruction.
35

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
ACCUMULATIVE Timer TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) operates an incrementing timer with units of Output 262
TIMER input TTIM(087)
0.1-s. The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 999.9 s for Required
TTIM N BCD and 0 to 6,553.5 s for binary (decimal or hexadecimal).
087 S
(BCD) Timer input
Reset
input
TTIMX
Timer PV SV
555 N: Timer number
(Binary) S: Set value
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, Timing resumes.
CJ1M, or CS1D
only) Timer TTIMX(555) PV maintained.
input
N
S Completion
Reset Flag
input
Reset input
N: Timer number
S: Set value
LONG TIMER TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) operates a decrementing timer with units of Output 266
TIML TIML(542) Required
0.1-s that can time up to approx. 115 days for BCD and 49,710 days
542 D1 for binary (decimal or hexadecimal).
(BCD)
D2 Timer input
TIMLX S SV
553 Timer PV
(Binary) D1: Completion
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, Flag
CJ1M, or CS1D D2: PV word
only) S: SV word
Completion Flag
(Bit 00 of D1)
TIMLX(553)
D1
D2
S
D1: Completion
Flag
D2: PV word
S: SV word
36

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
MULTI-OUTPUT MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) operates a 0.1-s incrementing timer with 8 Output 269
TIMER MTIM(543) Required
independent SVs and Completion Flags. The setting range for the
MTIM D1 set value (SV) is 0 to 999.9 s for BCD and 0 to 6,553.5 s for binary
543 (decimal or hexadecimal).
(BCD) D2 Timer PV
S
MTIMX
554 D1: Completion
(Binary) Timer SVs 0
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, Flags
CJ1M, or CS1D D2: PV word
only) S: 1st SV word
to
to
MTIMX(554)
D1
D2 Timer input
S
SV 7
D1: Completion to
Flags SV 2
D2: PV word
S: 1st SV word Timer PV (D2) SV 1
SV 0
0
Completion Bit 7
Flags (D1) to
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
COUNTER Count CNT/CNTX(546) operates a decrementing counter. The setting range Output 275
CNT input CNT Required
for the set value (SV) is 0 to 9,999 for BCD and 0 to 65,535 for binary
(BCD) N (decimal or hexadecimal).
S
CNTX Count input
Reset
546 input
(Binary) Reset input
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, N: Counter
CJ1M, or CS1D number
only) S: Set value SV
Counter PV
Count CNTX(546)
input
N
S Completion
Flag
Reset
input
N: Counter
number
S: Set value
37

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
REVERSIBLE Incre- Output 278
CNTR(012) CNTR(012)/CNTRX(548) operates a reversible counter.
COUNTER ment Required
CNTR input N
012 Decre- S
ment Increment input
(BCD)
input
CNTRX Reset
input Decrement input
548
(Binary)
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, N: Counter
CJ1M, or CS1D number
S: Set value
only) Counter PV
Incre-
ment CNTRX(548)
input SV
N Counter PV
Decre-
ment S
input +1
Reset
input
Completion Flag
N: Counter
number
S: Set value
SV 1
Counter PV
Completion Flag
RESET TIMER/ CNR(545)/CNRX(547) resets the timers or counters within the speci- Output 282
COUNTER CNR(545) fied range of timer or counter numbers. Sets the set value (SV) to the Required
CNR maximum of 9999.
N1
@CNR
545 N2
(BCD)
N1: 1st number in
range
CNRX
@CNRX N2: Last number
in range
547
(Binary)
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D CNRX(547)
only)
N1
N2
N1: 1st number

in range
N2: Last number
in range
38
2-2-5 Comparison Instructions

*1
Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
Symbol Compari- Symbol comparison instructions (unsigned) compare two values LD: Not 291
son (Unsigned) Symbol & options required
(constants and/or the contents of specified words) in 16-bit binary
LD, AND, OR + =, data and create an ON execution condition when the comparison AND, OR:
S1 condition is true. There are three types of symbol comparison Required
<>, <, <=, >, >=
300 (=) S2 instructions, LD (LOAD), AND, and OR.
305 (<>)
310 (<) LD ON execution condition when
S1: Comparison
315 (<=) comparison result is true.
data 1
320 (>) S2: Comparison <
325(>=) data 2
ON execution condition
AND when comparison result
is true.
<
OR
<
ON execution condition when

comparison result is true.
Symbol Compari- S1: Comparison Symbol comparison instructions (double-word, unsigned) compare two LD: Not 291
son (Double- data 1 values (constants and/or the contents of specified double-word data) in required
word, unsigned) S2: Comparison unsigned 32-bit binary data and create an ON execution condition when AND, OR:
LD, AND, OR + =, the comparison condition is true. There are three types of symbol com- Required
data 2 parison instructions, LD (LOAD), AND, and OR.
<>, <, <=, >, >= +
L
301 (=)
306 (<>)
311 (<)
316 (<=)
321 (>)
326 (>=)
Symbol Compari- S1: Comparison Symbol comparison instructions (signed) compare two values (con- LD: Not 291
son (Signed) data 1 stants and/or the contents of specified words) in signed 16-bit binary (4- required
LD, AND, OR + =, S2: Comparison digit hexadecimal) and create an ON execution condition when the com- AND, OR:
<>, <, <=, >, >= parison condition is true. There are three types of symbol comparison Required
data 2 instructions, LD (LOAD), AND, and OR.
+S
302 (=)
307 (<>)
312 (<)
317 (<=)
322 (>)
327 (>=)
39

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
Symbol Compari- S1: Comparison Symbol comparison instructions (double-word, signed) compare two LD: Not 291
son (Double- data 1 values (constants and/or the contents of specified double-word data) in required
word, signed) S2: Comparison signed 32-bit binary (8-digit hexadecimal) and create an ON execution AND, OR:
LD, AND, OR + =, condition when the comparison condition is true. There are three types Required
data 2 of symbol comparison instructions, LD (LOAD), AND, and OR.
<>, <, <=, >, >=
+SL
303 (=)
308 (<>)
313 (<)
318 (<=)
323 (>)
328 (>=)
Time Compari- LD (LOAD): Time comparison instructions compare two BCD time values and create LD: Not 297
son an ON execution condition when the comparison condition is true. required
LD, AND, OR + = Symbol There are three types of time comparison instructions, LD (LOAD), AND, OR:
DT, <> DT, < DT, AND, and OR. Time values (year, month, day, hour, minute, and second) Required
<= DT, > DT, >= C can be masked/unmasked in the comparison so it is easy to create cal-
DT endar timer functions.
S1
341 (= DT)
342 (<> DT) S2
343 (< DT)
344 (<= DT)
345 (> DT) AND:
346 (>= DT)
(CS/CJ-series Symbol
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 C
or later only)
S1
S2
OR:
Symbol
C
S1
S2
C: Control word
S1: 1st word of
present time
S2: 1st word of
comparison
time
UNSIGNED COM- Compares two unsigned binary values (constants and/or the contents Output 303
PARE CMP(020)
of specified words) and outputs the result to the Arithmetic Flags in Required
CMP S1 the Auxiliary Area.
!CMP*1
S2 Unsigned binary
020 comparison
S1: Comparison
data 1
S2: Comparison Arithmetic Flags
data 2 (>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
DOUBLE Compares two double unsigned binary values (constants and/or the Output 306
UNSIGNED CMPL(060) contents of specified words) and outputs the result to the Arithmetic Required
COMPARE Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
S1
CMPL
Unsigned binary
060 S2 comparison
S1: Comparison S1+1 S2+1

data 1
data 2 (>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
40

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SIGNED BINARY Compares two signed binary values (constants and/or the contents of Output 309
COMPARE CPS(114) specified words) and outputs the result to the Arithmetic Flags in the Required
CPS Auxiliary Area.
S1
!CPS*1 Signed binary
114 S2 comparison
S1: Comparison
data 1
data 2 (>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
DOUBLE Compares two double signed binary values (constants and/or the Output 312
SIGNED BINARY CPSL(115)
contents of specified words) and outputs the result to the Arithmetic Required
COMPARE Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
S1
CPSL
115 S2 Signed binary
comparison
S1: Comparison S1+1 S2+1
data 1
S2: Comparison
data 2 Arithmetic Flags
(>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
MULTIPLE COM- Compares 16 consecutive words with another 16 consecutive words Output 315
PARE MCMP(019) and turns ON the corresponding bit in the result word where the Required
MCMP contents of the words are not equal.
@MCMP S1
Comparison R
019 S2
0: Words
R are equal.
1: Words
S1: 1st word of aren't
set 1 equal.
S2: 1st word of
set 2
R: Result word
TABLE COM- Compares the source data to the contents of 16 words and turns Output 317
PARE TCMP(085) Required
ON the corresponding bit in the result word when the contents are
TCMP S
@TCMP equal.
Comparison R
085 T 1: Data are
equal.
R
0: Data aren't
equal.
S: Source data
T: 1st word of
table
R: Result word
UNSIGNED Compares the source data to 16 ranges (defined by 16 lower limits Output 320
BLOCK COM- BCMP(068) and 16 upper limits) and turns ON the corresponding bit in the result Required
PARE word when the source data is within the range.
S
BCMP
@BCMP T Ranges
1: In range
068 0: Not in range
R
Lower limit Upper limit R
S: Source data T to T+1 0
T: 1st word of
table T+2 to T+3 1
Source data
R: Result word
S
T+28 to T+29 14
T+30 to T+31 15
41

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
EXPANDED Compares the source data to up to 256 ranges (defined by upper and Output 322
BLOCK COM- BCMP2(502)
lower limits) and turns ON the corresponding bit in the result word when Required
PARE
S the source data is within a range.
BCMP2
@BCMP2 T 1: In range
502 T N n=255 max. 0: Not in range
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, or R D Bit

CS1D CPU Unit T+1 Range 0 A Range 0 B T+2 0
S: Source data
Ver. 2.0 or later T: 1st word of T+3 Range 1 A Range 1 B T+4 1
only) Source data
block
CJ1M CPU Unit R: Result word S
(Pre-Ver. 2.0 or
Unit Ver. 2.0 or D+15 max.
later) T+2N+1 Range N A Range N B T+2N+2
Note: A can be less than

or equal to B or
greater the B.
AREA RANGE Compares the 16-bit unsigned binary value in CD (word contents or Output 326
COMPARE ZCP(088) constant) to the range defined by LL and UL and outputs the results to Required
ZCP the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
CD
@ZCP
088 LL
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D UL
only)
CD: Compare
data (1 word)
LL: Lower limit of
range
UL: Upper limit of
range
DOUBLE AREA Compares the 32-bit unsigned binary value in CD and CD+1 (word con- Output 329
RANGE COM- ZCPL(116) tents or constant) to the range defined by LL and UL and outputs the Required
PARE results to the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
CD
ZCPL
@ZCPL LL
116
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, UL
CJ1M, or CS1D
only) CD: Compare
data (2 words)
LL: Lower limit of
range
UL: Upper limit of
range
42
2-2-6 Data Movement Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
MOVE Output 331
MOV(021) Transfers a word of data to the specified word.
MOV Required
@MOV S Source word
!MOV
!@MOV D
021
S: Source
D: Destination Bit status not
changed.
Destination word
DOUBLE MOVE Transfers two words of data to the specified words. Output 334
MOVL(498)
MOVL S S+1 Required
@MOVL S
498
D
Bit status not
S: 1st source
word changed.
D: 1st destination D D+1
word
MOVE NOT Transfers the complement of a word of data to the specified word. Output 333
MVN MVN(022) Required
@MVN Source word
S
022
D
S: Source
D: Destination Bit status
inverted.
Destination word
DOUBLE MOVE Output 336

NOT MVNL(499) Transfers the complement of two words of data to the specified words.
S S+1
Required
MVNL S
@MVNL
499 D
Bit status
S: 1st source inverted.
word
D: 1st destination D D+1
word
MOVE BIT Transfers the specified bit. Output 337

MOVB MOVB(082) Required
@MOVB
S
082
C
D
S: Source word or
data
C: Control word
D: Destination
word
43

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
MOVE DIGIT Transfers the specified digit or digits. (Each digit is made up of 4 bits.) Output 339
MOVD MOVD(083) Required
@MOVD S
083
C
D
S: Source word or
data
C: Control word
D: Destination
word
MULTIPLE BIT Transfers the specified number of consecutive bits. Output 342
TRANSFER XFRB(062) Required
XFRB C
@XFRB
062 S
D
C: Control word
S: 1st source
word
D: 1st destination
word
BLOCK Output 344

TRANSFER XFER(070) Transfers the specified number of consecutive words.
Required
XFER N
@XFER
070 S N words
to to
D D+(N−1)
S+(N−1)
N: Number of
words
S: 1st source
word
D: 1st destination
word
BLOCK SET Copies the same word to a range of consecutive words. Output 347
BSET BSET(071) Required
@BSET S Source word Destination words
071
St St
S: Source word
St: Starting word
E: End word
E
DATA Output 349

XCHG(073) Exchanges the contents of the two specified words.
EXCHANGE Required
XCHG E1 E1 E2
@XCHG
073 E2
E1: 1st exchange
word
E2: Second
exchange word
44

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DOUBLE DATA Exchanges the contents of a pair of consecutive words with another Output 350
EXCHANGE XCGL(562) Required
pair of consecutive words.
XCGL E1
@XCGL E1 E1+1 E2 E2+1
562 E2
E1: 1st exchange
word
E2: Second
exchange word
SINGLE WORD Transfers the source word to a destination word calculated by adding Output 352
DISTRIBUTE DIST(080) an offset value to the base address. Required
DIST S
@DIST S Bs Of
080 Bs
Of
S: Source word
Bs: Destination
base address
Of: Offset Bs+n
DATA COLLECT Transfers the source word (calculated by adding an offset value to the Output 354
COLL COLL(081) base address) to the destination word. Required
@COLL Bs
081 Bs Of
Of
D
Bs: Source base Bs+n

address
Of: Offset
D: Destination
word
MOVE TO REGIS- Sets the internal I/O memory address of the specified word, bit, or Output 356
TER MOVR(560)
timer/counter Completion Flag in the specified Index Register. (Use Required
MOVR S MOVRW(561) to set the internal I/O memory address of a
@MOVR timer/counter PV in an Index Register.)
560 D
I/O memory address of S
S: Source
(desired word or
bit)
D: Destination
(Index Register)
Index Register
MOVE TIMER/ Sets the internal I/O memory address of the specified timer or Output 358
COUNTER PV TO MOVRW(561) counter's PV in the specified Index Register. (Use MOVR(560) to set Required
REGISTER the internal I/O memory address of a word, bit, or timer/counter
S
MOVRW Completion Flag in an Index Register.)
@MOVRW D
561 I/O memory address of S
S: Source
(desired TC
number)
D: Destination Timer/counter PV only
(Index Register)
Index Register
45
2-2-7 Data Shift Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SHIFT REGISTER Data Operates a shift register. Output 361
SFT input SFT(010)
E St+1, St+2 St Required
010 Shift St
input
Reset E
input
Lost Status of data
input for each shift
St: Starting word input
E: End word
REVERSIBLE Creates a shift register that shifts data to either the right or the left. Output 362
SHIFT REGISTER SFTR(084) Required
SFTR C
@SFTR
084 St
E St Data input
E
Shift
C: Control word E St direc-
St: Starting word Data tion
E: End word input
ASYNCHRO- Output 365

Shifts all non-zero word data within the specified word range either
NOUS SHIFT ASFT(017) Required
REGISTER towards St or toward E, replacing 0000Hex word data.
C
ASFT
@ASFT St
017
E St Shift direction
C: Control word Shift enabled
Shift
St: Starting word
•••
E: End word Clear

Shift
St
Zero data
•••
Non-zero data
E
WORD SHIFT Shifts data between St and E in word units. Output 368
WSFT WSFT(016) Required
@WSFT S E St
016 Lost
St
E
S: Source word
St: Starting word
E: End word
ARITHMETIC Shifts the contents of Wd one bit to the left. Output 370
SHIFT LEFT ASL(025) Required
ASL Wd
@ASL
025 Wd: Word
46

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DOUBLE SHIFT Shifts the contents of Wd and Wd +1 one bit to the left. Output 371
LEFT ASLL(570) Required
ASLL Wd+1 Wd
@ASLL Wd
570 Wd: Word
ARITHMETIC Shifts the contents of Wd one bit to the right. Output 373
SHIFT RIGHT ASR(026) Required
ASR
@ASR Wd
026 Wd: Word
DOUBLE SHIFT Output 374

RIGHT ASRL(571) Shifts the contents of Wd and Wd +1 one bit to the right.
Required
ASRL Wd Wd+1 Wd
@ASRL
571 Wd: Word
ROTATE LEFT Output 376

ROL(027) Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the left including the Carry Flag (CY).
ROL Required
@ROL Wd
027
Wd: Word
DOUBLE Output 378

ROTATE LEFT ROLL(572)
Shifts all Wd and Wd + 1 bits one bit to the left including the Carry Flag
(CY). Required
ROLL Wd
@ROLL Wd+1 Wd
572
Wd: Word
ROTATE LEFT Output 383

WITHOUT RLNC(574) Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the left not including the Carry Flag (CY).
Required
CARRY
Wd Wd
RLNC
@RLNC
Wd: Word
574
DOUBLE Shifts all Wd and Wd +1 bits one bit to the left not including the Carry Output 385
ROTATE LEFT RLNL(576) Flag (CY). Required
WITHOUT
CARRY Wd Wd+1 Wd
RLNL
@RLNL Wd: Word
576
ROTATE RIGHT Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the right including the Carry Flag (CY). Output 380
ROR ROR(028) Required
@ROR Wd+1 Wd
Wd
028
Wd: Word
DOUBLE Shifts all Wd and Wd +1 bits one bit to the right including the Carry Output 381
ROTATE RIGHT RORL(573) Required
Flag (CY).
RORL
@RORL Wd Wd+1 Wd
573 Wd: Word
47

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
ROTATE RIGHT Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the right not including the Carry Flag (CY). Output 387
WITHOUT RRNC(575) The contents of the rightmost bit of Wd shifts to the leftmost bit and to Required
CARRY the Carry Flag (CY).
Wd
RRNC
@RRNC Wd: Word
575
Wd
DOUBLE Shifts all Wd and Wd +1 bits one bit to the right not including the Carry Output 388
ROTATE RIGHT RRNL(577) Flag (CY). The contents of the rightmost bit of Wd +1 is shifted to the Required
WITHOUT leftmost bit of Wd, and to the Carry Flag (CY).
CARRY Wd
RRNL Wd+1 Wd
Wd: Word
@RRNL
577
ONE DIGIT SHIFT Shifts data by one digit (4 bits) to the left. Output 390
LEFT SLD(074) Required
SLD E S t
St
@SLD
074 E Lost
St: Starting word

E: End word
ONE DIGIT SHIFT Output 392

RIGHT SRD(075) Shifts data by one digit (4 bits) to the right.
E S t Required
SRD St
@SRD Lost
075 E
St: Starting word
E: End word
SHIFT N-BIT Output 393
DATA LEFT NSFL(578) Shifts the specified number of bits to the left.
Required
NSFL D
@NSFL
578 C
N
D: Beginning
word for shift Shifts one bit to the left
N−1 bit
C: Beginning bit
N: Shift data
length
N−1 bit
SHIFT N-BIT Shifts the specified number of bits to the right. Output 395
DATA RIGHT NSFR(579) Required
NSFR D
@NSFR
579 C
N
D: Beginning Shifts one bit to the right
word for shift N−1 bit
C: Beginning bit
N: Shift data
length
N−1 bit
48

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SHIFT N-BITS Shifts the specified 16 bits of word data to the left by the specified Output 397
LEFT NASL(580) Required
number of bits.
NASL D
@NASL
580 C
D: Shift word Shift n-bits
C: Control word
Contents of
shifted in "a"
Lost or "0"
N bits
DOUBLE SHIFT Shifts the specified 32 bits of word data to the left by the specified Output 400
N-BITS LEFT NSLL(582)
number of bits. Required
NSLL D
@NSLL
582 C
D: Shift word Shift n-bits

C: Control word
Contents of
"a" or "0"
shifted in
Lost
N bits
SHIFT N-BITS Shifts the specified 16 bits of word data to the right by the specified Output 403
RIGHT NASR(581)
number of bits. Required
NASR D
@NASR
581 C
Contents of "a" or
D: Shift word "0" shifted in
C: Control word Lost
N bits
DOUBLE SHIFT Shifts the specified 32 bits of word data to the right by the specified Output 405
N-BITS RIGHT NSRL(583) Required
number of bits.
NSRL D
@NSRL
583 C Shift n-bits
D: Shift word
C: Control word Contents of
"a" or "0"
shifted in Lost
N bits
49
2-2-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
INCREMENT Output 409
BINARY ++(590) Increments the 4-digit hexadecimal content of the specified word by 1.
Required
++ Wd Wd Wd
@++
590 Wd: Word
DOUBLE INCRE- Increments the 8-digit hexadecimal content of the specified words by Output 411
MENT BINARY ++L(591) Required
1.
++L Wd
@++L Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
591 Wd: Word
DECREMENT Decrements the 4-digit hexadecimal content of the specified word by Output 413
BINARY − − (592) Required
1.
–– Wd
@– – Wd Wd
592 Wd: Word
DOUBLE DEC- Decrements the 8-digit hexadecimal content of the specified words by Output 415
REMENT − − L(593) Required
BINARY 1.
Wd
– –L Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
@– –L
Wd: 1st word
593
INCREMENT Increments the 4-digit BCD content of the specified word by 1. Output 417
BCD ++B(594) Required
++B Wd Wd Wd
@++B
594 Wd: Word
DOUBLE INCRE- Increments the 8-digit BCD content of the specified words by 1. Output 419
MENT BCD ++BL(595) Required
++BL
@++BL Wd
Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
595 Wd: 1st word
DECREMENT Decrements the 4-digit BCD content of the specified word by 1. Output 421
BCD − − B(596) Required
– –B Wd
@– –B Wd −1 Wd
596 Wd: Word
DOUBLE DEC- Output 423

REMENT BCD − − BL(597) Decrements the 8-digit BCD content of the specified words by 1.
Required
– –BL Wd
@– –BL Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
597 Wd: 1st word
50
2-2-9 Symbol Math Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SIGNED BINARY Adds 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants. Output 426
ADD WITHOUT +(400) Required
CARRY
+
Au Au (Signed binary)
@+ Ad
400 + Ad (Signed binary)
R
CY will turn ON
Au: Augend word when there is a CY R (Signed binary)
Ad: Addend word carry.
R: Result word
DOUBLE Adds 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants. Output 428
SIGNED BINARY +L(401) Required
ADD WITHOUT Au+1 (Signed binary)
CARRY Au Au
+L Ad
@+L + Ad+1 Ad (Signed binary)
401 R
CY will turn
ON when CY R+1 R (Signed binary)
Au: 1st augend there is a
word carry.
Ad: 1st addend
word
R: 1st result word
SIGNED BINARY Adds 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants with the Output 430
ADD WITH +C(402) Carry Flag (CY). Required
CARRY
+C
Au Au (Signed binary)
@+C Ad
402 Ad (Signed binary)
R
Au: Augend word + CY
Ad: Addend word CY will turn ON
R: Result word when there is a CY R (Signed binary)
carry.
DOUBLE Adds 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants with the Output 432
SIGNED BINARY +CL(403) Carry Flag (CY). Required
ADD WITH
CARRY Au Au+1 Au (Signed binary)
+CL Ad
@+CL Ad+1 Ad (Signed binary)
403 R
+ CY
Au: 1st augend
word CY will turn ON
Ad: 1st addend when there is a CY R+1 R (Signed binary)
word carry.
R: 1st result word
BCD ADD WITH- Output 434
OUT CARRY +B(404) Adds 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants.
Required
+B Au Au (BCD)
@+B
404 Ad Ad (BCD)
+
R
CY will turn ON
Au: Augend word when there is a CY R (BCD)
Ad: Addend word carry.
R: Result word
51

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DOUBLE BCD Adds 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants. Output 435
ADD WITHOUT +BL(405) Required
CARRY Au+1 Au (BCD)
Au
+BL
@+BL Ad (BCD)
Ad+1 Ad
405 +
R
CY will turn ON (BCD)
Au: 1st augend when there is a CY R+1 R
word carry.
Ad: 1st addend
word
R: 1st result
word
BCD ADD WITH Adds 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants with the Carry Output 437
CARRY +BC(406) Required
Flag (CY).
+BC Au (BCD)
@+BC
Au
406 Ad Ad (BCD)
R
+ CY
Au: Augend word CY will turn ON
Ad: Addend word when there is a
R: Result word carry. CY R (BCD)
DOUBLE BCD Adds 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants with the Carry Output 439
ADD WITH +BCL(407) Flag (CY). Required
CARRY
Au Au+1 Au (BCD)
+BCL
@+BCL Ad
Ad+1 Ad (BCD)
407
R
+ CY
Au: 1st augend
word
Ad: 1st addend CY will turn
ON when there CY R+1 R (BCD)
word
R: 1st result word is a carry.
SIGNED BINARY Output 440

SUBTRACT −(410) Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Required
WITHOUT Mi (Signed binary)
CARRY Mi
– Su − (Signed binary)
@– Su
410 R
CY will turn ON CY R (Signed binary)
Mi: Minuend word when there is a
Su: Subtrahend borrow.
word
R: Result word
DOUBLE Output 442

SIGNED BINARY − L(411) Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Required
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT Mi Mi+1 Mi (Signed binary)
CARRY Su
–L − Su+1 Su (Signed binary)
@–L R
411 CY will turn
Mi: Minuend word ON when CY R+1 R (Signed binary)
Su: Subtrahend there is a
word borrow.
R: Result word
52

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SIGNED BINARY Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants Output 446
SUBTRACT −C(412) Required
WITH CARRY with the Carry Flag (CY).
Mi Mi (Signed binary)
–C
@–C Su Su (Signed binary)
412
R
− CY
Mi: Minuend word
Su: Subtrahend CY will turn ON
word when there is a CY R (Signed binary)
R: Result word borrow.
DOUBLE Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants Output 448
SIGNED BINARY −CL(413) with the Carry Flag (CY). Required
WITH CARRY
Mi
–CL Mi+1 Mi (Signed binary)
@–CL Su
413
R Su+1 Su (Signed binary)
Mi: Minuend word − CY

Su: Subtrahend CY will turn
word ON when
R: Result word there is a CY R+1 R (Signed binary)
borrow.
BCD SUBTRACT Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants. Output 451
WITHOUT −B(414) Required
CARRY Mi (BCD)
Mi
–B
@–B Su − Su (BCD)
414
R
CY will turn ON
when there is a CY R (BCD)
Mi: Minuend word
Su: Subtrahend carry.
word
R: Result word
DOUBLE BCD Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants. Output 452
SUBTRACT −BL(415) Required
WITHOUT
CARRY Mi Mi +1 Mi (BCD)
–BL Su
@–BL − Su+1 Su (BCD)
415 R
Mi: 1st minuend CY will turn ON CY R+1 R (BCD)
word when there is a
Su: 1st borrow.
subtrahend word
R: 1st result word
BCD SUBTRACT Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants with the Output 456
WITH CARRY −BC(416) Carry Flag (CY). Required
–BC
@–BC Mi Mi (BCD)
416 Su
Su (BCD)
R
− CY
Mi: Minuend word
Su: Subtrahend
word CY will turn ON (BCD)
R: Result word when there is a CY R
borrow.
53

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DOUBLE BCD Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants with the Output 457
SUBTRACT −BCL(417) Carry Flag (CY). Required
WITH CARRY
–BCL Mi Mi +1 Mi (BCD)
@–BCL Su
417 Su+1 Su (BCD)
R
− CY
Mi: 1st minuend
word
Su: 1st CY will turn ON (BCD)
subtrahend word when there is a CY R+1 R
R: 1st result word borrow.
SIGNED BINARY Output 459

MULTIPLY *(420) Multiplies 4-digit signed hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Required
* Md Md (Signed binary)
@*
420 Mr
× Mr (Signed binary)
R
Md: Multiplicand R +1 R (Signed binary)
word
Mr: Multiplier
word
R: Result word
DOUBLE Multiplies 8-digit signed hexadecimal data and/or constants. Output 461
SIGNED BINARY *L(421) Required
MULTIPLY
*L
Md Md + 1 Md (Signed binary)
@*L Mr
421 × Mr + 1 Mr (Signed binary)
R
Md: 1st
multiplicand word R+3 R+2 R+1 R (Signed binary)
Mr: 1st multiplier
word
R: 1st result word
UNSIGNED Output 463
BINARY *U(422) Multiplies 4-digit unsigned hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Required
MULTIPLY
*U
Md Md (Unsigned binary)
@*U Mr
422 (Unsigned binary)
R × Mr
Md: Multiplicand
word R +1 R (Unsigned binary)
Mr: Multiplier
word
R: Result word
DOUBLE Output 465

UNSIGNED *UL(423) Multiplies 8-digit unsigned hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Required
BINARY
MULTIPLY Md Md + 1 Md (Unsigned binary)
*UL Mr
@*UL
423 R × Mr + 1 Mr (Unsigned binary)
Md: 1st
multiplicand word
Mr: 1st multiplier R+3 R+2 R+1 R (Unsigned binary)
word
R: 1st result word
54

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
BCD MULTIPLY Multiplies 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants. Output 467
*B *B(424) Required
@*B Md (BCD)
Md
424
Mr
× Mr (BCD)
R
Md: Multiplicand
R +1 R (BCD)
word
Mr: Multiplier
word
R: Result word
DOUBLE BCD Multiplies 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants. Output 469
MULTIPLY *BL(425) Required
*BL Md (BCD)
@*BL Md + 1 Md
425 Mr
× Mr + 1 Mr (BCD)
R
Md: 1st
multiplicand word (BCD)
Mr: 1st multiplier R+3 R+2 R+1 R
word
R: 1st result word
SIGNED BINARY Divides 4-digit (single-word) signed hexadecimal data and/or Output 471
DIVIDE /(430) constants. Required
/ Dd Dd (Signed binary)
@/
430 Dr
÷ Dr (Signed binary)
R
Dd: Dividend word (Signed binary)

R +1 R
Dr: Divisor word
R: Result word Remainder Quotient
DOUBLE Divides 8-digit (double-word) signed hexadecimal data and/or Output 473
SIGNED BINARY /L(431) constants. Required
DIVIDE
/L
Dd Dd + 1 Dd (Signed binary)
@/L Dr
431 ÷ (Signed binary)
R Dr + 1 Dr
Dd: 1st dividend

word R+3 R+2 R+1 R (Signed binary)
Dr: 1st divisor
word
R: 1st result word Remainder Quotient
UNSIGNED Divides 4-digit (single-word) unsigned hexadecimal data and/or Output 475
BINARY DIVIDE /U(432) Required
constants.
/U Dd
@/U Dd (Unsigned binary)
432 Dr
R ÷ Dr (Unsigned binary)
Dd: Dividend
word
Dr: Divisor word R +1 R (Unsigned binary)
R: Result word
Remainder Quotient
55

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DOUBLE Divides 8-digit (double-word) unsigned hexadecimal data and/or Output 477
UNSIGNED /UL(433) Required
BINARY DIVIDE constants.
/UL Dd Dd + 1 Dd (Unsigned binary)
@/UL Dr
433
R ÷ Dr + 1 Dr (Unsigned binary)
Dd: 1st dividend

word
Dr: 1st divisor R+3 R+2 R+1 R (Unsigned binary)
word
BCD DIVIDE Output 479

/B /B(434) Divides 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants. Required
@/B Dd
434 Dd (BCD)
Dr
R ÷ Dr (BCD)
Dd: Dividend
word
R +1 R (BCD)
Dr: Divisor word
R: Result word Remainder Quotient
DOUBLE BCD Output 481

/BL(435) Divides 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants.
DIVIDE Required
/BL Dd (BCD)
@/BL Dd + 1 Dd
435 Dr
R ÷ Dr + 1 Dr (BCD)
Dd: 1st dividend

word
Dr: 1st divisor R+3 R+2 R+1 R (BCD)
word
2-2-10 Conversion Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
BCD TO BINARY Output 483
BIN(023) Converts BCD data to binary data.
BIN Required
@BIN S (BCD) (BIN)
R
023
R
S: Source word
R: Result word
DOUBLE BCD TO Converts 8-digit BCD data to 8-digit hexadecimal (32-bit binary) data. Output 485
DOUBLE BINL(058) Required
BINARY
BINL
S (BCD) R (BIN)
@BINL R (BCD) R+1 (BIN)
058
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
56

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
BINARY TO BCD Output 487
BCD(024) Converts a word of binary data to a word of BCD data.
BCD Required
@BCD (BIN) R (BCD)
S
024
R
S: Source word
R: Result word
DOUBLE Output 489
BINARY TO DOU- BCDL(059) Converts 8-digit hexadecimal (32-bit binary) data to 8-digit BCD data.
Required
BLE BCD
S (BIN) R (BCD)
BCDL
@BCDL R (BIN) R+1 (BCD)
059
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
2’S COMPLE- Output 491

MENT NEG(160) Calculates the 2's complement of a word of hexadecimal data.
Required
NEG S 2's complement
@NEG (Complement + 1)
160 R (S) (R)
S: Source word
R: Result word
DOUBLE 2’S Calculates the 2's complement of two words of hexadecimal data. Output 493
COMPLEMENT NEGL(161) Required
NEGL S 2's complement
@NEGL (Complement + 1)
161 R (S+1, S) (R+1, R)
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
16-BIT TO 32-BIT Expands a 16-bit signed binary value to its 32-bit equivalent. Output 494
SIGNED BINARY SIGN(600) Required
SIGN S MSB
@SIGN
600 R S
S: Source word MSB = 0:

MSB = 1:
0000 Hex
R: 1st result word FFFF Hex
D+1 D
D = Contents of S
57

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DATA DECODER Reads the numerical value in the specified digit (or byte) in the source Output 496
MLPX MLPX(076) Required
word, turns ON the corresponding bit in the result word (or 16-word
@MLPX S range), and turns OFF all other bits in the result word (or 16-word
076 range).
C 4-to-16 bit conversion
R C
S: Source word l=1 (Convert 2 digits.)

C: Control word
R: 1st result word
n=2 (Start with second digit.)
4-to-16 bit decoding

(Bit m of R is turned ON.)
R
R+1
8-to-256 bit conversion

C
l=1 (Convert 2 bytes.)
n=1 (Start with first byte.)

(Bit m of R to R+15 is turned ON.)
R+1
R+14
R+15
R+16
R+17
Two 16-word ranges are
used when l specifies 2
bytes.
R+30
R+31
58

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DATA ENCODER FInds the location of the first or last ON bit within the source word (or Output 500
DMPX DMPX(077) 16-word range), and writes that value to the specified digit (or byte) in Required
@DMPX S the result word.
077 16-to-4 bit conversion
R C
Finds leftmost bit
C (Highest bit address)
S: 1st source l=1 (Convert
word 2 words.)
R: Result word
C: Control word

(Location of leftmost Leftmost bit Rightmost bit
bit (m) is written to R.)
n=2 (Start with digit 2.)
256-to-8 bit conversion

C
l=0 (Convert one 16-word range.)
Leftmost bit
Finds leftmost bit

(Highest bit address)
256-to-8 bit decoding (The location of

the leftmost bit in the 16-word range
(m) is written to R.)
n=1 (Start with byte 1.)
ASCII CONVERT Converts 4-bit hexadecimal digits in the source word into their 8-bit Output 504
ASC ASC(086) Required
ASCII equivalents.
@ASC Di
S
086
Di First digit to convert
S: Source word
Di: Digit
designator
D: 1st destination Number of
word digits (n+1)
Left (1) Right (0)
59

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
ASCII TO HEX Converts up to 4 bytes of ASCII data in the source word to their Output 508
HEX HEX(162) hexadecimal equivalents and writes these digits in the specified Required
@HEX destination word.
S
162 C: 0021
Di Di
D First byte to convert
S: 1st source Left (1) Right (0)

word
Di: Digit
designator
D: Destination
word
Number of digits (n+1)
First digit to write
COLUMN TO Converts a column of bits from a 16-word range (the same bit number Output 512
LINE LINE(063) Required
in 16 consecutive words) to the 16 bits of the destination word.
LINE S
@LINE N
Bit Bit
063 N 15 00
D
S 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
S: 1st source S+1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
word
N: Bit number S+2 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
D: Destination S+3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
word . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
S+15 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
Bit Bit
15 00
D 0 . . . 0 1 1 1
LINE TO Converts the 16 bits of the source word to a column of bits in a Output 514
COLUMN COLM(064)
16-word range of destination words (the same bit number in 16 Required
COLM S consecutive words).
@COLM
064 D Bit Bit
15 00
N
S 0 . . . . . . . 0 1 1 1
S: Source word
D: 1st destination
word
N: Bit number
Bit Bi Bit
15 00
D 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
D+1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
D+2 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
D+3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
D+15 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
60

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SIGNED BCD TO Converts one word of signed BCD data to one word of signed binary Output 517
BINARY BINS(470)
data. Required
BINS C
@BINS
470 S Signed BCD format
D specified in C
C: Control word Signed BCD Signed binary

S: Source word
D: Destination
word
DOUBLE Converts double signed BCD data to double signed binary data. Output 520
SIGNED BCD TO BISL(472) Required
BINARY
C
BISL
@BISL S Signed BCD format
472 specified in C
D
Signed BCD Signed binary
C: Control word
S: 1st source Signed BCD Signed binary
word
D: 1st destination
word
SIGNED BINARY Converts one word of signed binary data to one word of signed BCD Output 523
TO BCD BCDS(471)
data. Required
BCDS C
@BCDS
471 S Signed BCD format
specified in C
D
Signed binary Signed BCD
C: Control word
S: Source word
D: Destination
word
DOUBLE Converts double signed binary data to double signed BCD data. Output 525
SIGNED BINARY BDSL(473) Required
TO BCD
C
BDSL
@BDSL S Signed BCD format
473
D specified in C
C: Control word Signed binary Signed BCD

S: 1st source Signed binary Signed BCD
word
D: 1st destination
word
GRAY CODE Converts the Gray code data in the specified word to binary, BCD, or Output 529
CONVERSION GRY (474) angle (°) data at the specified resolution. Required
GRY C
474
S
(CS/CJ-series
Unit Ver. 2.0 or D
later only, includ-
ing CS1-H, CJ1-H, C: Control word
and CJ1M CPU S: Source word
Units from lot D: 1st destination
number 030201
and later) word
61

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
FOUR-DIGIT Converts a 4-digit hexadecimal number (#0000 to #FFFF) to ASCII Output 534
NUMBER TO STR4 data (4 characters). Required
ASCII
S
STR4
@STR4 D
601
S: Numeric
(CS/CJ-series D: ASCII text
CPU Units with
unit version 4.0 or
later only)
EIGHT-DIGIT Converts an 8-digit hexadecimal number (#0000 0000 to #FFFF FFFF) Output 537
NUMBER TO- STR8 to ASCII data (8 characters). Required
ASCII
S
STR8
@STR8 D
602
S: Numeric
CPU Units with
unit version 4.0 or
later only)
SIXTEEN-DIGIT Converts a 16-digit hexadecimal number (#0000 0000 0000 0000 to Output 539
NUMBER TO STR16 #FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF) to ASCII data (16 characters). Required
ASCII
S
STR16
@STR16 D
603
S: Numeric
CPU Units with
unit version 4.0 or
later only)
ASCII TO FOUR- Converts 4 characters of ASCII data to a 4-digit hexadecimal number. Output 541
DIGIT NUMBER NUM4 Required
NUM4 S
@NUM4
604 D
(CS/CJ-series S: ASCII text
CPU Units with D: Numeric
unit version 4.0 or
later only)
ASCII TO EIGHT- Converts 8 characters of ASCII data to an 8-digit hexadecimal number. Output 544
DIGIT NUMBER NUM8 Required
NUM8 S
@NUM8
605 D
(CS/CJ-series S: ASCII text
CPU Units with D: Numeric
unit version 4.0 or
later only)
ASCII TO SIX- Converts 16 characters of ASCII data to a 16-digit hexadecimal num- Output 545
TEEN-DIGIT NUM16 ber. Required
NUMBER
S
NUM16
@NUM16 D
606
S: ASCII text
(CS/CJ-series D: Numeric
CPU Units with
unit version 4.0 or
later only)
62
2-2-11 Logic Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
LOGICAL AND Takes the logical AND of corresponding bits in single words of word Output 548
ANDW ANDW(034) Required
data and/or constants.
@ANDW
I1
034 I1. I2→ R
I2
I1 I2 R
R
1 1 1
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2 1 0 0
R: Result word
0 1 0
0 0 0
DOUBLE Takes the logical AND of corresponding bits in double words of word Output 550
LOGICAL AND ANDL(610) Required
ANDL I1
@ANDL
(I1, I1+1). (I2, I2+1)→ (R, R+1)
610 I2
I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
R
1 1 1
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2 1 0 0
R: Result word
0 1 0
0 0 0
LOGICAL OR Output 551

ORW(035) Takes the logical OR of corresponding bits in single words of word
ORW data and/or constants. Required
@ORW I1
035 I1 + I2 → R
I2
R I1 I2 R
1 1 1
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2 1 0 1
R: Result word
0 1 1
0 0 0
DOUBLE Takes the logical OR of corresponding bits in double words of word Output 553
LOGICAL OR ORWL(611)
data and/or constants. Required
ORWL I1
@ORWL
(I1, I1+1) + (I2, I2+1) →(R, R+1)
611 I2
I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
R
1 1 1
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2 1 0 1
R: Result word 0 1
1
0 0 0
EXCLUSIVE OR Output 555

XORW XORW(036) Takes the logical exclusive OR of corresponding bits in single words Required
@XORW of word data and/or constants.
I1
036 I1. I2 + I1.I2 → R
I2
R I1 I2 R
I1: Input 1
1 1 0
I2: Input 2 1 0 1
R: Result word
0 1 1
0 0 0
63

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DOUBLE EXCLU- Output 557
SIVE OR XORL(612) Takes the logical exclusive OR of corresponding bits in double words
of word data and/or constants. Required
XORL I1
@XORL (I1, I1+1). (I2, I2+1) + (I1, I1+1). (I2, I2+1) → (R, R+1)
612 I2
R I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
1 1 0
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2 1 0 1
R: Result word
0 1 1
0 0 0
EXCLUSIVE NOR Takes the logical exclusive NOR of corresponding single words of Output 559
XNRW(037)
XNRW word data and/or constants. Required
@XNRW I1
037 I1. I2 + I1.I2 →R
I2
I1 I2 R
R
I1: Input 1
1 1 1
I2: Input 2 1 0 0
R: Result word
0 1 0
0 0 1
DOUBLE EXCLU- Takes the logical exclusive NOR of corresponding bits in double Output 560
SIVE NOR XNRL(613) Required
words of word data and/or constants.
XNRL I1
@XNRL (I1, I1+1). (I2, I2+1) + (I1, I1+1). (I2, I2+1) → (R, R+1)
613 I2
R I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
1 1 1
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2 1 0 0
R: 1st result word 0 1 0
0 0 1
COMPLEMENT Output 562

COM(029) Turns OFF all ON bits and turns ON all OFF bits in Wd.
COM Required
@COM Wd→Wd: 1 → 0 and 0 → 1
Wd
029
Wd: Word
DOUBLE COM- Output 564

PLEMENT COML(614) Turns OFF all ON bits and turns ON all OFF bits in Wd and Wd+1.
Required
COML Wd (Wd+1, Wd) → (Wd+1, Wd)
@COML
614
Wd: Word
64
2-2-12 Special Math Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
BINARY ROOT Computes the square root of the 32-bit binary content of the specified Output 565
ROTB(620) words and outputs the integer portion of the result to the specified
ROTB Required
@ROTB result word.
S
620
R
S+1 S R
S: 1st source
word Binary data (32 bits) Binary data (16 bits)
R: Result word
BCD SQUARE Computes the square root of an 8-digit BCD number and outputs the Output 567
ROOT ROOT(072) integer portion of the result to the specified result word. Required
ROOT
@ROOT
S
072 R
S+1 S R
S: 1st source
BCD data (8 digits) BCD data (4 digits)
word
R: Result word
ARITHMETIC Calculates the sine, cosine, or a linear extrapolation of the source data. Output 571
PROCESS APR(069)
The linear extrapolation function allows any relationship between X and Required
APR C Y to be approximated with line segments.
@APR
069 S
R
C: Control word
S: Source data
R: Result word
FLOATING Divides one 7-digit floating-point number by another. The floating- Output 583
POINT DIVIDE FDIV(079) Required
point numbers are expressed in scientific notation (7-digit mantissa
FDIV Dd and 1-digit exponent).
@FDIV
Quotient
079 Dr
R+1 R
R
Dd: 1st dividend Dr+1 Dr Dd+1 Dd
word
Dr: 1st divisor
word
R: 1st result word
BIT COUNTER Counts the total number of ON bits in the specified word(s). Output 587
BCNT BCNT(067) Required
@BCNT N
067 N words
S Counts the number
to of ON bits.
R
S+(N −1) Binary result
N: Number of
words
S: 1st source R
word
R: Result word
65
2-2-13 Floating-point Math Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
FLOATING TO Converts a 32-bit floating-point value to 16-bit signed binary data and Output 594
16-BIT FIX(450) places the result in the specified result word. Required
FIX
@FIX S
S+1 S Floating-point data
450 R (32 bits)
S: 1st source
word R Signed binary data
R: Result word (16 bits)
FLOATING TO Converts a 32-bit floating-point value to 32-bit signed binary data and Output 596
32-BIT FIXL(451) Required
places the result in the specified result words.
FIXL S
@FIXL S+1 S Floating-point data
451 R
(32 bits)
S: 1st source
word R+1 R Signed binary data
R: 1st result word (32 bits)
16-BIT TO Converts a 16-bit signed binary value to 32-bit floating-point data and Output 597
FLOATING FLT(452) places the result in the specified result words. Required
FLT S
@FLT
R S Signed binary data
452
(16 bits)
S: Source word
R: 1st result word R+1 R Floating-point data
(32 bits)
32-BIT TO Converts a 32-bit signed binary value to 32-bit floating-point data and Output 599
FLOATING FLTL(453) places the result in the specified result words. Required
FLTL S
@FLTL S+1 S
R Signed binary data
453
(32 bits)
S: 1st source
word R+1 R Floating-point data
R: 1st result word (32 bits)
FLOATING- Adds two 32-bit floating-point numbers and places the result in the Output 601
POINT ADD +F(454) Required
specified result words.
+F Au
@+F Augend (floating-
454 Ad Au+1 Au
point data, 32 bits)
R
Addend (floating-
Au: 1st augend + Ad+1 Ad
word
AD: 1st addend
word R+1 R Result (floating-
R: 1st result word point data, 32 bits)
FLOATING- Subtracts one 32-bit floating-point number from another and places Output 603
POINT SUB- F(455) the result in the specified result words. Required
TRACT
–F
Mi
@–F Mi+1 Mi Minuend (floating-
Su
455 point data, 32 bits)
R
Mi: 1st Minuend
− Su+1 Su Subtrahend (floating-
word
Su: 1st
Subtrahend word R+1 R Result (floating-point
R: 1st result word data, 32 bits)
66

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
FLOATING- Multiplies two 32-bit floating-point numbers and places the result in Output 605
POINT MULTIPLY *F(456) the specified result words. Required
*F Md
@*F Md+1 Md Multiplicand (floating-
456 Mr point data, 32 bits)
R × Mr+1 Mr Multiplier (floating-
Md: 1st
Multiplicand word
Mr: 1st Multiplier R+1 R Result (floating-point
word data, 32 bits)
R: 1st result word
FLOATING- Divides one 32-bit floating-point number by another and places the Output 607
POINT DIVIDE /F(457) result in the specified result words. Required
/F Dd
@/F Dd+1 Dd Dividend (floating-
457 Dr point data, 32 bits)
R
÷ Dr+1 Dr Divisor (floating-
Dd: 1st Dividend point data, 32 bits)
word
Dr: 1st Divisor
word R+1 R Result (floating-
R: 1st result word point data, 32 bits)
DEGREES TO Converts a 32-bit floating-point number from degrees to radians and Output 609
RADIANS RAD(458) Required
RAD S
@RAD
S+1 S Source (degrees, 32-bit
458 R floating-point data)
S: 1st source
word R+1 R Result (radians, 32-bit
R: 1st result word floating-point data)
RADIANS TO Converts a 32-bit floating-point number from radians to degrees and Output 610
DEGREES DEG(459) Required
DEG S
@DEG
459 R S+1 S Source (radians, 32-bit
floating-point data)
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word R+1 R Result (degrees, 32-bit
floating-point data)
SINE Calculates the sine of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) and Output 612
SIN SIN(460) Required
@SIN S
460 Source (32-bit
R SIN S+1 S
floating-point
S: 1st source data)
word
R: 1st result word R+1 R Result (32-bit
floating-point
data)
HIGH-SPEED Calculates the sine of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) and Output 614
SINE (CJ1-H-R SINQ(475) places the result in the specified result words. Required
only)
S SIN S+1 S Source (32-bit
SINQ
R floating-point
@SINQ data)
475 S: 1st source
word R+1 R Result (32-bit
R: 1st result word floating-point
data)
67

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
COSINE Calculates the cosine of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) Output 615
COS COS(461) and places the result in the specified result words. Required
@COS S
461 COS S+1 S Source (32-bit
R floating-point
S: 1st source
data)
R: 1st result word
floating-point
data)
HIGH-SPEED Calculates the cosine of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) and Output 617
COSINE (CJ1-H- COSQ(476) places the result in the specified result words. Required
R only) S
COSQ COS S+1 S Source (32-bit
@COSQ R
floating-point
476 data)
S: 1st source
word
floating-point
data)
TANGENT Calculates the tangent of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) Output 619
TAN TAN(462) Required
and places the result in the specified result words.
@TAN S
462 S+1 Source (32-bit
R TAN S
floating-point
S: 1st source data)
word
floating-point
data)
HIGH-SPEED Calculates the tangent of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) Output 621
TANGENT (CJ1- TANQ(477) and places the result in the specified result words. Required
H-R only)
S TAN S+1 S Source (32-bit
TANQ
floating-point
@TANQ R
data)
477 S: 1st source
R: 1st result word floating-point
data)
ARC SINE Calculates the arc sine of a 32-bit floating-point number and places Output 623
ASIN ASIN(463) Required
the result in the specified result words. (The arc sine function is the
@ASIN S inverse of the sine function; it returns the angle that produces a given
463 sine value between −1 and 1.)
R
S: 1st source Source (32-bit
SIN−1 S+1 S
floating-point
word
R: 1st result word data)
R+1 R Result (32-bit

floating-point
data)
ARC COSINE Calculates the arc cosine of a 32-bit floating-point number and places Output 625
ACOS(464)
ACOS the result in the specified result words. (The arc cosine function is the Required
@ACOS S inverse of the cosine function; it returns the angle that produces a
464 given cosine value between −1 and 1.)
R
S: 1st source Source (32-bit
word COS−1 S+1 S floating-point
Result (32-bit
R+1 R
floating-point
data)
68

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
ARC TANGENT Output 627
ATAN(465) Calculates the arc tangent of a 32-bit floating-point number and
ATAN places the result in the specified result words. (The arc tangent Required
@ATAN S function is the inverse of the tangent function; it returns the angle that
465 produces a given tangent value.)
R
Source (32-bit
S: 1st source TAN−1 S+1 S floating-point
word

floating-point
data)
SQUARE ROOT Calculates the square root of a 32-bit floating-point number and Output 629
SQRT(466)
SQRT places the result in the specified result words. Required
@SQRT S
466
R S+1 S Source (32-bit
floating-point
S: 1st source data)
word
floating-point
data)
EXPONENT Calculates the natural (base e) exponential of a 32-bit floating-point Output 631
EXP(467) number and places the result in the specified result words.
EXP Required
@EXP S
467 Source (32-bit
R S+1 S floating-point
data)
S: 1st source
word
e
R: 1st result word
floating-point
data)
LOGARITHM Calculates the natural (base e) logarithm of a 32-bit floating-point Output 633
LOG LOG(468) number and places the result in the specified result words. Required
@LOG S
468 Source (32-bit
R loge S+1 S floating-point
S: 1st source data)
word
floating-point
data)
EXPONENTIAL Raises a 32-bit floating-point number to the power of another 32-bit Output 635
POWER PWR(840)
floating-point number. Required
PWR
@PWR
B Power
840 E E+1 E
R B+1 S R+1 R
B: 1st base word Base
E: 1st exponent
word
R: 1st result word
69

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
FLOATING SYM- Using LD: Compares the specified single-precision data (32 bits) or constants LD: 636
BOL COMPARI- and creates an ON execution condition if the comparison result is true. Not required
SON (CS1-H, Symbol, option
Three kinds of symbols can be used with the floating-point symbol
CJ1-H, CJ1M, or S1 comparison instructions: LD (Load), AND, and OR. AND or OR:
CS1D only) S2 Required
LD, AND. or OR
+ Using AND:
=F (329), Symbol, option
<>F (330),
<F (331), S1
<=F (332), S2
>F (333),
or >=F (334) Using OR:
Symbol, option
S1
S2
S1: Comparison data 1
FLOATING- Converts the specified single-precision floating-point data (32-bit deci- Output 640
POINT TO ASCII FSTR(448) mal-point or exponential format) to text string data (ASCII) and outputs required
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, the result to the destination word.
CJ1M, or CS1D S
only)
FSTR
C
@FSTR D
448
S: 1st source
word
C: Control word
D: Destination
word
ASCII TO FLOAT- Converts the specified text string (ASCII) representation of single-pre- Output 645
ING-POINT (CS1- FVAL(449) cision floating-point data (decimal-point or exponential format) to 32-bit required
H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, single-precision floating-point data and outputs the result to the desti-
or CS1D only) S nation words.
FVAL
@FVAL D
449
S: Source word
D: 1st destination
word
MOVE FLOAT- Transfers the specified 32-bit floating-point number to the destination Output 649
ING-POINT MOVF(469) words. required
(SINGLE)
(CJ1-H-R only) S S+1 S
MOVF D
@MOVF
469 S: First source
word D+1 D
D: First destination
word
70
2-2-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions

The Double-precision Floating-point Instructions are supported only by the
CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D CPU Units.
Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DOUBLE FLOAT- Converts the specified double-precision floating-point data (64 bits) to 16- Output 657
ING TO 16-BIT FIXD(841) bit signed binary data and outputs the result to the destination word. Required
BINARY
FIXD S
@FIXD
D
841
S: 1st source
word
D: Destination
word
DOUBLE FLOAT- Converts the specified double-precision floating-point data (64 bits) to 32- Output 658
ING TO 32-BIT FIXLD(842) bit signed binary data and outputs the result to the destination words. Required
BINARY
FIXLD S
@FIXLD
D
842
S: 1st source
word
D: 1st destination
word
16-BIT BINARY Converts the specified 16-bit signed binary data to double-precision float- Output 660
TO DOUBLE DBL(843) ing-point data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the destination words. Required
FLOATING
DBL S
@DBL D
843
S: Source word
D: 1st destination
word
32-BIT BINARY Converts the specified 32-bit signed binary data to double-precision float- Output 661
TO DOUBLE DBLL(844) ing-point data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the destination words. Required
FLOATING
DBLL S
@DBLL
D
844
S: 1st source
word
D: 1st destination
word
DOUBLE FLOAT- Adds the specified double-precision floating-point values (64 bits each) Output 663
ING-POINT ADD +D(845) and outputs the result to the result words. Required
+D
@+D Au
845 Ad
R
Au: 1st augend
word
Ad: 1st addend
word
R: 1st result word
71

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DOUBLE FLOAT- Subtracts the specified double-precision floating-point values (64 bits Output 665
ING-POINT SUB- −D(846) each) and outputs the result to the result words. Required
TRACT
−D Mi
@− D Su
846
R
Mi: 1st minuend
word
Su: 1st subtra-
hend word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE FLOAT- Multiplies the specified double-precision floating-point values (64 bits Output 667
ING-POINT MUL- *D(847) each) and outputs the result to the result words. Required
TIPLY
*D Md
@*D Mr
847
R
Md: 1st multipli-
cand word
Mr: 1st multiplier
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE FLOAT- Divides the specified double-precision floating-point values (64 bits each) Output 669
ING-POINT /D(848) and outputs the result to the result words. Required
DIVIDE
/D Dd
@/D Dr
848
R
Dd: 1st Dividend
word
Dr: 1st divisor
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE Converts the specified double-precision floating-point data (64 bits) from Output 671
DEGREES TO RADD(849) degrees to radians and outputs the result to the result words. Required
RADIANS
RADD S
@RADD R
849
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE RADI- Converts the specified double-precision floating-point data (64 bits) from Output 673
ANS TO DEGD(850) radians to degrees and outputs the result to the result words. Required
DEGREES
DEGD S
@DEGD R
850
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE SINE Calculates the sine of the angle (radians) in the specified double-precision Output 674
SIND SIND(851) floating-point data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the result words. Required
@SIND
S
851
R
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
72

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DOUBLE Calculates the cosine of the angle (radians) in the specified double-preci- Output 676
COSINE COSD(852) sion floating-point data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the result words. Required
COSD
@COSD S
852 R
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE TAN- Calculates the tangent of the angle (radians) in the specified double-preci- Output 678
GENT TAND(853) sion floating-point data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the result words. Required
TAND
@TAND S
853 R
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE ARC Calculates the angle (in radians) from the sine value in the specified dou- Output 680
SINE ASIND(854) ble-precision floating-point data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the Required
ASIND result words. (The arc sine function is the inverse of the sine function; it
@ASIND S returns the angle that produces a given sine value between -1 and 1.)
854 R
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE ARC Calculates the angle (in radians) from the cosine value in the specified Output 682
COSINE ACOSD(855) double-precision floating-point data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the Required
ACOSD result words. (The arc cosine function is the inverse of the cosine function;
@ACOSD S it returns the angle that produces a given cosine value between -1 and 1.)
855 R
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE ARC Calculates the angle (in radians) from the tangent value in the specified Output 684
TANGENT ATAND(856) double-precision floating-point data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the Required
ATAND result words. (The arc tangent function is the inverse of the tangent func-
@ATAND S tion; it returns the angle that produces a given tangent value.)
856 R
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE Calculates the square root of the specified double-precision floating-point Output 686
SQUARE ROOT SQRTD(857) data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the result words. Required
SQRTD
@SQRTD S
857 R
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE EXPO- Calculates the natural (base e) exponential of the specified double-preci- Output 688
NENT EXPD(858) sion floating-point data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the result words. Required
EXPD
@EXPD S
858 R
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
73

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DOUBLE LOGA- Calculates the natural (base e) logarithm of the specified double-precision Output 690
RITHM LOGD(859) floating-point data (64 bits) and outputs the result to the result words. Required
LOGD
@LOGD S
859 R
S: 1st source
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE EXPO- Raises a double-precision floating-point number (64 bits) to the power of Output 692
NENTIAL PWRD(860) another double-precision floating-point number and outputs the result to Required
POWER the result words.
PWRD B
@PWRD E
860
R
B: 1st base word
E: 1st exponent
word
R: 1st result word
DOUBLE SYM- Using LD: Compares the specified double-precision data (64 bits) and creates an ON LD: 694
BOL COMPARI- execution condition if the comparison result is true. Not
SON Symbol, option
Three kinds of symbols can be used with the floating-point symbol com- required
LD, AND. or OR S1 parison instructions: LD (Load), AND, and OR.
+ S2 AND or
=D (335), OR:
<>D (336), Using AND: Required
<D (337), Symbol, option
<=D (338),
>D (339), S1
or >=D (340) S2
Using OR:
Symbol, option
S1
S2
74
2-2-15 Table Data Processing Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SET STACK Defines a stack of the specified length beginning at the specified word Output 703
SSET(630)
SSET and initializes the words in the data region to all zeroes. Required
@SSET TB
630 Internal I/O
N memory address
TB
TB: 1st stack m+(N−1)
TB+1 N words
address
N: Number of TB+2 in stack
words Last word
TB+3
in stack
Stack
pointer
m+(N −1)
PUSH ONTO Writes one word of data to the specified stack. Output 706
STACK PUSH(632) Required
PUSH Internal I/O Internal I/O
@PUSH
TB memory address memory address
632 S
TB TB
TB: 1st stack TB+1 TB+1

TB+2 TB+2
address TB+3 PUSH(632) TB+3
S: Source word
LAST IN FIRST Reads the last word of data written to the specified stack (the newest Output 712
OUT LIFO(634) Required
data in the stack).
LIFO TB
@LIFO Stack Internal I/O Internal I/O
634 D pointer memory address memory address
TB: 1st stack TB TB
address TB+1 Newest TB+1
D: Destination TB+2 data TB+2
word TB+3 TB+3 m −1
Stack
pointer
m −1 m −1
A is left
un-
changed.
The pointer is Last-in first-out

decremented.
FIRST IN FIRST Reads the first word of data written to the specified stack (the oldest Output 709
OUT FIFO(633) data in the stack). Required
FIFO TB Internal I/O Internal I/O
@FIFO memory address memory address
633 D TB TB
Stack TB+1
Oldest TB+1
TB: 1st stack pointer data
address TB+2 TB+2
m −1
D: Destination TB+3 TB+3
word Stack
pointer
m−1
First-in first-out
75

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DIMENSION Defines a record table by declaring the length of each record and the Output 715
RECORD TABLE DIM(631) Required
number of records. Up to 16 record tables can be defined.
DIM
@DIM N Table number (N)
631 LR
NR Record 1
TB
N: Table number
LR: Length of Number of records LR × NR words
each record
NR: Number of
records
TB: 1st table Record NR
word
SET RECORD Writes the location of the specified record (the internal I/O memory Output 718
LOCATION SETR(635) address of the beginning of the record) in the specified Index Required
SETR N Register.
@SETR Internal I/O
635 R Table number (N) memory address
D SETR(635) writes the internal I/O
memory address (m) of the first word of
R record R to Index Register D.
N: Table number
R: Record Record
number number (R)
D: Destination
Index Register
GET RECORD Returns the record number of the record at the internal I/O memory Output 720
NUMBER GETR(636) address contained in the specified Index Register. Required
GETR
@GETR N
636 IR Table number (N) Internal I/O
memory address
D
N: Table number GETR(636) writes the
IR: Index IR Record number
record number of the
Register record that includes
(R)
D: Destination I/O memory address
word (m) to D.
DATA SEARCH Searches for a word of data within a range of words. Output 722
SRCH SRCH(181) Required
@SRCH Internal I/O
C memory address
181
R1
R1 Search
Cd
C Cd
C: 1st control
word
R1: 1st word in
range R1+(C−1)
Cd: Comparison
Match
data
76

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SWAP BYTES Switches the leftmost and rightmost bytes in all of the words in the Output 725
SWAP(637)
SWAP range. Required
@SWAP N Byte position is swapped.
637
R1
N: Number of R1
words
R1: 1st word in N
range
FIND MAXIMUM Finds the maximum value in the range. Output 727
MAX MAX(182) Required
@MAX Internal I/O
C memory address
182
R1 R1
D C words
C: 1st control Max.
word value
R1: 1st word in R1+(W −1)
range
D: Destination
word
FIND MINIMUM Finds the minimum value in the range. Output 731
MIN MIN(183) Required
@MIN Internal I/O
C memory address
183 R1
R1
D C words
C: 1st control
word Min. value
R1: 1st word in R1+(W −1)
range
D: Destination
word
SUM Adds the bytes or words in the range and outputs the result to two Output 735
SUM SUM(184) Required
words.
@SUM
C
184
R1
D R1
C: 1st control
word
R1: 1st word in R1+(W−1)
range )
D: 1st destination
word
FRAME CHECK- Calculates the ASCII FCS value for the specified range. Output 738
SUM FCS(180) Required
FCS C R1
@FCS
180 R1 C units
D
C: 1st control ASCII conversion
word Calculation
R1: 1st word in FCS value
range
D: 1st destination
word
77

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
STACK SIZE Counts the amount of stack data (number of words) in the specified stack. Output 742
READ (CS1-H, SNUM(638) required
CJ1-H, CJ1M, or
CS1D only) TB
SNUM D
@SNUM
638 TB: First stack
address
D: Destination
word
STACK DATA Reads the data from the specified data element in the stack. The offset Output 744
READ (CS1-H, SREAD(639) value indicates the location of the desired data element (how many data required
CJ1-H, CJ1M, or elements before the current pointer position).
CS1D only) TB
SREAD C
@SREAD
639 D
TB: First stack

address
C: Offset value
D: Destination
word
STACK DATA Writes the source data to the specified data element in the stack (overwrit- Output 747
OVERWRITE SWRIT(640) ing the existing data). The offset value indicates the location of the desired required
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, data element (how many data elements before the current pointer posi-
CJ1M, or CS1D TB tion).
only)
C
SWRIT
@SWRIT S
640
TB: First stack
address
C: Offset value
S: Source data
STACK DATA Inserts the source data at the specified location in the stack and shifts the Output 750
INSERT (CS1-H, SINS(641) rest of the data in the stack downward. The offset value indicates the loca- required
CJ1-H, CJ1M, or tion of the insertion point (how many data elements before the current
CS1D only) TB pointer position).
SINS C
@SINS
641 S
TB: First stack

address
C: Offset value
S: Source data
STACK DATA Deletes the data element at the specified location in the stack and shifts Output 753
DELETE (CS1-H, SDEL(642) the rest of the data in the stack upward. The offset value indicates the required
CJ1-H, CJ1M, or location of the deletion point (how many data elements before the current
CS1D only) TB pointer position).
SDEL C
@SDEL
642 D
TB: First stack

address
C: Offset value
D: Destination
word
78
2-2-16 Data Control Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
PID CONTROL Executes PID control according to the specified parameters. Output 757
PID PID(190) Required
Parameters (C to C+8)
190 S
C
D PV input (S) PID control
S: Input word
C: 1st parameter
word
D: Output word Manipulated variable (D)
PID CONTROL Executes PID control according to the specified parameters. The PID Output 769
WITH AUTOTUN- PIDAT(191) constants can be auto-tuned with PIDAT(191). required
ING
PIDAT S
191 C
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
or CJ1M only) D
S: Input word
C: 1st parameter
word
D: Output word
LIMIT CONTROL Controls output data according to whether or not input data is within Output 779
LMT LMT(680) Required
upper and lower limits.
@LMT
S
680
C
D
S: Input word Upper limit
C: 1st limit word C+1
D: Output word
Lower limit
C
DEAD BAND Controls output data according to whether or not input data is within Output 781
CONTROL BAND(681)
the dead band range. Required
BAND S Output
@BAND
681 C
D
Lower limit (C)
S: Input word
C: 1st limit word Input
D: Output word
Upper limit (C+1)
79

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DEAD ZONE Adds the specified bias to input data and outputs the result. Output 784
CONTROL ZONE(682)
Required
ZONE Output
S
@ZONE
682 C
Positive bias (C+1)
D
S: Input word Input
C: 1st limit word
D: Output word
Negative bias (C)
TIME-PROPOR- Inputs the duty ratio or manipulated variable from the specified word, Output 787
TIONAL OUTPUT converts the duty ratio to a time-proportional output based on the spec- Required
TPO (685)
TPO ified parameters, and outputs the result from the specified output.
685 S
(CS/CJ-series C
Unit Ver. 2.0 or
later only) R
S: Input word
C: 1st parameter
word
R: Pulse Output
Bit
SCALING Converts unsigned binary data into unsigned BCD data according to Output 795
SCL SCL(194) the specified linear function. Required
@SCL
S R (unsigned BCD) Scaling is performed according
194
P1 to the linear function defined by
points A and B.
R
Point B P (BCD)
S: Source word Converted
P1: 1st parameter P1 + 1 (BIN) value
Point A
word P1 + 2 (BCD)
R: Result word Converted
P1 + 3 (BIN) value
S (unsigned binary)
80

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SCALING 2 Converts signed binary data into signed BCD data according to the Output 800
SCL2 SCL2(486) Required
specified linear function. An offset can be input in defining the linear
@SCL2 function.
S
486
P1 Positive Offset Negative Offset
R R (signed BCD) R (signed BCD)
S: Source word
P1: 1st parameter
word ∆Y
R: Result word ∆Y
Offset ∆X
∆X
S (signed binary) S (signed

Offset binary)
Offset of 0000
P1 Offset (Signed binary) R (signed BCD)
P1 + 1 ∆Y (Signed binary)
P1 + 2 ∆X (Signed BCD)
∆Y
Offset = 0000 hex
∆X
S (signed
binary)
81

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SCALING 3 Output 804
SCL3(487) Converts signed BCD data into signed binary data according to the
SCL3 specified linear function. An offset can be input in defining the linear Required
@SCL3 function.
S
487
P1 Positive Offset Negative Offset
R R (signed binary) R (signed binary)

S: Source word Max conversion
P1: 1st parameter
Max
word conver-
R: Result word sion
∆Y ∆Y
∆X ∆X
Offset Offset S (signed BCD)
Min.
conver- S (signed BCD)
sion Min. conversion
Offset of 0000
R (signed binary)
Max
conver-
sion
∆Y
∆X
S (signed BCD)
Min. conversion
AVERAGE Calculates the average value of an input word for the specified Output 807
AVG AVG(195) number of cycles. Required
195 S S: Source word
N
R
S: Source word
N: Number of N: Number of cycles
cycles
R: Result word
R+1 Pointer
Average Valid Flag Average

R+2
R+3
N values
R+N+1
82
2-2-17 Subroutine Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SUBROUTINE Calls the subroutine with the specified subroutine number and Output 811
CALL SBS(091) executes that program. Required
SBS N Execution condition ON
@SBS
091 N: Subroutine
number
Main program
Subroutine
program
(SBN(092) to
RET(093))
Program end
MACRO Calls the subroutine with the specified subroutine number and Output 817
MCRO MCRO(099) executes that program using the input parameters in S to S+3 and the Required
@MCRO N output parameters in D to D+3.
099
S MCRO(099)
D
N: Subroutine
number
S: 1st input Execution of sub-
parameter word routine between
SBN(092) and
D: 1st output RET(093).
parameter word MCRO(099)
The subroutine uses A600 to

A603 as inputs and A604 to
A607 as outputs.
SUBROUTINE Indicates the beginning of the subroutine program with the specified Output 821
ENTRY SBN(092) subroutine number. Not required
SBN N
092
N: Subroutine
number or
Subroutine region
SUBROUTINE Indicates the end of a subroutine program. Output 824

RETURN RET(093) Not required
RET
093
83

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
GLOBAL SUB- Calls the subroutine with the specified subroutine number and exe- Output 824
ROUTINE CALL GSBS(750) cutes that program. Not required
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D N
only)
GSBS N: Subroutine
number
750
GLOBAL SUB- Indicates the beginning of the subroutine program with the specified Output 832
ROUTINE ENTRY GSBN(751) subroutine number. Not required
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D N
only)
GSBN N: Subroutine
number
751
GLOBAL SUB- Indicates the end of a subroutine program. Output 835
ROUTINE GRET(752) Not required
RETURN (CS1-H,
CJ1-H, CJ1M, or
CS1D only)
GRET
752
2-2-18 Interrupt Control Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SET INTERRUPT Sets up interrupt processing for I/O interrupts or scheduled Output 839
MASK MSKS(690) Required
(Not supported interrupts. Both I/O interrupt tasks and scheduled interrupt tasks
by CS1D CPU N are masked (disabled) when the PC is first turned on.
Units for Duplex- MSKS(690) can be used to unmask or mask I/O interrupts and
CPU Systems.) C set the time intervals for scheduled interrupts.
MSKS N: Interrupt Interrupt Input Unit 0 to 3
@MSKS
identifier
690
C: Control data I/O
interrupt
Mask (1) or unmask (0)
interrupt inputs 0 to 7.
Time interval
Scheduled
interrupt Set scheduled
interrupt time interval.
READ Reads the current interrupt processing settings that were set with Output 846
INTERRUPT MSKR(692) MSKS(690). Required
MASK
(Not supported N
by CS1D CPU D
Units for Duplex-
CPU Systems.) N: Interrupt
MSKR identifier
@MSKR D: Destination
692 word
84

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
CLEAR Output 851
CLI(691) Clears or retains recorded interrupt inputs for I/O interrupts
INTERRUPT Required
(Not supported or sets the time to the first scheduled interrupt for scheduled
by CS1D CPU N interrupts.
Units for Duplex-
CPU Systems.) C N = 0 to 3
CLI N: Interrupt
@CLI identifier Interrupt Interrupt
input n input n
691 C: Control data
Internal Internal
status status
Recorded interrupt cleared Recorded interrupt retained

N = 4 to 5
MSKS(690)
Execution of scheduled
interrupt task.
Time to first
scheduled interrupt
DISABLE INTER- Disables execution of all interrupt tasks except the power OFF Output 855
RUPTS DI(693) interrupt. Required
DI
@DI
693
Disables execution of all

interrupt tasks (except
the power OFF interrupt).
ENABLE INTER- Enables execution of all interrupt tasks that were disabled with Output 858
RUPTS EI(694) DI(693). Not required
EI
694
Disables execution of all

interrupt tasks (except the
power OFF interrupt).
Enables execution of all

disabled interrupt tasks.
85

(CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only)
Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
MODE CONTROL INI(880) is used to start and stop target value comparison, to Output 864
INI
INI change the present value (PV) of a high-speed counter, to Required
@INI P change the PV of an interrupt input (counter mode), to change
880
C
the PV of a pulse output, or to stop pulse output.
NV
P: Port specifier
C: Control data
NV: 1st word with
new PV
HIGH-SPEED PRV(881) is used to read the present value (PV) of a high- Output 868
COUNTER PV PRV
speed counter, pulse output, or interrupt input (counter mode). Required
READ P
PRV
@PRV C
881 D
P: Port specifier
C: Control data
D: 1st destination
word
COUNTER FRE- Reads the pulse frequency input from a high-speed counter and either Output 874
QUENCY CON- PRV2 converts the frequency to a rotational speed (number of revolutions) or Required
VERT C1 converts the counter PV to the total number of revolutions. The result is
PRV2 output to the destination words as 8-digit hexadecimal. Pulses can be
883 C2 input from high-speed counter 0 only.
(CJ1M CPU Unit D
Ver. 2.0 or later
only) C1: Control data
C2: Pulses/revo-
lution
D: 1st destination
word
COMPARISON CTBL(882) is used to perform target value or range comparisons for Output 878
TABLE LOAD CTBL the present value (PV) of a high-speed counter. Required
CTBL P
@CTBL
C
882
TB
P: Port specifier
C: Control data
TB: 1st compari-
son table word
SPEED OUTPUT SPED(885) is used to specify the frequency and perform pulse output Output 882
SPED without acceleration or deceleration.
SPED Required
@SPED P
885
M
F
P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
F: 1st pulse fre-
quency word
86

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SET PULSES PULS(886) is used to set the number of pulses for pulse output. Output 887
PULS
PULS Required
@PULS P
886
T
N
P: Port specifier
T: Pulse type
N: Number of
pulses
PULSE OUTPUT PLS2(887) is used to set the pulse frequency and acceleration/deceler- Output 890
PLS2 ation rates, and to perform pulse output with acceleration/deceleration Required
PLS2
@PLS2 P (with different acceleration/deceleration rates). Only positioning is pos-
sible.
887
M
S
F
P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
S: 1st word of set-
tings table
F: 1st word of
starting frequency
ACCELERATION ACC(888) is used to set the pulse frequency and acceleration/deceler- Output 896
CONTROL ACC ation rates, and to perform pulse output with acceleration/deceleration Required
ACC P (with the same acceleration/deceleration rate). Both positioning and
@ACC speed control are possible.
M
888
S
P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
S: 1st word of set-
tings table
ORIGIN SEARCH ORG(889) is used to perform origin searches and returns. Output 903
ORG
ORG Required
@ORG P
889
C
P: Port specifier
C: Control data
PULSE WITH PWM(891) is used to output pulses with a variable duty factor. Output 906
VARIABLE DUTY PWM
Required
FACTOR P
PWM
@ F
891 D
P: Port specifier
F: Frequency
D: Duty factor
87
2-2-20 Step Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
STEP DEFINE STEP(008) functions in following 2 ways, depending on its position and Output 909
STEP STEP(008) whether or not a control bit has been specified. Required
008 B (1)Starts a specific step.
(2)Ends the step programming area (i.e., step execution).
B: Bit
STEP START SNXT(009) is used in the following three ways: Output 909
SNXT SNXT(009) (1)To start step programming execution. Required
009 B (2)To proceed to the next step control bit.
(3)To end step programming execution.
B: Bit
2-2-21 Basic I/O Unit Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
I/O REFRESH Refreshes the specified I/O words. Output 926
IORF IORF(097) Required
@IORF I/O bit area or I/O Unit or
St
097 Special I/O Unit bit area Special I/O Unit
E
St: Starting word St
E: End word I/O refreshing
SPECIAL I/O Performs I/O refreshing immediately for the specified Special I/O Unit's Output 929
UNIT I/O FIORF(225) allocated CIO Area and DM Area words.t with the specified unit num- Required
REFRESH ber.
(CJ1-H-R only) N
FIORF N: Unit number
@FIORF
225
CPU BUS UNIT Immediately refreshes the I/O in the CPU Bus Unit with the specified Output 932
I/O REFRESH DLNK(226) unit number. required
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D N
only)
DLNK N: Unit number
@DLNK
226
88

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
7-SEGMENT Converts the hexadecimal contents of the designated digit(s) into Output 937
DECODER SDEC(078) 8-bit, 7-segment display code and places it into the upper or lower Required
SDEC 8-bits of the specified destination words.
@SDEC
S
078 Di
D Di
Number of digits
S: Source word First digit to convert
Di: Digit
designator
D: 1st destination
word
Rightmost 8 bits (0)
7-segment
DIGITAL SWITCH Reads the value set on an external digital switch (or thumbwheel Output 940
INPUT DSW (210) switch) connected to an Input Unit or Output Unit and stores the 4-digit Required
DSW or 8-digit BCD data in the specified words.
I
210
(CS/CJ-series O
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later only) D
C1
C2
I: Data input word
(D0 to D3)
O: Output word
D: 1st result
word
C1: Number of
digits
C2: System word
TEN KEY INPUT Reads numeric data from a ten-key keypad connected to an Input Unit Output 945
TKY TKY (211) and stores up to 8 digits of BCD data in the specified words. Required
211 I
(CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 D1
or later only)
D2
I: Data input
word
D1: 1st register
word
D2: Key input
word
89

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
HEXADECIMAL Reads numeric data from a hexadecimal keypad connected to an Input Output 948
KEY INPUT HKY (212) Unit and Output Unit and stores up to 8 digits of hexadecimal data in Required
HKY the specified words.
I
212
(CS/CJ-series O
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later only) D
C
I: Data input
word
O: Output word
D: 1st register
word
C: System word
MATRIX INPUT Inputs up to 64 signals from an 8 × 8 matrix connected to an Input Unit Output 953
MTR MTR (213) and Output Unit (using 8 input points and 8 output points) and stores Required
that 64-bit data in the 4 destination words.
213 I
(CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 O
or later only)
D
C
I: Data input
word
O: Output word
D: 1st
destination
word
C: System word
7-SEGMENT DIS- Converts the source data (either 4-digit or 8-digit BCD) to 7-segment Output 957
PLAY OUTPUT 7SEG (214) display data, and outputs that data to the specified output word. Required
7SEG
S
214
(CS/CJ-series O
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later only) C
D
S: 1st source
word
O: Output word
C: Control data
D: System word
90

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
INTELLIGENT I/O Reads the contents of the memory area for the Special I/O Unit Output 962
READ IORD(222) Required
or CPU Bus Unit (see note).
IORD
@IORD C S
222 S S+1
D
Unit number of Special I/O Unit
C: Control data
S: Transfer
source and
number of words Desig-
D: Transfer nated
destination and number
of words
number of words read.
Note: CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later (including CS1-H, CJ1-H,
and CJ1M CPU Units from lot number 030418 or later) can read
from CPU Bus Units.
INTELLIGENT I/O Outputs the contents of the CPU Unit's I/O memory area to the Output 967
WRITE IOWR(223) Required
Special I/O Unit or the CPU Bus Unit (see note).
IOWR C
@IOWR D
223 S D+1
D
C: Control data
S: Transfer
source and
number of words
D: Transfer
destination and
number of words Desig-
nated
number of
words writ-
ten.
Note: CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later (including CS1-H, CJ1-H,
and CJ1M CPU Units from lot number 030418 or later) can write
to CPU Bus Units.
91
2-2-22 Serial Communications Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
PROTOCOL Calls and executes a communications sequence registered in a Serial Output 974
MACRO PMCR(260) Communications Board (CS Series only) or Serial Communications Required
PMCR Unit.
@PMCR C1 CPU Unit Serial Communications Unit
260 C2 Port
S
S
R to
C1: Control word 1
C2: Control word 2
S: 1st send word
R: 1st receive word
R
External
to device
TRANSMIT Outputs the specified number of bytes of data from the RS-232C port Output 983
TXD TXD(236) built into the CPU Unit or the serial port of a Serial Communications Required
@TXD Board (version 1.2 or later).
S
236
C
N
S: 1st source
word
C: Control word
N: Number of
bytes
0000 to 0100 hex
(0 to 256 decimal)
RECEIVE Reads the specified number of bytes of data from the RS-232C port Output 993
RXD RXD(235) built into the CPU Unit or the serial port of a Serial Communications Required
@RXD Board (version 1.2 or later).
D
235
C
N
D: 1st destination
word
C: Control word
N: Number of
bytes to store
0000 to 0100 hex
(0 to 256 decimal)
TRANSMIT VIA Outputs the specified number of bytes of data from the serial port of a Output 1005
SERIAL COMMU- TXDU(256) Serial Communications Unit (version 1.2 or later). The data is output in Required
NICATIONS UNIT no-protocol mode with the start code and end code (if any) specified in
TXDU S the allocated DM Setup Area.
@TXDU C
256
N
S: 1st source word
C: 1st control
word
N: Number of
bytes
0000 to 0256 BCD
92

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
RECEIVE VIA Reads the specified number of bytes of data from the serial port of a Output 1013
SERIAL COMMU- RXDU(255) Serial Communications Unit (version 1.2 or later). The data is read in Required
NICATIONS UNIT no-protocol mode with the start code and end code (if any) specified in
RXDU
D the allocated DM Setup Area.
@RXDU C
255
N
D: 1st destination
word
C: 1st control
word
N: Number of
bytes to store
0000 to 0256 BCD
CHANGE SERIAL Changes the communications parameters of a serial port on the CPU Output 1021
PORT SETUP STUP(237) Unit, Serial Communications Unit (CPU Bus Unit), or Serial Communi- Required
STUP cations Board. STUP(237) thus enables the protocol mode to be
@STUP C changed during PLC operation.
237 S
C: Control word
(port)
S: First source
word
2-2-23 Network Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
NETWORK SEND Transmits data to a node in the network. Output 1044
SEND SEND(090) Required
@SEND S Local node Destination node
090 15 0 15 0
D
S D
C n: No.
of send n
S: 1st source words
word
D: 1st destination
word
C: 1st control
word
NETWORK Requests data to be transmitted from a node in the network and Output 1050
RECEIVE RECV(098) receives the data. Required
RECV S
@RECV
D Local node Source node
098
15 0 15 0
C D S
S: 1st source m n
word
D: 1st destination
word
C: 1st control
word
93

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DELIVER Sends FINS commands and receives the response. Output 1056
COMMAND CMND(490) Required
CMND S Local node Destination node
@CMND
15 0
490 D
S
C Com- Command
mand
S: 1st command data (n Interpret
word (S−1)
bytes)
D: 1st response + n
word 2
C: 1st control
word
15 0
D Response
Re-
sponse Execute
(D−1) data (m
+ m bytes)
2
EXPLICIT MES- Sends an explicit message with any Service Code. Output 1066
SAGE SEND EXPLT (720) Required
EXPLT S
720
(CS/CJ-series D
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later only)
C
S: 1st word of
send
message
D: 1st word of
received
message
C: 1st control
word
EXPLICIT GET Reads status information with an explicit message (Get Attribute Sin- Output 1074
ATTRIBUTE EGATR (721) gle, Service Code: 0E hex). Required
EGATR S
721
(CS/CJ-series D
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later only) C
S: 1st word of
send
message
D: 1st word of
received
message
C: 1st control
word
message
EXPLICIT SET Writes status information with an explicit message Output 1081
ATTRIBUTE ESATR (722) (Set Attribute Single, Service Code: 0E hex) Required
ESATR
S
722
(CS/CJ-series C
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later only) S: First word of
send message
C: First control
word
94

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
EXPLICIT WORD Reads data to the local CPU Unit from a remote CPU Unit in the net- Output 1087
READ ECHRD (723)
work. (The remote CPU Unit must support explicit messages.) Required
ECHRD
723 S
(CS/CJ-series D
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later only) C
S: 1st source
word in remote
CPU Unit
D: 1st destination
word in local
CPU Unit
C: 1st control
word
EXPLICIT WORD Writes data from the local CPU Unit to a remote CPU Unit in the net- Output 1091
WRITE work. (The remote CPU Unit must support explicit messages.) Required
ECHWR ECHWR (724)
724
S
(CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 D
or later only)
C
S: 1st source
word in local
CPU Unit
D: 1st destination
word in remote
CPU Unit
C: 1st control
word
95
2-2-24 File Memory Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
READ DATA FILE Reads the specified data or amount of data from the specified data file Output 1099
FREAD FREAD(700) in file memory to the specified data area in the CPU Unit. Required
@FREAD
C
700 Starting read ad-
S1 dress specified in File specified
S2 S1+2 and S1+3 in S2 CPU Unit
D
C: Control word Number of
S1: 1st source words specified
word in S1 and S1+1
S2: Filename
D: 1st destination
word Memory Card or Number
EM file memory of words
written to
(Specified by the D and
4th digit of C.) D+1.
File specified
in S2 CPU Unit
Number of
words
Memory Card or EM file memory

(Specified by the 4th digit of C.)
96

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
WRITE DATA Overwrites or appends data in the specified data file in file memory Output 1106
FILE FWRIT(701) Required
with the specified data from the data area in the CPU Unit. If the
FWRIT C specified file doesn't exist, a new file is created with that filename.
@FWRIT
701 D1 CPU Unit Starting word File specified in D2
specified in
Starting D1+2 and
D2 address D1+3
S specified
Number of words
in S specified in D1
C: Control word and D1+1
D1: 1st
destination word Overwrite
D2: Filename
S: 1st source Memory Card or EM file memory
word (Specified by the 4th digit of C.)
CPU Unit
File specified in D2
Starting End of
file Existing
address data
specified
Number of words
and D1+1
Append
Beginning
of file File speci-
CPU Unit New file created
fied in D2
Starting
address
specified Number of words
and D1+1

WRITE TEXT Reads ASCII data from I/O memory and stores that data in the Memory Output 1113
FILE TWRIT Card as a text file (writing a new file or appending a file). The data is Required
TWRIT stored in the TXT format.
C
@TWRIT
704 S1
(CS/CJ-series S2
CPU Units with
unit version 4.0 or S3
later only)
S4
C: Control word
S1: Number of
bytes to write
S2: Directory and
file name
S3: Write data
S4: Delimiter
97
2-2-25 Display Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DISPLAY Reads the specified sixteen words of extended ASCII and displays the Output 1119
MESSAGE MSG(046) message on a Peripheral Device such as a Programming Console. Required
MSG N
@MSG
046 M
N: Message
number
M: 1st message
word
2-2-26 Clock Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
CALENDAR ADD Adds time to the calendar data in the specified words. Output 1122
CADD CADD(730) Required
@CADD C
730 C Minutes Seconds
T C+1 Day Hour
R C+2 Year Month
C: 1st calendar
word
T: 1st time word
T Minutes Seconds
R: 1st result word
T+1 Hours
R Minutes Seconds
R+1 Day Hour
R+2 Year Month
CALENDAR Subtracts time from the calendar data in the specified words. Output 1126
SUBTRACT CSUB(731) Required
CSUB C
@CSUB C Minutes Seconds
731 T C+1 Day Hour
R C+2 Year Month
−
C: 1st calendar
word
T: 1st time word T
R: 1st result word Minutes Seconds
T+1 Hours
R Minutes Seconds
R+1 Day Hour
R+2 Year Month
98

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
HOURS TO Converts time data in hours/minutes/seconds format to an equivalent Output 1129
SECONDS SEC(065) time in seconds only. Required
SEC S
@SEC
065 D
Minutes Seconds
S: 1st source Hours
word
D: 1st destination
word
Seconds
SECONDS TO Output 1131

HOURS HMS(066) Converts seconds data to an equivalent time in hours/minutes/
seconds format. Required
HMS S
@HMS
066 D
S: 1st source Seconds
word
D: 1st destination
word
Minutes Seconds
Hours
CLOCK Changes the internal clock setting to the setting in the specified Output 1134
ADJUSTMENT DATE(735) source words. Required
DATE S
@DATE CPU Unit
735 S: 1st source
word
Internal clock
Minutes Seconds
New
setting Day Hour
Year Month
00 Day of week
2-2-27 Debugging Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
TRACE When TRSM(045) is executed, the status of a preselected bit or word Output 1136
MEMORY TRSM(045) is sampled and stored in Trace Memory. TRSM(045) can be used any- Not required
SAMPLING where in the program, any number of times.
TRSM
045
99
2-2-28 Failure Diagnosis Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
FAILURE ALARM Output 1140
FAL(006) Generates or clears user-defined non-fatal errors. Non-fatal errors
FAL do not stop PC operation. Required
@FAL N Also generates non-fatal errors with the system.
006 FAL Error Flag ON
S Execution of Corresponding Executed FAL
N: FAL number FAL(006) Number Flag ON
S: 1st message generates a Error code written to A400
non-fatal error Error code and time written to Error
word or error Log Area
code to gener- with FAL
ate number N.
ERR Indicator flashes
Message
displayed on
Programming
Console
SEVERE Generates user-defined fatal errors. Fatal errors stop PC operation. Output 1148
FAILURE ALARM FALS(007) Required
Also generates fatal errors with the system.
FALS N FALS Error Flag ON
007 Execution of
S Error code written to A400
FALS(007) Error code and time/date written to
generates a Error Log Area
N: FALS number
fatal error
S: 1st message with FALS
word or error number N. ERR Indicator lit
code to gener-
ate
Message displayed
on Programming
Console
FAILURE POINT Diagnoses a failure in an instruction block by monitoring the time Output 1156
DETECTION FPD(269) Required
between execution of FPD(269) and execution of a diagnostic output
FPD C and finding which input is preventing an output from being turned ON.
269
T Time monitoring function:
Starts timing when execution condition A goes
R ON. Generates a non-fatal error if output B
isn't turned ON within the monitoring time.
C: Control word
T: Monitoring time
R: 1st register Execution
word condition A
T Error-pro-
cessing
R block (op-
tional)
Next instruction block
Logic diagnosis block*
Logic diagnosis
execution condition C
Diagnostic output B
Logic diagnosis function

Determines which input in C
prevents output B from going ON.
100
2-2-29 Other Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
SET CARRY Sets the Carry Flag (CY). Output 1166
STC STC(040) Required
@STC
040
CLEAR CARRY Turns OFF the Carry Flag (CY). Output 1166
CLC CLC(041) Required
@CLC
041
SELECT EM Changes the current EM bank. Output 1167
BANK EMBC(281) Required
EMBC
@EMBC N
281 N: EM bank
number
EXTEND Extends the maximum cycle time, but only for the cycle in which this Output 1169
MAXIMUM WDT(094) instruction is executed. Required
CYCLE TIME
WDT
T
@WDT
T: Timer setting
094
SAVE CONDI- Saves the status of the condition flags. Output 1171
TION FLAGS CCS(282) Required
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D
only)
CCS
@CCS
282
LOAD CONDI- Reads the status of the condition flags that was saved. Output 1173
TION FLAGS CCL(283) Required
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D
only)
CCL
@CCL
283
CONVERT Converts a CV-series PLC memory address to its equivalent CS/CJ- Output 1174
ADDRESS FROM FRMCV(284) series PLC memory address. Required
CV (CS1-H, CJ1-
H, CJ1M, or S
CS1D only)
D
FRMCV
@FRMCV S: Word contain-
284 ing CV-series
memory address
D: Destination
Index Register
CONVERT Converts a CS/CJ-series PLC memory address to its equivalent CV- Output 1179
ADDRESS TO CV TOCV(285) series PLC memory address. Required
(CS1-H, CJ1-H,
CJ1M, or CS1D S
only) D
TOCV
@TOCV
S: Index Register
285 containing CS-
series memory
address
D: Destination
word
101

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
DISABLE Disables peripheral servicing during program execution in one of the Output 1183
PERIPHERAL IOSP(287) Parallel Processing Modes or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode. Required
SERVICING
(CS1D CPU Units
for Single-CPU
Systems, CS1-H,
CJ1-H, or CJ1M
only)
IOSP
@IOSP
287
ENABLE Enables peripheral servicing that was disabled by IOSP(287) for pro- Output 1185
PERIPHERAL IORS(288) gram execution in one of the Parallel Processing Modes or Peripheral Not required
SERVICING Servicing Priority Mode.
(CS1D CPU Unit
for Single-CPU
Systems, CS1-H,
CJ1-H, or CJ1M
only)
IORS
288
2-2-30 Block Programming Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
BLOCK Define a block programming area. For every BPRG(096) there must Output 1191
PROGRAM BPRG(096) Required
be a corresponding BEND(801).
BEGIN
BPRG N
096 N: Block program
number
Block program
Executed when the execu-

tion condition is ON.
BLOCK Define a block programming area. For every BPRG(096) there must be Block program 1191
PROGRAM END a corresponding BEND(801). Required
BEND
801
BLOCK BPPS Pause and restart the specified block program from another block Block program 1193
PROGRAM (811) program. Required
PAUSE
BPPS N
811 N: Block program
number
to
to BPPS(811) executed
for block program n.
to Block program n. Once

paused this block program
will not be executed even
if bit "a" is ON.
102

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
BLOCK BPRS Pause and restart the specified block program from another block Block program 1193
PROGRAM (812) program. Required
RESTART
BPRS N
812
N: Block program
number
to
to BPRS(812) executed
for block program n.
Block program n. This block

to
program will now be executed
as long as bit "a" is ON.
CONDITIONAL EXIT(806) EXIT(806) without an operand bit exits the program if the execution Block program 1199
BLOCK EXIT condition is ON. Required
EXIT B: Bit operand
Execution Execution
806 condition condition
OFF ON
"A" executed. "A" executed.
Execution condition
"B" executed.
Block ended.
CONDITIONAL EXIT(806)B EXIT(806) without an operand bit exits the program if the execution Block program 1199
BLOCK EXIT condition is ON. Required
EXIT B: Bit operand
Operand bit Operand bit
806 OFF ON
(ON for (OFF for EXIT
EXIT NOT) NOT)
"B" executed.
Block ended.
CONDITIONAL EXIT NOT(806) EXIT(806) without an operand bit exits the program if the execution Block program 1199
BLOCK EXIT B condition is OFF. Required
NOT
EXIT NOT B: Bit operand
806
103

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
CONDITIONAL IF (802) If the execution condition is ON, the instructions between IF(802) and Block program 1196
BLOCK ELSE(803) will be executed and if the execution condition is OFF, the Required
BRANCHING instructions between ELSE(803) and IEND(804) will be executed.
IF
802 Execution
Execution
condition condition ON?
"A" executed (be- "B" executed

tween IF and ELSE). (after ELSE).
CONDITIONAL IF (802) Block program 1196

BLOCK If the operand bit is ON, the instructions between IF(802) and
B ELSE(803) will be executed. If the operand bit is OFF, the instructions Required
BRANCHING
between ELSE(803) and IEND(804) will be executed.
IF
B: Bit operand
802
Operand bit
ON?
IF R (IF NOT R)
"A" executed "B" executed

(between IF and
ELSE). (after ELSE).
CONDITIONAL IF (802) NOT The instructions between IF(802) and ELSE(803) will be executed and Block program 1196
BLOCK B if the operand bit is ON, the instructions be ELSE(803) and IEND(804) Required
BRANCHING will be executed is the operand bit is OFF.
(NOT)
IF NOT B: Bit operand
802
CONDITIONAL --- If the ELSE(803) instruction is omitted and the operand bit is ON, the Block program 1196
BLOCK instructions between IF(802) and IEND(804) will be executed Required
BRANCHING
(ELSE)
ELSE
803
CONDITIONAL --- If the operand bit is OFF, only the instructions after IEND(804) will be Block program 1196
BLOCK executed. Required
BRANCHING
END
IEND
804
104

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
ONE CYCLE AND WAIT(805) If the execution condition is ON for WAIT(805), the rest of the Block program 1202
WAIT instruction in the block program will be skipped. Required
WAIT Execution Execution Execution
805 condition condition condition
OFF OFF ON
"A"
executed.
Execution "B" executed.

condition
"C" "C" "C" executed.

executed. executed.
Wait
ONE CYCLE AND WAIT(805) If the operand bit is OFF (ON for WAIT NOT(805)), the rest of the Block program 1202
WAIT B instructions in the block program will be skipped. In the next cycle, Required
WAIT none of the block program will be executed except for the execution
805 B: Bit operand condition for WAIT(805) or WAIT(805) NOT. When the execution condi-
tion goes ON (OFF for WAIT(805) NOT), the instruction from
WAIT(805) or WAIT(805) NOT to the end of the program will be exe-
cuted.
ONE CYCLE AND WAIT(805) NOT If the operand bit is OFF (ON for WAIT NOT(805)), the rest of the Block program 1202
WAIT (NOT) B instructions in the block program will be skipped. In the next cycle, Required
WAIT NOT none of the block program will be executed except for the execution
condition for WAIT(805) or WAIT(805) NOT. When the execution condi-
805 B: Bit operand
tion goes ON (OFF for WAIT(805) NOT), the instruction from
WAIT(805) or WAIT(805) NOT to the end of the program will be exe-
cuted.
HUNDRED-MS TIMW(813) Delays execution of the block program until the specified time has Block program 1206
TIMER WAIT N elapsed. Execution continues from the next instruction after Required
TIMW SV TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816) when the timer times out.
813 SV: 0 to 999.9 s for BCD and
(BCD)
N: Timer number 0 to 6,553.5 s for binary
SV: Set value
TIMWX
816 TIMWX(816) "A"
(Binary) N executed.
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, SV
CJ1M, or CS1D
only)
N: Timer number SV
SV: Set value preset. Time elapsed.
"B" executed.
BEND
"C" executed.
C
105

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
COUNTER WAIT CNTW(814) Delays execution of the rest of the block program until the specified count Block program 1209
CNTW N has been achieved. Execution will be continued from the next instruction Required
814 SV after CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818) when the counter counts out.
(BCD) SV: 0 to 9,999 times for BCD and
0 to 65,535 times for binary
CNTWX N: Counter
818 number
(Binary) SV: Set value
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, "A"
CJ1M, or CS1D I: Count input executed.
only) CNTWX(818)
N
SV SV
preset. Time elapsed.
N: Counter "B" executed.

number
SV: Set value
I: Count input "C" executed.
"C" "C"
C executed. executed.
TEN-MS TIMER TMHW(815) Delays execution of the rest of the block program until the specified Block program 1212
WAIT N time has elapsed. Execution will be continued from the next Required
TMHW SV instruction after TMHW(815)/TMHWX(818) when the timer times out.
815 SV: 0 to 99.99 s for BCD
(BCD)
N: Timer number and 0 to 655.35 s for binary
SV: Set value
TMHWX
817 TMHWX(817) "A"
(Binary) N executed.
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, SV
CJ1M, or CS1D
only)
N: Timer number SV
SV: Set value preset. Time elapsed.
"B" executed.
BEND
"C" executed.
C
106

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
LOOP --- Block program 1215
LOOP(809) designates the beginning of the loop program.
LOOP Required
809
Execution Execution Execution Execution
condition condition condition condition
ON OFF OFF OFF
Execution condition
Loop repeated
LEND LEND (810) LEND(810) or LEND(810) NOT specifies the end of the loop. When Block program 1215
LEND LEND(810) or LEND(810) NOT is reached, program execution will loop Required
back to the next previous LOOP(809) until the operand bit for
810 LEND(810) or LEND(810) NOT turns ON or OFF (respectively) or until
the execution condition for LEND(810) turns ON.
LEND LEND (810) If the operand bit is OFF for LEND(810) (or ON for LEND(810) NOT), Block program 1215
LEND B execution of the loop is repeated starting with the next instruction after Required
810 LOOP(809). If the operand bit is ON for LEND(810) (or OFF for
B: Bit operand LEND(810) NOT), the loop is ended and execution continues to the
next instruction after LEND(810) or LEND(810) NOT.
Operand Operand Operand Operand
bit ON bit OFF bit OFF bit OFF
Loop repeated
Note The status of the operand bit would be

reversed for LEND(810) NOT.
LEND NOT LEND(810) NOT LEND(810) or LEND(810) NOT specifies the end of the loop. When Block program 1215
LEND NOT LEND(810) or LEND(810) NOT is reached, program execution will loop Required
back to the next previous LOOP(809) until the operand bit for
810 B: Bit operand LEND(810) or LEND(810) NOT turns ON or OFF (respectively) or until
the execution condition for LEND(810) turns ON.
107
2-2-31 Text String Processing Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
MOV STRING Output 1221
MOV$(664) Transfers a text string.
MOV$ Required
@MOV$ S
664
D
S: 1st source
word
D: 1st destination
word
CONCATENATE Links one text string to another text string. Output 1223
STRING +$(656) Required
+$ → → → →
@+$ S1 +
656 S2
D
S1: Text string 1
S2: Text string 2
D: First
destination word
GET STRING Fetches a designated number of characters from the left (beginning) Output 1226
LEFT LEFT$(652) Required
of a text string.
LEFT$ S1
@LEFT$
652 S2
D
S1: Text string
first word
S2: Number of
characters
D: First
destination word
GET STRING Reads a designated number of characters from the right (end) of a Output 1228
RIGHT RGHT$(653) Required
text string.
RGHT$
@RGHT$ S1
00
653 S2
D
S1: Text string
first word
S2: Number of
characters
D: First
destination word
GET STRING Reads a designated number of characters from any position in the Output 1230
MIDDLE MID$(654) middle of a text string. Required
MID$
@MID$ S1
654 S2
→ →
S3
D
S1: Text string
first word
S2: Number of
characters
S3: Beginning
position
D: First
destination word
108

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
FIND IN STRING Finds a designated text string from within a text string. Output 1233
FIND FIND$(660) Required
@FIND$ Found data
S1 → → →
660
S2
D
S1: Source text
string first word
S2: Found text
string first word
D: First
destination word
STRING LENGTH Calculates the length of a text string. Output 1235
LEN$ LEN$(650) Required
@LEN$ S → 1 2
650 3 4
D 5
S: Text string first

word
D: 1st destination
word
REPLACE IN Output 1237
STRING RPLC$(654)
Replaces a text string with a designated text string from a designated
position. Required
RPLC$
@RPLC$ S1
661 S2
→ →
S3
S4
D
S1: Text string
first word
S2: Replacement
text string first
word
S3: Number of
characters
S4: Beginning
position
D: First
destination word
DELETE STRING Deletes a designated text string from the middle of a text string. Output 1240
DEL$ DEL$(658) Required
@DEL$ Number of characters to be
S1 deleted (designated by S2).
658
→ →
S2
S3
G
D
S1: Text string
first word
S2: Number of
characters
S3: Beginning
position
D: First
destination word
109

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
EXCHANGE Replaces a designated text string with another designated text string. Output 1242
STRING XCHG$(665)
Required
XCHG$ Ex1 Ex1
@XCHG$ Ex1
665 Ex2
Ex1: 1st Ex2 Ex2
exchange word 1
Ex2: 1st
exchange word 2
CLEAR STRING Clears an entire text string with NUL (00 hex). Output 1245
CLR$ CLR$(666) Required
@CLR$ S S→ A B S→
666 C D
NUL NUL
S: Text string first
word
INSERT INTO Deletes a designated text string from the middle of a text string. Output 1246
STRING INS$(657) Required
INS$ →
@INS$ S1
NUL
657 S2
→ →
S3
Inserted
D characters
S1: Base text
string first word
S2: Inserted text
string first word
S3: Beginning
position
D: First
destination word
String Compari- Sting comparison instructions (=$, <>$, <$, <=$, >$, >=$) compare two 1250
son LD text strings from the beginning, in terms of value of the ASCII codes. If LD: Not
LD, AND, OR + Symbol the result of the comparison is true, an ON execution condition is cre- required
=$, <>$, <$, <=$, ated for a LOAD, AND, or OR. AND, OR:
>$, >=$ S1 Required
670 (=$) S2
671 (<>$)
672 (<$)
673 (<=$) AND
674 (>$) Symbol
675 (>=$)
S1
S2
OR
Symbol
S1
S2
S1: Text string 1
S2: Text string 2
110
2-2-32 Task Control Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
TASK ON Output 1255
TKON(820) Makes the specified task executable.
TKON Required
@TKON N The specified task's task number The specified task's task number
820 is higher than the local task's is lower than the local task's task
N: Task number task number (m<n). number (m>n).
Task m Task m
Be-
comes
Becomes execut-
executable in
able in that the next
cycle. cycle.
Task n Task n
TASK OFF Puts the specified task into standby status. Output 1258
TKOF TKOF(821) Required
@TKOF The specified task's task num- The specified task's task num-
N ber is higher than the local ber is lower than the local
821
N: Task number task's task number (m<n). task's task number (m>n).
Task m Task m
In stand- In stand-
by status by status
that the next
cycle. cycle.
Task n Task n
111
2-2-33 Model Conversion Instructions (CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only)
Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
BLOCK Output 1263
TRANSFER Transfers the specified number of consecutive words.
XFERC(565) Required
XFERC
@XFERC N
565 S N words
to to
D S+(N−1) D+(N−1)
N: Number of
words
S: 1st source
word
D: 1st destination
word
SINGLE WORD Output 1266
DISTRIBUTE DISTC(566) Transfers the source word to a destination word calculated by adding
an offset value to the base address. Can also write to a stack (Stack Required
DISTC S Push Operation).
@DISTC
566 Bs S Bs Of
Of
S: Source word
Bs: Destination
base address
Of: Offset
Bs+n
DATA COLLECT Output 1269
COLLC(567) Transfers the source word (calculated by adding an offset value to the
COLLC base address) to the destination word. Can also read data from a Required
@COLLC Bs stack in FIFO or LIFO order (Stack Read Operation).
567
Of Bs Of
D
Bs: Source base

address Bs+n
Of: Offset
D: Destination
word
MOVE BIT Transfers the specified bit. Output 1273

MOVBC MOVBC(568) Required
@MOVBC S
568
C
D
S: Source word or
data
C: Control word
D: Destination
word
BIT COUNTER Output 1275

BCNTC(621) Counts the total number of ON bits in the specified word(s).
BCNTC Required
@BCNTC N
621 N words
S Counts the number
to of ON bits.
R
S+(N −1) BCD result
N: Number of
words (BCD)
S: 1st source R
word
R: Result word
112
2-2-34 Special Function Block Instructions

Mnemonic Execution
Code condition
GET VARIABLE Outputs the FINS command variable type (data area) code and word Output 1277
ID GETID(286) address for the specified variable or address. This instruction is gener- Required
GETID ally used to get the assigned address of a variable in a function block.
@GETID
S
286 D1
D2
S: Variable or
address
D1: ID code
D2: Destination
word
113
Alphabetical List of Instructions by Mnemonic Section 2-3
2-3 Alphabetical List of Instructions by Mnemonic

A
Mnemonic Instruction Function code Upward Downward Immediate Page
Differentiation Differentiation Refreshing
Specification
ACC ACCELERATION CON- 888 @ACC --- --- 896
TROL
ACOS ARC COSINE 464 @ACOS --- --- 625
ACOSD DOUBLE ARC 855 @ACOSD --- --- 682
COSINE
AND AND --- @AND %AND !AND 165
AND < AND LESS THAN 310 --- --- --- 291
AND <$ AND STRING LESS 672 --- --- --- 1250
THAN
AND <> AND NOT EQUAL 305 --- --- --- 291
AND <>$ AND STRING NOT 671 --- --- --- 1250
EQUAL
AND <>D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- 336 --- --- --- 694
ING NOT EQUAL
AND <> DT AND TIME NOT 342 --- --- --- 297
EQUAL
AND <>F AND FLOATING NOT 330 --- --- --- 636
EQUAL
AND <>L AND DOUBLE NOT 306 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
AND <>S AND SIGNED NOT 307 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
AND <>SL AND DOUBLE 308 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED NOT EQUAL
AND <D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- 337 --- --- --- 694
ING LESS THAN
AND <DT AND TIME LESS 343 --- --- --- 297
THAN
AND <F AND FLOATING LESS 331 --- --- --- 636
THAN
AND <L AND DOUBLE LESS 311 --- --- --- 291
THAN
AND <S AND SIGNED LESS 312 --- --- --- 291
THAN
AND <SL AND DOUBLE 313 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED LESS THAN
AND = AND EQUAL 300 --- --- --- 291
AND =$ AND STRING EQUALS 670 --- --- --- 1250
AND =D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- 335 --- --- --- 694
ING EQUAL
AND =DT AND TIME EQUAL 341 --- --- --- 297
AND =F AND FLOATING 329 --- --- --- 636
EQUAL
AND =L AND DOUBLE EQUAL 301 --- --- --- 291
AND =S AND SIGNED EQUAL 302 --- --- --- 291
AND =SL AND DOUBLE 303 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED EQUAL
AND > AND GREATER THAN 320 --- --- --- 291
AND >$ AND STRING 674 --- --- --- 1250
GREATER THAN
AND >D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- 339 --- --- --- 694
ING GREATER THAN
AND >DT AND TIME GREATER 345 --- --- --- 297
THAN
AND >F AND FLOATING 333 --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN
114

Specification
AND >L AND DOUBLE 321 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
AND >S AND SIGNED 322 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
AND >SL AND DOUBLE 323 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED GREATER
THAN
AND LD AND LOAD --- --- --- --- 172
AND NOT AND NOT --- --- --- !AND NOT 167
AND TST AND BIT TEST 350 --- --- --- 182
AND TSTN AND BIT TEST 351 --- --- --- 182
AND <= AND LESS THAN OR 315 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
AND <=$ AND STRING LESS 673 --- --- --- 1250
THAN OR EQUAL
AND <=D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- 338 --- --- --- 694
ING LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
AND <=DT AND TIME LESS 344 --- --- --- 297
THAN OR EQUAL
AND <=F AND FLOATING LESS 332 --- --- --- 636
THAN OR EQUAL
AND <=L AND DOUBLE LESS 316 --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
AND <=S AND SIGNED LESS 317 --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
AND <=SL AND DOUBLE 318 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED LESS THAN
OR EQUAL
AND >= AND GREATER THAN 325 --- --- --- 291
OR EQUAL
AND >=$ AND STRING 675 --- --- --- 1250
GREATER THAN OR
EQUALS
AND >=D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- 340 --- --- --- 694
ING GREATER THAN
OR EQUAL
AND >=DT AND TIME GREATER 346 --- --- --- 297
THAN OR EQUAL
AND >=F AND FLOATING 334 --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
AND >=L AND DOUBLE 326 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
AND >=S AND SIGNED 327 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
AND >=SL AND DOUBLE 328 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED GREATER
THAN OR EQUAL
ANDL DOUBLE LOGICAL 610 @ANDL --- --- 550
AND
ANDW LOGICAL AND 034 @ANDW --- --- 548
APR ARITHMETIC 069 @APR --- --- 571
PROCESS
ASC ASCII CONVERT 086 @ASC --- --- 504
ASFT ASYNCHRONOUS 017 @ASFT --- --- 365
SHIFT REGISTER
ASIN ARC SINE 463 @ASIN --- --- 623
ASIND DOUBLE ARC SINE 854 @ASIND --- --- 680
ASL ARITHMETIC SHIFT 025 @ASL --- --- 370
LEFT
115

Specification
ASLL DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT 570 @ASLL --- --- 371
ASR ARITHMETIC SHIFT 026 @ASR --- --- 373
RIGHT
ASRL DOUBLE SHIFT 571 @ASRL --- --- 374
RIGHT
ATAN ARC TANGENT 465 @ATAN --- --- 627
ATAND DOUBLE ARC TAN- 856 @ATAND --- --- 684
GENT
AVG AVERAGE 195 --- --- --- 807
B
Mnemonic Instruction FUN code Upward Downward Immediate Page
Specification
BAND DEAD BAND CON- 681 @BAND --- --- 781
TROL
BCD BINARY TO BCD 024 @BCD --- --- 487
BCDL DOUBLE BINARY TO 059 @BCDL --- --- 489
BCD
BCDS SIGNED BINARY TO 471 @BCDS --- --- 523
BCD
BCMP UNSIGNED BLOCK 068 @BCMP --- --- 320
COMPARE
BCMP2 EXPANDED BLOCK 502 @BCMP2 --- --- 322
COMPARE
BCNT BIT COUNTER 067 @BCNT --- --- 587
BCNTC BIT COUNTER 621 @BCNTC --- --- 1275
BDSL DOUBLE SIGNED 473 @BDSL --- --- 525
BINARY TO BCD
BEND BLOCK PROGRAM 801 --- --- --- 1191
END
BIN BCD TO BINARY 023 @BIN --- --- 483
BINL DOUBLE BCD TO 058 @BINL --- --- 485
DOUBLE BINARY
BINS SIGNED BCD TO 470 @BINS --- --- 517
BINARY
BISL DOUBLE SIGNED 472 @BISL --- --- 520
BCD TO BINARY
BPPS BLOCK PROGRAM 811 --- --- --- 1193
PAUSE
BPRG BLOCK PROGRAM 096 --- --- --- 1191
BEGIN
BPRS BLOCK PROGRAM 812 --- --- --- 1193
RESTART
BREAK BREAK LOOP 514 --- --- --- 241
BSET BLOCK SET 071 @BSET --- --- 347
C
Specification
CADD CALENDAR ADD 730 @CADD --- --- 1122
CCL LOAD CONDITION 283 @CCL --- --- 1173
FLAGS
CCS SAVE CONDITION 282 @CCS --- --- 1171
FLAGS
CJP CONDITIONAL JUMP 510 --- --- --- 232
CJPN CONDITIONAL JUMP 511 --- --- --- 232
CLC CLEAR CARRY 041 @CLC --- --- 1166
116

Specification
CLI CLEAR INTERRUPT 691 @CLI --- --- 851
CLR$ CLEAR STRING 666 @CLR$ --- --- 1245
CMND DELIVER COMMAND 490 @CMND --- --- 1056
CMP COMPARE 020 --- --- !CMP 303
CMPL DOUBLE COMPARE 060 --- --- --- 306
CNR RESET TIMER/ 545 @CNR --- --- 282
COUNTER
CNRX RESET TIMER/ 548 @CNRX --- --- 282
COUNTER
CNT COUNTER --- --- --- --- 275
CNTX COUNTER 546 --- --- --- 275
CNTR REVERSIBLE 012 --- --- --- 278
COUNTER
CNTRX REVERSIBLE 548 --- --- --- 278
COUNTER
CNTW COUNTER WAIT 814 --- --- --- 1209
CNTWX COUNTER WAIT 818 --- --- --- 1209
COLL DATA COLLECT 081 @COLL --- --- 354
COLLC DATA COLLECT 567 @COLLC --- --- 1269
COLM LINE TO COLUMN 064 @COLM --- --- 514
COM COMPLEMENT 029 --- --- --- 562
COML DOUBLE 614 @COML --- --- 564
COMPLEMENT
COS COSINE 461 @COS --- --- 615
COSD DOUBLE COSINE 852 @COSD --- --- 676
COSQ HIGH-SPEED COSINE 476 @COSQ --- --- 617
CPS SIGNED BINARY 114 --- --- !CPS 309
COMPARE
CPSL DOUBLE SIGNED 115 --- --- --- 312
BINARY COMPARE
CSUB CALENDAR 731 @CSUB --- --- 1126
SUBTRACT
CTBL COMPARISON TABLE 882 @CTBL --- --- 878
LOAD
D
Specification
DATE CLOCK ADJUSTMENT 735 @DATE --- --- 1134
DBL 16-BIT BINARY TO 843 @DBL --- --- 660
DOUBLE FLOATING
DBLL 32-BIT BINARY TO 844 @DBLL --- --- 661
DOUBLE FLOATING
DEG RADIANS-TO 459 @DEG --- --- 610
DEGREES
DEGD DOUBLE RADIANS TO 850 @RADD --- --- 671
DEGREES
DEL$ DELETE STRING 658 @DEL$ --- --- 1240
DI DISABLE INTER- 693 @DI --- --- 855
RUPTS
DIFD DIFFERENTIATE 014 --- --- !DIFD 193
DOWN
DIFU DIFFERENTIATE UP 013 --- --- !DIFU 193
DIM DIMENSION RECORD 631 @DIM --- --- 715
TABLE
DIST SINGLE WORD 080 @DIST --- --- 352
DISTRIBUTE
117

Specification
DISTC SINGLE WORD 566 @DISTC --- --- 1266
DISTRIBUTE
DLNK CPU BUS UNIT I/O 226 @DLNK --- --- 932
REFRESH
DMPX DATA ENCODER 077 @DMPX --- --- 500
DOWN CONDITION OFF 522 --- --- --- 181
DSW DIGITAL SWITCH 210 --- --- --- 940
INPUT
E
Specification
ECHRD EXPLICIT WORD 723 @ECHRD --- --- 1087
READ
ECHWR EXPLICIT WORD 724 @ECHWR --- --- 1091
WRITE
EGATR EXPLICIT GET 721 @EGATR --- --- 1074
ATTRIBUTE
EI ENABLE 694 --- --- --- 858
INTERRUPTS
ELSE ELSE 803 --- --- --- 1196
EMBC SELECT EM BANK 281 @EMBC --- --- 1167
END END 001 --- --- --- 206
ESATR EXPLICIT SET 722 @ESATR --- --- 1081
ATTRIBUTE
EXIT NOT CONDITIONAL BLOCK 806 --- --- --- 1199
(operand) EXIT NOT
EXIT (input con- CONDITIONAL BLOCK 806 --- --- --- 1199
dition) EXIT
EXIT (operand) CONDITIONAL BLOCK 806 --- --- --- 1199
EXIT
EXP EXPONENT 467 @EXP --- --- 631
EXPD DOUBLE EXPONENT 858 @EXPD --- --- 688
EXPLT EXPLICIT MESSAGE 720 @EXPLT --- --- 1066
SEND
F
Specification
FAL FAILURE ALARM 006 @FAL --- --- 1140
FALS SEVERE FAILURE 007 --- --- --- 1148
ALARM
FCS FRAME CHECKSUM 180 @FCS --- --- 738
FDIV FLOATING POINT 079 @FDIV --- --- 583
DIVIDE
FIFO FIRST IN FIRST OUT 633 @FIFO --- --- 709
FIND$ FIND IN STRING 660 @FIND$ --- --- 1233
FIORF SPECIAL I/O UNIT I/O 225 @FIORF --- --- 929
REFRESH
FIX FLOATING TO 16-BIT 450 @FIX --- --- 594
FIXD DOUBLE FLOATING 841 @FIXD --- --- 657
TO 16-BIT BINARY
FIXL FLOATING TO 32-BIT 451 @FIXL --- --- 596
FIXLD DOUBLE FLOATING 842 @FIXLD --- --- 658
TO 32-BIT BINARY
FLT 16-BIT TO FLOATING 452 @FLT --- --- 597
FLTL 32-BIT TO FLOATING 453 @FLTL --- --- 599
118

Specification
FOR FOR-NEXT LOOPS 512 --- --- --- 238
FPD FAILURE POINT 269 --- --- --- 1156
DETECTION
FREAD READ DATA FILE 700 @FREAD --- --- 1099
FRMCV CONVERT ADDRESS 284 @FRMCV --- --- 1174
FROM CV
FSTR FLOATING POINT TO 448 @FSTR --- --- 640
ASCII
FWRIT WRITE DATA FILE 701 @FWRIT --- --- 1106
FVAL ASCII TO FLOATING 449 @FVAL --- --- 645
POINT
G
Specification
GETID GET VARIABLE ID 286 @GETID --- --- 1277
GETR GET RECORD 636 @GETR --- --- 720
NUMBER
GRET GLOBAL SUBROU- 752 --- --- --- 835
TINE RETURN
GRY GRAY CODE CON- 474 @GRY --- --- 529
VERSION
GSBN GLOBAL SUBROU- 751 --- --- --- 832
TINE ENTRY
GSBS GLOBAL SUBROU- 750 @GSBS --- --- 824
TINE CALL
H
Specification
HEX ASCII TO HEX 162 @HEX --- --- 508
HKY HEXADECIMAL KEY 212 --- --- --- 948
INPUT
HMS SECONDS TO HOURS 066 @HMS --- --- 1131
I
Specification
IEND IF END 804 --- --- --- 1196
IF NOT (oper- IF NOT 802 --- --- --- 1196
and)
IF (input condi- IF 802 --- --- --- 1196
tion)
IF (operand) IF 802 --- --- --- 1196
IL INTERLOCK 002 --- --- --- 210
ILC INTERLOCK CLEAR 003 --- --- --- 210
INI MODE CONTROL 880 @INI --- --- 864
INS$ INS$ 657 @INS$ --- --- 1246
IORD INTELLIGENT I/O 222 @IORD --- --- 962
READ
IORF I/O REFRESH 097 @IORF --- --- 926
IORS ENABLE PERIPH- 288 --- --- --- 1185
ERAL SERVICING
119

Specification
IOSP DISABLE PERIPH- 287 @IOSP --- --- 1183
ERAL SERVICING
IOWR INTELLIGENT I/O 223 @IOWR --- --- 967
WRITE
J
Specification
JME JUMP END 005 --- --- --- 228
JME0 MULTIPLE JUMP END 516 --- --- --- 236
JMP JUMP 004 --- --- --- 228
JMP0 MULTIPLE JUMP 515 --- --- --- 236
K
Specification
KEEP KEEP 011 --- --- !KEEP 188
L
Specification
LD LOAD --- @LD %LD !LD 161
LD < LOAD LESS THAN 310 --- --- --- 291
LD <$ LOAD STRING LESS 672 --- --- --- 1250
THAN
LD <D LOAD DOUBLE 337 --- --- --- 694
FLOATING LESS
THAN
LD <DT LOAD TIME LESS 343 --- --- --- 297
THAN
LD <F LOAD FLOATING 331 --- --- --- 636
LESS THAN
LD <> LOAD NOT EQUAL 305 --- --- --- 291
LD <>$ LOAD STRING NOT 671 --- --- --- 1250
EQUAL
LD <>D LOAD DOUBLE 336 --- --- --- 694
FLOATING NOT
EQUAL
LD <>DT LOAD TIME NOT 342 --- --- --- 297
EQUAL
LD <>F LOAD FLOATING NOT 330 --- --- --- 636
EQUAL
LD <>L LOAD DOUBLE NOT 306 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
LD <>S LOAD SIGNED NOT 307 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
LD <>SL LOAD DOUBLE 308 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED NOT EQUAL
LD <L LOAD DOUBLE LESS 311 --- --- --- 291
THAN
LD <S LOAD SIGNED LESS 312 --- --- --- 291
THAN
LD <SL LOAD DOUBLE 313 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED LESS THAN
LD = LOAD EQUAL 300 --- --- --- 291
LD =$ LOAD STRING 670 --- --- --- 1250
EQUALS
120

Specification
LD =D LOAD DOUBLE 335 --- --- --- 694
FLOATING EQUAL
LD =DT LOAD TIME EQUAL 341 --- --- --- 297
LD =F LOAD FLOATING 329 --- --- --- 636
EQUAL
LD =L LOAD DOUBLE 301 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
LD =S LOAD SIGNED EQUAL 302 --- --- --- 291
LD =SL LOAD DOUBLE 303 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED EQUAL
LD > LOAD GREATER 320 --- --- --- 291
THAN
LD >$ LOAD STRING 674 --- --- --- 1250
GREATER THAN
LD >D LOAD DOUBLE 339 --- --- --- 694
FLOATING GREATER
THAN
LD >DT LOAD TIME GREATER 345 --- --- --- 297
THAN
LD >F LOAD FLOATING 333 --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN
LD >L LOAD DOUBLE 321 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
LD >S LOAD SIGNED 322 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
LD >SL LOAD DOUBLE 323 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED GREATER
THAN
LD NOT LOAD NOT --- --- --- !LD NOT 163
LD TST LOAD BIT TEST 350 --- --- --- 182
LD TSTN LOAD BIT TEST 351 --- --- --- 182
LD <= LOAD LESS THAN OR 315 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
LD <=$ LOAD STRING LESS 673 --- --- --- 1250
THAN OR EQUAL
LD <=D LOAD DOUBLE 338 --- --- --- 694
FLOATING LESS
THAN OR EQUAL
LD <=DT LOAD TIME LESS 344 --- --- --- 297
THAN OR EQUAL
LD <=F LOAD FLOATING 332 --- --- --- 636
LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
LD <=L LOAD DOUBLE LESS 316 --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
LD <=S LOAD SIGNED LESS 317 --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
LD <=SL LOAD DOUBLE 318 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED LESS THAN
OR EQUAL
LD >= LOAD GREATER 325 --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
LD >=$ LOAD STRING 675 --- --- --- 1250
GREATER THAN OR
EQUALS
LD >=D LOAD DOUBLE 340 --- --- --- 694
FLOATING GREATER
THAN OR EQUAL
LD >=DT LOAD TIME GREATER 346 --- --- --- 297
THAN OR EQUAL
LD >=F LOAD FLOATING 334 --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
121

Specification
LD >=L LOAD DOUBLE 326 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
LD >=S LOAD SIGNED 327 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
LD >=SL LOAD DOUBLE 328 --- --- --- 291
SIGNED GREATER
THAN OR EQUAL
LEFT$ GET STRING LEFT 652 @LEFT$ --- --- 1226
LEN$ STRING LENGTH 650 @LEN$ --- --- 1235
LEND NOT LOOP END NOT 810 --- --- --- 1215
(operand)
LEND (input LOOP END 810 --- --- --- 1215
condition)
LEND (oper- LOOP END 810 --- --- --- 1215
and)
LIFO LAST IN FIRST OUT 634 @LIFO --- --- 712
LINE COLUMN TO LINE 063 @LINE --- --- 512
LMT LIMIT CONTROL 680 @LMT --- --- 779
LOG LOGARITHM 468 @LOG --- --- 633
LOGD DOUBLE LOGARITHM 859 @LOGD --- --- 690
LOOP LOOP 809 --- --- --- 1215
M
Specification
MAX FIND MAXIMUM 182 @MAX --- --- 727
MCMP MULTIPLE COMPARE 019 @MCMP --- --- 315
MCRO MACRO 099 @MCRO --- --- 817
MID$ GET STRING MIDDLE 654 @MID$ --- --- 1230
MILC MULTI-INTERLOCK 519 --- --- --- 214
CLEAR
MILH MULTI-INTERLOCK 517 --- --- --- 214
DIFFERENTIATION
HOLD
MILR MULTI-INTERLOCK 518 --- --- --- 214
DIFFERENTIATION
RELEASE
MIN FIND MINIMUM 183 @MIN --- --- 731
MLPX DATA DECODER 076 @MLPX --- --- 496
MOV MOVE 021 @MOV --- !MOV 331
MOV$ MOVE STRING 664 @MOV$ --- --- 1221
MOVB MOVE BIT 082 @MOVB --- --- 337
MOVBC MOVE BIT 568 @MOVBC --- --- 1273
MOVD MOVE DIGIT 083 @MOVD --- --- 339
MOVF MOVE FLOATING- 469 @MOVF --- --- 649
POINT (SINGLE)
MOVL DOUBLE MOVE 498 @MOVL --- --- 334
MOVR MOVE TO REGISTER 560 @MOVR --- --- 356
MOVRW MOVE TIMER/ 561 --- --- --- 358
COUNTER PV TO
REGISTER
MSG DISPLAY MESSAGE 046 @MSG --- --- 1119
MSKR READ INTERRUPT 692 @MSKR --- --- 846
MASK
MSKS SET INTERRUPT 690 @MSKS --- --- 839
MASK
122

Specification
MTIM MULTI-OUTPUT 543 --- --- --- 269
TIMER
MTIMX MULTI-OUTPUT 554 --- --- --- 269
TIMER
MTR MATRIX INPUT 213 --- --- --- 953
MVN MOVE NOT 022 @MVN --- --- 333
MVNL DOUBLE MOVE NOT 499 @MVNL --- --- 336
N
Specification
NASL SHIFT N-BITS LEFT 580 @NASL --- --- 397
NASR SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT 581 @NASR --- --- 403
NEG 2’S COMPLEMENT 160 @NEG --- --- 491
NEGL DOUBLE 2’S 161 @NEGL --- --- 493
COMPLEMENT
NEXT FOR-NEXT LOOPS 513 --- --- --- 238
NOP NO OPERATION 000 --- --- --- 207
NOT NOT 520 --- --- --- 180
NSFL SHIFT N-BIT DATA 578 @NSFL --- --- 393
LEFT
NSFR SHIFT N-BIT DATA 579 @NSFR --- --- 395
RIGHT
NSLL DOUBLE SHIFT 582 @NSLL --- --- 400
N-BITS LEFT
NSRL DOUBLE SHIFT 583 @NSRL --- --- 405
N-BITS RIGHT
NUM4 ASCII TO FOUR-DIGIT 604 @NUM4 --- --- 534
NUMBER
NUM8 ASCII TO EIGHT-DIGIT 605 @NUM8 --- --- 537
NUMBER
NUM16 ASCII TO SIXTEEN- 606 @NUM16 --- --- 539
DIGIT NUMBER
O
Specification
OR OR --- @OR %OR !OR 169
OR < OR LESS THAN 310 --- --- --- 291
OR <$ OR STRING LESS 672 --- --- --- 1250
THAN
OR <> OR NOT EQUAL 305 --- --- --- 291
OR <>$ OR STRING NOT 671 --- --- --- 1250
EQUAL
OR <>D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- 336 --- --- --- 694
ING NOT EQUAL
OR <>DT OR TIME NOT EQUAL 342 --- --- --- 297
OR <>F OR FLOATING NOT 330 --- --- --- 636
EQUAL
OR <>L OR DOUBLE NOT 306 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
OR <>S OR SIGNED NOT 307 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
OR <>SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED 308 --- --- --- 291
NOT EQUAL
OR <D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- 337 --- --- --- 694
ING LESS THAN
123

Specification
OR <DT OR TIME LESS THAN 343 --- --- --- 297
OR <F OR FLOATING LESS 331 --- --- --- 636
THAN
OR <L OR DOUBLE LESS 311 --- --- --- 291
THAN
OR <S OR SIGNED LESS 312 --- --- --- 291
THAN
OR <SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED 313 --- --- --- 291
LESS THAN
OR = OR EQUAL 300 --- --- --- 291
OR =$ OR STRING EQUALS 670 --- --- --- 1250
OR =D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- 335 --- --- --- 694
ING EQUAL
OR =DT OR TIME EQUAL 341 --- --- --- 297
OR =F OR FLOATING EQUAL 329 --- --- --- 636
OR =L OR DOUBLE EQUAL 301 --- --- --- 291
OR =S OR SIGNED EQUAL 302 --- --- --- 291
OR =SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED 303 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
OR > OR GREATER THAN 320 --- --- --- 291
OR >$ OR STRING GREATER 674 --- --- --- 1250
THAN
OR >D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- 339 --- --- --- 694
ING GREATER THAN
OR >DT OR TIME GREATER 345 --- --- --- 297
THAN
OR >F OR FLOATING 333 --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN
OR >L OR DOUBLE 321 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
OR >S OR SIGNED 322 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
OR >SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED 323 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
OR LD OR LOAD --- --- --- --- 174
OR NOT OR NOT --- --- --- !OR NOT 171
OR TST OR BIT TEST 350 --- --- --- 182
OR TSTN OR BIT TEST 351 --- --- --- 182
OR <= OR LESS THAN OR 315 --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
OR <=$ OR STRING LESS 673 --- --- --- 1250
THAN OR EQUALS
OR <=D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- 338 --- --- --- 694
ING LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
OR <=DT OR TIME LESS THAN 344 --- --- --- 297
OR EQUAL
OR <=F OR FLOATING LESS 332 --- --- --- 636
THAN OR EQUAL
OR <=L OR DOUBLE LESS 316 --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
OR <=S OR SIGNED LESS 317 --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
OR <=SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED 318 --- --- --- 291
LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
OR >= OR GREATER THAN 325 --- --- --- 291
OR EQUAL
OR >=$ OR STRING GREATER 675 --- --- --- 1250
THAN OR EQUALS
124

Specification
OR >=D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- 340 --- --- --- 694
ING GREATER THAN
OR EQUAL
OR >=DT OR TIME GREATER 346 --- --- --- 297
THAN OR EQUAL
OR >=F OR FLOATING 334 --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
OR >=L OR DOUBLE 326 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
OR >=S OR SIGNED 327 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
OR >=SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED 328 --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
ORG ORIGIN SEARCH 889 @ORG --- --- 903
ORW LOGICAL OR 035 @ORW --- --- 551
ORWL DOUBLE LOGICAL OR 611 @ORWL --- --- 553
OUT OUTPUT --- --- --- !OUT 185
OUTB SINGLE BIT OUTPUT 534 @OUTB --- !OUTB 204
OUT NOT OUTPUT NOT --- --- --- !OUT NOT 187
P
Specification
PID PID CONTROL 190 --- --- --- 757
PIDAT PID CONTROL WITH 191 --- --- --- 769
AUTOTUNING
PMCR PROTOCOL MACRO 260 @PMCR --- --- 974
PRV HIGH-SPEED 881 @PRV --- --- 868
COUNTER PV READ
PRV2 COUNTER FRE- 883 @PRV2 --- --- 874
QUENCY CONVERT
PULS SET PULSES 886 @PULS --- --- 887
PLS2 PULSE OUTPUT 887 @PLS2 --- --- 890
PUSH PUSH ONTO STACK 632 @PUSH --- --- 706
PWM PULSE WITH VARI- 891 @PWM --- --- 906
ABLE DUTY FACTOR
PWR EXPONENTIAL 840 @PWR --- --- 635
POWER
PWRD DOUBLE EXPONEN- 860 @PWRD --- --- 692
TIAL POWER
R
Specification
RAD DEGREES TO 458 @RAD --- --- 633
RADIANS
RADD DOUBLE DEGREES 849 @RADD --- --- 671
TO RADIANS
RECV NETWORK RECEIVE 098 @RECV --- --- 1050
RET SUBROUTINE 093 --- --- --- 824
RETURN
RGHT$ GET STRING RIGHT 653 @RGHT$ --- --- 1228
RLNC ROTATE LEFT 574 @RLNC --- --- 383
WITHOUT CARRY
125

Specification
RLNL DOUBLE ROTATE 576 @RLNL --- --- 385
LEFT WITHOUT
CARRY
ROL ROTATE LEFT 027 @ROL --- --- 376
ROLL DOUBLE ROTATE 572 @ROLL --- --- 378
LEFT
ROOT BCD SQUARE ROOT 072 @ROOT --- --- 567
ROR ROTATE RIGHT 028 @ROR --- --- 380
RORL DOUBLE ROTATE 573 @RORL --- --- 381
RIGHT
ROTB BINARY ROOT 620 @ROTB --- --- 565
RPLC$ REPLACE IN STRING 661 @RPLC$ --- --- 1237
RRNC ROTATE RIGHT 575 @RRNC --- --- 387
WITHOUT CARRY
RRNL DOUBLE ROTATE 577 @RRNL --- --- 388
RIGHT WITHOUT
CARRY
RSET RESET --- @RSET %RSET !RSET 195
RSTA MULTIPLE BIT RESET 531 @RSTA --- --- 198
RSTB SINGLE BIT RESET 533 @RSTB --- !RSTB 201
RXD RECEIVE 235 @RXD --- --- 993
RXDU RECEIVE VIA SERIAL 255 @RXDU --- --- 1013
COMMUNICATIONS
UNIT
S
Specification
SBN SUBROUTINE ENTRY 092 --- --- --- 821
SBS SUBROUTINE CALL 091 @SBS --- --- 811
SCL SCALING 194 @SCL --- --- 795
SCL2 SCALING 2 486 @SCL2 --- --- 800
SCL3 SCALING 3 487 @SCL3 --- --- 804
SDEC 7-SEGMENT 078 @SDEC --- --- 974
DECODER
SDEL STACK DATA DELETE 642 @SDEL --- --- 753
SEC HOURS TO SECONDS 065 @SEC --- --- 1129
SEND NETWORK SEND 090 @SEND --- --- 1044
SET SET --- @SET %SET !SET 195
SETA MULTIPLE BIT SET 530 @SETA --- --- 198
SETB SINGLE BIT SET 532 @SETB --- !SETB 201
SETR SET RECORD 635 @SETR --- --- 718
LOCATION
SFT SHIFT REGISTER 010 --- --- --- 361
SFTR REVERSIBLE SHIFT 084 @SFTR --- --- 362
REGISTER
SIGN 16-BIT TO 32-BIT 600 @SIGN --- --- 494
SIGNED BINARY
SIN SINE 460 @SIN --- --- 612
SIND DOUBLE SINE 851 @SIND --- --- 674
SINQ HIGH-SPEED SINE 475 @SINQ --- --- 614
SINS STACK DATA INSERT 641 @SINS --- --- 750
SLD ONE DIGIT SHIFT 074 @SLD --- --- 390
LEFT
SNUM STACK SIZE READ 638 @SNUM --- --- 742
SNXT STEP START 009 --- --- --- 909
126

Specification
SPED SPEED OUTPUT 885 @SPED --- --- 882
SQRT SQUARE ROOT 466 @SQRT --- --- 629
SQRTD DOUBLE SQUARE 857 @SQRTD --- --- 686
ROOT
SRCH DATA SEARCH 181 @SRCH --- --- 722
SRD ONE DIGIT SHIFT 075 @SRD --- --- 392
RIGHT
SREAD STACK DATA READ 639 @SREAD --- --- 744
SSET SET STACK 630 @SSET --- --- 703
STC SET CARRY 040 @STC --- --- 1166
STEP STEP DEFINE 008 --- --- --- 909
STR4 FOUR-DIGIT NUM- 601 @STR4 --- --- 541
BER TO ASCII
STR8 EIGHT-DIGIT NUMBER 602 @STR8 --- --- 544
TO ASCII
STR16 SIXTEEN-DIGIT NUM- 603 @STR16 --- --- 545
BER TO ASCII
STUP CHANGE SERIAL 237 @STUP --- --- 1021
PORT SETUP
SUM SUM 184 @SUM --- --- 735
SWAP SWAP BYTES 637 @SWAP --- --- 725
SWRIT STACK DATA WRITE 640 @SWRIT --- --- 747
T
Specification
TAN TANGENT 462 @TAN --- --- 619
TAND DOUBLE TANGENT 853 @TAND --- --- 678
TANQ HIGH-SPEED TAN- 477 @TANQ --- --- 621
GENT
TCMP TABLE COMPARE 085 @TCMP --- --- 317
TIM HUNDRED-MS TIMER --- --- --- --- 245
TIMH TEN-MS TIMER 015 --- --- --- 249
TIMHX TEN-MS TIMER 551 --- --- --- 249
TIML LONG TIMER 542 --- --- --- 266
TIMLX LONG TIMER 553 --- --- --- 266
TIMU TENTH-MS TIMER 541 --- --- --- 256
TIMUX TENTH-MS TIMER 556 --- --- --- 256
TIMW HUNDRED-MS TIMER 813 --- --- --- 1206
WAIT
TIMWX HUNDRED-MS TIMER 816 --- --- --- 1206
WAIT
TIMX HUNDRED-MS TIMER 550 --- --- --- 245
TKOF TASK OFF 821 @TKOF --- --- 1258
TKON TASK ON 820 @TKON --- --- 1255
TKY TEN KEY INPUT 211 @TKY --- --- 945
TMHH ONE-MS TIMER 540 --- --- --- 253
TMHHX ONE-MS TIMER 552 --- --- --- 253
TMHW TEN-MS TIMER WAIT 815 --- --- --- 1212
TMHWX TEN-MS TIMER WAIT 817 --- --- --- 1212
TMUH HUNDREDTH-MS 544 --- --- --- 259
TIMER
TMUHX HUNDREDTH-MS 557 --- --- --- 259
TIMER
127

Specification
TOCV CONVERT ADDRESS 285 @TOCV --- --- 1179
TO CV
TPO TIME-PROPOR- 685 --- --- --- 787
TIONAL OUTPUT
TRSM TRACE MEMORY 045 --- --- --- 1136
SAMPLING
TTIM ACCUMULATIVE 087 --- --- --- 262
TIMER
TTIMX ACCUMULATIVE 555 --- --- --- 262
TIMER
TWRIT WRITE TEXT FILE 704 @TWRIT --- --- 1113
TXD TRANSMIT 236 @TXD --- --- 983
TXDU TRANSMIT VIA 256 @TXDU --- --- 1005
SERIAL COMMUNICA-
TIONS UNIT
U
Specification
UP CONDITION ON 521 --- --- --- 181
W
Specification
WAIT NOT ONE CYCLE AND 805 --- --- --- 1202
(operand) WAIT NOT
WAIT (input ONE CYCLE AND 805 --- --- --- 1202
condition) WAIT
WAIT (operand) ONE CYCLE AND 805 --- --- --- 1202
WAIT
WDT EXTEND MAXIMUM 094 @WDT --- --- 1169
CYCLE TIME
WSFT WORD SHIFT 016 @WSFT --- --- 368
X
Specification
XCGL DOUBLE DATA 562 @XCGL --- --- 350
EXCHANGE
XCHG DATA EXCHANGE 073 @XCHG --- --- 349
XCHG$ EXCHANGE STRING 665 @XCHG$ --- --- 1242
XFER BLOCK TRANSFER 070 @XFER --- --- 344
XFERC BLOCK TRANSFER 565 @XFERC --- --- 1263
XFRB MULTIPLE BIT 062 @XFRB --- --- 342
TRANSFER
XNRL DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE 613 @XNRL --- --- 560
NOR
XNRW EXCLUSIVE NOR 037 @XNRW --- --- 559
XORL DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE 612 @XORL --- --- 557
OR
XORW EXCLUSIVE OR 036 @XORW --- --- 555
128
Z
Specification
ZCP AREA RANGE COM- 088 --- --- --- 326
PARE
ZCPL DOUBLE AREA 116 --- --- --- 329
RANGE COMPARE
ZONE DEAD ZONE 682 @ZONE --- --- 784
CONTROL
Symbols
Specification
7SEG 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY 214 --- --- --- 957
OUTPUT
+ SIGNED BINARY ADD 400 @+ --- --- 426
WITHOUT CARRY
+$ CONCATENATE 656 @+$ --- --- 1223
STRING
++ INCREMENT BINARY 590 @++ --- --- 409
++B INCREMENT BCD 594 @++B --- --- 417
++BL DOUBLE 595 @++BL --- --- 419
INCREMENT BCD
++L DOUBLE 591 @++L --- --- 411
INCREMENT BINARY
+B BCD ADD WITHOUT 404 @+B --- --- 434
CARRY
+BC BCD ADD WITH 406 @+BC --- --- 437
CARRY
+BCL DOUBLE BCD ADD 407 @+BCL --- --- 439
WITH CARRY
+BL DOUBLE BCD ADD 405 @+BL --- --- 435
WITHOUT CARRY
+C SIGNED BINARY ADD 402 @+C --- --- 430
WITH CARRY
+CL DOUBLE SIGNED 403 @+CL --- --- 432
BINARY ADD WITH
CARRY
+D DOUBLE FLOATING- 845 @+D --- --- 663
POINT ADD
+F FLOATING-POINT 454 @+F --- --- 601
ADD
+L DOUBLE SIGNED 401 @+L --- --- 428
BINARY ADD
WITHOUT CARRY
– SIGNED BINARY 410 @– --- --- 440
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
–– DECREMENT BINARY 592 @– – --- --- 413
– –B DECREMENT BCD 596 @– –B --- --- 421
– –BL DOUBLE 597 @– –BL --- --- 423
DECREMENT BCD
– –L DOUBLE 593 @– –L --- --- 415
DECREMENT BINARY
–B BCD SUBTRACT 414 @–B --- --- 451
WITHOUT CARRY
–BC BCD SUBTRACT 416 @–BC --- --- 456
WITH CARRY
–BCL DOUBLE BCD 417 @–BCL --- --- 457
SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
129

Specification
–BL DOUBLE BCD 415 @–BL --- --- 452
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
–C SIGNED BINARY 412 @–C --- --- 446
SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
–CL DOUBLE SIGNED 413 @–CL --- --- 448
BINARY SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
−D DOUBLE FLOATING- 846 @−D --- --- 665
POINT SUBTRACT
–F FLOATING-POINT 455 @–F --- --- 603
SUBTRACT
* SIGNED BINARY 420 @* --- --- 459
MULTIPLY
*B BCD MULTIPLY 424 @*B --- --- 467
*BL DOUBLE BCD 425 @*BL --- --- 469
MULTIPLY
*D DOUBLE FLOATING- 847 @*D --- --- 667
POINT MULTIPLY
*F FLOATING-POINT 456 @*F --- --- 605
MULTIPLY
*L DOUBLE SIGNED 421 @*L --- --- 461
BINARY MULTIPLY
*U UNSIGNED BINARY 422 @*U --- --- 463
MULTIPLY
*UL DOUBLE UNSIGNED 423 @*UL --- --- 465
BINARY MULTIPLY
–L DOUBLE SIGNED 411 @–L --- --- 442
BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
/ SIGNED BINARY 430 @/ --- --- 471
DIVIDE
/B BCD DIVIDE 434 @/B --- --- 479
/BL DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE 435 @/BL --- --- 481
/D DOUBLE FLOATING- 848 @/D --- --- 669
POINT DIVIDE
/F FLOATING-POINT 457 @/F --- --- 607
DIVIDE
/L DOUBLE SIGNED 431 @/L --- --- 473
BINARY DIVIDE
/U UNSIGNED BINARY 432 @/U --- --- 475
DIVIDE
/UL DOUBLE UNSIGNED 433 @/UL --- --- 477
BINARY DIVIDE
130
List of Instructions by Function Code Section 2-4
2-4 List of Instructions by Function Code

Function code Mnemonic Instruction Upward Downward Immediate Page
Specification
--- LD LOAD @LD %LD !LD 161
--- LD NOT LOAD NOT --- --- !LD NOT 163
--- AND AND @AND %AND !AND 165
--- AND NOT AND NOT --- --- !AND NOT 167
--- OR OR @OR %OR !OR 169
--- OR NOT OR NOT --- --- !OR NOT 171
--- AND LD AND LOAD --- --- --- 172
--- OR LD OR LOAD --- --- --- 174
--- OUT OUTPUT --- --- !OUT 185
--- OUT NOT OUTPUT NOT --- --- !OUT NOT 187
--- SET SET @SET %SET !SET 195
--- RSET RESET @RSET %RSET !RSET 195
--- TIM HUNDRED-MS TIMER --- --- --- 245
--- CNT COUNTER --- --- --- 275
000 NOP NO OPERATION --- --- --- 207
001 END END --- --- --- 206
002 IL INTERLOCK --- --- --- 210
003 ILC INTERLOCK CLEAR --- --- --- 210
004 JMP JUMP --- --- --- 228
005 JME JUMP END --- --- --- 228
006 FAL FAILURE ALARM @FAL --- --- 1140
007 FALS SEVERE FAILURE --- --- --- 1148
ALARM
008 STEP STEP DEFINE --- --- --- 909
009 SNXT STEP START --- --- --- 909
010 SFT SHIFT REGISTER --- --- --- 361
011 KEEP KEEP --- --- !KEEP 188
012 CNTR REVERSIBLE --- --- --- 278
COUNTER
013 DIFU DIFFERENTIATE UP --- --- !DIFU 193
014 DIFD DIFFERENTIATE --- --- !DIFD 193
DOWN
015 TIMH TEN-MS TIMER --- --- --- 249
016 WSFT WORD SHIFT @WSFT --- --- 368
017 ASFT ASYNCHRONOUS @ASFT --- --- 365
SHIFT REGISTER
019 MCMP MULTIPLE COMPARE @MCMP --- --- 315
020 CMP UNSIGNED COMPARE --- --- !CMP 303
021 MOV MOVE @MOV --- !MOV 331
022 MVN MOVE NOT @MVN --- --- 333
023 BIN BCD TO BINARY @BIN --- --- 483
024 BCD BINARY TO BCD @BCD --- --- 487
025 ASL ARITHMETIC SHIFT @ASL --- --- 370
LEFT
026 ASR ARITHMETIC SHIFT @ASR --- --- 373
RIGHT
027 ROL ROTATE LEFT @ROL --- --- 376
028 ROR ROTATE RIGHT @ROR --- --- 380
029 COM COMPLEMENT @COM --- --- 562
034 ANDW LOGICAL AND @ANDW --- --- 548
035 ORW LOGICAL OR @ORW --- --- 551
036 XORW EXCLUSIVE OR @XORW --- --- 555
131

Specification
037 XNRW EXCLUSIVE NOR @XNRW --- --- 559
040 STC SET CARRY @STC --- --- 1166
041 CLC CLEAR CARRY @CLC --- --- 1166
045 TRSM TRACE MEMORY --- --- --- 1136
SAMPLING
046 MSG DISPLAY MESSAGE @MSG --- --- 1119
058 BINL DOUBLE BCD TO @BINL --- --- 485
DOUBLE BINARY
059 BCDL DOUBLE BINARY TO @BCDL --- --- 489
BCD
060 CMPL DOUBLE UNSIGNED --- --- --- 306
COMPARE
062 XFRB MULTIPLE BIT @XFRB --- --- 342
TRANSFER
063 LINE COLUMN TO LINE @LINE --- --- 512
064 COLM LINE TO COLUMN @COLM --- --- 514
065 SEC HOURS TO SECONDS @SEC --- --- 1129
066 HMS SECONDS TO HOURS @HMS --- --- 1131
067 BCNT BIT COUNTER @BCNT --- --- 587
068 BCMP UNSIGNED BLOCK @BCMP --- --- 320
COMPARE
069 APR ARITHMETIC @APR --- --- 571
PROCESS
070 XFER BLOCK TRANSFER @XFER --- --- 344
071 BSET BLOCK SET @BSET --- --- 347
072 ROOT BCD SQUARE ROOT @ROOT --- --- 567
073 XCHG DATA EXCHANGE @XCHG --- --- 349
074 SLD ONE DIGIT SHIFT @SLD --- --- 390
LEFT
075 SRD ONE DIGIT SHIFT @SRD --- --- 392
RIGHT
076 MLPX DATA DECODER @MLPX --- --- 496
077 DMPX DATA ENCODER @DMPX --- --- 500
078 SDEC 7-SEGMENT @SDEC --- --- 974
DECODER
079 FDIV FLOATING POINT @FDIV --- --- 583
DIVIDE
080 DIST SINGLE WORD @DIST --- --- 352
DISTRIBUTE
081 COLL DATA COLLECT @COLL --- --- 354
082 MOVB MOVE BIT @MOVB --- --- 337
083 MOVD MOVE DIGIT @MOVD --- --- 339
084 SFTR REVERSIBLE SHIFT @SFTR --- --- 362
REGISTER
085 TCMP TABLE COMPARE @TCMP --- --- 317
086 ASC ASCII CONVERT @ASC --- --- 504
087 TTIM ACCUMULATIVE --- --- --- 262
TIMER
088 ZCP AREA RANGE COM- --- --- --- 326
PARE
090 SEND NETWORK SEND @SEND --- --- 1044
091 SBS SUBROUTINE CALL @SBS --- --- 811
092 SBN SUBROUTINE ENTRY --- --- --- 821
093 RET SUBROUTINE --- --- --- 824
RETURN
094 WDT EXTEND MAXIMUM @WDT --- --- 1169
CYCLE TIME
132

Specification
096 BPRG BLOCK PROGRAM --- --- --- 1191
BEGIN
097 IORF I/O REFRESH @IORF --- --- 926
098 RECV NETWORK RECEIVE @RECV --- --- 1050
099 MCRO MACRO @MCRO --- --- 817
114 CPS SIGNED BINARY --- --- !CPS 309
COMPARE
115 CPSL DOUBLE SIGNED --- --- --- 312
BINARY COMPARE
116 ZCPL DOUBLE AREA --- --- --- 329
RANGE COMPARE
160 NEG 2’S COMPLEMENT @NEG --- --- 491
161 NEGL DOUBLE 2’S @NEGL --- --- 493
COMPLEMENT
162 HEX ASCII TO HEX @HEX --- --- 508
180 FCS FRAME CHECKSUM @FCS --- --- 738
181 SRCH DATA SEARCH @SRCH --- --- 722
182 MAX FIND MAXIMUM @MAX --- --- 727
183 MIN FIND MINIMUM @MIN --- --- 731
184 SUM SUM @SUM --- --- 735
190 PID PID CONTROL --- --- --- 757
191 PIDAT PID CONTROL WITH --- --- --- 769
AUTOTUNING
194 SCL SCALING @SCL --- --- 795
195 AVG AVERAGE --- --- --- 807
210 DSW DIGITAL SWITCH --- --- --- 940
INPUT
211 TKY TEN KEY INPUT @TKY --- --- 945
212 HKY HEXADECIMAL KEY --- --- --- 948
INPUT
213 MTR MATRIX INPUT --- --- --- 953
214 7SEG 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY --- --- --- 957
OUTPUT
222 IORD INTELLIGENT I/O @IORD --- --- 962
READ
223 IOWR INTELLIGENT I/O @IOWR --- --- 967
WRITE
225 FIORF SPECIAL I/O UNIT I/O @FIORF --- --- 929
REFRESH
226 DLNK CPU BUS UNIT I/O @DLNK --- --- 932
REFRESH
235 RXD RECEIVE @RXD --- --- 993
236 TXD TRANSMIT @TXD --- --- 983
255 RXDU RECEIVE VIA SERIAL @RXDU --- --- 1013
COMMUNICATIONS
UNIT
256 TXDU TRANSMIT VIA @TXDU --- --- 1005
SERIAL COMMUNICA-
TIONS UNIT
237 STUP CHANGE SERIAL @STUP --- --- 1021
PORT SETUP
260 PMCR PROTOCOL MACRO @PMCR --- --- 974
269 FPD FAILURE POINT --- --- --- 1156
DETECTION
281 EMBC SELECT EM BANK @EMBC --- --- 1167
282 CCS SAVE CONDITION @CCS --- --- 1171
FLAGS
283 CCL LOAD CONDITION @CCL --- --- 1173
FLAGS
133

Specification
284 FRMCV CONVERT ADDRESS @FRMCV --- --- 1174
FROM CV
285 TOCV CONVERT ADDRESS @TOCV --- --- 1179
TO CV
286 GETID GET VARIABLE ID @GETID --- --- 1277
287 IOSP DISABLE PERIPH- @IOSP --- --- 1183
ERAL SERVICING
288 IORS ENABLE PERIPH- --- --- --- 1185
ERAL SERVICING
300 AND = AND EQUAL --- --- --- 291
300 LD = LOAD EQUAL --- --- --- 291
300 OR = OR EQUAL --- --- --- 291
301 AND =L AND DOUBLE EQUAL --- --- --- 291
301 LD =L LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
301 OR =L OR DOUBLE EQUAL --- --- --- 291
302 AND =S AND SIGNED EQUAL --- --- --- 291
302 LD =S LOAD SIGNED EQUAL --- --- --- 291
302 OR =S OR SIGNED EQUAL --- --- --- 291
303 AND =SL AND DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED EQUAL
303 LD =SL LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED EQUAL
303 OR =SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
305 AND <> AND NOT EQUAL --- --- --- 291
305 LD <> LOAD NOT EQUAL --- --- --- 291
305 OR <> OR NOT EQUAL --- --- --- 291
306 AND <>L AND DOUBLE NOT --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
306 LD <>L LOAD DOUBLE NOT --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
306 OR <>L OR DOUBLE NOT --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
307 AND <>S AND SIGNED NOT --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
307 LD <>S LOAD SIGNED NOT --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
307 OR <>S OR SIGNED NOT --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
308 AND <>SL AND DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED NOT EQUAL
308 LD <>SL LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED NOT EQUAL
308 OR <>SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED --- --- --- 291
NOT EQUAL
310 AND < AND LESS THAN --- --- --- 291
310 LD < LOAD LESS THAN --- --- --- 291
310 OR < OR LESS THAN --- --- --- 291
311 AND <L AND DOUBLE LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN
311 LD <L LOAD DOUBLE LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN
311 OR <L OR DOUBLE LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN
312 AND <S AND SIGNED LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN
312 LD <S LOAD SIGNED LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN
134

Specification
312 OR <S OR SIGNED LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN
313 AND <SL AND DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED LESS THAN
313 LD <SL LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED LESS THAN
313 OR <SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED --- --- --- 291
LESS THAN
315 AND <= AND LESS THAN OR --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
315 LD <= LOAD LESS THAN OR --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
315 OR <= OR LESS THAN OR --- --- --- 291
EQUAL
316 AND <=L AND DOUBLE LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
316 LD <=L LOAD DOUBLE LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
316 OR <=L OR DOUBLE LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
317 AND <=S AND SIGNED LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
317 LD <=S LOAD SIGNED LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
317 OR <=S OR SIGNED LESS --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
318 AND <=SL AND DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED LESS THAN
OR EQUAL
318 LD <=SL LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED LESS THAN
OR EQUAL
318 OR <=SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED --- --- --- 291
LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
320 AND > AND GREATER THAN --- --- --- 291
320 LD > LOAD GREATER --- --- --- 291
THAN
320 OR > OR GREATER THAN --- --- --- 291
321 AND >L AND DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
321 LD >L LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
321 OR >L OR DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
322 AND >S AND SIGNED --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
322 LD >S LOAD SIGNED --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
322 OR >S OR SIGNED --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
323 AND >SL AND DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED GREATER
THAN
323 LD >SL LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED GREATER
THAN
323 OR >SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN
325 AND >= AND GREATER THAN --- --- --- 291
OR EQUAL
325 LD >= LOAD GREATER --- --- --- 291
THAN OR EQUAL
135

Specification
325 OR >= OR GREATER THAN --- --- --- 291
OR EQUAL
326 AND >=L AND DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
326 LD >=L LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
326 OR >=L OR DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
327 AND >=S AND SIGNED --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
327 LD >=S LOAD SIGNED --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
327 OR >=S OR SIGNED --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
328 AND >=SL AND DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED GREATER
THAN OR EQUAL
328 LD >=SL LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 291
SIGNED GREATER
THAN OR EQUAL
328 OR >=SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED --- --- --- 291
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
329 AND =F AND FLOATING --- --- --- 636
EQUAL
329 LD =F LOAD FLOATING --- --- --- 636
EQUAL
329 OR =F OR FLOATING EQUAL --- --- --- 636
330 AND <>F AND FLOATING NOT --- --- --- 636
EQUAL
330 LD <>F LOAD FLOATING NOT --- --- --- 636
EQUAL
330 OR <>F OR FLOATING NOT --- --- --- 636
EQUAL
331 AND <F AND FLOATING LESS --- --- --- 636
THAN
331 LD <F LOAD FLOATING --- --- --- 636
LESS THAN
331 OR <F OR FLOATING LESS --- --- --- 636
THAN
332 AND <=F AND FLOATING LESS --- --- --- 636
THAN OR EQUAL
332 LD <=F LOAD FLOATING --- --- --- 636
LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
332 OR <=F OR FLOATING LESS --- --- --- 636
THAN OR EQUAL
333 AND >F AND FLOATING --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN
333 LD >F LOAD FLOATING --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN
333 OR >F OR FLOATING --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN
334 AND >=F AND FLOATING --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
334 LD >=F LOAD FLOATING --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
136

Specification
334 OR >=F OR FLOATING --- --- --- 636
GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
335 AND =D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING EQUAL
335 LD =D LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 694
FLOATING EQUAL
335 OR =D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING EQUAL
336 AND <>D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING NOT EQUAL
336 LD <>D LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 694
FLOATING NOT
EQUAL
336 OR <>D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING NOT EQUAL
337 AND <D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING LESS THAN
337 LD <D LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 694
FLOATING LESS
THAN
337 OR <D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING LESS THAN
338 AND <=D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
338 LD <=D LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 694
FLOATING LESS
THAN OR EQUAL
338 OR <=D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING LESS THAN OR
EQUAL
339 AND >D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING GREATER THAN
339 LD >D LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 694
FLOATING GREATER
THAN
339 OR >D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING GREATER THAN
340 AND >=D AND DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING GREATER THAN
OR EQUAL
340 LD >=D LOAD DOUBLE --- --- --- 694
FLOATING GREATER
THAN OR EQUAL
340 OR >=D OR DOUBLE FLOAT- --- --- --- 694
ING GREATER THAN
OR EQUAL
341 AND = DT AND TIME EQUAL --- --- --- 297
341 LD = DT LOAD TIME EQUAL --- --- --- 297
341 OR = DT OR TIME EQUAL --- --- --- 297
342 AND <> DT AND TIME NOT --- --- --- 297
EQUAL
342 LD <> DT LOAD TIME NOT --- --- --- 297
EQUAL
342 OR <> DT OR TIME NOT EQUAL --- --- --- 297
343 AND < DT AND TIME LESS --- --- --- 297
THAN
343 LD < DT LOAD TIME LESS --- --- --- 297
THAN
343 OR < DT OR TIME LESS THAN --- --- --- 297
344 AND <= DT AND TIME LESS --- --- --- 297
THAN OR EQUAL
137

Specification
344 LD <= DT LD TIME LESS THAN --- --- --- 297
OR EQUAL
344 OR <= DT OR TIME LESS THAN --- --- --- 297
OR EQUAL
345 AND > DT AND TIME GREATER --- --- --- 297
THAN
345 LD > DT LOAD TIME GREATER --- --- --- 297
THAN
345 OR > DT OR TIME GREATER --- --- --- 297
THAN
346 AND >= DT AND TIME GREATER --- --- --- 297
THAN OR EQUAL
346 LD >= DT LOAD TIME GREATER --- --- --- 297
THAN OR EQUAL
346 OR >= DT OR TIME GREATER --- --- --- 297
THAN OR EQUAL
350 AND TST AND BIT TEST --- --- --- 182
350 LD TST LOAD BIT TEST --- --- --- 182
350 OR TST OR BIT TEST --- --- --- 182
351 AND TSTN AND BIT TEST NOT --- --- --- 182
351 LD TSTN LOAD BIT TEST NOT --- --- --- 182
351 OR TSTN OR BIT TEST NOT --- --- --- 182
400 + SIGNED BINARY ADD @+ --- --- 426
WITHOUT CARRY
401 +L DOUBLE SIGNED @+L --- --- 428
BINARY ADD
WITHOUT CARRY
402 +C SIGNED BINARY ADD @+C --- --- 430
WITH CARRY
403 +CL DOUBLE SIGNED @+CL --- --- 432
BINARY ADD WITH
CARRY
404 +B BCD ADD WITHOUT @+B --- --- 437
CARRY
405 +BL DOUBLE BCD ADD @+BL --- --- 435
WITHOUT CARRY
406 +BC BCD ADD WITH @+BC --- --- 437
CARRY
407 +BCL DOUBLE BCD ADD @+BCL --- --- 439
WITH CARRY
410 – SIGNED BINARY @– --- --- 440
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
411 –L DOUBLE SIGNED @–L --- --- 442
BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
412 –C SIGNED BINARY @–C --- --- 446
SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
413 –CL DOUBLE SIGNED @–CL --- --- 448
BINARY SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
414 –B BCD SUBTRACT @–B --- --- 451
WITHOUT CARRY
415 –BL DOUBLE BCD @–BL --- --- 452
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
416 –BC BCD SUBTRACT @–BC --- --- 456
WITH CARRY
417 –BCL DOUBLE BCD @–BCL --- --- 457
SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
138

Specification
420 * SIGNED BINARY @* --- --- 459
MULTIPLY
421 *L DOUBLE SIGNED @*L --- --- 461
BINARY MULTIPLY
422 *U UNSIGNED BINARY @*U --- --- 463
MULTIPLY
423 *UL DOUBLE UNSIGNED @*UL --- --- 465
BINARY MULTIPLY
424 *B BCD MULTIPLY @*B --- --- 467
425 *BL DOUBLE BCD @*BL --- --- 469
MULTIPLY
430 / SIGNED BINARY @/ --- --- 471
DIVIDE
431 /L DOUBLE SIGNED @/L --- --- 473
BINARY DIVIDE
432 /U UNSIGNED BINARY @/U --- --- 475
DIVIDE
433 /UL DOUBLE UNSIGNED @/UL --- --- 477
BINARY DIVIDE
434 /B BCD DIVIDE @/B --- --- 479
435 /BL DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE @/BL --- --- 481
448 FSTR FLOATING POINT TO @FSTR --- --- 640
ASCII
449 FVAL ASCII TO FLOATING @FVAL --- --- 645
POINT
450 FIX FLOATING TO 16-BIT @FIX --- --- 594
451 FIXL FLOATING TO 32-BIT @FIXL --- --- 596
452 FLT 16-BIT TO FLOATING @FLT --- --- 597
453 FLTL 32-BIT TO FLOATING @FLTL --- --- 599
454 +F FLOATING-POINT @+F --- --- 601
ADD
455 –F FLOATING-POINT @–F --- --- 603
SUBTRACT
456 *F FLOATING-POINT @*F --- --- 605
MULTIPLY
457 /F FLOATING-POINT @/F --- --- 607
DIVIDE
458 RAD DEGREES TO @RAD --- --- 633
RADIANS
459 DEG RADIANS-TO @DEG --- --- 610
DEGREES
460 SIN SINE @SIN --- --- 612
461 COS COSINE @COS --- --- 615
462 TAN TANGENT @TAN --- --- 619
463 ASIN ARC SINE @ASIN --- --- 623
464 ACOS ARC COSINE @ACOS --- --- 625
465 ATAN ARC TANGENT @ATAN --- --- 627
466 SQRT SQUARE ROOT @SQRT --- --- 629
467 EXP EXPONENT @EXP --- --- 631
468 LOG LOGARITHM @LOG --- --- 633
469 MOVF MOVE FLOATING- @MOVF --- --- 649
POINT (SINGLE)
470 BINS SIGNED BCD TO @BINS --- --- 517
BINARY
471 BCDS SIGNED BINARY TO @BCDS --- --- 523
BCD
472 BISL DOUBLE SIGNED @BISL --- --- 520
BCD TO BINARY
139

Specification
473 BDSL DOUBLE SIGNED @BDSL --- --- 525
BINARY TO BCD
474 GRY GRAY CODE CON- @GRY --- --- 529
VERSION
475 SINQ HIGH-SPEED SINE @SINQ --- --- 614
476 COSQ HIGH-SPEED COSINE @COSQ --- --- 617
477 TANQ HIGH-SPEED TAN- @TANQ --- --- 621
GENT
486 SCL2 SCALING 2 @SCL2 --- --- 800
487 SCL3 SCALING 3 @SCL3 --- --- 804
490 CMND DELIVER COMMAND @CMND --- --- 1056
498 MOVL DOUBLE MOVE @MOVL --- --- 334
499 MVNL DOUBLE MOVE NOT @MVNL --- --- 336
502 BCMP2 EXPANDED BLOCK @BCMP2 --- --- 322
COMPARE
510 CJP CONDITIONAL JUMP --- --- --- 232
511 CJPN CONDITIONAL JUMP --- --- --- 232
512 FOR FOR-NEXT LOOPS --- --- --- 238
513 NEXT FOR-NEXT LOOPS --- --- --- 238
514 BREAK BREAK LOOP --- --- --- 241
515 JMP0 MULTIPLE JUMP --- --- --- 236
516 JME0 MULTIPLE JUMP END --- --- --- 236
517 MILH MULTI-INTERLOCK --- --- --- 214
DIFFERENTIATION
HOLD
518 MILR MULTI-INTERLOCK --- --- --- 214
DIFFERENTIATION
RELEASE
519 MILC MULTI-INTERLOCK --- --- --- 214
CLEAR
520 NOT NOT --- --- --- 180
521 UP CONDITION ON --- --- --- 181
522 DOWN CONDITION OFF --- --- --- 181
530 SETA MULTIPLE BIT SET @SETA --- --- 198
531 RSTA MULTIPLE BIT RESET @RSTA --- --- 198
532 SETB SINGLE BIT SET @SETB --- !SETB 201
533 RSTB SINGLE BIT RESET @RSTB --- !RSTB 201
534 OUTB SINGLE BIT OUTPUT @OUTB --- !OUTB 204
540 TMHH ONE-MS TIMER --- --- --- 253
541 TIMU TENTH-MS TIMER --- --- --- 256
542 TIML LONG TIMER --- --- --- 266
543 MTIM MULTI-OUTPUT --- --- --- 269
TIMER
544 TMUH HUNDREDTH-MS --- --- --- 259
TIMER
545 CNR RESET TIMER/ @CNR --- --- 282
COUNTER
546 CNTX COUNTER --- --- --- 275
547 CNRX RESET TIMER/ --- --- --- 282
COUNTER
548 CNTRX REVERSIBLE --- --- --- 278
COUNTER
550 TIMX HUNDRED-MS TIMER --- --- --- 245
551 TIMHX TEN-MS TIMER --- --- --- 249
552 TMHHX ONE-MS TIMER --- --- --- 253
553 TIMLX LONG TIMER --- --- --- 266
140

Specification
554 MTIMX MULTI-OUTPUT --- --- --- 269
TIMER
555 TTIMX ACCUMULATIVE --- --- --- 262
TIMER
556 TIMUX TENTH-MS TIMER --- --- --- 256
557 TMUHX HUNDREDTH-MS --- --- --- 259
TIMER
560 MOVR MOVE TO REGISTER @MOVR --- --- 356
561 MOVRW MOVE TIMER/ @MOVRW --- --- 358
COUNTER PV TO
REGISTER
562 XCGL DOUBLE DATA @XCGL --- --- 350
EXCHANGE
565 XFERC BLOCK TRANSFER @XFERC --- --- 1263
566 DISTC SINGLE WORD @DISTC --- --- 1266
DISTRIBUTE
567 COLLC DATA COLLECT @COLLC --- --- 1269
568 MOVBC MOVE BIT @MOVBC --- --- 1273
570 ASLL DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT @ASLL --- --- 371
571 ASRL DOUBLE SHIFT @ASRL --- --- 374
RIGHT
572 ROLL DOUBLE ROTATE @ROLL --- --- 378
LEFT
573 RORL DOUBLE ROTATE @RORL --- --- 381
RIGHT
574 RLNC ROTATE LEFT @RLNC --- --- 383
WITHOUT CARRY
575 RRNC ROTATE RIGHT @RRNC --- --- 387
WITHOUT CARRY
576 RLNL DOUBLE ROTATE @RLNL --- --- 385
LEFT WITHOUT
CARRY
577 RRNL DOUBLE ROTATE @RRNL --- --- 388
RIGHT WITHOUT
CARRY
578 NSFL SHIFT N-BIT DATA @NSFL --- --- 393
LEFT
579 NSFR SHIFT N-BIT DATA @NSFR --- --- 395
RIGHT
580 NASL SHIFT N-BITS LEFT @NASL --- --- 397
581 NASR SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT @NASR --- --- 403
582 NSLL DOUBLE SHIFT @NSLL --- --- 400
N-BITS LEFT
583 NSRL DOUBLE SHIFT @NSRL --- --- 405
N-BITS RIGHT
590 ++ INCREMENT BINARY @++ --- --- 409
591 ++L DOUBLE @++L --- --- 411
INCREMENT BINARY
592 –– DECREMENT BINARY @– – --- --- 413
593 – –L DOUBLE @– –L --- --- 415
DECREMENT BINARY
594 ++B INCREMENT BCD @++B --- --- 417
595 ++BL DOUBLE @++BL --- --- 419
INCREMENT BCD
596 – –B DECREMENT BCD @– –B --- --- 421
597 – –BL DOUBLE DECRE- @– –BL --- --- 423
MENT BCD
600 SIGN 16-BIT TO 32-BIT @SIGN --- --- 494
SIGNED BINARY
601 STR4 FOUR-DIGIT NUM- @STR4 --- --- 534
BER TO ASCII
141

Specification
602 STR8 EIGHT-DIGIT NUMBER @STR8 --- --- 537
TO ASCII
603 STR16 SIXTEEN-DIGIT NUM- @STR16 --- --- 539
BER TO ASCII
604 NUM4 ASCII TO FOUR-DIGIT @NUM4 --- --- 541
NUMBER
605 NUM8 ASCII TO EIGHT-DIGIT @NUM8 --- --- 544
NUMBER
606 NUM16 ASCII TO SIXTEEN- @NUM16 --- --- 545
DIGIT NUMBER
610 ANDL DOUBLE LOGICAL @ANDL --- --- 550
AND
611 ORWL DOUBLE LOGICAL OR @ORWL --- --- 553
612 XORL DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE @XORL --- --- 557
OR
613 XNRL DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE @XNRL --- --- 560
NOR
614 COML DOUBLE @COML --- --- 564
COMPLEMENT
620 ROTB BINARY ROOT @ROTB --- --- 565
621 BCNTC BIT COUNTER @BCNTC --- --- 1275
630 SSET SET STACK @SSET --- --- 703
631 DIM DIMENSION RECORD @DIM --- --- 715
TABLE
632 PUSH PUSH ONTO STACK @PUSH --- --- 706
633 FIFO FIRST IN FIRST OUT @FIFO --- --- 709
634 LIFO LAST IN FIRST OUT @LIFO --- --- 712
635 SETR SET RECORD LOCA- @SETR --- --- 718
TION
636 GETR GET RECORD @GETR --- --- 720
NUMBER
637 SWAP SWAP BYTES @SWAP --- --- 725
638 SNUM STACK SIZE READ @SNUM --- --- 742
639 SREAD STACK DATA READ @SREAD --- --- 744
640 SWRIT STACK DATA WRITE @SWRIT --- --- 747
641 SINS STACK DATA INSERT @SINS --- --- 750
642 SDEL STACK DATA DELETE @SDEL --- --- 753
650 LEN$ STRING LENGTH @LEN$ --- --- 1235
652 LEFT$ GET STRING LEFT @LEFT$ --- --- 1226
653 RGHT$ GET STRING RIGHT @RGHT$ --- --- 1228
654 MID$ GET STRING MIDDLE @MID$ --- --- 1230
656 +$ CONCATENATE @+$ --- --- 1223
STRING
657 INS$ INS$ @INS$ --- --- 1246
658 DEL$ DELETE STRING @DEL$ --- --- 1240
660 FIND$ FIND IN STRING @FIND$ --- --- 1233
661 RPLC$ REPLACE IN STRING @RPLC$ --- --- 1237
664 MOV$ MOV STRING @MOV$ --- --- 1221
665 XCHG$ EXCHANGE STRING @XCHG$ --- --- 1242
666 CLR$ CLEAR STRING @CLR$ --- --- 1245
670 AND =$ AND STRING EQUALS --- --- --- 1250
670 LD =$ LOAD STRING --- --- --- 1250
EQUALS
670 OR =$ OR STRING EQUALS --- --- --- 1250
671 AND <>$ AND STRING NOT --- --- --- 1250
EQUAL
142

Specification
671 LD <>$ LOAD STRING NOT --- --- --- 1250
EQUAL
671 OR <>$ OR STRING NOT --- --- --- 1250
EQUAL
672 AND <$ AND STRING LESS --- --- --- 1250
THAN
672 LD <$ LOAD STRING LESS --- --- --- 1250
THAN
672 OR <$ OR STRING LESS --- --- --- 1250
THAN
673 AND <=$ AND STRING LESS --- --- --- 1250
THAN OR EQUALS
673 LD <=$ LOAD STRING LESS --- --- --- 1250
THAN OR EQUAL
673 OR <=$ OR STRING LESS --- --- --- 1250
THAN OR EQUALS
674 AND >$ AND STRING --- --- --- 1250
GREATER THAN
674 LD >$ LOAD STRING --- --- --- 1250
GREATER THAN
674 OR >$ OR STRING GREATER --- --- --- 1250
THAN
675 AND >=$ AND STRING --- --- --- 1250
GREATER THAN OR
EQUALS
675 LD >=$ LOAD STRING --- --- --- 1250
GREATER THAN OR
EQUALS
675 OR >=$ OR STRING GREATER --- --- --- 1250
THAN OR EQUALS
680 LMT LIMIT CONTROL @LMT --- --- 779
681 BAND DEAD BAND @BAND --- --- 781
CONTROL
682 ZONE DEAD ZONE @ZONE --- --- 784
CONTROL
685 TPO TIME-PROPOR- --- --- --- 787
TIONAL OUTPUT
690 MSKS SET INTERRUPT @MSKS --- --- 839
MASK
691 CLI CLEAR INTERRUPT @CLI --- --- 851
692 MSKR READ INTERRUPT @MSKR --- --- 846
MASK
693 DI DISABLE @DI --- --- 855
INTERRUPTS
694 EI ENABLE --- --- --- 858
INTERRUPTS
700 FREAD READ DATA FILE @FREAD --- --- 1099
701 FWRIT WRITE DATA FILE @FWRIT --- --- 1106
704 TWRIT WRITE TEXT TILE @TWRIT --- --- 1113
720 EXPLT EXPLICIT MESSAGE @EXPLT --- --- 1066
SEND
721 EGATR EXPLICIT GET @EGATR --- --- 1074
ATTRIBUTE
722 ESATR EXPLICIT SET @ESATR --- --- 1081
ATTRIBUTE
723 ECHRD EXPLICIT WORD @ECHRD --- --- 1087
READ
724 ECHWR EXPLICIT WORD @ECHWR --- --- 1091
CLEAR
730 CADD CALENDAR ADD @CADD --- --- 1122
731 CSUB CALENDAR @CSUB --- --- 1126
SUBTRACT
143

Specification
735 DATE CLOCK ADJUSTMENT @DATE --- --- 1134
750 GSBS GLOBAL SUBROU- @GSBS --- --- 824
TINE CALL
751 GSBN GLOBAL SUBROU- --- --- --- 832
TINE ENTRY
752 GRET GLOBAL SUBROU- --- --- --- 835
TINE RETURN
801 BEND BLOCK PROGRAM --- --- --- 1191
END
802 IF CONDITIONAL --- --- --- 1196
BRANCHING BLOCK
802 IF CONDITIONAL --- --- --- 1196
BRANCHING BLOCK
802 IF NOT CONDITIONAL --- --- --- 1196
BRANCHING BLOCK
NOT
803 ELSE ELSE --- --- --- 1196
804 IEND IF END --- --- --- 1196
805 WAIT ONE CYCLE AND --- --- --- 1202
WAIT
805 WAIT ONE CYCLE AND --- --- --- 1202
WAIT
805 WAIT NOT ONE CYCLE AND --- --- --- 1202
WAIT NOT
806 EXIT CONDITIONAL BLOCK --- --- --- 1199
EXIT
806 EXIT CONDITIONAL BLOCK --- --- --- 1199
EXIT
806 EXIT NOT CONDITIONAL BLOCK --- --- --- 1199
EXIT NOT
809 LOOP LOOP --- --- --- 1215
810 LEND LOOP END --- --- --- 1215
810 LEND LOOP END --- --- --- 1215
810 LEND NOT LOOP END NOT --- --- --- 1215
811 BPPS BLOCK PROGRAM --- --- --- 1193
PAUSE
812 BPRS BLOCK PROGRAM --- --- --- 1193
RESTART
813 TIMW HUNDRED-MS TIMER --- --- --- 1206
WAIT
814 CNTW COUNTER WAIT --- --- --- 1209
815 TMHW TEN-MS TIMER WAIT --- --- --- 1212
816 TIMWX HUNDRED-MS TIMER --- --- --- 1206
WAIT
817 TMHWX TEN-MS TIMER WAIT --- --- --- 1212
818 CNTWX COUNTER WAIT --- --- --- 1209
820 TKON TASK ON @TKON --- --- 1255
821 TKOF TASK OFF @TKOF --- --- 1258
840 PWR EXPONENTIAL @PWR --- --- 635
POWER
841 FIXD DOUBLE FLOATING @FIXD --- --- 657
TO 16-BIT BINARY
842 FIXLD DOUBLE FLOATING @FIXLD --- --- 658
TO 32-BIT BINARY
843 DBL 16-BIT BINARY TO @DBL --- --- 660
DOUBLE FLOATING
844 DBLL 32-BIT BINARY TO @DBLL --- --- 661
DOUBLE FLOATING
845 +D DOUBLE FLOATING- @+D --- --- 663
POINT ADD
144

Specification
846 −D DOUBLE FLOATING- @−D --- --- 665
POINT SUBTRACT
847 *D DOUBLE FLOATING- @*D --- --- 667
POINT MULTIPLY
848 /D DOUBLE FLOATING- @/D --- --- 669
POINT DIVIDE
849 RADD DOUBLE DEGREES @RADD --- --- 671
TO RADIANS
850 DEGD DOUBLE RADIANS TO @RADD --- --- 673
DEGREES
851 SIND DOUBLE SINE @SIND --- --- 674
852 COSD DOUBLE COSINE @COSD --- --- 676
853 TAND DOUBLE TANGENT @TAND --- --- 678
854 ASIND DOUBLE ARC SINE @ASIND --- --- 680
855 ACOSD DOUBLE ARC @ACOSD --- --- 682
COSINE
856 ATAND DOUBLE ARC TAN- @ATAND --- --- 684
GENT
857 SQRTD DOUBLE SQUARE @SQRTD --- --- 686
ROOT
858 EXPD DOUBLE EXPONENT @EXPD --- --- 688
859 LOGD DOUBLE LOGARITHM @LOGD --- --- 690
860 PWRD DOUBLE EXPONEN- @PWRD --- --- 692
TIAL POWER
880 INI MODE CONTROL @INI --- --- 864
881 PRV HIGH-SPEED @PRV --- --- 868
COUNTER PV READ
882 CTBL COMPARISON TABLE @CTBL --- --- 878
LOAD
883 PRV2 COUNTER FRE- @PRV2 --- --- 874
QUENCY CONVERT
885 SPED SPEED OUTPUT @SPED --- --- 882
886 PULS SET PULSES @PULS --- --- 887
887 PLS2 PULSE OUTPUT @PLS2 --- --- 890
888 ACC ACCELERATION CON- @ACC --- --- 896
TROL
889 ORG ORIGIN SEARCH @ORG --- --- 903
891 PWN PULSE WITH VARI- @PWN --- --- 906
ABLE DUTY FACTOR
145
146
SECTION 3
Instructions
This section describes each of the instructions that can be used in programming CS/CJ-series PLCs. Instructions are
described in order of function, as classified in Section 2 Summary of Instructions.
3-1 Notation and Layout of Instruction Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

3-2 Instruction Upgrades and New Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
3-2-1 Upgrades for CS1-H/CJ1-H CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
3-3 Sequence Input Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3-3-1 LOAD: LD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3-3-2 LOAD NOT: LD NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3-3-3 AND: AND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3-3-4 AND NOT: AND NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3-3-5 OR: OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3-3-6 OR NOT: OR NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3-3-7 AND LOAD: AND LD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
3-3-8 OR LOAD: OR LD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
3-3-9 Differentiated and Immediate Refreshing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3-3-10 Operation Timing for I/O Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
3-3-11 TR Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
3-3-12 NOT: NOT(520) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3-3-13 CONDITION ON/OFF: UP(521) and DOWN(522) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3-3-14 BIT TEST: TST(350) and TSTN(351) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3-4 Sequence Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
3-4-1 OUTPUT: OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
3-4-2 OUTPUT NOT: OUT NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
3-4-3 KEEP: KEEP(011) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
3-4-4 DIFFERENTIATE UP/DOWN: DIFU(013) and DIFD(014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
3-4-5 SET and RESET: SET and RSET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
3-4-6 MULTIPLE BIT SET/RESET: SETA(530)/RSTA(531) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
3-4-7 SINGLE BIT SET/RESET: SETB(532)/RSTB(533) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
3-4-8 SINGLE BIT OUTPUT: OUTB(534) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
3-5 Sequence Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
3-5-1 END: END(001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
3-5-2 NO OPERATION: NOP(000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
3-5-3 Overview of Interlock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
3-5-4 INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
3-5-5 MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION HOLD,
MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION RELEASE, and
MULTI-INTERLOCK CLEAR: MILH(517), MILR(518), and MILC(519). . . . . . . . . 214
3-5-6 JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004) and JME(005). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
3-5-7 CONDITIONAL JUMP: CJP(510)/CJPN(511) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
3-5-8 MULTIPLE JUMP and JUMP END: JMP0(515) and JME0(516) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
3-5-9 FOR-NEXT LOOPS: FOR(512)/NEXT(513) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
3-5-10 BREAK LOOP: BREAK(514) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
3-6 Timer and Counter Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
3-6-1 HUNDRED-MS TIMER: TIM/TIMX(550). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
3-6-2 TEN-MS TIMER: TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
3-6-3 ONE-MS TIMER: TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
3-6-4 TENTH-MS TIMER: TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
3-6-5 HUNDREDTH-MS TIMER: TMUH(544)/TMUHX(557) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
3-6-6 ACCUMULATIVE TIMER: TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
3-6-7 LONG TIMER: TIML(542)/TIMLX(553). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
147
3-6-8 MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER: MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
3-6-9 COUNTER: CNT/CNTX(546). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
3-6-10 REVERSIBLE COUNTER: CNTR(012)/CNTRX(548) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
3-6-11 RESET TIMER/COUNTER: CNR(545)/CNRX(547). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
3-6-12 Example Timer and Counter Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
3-6-13 Indirect Addressing of Timer/Counter Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
3-7 Comparison Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
3-7-1 Input Comparison Instructions (300 to 328). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
3-7-2 Time Comparison Instructions (341 to 346). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
3-7-3 COMPARE: CMP(020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
3-7-4 DOUBLE COMPARE: CMPL(060) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
3-7-5 SIGNED BINARY COMPARE: CPS(114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
3-7-6 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE: CPSL(115) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
3-7-7 MULTIPLE COMPARE: MCMP(019) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
3-7-8 TABLE COMPARE: TCMP(085) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
3-7-9 BLOCK COMPARE: BCMP(068) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
3-7-10 EXPANDED BLOCK COMPARE: BCMP2(502). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
3-7-11 AREA RANGE COMPARE: ZCP(088). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
3-7-12 DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE: ZCPL(116) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
3-8 Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
3-8-1 MOVE: MOV(021). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
3-8-2 MOVE NOT: MVN(022) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
3-8-3 DOUBLE MOVE: MOVL(498) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
3-8-4 DOUBLE MOVE NOT: MVNL(499) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
3-8-5 MOVE BIT: MOVB(082) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
3-8-6 MOVE DIGIT: MOVD(083) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
3-8-7 MULTIPLE BIT TRANSFER: XFRB(062). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
3-8-8 BLOCK TRANSFER: XFER(070) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
3-8-9 BLOCK SET: BSET(071) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
3-8-10 DATA EXCHANGE: XCHG(073) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
3-8-11 DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE: XCGL(562) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
3-8-12 SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE: DIST(080) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
3-8-13 DATA COLLECT: COLL(081) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
3-8-14 MOVE TO REGISTER: MOVR(560) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
3-8-15 MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REGISTER: MOVRW(561). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
3-9 Data Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
3-9-1 SHIFT REGISTER: SFT(010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
3-9-2 REVERSIBLE SHIFT REGISTER: SFTR(084) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
3-9-3 ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT REGISTER: ASFT(017). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
3-9-4 WORD SHIFT: WSFT(016). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
3-9-5 ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT: ASL(025). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
3-9-6 DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT: ASLL(570). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
3-9-7 ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT: ASR(026) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
3-9-8 DOUBLE SHIFT RIGHT: ASRL(571) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
3-9-9 ROTATE LEFT: ROL(027). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
3-9-10 DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT: ROLL(572) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
3-9-11 ROTATE RIGHT: ROR(028) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
3-9-12 DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT: RORL(573) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
3-9-13 ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT CARRY: RLNC(574) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
3-9-14 DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT CARRY: RLNL(576). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
3-9-15 ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT CARRY: RRNC(575) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
3-9-16 DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT CARRY: RRNL(577) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
3-9-17 ONE DIGIT SHIFT LEFT: SLD(074) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
3-9-18 ONE DIGIT SHIFT RIGHT: SRD(075). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
3-9-19 SHIFT N-BIT DATA LEFT: NSFL(578) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
3-9-20 SHIFT N-BIT DATA RIGHT: NSFR(579). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
3-9-21 SHIFT N-BITS LEFT: NASL(580) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
148
3-9-22 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS LEFT: NSLL(582) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
3-9-23 SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT: NASR(581) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
3-9-24 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT: NSRL(583) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
3-10 Increment/Decrement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
3-10-1 INCREMENT BINARY: ++(590) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
3-10-2 DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY: ++L(591) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
3-10-3 DECREMENT BINARY: – –(592). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
3-10-4 DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY: – –L(593). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
3-10-5 INCREMENT BCD: ++B(594) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
3-10-6 DOUBLE INCREMENT BCD: ++BL(595) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
3-10-7 DECREMENT BCD: – –B(596) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
3-10-8 DOUBLE DECREMENT BCD: – –BL(597). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
3-11 Symbol Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
3-11-1 SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +(400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
3-11-2 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +L(401) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
3-11-3 SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY: +C(402). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
3-11-4 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY: +CL(403) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
3-11-5 BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +B(404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
3-11-6 DOUBLE BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +BL(405) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
3-11-7 BCD ADD WITH CARRY: +BC(406) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
3-11-8 DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH CARRY: +BCL(407). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
3-11-9 SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –(410) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
3-11-10 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –L(411) . . . . . . . . . 442
3-11-11 SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –C(412) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
3-11-12 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –CL(413) . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
3-11-13 BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –B(414) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
3-11-14 DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –BL(415) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
3-11-15 BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –BC(416). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
3-11-16 DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –BCL(417) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
3-11-17 SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *(420). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
3-11-18 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *L(421) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
3-11-19 UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *U(422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
3-11-20 DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *UL(423). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
3-11-21 BCD MULTIPLY: *B(424). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
3-11-22 DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY: *BL(425). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
3-11-23 SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /(430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
3-11-24 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /L(431) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
3-11-25 UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /U(432) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
3-11-26 DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /UL(433). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
3-11-27 BCD DIVIDE: /B(434). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
3-11-28 DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE: /BL(435) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
3-12 Conversion Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
3-12-1 BCD TO BINARY: BIN(023). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
3-12-2 DOUBLE BCD TO DOUBLE BINARY: BINL(058) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
3-12-3 BINARY TO BCD: BCD(024) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
3-12-4 DOUBLE BINARY TO DOUBLE BCD: BCDL(059) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
3-12-5 2’S COMPLEMENT: NEG(160) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
3-12-6 DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT: NEGL(161) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
3-12-7 16-BIT TO 32-BIT SIGNED BINARY: SIGN(600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
3-12-8 DATA DECODER: MLPX(076) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
3-12-9 DATA ENCODER: DMPX(077) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
3-12-10 ASCII CONVERT: ASC(086) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
3-12-11 ASCII TO HEX: HEX(162) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
3-12-12 COLUMN TO LINE: LINE(063). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
3-12-13 LINE TO COLUMN: COLM(064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
3-12-14 SIGNED BCD TO BINARY: BINS(470). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
3-12-15 DOUBLE SIGNED BCD TO BINARY: BISL(472) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
149
3-12-16 SIGNED BINARY TO BCD: BCDS(471) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
3-12-17 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY TO BCD: BDSL(473) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
3-12-18 GRAY CODE CONVERT: GRY(474) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
3-12-19 FOUR-DIGIT NUMBER TO ASCII: STR4(601) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
3-12-20 EIGHT-DIGIT NUMBER TO ASCII: STR8(602). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
3-12-21 SIXTEEN-DIGIT NUMBER TO ASCII: STR16(603) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
3-12-22 ASCII TO FOUR-DIGIT NUMBER: NUM4(604) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
3-12-23 ASCII TO EIGHT-DIGIT NUMBER: NUM8(605). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
3-12-24 ASCII TO SIXTEEN-DIGIT NUMBER: NUM16(606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
3-13 Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
3-13-1 LOGICAL AND: ANDW(034) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
3-13-2 DOUBLE LOGICAL AND: ANDL(610) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
3-13-3 LOGICAL OR: ORW(035) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
3-13-4 DOUBLE LOGICAL OR: ORWL(611). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
3-13-5 EXCLUSIVE OR: XORW(036). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
3-13-6 DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE OR: XORL(612). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
3-13-7 EXCLUSIVE NOR: XNRW(037) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
3-13-8 DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE NOR: XNRL(613) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
3-13-9 COMPLEMENT: COM(029) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
3-13-10 DOUBLE COMPLEMENT: COML(614) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
3-14 Special Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
3-14-1 BINARY ROOT: ROTB(620). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
3-14-2 BCD SQUARE ROOT: ROOT(072). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
3-14-3 ARITHMETIC PROCESS: APR(069) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
3-14-4 FLOATING POINT DIVIDE: FDIV(079) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
3-14-5 BIT COUNTER: BCNT(067). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
3-15 Floating-point Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
3-15-1 FLOATING TO 16-BIT: FIX(450). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
3-15-2 FLOATING TO 32-BIT: FIXL(451) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
3-15-3 16-BIT TO FLOATING: FLT(452) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
3-15-4 32-BIT TO FLOATING: FLTL(453) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
3-15-5 FLOATING-POINT ADD: +F(454). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
3-15-6 FLOATING-POINT SUBTRACT: –F(455) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
3-15-7 FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY: *F(456) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
3-15-8 FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE: /F(457) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
3-15-9 DEGREES TO RADIANS: RAD(458) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
3-15-10 RADIANS TO DEGREES: DEG(459) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
3-15-11 SINE: SIN(460) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
3-15-12 HIGH-SPEED SINE: SINQ(475). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
3-15-13 COSINE: COS(461) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
3-15-14 HIGH-SPEED COSINE: COSQ(476) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
3-15-15 TANGENT: TAN(462) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
3-15-16 HIGH-SPEED TANGENT: TANQ(477) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
3-15-17 ARC SINE: ASIN(463) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
3-15-18 ARC COSINE: ACOS(464) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
3-15-19 ARC TANGENT: ATAN(465) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
3-15-20 SQUARE ROOT: SQRT(466) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
3-15-21 EXPONENT: EXP(467) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
3-15-22 LOGARITHM: LOG(468) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
3-15-23 EXPONENTIAL POWER: PWR(840) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
3-15-24 Single-precision Floating-point Comparison Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
3-15-25 FLOATING-POINT TO ASCII: FSTR(448) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
3-15-26 ASCII TO FLOATING-POINT: FVAL(449) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
3-15-27 MOVE FLOATING-POINT (SINGLE): MOVF(469) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
3-16 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D Only) . . . . . . . . 651
3-16-1 DOUBLE FLOATING TO 16-BIT: FIXD(841). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
3-16-2 DOUBLE FLOATING TO 32-BIT: FIXLD(842) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
150
3-16-3 16-BIT TO DOUBLE FLOATING: DBL(843) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
3-16-4 32-BIT TO DOUBLE FLOATING: DBLL(844) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
3-16-5 DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT ADD: +D(845) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
3-16-6 DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT SUBTRACT: –D(846) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
3-16-7 DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY: *D(847). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
3-16-8 DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE: /D(848) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
3-16-9 DOUBLE DEGREES TO RADIANS: RADD(849) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
3-16-10 DOUBLE RADIANS TO DEGREES: DEGD(850) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
3-16-11 DOUBLE SINE: SIND(851) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
3-16-12 DOUBLE COSINE: COSD(852) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
3-16-13 DOUBLE TANGENT: TAND(853) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
3-16-14 DOUBLE ARC SINE: ASIND(854) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
3-16-15 DOUBLE ARC COSINE: ACOSD(855) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
3-16-16 DOUBLE ARC TANGENT: ATAND(856) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
3-16-17 DOUBLE SQUARE ROOT: SQRTD(857) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
3-16-18 DOUBLE EXPONENT: EXPD(858) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
3-16-19 DOUBLE LOGARITHM: LOGD(859) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
3-16-20 DOUBLE EXPONENTIAL POWER: PWRD(860) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
3-16-21 Double-precision Floating-point Input Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
3-17 Table Data Processing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
3-17-1 SET STACK: SSET(630) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
3-17-2 PUSH ONTO STACK: PUSH(632) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
3-17-3 FIRST IN FIRST OUT: FIFO(633) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
3-17-4 LAST IN FIRST OUT: LIFO(634) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
3-17-5 DIMENSION RECORD TABLE: DIM(631). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
3-17-6 SET RECORD LOCATION: SETR(635) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
3-17-7 GET RECORD NUMBER: GETR(636) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
3-17-8 DATA SEARCH: SRCH(181) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
3-17-9 SWAP BYTES: SWAP(637). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
3-17-10 FIND MAXIMUM: MAX(182) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
3-17-11 FIND MINIMUM: MIN(183) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
3-17-12 SUM: SUM(184) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
3-17-13 FRAME CHECKSUM: FCS(180) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
3-17-14 STACK SIZE READ: SNUM(638) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
3-17-15 STACK DATA READ: SREAD(639). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
3-17-16 STACK DATA OVERWRITE: SWRIT(640) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
3-17-17 STACK DATA INSERT: SINS(641). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
3-17-18 STACK DATA DELETE: SDEL(642) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
3-18 Data Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
3-18-1 PID CONTROL: PID(190) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
3-18-2 PID CONTROL WITH AUTOTUNING: PIDAT(191) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
3-18-3 LIMIT CONTROL: LMT(680) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
3-18-4 DEAD BAND CONTROL: BAND(681) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
3-18-5 DEAD ZONE CONTROL: ZONE(682) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
3-18-6 TIME-PROPORTIONAL OUTPUT: TPO(685) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
3-18-7 SCALING: SCL(194). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
3-18-8 SCALING 2: SCL2(486) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
3-18-9 SCALING 3: SCL3(487) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
3-18-10 AVERAGE: AVG(195) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
3-19 Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
3-19-1 SUBROUTINE CALL: SBS(091) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
3-19-2 MACRO: MCRO(099) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
3-19-3 SUBROUTINE ENTRY: SBN(092). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
3-19-4 SUBROUTINE RETURN: RET(093) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
3-19-5 GLOBAL SUBROUTINE CALL: GSBS(750) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
3-19-6 GLOBAL SUBROUTINE ENTRY: GSBN(751) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
3-19-7 GLOBAL SUBROUTINE RETURN: GRET(752) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
151
3-20 Interrupt Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
3-20-1 SET INTERRUPT MASK: MSKS(690) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
3-20-2 READ INTERRUPT MASK: MSKR(692) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
3-20-3 CLEAR INTERRUPT: CLI(691) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
3-20-4 DISABLE INTERRUPTS: DI(693) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
3-20-5 ENABLE INTERRUPTS: EI(694) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
3-20-6 Summary of Interrupt Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
3-21 High-speed Counter/Pulse Output Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
3-21-1 MODE CONTROL: INI(880) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
3-21-2 HIGH-SPEED COUNTER PV READ: PRV(881) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only). . . . . . 868
3-21-3 COUNTER FREQUENCY CONVERT: PRV2(883). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
3-21-4 REGISTER COMPARISON TABLE: CTBL(882) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only) . . . . . 878
3-21-5 SPEED OUTPUT: SPED(885) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
3-21-6 SET PULSES: PULS(886) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
3-21-7 PULSE OUTPUT: PLS2(887) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
3-21-8 ACCELERATION CONTROL: ACC(888) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 896
3-21-9 ORIGIN SEARCH: ORG(889) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
3-21-10 PULSE WITH VARIABLE DUTY FACTOR: PWM(891) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only) 906
3-22 Step Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
3-22-1 STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
3-23 Basic I/O Unit Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
3-23-1 I/O REFRESH: IORF(097). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
3-23-2 SPECIAL I/O UNIT I/O REFRESH: FIORF(225) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
3-23-3 CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH: DLNK(226) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
3-23-4 7-SEGMENT DECODER: SDEC(078) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
3-23-5 DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT – DSW(210) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
3-23-6 TEN KEY INPUT – TKY(211) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
3-23-7 HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT – HKY(212) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
3-23-8 MATRIX INPUT: MTR(213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
3-23-9 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT – 7SEG(214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
3-23-10 INTELLIGENT I/O READ: IORD(222) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
3-23-11 INTELLIGENT I/O WRITE: IOWR(223) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
3-24 Serial Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
3-24-1 Serial Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
3-24-2 PROTOCOL MACRO: PMCR(260) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
3-24-3 TRANSMIT: TXD(236) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
3-24-4 RECEIVE: RXD(235) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
3-24-5 TRANSMIT VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS UNIT: TXDU(256). . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
3-24-6 RECEIVE VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS UNIT: RXDU(255) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
3-24-7 CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP: STUP(237) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
3-25 Network Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
3-25-1 About SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
3-25-2 About Explicit Message Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
3-25-3 NETWORK SEND: SEND(090) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
3-25-4 NETWORK RECEIVE: RECV(098) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
3-25-5 DELIVER COMMAND: CMND(490) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056
3-25-6 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND: EXPLT(720). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
3-25-7 EXPLICIT GET ATTRIBUTE: EGATR(721) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
3-25-8 EXPLICIT SET ATTRIBUTE: ESATR(722). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
3-25-9 EXPLICIT WORD READ: ECHRD(723) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
3-25-10 EXPLICIT WORD WRITE: ECHWR(724) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
3-26 File Memory Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
3-26-1 Precautions when Using Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
3-26-2 READ DATA FILE: FREAD(700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
3-26-3 WRITE DATA FILE: FWRIT(701) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
3-26-4 WRITE TEXT FILE: TWRIT(704) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
152
3-27 Display Instructions: DISPLAY MESSAGE: MSG(046). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
3-28 Clock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
3-28-1 CALENDAR ADD: CADD(730) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
3-28-2 CALENDAR SUBTRACT: CSUB(731) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
3-28-3 HOURS TO SECONDS: SEC(065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
3-28-4 SECONDS TO HOURS: HMS(066) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
3-28-5 CLOCK ADJUSTMENT: DATE(735) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
3-29 Debugging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
3-29-1 Trace Memory Sampling: TRSM(045). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
3-30 Failure Diagnosis Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
3-30-1 FAILURE ALARM: FAL(006) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
3-30-2 SEVERE FAILURE ALARM: FALS(007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
3-30-3 FAILURE POINT DETECTION: FPD(269) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
3-31 Other Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
3-31-1 SET CARRY: STC(040) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
3-31-2 CLEAR CARRY: CLC(041) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
3-31-3 SELECT EM BANK: EMBC(281) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
3-31-4 EXTEND MAXIMUM CYCLE TIME: WDT(094) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
3-31-5 SAVE CONDITION FLAGS: CCS(282) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
3-31-6 LOAD CONDITION FLAGS: CCL(283) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
3-31-7 CONVERT ADDRESS FROM CV: FRMCV(284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
3-31-8 CONVERT ADDRESS TO CV: TOCV(285) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
3-31-9 DISABLE PERIPHERAL SERVICING: IOSP(287) (CS1-H/CJ1-H/CJ1M Only). . . . 1183
3-31-10 ENABLE PERIPHERAL SERVICING: IORS(288) (CS1-H/CJ1-H/CJ1M Only) . . . . 1185
3-32 Block Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
3-32-1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
3-32-2 BLOCK PROGRAM BEGIN/END: BPRG(096)/BEND(801) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
3-32-3 BLOCK PROGRAM PAUSE/RESTART: BPPS(811)/BPRS(812) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
3-32-4 Branching: IF(802), ELSE(803), and IEND(804) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
3-32-5 CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT (NOT): EXIT (NOT)(806) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
3-32-6 ONE CYCLE AND WAIT (NOT): WAIT(805)/WAIT(805) NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
3-32-7 HUNDRED-MS TIMER WAIT: TIMW(813) and TIMWX(816) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
3-32-8 COUNTER WAIT: CNTW(814) and CNTWX(818) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
3-32-9 TEN-MS TIMER WAIT: TMHW(815) and TMHWX(817) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
3-32-10 Loop Control: LOOP(809)/LEND(810)/LEND(810) NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
3-33 Text String Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
3-33-1 Text String Processing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
3-33-2 MOV STRING: MOV$(664) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
3-33-3 CONCATENATE STRING: +$(656) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
3-33-4 GET STRING LEFT: LEFT$(652) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226
3-33-5 GET STRING RIGHT: RGHT$(653) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
3-33-6 GET STRING MIDDLE: MID$(654) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230
3-33-7 FIND IN STRING: FIND$(660) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233
3-33-8 STRING LENGTH: LEN$(650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
3-33-9 REPLACE IN STRING: RPLC$(661) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
3-33-10 DELETE STRING: DEL$(658) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240
3-33-11 EXCHANGE STRING: XCHG$(665). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242
3-33-12 CLEAR STRING: CLR$(666) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
3-33-13 INSERT INTO STRING: INS$(657) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246
3-33-14 String Comparison Instructions (670 to 675) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
3-34 Task Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
3-34-1 TASK ON: TKON(820) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
3-34-2 TASK OFF: TKOF(821). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258
3-35 Model Conversion Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
3-35-1 BLOCK TRANSFER: XFERC(565) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
3-35-2 SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE: DISTC(566) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
3-35-3 DATA COLLECT: COLLC(567) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269
153
3-35-4 MOVE BIT: MOVBC(568). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
3-35-5 BIT COUNTER: BCNTC(621) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
3-35-6 GET VARIABLE ID: GETID(286) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
154
Notation and Layout of Instruction Descriptions Section 3-1
3-1 Notation and Layout of Instruction Descriptions

Instructions are described in groups by function. Refer to 2-3 Alphabetical List
of Instructions by Mnemonic for a list of instructions by mnemonic that lists the
page number in this section for each instruction.
The description of each instruction is organized as described in the following
table.
Item Contents
Name and Mnemonic The heading of each section consists of the name of the instruction followed by the
mnemonic with the function code in parentheses. Example: MOVE BIT: MOVB(082)
Purpose The basic purpose of the instruction is described after the section heading.
Ladder Symbol and Operand The ladder symbol used to represent the instruction on the CX-Programmer is
Names shown, as in the example for the MOVE BIT instruction given below. The name of
each operand is also provided with the ladder symbol.
MOVB(082)
S S: Source word or data
C C: Control word
D D: Destination word
Variations Variations The variations that can be used to control execution of the instruction under special
conditions are given using the mnemonic form. Any variation that is not supported by
an instruction is given as “Not supported.”
• Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition: The instruction is executed as long as
it receives an ON execution condition.
• Executed Once for Upward Differentiation: The instruction is executed during
the next cycle only after the execution condition changes from OFF to ON.
• Executed Once for Downward Differentiation: The instruction is executed dur-
ing the next cycle only after the execution condition changes from ON to OFF.
• Always Executed: The instruction does not require an execution condition and
is executed each cycle.
• Creates ON Condition....: The instruction is executed each cycle to create an
execution condition for the next instruction.
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MOVB(082)

Variations Variations Executed Once for Upward Differentia- @MOVB(082)
tion
Executed Once for Downward Differenti- Not supported.
ation
Immediate Immediate refreshing can be specified for some instructions to refresh I/O when the
Refreshing instruction is executed. If immediate refreshing is supported, the specification is
Specification given using the mnemonic form. If immediate refreshing is not support by an instruc-
tion “Not supported” is given.
Immediate Refreshing Specification Not supported.
Applicable Program Areas The program areas in which the instruction can be used are specified. “OK” indicates
the areas in which the instruction can be used.
Block program Step program Subroutines Interrupt tasks

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
155
Item Contents
Operands Where necessary, the meaning of words and bits used in specific operands, such
as control words, is given.
15 8 7 0
C m n
Source bit: 00 to 0F
(0 to 15 decimal)
Destination bit: 00 to 0F
(0 to 15 decimal)
Operand Specifications The memory areas addresses that can be used each operand are listed in a table
like the following one. The letters used in the column headings on the left are the
same as those used in the ladder symbol. “---” is used to indicate when an area can-
not be specific for an operand.
Area S C D
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
Work Area W000 to W511
Holding Bit Area H000 to H511
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to A959 A448 to A959
Timer Area T0000 to T4095
Counter Area C0000 to C4095
DM Area D00000 to D32767
EM Area without E00000 to E32767
bank
Description The function of the instruction and the operands used in the instruction are
described.
Flags The flags table indicates the status of the condition flags immediately after execution
of the instruction. Any flags that are not listed are not affected by the instruction.
“OFF” indicates that a flag is turned OFF immediately after execution of the instruc-
tion regardless of the results of executing the instruction.
Name Label Operation

Error Flag ER ON if control data is within ranges.
OFF in all other cases.
Equals Flag = OFF
Negative Flag N OFF
Precautions Special precautions required in using the instruction are provided. Be sure to read
and follow these precautions.
Example An example of using the instruction with specific operands is provided to further
explain the function of the instruction.
Constants Constants input for operands are given as listed below.

Operand Descriptions and Operand Specifications
• Operands Specifying Bit Strings (Normally Input as Hexadecimal):
Only the hexadecimal form is given for operands specifying bit strings,
e.g., only “#0000 to #FFFF” is specified as the S operand for the
MOV(021) instruction. On the CX-Programmer, however, bit strings can
be input in decimal form by using the & prefix.
• Operands Specifying Numeric Values (Normally Input as Decimal, Includ-
ing Jump Numbers):
Both the decimal and hexadecimal forms are given for operands specify-
ing numeric values, e.g., “#0000 to #FFFF” and “&0 to &65535” are given
for the N operand for the XFER(070) instruction.
156
• Operands Indicating Control Numbers (Except for Jump Numbers):

The decimal form is given for control numbers, e.g., “0 to 1023” is given
for the N operand for the SBS(091) instruction.
Examples
In the examples, constants are given using the CX-Programmer notation, e.g.,
operands specifying numeric values are given in decimal for with an & prefix,
as shown in the following example.
XFER
&10
D00100
D00200
The input methods for constants for the Programming Devices are given in the
following table.
Operand CX- Programming Console
Programmer
Operands specify- Input as deci- The Cont/# Key can be pressed to input hexa-
ing bit strings (normal with an & decimal values by default with an # prefix. The
mally input as prefix or input CHG Key can then be pressed to rotate
hexadecimal) as hexadeci- between hexadecimal (with # prefix), signed
Operands specify- mal with an # decimal (with +/–), and unsigned decimal (with
ing numeric values prefix. (See & prefix).
(normally input as note.)
decimal)
Operands specify- Input as deci- Input directly in decimal form.
ing control numbers mal with an # If the & prefix is automatically added, the CHG
(except for jump prefix. (See Key can be pressed to rotate between
numbers) note.) unsigned decimal (with & prefix), hexadecimal
(with # prefix), and signed decimal (with +/–).
If no prefix is displayed, the value must be
entered in decimal form.
Note When operands are input on the CX-Programmer, the input ranges will be dis-
played along with the appropriate prefixes.
Condition Flags Programming Console labels are used for condition flags in this section. With
the CX-Programmer, the condition flags are registered in advance as global
symbols with “P_” in front of the symbol name.
Flag CX-Programmer label Programming Console label
Error Flag P_ER ER
Access Error P_AER AER
Flag
Carry Flag P_CY CY
Greater Than P_GT >
Flag
Equals Flag P_EQ =
Less Than Flag P_LT <
Negative Flag P_N N
Overflow Flag P_OF OF
Underflow Flag P_UF UF
Greater Than or P_GE >=
Equals Flag
Not Equal Flag P_NE <>
157
Instruction Upgrades and New Instructions Section 3-2
Flag CX-Programmer label Programming Console label

Less Than or P_LE <=
Equals Flag
Always ON Flag P_On ON
Always OFF P_Off OFF
Flag
Symbol Instructions Some of the C/CV-series PLC instructions have been changed to different
instructions with the same functionality for the CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Instruction group C/CV Series CS/CJ Series
Sequence Control JMP #0 / JME #0 JMP0 / JME0
Comparison EQU AND=
Data Movement MOVQ MOV
Increment/Decre- INC ++B
ment INCL ++BL
INCB ++
INBL ++L
DEC --B
DECL --BL
DECB --
DCBL --L
Symbol Math ADB +C
ADBL +CL
ADD +BC
ADDL +BCL
SBB -C
SBBL -CL
SUB -BC
SUBL -BCL
MBS *
MBSL *L
MLB *U
MUL *B
MULL *BL
DBS /
DBSL /L
DVB /U
DIV /B
DIVL /BL
Interrupt Control INT MSKS / MSKR / CLIDI / EI
3-2 Instruction Upgrades and New Instructions

This section lists the instruction upgrades for CS1 CPU Units with the -EV1
suffix and CS1-H/CJ1-H CPU Units.
3-2-1 Upgrades for CS1-H/CJ1-H CPU Units

New Instructions The following instructions have been added to the CS1-H and CJ1-H CPU
Units.
158
Sequence Output Instructions

SINGLE BIT SET, SETB(532)
SINGLE BIT RESET, RSTB(533)
SINGLE BIT OUTPUT, OUTB(534)
Data Comparison Instructions
AREA RANGE COMPARE, ZCP(088)
DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE, ZCPL(116)
Floating Point Calculation and Conversion Instructions
Floating Point Data Comparison Instructions: =F, <>F, <F, <=F, >F, and >=F (329 to
334)
FLOATING POINT TO ASCII, FSTR(448)
ASCII TO FLOATING POINT, VAL(449)
Double-precision Floating Point Calculation and Conversion Instructions
Double-precision Comparison Instructions: =D, <>D, <D, <=D, >D, and >=D (335 to
340)
DOUBLE FLOATING TO 16-BIT BINARY, FIXD(841)
DOUBLE FLOATING TO 32-BIT BINARY, FIXLD(8420)
16-BIT BINARY TO DOUBLE FLOATING, DBL(843)
32-BIT BINARY TO DOUBLE FLOATING, DBLL(844)
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT ADD, +D(845)
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT SUBTRACT, −D(846)
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY, *D(847)
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE, /D(848)
DOUBLE DEGREES TO RADIANS, RADD(849)
DOUBLE RADIANS TO DEGREES, DEGD(850)
DOUBLE SINE, SIND(851)
DOUBLE COSINE, COSD(852)
DOUBLE TANGENT, TAND(853)
DOUBLE ARC SINE, ASIND(854)
DOUBLE ARC COSINE, ACOSD(855)
DOUBLE ARC TANGENT, ATAND(856)
DOUBLE SQUARE ROOT, SQRTD(857)
DOUBLE EXPONENT, EXPD(858)
DOUBLE LOGARITHM, LOGD(859)
DOUBLE EXPONENTIAL POWER, PWRD(860)
Table Data Processing Instructions
STACK SIZE READ, SNUM(638)
STACK DATA READ, SREAD(639)
STACK DATA WRITE, SWRIT(640)
STACK DATA INSERT, SINS(641)
STACK DATA DELETE, SDEL(642)
Data Control Instructions
PID CONTROL WITH AUTOTUNING, PIDAT(191)
Subroutine Instructions
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE CALL, GSBS(750)
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE ENTRY, GSBN(751)
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE RETURN, GRET(752)
I/O Unit Instructions
CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH, DLNK(226)
Other Instructions
SAVE CONDITION FLAGS, CCS(282)
LOAD CONDITION FLAGS, CCL(283)
CONVERT ADDRESS FROM CV, FRMCV(284)
CONVERT ADDRESS TO CV, TOCV(285)
DISABLE PERIPHERAL SERVICING, IOSP(287)
ENABLE PERIPHERAL SERVICING, IORS(288)
159
New Instructions The following instructions have been upgraded for the CS1-H and CJ1-H CPU
Units.
Special Math Instructions
ARITHMETIC PROCESS, APR(069)
Failure Diagnosis Instructions
FAILURE ALARM, FAL(006)
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM, FALS(007)
160
Sequence Input Instructions Section 3-3
3-3 Sequence Input Instructions

3-3-1 LOAD: LD
Purpose Indicates a logical start and creates an ON/OFF execution condition based on
the ON/OFF status of the specified operand bit.
Ladder Symbol Bus bar Starting point of block
Variations
Variations Restarts Logic and Creates ON Each Cycle LD
Operand Bit is ON
Restarts Logic and Creates ON Once for @LD
Upward Differentiation
Restarts Logic and Creates ON Once for %LD
Downward Differentiation
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !LD
Combined Refreshes Input Bit, Restarts Logic, and !@LD
Variations Creates ON Once for Upward Differentiation
(See note.)
Refreshes Input Bit, Restarts Logic, and !%LD
Creates ON Once for Downward Differentiation
(See note.)
Note Immediate refreshing is not supported by CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU
Systems.
Applicable Program Areas

Block program areas Step program areas Subroutines Interrupt tasks
OK OK OK OK
Operand Specifications
Area LD operand bit
Auxiliary Bit Area A00000 to A95915
Task Flag Area TK0000 to TK0031
Condition Flags ER, CY, N, OF, UF, >, =, <, >=, <>, <=, A1, A0
Clock Pulses 0.02 s, 0.1 s, 0.2 s, 1 s, 1 min
TR Area TR0 to TR15
DM Area ---
EM Area without bank ---
EM Area with bank ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
161
Area LD operand bit

Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Indirect addressing ,IR0 to ,IR15
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to +2047 ,IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
, –(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description LD is used for the first normally open bit from the bus bar or for the first nor-
mally open bit of a logic block. If there is no immediate refreshing specifica-
tion, the specified bit in I/O memory is read. If there is an immediate
refreshing specification, the status of the Basic Input Unit’s input terminal is
read and used.
LD is used in the following circumstances as an instruction for indicating a log-
ical start.
• When directly connecting to the bus bar.
• When logic blocks are connected by AND LD or OR LD, i.e., at the begin-
ning of a logic block.
The AND LOAD and OR LOAD instructions are used to connect in series or in
parallel logic blocks beginning with LD or LD NOT.
At least one LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction is required for the execution con-
dition when output-related instructions cannot be connected directly to the
bus bar. If there is no LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction, a programming error
will occur with the program check by the Peripheral Device.
When logic blocks are connected by AND LOAD or OR LOAD instructions, the
total number of AND LOAD/OR LOAD instructions must match the total num-
ber of LOAD/LOAD NOT instructions minus1. If they do not match, a program-
ming error will occur. For details, refer to 3-3-7 AND LOAD: AND LD and 3-3-
8 OR LOAD: OR LD.
Flags There are no flags affected by this instruction.
Precautions Differentiate up (@) or differentiate down (%) can be specified for LD. If differ-
entiate up (@) is specified, the execution condition is turned ON for one cycle
only after the status of the operand bit goes from OFF to ON. If differentiate
down (%) is specified, the execution condition is turned ON for one cycle only
after the status of the operand bit goes from ON to OFF.
Immediate refreshing (!) can be specified for LD. An immediate refresh
instruction updates the status of the input bit just before the instruction is exe-
cuted for Basic Input Units (but not Basic Input Units on Slave Racks or for
C200H Group 2 Multi-point Input Units).
For LD, it is possible to combine immediate refreshing and up or down differ-
entiation (!@ or !%). If either of these is specified, the input is refreshed from
the Basic Input Unit just before the instruction is executed and the execution
condition is turned ON for one cycle only after the status goes from OFF to
ON, or from ON to OFF.
162
Example
Instruction Operand
AND LD
LD 000000 OR LD
LD 000001
LD 000002 OR LD
AND 000003
OR LD ---
AND LD ---
LD NOT 000004
AND 000005
OR LD ---
OUT 000100
3-3-2 LOAD NOT: LD NOT

Purpose Indicates a logical start and creates an ON/OFF execution condition based on
the reverse of the ON/OFF status of the specified operand bit.
Ladder Symbol Bus bar Starting point of block
Variations
Variations Restarts Logic and Creates ON Each Cycle Operand LD NOT
Bit is OFF
Restarts Logic and Creates ON Once for Upward @LD NOT
Differentiation (See note 1.)
Restarts Logic and Creates ON Once for Downward %LD NOT
Differentiation (See note 1.)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note 2.) !LD NOT
Combined Refreshes Input Bit, Restarts Logic, and Creates ON !@LD NOT
Variations Once for Upward Differentiation (See note 3.)
Refreshes Input Bit, Restarts Logic, and Creates ON !%LD NOT
Once for Downward Differentiation (See note 3.)
Note 1. The following variations are supported by only the CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M,
or CS1D CPU Units: @LD NOT, %LD NOT, !@LD NOT, and !%LD NOT.
2. Immediate refreshing is not supported by CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-
CPU Systems.
3. Combined variations are supported by CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU
Systems and CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units only.
163

OK OK OK OK
Area LD NOT bit operand
Condition Flags ER, CY, N, OF, UF, >, =, <, >=, <>, <=, ON, OFF, AER
TR Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description LD NOT is used for the first normally closed bit from the bus bar, or for the first
normally closed bit of a logic block. If there is no immediate refreshing specifi-
cation, the specified bit in I/O memory is read and reversed. If there is an
immediate refreshing specification, the status of the Basic Input Unit’s input
terminal is read, reversed, and used.
LD NOT is used in the following circumstances as an instruction for indicating
a logical start.
• When directly connecting to the bus bar.
• When logic blocks are connected by AND LD or OR LD. (Used at the
beginning of a logic block.)
The AND LOAD and OR LOAD instructions are used to connect in series or in
parallel logic blocks beginning with LD or LD NOT.
At least one LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction is required for the execution con-
dition when output-related instructions cannot be connected directly to the
bus bar. If there is no LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction, a program error will
occur with the program check by the Peripheral Device.
When logic blocks are connected by AND LOAD or OR LOAD instructions, the
ber of LOAD/LOAD NOT instructions minus1. If they do not match, a program-
ming error will occur.
164
Precautions Immediate refreshing (!) can be specified for LD NOT. An immediate refresh
cuted for Basic Input Units (but not Basic Input Units on Slave Racks or for
Example
Instruction Operand
LD 000000 AND LD
OR LD
LD 000001
LD 000002 OR LD
AND 000003
OR LD ---
AND LD ---
LD NOT 000004
AND 000005
OR LD ---
OUT 000100
3-3-3 AND: AND

Purpose Takes a logical AND of the status of the specified operand bit and the current
execution condition.
Ladder Symbol
Variations
Variations Creates ON Each Cycle AND Result is ON AND
Creates ON Once for Upward Differentiation @AND
Creates ON Once for Downward Differentiation %AND
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !AND
Combined Refreshes Input Bit and Creates ON Once for !@AND
Variations Upward Differentiation (See note.)
Refreshes Input Bit and Creates ON Once for !%AND
Downward Differentiation (See note.)
Systems.
OK OK OK OK
165
Area AND bit operand
TR Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description AND is used for a normally open bit connected in series. AND cannot be
directly connected to the bus bar, and cannot be used at the beginning of a
logic block. If there is no immediate refreshing specification, the specified bit
in I/O memory is read. If there is an immediate refreshing specification, the
status of the Basic Input Unit’s input terminal is read.
Precautions Differentiate up (@) or differentiate down (%) can be specified for AND. If dif-
ferentiate up (@) is specified, the execution condition is turned ON for one
cycle only after the status of the operand bit goes from OFF to ON. If differen-
tiate down (%) is specified, the execution condition is turned ON for one cycle
only after the status of the operand bit goes from ON to OFF.
Immediate refreshing (!) can be specified for AND. An immediate refresh
cuted from the Basic Input Unit (but not Basic Input Units on Slave Racks or
for C200H Group 2 Multi-point Input Units).
For AND, it is possible to combine immediate refreshing and up or down differ-
condition is turned ON for one cycle only after the status goes from OFF to
ON, or from ON to OFF.
AND cannot be used for addresses in the DM and EM Areas. Use AND
TST(350) instead.
166
Example
Instruction Operand
LD 000000
AND 000001
LD 000002
AND 000003
LD 000004
AND NOT 000005
OR LD ---
AND LD ---
OUT 000006
3-3-4 AND NOT: AND NOT

Purpose Reverses the status of the specified operand bit and takes a logical AND with
the current execution condition.
Ladder Symbol
Variations
Variations Creates ON Each Cycle AND NOT Result is ON AND NOT
Creates ON Once for Upward Differentiation (See @AND NOT
note 1.)
Creates ON Once for Downward Differentiation (See %AND NOT
note 1.)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note 2.) !AND NOT
Combined Refreshes Input Bit and Creates ON Once for !@AND NOT
Variations Upward Differentiation (See note 3.)
Refreshes Input Bit and Creates ON Once for !%AND NOT
Downward Differentiation (See note 3.)
or CS1D CPU Units: @AND NOT, %AND NOT, !@AND NOT, and !%AND
NOT.
CPU Systems.
OK OK OK OK
Area AND NOT bit operand
167
Area AND NOT bit operand

TR Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description AND NOT is used for a normally closed bit connected in series. AND NOT
cannot be directly connected to the bus bar, and cannot be used at the begin-
ning of a logic block. If there is no immediate refreshing specification, the
specified bit in I/O memory is read. If there is an immediate refreshing specifi-
cation, the status the Basic Input Unit’s input terminals is read.

Precautions Immediate refreshing (!) can be specified for AND NOT. An immediate refresh
instruction updates the status of input bit just before the instruction is exe-
cuted from Basic Input Units (but not for Basic Input Units on Slave Racks or
for C200H Group 2 Multi-point Input Units).
Example
Instruction Operand
LD 000000
AND 000001
LD 000002
AND 000003
LD 000004
AND NOT 000005
168
Instruction Operand
OR LD ---
AND LD ---
OUT 000006
3-3-5 OR: OR
Purpose Takes a logical OR of the ON/OFF status of the specified operand bit and the
current execution condition.
Ladder Symbol Bus bar
Variations
Variations Creates ON Each Cycle OR Result is ON OR
Creates ON Once for Upward Differentiation @OR
Creates ON Once for Downward Differentiation %OR
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !OR
Combined Refreshes Input Bit and Creates ON Once for !@OR
Variations Upward Differentiation (See note.)
Refreshes Input Bit and Creates ON Once for !%OR
Downward Differentiation (See note.)
Systems.

OK OK OK OK
Area OR bit operand
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
169
Area OR bit operand

Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description OR is used for a normally open bit connected in parallel. A normally open bit
is configured to form a logical OR with a logic block beginning with a LOAD or
LOAD NOT instruction (connected to the bus bar or at the beginning of the
logic block). If there is no immediate refreshing specification, the specified bit
in I/O memory is read. If there is an immediate refreshing specification, the
status of the Basic Input Unit’s input terminal is read.

Precautions Differentiate up (@) or differentiate down (%) can be specified for OR. If differ-
entiate up (@) is specified, the execution condition is turned ON for one cycle
only after the status of the operand bit goes from OFF to ON. If differentiate
down (%) is specified, the execution condition is turned ON for one cycle only
after the status of the operand bit goes from ON to OFF.
Immediate refreshing (!) can be specified for OR. An immediate refresh
cuted from the Basic Input Unit (but not for Basic Input Units on Slave Racks
or for C200H Group 2 Multi-point Input Units).
For OR, it is possible to combine immediate refreshing and up or down differ-
condition is turned ON for one cycle only after the status of the operand bit
goes from OFF to ON, or from ON to OFF.
Example
Instruction Operand
LD 000000
AND 000001
AND 000002
OR 000003
AND 000004
LD 000005
AND 000006
OR NOT 000007
AND LD ---
OUT 000008
170
3-3-6 OR NOT: OR NOT

Purpose Reverses the status of the specified bit and takes a logical OR with the current
Ladder Symbol Bus bar
Variations
Variations Creates ON Each Cycle OR NOT Result is ON OR NOT
Creates ON Once for Upward Differentiation (See @OR NOT
note 1.)
Creates ON Once for Downward Differentiation (See %OR NOT
note 1.)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note 2.) !OR NOT
Combined Refreshes Input Bit and Creates ON Once for !@OR NOT
Variations Upward Differentiation (See note 3.)
Refreshes Input Bit and Creates ON Once for !%OR NOT
Downward Differentiation (See note 3.)
or CS1D CPU Units: @OR NOT, %OR NOT, !@OR NOT, and !%OR NOT.
CPU Systems.

OK OK OK OK
Area OR NOT bit operand
Condition Flags ER, CY, N, OF, UF, >, =, <, >=, <>, <=, A1, A0
TR Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
171
Area OR NOT bit operand

Index Registers ---
Indirect addressing using ,IR0 to ,IR15
Index Registers –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to +2047 ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description OR NOT is used for a normally closed bit connected in parallel. A normally
closed bit is configured to form a logical OR with a logic block beginning with a
LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction (connected to the bus bar or at the beginning
of the logic block). If there is no immediate refreshing specification, the speci-
fied bit in I/O memory is read. If there is an immediate refreshing specification,
the status of the Basic Input Unit’s input terminal is read.

Precautions Immediate refresh (!) can be specified for OR NOT. An immediate refresh
cuted from a Basic Input Unit (but not Basic Input Units on Slave Racks or for
Example
Instruction Operand
LD 000000
AND 000001
AND 000002
OR 000003
AND 000004
LD 000005
AND 000006
OR NOT 000007
AND LD ---
OUT 000008
3-3-7 AND LOAD: AND LD

Purpose Takes a logical AND between logic blocks.
Ladder Symbol
Logic block Logic block
Variations
Variations Creates ON Each Cycle AND Result is ON AND LD

OK OK OK OK
172
Description AND LD connects in series the logic block just before this instruction with
another logic block.
LD
to Logic block A
LD
to Logic block B
AND LD Serial connection between logic block A and logic block B.
The logic block consists of all the instructions from a LOAD or LOAD NOT
instruction until just before the next LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction on the
same rungs.
In the following diagram, the two logic blocks are indicated by dotted lines.
Studying this example shows that an ON execution condition will be produced
when either of the execution conditions in the left logic block is ON (i.e., when
either CIO 000000 or CIO 000001 is ON) and either of the execution condi-
tions in the right logic block is ON (i.e., when either CIO 000002 is ON or
CIO 000003 is OFF).
Precautions Three or more logic blocks can be connected in series using this instruction to
first connect two of the logic blocks and then to connect the next and subse-
quent ones in order. It is also possible to continue placing this instruction after
three or more logic blocks and connect them together in series.
When a logic block is connected by AND LOAD or OR LOAD instructions, the
ber of LOAD/LOAD NOT instructions minus 1. If they do not match, a program
error will occur.
Example
Coding Example (1)

Instruction Operand
LD 000000
OR NOT 000001
LD NOT 000002
OR 000003
AND LD ---
LD 000004
OR 000005
173
Instruction Operand
AND LD ---
. .
. .
OUT 000500
Coding Example (2)
Instruction Operand
LD 000000
OR NOT 000001
LD NOT 000002
OR 000003
LD 000004
OR 000005
. .
. .
AND LD ---
AND LD ---
. .
. .
OUT 000500
The AND LOAD instruction can be used repeatedly. In programming method

(2) above, however, the number of AND LOAD instructions becomes one less
than the number of LOAD and LOAD NOT instructions before that.
In method (2), make sure that the total number of LOAD and LOAD NOT
instructions before AND LOAD is not more than eight. To use nine or more,
program using method (1). If there are nine or more with method (2), then a
program error will occur during the program check by the Peripheral Device.
Coding
Address Instruction Operand
000000 LD 000000
000001 OR 000001
000002 LD 000002
000003 OR NOT 000003
000004 AND LD ---
000005 OUT 000500
Second LD: Used for first bit of next block connected in series to previous block.
3-3-8 OR LOAD: OR LD
Purpose Takes a logical OR between logic blocks.
Ladder Symbol
Logic block
Logic block
Variations
Variations Creates ON Each Cycle AND Result is ON OR LD
174

OK OK OK OK
Description AND LD connects in parallel the logic block just before this instruction with
another logic block.
LD
to Logic block A
LD
to Logic block B
OR LD Parallel connection between logic block A and logic block B.
The logic block consists of all the instructions from a LOAD or LOAD NOT
instruction until just before the next LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction on the
same rungs.
The following diagram requires an OR LOAD instruction between the top logic
block and the bottom logic block. An ON execution condition would be pro-
duced either when CIO 000000 is ON and CIO 000001 is OFF or when
CIO 000002 and CIO 000003 are both ON. The operation of and mnemonic
code for the OR LOAD instruction is exactly the same as those for a AND
LOAD instruction except that the current execution condition is ORed with the
last unused execution condition.
Precautions Three or more logic blocks can be connected in parallel using this instruction
to first connect two of the logic blocks and then to connect the next and subse-
quent ones in order. It is also possible to continue placing this instruction after
three or more logic blocks and connect them together in parallel.
When a logic block is connected by AND LOAD or OR LOAD instructions, the
ber of LOAD/LOAD NOT instructions minus 1. If they do not match, a pro-
gramming error will occur.
Example
175
Coding Example (1)

Instruction Operand
LD 000000
AND NOT 000001
LD NOT 000002
AND NOT 000003
OR LD ---
LD 000004
AND 000005
OR LD ---
. .
. .
OUT 000501
Coding Example (2)

Instruction Operand
LD 000000
AND NOT 000001
LD NOT 000002
AND NOT 000003
LD 000004
AND 000005
. .
. .
OR LD ---
OR LD ---
. .
. .
OUT 000501
The OR LOAD instruction can be used repeatedly. In programming method

(2) above, however, the number of OR LOAD instructions becomes one less
than the number of LOAD and LOAD NOT instructions before that.
In method (2), make sure that the total number of LOAD and LOAD NOT
instructions before OR LOAD is not more than eight. To use nine or more, pro-
gram using method (1). If there are nine or more with method (2), then a pro-
gram error will occur during the program check by the Peripheral Device.
Coding
000100 LD 000000
000101 AND NOT 000001
000102 LD 000002
000103 AND 000003
000104 OR LD ---
000105 OUT 000501
Second LD: Used for first bit of next block connected in series to previous block.
176
3-3-9 Differentiated and Immediate Refreshing Instructions

The LOAD, AND, and OR instructions have differentiated and immediate
refreshing variations in addition to their ordinary forms, and there are also two
combinations available.
The LOAD NOT, AND NOT, OR NOT, OUT, and OUT NOT instructions have
immediate refreshing variations in addition to their ordinary forms.
The I/O timing for data handled by instructions differs for ordinary and differ-
entiated instructions, immediate refreshing instructions, and immediate
refreshing differentiated instructions.
Ordinary and differentiated instructions are executed using data input by pre-
vious I/O refresh processing, and the results are output with the next I/O pro-
cessing. Here “I/O refreshing” means the data exchanged between the CPU’s
internal memory and the I/O Unit.
In addition to the above I/O refreshing, an immediate refresh instruction
exchanges data with the I/O Unit for those words that are accessed by the
instruction. An immediate refresh instruction refreshes eight bits simulta-
neously (leftmost or rightmost eight bits) in addition to the specified bit.
Immediate refresh instructions cannot be used for Units on Slave Racks.
Instruction variation Mnemonic Function I/O refresh
Ordinary LD, AND, OR, LD NOT, The ON/OFF status of the specified bit Cyclic refreshing
AND NOT, OR NOT is taken by the CPU with cyclic refresh-
ing, and it is reflected in the next instruc-
tion execution.
OUT, OUT NOT After the instruction is executed, the ON/
OFF status of the specified bit is output
with the next cyclic refreshing.
Differentiated up @LD, @AND, @OR The instruction is executed once when
the specified bit turns from OFF to ON
and the ON state is held for one cycle.
Differentiated down %LD, %AND, %OR The instruction is executed once when
the specified bit turns from ON to OFF
and the ON state is held for one cycle.
Immediate refresh !LD, !AND, !OR, !LD NOT, The input data for the specified bit is Before instruction execu-
!AND NOT, !OR NOT taken by the CPU and the instruction is tion
executed.
!OUT, !OUT NOT After the instruction is executed, the After instruction execution
data for the specified bit is output.
Differentiated up / !@LD, !@AND, !@OR The input data for the specified bit is Before instruction execu-
immediate refresh refreshed by the CPU, and the instruction
tion is executed once when the bit turns
from OFF to ON and the ON state is
held for one cycle.
Differentiated down / !%LD, !%AND, !%OR The input data for the specified bit is
immediate refresh refreshed by the CPU, and the instruc-
tion is executed once when the bit turns
from ON to OFF and the ON state is
held for one cycle.
177
3-3-10 Operation Timing for I/O Instructions

The following chart shows the differences in the timing of instruction opera-
tions for a program configured from LD and OUT.
Input
received
Input
received
Input
↑ received
Input
↓ received
Input
Input received
! received
Input
!↑ received
Input
!↓ received
Input received
Input
! ! received
Input
↑ ! received
Input
↓ ! received
! !
!↑ !
!↓ !
CPU
processing
Instruction execution I/O refreshing
3-3-11 TR Bits
TR bits are used to temporarily retain the ON/OFF status of execution condi-
tions in a program when programming in mnemonic code. They are not used
when programming directly in ladder program form because the processing is
automatically executed by the Peripheral Device. The following diagram
shows a simple application using two TR bits.
178
Address Instruction Operands

000000 LD 000000
000001 OUT TR0
000002 AND 000001
000003 OUT TR1
000004 AND 000002
000005 OUT 000500
000006 LD TR1
000007 AND 000003
000008 OUT 000501
000009 LD TR0
000010 AND 000004
000011 OUT 000502
000012 LD TR0
000013 AND NOT 000005
000014 OUT 000503
Using TR0 to TR15 TR0 to TR15 are used only with LOAD and OUTPUT instructions. There are
no restrictions on the order in which the bit addresses are used.
Sometimes it is possible to simplify a program by rewriting it so that TR bits
are not required. The following diagram shows one case in which a TR bit is
unnecessary and one in which a TR bit is required.
(1)
(2)
In instruction block (1), the ON/OFF status at point A is the same as for output
CIO 00200, so AND 000001 and OUT 000201 can be coded without requiring
a TR bit. In instruction block (2), the status of the branching point and that of
output CIO 000202 are not necessarily the same, so a TR bit must be used. In
this case, the number of steps in the program could be reduced by using
instruction block (1) in place of instruction block (2).
TR0 to TR15 TR bits are used only for retaining (OUT TR0 to TR15) and restoring (LD TR0
Considerations to TR15) the ON/OFF status of branching points in programs with many out-
put branches. They are thus different from general bits, and cannot be used
with AND or OR instructions, or with instructions that include NOT.
179
TR0 to TR15 output A TR bit address cannot be repeated within the same block in a program with
Duplication many output branches, as shown in the following diagram. It can, however, be
used again in a different block.
to
3-3-12 NOT: NOT(520)

Purpose Reverses the execution condition.
Ladder Symbol
NOT(520)
Variations
Variations Reverses the Execution Condition Each Cycle NOT(520)
Immediate Refreshing Specification Not supported
OK OK OK OK
Description NOT(520) is placed between an execution condition and another instruction to
invert the execution condition.
Flags There are no flags affected by NOT(520).
Precautions NOT(520) is an intermediate instruction, i.e., it cannot be used as a right-hand

instruction. Be sure to program a right-hand instruction after NOT(520).
Example NOT(520) reverses the execution condition in the following example.
The following table shows the operation of this program section.
180
Input bit status Output bit status

CIO 000000 CIO 000001 CIO 000002 CIO 000003
1 1 1 0
1 1 0 0
1 0 1 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1
3-3-13 CONDITION ON/OFF: UP(521) and DOWN(522)

Purpose UP(521) turns ON the execution condition for the next instruction for one cycle
when the execution condition it receives goes from OFF to ON. DOWN(522)
turns ON the execution condition for the next instruction for one cycle when
the execution condition it receives goes from ON to OFF.
Ladder Symbols
UP(521)
DOWN(522)
Variations
Variations Creates ON Once for Upward Differentiation UP(521)
Variations Creates ON Once for Downward Differentiation UP(522)

OK OK OK OK
Description UP(521) is placed between an execution condition and another instruction to

turn the execution condition into an up-differentiated condition. UP(521)
causes the connecting instruction to be executed just once when the execu-
tion condition goes from OFF to ON.
DOWN(522) is placed between an execution condition and another instruction
to turn the execution condition into a down-differentiated condition.
DOWN(522) causes the connecting instruction to be executed just once when
the execution condition goes from ON to OFF.
The DIFU(013) and DIFD(014) instructions can also be used for the same
purpose, but they require work bits. UP(521) and DOWN(522) simplify pro-
gramming by reducing the number of work bits and program addresses
needed.
Flags There are no flags affected by UP(521) and DOWN(522).
Precautions UP(521) and DOWN(522) are intermediate instructions, i.e., they cannot be
used as right-hand instructions. Be sure to program a right-hand instruction
after UP(521) or DOWN(522).
The operation of UP(521) and DOWN(522) depends on the execution condi-
tion for the instruction as well as the execution condition for the program sec-
tion when it is programmed in an interlocked program section, a jumped
181
program section, or a subroutine. Refer to 3-5-4 INTERLOCK and INTER-

LOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003), 3-5-6 JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004)
and JME(005), and 3-20 Interrupt Control Instructions for details.
Note Observe the following precaution when using UP(521) in a function
block definition.
The operation of UP(521) will not be consistent if the same function block
instance is executed more than once in the same cycle.
An instance will not be executed while EN is OFF. Caution is thus required
when using UP(521) in a function block definition. For details, refer to informa-
tion on restrictions on using ladder programming instructions in the CX-Pro-
grammer Operation Manual: Function Blocks.
Observe the following precaution when using UP(521) in a subroutine.
The operation of UP(521) will not be consistent if the same subroutine is exe-
cuted more than once in the same cycle.
An subroutine will not be executed while the input condition for the subroutine
is OFF. Caution is thus required when using UP(521) in a function block defini-
tion. For details, refer to information on SBS(091).
Examples When CIO 000000 goes from OFF to ON in the following example,
CIO 000001 is turned ON for just one cycle.
Cycle
time
Cycle
time
3-3-14 BIT TEST: TST(350) and TSTN(351)

Purpose LD TST(350), AND TST(350), and OR TST(350) are used in the program like
LD, AND, and OR; the execution condition is ON when the specified bit in the
specified word is ON, and OFF when the bit is OFF.
LD TSTN(351), AND TSTN(351), and OR TSTN(351) are used in the program
like LD NOT, AND NOT, and OR NOT; the execution condition is OFF when
the specified bit in the specified word is ON, and ON when the bit is OFF.
182
Ladder Symbols
TST(350)
S S: Source word
N N: Bit number
TSTN(351)
S S: Source word
N N: Bit number
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle TST(350)
Variations Executed Each Cycle TSTN(351)


OK OK OK OK
Operands N: Bit number

The bit number must be between 0000 and 000F hexadecimal or between
&0000 and &0015 decimal. Only the rightmost bit (0 to F hexadecimal) of the
contents of the word is valid when a word address is specified.
Area S N
EM Area without bank E00000 to E32767
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM addresses @ D00000 to @ D32767
in binary @ E00000 to @ E32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM addresses *D00000 to *D32767
in BCD *E00000 to *E32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #000F (binary) or
&0 to &15
Data Registers DR0 to DR15
183
Area S N
Index Registers ---
Index Registers –2048 to +2047 , IR0 to –2048 to +2047 ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description LD TST(350), AND TST(350), and OR TST(350) can be used in the program
like LD, AND, and OR; the execution condition is ON when the specified bit in
the specified word is ON and OFF when the bit is OFF. Unlike LD, AND, and
OR, bits in the DM and EM areas can be used as operands in TST(350).
LD TSTN(351), AND TSTN(351), and OR TSTN(351) can be used in the pro-
gram like LD NOT, AND NOT, and OR NOT; the execution condition is OFF
when the specified bit in the specified word is ON and ON when the bit is OFF.
Unlike LD NOT, AND NOT, and OR NOT, bits in the DM and EM areas can be
used as operands in TSTN(351).
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF or unchanged (See note.)
Equals Flag = OFF or unchanged (See note.)
Negative Flag N OFF or unchanged (See note.)
Note In CS1 and CJ1 CPU Units, these are turned OFF.
In CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units, these Flags are left
unchanged.
Precautions TST(350) and TSTN(351) are intermediate instructions, i.e., they cannot be
used as right-hand instructions. Be sure to program a right-hand instruction
after TST(350) or TSTN(351).
Examples LD TST(350) and LD TSTN(351)

In the following example, CIO 000001 is turned ON when bit 3 of D00010 is
ON.
&3
In the following example, CIO 000001 is turned ON when bit 3 of D00010 is

OFF.
&3
AND TST(350) and AND TSTN(351)

In the following example, CIO 000001 is turned ON when CIO 000000 and bit
3 of D00010 are both ON.
184
Sequence Output Instructions Section 3-4
&3
In the following example, CIO 000001 is turned ON when CIO 000000 is ON

and bit 5 of D00010 is OFF.
&5
OR TST(350) and OR TSTN(351)

In the following example, CIO 000001 is turned ON when CIO 000000 or bit 3
of D00010 is ON.
&3
In the following example, CIO 000001 is turned ON when CIO 000000 is ON

or bit 3 of D00010 is OFF.
&3
3-4 Sequence Output Instructions

3-4-1 OUTPUT: OUT
Purpose Outputs the result (execution condition) of the logical processing to the speci-
fied bit.
Ladder Symbol
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition OUT
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation Not supported.
Executed Once for Downward Differentiation Not supported.
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !OUT
Note Immediate refreshing is not supported by CS1D CPU Units.
185

Not allowed OK OK OK
Area OUT bit operand
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
TR Area TR0 to TR15
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description If there is no immediate refreshing specification, the status of the execution

condition (power flow) is written to the specified bit in I/O memory. If there is
an immediate refreshing specification, the status of the execution condition
(power flow) is also written to the Basic Output Unit’s output terminal in addi-
tion to the output bit in I/O memory.
Precautions Immediate refreshing (!) can be specified for OUT and OUT NOT. An immedi-
ate refresh instruction updates the status of the output terminal just after the
instruction is executed for the Basic Output Unit (but not for Basic Output
Units on Slave Racks or for C200H Group 2 Multi-point Input Units), at the
same time as it writes the status of the execution condition (power flow) to the
specified output bit in I/O memory.
OUT cannot be used for addresses in the DM and EM Areas. Use OUTB(534)
instead.
186
Example
Instruction Operand
LD 000000
OUT 000001
OUT NOT 000002
Note Difference between SET/RSET and OUT

For OUT, the operand bit is turned ON when the input condition turns ON and
is turned OFF when the input condition turns OFF. For SET and RSET, the
operand bit turns ON or OFF, respectively, when the input condition turns ON
and the operand bit does not change when the input condition turns OFF.
Note Precaution for Index Registers
OUT is executed even when the input condition turns OFF. Be particularly
careful when programming OUT using an indirect index register address.
Input condition
MOVR
W0.0
IR0
,IR0
When the input condition is OFF,
MOVR(560) is not executed, but OUT
is executed for the address stored in
the index register.
3-4-2 OUTPUT NOT: OUT NOT

Purpose Reverses the result (execution condition) of the logical processing, and out-
puts it to the specified bit.
Ladder Symbol
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition OUT NOT
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !OUT NOT

187

Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
TR Area TR0 to TR15
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description If there is no immediate refreshing specification, the status of the execution

condition (power flow) is reversed and written to a specified bit in I/O memory.
If there is an immediate refreshing specification, the status of the execution
condition (power flow) is reversed and also written to the Basic Output Unit’s
output terminal in addition to the output bit in I/O memory.
Example
Instruction Operand
LD 000000
OUT 000001
OUT NOT 000002
3-4-3 KEEP: KEEP(011)

Purpose Operates as a latching relay.
Ladder Symbol S (Set) KEEP(011)
B B: Bit
R (Reset)
188
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition KEEP(011)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation Not supported
Executed Once for Downward Differentiation Not supported
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !KEEP(011)

Area B
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047, IR0 to –2048 to +2047, IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description When S turns ON, the designated bit will go ON and stay ON until reset,
regardless of whether S stays ON or goes OFF. When R turns ON, the desig-
nated bit will go OFF. The relationship between execution conditions and
KEEP(011) bit status is shown below.
Set
Reset
189
ON
S execution condition OFF
ON
R execution condition OFF
ON
Status of C OFF
If S and R are ON simultaneously, the reset input takes precedence.
Set
Reset
Status of C
The set input (S) cannot be received while R is ON.
Set
Reset
Status of C
KEEP(011) has an immediate refreshing variation (!KEEP(011)). When an

external output bit has been specified for B in a !KEEP(011) instruction, any
changes to B will be refreshed when !KEEP(011) is executed and reflected
immediately in the output bit. (The changes will not be reflected immediately if
the bit is allocated to a Group-2 High-density I/O Unit, High-density Special
I/O Unit, or a Unit mounted in a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Rack.)
KEEP(011) operates like the self-maintaining bit, but a self-maintaining bit
programmed with KEEP(011) requires one less instruction.
Self-maintaining bits programmed with KEEP(011) will maintain status even in

an interlock program section, unlike the self-maintaining bit programmed with-
out KEEP(011).
190
Output bit C will maintain its Output bit C will be turned

previous status in an interlock. OFF in an interlock.
KEEP(011) can be used to create flip-flops as shown below.
If a holding bit is used for B, the bit status will be retained even during a power
interruption. KEEP(011) can thus be used to program bits that will maintain
status after restarting the PLC following a power interruption. An example of
this that can be used to produce a warning display following a system shut-
down for an emergency situation is shown below.
Indicates
emergency
situation
Reset input
Activates
warning
display
The status of I/O Area bits can be retained in the event of a power interruption
by turning ON the IOM Hold Bit and setting IOM Hold Bit Hold in the PLC
Setup. In this case, I/O Area bits used in KEEP(011) will maintain status after
restarting the PLC following a power interruption, just like holding bits. Be sure
to restart the PLC after changing the PLC Setup; otherwise the new settings
will not be used.
Flags No flags are affected by KEEP(011).
Precautions Never use an input bit in a normally closed condition on the reset (R) for
KEEP(011) when the input device uses an AC power supply. The delay in
shutting down the PLC’s DC power supply (relative to the AC power supply to
191
the input device) can cause the operand bit of KEEP(011) to be reset. This sit-
uation is shown below.
Input Unit
A S
KEEP
120000
A NEVER R
The operands for KEEP(011) are input in a different order in ladder diagrams
and mnemonic code.
Ladder diagram order: Set input → KEEP(011) → Reset input
Mnemonic code order: Set input → Reset input → KEEP(011)
Example When CIO 000000 goes ON in the following example, CIO 00500 is turned
ON. CIO 00500 remains ON until CIO 000001 goes ON.
When CIO 000002 goes ON and CIO 000003 goes OFF in the following
example, CIO 00100 is turned ON. CIO 00100 remains ON until CIO 000004
or CIO 000005 goes ON.
Coding
000100 LD 000000
000101 LD 000001
000102 KEEP (011) 000500
000103 LD 000002
000104 AND NOT 000003
000105 LD 000004
000106 OR 000005
000107 KEEP (011) 000100
Note KEEP(011) is input in different orders on in ladder and mnemonic form. In lad-
der form, input the set input, KEEP(011), and then the reset input. In mne-
monic form, input the set input, the reset input, and then KEEP(011).
192
3-4-4 DIFFERENTIATE UP/DOWN: DIFU(013) and DIFD(014)

Purpose DIFU(013) turns the designated bit ON for one cycle when the execution con-
dition goes from OFF to ON (rising edge).
DIFD(014) turns the designated bit ON for one cycle when the execution con-
dition goes from ON to OFF (falling edge).
Ladder Symbols
DIFU(013)
B B: Bit
DIFD(014)
B B: Bit
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition Not supported
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation DIFU(013)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !DIFU(013)
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition Not supported

Executed Once for Upward Differentiation DIFD(014)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !DIFD(014)
Applicable Program Areas Block program areas Step program areas Subroutines Interrupt tasks
Area B
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
193
Area B
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to ,15–(– –) IR
Description When the execution condition goes from OFF to ON, DIFU(013) turns B ON.
When DIFU(013) is reached in the next cycle, B is turned OFF.
Execution condition
Status of B
1 cycle
When the execution condition goes from ON to OFF, DIFD(014) turns B ON.
When DIFD(014) is reached in the next cycle, B is turned OFF.
Execution condition
Status of B
1 cycle
DIFU(013) and DIFD(014) have immediate refreshing variations (!DIFU(013)

and !DIFD(014)). When an external output bit has been specified for B in one
of these instructions, any changes to B will be refreshed when the instruction
is executed and reflected immediately in the output bit. (The changes will not
be reflected immediately if the bit is allocated to a Group-2 High-density I/O
Unit, High-density Special I/O Unit, or a Unit mounted in a SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slave Rack.)
UP(521) and DOWN(522) can be used to execute an instruction for just one
cycle when the execution condition goes from OFF → ON or ON → OFF.
Refer to 3-3-13 CONDITION ON/OFF: UP(521) and DOWN(522) for details.
Flags No flags are affected by DIFU(013) and DIFD(014).
Precautions The operation of DIFU(013) or DIFD(014) depends on the execution condition

for the instruction itself as well as the execution condition for the program sec-
tion when it is programmed in an interlocked program section, a jumped pro-
gram section, or a subroutine. Refer to 3-5-4 INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK
CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003), 3-5-6 JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004) and
JME(005), and 3-20 Interrupt Control Instructions for details.
If DIFU(013) is used in a FOR-NEXT loop and the loop repeats in a cycle, the
controlled bit will be always ON or always OFF within that loop.
194
Examples Operation of DIFU(013)

When CIO 000000 goes from OFF to ON in the following example,
CIO 001000 is turned ON for one cycle.
001000
1 cycle 1 cycle
Operation of DIFD(014)
When CIO 000000 goes from ON to OFF in the following example,
CIO 001000 is turned ON for one cycle.
001000
001000
1 cycle 1 cycle
Note Observe the following precaution when using DIFU(013) in a function

block definition.
The operation of DIFU(013) will not be consistent if the same function block
instance is executed more than once in the same cycle.
An instance will not be executed while EN is OFF. Caution is thus required
when using DIFU(013) in a function block definition. For details, refer to infor-
mation on restrictions on using ladder programming instructions in the CX-
Programmer Operation Manual: Function Blocks.
Observe the following precaution when using DIFU(013) in a subroutine.
The operation of DIFU(013) will not be consistent if the same subroutine is
executed more than once in the same cycle.
An subroutine will not be executed while the input condition for the subroutine
is OFF. Caution is thus required when using DIFU(013) in a function block def-
inition. For details, refer to information on SBS(091).
3-4-5 SET and RESET: SET and RSET

Purpose SET turns the operand bit ON when the execution condition is ON.
RSET turns the operand bit OFF when the execution condition is ON.
Ladder Symbols
SET
B B: Bit
RSET
B B: Bit
195
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SET
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SET
Executed Once for Downward Differentiation %SET
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !SET
Combined Executed Once and Bit Refreshed !@SET
variations Immediately for Upward Differentiation (See
note.)
Executed Once and Bit Refreshed !%SET
Immediately for Downward Differentiation
(See note.)
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RSET

Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RSET
Executed Once for Downward Differentiation %RSET
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !RSET
Combined Immediate Refreshing Once for Upward !@RSET
Variations Differentiation (See note.)
Immediate Refreshing Once for Downward !%RSET
Differentiation (See note.)

OK OK OK OK
Area B
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to ,–(– –) IR15
196
Description SET turns the operand bit ON when the execution condition is ON, and does
not affect the status of the operand bit when the execution condition is OFF.
Use RSET to turn OFF a bit that has been turned ON with SET.
Execution condition
of SET
Status of B
RSET turns the operand bit OFF when the execution condition is ON, and
does not affect the status of the operand bit when the execution condition is
OFF. Use SET to turn ON a bit that has been turned OFF with RSET.
Execution condition
of RSET
Status of B
SET and RSET have immediate refreshing variations (!SET and !RSET).
When an external output bit has been specified for B in one of these instruc-
tions, any changes to B will be refreshed when the instruction is executed and
reflected immediately in the output bit. (The changes will not be reflected
immediately if the bit is allocated to a Group-2 High-density I/O Unit, High-
density Special I/O Unit, or a Unit mounted in a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Slave Rack.)
The set and reset inputs for a KEEP(011) instruction must be programmed
with the instruction, but the SET and RSET instructions can be programmed
completely independently. Furthermore, the same bit may be used as the
operand in any number of SET or RSET instructions.
Flags No flags are affected by SET and RSET.
Precautions SET and RSET cannot be used to set and reset timers and counters.
When SET or RSET is programmed between IL(002) and ILC(003) or
JMP(004) and JME(005), the status of the specified bit will not be changed if
the program section is interlocked or jumped.
Note SET cannot be used for addresses in the DM and EM Areas. Use SETB(531)
instead.
Note RSET cannot be used for addresses in the DM and EM Areas. Use
RSTB(533) instead.
Example Differences between OUT/OUT NOT and SET/RSET

The operation of SET differs from that of OUT because the OUT instruction
turns the operand bit OFF when its execution condition is OFF. Likewise,
RSET differs from OUT NOT because OUT NOT turns the operand bit ON
when its execution condition is OFF.
197
000000 010000 CIO 010000 is turned ON/OFF

when CIO 000000 goes ON/OFF.
000001
CIO 010000 is turned ON when
CIO 000001 goes ON; it remains
ON until CIO 000002 goes ON.
000002
3-4-6 MULTIPLE BIT SET/RESET: SETA(530)/RSTA(531)

Purpose SETA(530) turns ON the specified number of consecutive bits.
RSTA(531) turns OFF the specified number of consecutive bits.
Ladder Symbols
SETA(530)
D D: Beginning word
N1 N1: Beginning bit
N2 N2: Number of bits
RSTA(531)
D D: Beginning word
N1 N1: Beginning bit
N2 N2: Number of bits

Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SETA(530)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SETA(530)
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RSTA(531)

Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RSTA(531)
OK OK OK OK
Operands D: Beginning Word

Specifies the first word in which bits will be turned ON or OFF.
N1: Beginning Bit
Specifies the first bit which will be turned ON or OFF. N1 must be #0000 to
#000F (&0 to &15).
N2: Number of Bits
Specifies the number of bits which will be turned ON or OFF. N2 must be
#0000 to #FFFF (&0 to &65535).
198
Note The bits being turned ON or OFF must be in the same data area. (The range
of words is roughly D to D+N2÷16.)
to
D: 256 words max.
Area D N1 N2
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM addresses in @ D00000 to @ D32767
binary @ E00000 to @ E32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM addresses in *D00000 to *D32767
BCD *E00000 to *E32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #000F #0000 to #FFFF
(binary) or &0 to (binary) or &0 to
&15 &65535
Data Registers --- DR0 to DR15
Index Registers ---
Index Registers –2048 to +2047, IR0 to –2048 to +2047, IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description The operation of SETA(530) and RSTA(531) are described separately below.
Operation of SETA(530)
SETA(530) turns ON N2 bits, beginning from bit N1 of D, and continuing to the
left (more-significant bits). All other bits are left unchanged. (No changes will
be made if N2 is set to 0.)
Bits turned ON by SETA(530) can be turned OFF by any other instructions,
not just RSTA(531).
199
N2 bits are set to 1 (ON).
SETA(530) can be used to turn ON bits in data areas that are normally
accessed by words only, such as the DM and EM areas.
Operation of RSTA(531)
RSTA(531) turns OFF N2 bits, beginning from bit N1 of D, and continuing to
the left (more-significant bits). All other bits are left unchanged. (No changes
will be made if N2 is set to 0.)
Bits turned OFF by RSTA(531) can be turned ON by any other instructions,
not just SETA(530).
N2 bits are reset to 0 (OFF).
RSTA(531) can be used to turn OFF bits in data areas that are normally
accessed by words only, such as the DM and EM areas.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N1 is not within the specified range of 0000 to 000F.
Examples SETA(530) Example

When CIO 000000 is turned ON in the following example, the 20 bits (0014
hexadecimal) beginning with bit 5 of CIO 0100 are turned ON.
N1: Bit 5
&5 N2: 20 bits
&20
RSTA(531) Example
When CIO 000000 is turned ON in the following example, the 20 bits (0014
hexadecimal) beginning with bit 3 of CIO 0100 are turned OFF.
N1: Bit 3
&3 N2: 20 bits
&20
200
3-4-7 SINGLE BIT SET/RESET: SETB(532)/RSTB(533)

Purpose SETB(532) turns ON the specified bit.
RSTB(533) turns OFF the specified bit.
These instructions are supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU
Units only.
Ladder Symbols
SETB(532) D: Word address

D N: Bit number
N
RSTB(533)
D: Word address
D N: Bit number
N
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SETB(532)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SETB(532)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !SETB(532)
Combined Executed Once and Bit Refreshed !@SETB(532)
Variations Immediately for Upward Differentiation (See
note.)
Executed Once and Bit Refreshed Not supported
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RSTB(533)

Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RSTB(533)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !RSTB(533)
Combined Executed Once and Bit Refreshed !@RSTB(533)
note.)
Executed Once and Bit Refreshed Not supported

OK OK OK OK
Operands D: Word Address

Specifies the word in which the bit will be turned ON or OFF.
N: Beginning Bit
Specifies the bit which will be turned ON or OFF. N must be #0000 to #000F
(&0 to &15).
201
Area D N
(n = 0 to C)
binary @ E00000 to @ E32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
BCD *E00000 to *E32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #000F (binary)
or &0 to &15
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description The functions of SETB(532) and RSTB(533) are described separately below.
Operation of SETB(532)
SETB(532) turns ON bit N of word D when the execution condition is ON. The
status of the bit is not affected when the execution condition is OFF. Unlike
SET, SETB(532) can turn ON a bit in the DM area or EM area.
15
This bit is turned ON.
Execution condition ON
OFF
Bit N of word D ON
OFF
Bits turned ON by SETB(532) can be turned OFF by any other instruction, not
just RSTB(533).
SETB(532) is supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units only.
202
Operation of RSTB(533)
RSTB(533) turns OFF bit N of word D when the execution condition is ON.
The status of the bit is not affected when the execution condition is OFF. (Use
SETB(532) to turn ON the bit.) Unlike RST, RSTB(533) can turn OFF a bit in
the DM area or EM area.
15
This bit is turned OFF.
ON
Execution condition OFF
Bit N of word D ON
OFF
Bits turned OFF by RSTB(533) can be turned ON by any other instruction, not
just SETB(532).
RSTB(533) is supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units only.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the specified range of 0000 to 000F
(&0 to &15).
Precautions SETB(532) and RSTB(533) cannot set/reset timers and counters.

When SETB(532) or RSTB(533) is programmed between IL(002) and
ILC(003) or JMP(004) and JME(005), the status of the specified bit will not be
changed if the program section is interlocked or jumped, i.e., when the inter-
lock condition or jump condition is OFF.
SETB(532) and RSTB(533) have immediate refreshing variations
(!SETB(532) and !RSTB(533)). When an external output bit has been speci-
fied in one of these instructions, any changes to the specified bit will be
refreshed when the instruction is executed and reflected immediately in the
output bit. (The changes will not be reflected immediately if the bit is allocated
to a Group-2 High-density I/O Unit, High-density Special I/O Unit, or a Unit
mounted in a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Rack.)
Differences between SET/RSET and SETB(532)/RSTB(533)
The SET and RSET instructions operate somewhat differently from
SETB(532) and RSTB(533).
1. The instructions operate in the same way when the specified bit is in the
CIO, W, H, or A Area.
2. The SETB(532) and RSTB(533) instructions can control bits in the DM and
EM Areas, unlike SET and RSET.
Differences between OUTB(534) and SETB(532)/RSTB(533)
The OUTB(534) instruction operates somewhat differently from SETB(532)
and RSTB(533).
1. The SETB(532) and RSTB(533) instructions change the status of the
specified bit only when their execution condition is ON. These instructions
have no effect on the status of the specified bit when their execution con-
dition is OFF.
203
2. The OUTB(534) instruction turns ON the specified bit when its execution
condition is ON and turns OFF the specified bit when its execution condi-
tion is OFF.
3. The set and reset inputs for a KEEP(011) instruction must be programmed
with the instruction, but the SETB(532) and RSTB(533) instructions can be
programmed completely independently. Furthermore, the same bit may be
used as the operand in any number of SETB(532) and RSTB(533) instruc-
tions.
000000
SETB Bit 02 of D00000 is turned ON
D00000 when CIO 000000 is ON.
&2
000001
RSTB
Bit 02 of D00000 is turned OFF
D00000
when CIO 000001 is ON.
&2
3-4-8 SINGLE BIT OUTPUT: OUTB(534)

Purpose OUTB(534) outputs the status of the instruction’s execution condition to the
specified bit. OUTB(534) can control a bit in the DM Area or EM Area, unlike
OUT.
This instruction is supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units
only.
Ladder Symbols
OUTB(534)
D: Word address
D N: Bit number
N
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition OUTB(534)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !OUTB(534)

Operands D: Word Address

Specifies the word containing the bit to be controlled.
N: Beginning Bit
Specifies the bit to be controlled. N must be #0000 to #000F (&0 to &15).
Area D N
204
Area D N
(n = 0 to C)
binary @ E00000 to @ E32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
BCD *E00000 to *E32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #000F (binary)
or &0 to &15
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description When the execution condition is ON, OUTB(534) turns ON bit N of word D.
When the execution condition is OFF, OUTB(534) turns OFF bit N of word D.
15 N 0
D
This bit is turned OFF.
ON
Execution condition
OFF
ON
Bit N of word D
OFF
If the immediate refreshing version is not used, the status of the execution
condition (power flow) is written to the specified bit in I/O memory. If the imme-
diate refreshing version is used, the status of the execution condition (power
flow) is written to the Basic Output Unit’s output terminal as well as the output
bit in I/O memory.
OUTB(534) is supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units only.
Precautions Immediate refreshing (!OUTB(534)) can be specified. An immediate refresh

instruction updates the status of the output terminal just after the instruction is
executed on an output bit allocated to a Basic Output Unit (but not for C200H
Group 2 Multi-point Output Units or Basic Output Units on Slave Racks), at
205
Sequence Control Instructions Section 3-5
the same time as it writes the status of the execution condition (power flow) to
the specified output bit in I/O memory.
When OUTB(534) is programmed between IL(002) and ILC(003), the speci-
fied bit will be turned OFF if the program section is interlocked. (This is the
same as an OUT instruction in an interlocked program section.)
When a word is specified for the bit number (N), only bits 00 to 03 of N are
used. For example, if N contains FFFA hex, OUTB(534) will control bit 10 of
word D.
Note Difference between SETB(532)/RSTB(533) and OUTB(534)
For OUTB(534), the operand bit is turned ON when the input condition turns
ON and is turned OFF when the input condition turns OFF. For SETB(532)
and RSTB(533), the operand bit turns ON or OFF, respectively, when the input
condition turns ON and the operand bit does not change when the input con-
dition turns OFF.
Example
000000
OUTB Bit 10 of D00000 is turned OFF
D00000
when CIO 000000 is OFF.
&10
Note Precaution for Index Registers

OUTB(534) is executed even when the input condition turns OFF. Be particu-
larly careful when programming OUT using an indirect index register address.
Input condition
MOVR
D100
IR0
OUTB When the input condition is OFF,

MOVR(560) is not executed, but
,IR0
OUTB(534) is executed for the address
&15 stored in the index register.
3-5 Sequence Control Instructions

3-5-1 END: END(001)
Purpose Indicates the end of a program.
Ladder Symbol
END(001)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition END(001)

Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed OK
206
Description END(001) completes the execution of a program for that cycle. No instructions
written after END(001) will be executed.
Execution proceeds to the program with the next task number. When the pro-
gram being executed has the highest task number in the program, END(001)
marks the end of the overall main program.
Task 1 Program A
Task 2 Program B
Task n Program Z
End of the main program
I/O refreshing
Precautions Always place END(001) at the end of each program. A programming error will
occur if there is not an END(001) instruction in the program.
3-5-2 NO OPERATION: NOP(000)

Purpose This instruction has no function. (No processing is performed for NOP(000).)
Ladder Symbol There is no ladder symbol associated with NOP(000).
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NOP(000)

OK OK OK OK
Description No processing is performed for NOP(000), but this instruction can be used to
set aside lines in the program where instructions will be inserted later. When
the instructions are inserted later, there will be no change in program
addresses.
Flags No flags are affected by NOP(000).
207
Precautions NOP(000) can only be used with mnemonic displays, not with ladder pro-
grams.
3-5-3 Overview of Interlock Instructions

Interlock Instructions The following instruction combinations can be used to interlock outputs in a
program section.
• INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR (IL(002) and IL(003))
• MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION HOLD and MULTI-INTERLOCK
CLEAR (MILH(517) and MILC(519))*
Note MILH(517) holds the status of the Differentiation Flag, so differentiat-
ed instructions that were interlocked are executed after the interlock
is cleared.
• MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION RELEASE and MULTI-INTER-
LOCK CLEAR (MILR(518) and MILC(519))*
Note MILR(518) does not hold the status of the Differentiation Flag, so dif-
ferentiated instructions that were interlocked are not executed after
the interlock is cleared.
* These instructions are supported only by CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later.
Differences between Regular interlocks (IL(002) and IL(003)) cannot be nested, but multiple inter-
Interlocks and Multiple locks (MILH(517), MILR(518), and MILC(519)) can be nested. Ladder pro-
Interlocks gramming can be simplified by nesting multiple interlocks, as shown in the
following diagram.
Interlocks with MILH and MILC Interlocks with IL and ILC
a a
MILH IL
0
A1
A1
ILC
b
a b
MILH
IL
1
A2
A2
ILC
c
MILH a b c
2 IL
A3
A3
ILC
MILC
2
MILC
1
MILC
0
208
Differences between Differentiated instructions (DIFU, DIFD, or instructions with a @ or % prefix)

MILH(517) and MILR(518) operate differently in interlocks created with MILH(517) and MILR(518).
The operation of differentiated instructions in an interlock created with
MILH(517) is identical to the operation in an interlock created with IL(002).
For details, refer to 3-5-5 MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION HOLD,
MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION RELEASE, and MULTI-INTER-
LOCK CLEAR: MILH(517), MILR(518), and MILC(519).
Precautions Do not combine interlocks created with different interlock instructions (IL-ILC,
MILH-MILC, and MILR-MILC). The interlocks may not operate properly if dif-
ferent interlock methods are used together. For details on combining instruc-
tions, refer to 3-5-5 MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION HOLD, MULTI-
INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION RELEASE, and MULTI-INTERLOCK
CLEAR: MILH(517), MILR(518), and MILC(519).
For example, an MILH(517) instruction cannot be inserted between IL(002)
and IL(003).
IL
MILH(517) is in an interlocked area

MILH between IL(002) and ILC.(003).
ILC
Note The different interlocks (IL-ILC, MILH-MILC, and MILR-MILC) can be used
together as long as the interlocked program sections do not overlap.
For example, all three interlock methods can be used without overlapping, as
shown in the following diagram.
IL
ILC
MILH
Different interlock methods can be

used as long as the interlocked
MILC
areas do not overlap.
MILR
MILC
209
Differences between The following table shows the differences between interlocks (created with
Interlocks and Jumps IL(002)/ILC(003), MILH(517)/MILC(519), or MILR(518)/MILC(519)) and jumps
created with JMP(004)/JME(005).
Item Treatment in IL(002)/ILC(003), MILH(517)/ Treatment in
MILC(519), or MILR(518)/MILC(519)) JMP(004)/JME(005)
Instruction execution Instructions other than OUT, OUT NOT, No instructions are executed.
OUTB(534), and timer instructions are not
executed.
Output status in instructions Except for outputs in OUT, OUT NOT, All outputs retain their previous status.
OUTB(534), and timer instructions, all out-
puts retain their previous status.
Bits in OUT, OUT NOT, OFF All outputs retain their previous status.
OUTB(534)
Status of timer instructions Reset Operating timers (TIM, TIMX(550),
(except (TTIM(087), TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TMHH(540),
TTIMX(555), MTIM(543), and TMHHX(552), TIMU(541), TIMUX(556),
MTIMX(554)) TMUH(544), TMUHX(557) only) continue
timing because the PVs are updated even
when the timer instruction is not being exe-
cuted.
3-5-4 INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR: IL(002) and ILC(003)

Purpose Interlocks all outputs between IL(002) and ILC(003) when the execution con-
dition for IL(002) is OFF. IL(002) and ILC(003) are normally used in pairs.
Ladder Symbols
IL(002)
ILC(003)
Variations
Variations Interlocks when OFF/Does Not interlock when ON IL(002)
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ILC(003)


Not allowed Not allowed OK OK
Description When the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF, the outputs for all instruc-
tions between IL(002) and ILC(003) are interlocked. When the execution con-
dition for IL(002) is ON, the instructions between IL(002) and ILC(003) are
executed normally.
Execution Execution
Execution condition ON condition OFF
condition
Normal Outputs
Interlocked section execution interlocked.
of the program
210
The following table shows the treatment of various outputs in an interlocked

section between IL(002) and ILC(003).
Instruction Treatment
Bits specified in OUT, OUT NOT, or OUTB(534) OFF
TIM, TIMX(550), TIMH(015), Completion Flag OFF (reset)
TIMHX(551), TMHH(540), PV Time set value (reset)
TMHHX(552), TIML(542), and
TIMXL(553)
TIMU(541), TIMUX(556), Cannot be refer-
TMUH(544), and TMUHX(557) enced.
(See note 1.)
Bits/words specified in all other instructions (See note 2.) Retain previous status.
Note 1. These instructions are supported by the CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
2. Bits and words in all other instructions including TTIM(087), TTIMX(555),
MTIM(543), MTIMX(554), SET, RSET, CNT, CNTX(546), CNTR(012), CN-
TRX(548), SFT, and KEEP(011) retain their previous status.
If there are bits which you want to remain ON in an interlocked program sec-
tion, set these bits to ON with SET just before IL(002).
It is often more efficient to switch a program section with IL(002) and
ILC(003). When several processes are controlled with the same execution
condition, it takes fewer program steps to put these processes between
IL(002) and ILC(003).
The following table shows the differences between IL(002)/ILC(003) and

JMP(004)/JME(005).
Item Treatment in Treatment in
IL(002)/ILC(003) JMP(004)/JME(005)
Instruction execution Instructions other than OUT, OUT NOT, No instructions are executed.
OUTB(534), and timer instructions are
not executed.
Output status in instructions Except for outputs in OUT, OUT NOT, All outputs retain their previous status.
OUTB(534), and timer instructions, all
outputs retain their previous status.
Bits in OUT, OUT NOT, OUTB(534) OFF All outputs retain their previous status.
Status of timer instructions Reset Operating timers (TIM, TIMX(550),
(except (TTIM(087), TTIMX(555), TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TMHH(540),
MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554)) TMHHX(552) only) continue timing
because the PVs are updated even
when the timer instruction is not being
executed.
Flags
Error Flag ER Unchanged (See note.)
Equals Flag = Unchanged (See note.)
Negative Flag N Unchanged (See note.)
211
Note In CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D (for Single-CPU System) CPU Units, the
Equals and Negative Flags are left unchanged.
In CS1 and CJ1 CPU Units, the Equals and Negative Flags are turned OFF.
Precautions The cycle time is not shortened when a section of the program is interlocked
because the interlocked instructions are executed internally.
The operation of DIFU(013), DIFD(014), and differentiated instructions is not
dependent solely on the status of the execution condition when they are pro-
grammed between IL(002) and ILC(003). Changes in the execution condition
for DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or a differentiated instruction are not recorded if the
DIFU(013) or DIFD(014) is in an interlocked section and the execution condi-
tion for the IL(002) is OFF.
In general, IL(002) and ILC(003) are used in pairs, although it is possible to
use more than one IL(002) with a single ILC(003) as shown in the following
diagram. If IL(002) and ILC(003) are not paired, an error message will appear
when the program check is performed but the program will be executed prop-
erly.
Execution Program section

condition
a b A B
OFF ON Interlocked Interlocked
OFF OFF Interlocked Interlocked
ON OFF Not interlocked Interlocked
ON ON Not interlocked Not interlocked
IL(002) and ILC(003) cannot be nested, as in the following diagram. (Use

MILH(517)/MILR(518) and MILC(519) when it is necessary to nest interlocks.)
212
Examples When CIO 000000 is OFF in the following example, all outputs between
IL(002) and ILC(003) are interlocked. When CIO 000000 is ON in the follow-
ing example, the instructions between IL(002) and ILC(003) are executed nor-
mally.
CIO 000000 CIO 000000

ON OFF
OFF
OFF
Normal Outputs
execution
interlocked
Reset
Retained
Retained
213
3-5-5 MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION HOLD, MULTI-INTERLOCK

DIFFERENTIATION RELEASE, and MULTI-INTERLOCK CLEAR:
MILH(517), MILR(518), and MILC(519)
Purpose Interlocks all outputs between MILH(517) (or MILR(518)) and MILC(519)
when the execution condition for MILH(517) (or MILR(518)) is OFF. MILH(517)
(or MILR(518)) and MILC(519) are normally used in pairs.
Unlike the IL(002)/ILC(003) interlocks, the MILH(517)/MILC(519) and
MILR(518)/MILC(519) interlocks can be nested. The operation of differenti-
ated instructions is different for interlocks created with MILH(517) and
MILR(518).
These instructions are supported only by CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or
later.
Ladder Symbols
MILH(517)
N N: Interlock Number
D D: Interlock Status Bit
MILR(518)
D D: Interlock Status Bit
MILC(519)
Operands N: Interlock Number

The interlock number must be between 0 and 15. Match the interlock number
of the MILH(517) (or MILR(518)) instruction with the same number in the cor-
responding MILC(519) instruction.
The interlock numbers can be used in any order.
D: Interlock Status Bit
• ON when the program section is not interlocked.
• OFF when the program section is interlocked.
When the interlock is engaged, the Interlock Status Bit can be force-set to
release the interlock. Conversely, when the interlock is not engaged, the Inter-
lock Status Bit can be force-reset to engage the interlock.
Area N D
CIO Area --- CIO 000000 to CIO 614315
Work Area --- W00000 to W51115
Holding Bit Area --- H00000 to H51115
Auxiliary Bit Area --- A00000 to A95915
Timer Area --- ---
Counter Area --- ---
DM Area --- ---
EM Area without bank --- ---
EM Area with bank --- ---
Indirect DM/EM --- ---
addresses in binary
214
Area N D
addresses in BCD
Constants 0 to 15 ---
Data Registers --- ---
Index Registers --- ---
Indirect addressing --- ,IR0 to ,IR15
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –
2048 to +2047 ,IR15
Variations
Variations Interlocks when OFF/Does Not interlock when ON MILH(517) and
MILR(518)
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MILC(519)

Applicable Program Areas The following table shows the applicable program areas for MILH(517),
MILR(518), and MILC(519).
Description When the execution condition for MILH(517) (or MILR(518)) with interlock
number N is OFF, the outputs for all instructions between that MILH(517)/
MILR(518) instruction and the next MILC(519) with interlock number N are
interlocked.
When the execution condition for MILH(517) (or MILR(518)) with interlock
number N is ON, the instructions between that MILH(517)/MILR(518) instruc-
tion and the next MILC(519) with interlock number N are executed normally.
Interlock Status
The following table shows the treatment of various outputs in an interlocked
section between MILH(517)/MILR(518) instruction and the next MILC(519).
Instruction Treatment
Bits specified in OUT, OUT NOT, or OUTB(534) OFF
TIM, TIMX(550), TIMH(015), Completion Flag OFF (reset)
TIMHX(551), TMHH(540), PV Time set value (reset)
TMHHX(552), TIML(542), and
TIMXL(553)
TIMU(541), TIMUX(556), Cannot be refer-
TMUH(544), and TMUHX(557) enced.
(See note 1.)
Bits/words specified in all other instructions (See note 2.) Retain previous status.
Note 1. These instructions are supported by the CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
2. Bits and words in all other instructions including TTIM(087), TTIMX(555),
MTIM(543), MTIMX(554), SET, RSET, CNT, CNTX(546), CNTR(012), CN-
TRX(548), SFT, and KEEP(011) retain their previous status.
215
The MILH(517)/MILR(518) instruction turns OFF the Interlock Status Bit

(operand D) when the interlock is in engaged and turns ON the bit when the
interlock is not engaged. Consequently, the Interlock Status Bit can be moni-
tored to check whether or not the interlock for a given interlock number is
engaged.
Input condition ON
(Normal operation) Input condition OFF
MILH
Input condition n
d
Normal Outputs interlocked.
operation (Outputs OFF,
Interlock timers reset, etc.)
Interlocked program Status Bit Interlock Status Bit
section (d) ON (d) OFF
MILC
n
Nesting
Interlocks are nested when an interlocked program section (MILH(517)/
MILR(518) and MILC(519) combination) is placed within another interlocked
program section (MILH(517)/MILR(518) and MILC(519) combination). Inter-
locks can be nested up to 16 levels.
Nesting can be used for the following kinds of applications.
• Example 1
Interlocking the entire program with one condition and interlocking a part
of the program with another condition (1 nesting level)
Global interlock
(Emergency stop)
A1 (Peripheral processing)
Partial interlock
(Conveyor RUN)
A2 (Conveyor operation)
• A1 and A2 are interlocked when the Emergency Stop Button is ON.

• A2 is interlocked when Conveyor RUN is OFF.
216
Global interlock
(Emergency stop)
MILH When the Emergency Stop is ON (input
condition OFF), both A1 and A2 are
0 interlocked.
When the Emergency Stop is OFF (input
condition ON), A1 is executed normally
and A2 is controlled by the Conveyor
A1 (Peripheral processing) RUN switch as described below.
Partial interlock
(Conveyor RUN)
MILH When the Conveyor RUN switch is OFF
(input condition OFF), A2 is interlocked.
1 When the Conveyor RUN switch is ON
(input condition ON), A2 is executed
normally.
MILC
1
MILC
0
• Example 2
Interlocking the entire program with one condition and interlocking two
overlapping parts of the program with other conditions (2 nesting levels)
Global interlock
(Emergency stop)
Partial interlock
(Conveyor RUN)
Partial interlock
(Arm RUN)
A3 (Arm operation)
• A1, A2, and A3 are interlocked when the Emergency Stop Button is
ON.
• A2 and A3 are interlocked when Conveyor RUN is OFF.
• A3 is interlocked when Arm RUN is OFF.
217
Global interlock
(Emergency stop)
MILH When the Emergency Stop is ON (input
0 condition OFF), A1, A2, and A3 are
interlocked.
When the Emergency Stop is OFF (input
condition ON), A1 is executed normally and A2
and A3 are controlled by the Conveyor RUN
and Arm RUN switches as described below.
Partial interlock
(Conveyor RUN)
MILH When the Conveyor RUN switch is OFF (input
1 condition OFF), both A2 and A3 are interlocked.
When the Conveyor RUN switch is ON (input
condition ON), A2 is executed normally and A3 is
controlled by the Arm RUN switch as described
below.
Partial interlock
(Arm RUN)
MILH When the Arm RUN switch is OFF (input
2 condition OFF), A3 is interlocked.
When the Arm RUN switch is ON (input
condition ON), A3 is executed normally.
A3 (Arm operation)
MILC
2
MILC
1
MILC
0
Differences between MILH(517) and MILR(518)

Differentiated instructions (DIFU, DIFD, or instructions with a @ or % prefix)
operate differently in interlocks created with MILH(517) and MILR(518).
When a program section is interlocked with MILR(518), a differentiated
instruction will not be executed when the interlock is cleared even if the differ-
entiation condition was activated during the interlock (comparing the status of
the execution condition when the interlock started to its status when the inter-
lock was cleared).
When a program section is interlocked with MILH(517), a differentiated
instruction will be executed when the interlock is cleared if the differentiation
condition was activated during the interlock (comparing the status of the exe-
cution condition when the interlock started to its status when the interlock was
cleared).
218
Instruction Operation of Differentiated Instructions

MILH(517) A differentiated instruction (DIFU, DIFD, or
MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFER- instruction with a @ or % prefix) will be exe-
ENTIATION HOLD cuted after the interlock is cleared if the differ-
entiation condition of the instruction was
established while the instruction was inter-
locked. (The status of the execution condition
when the interlock started is compared to its
status when the interlock was cleared.)
MILR(518) A differentiated instruction (DIFU, DIFD, or
MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFER- instruction with a @ or % prefix) will not be
ENTIATION RELEASE executed after the interlock is cleared even if
the differentiation condition of the instruction
was established while the instruction was inter-
locked.
• Operation of Differentiated Instructions in an MILH(517) Interlock

If there is a differentiated instruction (DIFU, DIFD, or instruction with a @
or % prefix) between MILH(517) and the corresponding MILC(519), that in-
struction will be executed after the interlock is cleared if the differentiation
condition of the instruction was established. (The system compares the ex-
ecution condition’s status when the interlock started to its status when the
interlock was cleared.)
In the same way, a differentiated instruction will be executed if its execution
condition is established at the same time that the interlock is started or
cleared.
Many other conditions in the program may cause the differentiation condi-
tion to be reset even if it was established during the interlock. In this case,
the differentiation instruction will not be executed when the interlock is
cleared.
• Example
When a DIFFERENTIATE UP (DIFU(013)) instruction is being used
and the input condition is OFF when the interlock starts and ON when
the interlock is cleared, DIFU(013) will be executed when the interlock
is cleared. (Differentiated instructions operate the same in the
MILH(517) interlock as they would in an IL(002) interlock.)
000000
MILH
0
1. When CIO 000000 is OFF (interlock starts), the DIFU's CIO 000001 input condition is OFF.
2. The DIFU's CIO 000001 input condition goes from OFF to ON while CIO 000000 is OFF (DIFU interlocked),
3. When CIO 000000 goes from OFF to ON (interlock cleared), DIFU is executed if CIO 000001 is still ON.
000001
DIFU
001000
MILC
0
219
Timing Chart
Not interlocked Interlocked Not interlocked
ON
000000
OFF
Status (OFF) at
start of interlock ON Differentiation condition established
ON
000001
OFF
OFF Status (ON) when
MILH(517) interlock interlock is cleared
DIFU(013) is executed.
ON
001000
OFF
1 cycle
• Operation of Differentiated Instructions in an MILR(518) Interlock

If there is a differentiated instruction (DIFU, DIFD, or instruction with a @
or % prefix) between MILR(518) and the corresponding MILC(519), that in-
struction will not be executed after the interlock is cleared even if the dif-
ferentiation condition of the instruction was established. (The system
compares the execution condition’s status in the cycle when the interlock
started to its status in the cycle when the interlock was cleared.)
In the same way, a differentiated instruction will not be executed if its exe-
cution condition is established at the same time that the interlock is started
or cleared.
• Example
When a DIFFERENTIATE UP (DIFU(013)) instruction is being used
and the input condition is OFF when the interlock starts and ON when
the interlock is cleared, DIFU(013) will not be executed when the in-
terlock is cleared.
000000
MILR
0
1. When CIO 000000 is OFF (interlock starts), the DIFU's CIO 000001 input condition is OFF.
2. The DIFU's CIO 000001 input condition goes from OFF to ON while CIO 000000 is OFF (DIFU interlocked),
3. When CIO 000000 goes from OFF to ON (interlock cleared), DIFU is not executed even though CIO 000001 is still ON.
000001
DIFU
001000
MILC
0
220
Timing Chart
Not interlocked Interlocked Not interlocked
ON
000000
OFF
ON
ON
000001
OFF
OFF
MILR(518) interlock
ON DIFU(013) is not executed.
001000
OFF
Controlling Interlock Status from a Programming Device

An interlock can be engaged or released manually by force-resetting or force-
setting the Interlock Status Bit (specified with operand D of MILH(517) and
MILR(518)) from a Programming Device. The forced status of the Interlock
Status Bit has priority and overrides the interlock status calculated by program
execution.
Force-set: Releases the interlock.
OFF
MILH
n
010000 CIO 010000 is OFF when the interlock is engaged.
Program section
controlled by interlock If CIO 010000 is force-set (ON), the interlock is released.
MILC
n
Force-reset: Engages the interlock.

ON
MILH
n
010000 CIO 010000 is ON when the interlock is not engaged.
Program section
controlled by interlock If CIO 010000 is force-reset (OFF), the interlock is engaged.
MILC
n
Note Program operation can be switched more efficiently by using interlocks with
MILH(517) or MILR(518).
Instead of switching processing with compound conditions, insert an
MILH(517) or MILR(518) instruction before each process and an MILC(519)
instruction after each process.
221
a a
A1 MILH
0
b
A2 A1
b
MILH
1
A2
MILC
1
MILC
0
Unlike the IL(002) interlocks, MILH(517) and MILR(518) interlocks can be

nested, so the operation of similar programs will be different if MILH(517) or
MILR(518) is used instead of ILC(002).
Program with MILH(517)/MILC(519) Interlocks
a
MILH
0
010000
A1
b
MILH
1
010001
A2
MILC
1
A3
MILC
0

condition
a b A1 A2 A3
OFF ON Interlocked Interlocked Not interlocked
OFF
ON OFF Not interlocked Interlocked Not interlocked
ON ON Not interlocked Not interlocked Not interlocked
222
Program with IL(002)/ILC(003) Interlocks

a
IL
A1
b
IL
A2
ILC
This program section is not

A3 controlled by the interlock.
ILC This ILC(003)

instruction is ignored
so ...

condition
a b A1 A2 A3
OFF (Not controlled by
ON OFF Not interlocked Interlocked the IL(002)/
ILC(003) interlock.)
ON ON Not interlocked Not interlocked
If there are bits which you want to remain ON in a program section interlocked
by MILH(517) or MILR(518), set these bits to ON with SET just before the
MILH(517) or MILR(518) instruction.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions The cycle time is not shortened when a section of the program is interlocked
by MILH(517) or MILR(518) because the interlocked instructions are executed
internally.
223
When nesting interlocks, assign interlock numbers so that the nested program
section does not exceed the outer program section.
a
MILH
0
A1
b
MILH
1
A2
MILC
0
A3
The nested program section
MILC must not go beyond the outer
program section.
1

condition
a b A1 A2 A3
OFF
ON OFF Not interlocked Interlocked Interlocked
ON Not interlocked Not interlocked Not interlocked
224
Other instructions can be input between the MILC(519) instructions, as shown

in the following diagram.
a
MILH
0
010000
A1
b
MILH
1
010001
A2
MILC
1
Other instructions can be inserted between
two MILC(519) instructions. In this case,
A3 sections A1 and A3 operate together. (They
are interlocked when "a" is OFF, regardless
of the ON/OFF status of "b".)
MILC
0
If there is an ILC(003) instruction between an MILH(517) and MILC(519) pair,

the program section between MILH(517) and ILC(003) will be interlocked.
a
MILH When input condition "a" is OFF, only
program section A1 is interlocked.
0
A1
If there is an ILC(003) instruction,

ILC the interlock is cleared at that point.
A2
The MILC(519) instruction is ignored.

MILC
0
225
If there is an ILC(003) instruction between an MILR(518) and MILC(519) pair,

the ILC(003) instruction will be ignored and the full program section between
MILR(518) and MILC(519) will be interlocked.
a
MILR When input condition "a" is OFF, program
sections A1 and A2 are interlocked.
0
A1
The ILC(003) instruction is ignored.

ILC
A2
MILC
0
If there is another MILH(517) or MILR(518) instruction with the same interlock

number between an MILH(517) and MILC(519) pair and the first MILH(517)
instruction’s interlock is engaged, the second MILH(517)/MILR(518) will not
operate.
If there is another MILH(517) or MILR(518) instruction with the same interlock
number between an MILH(517) and MILC(519) pair and the first MILH(517)
instruction’s interlock is not engaged, the second MILH(517)/MILR(518) will
operate normally.
a
MILH When input condition "a" is OFF, program
sections A1 and A2 are both interlocked,
0 even if input condition "b" is ON.
A1
b
MILH When input condition "a" is ON and "b"
is OFF, only program section A2 is
0
interlocked.
A2
MILC
0
Note The MILR(518) interlocks operate in the same way if there is another
MILH(517) or MILR(518) instruction with the same interlock number between
an MILR(518) and MILC(519) pair.
If there is an MILC(519) instruction with a different interlock number between
an MILH(517)/MILR(518) and MILC(519) pair, that MILC(519) instruction will
be ignored.
226
a
MILH When input condition "a" is OFF, program
sections A1 and A2 are both interlocked.
0
A1
This MILC(519) instruction is ignored.

MILC
1
A2
MILC
0
If there is an MILH(517) instruction between an IL(002) and ILC(003) pair and

the IL(002) interlock is engaged, the MILH(517) instruction has no effect. In
this case, the program section between IL(002) and ILC(003) will be inter-
locked.
If the IL(002) interlock is not engaged and the MILH(517) instruction’s execu-
tion condition (b in this case) is OFF, the program section between MILH(517)
and ILC(003) will be interlocked.
a
IL When input condition "a" is OFF, program
A1
b
If the program section is not interlocked
MILH by IL(002) and "b" is OFF, program
0 section A2 is interlocked.
A2
ILC
If there is an MILC(519) instruction between an IL(002) and ILC(003) pair, that

MILC(519) instruction will be ignored and the entire program section between
IL(002) and ILC(003) will be interlocked.
a
IL When input condition "a" is OFF, program
A1
The MILC(519) instruction is ignored.

MILC
0
A2
ILC
Examples When W00000 and W00001 are both ON, the instructions between
MILH(517) with interlock number 0 and MILC(519) with interlock number 0 are
executed normally.
227
When W00000 is OFF, the instructions between MILH(517) with interlock

number 0 and MILC(519) with interlock number 0 are interlocked.
When W00000 is ON and W00001 are OFF, the instructions between
MILH(517) with interlock number 1 and MILC(519) with interlock number 1 are
interlocked. The other instructions are executed normally.
W00000 and W00001 W00000 ON and W00001
both ON W0000 OFF OFF
W00000
MILH
0
010000
Executed
normally.
000001 000200
OFF
W00001
MILH
1
010001
000002 H0000
Executed
OFF
normally.
Outputs
interlocked.
SET Held Outputs
interlocked.
000003
MILC
1
CNT
1 Executed
Held normally.
#0010
MILC
0
3-5-6 JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(004) and JME(005)

Purpose When the execution condition for JMP(004) is OFF, program execution jumps
directly to the first JME(005) in the program with the same jump number.
JMP(004) and JME(005) are used in pairs.
Ladder Symbols
JMP(004)
N N: Jump number
JME(005)
N N: Jump number
Variations
Variations Jumps when OFF/Does Not Jump when ON JMP(004)
228
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition JME(005)


OK Not allowed OK OK
Operands N: Jump Number

The jump number must be 0000 to 03FF (&0 to &1,023 decimal).
Note For CJ1M-CPU11 and CJ1M-CPU21 CPU Units, the jump number must be
between the range 0000 to 00FF hex or &0 to &255 decimal.
Area N
JMP(004) JME(005)
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 ---
Work Area W000 to W511 ---
Holding Bit Area H000 to H511 ---
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to A959 ---
Timer Area T0000 to T4095 ---
Counter Area C0000 to C4095 ---
DM Area D00000 to D32767 ---
EM Area without bank E00000 to E32767 ---
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_32767 ---
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM addresses @ D00000 to @ D32767 ---
in binary @ E00000 to @ E32767
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM addresses *D00000 to *D32767 ---
in BCD *E00000 to *E32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #03FF (binary) or #0000 to #03FF (binary) or
&0 to &1023 (See note.) &0 to &1023 (See note.)
Data Registers DR0 to DR15 ---
Indirect addressing using ,IR0 to ,IR15 ---
Index Registers –2048 to +2047, IR0 to
–2048 to +2047, IR15
Note For CJ1M-CPU11 and CJ1M-CPU21 CPU Units, the range is #0000 to #00FF
(binary) or &0 to &1023 (decimal).
Description When the execution condition for JMP(004) is ON, no jump is made and the
program is executed consecutively as written.
When the execution condition for JMP(004) is OFF, program execution jumps
directly to the first JME(005) in the program with the same jump number. The
instructions between JMP(004) and JME(005) are not executed, so the status
of outputs between JMP(004) and JME(005) is maintained. In block programs,
229
the instructions between JMP(004) and JME(005) are skipped regardless of

the status of the execution condition.
Execution condition
Instructions
jumped
Instructions in this section are not

Instructions executed and output status is
executed maintained. The instruction execution
time for these instructions is eliminated.
Because all of instructions between JMP(004)/CJP(510)/CJPN(511) and

JME(005) are skipped when the execution condition for JMP(004) is OFF, the
cycle time is reduced by the total execution time of the skipped instructions. In
contrast, processing time equivalent to NOP(000) processing is required for
instructions between JMP0(515) and JME0(516), so the cycle time is not
reduced as much with those jump instructions.
The following table compares the various jump instructions.
Item JMP(004) CJP(510) CJPN(511) JMP0(515)
JME(005) JME(005) JME(005) JME0(516)
Execution condition for jump OFF ON OFF OFF
Number allowed 1,024 total (256 for CJ1M-CPU11/21.) No limit
Instruction processing when jumped Not executed. NOP(000) processing
Instruction execution time when None Equivalent to
jumped NOP(000) instructions
Status of outputs (bits and words) Bits and words maintain their previous status.
when jumped
Status of operating timers when Operating timers continue timing.
jumped
Processing in block programs Always jump. Jump when ON. Jump when OFF. Not allowed.
Flags (JMP)
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the specified range of 0000 to 03FF.
(See note.)
ON if there is a JMP(004) in the program without a
JME(005) with the same jump number.
ON if there is a JMP(004) in the task without a JME(005)
with the same jump number in the task.
Note For CJ1M-CPU11 and CJ1M-CPU21 CPU Units, the range is 0 to 255 (0000
to 00FF hex).
Precautions All of the outputs (bits and words) in jumped instructions retain their previous
status. Operating timers (TIM, TIMX(550), TIMH(015), TIMHX(551),
TMHH(540), TMHHX(552), TIMU(541), TIMUX(556), TMUH(544), and
TMUHX(557)) continue timing because the PVs are updated even when the
timer instruction is not being executed.
When there are two or more JME(005) instructions with the same jump num-
ber, only the instruction with the lower address will be valid. The JME(005)
with the higher program address will be ignored.
230
When JME(005) precedes JMP(004) in the program, the instructions between

JME(005) and JMP(004) will be executed repeatedly as long as the execution
condition for JMP(004) is OFF. A Cycle Time Too Long error will occur if the
execution condition is not turned ON or END(001) is not executed within the
maximum cycle time.
Program section A is executed

repeatedly as long as
execution condition a is OFF.
In block programs, the instructions between JMP(004) and JME(005) are

always skipped regardless of the status of the execution condition for
JMP(004).
Block program section
JMP &1
to
JME &1
JMP(004) and JME(005) pairs must be in the same task because jumps
between tasks are not allowed. An error will occur if a JME(005) instruction is
not programmed in the same task as its corresponding JMP(004) instruction.
grammed between JMP(004) and JME(005). When DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or
a differentiated instruction is executed in an jumped section immediately after
the execution condition for the JMP(004) has gone ON, the execution condi-
tion for the DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or differentiated instruction will be com-
pared to the execution condition that existed before the jump became effective
(i.e., before the execution condition for JMP(004) went OFF).
Examples Basic Operation
When CIO 000000 is OFF in the following example, the instructions between
JMP(004) and JME(005) are not executed and the outputs maintain their pre-
vious status.
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the instructions between
JMP(004) and JME(005) are executed normally.
231
CIO 000000 CIO 000000

&1 ON OFF
Normal Instructions
execution not executed.
(Outputs re-
main un-
changed.)
&1
3-5-7 CONDITIONAL JUMP: CJP(510)/CJPN(511)

Purpose The operation of CJP(510) is the basically the opposite of JMP(004). When
the execution condition for CJP(510) is ON, program execution jumps directly
to the first JME(005) in the program with the same jump number. CJP(510)
and JME(005) are used in pairs.
The operation of CJPN(511) is almost identical to JMP(004). When the execu-
tion condition for CJP(004) is OFF, program execution jumps directly to the
first JME(005) in the program with the same jump number. CJPN(511) and
JME(005) are used in pairs.
Ladder Symbols
CJP(510)
N N: Jump number
CJPN(511)
N N: Jump number
Variations
Variations Jumps when ON/Does Not Jump when OFF CJP(510)
232
Variations Jumps when OFF/Does Not Jump when ON CJPN(511)

Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition JME(005)


OK Not allowed OK OK
Operands N: Jump Number

The jump number must be 0000 to 03FF (0 to 1,023 decimal).
between the range 0000 to 00FF hex or &0 to &255 decimal.
Area N
CJP(510) CJPN(511) JME(005)
DM Area D00000 to D32767 ---
EM Area without E00000 to E32767 ---
bank
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM @ D00000 to @ D32767 ---
addresses in binary @ E00000 to @ E32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM *D00000 to *D32767 ---
addresses in BCD *E00000 to *E32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #03FF (binary) or &0 to &1023 #0000 to #03FF
(See note.) (binary) or &0 to
&1023 (See note.)
Indirect addressing ,IR0 to ,IR15 ---
using Index Regis- –2048 to +2047, IR0 to –2048 to +2047,
ters IR15
Note For CJ1M-CPU11 and CJ1M-CPU21 CPU Units, the range is #0000 to #00FF
(binary) or &0 to &1023 (decimal).
Description The operation of CJP(510) and CJPN(511) differs only in the execution condi-
tion. CJP(510) jumps to the first JME(005) when the execution condition is ON
233
and CJPN(511) jumps to the first JME(005) when the execution condition is
OFF.
Because the jumped instructions are not executed, the cycle time is reduced
by the total execution time of the jumped instructions.
Operation of CJP(510)
When the execution condition for CJP(510) is OFF, no jump is made and the
When the execution condition for CJP(510) is ON, program execution jumps
directly to the first JME(005) in the program with the same jump number.
Execution Execution
condition OFF condition ON
Instructions
jumped

Instructions executed and output status is
executed maintained. The instruction execution
time for these instructions is eliminated.
Operation of CJPN(511)
When the execution condition for CJPN(511) is ON, no jump is made and the
When the execution condition for CJPN(511) is OFF, program execution
jumps directly to the first JME(005) in the program with the same jump num-
ber.
Execution Execution
condition ON condition OFF
Instructions
jumped

executed and output status is
Instructions maintained. The instruction execution
executed time for these instructions is eliminated.
Flags The following table shows the flags affected by CJP(510) and CJPN(511).
Error Flag ER ON if there is not a JME(005) with the same jump number
as CJP(510) or CJPN(511). (See note.)
ON if N is not within the specified range of 0000 to 03FF.
ON if there is a CJP(510) or CJPN(511) instruction in a
task without a JME(005) with the same jump number.
between the range 0 to 255 (0000 to 00FF hex).
Precautions All of the outputs (bits and words) in jumped instructions retain their previous
status. Operating timers (TIM, TIMX(550), TIMH(015), TIMHX(551),
TMHH(540), and TMHHX(552)) continue timing be-cause the PVs are
updated even when the timer instruction is not being executed.
234
When there are two or more JME(005) instructions with the same jump num-
ber, only the instruction with the lower address will be valid. The JME(005)
with the higher program address will be ignored.
When JME(005) precedes the CJP(510) or CJPN(511) instruction in the pro-
gram, the instructions in-between will be executed repeatedly as long as the
execution condition remains OFF (CJP(510)) or ON (CJPN(511)). A Cycle
Time Too Long error will occur if the jump is not completed by changing the
execution condition executing END(001) within the maximum cycle time.
The CJP(510) or CJPN(511) instructions will operate normally in block pro-
grams.
When the execution condition for the CJP(510) is ON or the execution condi-
tion for CJPN(511) is OFF, program execution will jump directly to the JME
instruction without executing instructions between CJP(510)/CJPN(511) and
JME. No execution time will be required for these instructions and the cycle
time will thus be reduced.
When the execution condition for the JMP0 is OFF, NOP processing is exe-
cuted between the JMP0 and JME0, requiring execution time. Therefore, the
cycle time will not be reduced.
When a CJP(510) or CJPN(511) instruction is programmed in a task, there
must be a JME(005) with the same jump number because jumps between
tasks are not allowed. An error will occur if a corresponding JME(005) instruc-
tion is not programmed in the same task.
grammed in a jumped program section. When DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or a dif-
ferentiated instruction is executed in an jumped section immediately after the
execution condition for the CJP(510) has gone OFF (ON for CJPN(511)), the
execution condition for the DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or differentiated instruction
will be compared to the execution condition that existed before the jump
became effective.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the instructions between
CJP(510) and JME(005) are not executed and the outputs maintain their pre-
vious status.
When CIO 000000 is OFF in the following example, the instructions between
CJP(510) and JME(005) are executed normally.
235
CIO 000000 CIO 000000

ON OFF
&1
Instructions
not Normal
executed. execution
(Outputs
remain un-
changed.)
&1
Note For CJPN(511), the ON/OFF status of CIO 000000 would be reversed.
3-5-8 MULTIPLE JUMP and JUMP END: JMP0(515) and JME0(516)

Purpose When the execution condition for JMP0(515) is OFF, all instructions from
JMP0(515) to the next JME0(516) in the program are processed as
NOP(000). Use JMP0(515) and JME0(516) in pairs. There is no limit on the
number of pairs that can be used in the program.
Ladder Symbols
JMP0(515)
JME0(516)
Variations
Variations Jumps when OFF/Does Not Jump when ON JMP0(515)
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition JME0(516)


236
Description When the execution condition for JMP0(515) is ON, no jump is made and the
program executed consecutively as written.
When the execution condition for JMP0(515) is OFF, all instructions from
JMP0(515) to the next JME0(516) in the program are processed as
NOP(000). Unlike JMP(004), CJP(510), and CJPN(511), JMP0(515) does not
use jump numbers, so these instructions can be placed anywhere in the pro-
gram.
Execution Execution
condition a ON condition a OFF
Instructions
jumped
Instructions
executed
Jumped instructions are processed as

NOP(000). Instruction execution times
Execution are the same as NOP(000).
condition b ON Execution
condition b OFF
Instructions
executed
Instructions
jumped
Unlike JMP(004), CJP(510), and CJPN(511) which jump directly to the first
JME(005) instruction in the program, all of the instructions between
JMP0(515) and JME0(516) are executed as NOP(000). The execution time of
the jumped instructions will be reduced, but not eliminated. The jumped
instructions themselves are not executed and their outputs (bits and words)
maintain their previous status.
Precautions Multiple pairs of JMP0(515) and JME0(516) instructions can be used in the
program, but the pairs cannot be nested.
JMP0(515) and JME0(516) cannot be used in block programs.
JMP0(515) and JME0(516) pairs must be in the same tasks because jumps
between tasks are not allowed.
grammed between JMP0(515) and JME0(516). When DIFU(013), DIFD(014),
or a differentiated instruction is executed in an jumped section immediately
after the execution condition for the JMP0(515) has gone ON, the execution
condition for the DIFU(013), DIFD(014), or differentiated instruction will be
compared to the execution condition that existed before the jump became
effective (i.e., before the execution condition for JMP0(515) went OFF).
Example When CIO 000000 is OFF in the following example, the instructions between
JMP0(515) and JME0(516) are processed as NOP(000) instructions and the
outputs maintain their previous status.
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the instructions between
JMP0(515) and JME0(516) are executed normally.
237
CIO 000000 CIO 000000

ON OFF
Normal Instructions
execution processed
as
NOP(000).
(Outputs re-
main un-
changed.)
3-5-9 FOR-NEXT LOOPS: FOR(512)/NEXT(513)

Purpose The instructions between FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are repeated a specified
number of times. FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are used in pairs.
Ladder Symbols
FOR(512)
N N: Number of loops
NEXT(513)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FOR(512)
Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NEXT(513)

Operands N: Number of Loops

The number of loops must be 0000 to FFFF (0 to 65,535 decimal).
238
Area N
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM @ D00000 to @ D32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM *D00000 to *D32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF (binary) or &0 to &65,535
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description The instructions between FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are executed N times
and then program execution continues with the instruction after NEXT(513).
The BREAK(514) instruction can be used to cancel the loop.
If N is set to 0, the instructions between FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are pro-
cessed as NOP(000) instructions.
Loops can be used to process tables of data with a minimum amount of pro-
gramming.
Repeated N times
Repeated program section
FOR-NEXT loops can be nested up to 15 levels. In the example below, pro-

gram sections A, B, and C are executed as follows:
A → B → B → C, A → B → B → C, and A → B → B → C
239
&3
&2
Use BREAK(514) to escape from a FOR-NEXT loop. Several BREAK(514)

instructions (the number of levels nested) are required to escape from nested
loops. The remaining instructions in the loop after BREAK(514) are processed
as NOP(000) instructions.
&3 Escapes from &3

loop when
condition a is
ON.
&2
Remaining
Breaks FOR-NEXT loop 2.
instructions are
processed as 1 2
NOP(000).
Breaks FOR-NEXT loop 1.
Alternative Looping Methods

There are two ways to repeat a program section until a given execution condi-
tion is input.
1,2,3... 1. FOR-NEXT Loop with BREAK
Start a FOR-NEXT loop with a maximum of N repetitions. Program
BREAK(514) within the loop with the desired execution condition. The loop
will end before N repetitions if the execution condition is input.
2. JME(005)-JMP(004) Loop
Program a loop with JME(005) before JMP(004). The instructions between
JME(005) and JMP(004) will be executed repeatedly as long as the execu-
tion condition for JMP(004) is OFF. (A Cycle Time Too Long error will occur
if the execution condition is not turned ON or END(001) is not executed
within the maximum cycle time.)
240
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if more than 15 loops are nested.
Equals Flag = OFF
Negative Flag N OFF
Precautions Program FOR(512) and NEXT(513) in the same task. Execution will not be
repeated if these instructions are not in the same task.
A jump instruction such as JMP(004) may be executed within a FOR-NEXT
loop, but do not jump beyond the FOR-NEXT loop.
The following instructions cannot be used within FOR-NEXT loops:
• Block programming instructions
• MULTIPLE JUMP and JUMP END: JMP(515) and JME(516)
• STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009)
Note If a loop repeats in one cycle and a differentiated bit is used in the FOR-NEXT
loop, that bit will be always ON or always OFF within that loop.
Example In the following example, the looped program section transfers the content of
D00100 to the address indicated in D00200 and then increments the content
of D00200 by 1.
&3 Repeated 3 times.
D00100
@D00200
D00200
#0000
3-5-10 BREAK LOOP: BREAK(514)

Purpose Programmed in a FOR-NEXT loop to cancel the execution of the loop for a
given execution condition. The remaining instructions in the loop are pro-
cessed as NOP(000) instructions.
Ladder Symbol
BREAK(514)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BREAK(514)
241
Timer and Counter Instructions Section 3-6

Description Program BREAK(514) between FOR(512) and NEXT(513) to cancel the

FOR-NEXT loop when BREAK(514) is executed. When BREAK(514) is exe-
cuted, the rest of the instructions up to NEXT(513) are processed as
NOP(000).
Condition a ON
N repetitions
Repetitions
forced to end.
Processed as NOP(000).
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = OFF
Negative Flag N OFF
Precautions A BREAK(514) instruction cancels only one loop, so several BREAK(514)

instructions (the number of levels nested) are required to escape from nested
loops.
BREAK(514) can be used only in a FOR-NEXT loop.
3-6 Timer and Counter Instructions

This section describes instructions used to define and handle timers and
counters.
Instruction Mnemonic Function code Page
HUNDRED-MS TIMER TIM/TIMX ---/551 245
TEN-MS TIMER TIMH/TIMHX 015/551 249
ONE-MS TIMER TMHH/TIMHHX 540/552 253
TENTH-MS TIMER (See note.) TIMU/TIMUX 541/556 256
HUNDREDTH-MS TIMER (See note.) TMUH/TMUHX 544/557 259
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER TTIM/TTIMX 087/555 262
LONG TIMER TIML/TIMLX 542/553 266
MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER MTIM/MTIMX 543/554 269
COUNTER CNT/CNTX ---/546 275
REVERSIBLE COUNTER CNTR/CNTRX 012/548 278
RESET TIMER/COUNTER CNR/CNRX 545/547 282
Note TIMU(541), TIIMUX(556), TMUH(544), and TMUHX(557) are supported by

CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
242
Refresh Methods for Timer/Counter PV

■ Overview
In the CS1-H, CS1D, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units, the PV refresh method
can be set to either BCD or binary for all of the timer/counter-related instruc-
tions. (See notes 1 and 2.)
Using binary data instead of BCD allows the SV range for timers and counter
to be increased from 0 to 9999 to 0 to 65535. It also enables using binary data
calculated with other instructions directly as a timer/counter SV. The refresh
method is valid even when setting an SV indirectly (i.e., using the contents of
memory word). (That is, the contents of the addressed word is taken as either
BCD or binary data according to the refresh method that is set.)
Refer to 6-4 Changing the Timer/Counter PV Refresh Mode in the CS/CJ
Series Programming Manual (W394) for details on refresh methods.
Note 1. With CS1-H and CJ1-H CPU Units manufactured prior to 31 May 2002, the
binary instructions will be displayed on the Programming Console with the
mnemonic of the equivalent instruction for BCD operation. (For example,
TIMX0 &16 will be displayed as TIM0 &16.) The instruction, however, will
operate using binary mode.
2. The refresh method can be selected only with CX-Programmer version 3.0
or later. It cannot be selected with version 2.1 or early, or from a Program-
ming Console.
3. User programs that use the binary update mode cannot be read with CX-
Programmer version 2.1 or lower. They can be read only by changing to
BCD mode.
■ Applicable Instructions
Classification Instruction Mnemonic
BCD Binary
Timer/counter HUNDRED-MS TIMER TIM TIMX(550)
instructions TEN-MS TIMER TIMH(015) TIMHX(551)
ONE-MS TIMER TMHH(540) TMHHX(552)
TENTH-MS TIMER (See note.) TIMU(541) TIMUX(556)
HUNDREDTH-MS TIMER (See note.) TMUH(544) TMUHX(557)
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER TTIM(087) TTIMX(555)
LONG TIMER TIML(542) TIMLX(553)
MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER MTIM(543) MTIMX(554)
COUNTER CNT CNTX(546)
REVERSIBLE COUNTER CNTR(012) CNTRX(548)
RESET TIMER/COUNTER CNR(545) CNRX(547)
Block HUNDRED-MS TIMER WAIT TIMW(813) TIMWX(816)
programming TEN-MS TIMER WAIT TMHW(815) TMHWX(817)
instructions
COUNTER WAIT CNTW(814) CNTWX(818)
Note TIMU(541), TIMUX(556), TMUH(544), and TMUHX(557) are supported by

243
Basic Timer Specifications

The following table shows the basic specifications of the timers.
Item TIM/ TIMH(015)/ TMHH(540)/ TIMU(541)/ TMUH(544)/ TTIM(087)/ TIML(542)/ MTIM(543)/
TIMX(550) TIMHX(551) TMHHX(552) TIMUX(556) TMUHX(557) TTIMX(555) TIMLX(553) MTIMX(554)
(See note 3.) (See note 3.)
Timing method Decrement- Decrementing Decrementing Decrementing Decrementing Incrementing Decrementing Incrementing
ing
Timing units 100 ms 10 ms 1 ms 0.1 ms 0.01 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms
Maximum SV TIM: 999.9 s TIMH: 99.99 s TMHH: TIMU: TMUH: TTIM: 999.9 s TIML: MTIM: 999.9 s
TIMX: TIMHX: 9.999 s 0.9999 s 0.09999 s TTIMX: 115 days MTIMX:
6,553.5 s 655.35 s TMHHX: TIMUX: TMUHX: 6,553.5 s TIMLX: 6,553.5 s
65.535 s 6.5535 s 0.65535 s 49,710 days
Outputs/instruc- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8
tion
Timer numbers Used Used Used Used Used Used Not used Not used
Completion Flag At execution At execution At execution At execution At execution At execution At execution At execution
refreshing
Timer PV See note 1. See note 2. Every 1 ms At execution At execution At execution At execution At execution
refreshing At execution
(See note 5.)
Value Com- OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
after pletion
reset Flags
PVs SV SV SV --- (See note 4.) 0 SV 0
Note 1. TIM PVs are refreshed at execution, at the end of program execution each
cycle, or every 80 ms by interrupt if the cycle time exceeds 80 ms.
2. TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) PVs are refreshed at execution, at the end of pro-
gram execution each cycle, and every 10 ms by interrupt.
3. TIMU(541), TIMUX(556), TMUH(544), and TMUHX(557) are supported by
4. It is not possible to read the timer PVs of TIMU(541), TIMUX(556),
TMUH(544), and TMUHX(557).
5. Timers are refreshed at different times depending on the timer number.
Refer to the descriptions of individual timer instructions for details.
Timer Operation
The following table shows the effects of operating and programming condi-
tions on the operation of the timers.
Item TIM/ TIMH(015)/ TMHH(540)/ TIMU(541)/ TMUH(544)/ TTIM(087)/ TIML(542)/ MTIM(543)/
TIMX(550) TIMHX(551) TMHHX(552) TIMUX(556) TMUHX(557) TTIMX(555) TIMLX(553) MTIMX(554)
Operating mode PV = 0 --- ---
change Completion Flag = OFF
Power interrupt/reset PV = 0 --- ---
Completion Flag = OFF
Execution of Binary: PV = FFFF, Completion Flag = OFF Not applica- Not applica-
CNR(545)/CNRX(547) BCD: PV = FFFF or 9999, Completion Flag = OFF ble ble
Operation in jumped Operating timers continue timing. Timer status is maintained.
program section
(JMP(004)-JME(005))
Operation in inter- PV = SV Timer status PV = SV Timer sta-
locked program sec- Completion Flag = OFF maintained. Completion tus main-
tion (IL(002)-ILC(003)) Flag = OFF tained.
Forced Comple- ON --- ---
set tion Flag
PVs Set to 0. --- (See note 2.) Set to 0. --- ---
Forced Comple- OFF --- ---
reset tion Flags
PVs Reset to SV. --- (See note 2.) Set to 0. --- ---
Note 1. TIMU(541), TIMUX(556), TMUH(544), and TMUHX(557) are supported by

244
2. It is not possible to read the timer PVs of TIMU(541), TIMUX(556),

TMUH(544), and TMUHX(557).
3-6-1 HUNDRED-MS TIMER: TIM/TIMX(550)

Purpose TIM or TIMX(550) operates a decrementing timer with units of 0.1-s. The set-
ting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 999.9 s for TIM and 0 to 6,553.5 s for
TIMX(550). The timer accuracy is 0 to 0.01 s.
Note The timer accuracy for CS1D CPU Units is 10 ms + the cycle time. The timer
accuracy for unit version 4.1 of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units is −0.1 to 0 s. The
timer accuracy for other unit versions of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units is 0 to 0.01 s.
Ladder Symbol
PV Symbol Operands
refresh
method
BCD N: 0000 to 4095 (decimal)
TIM S: #0000 to #9999 (BCD)
N N: Timer number
S S: Set value
Binary N: 00000 to 4095 (decimal)
TIMX(550) S: &0 to &65535 (decimal)
#0000 to #FFFF (hex)
N N: Timer number
S S: Set value
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TIM/TIMX(550)

Not allowed OK OK Not allowed
Operands N: Timer Number

The timer number must be between 0000 and 4095 (decimal).
S: Set Value
The set value must be between #0000 and 9999 (BCD).
(If the set value is set to #0000, the Completion Flag will be turned ON when
TIM/TIMX(550) is executed.)
Area N S
Timer Area 0000 to 4095 (decimal) T0000 to T4095
Counter Area --- C0000 to C4095
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
245
Area N S
EM Area without bank --- E00000 to E32767
EM Area with bank --- En_00000 to En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM --- @ D00000 to @ D32767
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM --- *D00000 to *D32767
*En_00000 to *En_032767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- BCD:
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
“&” cannot be used.
Binary:
&0 to &65535 (decimal)
Description When the timer input is OFF, the timer specified by N is reset, i.e., the timer’s
PV is reset to the SV and its Completion Flag is turned OFF.
When the timer input goes from OFF to ON, TIM/TIMX(550) starts decrement-
ing the PV. The PV will continue timing down as long as the timer input
remains ON and the timer’s Completion Flag will be turned ON when the PV
reaches 0000.
The status of the timer’s PV and Completion Flag will be maintained after the
timer times out. To restart the timer, the timer input must be turned OFF and
then ON again or the timer’s PV must be changed to a non-zero value (by
MOV(021), for example).
Timer input
Timer PV SV
Completion
Flag
The following timing chart shows the behavior of the timer’s PV and Comple-
tion Flag when the timer input is turned OFF before the timer times out.
Timer input
Timer PV SV
Completion
Flag
246
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is indirectly addressed through an Index Register
but the address in the Index Register is not the address of
a timer Completion Flag or timer PV.
ON if in BCD mode and S does not contain BCD data.
Equals Flag = OFF or unchanged (See note.)
Note In CS1 and CJ1 CPU Units, these are turned OFF.
unchanged.
Precautions Timer numbers are shared with other timer instructions. If two timers share
the same timer number, but are not used simultaneously, a duplication error
will be generated when the program is checked, but the timers will operate
normally. Timers which share the same timer number will not operate properly
if they are used simultaneously.
Timers created with timer numbers 2048 to 4095 will not operate properly
when the CPU Unit cycle time exceeds 80 ms. Use timer numbers 0000 to
2047 when the cycle time is longer than 80 ms.
The present value of timers programmed with timer numbers 0000 to 2047 will
be updated even when the timer is on standby. The present value of timers
programmed with timer numbers 2048 to 4095 will be held when the timer is
on standby.
Timers will be reset or paused in the following cases. (When a timer is reset,
its PV is reset to the SV and its Completion Flag is turned OFF.)
Condition PV Completion Flag
Operating mode changed from RUN or 0000 OFF
MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode
or vice versa.1
Power supply interrupted and reset2 0000 OFF
Execution of CNR(545)/CNRX(547), BCD: 9999 OFF
the RESET TIMER/COUNTER Binary: FFFF
instructions3
Operation in interlocked program sec- Reset to SV. OFF
tion
(IL(002)–ILC(003))
Operation in jumped program section PV continues decre- Retains previous sta-
(JMP(004)–JME(005)) menting. tus.
Note 1. If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) has been turned ON, the status of timer Com-
pletion Flags and PVs will be maintained when the operating mode is
changed.
2. If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) has been turned ON and the status of the IOM
Hold Bit itself is protected in the PLC Setup, the status of timer Completion
Flags and PVs will be maintained even when the power is interrupted.
3. The PV will be set to the SV when TIM/TIMX(550) is executed.
When TIM/TIMX(550) is in a program section between IL(002) and ILC(003)
and the program section is interlocked, the PV will be reset to the SV and the
Completion Flag will be turned OFF.
When an operating TIM/TIMX(550) timer created with a timer number
between 0000 and 2047 is in a jumped program section (JMP(004),
CJMP(510), CJPN(511), JME(005)), the timer’s PV will continue timing. (See
247
note.) The jumped TIM/TIMX(550) instruction will not be executed, but the PV
will be refreshed each cycle after all tasks have been executed.
Note With the CS1D CPU Units, the PV will not be refreshed in the above case.
When a TIM/TIMX(550) timer is forced set, its Completion Flag will be turned
ON and its PV will be set to 0000. When a TIM/TIMX(550) timer is forced
reset, its Completion Flag will be turned OFF and its PV will be reset to the
SV.
The operation of the = Flag and N Flag depends on the model of the CPU
Unit. Refer to Flags, above, for details.
The timer’s Completion Flag is refreshed only when TIM/TIMX(550) is exe-
cuted, so a delay of up to one cycle may be required for the Completion Flag
to be turned ON after the timer times out.
If online editing is used to overwrite a timer instruction, always reset the Com-
pletion Flag. The timer will not operate properly unless the Completion Flag is
reset.
A TIM/TIMX(550) instruction’s PV and Completion Flag can be refreshed in
the following ways depending on the timer number that is used.
Timers Created with Timer Numbers 0000 to 2047
Execution of TIM/ The PV is updated every time that TIM/TIMX(550) is exe-
TIMX(550) cuted.
The Completion Flag is turned ON if the PV is 0000.
The Completion Flag is turned OFF if the PV is not 0000.
After executing all tasks The PV is also updated every cycle at the end of pro-
gram execution.
80-ms interval refreshing If the cycle time exceeds 80 ms, the timer’s PV is
updated every 80 ms.

Execution of TIM The PV is updated every time that TIM is executed.
The Completion Flag is turned ON if the PV is 0000.
Timers are reset (PV = SV, Completion Flag OFF) by power interruptions
unless the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON and the bit is protected in the PLC
Setup. It is also possible use a clock pulse bit and a counter instruction to pro-
gram a timer that will retain its PV in the event of a power interruption, as
Execution 1-s clock
condition pulse bit
Count input
Reset input
Example When timer input CIO 000000 goes from OFF to ON in the following example,
the timer PV will begin counting down from the SV. Timer Completion Flag
T0000 will be turned ON when the PV reaches 0000.
When CIO 000000 goes OFF, the timer PV will be reset to the SV and the
248
or
Timer input
&0100
CIO 000000
Timer PV
T0000
Timer
Completion
Flag
T0000
3-6-2 TEN-MS TIMER: TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551)

Purpose TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) operates a decrementing timer with units of 10-ms.
The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 99.99 s for TIMH(015) and 0 to
655.35 s for TIMHX(551). The timer accuracy is 0 to 0.01 s.
Note The timer accuracy for CS1D CPU Units is 10 ms + the cycle time
Ladder Symbol
PV Symbol Operands
refresh
method
TIMH(015) S: #0000 to #9999 (BCD)
N N: Timer number
S S: Set value

TIMHX(551) S: &0 to &65535 (decimal)
N N: Timer number
S S: Set value
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TIMH(015)/
TIMHX(551)


S: Set Value
The set value must be between #0000 and 9999 in BCD mode.
249
Area N S
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- BCD:
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Binary:
When the timer input goes from OFF to ON, TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) starts
decrementing the PV. The PV will continue timing down as long as the timer
input remains ON and the timer’s Completion Flag will be turned ON when the
PV reaches 0000.
Timer input
Timer PV SV
Completion
Flag
The following timing chart shows the behavior of the timer’s PV and Comple-
tion Flag when the timer input is turned OFF before the timer times out.
250
Timer input
Timer PV SV
Completion
Flag
Flags
Note In CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D (for Single-CPU System) CPU Units,
these Flags are left unchanged.
In CS1 and CJ1 CPU Units, these are turned OFF.
Timers created with timer numbers 2048 to 4095 will not operate properly
when the CPU Unit cycle time exceeds 80 ms. Use timer numbers 0000 to
2047 when the cycle time is longer than 80 ms.
TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) timers created with timer numbers 0000 to 0255 are
refreshed every 10 ms. Use these timer numbers when the PV is being refer-
enced in the user program.
on standby.
The Completion Flags for TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) timers will be updated
when the instruction is executed. (This operation differs from that for CV-
series and CVM1 PLCs.)
MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode or
vice versa.1
Execution of CNR(545)/CNRX(547), the BCD: 9999 OFF
RESET TIMER/COUNTER instructions3 Binary: FFFF
Operation in interlocked program section Reset to SV. OFF
(IL(002)–ILC(003))
Operation in jumped program section PV continues Retains previous status.
(JMP(004)–JME(005)) decrementing.
251
changed.
3. The PV will be set to the SV when TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) is executed.
When an operating TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) timer created with a timer number
between 0000 and 2047 is in a jumped program section (JMP(004),
CJMP(510), CJPN(511), JME(005)), the timer’s PV will continue timing. (See
note.) (The jumped TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) instruction will not be executed,
but the PV will be refreshed every 10 ms and each cycle after all tasks have
been executed.)
Note With the CS1D CPU Units, the PV will not be refreshed in the above case.
When TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) is in a program section between IL(002) and
ILC(003) and the program section is interlocked, the PV will be reset to the SV
and the Completion Flag will be turned OFF.
When a TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) timer is forced set, its Completion Flag will
be turned ON and its PV will be set to 0000. When a TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551)
timer is forced reset, its Completion Flag will be turned OFF and its PV will be
reset to the SV.
The operation of the = Flag and N Flag depends or the model of CPU Unit.
Refer to Flags for details.
The timer’s Completion Flag is refreshed only when TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551)
is executed, so a delay of up to one cycle may be required for the Completion
Flag to be turned ON after the timer times out.
reset.
A TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) instruction’s PV and Completion Flag can be
refreshed in the following ways depending on the timer number that is used.
Execution of The Completion Flag is turned ON if the PV is 0000.
TIMH(015)/ The Completion Flag is turned OFF if the PV is not 0000.
TIMHX(551)
10-ms interval The timer’s PV is updated every 10 ms.
refreshing

Execution of The PV is updated every time that TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) is
TIMH(015)/ executed.
TIMHX(551) The Completion Flag is turned ON if the PV is 0000.
After executing all The PV is also updated every cycle at the end of program execu-
tasks tion.
80-ms interval If the cycle time exceeds 80 ms, the timer’s PV is updated every
refreshing 80 ms.

Execution of The PV is updated every time that TIMH(015) is executed.
TIMH(015)/ The Completion Flag is turned ON if the PV is 0000.
TIMHX(551) The Completion Flag is turned OFF if the PV is not 0000.
252
Example When timer input CIO 000000 goes from OFF to ON in the following example,
the timer PV will begin counting down from the SV (#0064 = 100 = 1.00 s).
The Timer Completion Flag, T0000, will be turned ON when the PV reaches
0000.
Timer input
CIO 000000
Timer PV
T0000 #0100
(1.00 s)
or Timer Completion
Flag
TIMHX T0000
&0100
3-6-3 ONE-MS TIMER: TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552)

Purpose TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552) operates a decrementing timer with units of 1-ms.
The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 9.999 s for TMHH(540) and 0
to 65.535 for TMHHX(552). The timer accuracy is –0.001 to 0 s.
Note The timer accuracy for CS1D CPU Units is 10 ms + the cycle time. The timer
accuracy for unit version 4.1 of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units is −0.01 to 0 s. The
timer accuracy for other unit versions of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units is −0.001 to
0 s.
Ladder Symbol
PV Symbol Operands
refresh
method
BCD N: 0 to 15 decimal, or
TMHH(540) 0 to 4,095 decimal
(See note.)
N N: Timer number S: #0000 to #9999 (BCD)
S S: Set value
Binary N: 0 to 15 decimal, or
TMHHX(552) 0 to 4,095 decimal
(See note.)
N N: Timer number S: &0 to &65535 decimal
#0000 to #FFFF hex
S S: Set value
Note In CJ1-H-R CPU Units other than those with unit version 4.1, N can be set to
between 0 and 4,095 decimal. In CJ1-H-R CPU Units with unit version 4.1, N
can be set only to between 16 and 4095 decimal. For details, refer to Refresh-
ing of TMHH(540) and TMHHX(552) PVs and Completion Flags on page 256.
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TMHH(540)/
TMHHX(552)
253

OK in CJ1-H-R CPU OK OK Not allowed
Units only

S: Set Value
Area N S
Timer Area 0000 to 0015 decimal, or T0000 to T4095
0000 to 4095 (See note.)
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- BCD:
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Binary:
Note In CJ1-H-R CPU Units other than those with unit version 4.1, N can be set to
between 0 and 4,095 decimal. In CJ1-H-R CPU Units with unit version 4.1, N
can be set only to between 16 and 4095 decimal. For details, refer to Refresh-
ing of TMHH(540) and TMHHX(552) PVs and Completion Flags on page 256.
When the timer input goes from OFF to ON, TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552) starts
decrementing the PV. The PV will continue timing down as long as the timer
254
input remains ON and the timer’s Completion Flag will be turned ON when the
PV reaches 0000.
Flags
The Completion Flag is updated only when TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552) is exe-
cuted. The Completion Flag can thus be delayed by up to one cycle time from
the actual set value.
The present value of a high-speed timer with a timer number from 0 to 15 will
be refreshed even if the task is on standby. The present value of a high-speed
timer with a timer number from 16 to 4095 will be held if the task is on standby.
vice versa.1
Operation in interlocked program section Reset to SV. OFF
(IL(002)–ILC(003))
Operation in jumped program section PV continues Retains previous status.
(JMP(004)–JME(005)) decrement-
ing.
changed.
3. The PV will be set to the SV when TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552) is executed.
255
For all CPU Units except CS1D CPU Units, the present value of all operating
timers with timer numbers 0 to 15 will be refreshed even if the timer is in a pro-
gram section that is jumped using JMP(004), CJMP(510), CJPN(511),
JME(005). (The jumped timer instruction will not be executed, but the PV will
be refreshed every 1 ms.) The present values will not be updated with a CS1D
CPU Unit.
When TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552) is in a program section between IL(002) and
When a TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552) timer is forced set, its Completion Flag will
be turned ON and its PV will be set to 0000. When a TMHH(540)/
TMHHX(552) timer is forced reset, its Completion Flag will be turned OFF and
its PV will be reset to the SV.
reset.
Refreshing of TMHH(540) A TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552) instruction’s PV and Completion Flag are

and TMHHX(552) PVs and refreshed as shown in the following tables.
Completion Flags Timer numbers 0 to 15 (Cannot be used with unit version 4.1 of the CJ1-H-R
CPU Units, but can be used with other unit versions of the CJ1-H-R CPU
Units.):
Refresh timing Data refreshed
TMHH(540)/ The Completion Flag is turned OFF if the PV is not 0000.
TMHHX(552)
1-ms interval refreshing The timer’s PV is refreshed every 1 ms.
Timer numbers 16 to 4,095 (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only):

Refresh timing Data refreshed
TMHH(540)/ The Completion Flag is turned OFF if the PV is not 0000.
TMHHX(552)
3-6-4 TENTH-MS TIMER: TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556)

Purpose TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) operates a decrementing timer with units of 0.1-ms.
The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 0.9999 s for TIMU(541) and 0
to 6.5535 s for TIMUX(556). The timer accuracy is –0.1 to 0 ms.
Note These instructions can be used in the CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
256
Ladder Symbol
PV Symbol Operands
refresh
method
TIMU(541) S: #0000 to #9999 (BCD)
N N: Timer number
S S: Set value

TIMUX(556) S: &0 to &65535 (decimal)
N N: Timer number
S S: Set value
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TIMU(541)/
TIMUX(556)

Function block Block program Step program Subroutines Interrupt
definitions areas areas tasks
OK Not allowed OK OK Not allowed

S: Set Value
Area N S
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
257
Area N S
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- BCD:
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Binary:
Completion Flag is turned OFF.
When the timer input goes from OFF to ON, TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) starts
decrementing the PV. If the set value is reached while the timer input is ON,
the timer’s Completion Flag will be turned ON (the timer times out).
The status of the timer’s Completion Flag will be maintained after the timer
times out. To restart the timer, the timer input must be turned OFF and then
ON again.
Read this timer’s Completion Flag only. The timer’s PV is used by the system,
so it cannot be read.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if timer number N is indirectly addressed through an
Index Register but the address in the Index Register is not
the address of a timer’s Completion Flag or PV.
Equals Flag = Unchanged
Negative Flag N Unchanged
The timer PV cannot be read.
The Completion Flag is updated only when TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) is exe-
The timer will not operate properly when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms.
Condition Completion Flag
Operating mode changed from RUN or MONITOR mode OFF
to PROGRAM mode or vice versa. (See note 1.)
Power supply interrupted and reset (See note 2.) OFF
258

Execution of CNR(545)/CNRX(547), the RESET TIMER/ OFF
COUNTER instructions
Operation in interlocked program section OFF
(IL(002)–ILC(003))
Operation in jumped program section Retains previous status.
(JMP(004)–JME(005))
changed.
Note When TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) is in a program section between IL(002) and
TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) timers may not time accurately when used in a pro-
gram section jumped by the JMP(004), CJMP(510), CJPN(511), and
JME(005) instructions.
When a TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) timer is forced set, its Completion Flag will
be turned ON. When a TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) timer is forced reset, its Com-
pletion Flag will be turned OFF.
reset.
A TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) instruction’s Completion Flag is refreshed as
shown in the following table.
Execution of TIMU(541)/ The Completion Flag is turned ON if the SV is reached.
TIMUX(556) The Completion Flag is turned OFF if the SV has not been
reached.
Operation Example
TIMU
#0123
or
TIMUX
&0123
When timer input CIO 000000 goes from OFF to ON in this example, the timer
PV will begin counting down. The Timer Completion Flag, T0000, will be
turned ON after 12.3 ms.
When CIO 000000 goes OFF, the Timer Completion Flag, T0000, will be
turned OFF.
3-6-5 HUNDREDTH-MS TIMER: TMUH(544)/TMUHX(557)

Purpose TMUH(544)/TMUHX(557) operates a decrementing timer with units of 0.01-
ms. The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 0.09999 s for TMUH(544)
and 0 to 0.65535 s for TMUHX(557). The timer accuracy is –0.01 to 0 ms.
259
Ladder Symbol
PV Symbol Operands
refresh
method
TMUH(541) S: #0000 to #9999 (BCD)
N N: Timer number
S S: Set value

TMUHX(557) S: &0 to &65535 (decimal)
N N: Timer number
S S: Set value
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TMUH(544)/
TMUHX(557)

OK Not allowed OK OK Not allowed

S: Set Value
Area N S
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
260
Area N S
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- BCD:
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Binary:
Completion Flag is turned OFF.
When the timer input goes from OFF to ON, TMUH(544)/TMUHX(557) starts
decrementing the PV. If the set value is reached while the timer input is ON,
the timer’s Completion Flag will be turned ON (the timer times out).
The status of the timer’s Completion Flag will be maintained after the timer
times out. To restart the timer, the timer input must be turned OFF and then
ON again.
Read this timer’s Completion Flag only. The timer’s PV is used by the system,
so it cannot be read.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if timer number N is indirectly addressed through an
Index Register but the address in the Index Register is not
the address of a timer’s Completion Flag or PV.
Equals Flag = Unchanged
The timer PV cannot be read.
The Completion Flag is updated only when TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) is exe-
The timer will not operate properly when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms.
Operating mode changed from RUN or MONITOR mode OFF
to PROGRAM mode or vice versa. (See note 1.)
Power supply interrupted and reset (See note 2.) OFF
261

Execution of CNR(545)/CNRX(547), the RESET TIMER/ OFF
COUNTER instructions
Operation in interlocked program section OFF
(IL(002)–ILC(003))
Operation in jumped program section Retains previous status.
(JMP(004)–JME(005))
changed.
Note When TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) is in a program section between IL(002) and
TIMUH(544)/TIMUHX(557) timers may not time accurately when used in a
program section jumped by the JMP(004), CJMP(510), CJPN(511), and
JME(005) instructions.
When a TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) timer is forced set, its Completion Flag will
be turned ON. When a TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) timer is forced reset, its Com-
pletion Flag will be turned OFF.
reset.
A TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) instruction’s Completion Flag is refreshed as
Execution of TMUH(544) The Completion Flag is turned ON if the SV is reached.
/TMUHX(557) The Completion Flag is turned OFF if the SV has not been
reached.
Operation Example
TMUH
#0123
or
TMUHX
&0123
When timer input CIO 000000 goes from OFF to ON in this example, the timer
PV will begin counting down. The Timer Completion Flag, T0000, will be
turned ON after 1.23 ms.
When CIO 000000 goes OFF, the Timer Completion Flag, T0000, will be
turned OFF.
3-6-6 ACCUMULATIVE TIMER: TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555)

Purpose TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) operates an incrementing timer with units of 0.1-s.
The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 999.9 s for TTIM(087) and 0 to
6,553.5 s for TTIMX(555). The timer accuracy is –0.01 to 0 s.
262
Ladder Symbol
PV Symbol Operands
refresh
method
BCD N: 0000 to 15
Timer input TTIM(087) (decimal)
S: #0000 to #9999
N N: Timer number (BCD)
S S: Set value
Reset input
Binary N: 00000 to 15
Timer input TTIMX(555) (decimal)
S: &0 to &65535
N N: Timer number (decimal)
#0000 to #FFFF
S S: Set value (hex)
Reset input
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TTIM(087)/
TTIMX(555)
The timer number must be between 0000 to 4095 (decimal).
S: Set Value
Area N S
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
263
Area N S
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- BCD:
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Binary:
Description When the timer input is ON, TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) increments the PV. When
the timer input goes OFF, the timer will stop incrementing the PV, but the PV
will retain its value. The PV will resume timing when the timer input goes ON
again. The timer’s Completion Flag will be turned ON when the PV reaches
the SV.
timer times out. There are three ways to restart the timer: the timer’s PV can
be changed to a non-zero value (by MOV(021), for example), the reset input
can be turned ON, or CNR(545)/CNRX(547) can be executed.
Timer input
Timer PV SV
Timing resumes.
PV maintained.
Completion
Flag
Reset input
Flags
264
Timers will be reset or paused in the following cases. (When a TTIM(087)/

TTIMX(555) timer is reset, its PV is reset to 0000 and its Completion Flag is
turned OFF.)
vice versa.1
Operation in interlocked program section Retains previ- Retains previous status.
(IL(002)–ILC(003)) ous status.
Operation in jumped program section Retains previ- Retains previous status.
(JMP(004)–JME(005)) ous status.
changed.
3. The PV will be set to the SV when TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) is executed.
When TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) is in a program section between IL(002) and
ILC(003) and the program section is interlocked, the PV will retain its previous
value (it will not be reset). Be sure to take this fact into account when
TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) is programmed between IL(002) and ILC(003).
When an operating TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) timer is in a program section
between JMP(004) and JME(005) and the program section is jumped, the PV
will retain its previous value. Be sure to take this fact into account when
TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) is programmed between JMP(004) and JME(005).
When a TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) timer is forced set, its Completion Flag will be
turned ON and its PV will be reset to 0000. When a TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555)
timer is forced reset, its Completion Flag will be turned OFF and its PV will be
reset to 0000. The forced set and forced reset operations take priority over the
status of the timer and reset inputs.
The timer’s PV is refreshed only when TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) is executed, so
the timer will not operate properly when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms
because the timer increments in 100-ms units.
The timer’s Completion Flag is refreshed only when TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) is
executed, so a delay of up to one cycle may be required for the Completion
Typical timers such as TIM/TIMX(550) are decrementing counters and the PV
shows the time remaining until the timer times out. The PV of TTIM(087)/
TTIMX(555) shows how much time has elapsed, so the PV can be used
unchanged in many calculations and display outputs.
Example When timer input CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the timer PV
will begin counting up from 0. Timer Completion Flag T0001 will be turned ON
when the PV reaches the SV.
If the reset input is turned ON, the timer PV will be reset to 0000 and the Com-
pletion Flag (T0001) will be turned OFF. (Usually the reset input is turned ON
to reset the timer and then the timer input is turned ON to start timing.)
265
If the timer input is turned OFF before the SV is reached, the timer will stop
timing but the PV will be maintained. The timer will resume from its previous
PV when the timer input is turned ON again.
TTIM TTIMX
000000 0001 000000 0001
or
#0100 &0100
000001 000001
Timer input ON ON
CIO 000000 OFF OFF
Timer PV # #0100 ##0100

T0001
Timing resumes.
PV maintained.
Timer Completion 0 0
Flag ON ON
T0001 OFF OFF
ON ON
Reset input OFF OFF
CIO 000001
3-6-7 LONG TIMER: TIML(542)/TIMLX(553)

Purpose TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) operates a decrementing timer with units of 0.1 s that
can time up to 115 days for TIML(542) and 4,971 days for TIMLX(543). The
timer accuracy is 0 to 0.01 s.
Ladder Symbol BCD
TIML(542)
D1 D1: Completion Flag
D2 D2: PV word
S S: SV word
Binary
TIMLX(543)
D1 D1: Completion Flag
D2 D2: PV word
S S: SV word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TIML(542)/
TIMLX(553)
266

Operands D1: Completion Flag

Bit 0 of D1 acts as the Completion Flag for TIML(542)/TIMLX(553).
15 0
D1
Do not use. Completion Flag

D2: PV Word
D2+1 and D2 contain the 8-digit binary or BCD PV. (D2 and D2+1 must be in
the same data area.) The PV can range from #00000000 to #99999999 for
TIML(542) and &00000000 to &4294967294 (decimal) or #00000000 to
#FFFFFFFF (hexadecimal) for TIMLX(553).
D2 D2+1 D2
S: SV Word
S+1 and S contain the 8-digit binary or BCD SV. (S and S+1 must be in the
same data area.) The SV must be between #00000000 to #99999999 for
TIML(542) and &00000000 to &4294967294 (decimal) or #00000000 to
#FFFFFFFF (hexadecimal) for TIMLX(553).
S S+1 S
Area D1 D2 S
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to CIO 6142
CIO 6143
Work Area W000 to W511 W000 to W510
Holding Bit Area H000 to H511 H000 to H510
Auxiliary Bit Area A448 to A959 A448 to A958 A000 to A958
Timer Area --- --- T0000 to T4094
Counter Area --- --- C0000 to C4094
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to D32766
D32767
EM Area without bank E00000 to E00000 to E32766
E32767
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_00000 to En_32766
En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
267
Area D1 D2 S
Constants --- BCD:
#00000000 to
99999999 (BCD)
“&” cannot be
used.
Binary:
&00000000 to
&4294967294
(decimal) or
#00000000 to
#FFFFFFFF (hex)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Description TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) is a decrementing ON-delay timer with units of 0.1-s

that uses an 8-digit SV and an 8-digit PV.
When the timer input is OFF, the timer is reset, i.e., the timer’s PV is reset to
the SV and its Completion Flag is turned OFF.
When the timer input goes from OFF to ON, TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) starts
decrementing the PV in D2+1 and D2. The PV will continue timing down as
long as the timer input remains ON and the timer’s Completion Flag will be
turned ON when the PV reaches 0000 0000.
Timer input
SV
Timer PV
Completion Flag
(Bit 00 of D1)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the PV contained in D2+1 and D2 is not BCD.
ON if the SV contained in S+1 and S is not BCD.
Precautions Unlike most timers, TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) does not use a timer number.
(Timer area PV refreshing is not performed for TIML(542)/TIMLX(553).)
Since the Completion Flag for TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) is in a data area it can
be forced set or forced reset like other bits, but the PV will not change.
The timer’s PV is refreshed only when TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) is executed, so
the timer will not operate properly when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms
because the timer increments in 100-ms units.
The timer’s Completion Flag is refreshed only when TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) is
executed, so a delay of up to one cycle may be required for the Completion
268
When TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) is in a program section between IL(002) and

When an operating TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) timer is in a program section
TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) is programmed between JMP(004) and JME(005).
Be sure that the words specified for the Completion Flag and PV (D1, D2, and
D2+1) are not used in other instructions. If these words are affected by other
instructions, the timer might not time out properly.
Example When timer input CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the timer PV (in
D00101 and D00100) will be set to the SV (in D00101 and D00100) and the
PV will begin counting down. The timer Completion Flag (CIO 020000) will be
turned ON when the PV reaches 0000 0000.
Timer input
CIO 000000
Timer PV
(D00101 and D00100)
Timer SV:
(D00201 and D00200)
Timer Completion
Flag
(CIO 020000)
D1: 00200
Timer Completion
Flag
(CIO 020000)
D2: D00100 Timer's PV (LSB)

D00101 Timer's PV (MSB)
S: D00200 C 0 0 Timer SV:

D00201 1 0 (100,000 decimal= 10,000 s)
3-6-8 MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER: MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554)

Purpose MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) operates a 0.1-s incrementing timer with eight inde-
pendent SVs and Completion Flags. The set value is 0 to 999.9 s for
MTIM(543) and 0 to 6,553.5 s for MTIMX(554), and the timer accuracy is 0 to
0.01 s.
269
Ladder Symbol BCD
MTIM(543)
D1 D1: Completion Flags
D2 D2: PV word
S S: First SV word
Binary
MTIMX(554)
D1 D1: Completion Flags
D2 D2: PV word
S S: First SV word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MTIM(543)/
MTIMX(554)
Operands D1: Completion Flags
D1 contains the eight Completion Flags as well as the pause and reset bits.
15 9 87 65 4 3 2 1 0
D1
Do not use.
Completion Flags
Reset bit
Pause bit
D2: PV Word
D2 contains the 4-digit binary or BCD PV.
Data Range
BCD #0000 to #9999
Binary &0 to &65535 (decimal)
S: First SV Word
S through S+7 contain the eight independent SVs.
Each SV must be as follows:
Data Range
BCD #0000 to #9999
270
Corresponding bit
(Completion Flag) in D1
Data Range
BCD One word for each of 8 timer SV:
#0000 to #9999
Binary One word for each of 8 timer SV:
Note S through S+7 must be in the same data area.

Area D1 D2 S
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 CIO 0000 to
CIO 6136
Timer Area T0000 to T4095 T0000 to T4088
Counter Area C0000 to C4095 C0000 to C4088
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32760
EM Area without bank E00000 to E32767 E00000 to
E32760
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_32767 En_00000 to
(n = 0 to C) En_32760
(n = 0 to C)
binary @ E00000 to @ E32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
BCD *E00000 to *E32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers --- DR0 to DR15 ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description When the execution condition for MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) is ON and the reset
and timer bits are both OFF, MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) increments the PV in
D2. If the pause bit is turned ON, the timer will stop incrementing the PV, but
the PV will retain its value. MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) will resume timing when
the pause bit goes OFF again.
271
The PV (content of D2) is compared to the eight SVs in S through S+7 each
time that MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) is executed, and if any of the SVs is less
than or equal to the PV, the corresponding Completion Flag (D1 bits 00
through 07) is turned ON.
When the PV reaches 9999, the PV will be reset to 0000 and all of the Com-
pletion Flags will be turned OFF. If the reset bit is turned ON while the timer is
operating or paused, the PV will be reset to 0000 and all of the Completion
Flags will be turned OFF.
Timer PV
Timer SVs
0
to to
Timer input
SV 7
SV 2
Timer PV (D2) SV 1
SV 0
0
Bit 7
Completion Bit 2
flags (D1)
Bit 1
Bit 0
The following table shows the operation of MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) for the

four possible combinations of the reset and pause bits.
Reset bit Pause bit Operation
(Bit 08) (Bit 09)
OFF OFF The PV will be updated and the corresponding Completion
Flag will be turned ON when SV ≤ PV.
ON The PV will not be updated and MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554)
will be treated as NOP(000).
ON OFF The PV will be reset to 0000 and the Completion Flags will
ON be turned OFF. The PV will not be updated.
The reset and pause bits are effective only when the execution condition for
MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) is ON.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the PV contained in D2 is not BCD.
Precautions Unlike most timers, MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) does not use a timer number.
(Timer area PV refreshing is not performed for MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554).)
When the PV reaches 9999, the PV will be reset to 0000 and all of the Com-
pletion Flags will be turned OFF.
272
If in BCD mode and an SV in S through S+7 does not contain BCD data, that
SV will be ignored. An error will not occur and the Error Flag will not be turned
ON.
Since the Completion Flag for MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) is in a data area it can
be forced set or forced reset like other bits, but the PV will not change.
When eight or fewer SVs are required, set the word after the last SV to 0000.
MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) will ignore the SV that is set to 0000 and all of the
remaining SVs.
to to
These SVs
are ignored.
The timer’s PV is refreshed only when MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) is executed,

so the timer will not operate properly when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms
because the timer increments in 100-ms units. To ensure precise timing and
prevent problems caused by long cycle times, input the same MTIM(543)/
MTIMX(554) instruction at several points in the program.
The timer’s Completion Flag is refreshed only when MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554)
is executed, so a delay of up to one cycle may be required for the Completion
When MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) is in a program section between IL(002) and
ILC(003) and the program section is interlocked, the PV will retain its previous
value (it will not be reset). Be sure to take this fact into account when
MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) is programmed between IL(002) and ILC(003).
When an operating MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) timer is in a program section
MTIM(543)/MTIMX(554) is programmed between JMP(004) and JME(005).
Be sure that the words specified for the Completion Flags and PV (D1 and
D2) are not used in other instructions. If these words are affected by other
instructions, the timer might not time out properly.
If a word in the CIO area is specified for D1, the SET and RSET instructions
can be used to control the pause and reset bits.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON and the pause bit (CIO 010009) is OFF in the follow-
ing example, the timer will start operating when the reset bit (CIO 010009) is
turned from ON to OFF. The timer’s PV will begin timing up from 0000.
The eight SVs in D00200 through D00207 are compared to the PV and the
corresponding Completion Flags (CIO 010000 through CIO 010007) are
turned on when the SV ≤ PV.
273
D1: 0100CH
Completion Flags
Reset bit
Pause bit
Timer PV
(Incrementing)
D2: D00100
Corresponding completion
flag ON when SV ≤ PV.
Timer SVs
S: D00200
S+1: D00201
S+2: D00202
S+3: D00203
S+4: D00204
S+5: D00205
S+6: D00206
S+7: D00207
Timer input
CIO 000000 Timer input must remain ON
while the timer is timing.
Reset bit
CIO 010008
Pause bit
CIO 010009
Max. PV = 9999 Timing resumes.
Timer SVs
SV 7
SV 1
PV maintained.
SV 0
Completion Flags
274
3-6-9 COUNTER: CNT/CNTX(546)

Purpose CNT/CNTX(546) operates a decrementing counter. The setting range 0 to
9,999 for CNT and 0 to 65,535 for CNTX(546).
Ladder Symbol BCD
Count input CNT
N N: Counter number
S S: Set value
Reset input
Binary
Count input CNTX(546)
N N: Counter number
S S: Set value
Reset input
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CNT/
CNTX(546)
Operands N: Counter Number

The counter number must be between 0000 and 4095 (decimal).
S: Set Value
Data Range
BCD #0000 to #9999
Area N S
Auxiliary Bit --- A000 to A959
Area
Timer Area --- T0000 to T4095
Counter Area 0000 to 4095 (decimal) C0000 to C4095
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
EM Area with- --- E00000 to E32767
out bank
EM Area with --- En_00000 to En_32767
bank (n = 0 to C)
275
Area N S
addresses in @ E00000 to @ E32767
binary
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
addresses in *E00000 to *E32767
BCD
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- BCD:
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Binary:
Indirect address- ,IR0 to ,IR15
ing using Index –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to +2047 ,IR15
Registers
Description The counter PV is decremented by 1 every time that the count input goes from
OFF to ON. The Completion Flag is turned ON when the PV reaches 0.
Once the Completion Flag is turned ON, reset the counter by turning the reset
input ON or by using the CNR(545)/CNRX(547) instruction. Otherwise, the
counter cannot be restarted.
The counter is reset and the count input is ignored when the reset input is ON.
(When a counter is reset, its PV is reset to the SV and the Completion Flag is
turned OFF.)
Count input
Reset input
Counter PV SV
Completion
Flag
Flags
a counter Completion Flag or counter PV.
276
Precautions Counter numbers are shared by the CNT, CNTX(546), CNTR(012),

CNTRX(548), CNTW(814), and CNTWX(818) instructions. If two counters
share the same counter number but are not used simultaneously, a duplica-
tion error will be generated when the program is checked but the counters will
operate normally. Counters which share the same counter number will not
operate properly if they are used simultaneously.
A counter’s PV is refreshed when the count input goes from OFF to ON and
the Completion Flag is refreshed each time that CNT/CNTX(546) is executed.
The Completion Flag is turned ON if the PV is 0 and it is turned OFF if the PV
is not 0.
When a CNT/CNTX(546) counter is forced set, its Completion Flag will be
turned ON and its PV will be reset to 0000. When a CNT/CNTX(546) counter
is forced reset, its Completion Flag will be turned OFF and its PV will be set to
the SV.
Be sure to reset the counter by turning the reset input from
OFF → ON → OFF before beginning counting with the count input, as shown
in the following diagram. The count input will not be received if the reset input
is ON.
Reset input
Count input
SV
Counter PV
Completion
Flag
Ready to start
counting
The reset input will take precedence and the counter will be reset if the reset
input and count input are both ON at the same time. (The PV will be reset to
the SV and the Completion Flag will be turned OFF.)
Reset input
Count input
SV
Counter PV
Completion
Flag
Count input Reset input Count input

can be re- takes pre- can be re-
ceived. cedence. ceived.
Note If online editing is used to add a counter, the counter must be reset before it
will work properly. If the counter is not reset, the previous value will be used as
the counter’s present value (PV), and the counter may not operate properly
after it is written.
277
Counter PVs are retained even through a power interruption. If you want to
restart counting from the SV instead of resuming the count from the retained
PV, add the First Cycle Flag (A20011) as a reset input to the counter.
First Cycle Flag

(A20011)
3-6-10 REVERSIBLE COUNTER: CNTR(012)/CNTRX(548)

Purpose CNTR(012)/CNTRX(548) operates a reversible counter.
Ladder Symbol BCD
Increment input CNTR(012)
N N: Counter number
S S: Set value
Decrement input
Reset input
Binary
Increment input CNTRX(548)
N N: Counter number
S S: Set value
Decrement input
Reset input
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CNTR(012)/
CNTRX(548)

The counter number must be between 0000 and 4095 (decimal).
S: Set Value
Data Range
BCD #0000 to #9999
278
Area N S
Auxiliary Bit --- A000 to A959
Area
Counter Area 0000 to 4095 (decimal) C0000 to C4095
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
EM Area with- --- E00000 to E32767
out bank
EM Area with --- En_00000 to En_32767
bank (n = 0 to C)
addresses in @ E00000 to @ E32767
binary
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
addresses in *E00000 to *E32767
BCD
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- BCD:
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Binary:
Indirect address- ,IR0 to ,IR15
ing using Index –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to +2047 ,IR15
Registers
Description The counter PV is incremented by 1 every time that the increment input goes
from OFF to ON and it is decremented by 1 every time that the decrement
input goes from OFF to ON. The PV can fluctuate between 0 and the SV.
Increment input
Decrement input
Counter PV
When incrementing, the Completion Flag will be turned ON when the PV is

incremented from the SV back to 0 and it will be turned OFF again when the
PV is incremented from 0 to 1.
279
SV
Counter PV
+1
Completion Flag
When decrementing, the Completion Flag will be turned ON when the PV is

decremented from 0 up to the SV and it will be turned OFF again when the PV
is decremented from the SV to SV–1.
SV −1
Counter PV
Completion Flag
Flags
but the address in the Index Register is not the PV
address of a counter.
Precautions Counter numbers are shared by the CNT, CNTX(546), CNTR(012),

CNTRX(548), CNTW(814), and CNTWX(818) instructions. If two counters
share the same counter number but are not used simultaneously, a duplica-
tion error will be generated when the program is checked but the counters will
operate normally. Counters which share the same counter number will not
operate properly if they are used simultaneously.
The PV will not be changed if the increment and decrement inputs both go
from OFF to ON at the same time. When the reset input is ON, the PV will be
reset to 0 and both count inputs will be ignored.
The Completion Flag will be ON only when the PV has been incremented
from the SV to 0 or decremented from 0 to the SV; it will be OFF in all other
cases.
When inputting the CNTR(012)/CNTRX(548) instruction with mnemonics, first
enter the increment input (II), then the decrement input (DI), the reset input
(R), and finally the CNTR(012)/CNTRX(548) instruction. When entering with
the ladder diagrams, first input the increment input (II), then the CNTR(012)/
CNTRX(548) instruction, the decrement input (DI), and finally the reset input
(R).
Examples Basic Operation of CNTR(012)/CNTRX(548)
The counter PV is reset to 0 by turning the reset input (CIO 000002) ON and
OFF. The PV is incremented by 1 each time that the increment input
(CIO 000000) goes from OFF to ON. When the PV is incremented from the
SV (3), it is automatically reset to 0 and the Completion Flag is turned ON.
Likewise, the PV is decremented by 1 each time that the decrement input
(CIO 000001) goes from OFF to ON. When the PV is decremented from 0, it
is automatically set to the SV (3) and the Completion Flag is turned ON.
280
000000 Increment input

CNTR
Decrement 0001
000001 input
#0003
ON
000002 Reset input
Increment input
CIO 000000 OFF
ON
Decrement input
CIO 000001 OFF
or
000000 Increment input Reset input ON

CNTRX CIO 000002 OFF
Decrement 0001
000001 input
&0003 SV
Counter PV 3
C0001
000002 0
Reset input
ON
Completion Flag
C0001 OFF
Specifying the SV in a Word

In the following example, the SV for CNTR(012) 0007 is determined by the
content of CIO 0001. When the content of CIO 0001 is controlled by an exter-
nal switch, the set value can be changed manually from the switch.
Fixed SV:
5000
SV:
CIO 0001
Increment input
Decrement input
Completion Flag
Roll-over Roll-over
281
3-6-11 RESET TIMER/COUNTER: CNR(545)/CNRX(547)

Purpose Resets the timers or counters within the specified range of timer or counter
numbers.
Ladder Symbol BCD
CNR(545)
N1 N1: First number in range
N2 N2: Last number in range
Binary
CNRX(547)
N1 N1: First number in range
N2 N2: Last number in range

Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CNR(545)/
CNRX(547)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @CNR(545)/
CNRX(547)
OK OK OK OK
Operands N1: First Number in Range

N1 must be a timer number between T0000 and T4095 or a counter number
between C0000 and C4095.
N2: Last Number in Range
N2 must be a timer number between T0000 and T4095 or a counter number
between C0000 and C4095.
Note N1 and N2 must be in the same data area, i.e., N1 and N2 must be timer num-
bers or counter numbers.
Area N1 N2
CIO Area --- ---
Work Area --- ---
Holding Bit Area --- ---
Auxiliary Bit Area --- ---
Timer Area C0000 to C4095 C0000 to C4095
Counter Area T0000 to T4095 T0000 to T4095
DM Area --- ---
addresses in binary
addresses in BCD
282
Area N1 N2
Constants --- ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description CNR(545)/CNRX(547) resets the Completion Flags of all timers or counters

from N1 to N2. At the same time, the PVs will all be set to the maximum value
(9999 for BCD and FFFF for binary). (The PV will be set to the SV the next
time that the timer or counter instruction is executed.)
Operation of CNR(545)
The following table shows the timer and counter instructions (with BCD PVs),
which are reset by CNR(545).
Instructions reset Operation of CNR(545)
TIM: HUNDRED-MS TIMER The PV is set to its maximum value
TIMH(015): TEN-MS TIMER (9,999 BCD) and the Completion Flag
TMHH(540): ONE-MS TIMER is turned OFF.
TTIM(087): ACCUMULATIVE TIMER
TIMW(813): HUNDRED-MS TIMER WAIT
TMHW(815): TEN-MS TIMER WAIT
CNT: COUNTER
CNTR(012): REVERSIBLE COUNTER
CNTW(814): COUNTER WAIT
TIMU(541): TENTH-MS TIMER The Completion Flag is turned OFF.
TMUH(544): HUNDREDTH-MS TIMER (The PV cannot be read.)
(TIMU(541) and TMUH(544) are supported
by CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.)
Operation of CNRX(547)
The following table shows the timer and counter instructions (with binary
PVs), which are reset by CNRX(547).
Instructions reset Operation of CNR(545)
TIMX(550): HUNDRED-MS TIMER The PV is set to its maximum value
TIMHX(551): TEN-MS TIMER (FFFF hex) and the Completion Flag is
TMHHX(552): ONE-MS TIMER turned OFF.
TTIMX(555): ACCUMULATIVE TIMER
TIMWX(816): HUNDRED-MS TIMER WAIT
TMHWX(817):TEN-MS TIMER WAIT
CNTX(546): COUNTER
CNTRX(548): REVERSIBLE COUNTER
CNTWX(818): COUNTER WAIT
TIMUX(556): TENTH-MS TIMER The Completion Flag is turned OFF.
TMUHX(557): HUNDREDTH-MS TIMER (The PV cannot be read.)
(TIMUX(556) and TMUHX(557) are sup-
ported by CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.)
283
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N1 is indirectly addressed through an Index Register
address of a timer or counter.
ON if N2 is indirectly addressed through an Index Register
address of a timer or counter.
ON if N1 and N2 are not in the same data area.
Precautions The CNR(545)/CNRX(547) instructions do not reset TIML(542), TIMLX(553),

MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554), because these timers do not use timer num-
bers.
The CNR(545)/CNRX(547) instructions do not reset the timer/counter instruc-
tions themselves, they reset the PVs and Completion Flags allocated to those
instructions. In most cases, the effect of CNR(545)/CNRX(547) is different
from directly resetting the instructions. For example, when a TIM/TIMX(550)
instruction is reset directly its PV is set to the SV, but when that timer is reset
by CNR(545)/CNRX(547) its PV is set to the maximum value (9999 for BCD
and FFFF for binary).
When N1 and N2 are specified with N1>N2, only the Completion Flag for the
timer/counter number will be reset.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the Completion Flags for
timers T0002 to T0005 are turned OFF and the timers’ PVs are set to the
maximum value (9999 for BCD and FFFF for binary).
When CIO 000001 is ON, the Completion Flags for counters C0003 to C0007
are turned OFF and the counters’ PVs are set to the maximum value (9999 for
BCD and FFFF for binary).
000000
CNR
T0002
T0005
000001
CNR
C0003
C0007
000000
CNRX
T0002
T0005
000001
CNRX
C0003
C0007
3-6-12 Example Timer and Counter Applications

The following examples show various applications of timer and counter
instructions including long-term timers, a two-stage counter, ON/OFF delay,
one-shot bit, and flicker bit.
284
Example 1: The following program examples show three ways to create long-term timers
Long-term Timers with standard TIM and CNT instructions.
Two TIM Instructions
In this example, two TIM instructions are combined to make a 30-minute
timer.
000000
000000 LD 000000
000001 TIM 0001
T0001
#9000
000002 LD T0001
000003 TIM 0002
#9000
T0002 000004 LD T0002
000005 OUT 000200
TIM and CNT Instructions

In this example, a TIM instruction and a CNT instruction are combined to
make a 500-second timer.
TIM 0001 generates a pulse every 5 s and CNT 0002 counts these pulses.
The set value for this combination is the timer interval × counter SV. In this
case, the timer SV would be 5 s × 100 = 500 s. With this combination, the
long-term timer’s PV is actually the PV of a counter, which is maintained
through power interruptions.

000000 LD 010000
000001 LD 000001
000002 CNT 0002
#0100
000003 LD 000000
000004 AND NOT 010000
Start Count up 000005 AND NOT C0002
000006 TIM 0001
#0050
000007 LD T0001
000008 OUT 010000
000009 LD C0002
000010 OUT 000201
Clock Pulse and CNT Instruction

In this example, a CNT instruction counts the pulses from the 1-s clock pulse
to make a 700-second timer.
If the First Cycle Flag (A20011) is ORed with the counter’s reset input
(CIO 000001), the counter’s PV will be reset to the SV (0700) when program
execution begins rather than resuming the count from the previous PV.
285
000000 1 s (1-s clock)

000000 LD 000000
000001 AND 1s
000001
000002 LD 000001
000003 OR A20011
A20011 000004 CNT 0001
#0700
C0001 000005 LD C0001
000006 OUT 000202
Example 2: When an SV higher than 9999 is required, two counters can be combined as
Two-stage Counter shown in the following example. In this case, two CNT instructions are com-
bined to make a BCD counter with an SV of 20,000.

000000 LD 000000
000001 AND 000001
000002 LD NOT 000002
000003 OR C0001
000004 OR C0002
000005 CNT 0001
#0100
000006 LD C0001
000007 LD NO 000002
000008 CNT 0002
#0200
000009 LD C0002
000010 OUT 000203
Example 3: In this example two TIM timers are combined with KEEP(011) to make an ON
ON/OFF Delay delay and an OFF delay. CIO 000500 will be turned ON 5.0 seconds after
CIO 000000 goes ON and it will be turned OFF 3.0 seconds after CIO 000000
goes OFF.
286

000000 LD 000000
000001 TIM 0001
#0050
000002 LD 000500
000003 AND NOT 000000
000004 TIM 0002
#0030
000005 LD T0001
000006 LD T0002
000007 KEEP(011) 000500
CIO 000000
CIO 000500
5.0 s 3.0 s
Example 4: A TIM timer can be combined with OUT or OUT NOT to control how long a
One-shot Bit particular bit is ON or OFF. In this example, CIO 000204 will be ON for 1.5
seconds (the SV of T0001) after CIO 000000 goes ON.

000000 LD 000000
000001 LD 001000
000002 AND NOT 010000
000003 OR 000000
000004 OUT 001000
000005 LD 001000
000006 TIM 0001
#0015
000007 LD T0001
000008 OUT 010000
000009 LD 001000
000010 AND NOT 010000
000011 OUT 000204
CIO 000000
CIO 000204
1.5 s 1.5 s
Example 4: The following program examples show two ways to create flicker bits. The
Flicker Bit second example just mimics a clock pulse.
Two TIM Instructions
Two TIM timers can be combined to make a bit turn ON and OFF at regular
intervals while the execution condition is ON. In this example, CIO 000205 will
be OFF for 1.0 second and then ON for 1.5 seconds as long as CIO 000000 is
ON.
287

000000 LD 000000
000001 AND T0002
000002 TIM 0001
#0010
000003 LD 000205
000004 TIM 0002
#0015
000005 LD T0001
000006 OUT 000205
CIO 000000
CIO 000205
1.0 s 1.5 s 1.0 s 1.5 s
Clock Pulse
The desired execution condition can be combined with a clock pulse to mimic
the clock pulse (0.1 s, 0.2 s, or 1.0 s).
1-s clock pulse Address Instruction Operands
000000 LD 000000
000001 AND 1s
000002 OUT 000206
1-s clock
pulse
3-6-13 Indirect Addressing of Timer/Counter Numbers

Timer and counter numbers can be indirectly addressed using Index Regis-
ters. When Index Registers will be used for indirect addressing, use
MOVRW(561) (MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REGISTER) to set the PLC
memory address of the desired timer or counter’s PV to the desired Index
Register.
The following timers and counters can be indirectly addressed using Index
Registers: TIM, TIMX(550), TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TTIM(087),
TTIMX(555), TMHH(540), TMHHX(552), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816),
TMHW(815), TMHWX(817), CNT, CNTX(546), CNTR(012), CNTRX(548),
CNTW(814), and CNTWX(818). (These are the timers and counters that use
timer and counter numbers.)
The timer or counter instruction will not be executed if the PLC memory
address in the specified Index Register is not the address of a timer or counter
PV.
Using Index Registers to indirectly address timers and counters can reduce
the size of the program and increase flexibility. For example, common subrou-
tines can be created.
Example The following example shows a program section that uses indirect addressing
to define and start 100 timers with SVs contained in D00100 through D00199.
288
IR0 contains the PLC memory address of the timer PV and IR1 contains the
PLC memory address of the timer Completion Flag.
DM address Content Function
D00100 0010 SV for T0000
D00101 0100 SV for T0001
D00102 0050 SV for T0002
. . .
. . .
. . .
D00199 0999 SV for T0099
P_On
1
(Always ON
Flag)
4
&100
FOR
&100
5
@D00000
P_On
++
(Always ON
Flag)
NEXT
1,2,3... 1. MOVRW(561) moves the PLC memory address of the PV for timer T0000
to IR0. Afterwards IR0 can be used in place of the timer number.
2. MOVR(560) moves the PLC memory address of the Completion Flag for
timer T0000 to IR1.
3. MOVR(560) moves the PLC memory address of CIO 200000 into IR2.
4. MOV(021) moves &100 into D00000 for indirect addressing of the timer
SVs.
5. The content of IR0, IR1, IR2, and D00000 are incremented by 1 each time
as this loop is executed 100 times, starting timers T0000 through T0099.
289
The loop in the program above has 4 input parameters which are used to start
all 100 timers with this common subroutine.
IR0 The PLC memory address of the timer’s PV
IR1 The PLC memory address of the timer’s Completion Flag
IR2 The PLC memory address of the timer’s execution condition
D00000 The DM address of the word containing the timer’s SV
The subroutine above is equivalent to the 400 instructions below.

200000
000000 LD NOT 200000
000001 TIM 0000
D00100
000002 LD T0000
T0000
000003 OUT 200000
000004 LD NOT 200001
200001
000005 TIM 0001
D00101
000006 LD T0001
000007 OUT 200001
000008 LD NOT 200002
T0001
000009 TIM 0002
D00102
200602
000010 LD T0002
000011 OUT 200002
T0099 000396 LD NOT 200602

000397 TIM 0099
D00199
000398 LD T0000
000399 OUT 200602
290
Comparison Instructions Section 3-7
3-7 Comparison Instructions

This section describes instructions used to compare data of various lengths
and in various ways.
Instruction Mnemonic Function Page
code
Input Comparison Instructions =, <>, <, <=, >, >= 300 to 328 291
(S, L) (LD, AND, OR)
Time Comparison Instructions =DT, <>DT, <DT, <=DT, >DT, 341 to 346 297
>=DT (LD, AND, OR)
COMPARE CMP 020 303
DOUBLE COMPARE CMPL 060 306
SIGNED BINARY COMPARE CPS 114 309
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY CPSL 115 312
COMPARE
MULTIPLE COMPARE MCMP 019 315
TABLE COMPARE TCMP 085 317
BLOCK COMPARE BCMP 068 320
EXPANDED BLOCK COMPARE BCMP2 502 322
AREA RANGE COMPARE ZCP 088 326
DOUBLE AREA RANGE COM- ZCPL 116 329
PARE
3-7-1 Input Comparison Instructions (300 to 328)

Purpose Input comparison instructions compare two values (constants and/or the con-
tents of specified words) and create an ON execution condition when the
comparison condition is true. Input comparison instructions are available to
compare signed or unsigned data of one-word or double length data.
Note Refer to 3-15-24 Single-precision Floating-point Comparison Instructions for
details on single-precision floating-point input comparison instructions and 3-
16-21 Double-precision Floating-point Input Instructions for details on double-
precision floating-point input comparison instructions.
Ladder Symbol
Symbol & options
S1 S1: Comparison data 1
Variations
Variations Creates ON Each Cycle Comparison is True Input compari-
son instruction

OK OK OK OK
for Instructions for One- Area S1 S2
word Data CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
291
Area S1 S2
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_ 32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
for Instructions for Area S1 S2
Double-length Data CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6142
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #FFFFFFFF (binary)
Data Registers ---
292
Area S1 S2
Index Registers IR0 to IR15 (for unsigned data only)
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The input comparison instruction compares S1 and S2 as signed or unsigned

values and creates an ON execution condition when the comparison condition
is true. Unlike instructions such as CMP(020) and CMPL(060), the result of an
input comparison instruction is reflected directly as an execution condition, so
it is not necessary to access the result of the comparison through an Arith-
metic Flag and the program is simpler and faster.
Inputting the Instructions
The input comparison instructions are treated just like the LD, AND, and OR
instructions to control the execution of subsequent instructions.
Input type Operation
LD The instruction can be connected directly to the left bus bar.
AND The instruction cannot be connected directly to the left bus bar.
OR The instruction can be connected directly to the left bus bar.
LD connection ON execution condition when

<

AND connection comparison result is true.
<
OR connection
<
Options
The input comparison instructions can compare signed or unsigned data and
they can compare one-word or double values. If no options are specified, the
293
comparison will be for one-word unsigned data. With the three input types and
two options, there are 72 different input comparison instructions.
Symbol Option (data format) Option (data length)
= (Equal) None: Unsigned data None: One-word data
<> (Not equal) S: Signed data L: Double-length data
< (Less than)
<= (Less than or equal)
> (Greater than)
>= (Greater than or equal)
Unsigned input comparison instructions (i.e., instructions without the S option)

can handle unsigned binary or BCD data. Signed input comparison instruc-
tions (i.e., instructions with the S option) handle signed binary data.
Summary of Input Comparison Instructions
The following table shows the function codes, mnemonics, names, and func-
tions of the 72 input comparison instructions. (For one-word comparisons
C1=S1 and C2=S2; for double comparisons C1=S1+1, S1 and C2=S2+1, S2.)
Code Mnemonic Name Function
300 LD= LOAD EQUAL True if
AND= AND EQUAL C1 = C2
OR= OR EQUAL
301 LD=L LOAD DOUBLE EQUAL
AND=L AND DOUBLE EQUAL
OR=L OR DOUBLE EQUAL
302 LD=S LOAD SIGNED EQUAL
AND=S AND SIGNED EQUAL
OR=S OR SIGNED EQUAL
303 LD=SL LOAD DOUBLE SIGNED EQUAL
AND=SL AND DOUBLE SIGNED EQUAL
OR=SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED EQUAL
305 LD<> LOAD NOT EQUAL True if
AND<> AND NOT EQUAL C1 ≠ C2
OR<> OR NOT EQUAL
306 LD<>L LOAD DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
AND<>L AND DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
OR<>L OR DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
307 LD<>S LOAD SIGNED NOT EQUAL
AND<>S AND SIGNED NOT EQUAL
OR<>S OR SIGNED NOT EQUAL
308 LD<>SL LOAD DOUBLE SIGNED NOT EQUAL
AND<>SL AND DOUBLE SIGNED NOT EQUAL
OR<>SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED NOT EQUAL
294

310 LD< LOAD LESS THAN True if
AND< AND LESS THAN C1 < C2
OR< OR LESS THAN
311 LD<L LOAD DOUBLE LESS THAN
AND<L AND DOUBLE LESS THAN
OR<L OR DOUBLE LESS THAN
312 LD<S LOAD SIGNED LESS THAN
AND<S AND SIGNED LESS THAN
OR<S OR SIGNED LESS THAN
313 LD<SL LOAD DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN
AND<SL AND DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN
OR<SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN
315 LD<= LOAD LESS THAN OR EQUAL True if
AND<= AND LESS THAN OR EQUAL C1 ≤ C2
OR<= OR LESS THAN OR EQUAL
316 LD<=L LOAD DOUBLE LESS THAN OR EQUAL
AND<=L AND DOUBLE LESS THAN OR EQUAL
OR<=L OR DOUBLE LESS THAN OR EQUAL
317 LD<=S LOAD SIGNED LESS THAN OR EQUAL
AND<=S AND SIGNED LESS THAN OR EQUAL
OR<=S OR SIGNED LESS THAN OR EQUAL
318 LD<=SL LOAD DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN OR EQUAL True if
AND<=SL AND DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN OR EQUAL C1 ≤ C2
OR<=SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED LESS THAN OR EQUAL
320 LD> LOAD GREATER THAN True if
AND> AND GREATER THAN C1 > C2
OR> OR GREATER THAN
321 LD>L LOAD DOUBLE GREATER THAN
AND>L AND DOUBLE GREATER THAN
OR>L OR DOUBLE GREATER THAN
322 LD>S LOAD SIGNED GREATER THAN
AND>S AND SIGNED GREATER THAN
OR>S OR SIGNED GREATER THAN
323 LD>SL LOAD DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER THAN
AND>SL AND DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER THAN
OR>SL OR DOUBLE SIGNED GREATER THAN
325 LD>= LOAD GREATER THAN OR EQUAL True if
AND>= AND GREATER THAN OR EQUAL C1 ≥ C2
OR>= OR GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
326 LD>=L LOAD DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
AND>=L AND DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
OR>=L OR DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
327 LD>=S LOAD SIGNED GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
AND>=S AND SIGNED GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
OR>=S OR SIGNED GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
328 LD>=SL LOAD DBL SIGNED GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
AND>=SL AND DBL SIGNED GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
OR>=SL OR DBL SIGNED GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
295
Flags
Greater Than > ON if S1 > S2 with one-word data.
Flag
ON if S1+1, S1 > S2+1, S2 with double-length data.
Greater Than or > = ON if S1 ≥ S2 with one-word data.
Equal Flag
ON if S1+1, S1 ≥ S2+1, S2 with double-length data.
Equal Flag = ON if S1 = S2 with one-word data.
ON if S1+1, S1 = S2+1, S2 with double-length data.
Not Equal Flag = ON if S1 ≠ S2 with one-word data.
ON if S1+1, S1 ≠ S2+1, S2 with double-length data.
Less Than Flag < ON if S1 < S2 with one-word data.
ON if S1+1, S1 < S2+1, S2 with double-length data.
Less Than or <= ON if S1 ≤ S2 with one-word data.
Equal Flag
ON if S1+1, S1 ≤ S2+1, S2 with double-length data.
Note In CS1 and CJ1 CPU Units, these Flags are turned OFF.
unchanged.
Precautions Input comparison instructions cannot be used as right-hand instructions, i.e.,

another instruction must be used between them and the right bus bar.
Examples AND LESS THAN: AND<(310)

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00100
and D00200 are compared in as unsigned binary data. If the content of
D00100 is less than that of D00200, CIO 005000 is turned ON and execution
proceeds to the next line. If the content of D00100 is not less than that of
D00200, the remainder of the instruction line is skipped and execution moves
to the next instruction line.
000000 005000
<
Unsigned S1: D00100 S2: D00200
LESS THAN 8714 3A1C
Comparison
000001 005001 Decimal: 34,580 Decimal: 14,876
<S 34,580 > 14,876
(Will not proceed to next line.)
AND SIGNED LESS THAN: AND<S(312)

and D00210 are compared as signed binary data. If the content of D00110 is
less than that of D00210, CIO 005001 is turned ON and execution proceeds
to the next line. If the content of D00110 is not less than that of D00210, the
296
remainder of the instruction line is skipped and execution moves to the next
instruction line.
Signed S1: D00110 S2: D00210

LESS THAN
Comparison 8714 3A1C
Decimal: −30,956 Decimal: 14,876
−30,956 < 14,876
(Will proceed to next line.)
3-7-2 Time Comparison Instructions (341 to 346)

Purpose Time comparison instructions compare two BCD time values and create an
ON execution condition when the comparison condition is true.
The time comparison instructions are treated just like the LD, AND, and OR
These instructions are supported only by CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or
later.
Ladder Symbol
LD
Symbol
C C: Control word
S1 S1: First word of present time
S2 S2: First word of comparison time
AND
Symbol
C C: Control word
OR
Symbol
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Creates ON Each Cycle Comparison is True Time compari-
son instruction

OK OK OK OK
297
Operands C: Control Word

Bits 00 to 05 of C specify whether or not the time data will be masked for the
comparison. Bits 00 to 05 mask the seconds, minutes, hours, day, month, and
year, respectively. If all 6 values are masked, the instruction will not be exe-
cuted, the execution condition will be OFF, and the Error Flag will be turned
ON.
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Masks seconds data when ON.

Masks minutes data when ON.
Masks hours data when ON.
Masks day data when ON.
Masks month data when ON.
Masks year data when ON.
S1 through S1+2: Present Time Data

S1 through S1+2 contain the present time data. S1 through S1+2 must be in
the same data area.
15 8 7 0
S1
Seconds: 00 to 59 (BCD)
Minutes: 00 to 59 (BCD)
15 8 7 0
S1+1
Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD)
Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)
15 8 7 0
S1+2
Month: 01 to 12 (BCD)
Year: 00 to 99 (BCD)
Note When using the CPU Unit’s internal clock data for the comparison, set S1 to
A351 to specify the CPU Unit’s internal clock data (A351 to A353).
298
S2 through S2+2: Comparison Time Data

S2 through S2+2 contain the comparison time data. S2 through S2+2 must be
in the same data area.
15 8 7 0
S2
15 8 7 0
S2+1
Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)
15 8 7 0
S2+2
Note The year value indicates the last two digits of the year. Values 00 to 97 are
interpreted as 2000 to 2097. Values 98 and 99 are interpreted as 1998 and
1999.
Area C S1 S2
CIO 6143
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32765
EM Area without bank E00000 to E32767 E00000 to E32765
En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
299
Area C S1 S2
Constants See previous page. See previous page. ---
Data Registers ---

Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The time comparison instruction compares the unmasked values (corre-
sponding bit of C set to 0) of the present time data in S1 to S1+2 with the com-
parison time data in S2 to S2+2 and creates an ON execution condition when
the comparison condition is true. At the same time, the result of a time com-
parison instruction is reflected in the arithmetic flags (=, <>, <, <=, >, >=).
There are 18 possible combinations of time comparison instructions.
Any time values that are masked in the control word (C) are not included in
the comparison.
The following table shows the ON/OFF status of each flag for each compari-
son result.
Result Flag status
= <> < <= > >=
S1 = S2 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
S1 > S2 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
S1 < S2 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
Comparison
S1 S2
Conditions Flags
Result (=, <>, <, <=, >, >=)
Masking Time Values

Time values can be masked individually and excluded from the comparison
operation. To mask a time value, set the corresponding bit in the control word
(C) to 1. Bits 00 to 05 of C mask the seconds, minutes, hours, day, month, and
year, respectively.
Example:
When C = 39 hex, the rightmost 6 bits are 111001 (year=1, month=1, day=1,
hours=0, minutes=0, and seconds=1) so only the hours and minutes are com-
pared. This mask setting can be used to perform a particular operation at a
given time (hour and minute) each day.
300
Present time data Comparison time data

15 08 07 00 15 08 07 00
S1 Minute (00 to Second (00 to S2 Minute (00 to Second (00 to
59, BCD) 59, BCD) 59, BCD) 59, BCD)
S1+1 Day of month Hour (00 to S2+1 Day of month Hour (00 to
(01 to 31, BCD) 23, BCD) (01 to 31, BCD) 23, BCD)
Year (00 to Month (01 to Year (00 to Month (01 to
S1+2 99, BCD) 12, BCD) S2+2 99, BCD) 12, BCD)
Compares only hours and Year, month, day, and seconds

minutes data. data is masked.
Previous data comparison instructions compared data in 16-bit units. The

time comparison instructions are limited to comparing 8-bit time values.
The following table shows the structure of the CPU Unit’s internal Calendar/
Clock Area.
Addresses Contents
A35100 to A35107 Second (00 to 59, BCD)
A35108 to A35115 Minute (00 to 59, BCD)
A35200 to A35207 Hour (00 to 23, BCD)
A35208 to A35215 Day of month (01 to 31, BCD)
A35300 to A35307 Month (01 to 12, BCD)
A35308 to A35315 Year (00 to 99, BCD)
The Calendar/Clock Area can be set with a Programming Device (including a

Programming Console), DATE(735) instruction, or “CLOCK WRITE” FINS
command (0702 hex).
Summary of Time Comparison Instructions
tions of the 18 time comparison instructions.
341 LD= DT LOAD EQUAL True if
AND=DT AND EQUAL S1 = S2
OR=DT OR EQUAL
342 LD<>DT LOAD NOT EQUAL True if
AND<>DT AND NOT EQUAL S1 ≠ S2
OR<>DT OR NOT EQUAL
343 LD<DT LOAD LESS THAN True if
AND<DT AND LESS THAN S1 < S2
OR<DT OR LESS THAN
344 LD<=DT LOAD LESS THAN OR EQUAL True if
AND<=DT AND LESS THAN OR EQUAL S1 ≤ S2
OR<=DT OR LESS THAN OR EQUAL
345 LD>DT LOAD GREATER THAN True if
AND>DT AND GREATER THAN S1 > S2
OR>DT OR GREATER THAN
346 LD>=DT LOAD GREATER THAN OR EQUAL True if
AND>=DT AND GREATER THAN OR EQUAL S1 ≥ S2
OR>=DT OR GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
301
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if all 6 of the mask bits (C bits 00 to 05) are ON.
Greater Than > ON if S1 > S2.
Flag
Greater Than or > = ON if S1 ≥ S2.
Equal Flag
Equal Flag = ON if S1 = S2.
Not Equal Flag = ON if S1 ≠ S2.
Less Than Flag < ON if S1 < S2.
Less Than or <= ON if S1 ≤ S2.
Equal Flag
In CS1 and CJ1 CPU Units, these Flags are turned OFF.
Precautions Time comparison instructions cannot be used as right-hand instructions, i.e.,

Example When CIO 000000 is ON and the time is 13:00:00, CIO 005000 is turned ON.
The contents of A351 to A353 (the CPU Unit’s internal calendar/clock data)
are used as the present time data and the contents of D00100 to D00102 are
used as the comparison time data. The year, month, and day values are
masked, so only the hour, minute, and second data are compared.
000000 005000
=DT
C D00000
S1 A352
S2 D00100
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D00000 - - 1 1 1 0 0 0 D00000 set to 0038 hex
Seconds compared.
Minutes compared.
Hours compared.
Day masked.
Month masked.
Year masked.
Shaded data is compared.

15 8 7 0 15 8 7 0
A351 Minute Second S2: D00100 00 00
A352 Day of month Hour S2+1: D00101 - 13
A353 Year Month S2+2: D00102 - -
Conditions Flags set as soon as

execution condition is turned ON.
302
3-7-3 COMPARE: CMP(020)

Purpose Compares two unsigned binary values (constants and/or the contents of
specified words) and outputs the result to the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxiliary
Area.
Ladder Symbol
CMP(020)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CMP(020)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !CMP(020)
Systems.

OK OK OK OK
Area S1 S2
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
303
Area S1 S2
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description CMP(020) compares the unsigned binary data in S1 and S2 and outputs the
result to Arithmetic Flags (the Greater Than, Greater Than or Equal, Equal,
Less Than or Equal, Less Than, and Not Equal Flags) in the Auxiliary Area.
Unsigned binary
comparison
Arithmetic Flags
(>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
Condition Flag Status

The following table shows the status of the Arithmetic Flags after execution of
CMP(020). (A status of “---” indicates that the Flag may be ON or OFF.)
CMP(020) Flag status
Result > >= = <= < <>
S1 > S2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
S1 = S2 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
S1 < S2 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
Using CMP(020) Results in the Program

When CMP(020) is executed, the result is reflected in the Arithmetic Flags.
Control the desired output or right-hand instruction with a branch from the
same input condition that controls CMP(020), as shown in the following dia-
gram. In this case, the Equals Flag and output A will be turned ON when S1 =
S 2.
Correct Use of CMP(020)
CMP
S1
S2
Arithmetic Flag
(Example: Equal Flag)
A
Using CMP(020) Results in the Program

Do not program another instruction between CMP(020) and the instruction
controlled by the Arithmetic Flag because the other instruction might change
the status of the Arithmetic Flag. In this case, the results of instruction B might
change the results of CMP(020).
304
Incorrect Use of CMP(020)

CMP
S1
S2
Instruction
B
Arithmetic Flag
A
The immediate-refreshing variation (!CMP(020)) can be used with words allo-

cated to external inputs specified in S1 and/or S2. When !CMP(020) is exe-
cuted, input refreshing will be performed for the external input word specified
in S1 and/or S2 and that refreshed value will be compared. (Immediate
refreshing cannot be performed on inputs allocated to Group-2 High-density
I/O Units or Units mounted to Slave Racks.)
Flags
Name CX-Programmer Programming Operation
label Console label
Error Flag P_ER ER Unchanged (See note.)
Greater Than Flag P_GT > ON if S1 > S2.
Greater Than or Equal Flag P_GE >= ON if S1 ≥ S2.
Equal Flag P_EQ = ON if S1 = S2.
Not Equal Flag P_NE = ON if S1 ≠ S2.
Less Than Flag P_LT < ON if S1 < S2.
Less Than or Equal Flag P_LE <= ON if S1 ≤ S2.
Negative Flag P_N N Unchanged (See note.)
Precautions Do not program another instruction between CMP(020) and an input condition
that accesses the result of CMP(020) because the other instruction might
change the status of the Arithmetic Flags.
305
3-7-4 DOUBLE COMPARE: CMPL(060)

Purpose Compares two double unsigned binary values (constants and/or the contents
of specified words) and outputs the result to the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxil-
iary Area.
Ladder Symbol
CMPL(060)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CMPL(060)

OK OK OK OK
Area S1 S2
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #FFFFFFFF
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers IR0 to IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
306
Description CMPL(060) compares the unsigned binary data in S1 +1, S1 and S2+1, S2
and outputs the result to Arithmetic Flags (the Greater Than, Greater Than or
Equal, Equal, Less Than or Equal, Less Than, and Not Equal Flags) in the
Auxiliary Area.
Unsigned binary
comparison
S2+1
Arithmetic Flags
(>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
Arithmetic Flag Status

CMPL(060). (A status of “---” indicates that the Flag may be ON or OFF.)
CMPL(060)Result Flag status
> >= = <= < <>
S1 +1, S1 > S2+1, S2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
S1+1, S1 = S2+1, S2 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
S1+1, S1 < S2+1, S2 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
Using CMPL(060) Results in the Program

When CMPL(060) is executed, the result is reflected in the Arithmetic Flags.
same input condition that controls CMPL(060), as shown in the following dia-
gram. Here, the Equals Flag and output A will be turned ON when S1 +1, S1 =
S2+1, S2.
Correct Use of CMPL(060)
CMPL
S1
S2
Arithmetic Flag
A
Using CMPL(060) Results in the Program

Do not program another instruction between CMPL(060) and the instruction
change the results of CMPL(060).
307
Incorrect Use of CMPL(060)

CMPL
S1
S2
Instruction
B
Arithmetic Flag
(Example: Equals Flag)
A
Flags
Name CX-Programmer Programming Operation
label Console label
Error Flag P_ER ER Unchanged (See note.)
Greater Than Flag P_GT > ON if S1 +1, S1 > S2+1, S2.
Greater Than or Equal Flag P_GE >= ON if S1 +1, S1 ≥ S2+1, S2.
Equal Flag P_EQ = ON if S1 +1, S1 = S2+1, S2.
Not Equal Flag P_NE <> ON if S1 +1, S1 ≠ S2+1, S2.
Less Than Flag P_LT < ON if S1 +1, S1 < S2+1, S2.
Less Than or Equal Flag P_LE <= ON if S1 +1, S1 ≤ S2+1, S2.
Negative Flag P_N N Unchanged (See note.)
Precautions Do not program another instruction between CMPL(060) and an input condi-
tion that accesses the result of CMPL(060) because the other instruction
might change the status of the Arithmetic Flags.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the eight-digit unsigned
binary data in CIO 0011 and CIO 0010 is compared to the eight-digit
unsigned binary data in CIO 0009 and CIO 0008 and the result is output to
the Arithmetic Flags. The results recorded in the Greater Than, Equals, and
Less Than Flags are immediately saved to CIO 000200 (Greater Than),
CIO 000201 (Equals), and CIO 000202 (Less Than).
308
Flag status
Result > (0)
Comparison = (0)
< (1)
3-7-5 SIGNED BINARY COMPARE: CPS(114)

Purpose Compares two signed binary values (constants and/or the contents of speci-
fied words) and outputs the result to the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
Ladder Symbol
CPS(114)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CPS(114)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !CPS(114)

OK OK OK OK
Area S1 S2
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
309
Area S1 S2
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description CPS(114) compares the signed binary data in S1 and S2 and outputs the
result to Arithmetic Flags (the Greater Than, Greater Than or Equal, Equal,
Less Than or Equal, Less Than, and Not Equal Flags) in the Auxiliary Area.
Signed binary
comparison
Arithmetic Flags
(>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
Note CPS(114) treats the data in S1 and S2 as signed binary data which ranges
from 8000 to 7FFF (–32,768 to 32,767 decimal).
CPS(114). (A status of “---” indicates that the Flag may be ON or OFF.)
CPS(114) Flag status
Result > >= = <= < <>
S1 > S2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
S1 = S2 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
S1 < S2 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
Using CPS(114) Results in the Program

When CPS(114) is executed, the result is reflected in the Arithmetic Flags.
same input condition that controls CPS(114), as shown in the following dia-
gram. In this case, the Equals Flag and output A will be turned ON when S1 =
S 2.
Correct Use of CPS(114)
CPS
S1
S2
Arithmetic Flag
A
310
Using CPS(114) Results in the Program

Do not program another instruction between CPS(114) and the instruction
change the results of CPS(114).
Incorrect Use of CPS(114)
CPS
S1
S2
Instruction
B
Arithmetic Flag
A
The immediate-refreshing variation (!CPS(114)) can be used with words allo-

cated to external inputs specified in S1 and/or S2. When !CPS(114) is exe-
cuted, input refreshing will be performed for the external input word specified
in S1 and/or S2 and that refreshed value will be compared. (Immediate
refreshing cannot be performed on inputs allocated to Group-2 High-density
I/O Units or Units mounted to Slave Racks.)
Flags
Greater Than Flag > ON if S1 > S2.
Greater Than or Equal Flag >= ON if S1 ≥ S2.
Equal Flag = ON if S1 = S2.
Not Equal Flag <> ON if S1 ≠ S2.
Less Than Flag < ON if S1 < S2.
Less Than or Equal Flag <= ON if S1 ≤ S2.
Precautions Do not program another instruction between CPS(114) and an input condition
that accesses the result of CPS(114) because the other instruction might
311
3-7-6 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE: CPSL(115)

Purpose Compares two double signed binary values (constants and/or the contents of
specified words) and outputs the result to the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxiliary
Area.
Ladder Symbol
CPSL(115)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CPSL(115)

OK OK OK OK
Area S1 S2
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
312
Description CPSL(115) compares the double signed binary data in S1 +1, S1 and S2+1,
S2 and outputs the result to Arithmetic Flags (the Greater Than, Greater Than
or Equal, Equal, Less Than or Equal, Less Than, and Not Equal Flags) in the
Auxiliary Area.
Signed binary
comparison
S2+1
Arithmetic Flags
(>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
Note CPSL(115) treats the data in S1 and S2 as double signed binary data which
ranges from 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF (–2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 dec-
imal).
CPSL(115). (A status of “---” indicates that the Flag may be ON or OFF.)
CPSL(115)Result Flag status
> >= = <= < <>
S1 +1, S1 > S2+1, S2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
S1+1, S1 = S2+1, S2 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
S1+1, S1 < S2+1, S2 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
Using CPSL(115) Results in the Program

When CPSL(115) is executed, the result is reflected in the Arithmetic Flags.
same input condition that controls CPSL(115), as shown in the following dia-
gram. Here, the Equals Flag and output A will be turned ON when S1 +1, S1 =
S2+1, S2.
Correct Use of CPSL(115)
CPSL
S1
S2
Arithmetic Flag
A
Using CPSL(115) Results in the Program

Do not program another instruction between CPSL(115) and the instruction
change the results of CPSL(115).
313
Incorrect Use of CPSL(115)

CPSL
S1
S2
Instruction
B
Arithmetic Flag
A
Flags
Greater Than Flag > ON if S1 +1, S1 > S2+1, S2.
Greater Than or Equal Flag >= ON if S1 +1, S1 ≥ S2+1, S2.
Equal Flag = ON if S1 +1, S1 = S2+1, S2.
Not Equal Flag = ON if S1 +1, S1 ≠ S2+1, S2.
Less Than Flag < ON if S1 +1, S1 < S2+1, S2.
Less Than or Equal Flag <= ON if S1 +1, S1 ≤ S2+1, S2.
Note In CS1 and CJ1 CPU Units, these Flags are turned OFF.
unchanged.
Precautions Do not program another instruction between CPSL(115) and an input condi-
tion that accesses the result of CPSL(115) because the other instruction
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the eight-digit signed
binary data in D00002 and D00001 is compared to the eight-digit signed
binary data in D00006 and D00005 and the result is output to the Arithmetic
Flags.
• If the content of D00002 and D00001 is greater than that of D00006 and
D00005, the Greater Than Flag will be turned ON, causing CIO 002000 to
be turned ON.
• If the content of D00002 and D00001 is equal to that of D00006 and
D00005, the Equals Flag will be turned ON, causing CIO 002001 to be
turned ON.
• If the content of D00002 and D00001 is less than that of D00006 and
D00005, the Less Than Flag will be turned ON, causing CIO 002002 to
be turned ON.
314
Flag status
1234 5678 > (1)
D0001 = (0)
D0005 Comparison
< (0)
ABCD EF12
3-7-7 MULTIPLE COMPARE: MCMP(019)

Purpose Compares 16 consecutive words with another 16 consecutive words and
turns ON the corresponding bit in the result word where the contents of the
words are not equal.
Ladder Symbol
MCMP(019)
S1 S1: First word of set 1
S2 S2: First word of set 2
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MCMP(019)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MCMP(019)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S1: First word of set 1

Specifies the beginning of the first 16-word range. S1 and S1+15 must be in
the same data area.
S2: First word of set 2
Specifies the beginning of the second 16-word range. S2 and S2+15 must be
R: Result word
Each bit of R contains the result of a comparison between two words in the
16-word sets. Bit n of R (n = 00 to 15) contains the result of the comparison
between words S1+n and S2+n.
15 14 1 0
R
Comparison result for S1 and S2
Comparison result for S1+1 and S2+1
315
Area S1 S2 R
CIO 6143
DM Area D00000 to D32752 D00000 to
D32767
E32767
EM Area with bank En_00000 to 32752 En_00000 to
(n = 0 to C) En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description MCMP(019) compares the contents of the 16 words S1 through S1+15 to the
contents of the 16 words S2 through S2+15, and turns ON the corresponding
bit in word R when the contents are not equal.
The content of S1 is compared to the content of S2, the content of S1+1 to the
content of S2+1, ..., and the content of S1+15 to the content of S2+15. Bit n of
R is turned OFF if the content of S1+n is equal to the content of S2+n; bit n of
R is turned ON if the contents are not equal. If the contents of all 16 pairs of
words are the same, the Equals Flag will turn ON after the instruction has
been executed.
Comparison R
0: Words are equal.
1: Words aren't equal.
316
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON if the result word is 0000.
(The two 16-word sets contain the same data.)
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, MCMP(019) compares

words D00100 through D00115 in order to words D00200 through D00215
and turns ON the corresponding bits in D00300 when the words are not
equal.
R: D00300
S1: S2:
3-7-8 TABLE COMPARE: TCMP(085)

Purpose Compares the source data to the contents of 16 consecutive words and turns
ON the corresponding bit in the result word when the contents of the words
are equal.
Ladder Symbol
TCMP(085)
S S: Source data
T T: First word of table
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TCMP(085)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TCMP(085)
OK OK OK OK
317
Operands T: First word of table

Specifies the beginning of the 16-word table. T and T+15 must be in the same
data area.
R: Result word
Each bit of R contains the result of a comparison between S and a word in the
16-word table. Bit n of R (n = 00 to 15) contains the result of the comparison
between S and T+n.
Comparison data 0
Comparison data 1
to to
Comparison data 15
15 14 1 0
R
Comparison result for S and T
Comparison result for S and T+1
Area S T R
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to
CIO 6143 CIO 6128 CIO 6143
Work Area W000 to W511 W000 to W496 W000 to W511
Holding Bit Area H000 to H511 H000 to H496 H000 to H511
Timer Area T0000 to T4095 T0000 to T4080 T0000 to T4095
Counter Area C0000 to C4095 C0000 to C4080 C0000 to C4095
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to D00000 to
D32767 D32752 D32767
EM Area without bank E00000 to E00000 to E00000 to
E32767 E32752 E32767
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_00000 to En_00000 to
En_32767 En_32752 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF ---
(binary)
Data Registers DR0 to DR15 --- DR0 to DR15
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
318
Description TCMP(085) compares the source data (S) to each of the 16 words T through
T+15 and turns ON the corresponding bit in word R when the data are equal.
Bit n of R is turned ON if the content of T+n is equal to S and it is turned OFF
if they are not equal.
S is compared to the content of T and bit 00 of R is turned ON if they are
equal or OFF if they are not equal, S is compared to the content of T+1 and bit
01 of R is turned ON if they are equal or OFF if they are not equal, ..., and S is
compared to the content of T+15 and bit 15 of R is turned ON if they are equal
or OFF if they are not equal.
Comparison R
1: Data are equal.
0: Data aren't equal.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
(None of the 16 words in the table equals S.)
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, TCMP(085) compares the
content of D00100 with the contents of words D00200 through D00215 and
turns ON the corresponding bits in D00300 when the contents are equal or
OFF when the contents are not equal.
R: D00300
S: D00100 T:
319
3-7-9 BLOCK COMPARE: BCMP(068)

Purpose Compares the source data to 16 ranges (defined by 16 lower limits and 16
upper limits) and turns ON the corresponding bit in the result word when the
source data is within a range.
Ladder Symbol
BCMP(068)
S S: Source data
B B: First word of block
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BCMP(068)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BCMP(068)

OK OK OK OK
Operands B: First word of block

Specifies the beginning of a 32-word block (16 lower/upper limit pairs). B and
B+31 must be in the same data area.
R: Result word
Each bit of R contains the result of a comparison between S and one of the 16
ranges defined the 32-word block. Bit n of R (n = 00 to 15) contains the result
of the comparison between S and the nth pair of words.
15 14 1 0
R
Comparison result for S
and range B ↔ B+1
Comparison result for S and range B+2 ↔ B+3
and range B+28 ↔ B+29
and range B+30 ↔ B+31
Area S B R
CIO 6143 CIO 6112 CIO 6143
D32767 D32736 D32767
E32767 E32736 E32767
320
Area S B R
En_32767 En_32736 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BCMP(068) compares the source data (S) to the 16 ranges defined by pairs
of lower and upper limit values in B through B+31. The first word in each pair
(B+2n) provides the lower limit and the second word (B+2n+1) provides the
upper limit of range n (n = 0 to 15). If S is within any of these ranges (inclusive
of the upper and lower limits), the corresponding bit in R is turned ON. The
rest of the bits in R will be turned OFF.
B ≤S≤ B+1 Bit 00 of R
B+2 ≤S≤ B+3 Bit 01 of R
B+4 ≤S≤ B+5 Bit 02 of R
B+6 ≤S≤ B+7 Bit 03 of R
B+8 ≤S≤ B+9 Bit 04 of R
B+10 ≤S≤ B+11 Bit 05 of R
B+12 ≤S≤ B+13 Bit 06 of R
B+14 ≤S≤ B+15 Bit 07 of R
B+16 ≤S≤ B+17 Bit 08 of R
B+18 ≤S≤ B+19 Bit 09 of R
B+20 ≤S≤ B+21 Bit 10 of R
B+22 ≤S≤ B+23 Bit 11 of R
B+24 ≤S≤ B+25 Bit 12 of R
B+26 ≤S≤ B+27 Bit 13 of R
B+28 ≤S≤ B+29 Bit 14 of R
B+30 ≤S≤ B+31 Bit 15 of R
For example, bit 00 of R is turned ON if S is within the first range (B ≤ S ≤

B+1), bit 01 of R is turned ON if S is within the second range (B+2 ≤ S ≤ B+3),
..., and bit 15 of R is turned ON if S is within the fifteenth range (B+30 ≤ S ≤
B+31). All other bits in R are turned OFF.
321
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
(S is not within any of the 16 ranges.)
Precautions An error will not occur if the lower limit is greater than the upper limit, but 0
(not within the range) will be output to the corresponding bit of R.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, BCMP(068) compares the
content of D00100 with the 16 ranges defined in D00200 through D00231 and
turns ON the corresponding bits in D00300 when S is within the range or OFF
when S is not within the range.
R: D00300
S: D00100 to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
3-7-10 EXPANDED BLOCK COMPARE: BCMP2(502)

Purpose Compares the source data to up to 256 ranges (defined by 256 lower limits
and 256 upper limits) and turns ON the corresponding bit in the result word
when the source data is within a range. BCMP2(502) is supported only by the
CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CS1D CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later, and CJ1M CPU Unit
(Pre-Ver. 2.0 or Unit Ver. 2.0 or later).
Ladder Symbol
BCMP2(502)
S S: Source data
B B: First word of block
R R: First result word
322
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BCMP2(502)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BCMP2(502)

OK OK OK OK
Operands B: First word of block

Specifies the beginning of a comparison block containing up to 513 words
including up to 256 lower/upper limit pairs). All words must be in the same
data area.
Comparison block
Word 15 8 7 0
00 hex Last range "N" N: 00 to FF hex
B (0 to 255)
Range 0 B+1 Range 0 value A
B+2 Range 0 value B
B+4 Range 1 value B
B+6 Range 2 value B
Range Range 15 B+31 Range 15 value A

data
B+32 Range 15 value B
Range N B+2N+1 Range N value A

B+2(N+1) Range N value B
R: First result word

Each bit of each R word contains the result of a comparison between S and
one of the ranges defined the comparison block. The maximum number of
result words is 16, i.e., m equals 0 to 15.
15 14 n 0
R+m
Comparison result for
S and range 15m
Comparison result for S and range 15m + n
S and range 15m + 14
323
Area S B R
addresses in binary
addresses in BCD
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BCMP2(502) compares the source data (S) to the ranges defined by pairs of
lower and upper limit values in the comparison block. If S is within any of
these ranges (inclusive of the upper and lower limits), the corresponding bits
in the result words (R to R+15 max.) are turned ON. The rest of the bits in R
will be turned OFF.
The number of ranges is determined by the value N set in the lower byte of B.
N can be between 0 and 255. The upper byte of B must be 00 hex.
Comparison block
15 87 0
Last range N: 00 to FF hex (0 to 255)
B 00 hex "N"
Result words
Comparison ranges R Bit
B+1 Range 0 value A Range 0 value B B+2 0
Source data
S
: :
R+1 Bit
: :
B+2N+1 Range N value A Range N value B B+2N+2
In range: ON
Ranges
Not in range: OFF
Number of Ranges
The number of ranges in the comparison block is set in the first word of the
block. Up to 256 ranges can be set.
324
Setting Ranges
The values A and B for each range will determine how the comparison oper-
ates depending on which value is larger, as shown below.
· If Value A ≤ Value B
Then, Value A ≤ Comparison range ≤ Value B
Comparison range
Value A Value B
· If Value A > Value B

Then, Comparison range ≤ Value B and Value A ≤ Comparison range
Comparison Comparison
range range
Value B Value A
Example
When B+1 ≤ B+2
If B+1 ≤ S ≤ B+2, then bit 0 of R will turn ON,
If B+3 ≤ S ≤ B+4, then bit 1 of R will turn ON,
If S < B+5 and B+6 < S, then bit 2 of R will turn OFF, and
If S < B+7 and B+8 < S, then bit 3 of R will turn OFF.
When B+1 > B+2
If S ≤ B+2 and B+1 ≤ S, then bit 0 of R will turn ON,
If S ≤ B+4 and B+3 ≤ S, then bit 1 of R will turn ON,
If B+6 < S < B+5, then bit 2 of R will turn OFF, and
If B+8 < S < B+7, then bit 3 of R will turn OFF.
Results Storage Location
The results are output to corresponding bits in word R. If there are more than
16 comparison ranges, consecutive words following R will be used. The maxi-
mum number of result words is 16, i.e., m equals 0 to 15.
15 14 n 0
R+m
S and range 15m
Comparison result for S and range 15m + n
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, BCMP2(502) compares

the content of CIO 0010 with the 24 ranges defined in D00200 through
D00247 (N = 17 hex = 23 decimal, i.e., 24 ranges) and turns ON the corre-
sponding bits in CIO 0100 and CIO 0101 when S is within the range and OFF
when S is not within the range. For example, if the source data in CIO 0010 is
in the range defined by D00201 and D00202, then bit 00 of CIO 0100 is
turned ON and if it in not in the range, then bit 00 of CIO 0100 is turned OFF.
Likewise, the source data in CIO 0010 is compared to the ranges defined by
D00203 and D00204, D00247 and D00248, and the other words in the com-
325
parison block, and bit 1 in CIO 0100, bit 7 in CIO 1010, and the other bits in
the result words are manipulated according to the results of comparison.
000000 0 0 1 7
R: CIO 0100
BCMP2 Bit
0010 S: CIO 0010 0 1 7 5 D00201 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 D00202
D00200 D00203 0 0 8 0 0 1 8 0 D00204
0100 D00205 0 1 6 0 0 2 6 0 D00206
D00231 1 2 0 0 1 8 0 0 D00232
R: CIO 0101
D00233 1 5 0 0 0 5 0 0 D00234
D00235 1 9 0 0 0 1 0 0 D00236
D00237 1 8 0 0 0 2 0 0 D00238
D00247 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 0 D00248
3-7-11 AREA RANGE COMPARE: ZCP(088)

Purpose Compares a 16-bit unsigned binary value (CD) with the range defined by
lower limit LL and upper limit UL. The results are output to the Arithmetic
Flags.
only.
Ladder Symbol
ZCP(088)
CD CD: Comparison Data
LL LL: Lower limit of range
UL UL: Upper limit of range
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ZCP(088)

OK OK OK OK
Area CD LL UL
326
Area CD LL UL
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ZCP(088) compares the 16-bit signed binary data in CD with the range
defined by LL and UL and outputs the result to the Greater Than, Equals, and
Less Than Flags in the Auxiliary Area. (The Less Than or Equal, Greater
Than or Equal, and Not Equal Flags are left unchanged.)
ZCP(088).
ZCP(088)Result Flag status
> = <
CD > UL ON OFF OFF
CD = UL OFF ON
LL < CD < UL
CD = LL
CD < LL OFF ON
Using ZCP(088) Results in the Program

When ZCP(088) is executed, the result is reflected in the Arithmetic Flags.
same input condition that controls ZCP(088), as shown in the following dia-
gram. In this case, the Equals Flag and output A will be turned ON when
LL ≤ CD ≤ UL.
327
Correct Use of ZCP(088)
ZCP
CD
LL
UL
Arithmetic Flag
Do not program another instruction between ZCP(088) and the instruction

change the results of ZCP(088).
Incorrect Use of ZCP(088)
ZCPL
CD
LL
UL
Instruction
B
A
Arithmetic Flag
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if LL > UL.
Greater Than Flag > ON if CD > UL.
Greater Than or Equal Flag >= Left unchanged.
Equal Flag = ON if LL ≤ CD ≤ UL.
Not Equal Flag <> Left unchanged.
Less Than Flag < ON if CD < LL.
Less Than or Equal Flag <= Left unchanged.
Negative Flag N Left unchanged.
Precautions Do not program another instruction between ZCP(088) and an input condition
that accesses the result of ZCP(088) because the other instruction might
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 16-bit unsigned binary
data in D00000 is compared to the range 0005 to 001F hex (5 to 31 decimal)
and the result is output to the Arithmetic Flags.
CIO 000200 is turned ON if 0005 hex ≤ content of D00000 ≤ 001F hex.
CIO 000201 is turned ON if the content of D00000 > 001F hex.
CIO 000202 is turned ON if the content of D00000 < 0005 hex.
328
000000 LL CD UL Arithmetic
ZCP
D00000 Flags
CD D00000 0005Hex ≤ ≤ 001FHex = ON(1)
LL #0005
#001F D00000
UL
> 001FHex > ON(1)
002000 D00000
0005Hex > < ON(1)
=
002001
>
002002
<
3-7-12 DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE: ZCPL(116)

Purpose Compares a 32-bit unsigned binary value (CD+1, CD) with the range defined
by lower limit (LL+1, LL) and upper limit (UL+1, UL). The results are output to
the Arithmetic Flags.
only.
Ladder Symbol
ZCPL(116)
CD CD: First word of Comparison Data
LL LL: First word of Lower Limit
UL UL: First word of Upper Limit
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ZCP(088)

OK OK OK OK
Area CD LL UL
(n = 0 to C)
329
Area CD LL UL
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 0000 to #FFFF FFFF
(binary)
Data Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ZCPL(116) compares the 32-bit signed binary data in CD+1, CD with the
range defined by LL+1, LL and UL+1, UL and outputs the result to the Greater
Than, Equals, and Less Than Flags in the Auxiliary Area. (The Less Than or
Equal, Greater Than or Equal, and Not Equal Flags are left unchanged.)
ZCPL(116).
ZCPL(116)Result Flag status
> = <
CD+1, CD > UL+1, UL ON OFF OFF
CD+1, CD = UL+1, UL OFF ON
LL+1, LL < CD+1, CD < UL+1, UL
CD+1, CD = LL+1, LL
CD+1, CD < LL+1, LL OFF ON
Using ZCPL(116) Results in the Program

When ZCPL(116) is executed, the result is reflected in the Arithmetic Flags.
same input condition that controls ZCPL(116).
Do not program another instruction between ZCPL(116) and the instruction
the status of the Arithmetic Flag.
The operation of ZCPL(116) is almost identical to that of ZCP(088) except that
ZCPL(116) compares 32-bit values instead of 16-bit values. Refer to 3-7-11
AREA RANGE COMPARE: ZCP(088) for diagrams showing how to use
results in the program and an example program section.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if LL+1, LL > UL+1, UL.
Greater Than Flag > ON if CD > UL+1, UL.
330
Data Movement Instructions Section 3-8

Greater Than or Equal Flag >= Left unchanged.
Equal Flag = ON if LL+1, LL ≤ CD+1, CD ≤ UL+1, UL.
Not Equal Flag <> Left unchanged.
Less Than Flag < ON if CD+1, CD < LL+1, LL.
Less Than or Equal Flag <= Left unchanged.
Negative Flag N Left unchanged.
Precautions Do not program another instruction between ZCPL(116) and an input condi-
tion that accesses the result of ZCPL(116) because the other instruction
3-8 Data Movement Instructions

3-8-1 MOVE: MOV(021)
Purpose Transfers a word of data to the specified word.
Ladder Symbol
MOV(021)
S S: Source
D D: Destination
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MOV(021)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MOV(021)
Immediate Refreshing Specification (See note.) !MOV(021)
Combined Executed Once and Destination Refreshed !@MOV(021)
note.)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
331
Area S D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF (binary) ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description Transfers S to D. If S is a constant, the value can be used for a data setting.
Source word Bit status not Destination word

changed.
MOV(021) has an immediate refreshing variation (!MOV(021)). An external

input bits can be specified for S and external output bits can be specified for
D. Input bits used for S will refreshed just before, and output bits used for D
will be refreshed just after execution unless the bits are allocated to a Group-2
High-density I/O Unit, High-density Special I/O Unit, or a Unit mounted in a
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Rack.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON if the data being transferred is 0000.
Negative Flag N ON if the leftmost bit of the data being transferred is 1.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of CIO 0100 is
copied to D00100.
332
00001
MOV
#1234 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D00010 D00010 1 2 3 4 (Hexadecimal 1234)
00002
MOV
+1234 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D00011 D00011 0 4 D 2 (Decimal 1234)
00003
MOV
-1234 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D00012 D00012 F B 2 E (Decimal -1234)
3-8-2 MOVE NOT: MVN(022)

Purpose Transfers the complement of a word of data to the specified word.
Ladder Symbol
MVN(022)
S S: Source
D D: Destination
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MVN(022)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MVN(022)
OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF (binary) ---
333
Area S D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description MVN(022) inverts the bits in S and transfers the result to D. The content of S
is left unchanged.
Source word Destination word
Bit status
inverted.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON if the content of D is 0000 after execution.
Negative Flag N ON if the leftmost bit of D is 1 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of the bits in
CIO 0100 is inverted and the result is copied to D00100.
3-8-3 DOUBLE MOVE: MOVL(498)

Purpose Transfers two words of data to the specified words.
Ladder Symbol
MOVL(498)
S S: First source word
D D: First destination word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MOVL(498)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MOVL(498)
334

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #FFFFFFFF ---
(binary)
Data Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, 1–(– –) IR5
Description MOVL(498) transfers S+1 and S to D+1 and D. If S+1 and S are constants,
the value can be used for a data setting.
S S+1 D D+1
Bit status
not changed.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON if the contents of D+1 and D are 0000 0000 after exe-
cution.
Negative Flag N ON if the leftmost bit of D+1 is 1 after execution.
335
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00101 and
D00100 are copied to D00201 and D00200.
3-8-4 DOUBLE MOVE NOT: MVNL(499)

Purpose Transfers the complement of two words of data to the specified words.
Ladder Symbol
MVNL(499)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MVNL(499)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MVNL(499)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
336
Area S D
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description MVNL(499) inverts the bits in S+1 and S and transfers the result to D+1 and
D. The contents of S+1 and S are left unchanged.
S S+1 D D+1
Bit status
inverted.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON if the contents of D+1 and D are 0000 0000 after exe-
cution.
Negative Flag N ON if the leftmost bit of D+1 is 1 after execution.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of the bits in
D00101 and D00100 are inverted and the result is copied to D00201 and
D00200. (The original contents of D00101 and D00100 are left unchanged.)
3-8-5 MOVE BIT: MOVB(082)

Purpose Transfers the specified bit.
Ladder Symbol
MOVB(082)
C C: Control word
337
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MOVB(082)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MOVB(082)

OK OK OK OK

The rightmost two digits of C indicate which bit of S is the source bit and the
leftmost two digits of C indicate which bit of D is the destination bit.
15 8 7 0
C m n
Source bit: 00 to 0F
(0 to 15 decimal)
Destination bit: 00 to 0F
(0 to 15 decimal)
Area S C D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF Specified values ---
(binary) only
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
338
Description MOVB(082) copies the specified bit (n) from S to the specified bit (m) in D.
The other bits in the destination word are left unchanged.
Note The same word can be specified for both S and D to copy a bit within a word.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the rightmost and leftmost two digits of C are not
within the specified range of 00 to 0F.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 5th bit of the source
word (CIO 0200) is copied to the 12th bit of the destination word (CIO 0300) in
accordance with the control word’s value of 0C05.
1 2 0 5
3-8-6 MOVE DIGIT: MOVD(083)

Purpose Transfers the specified digit or digits. (Each digit is made up of 4 bits.)
Ladder Symbol
MOVD(083)
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MOVD(083)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MOVD(083)
OK OK OK OK
339
Operands S: Source Word

The source digits are read from right to left, wrapping back to the rightmost
digit (digit 0) if necessary.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
S Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
C: Control Word
The first three digits of C indicate the first source digit (m), the number of dig-
its to transfer (n), and the first destination digit (l), as shown in the following
diagram.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C 0 l n m
First digit in S (m): 0 to 3
Number of digits (n): 0 to 3

First digit in D (l): 0 to 3 0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
Always 0.
D: Destination Word
The destination digits are written from right to left, wrapping back to the right-
most digit (digit 0) if necessary.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
Area S C D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary) only
340
Area S C D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description MOVD(083) copies the content of n digits from S (beginning at digit m) to D

(beginning at digit l). Only the specified digits are changed; the rest are left
unchanged.
If the number of digits being read or written exceeds the leftmost digit of S or
D, MOVD(083) will wrap to the rightmost digit of the same word.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if one of the first three digits of C is not within the
specified range of 0 to 3.
Examples Four-digit Transfer

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, four digits of data are cop-
ied from CIO 0200 to CIO 0300. The transfer begins with the digit 1 of
CIO 0200 and digit 0 or CIO 0300, in accordance with the control word’s value
of 0031.
First digit in S: Digit 1

Digit no.
Number of digits: 3 (4 digits)

Digit no.
First digit in D: Digit 0
Note After reading the leftmost digit of S (digit 3), MOVD(083) wraps to the right-
most digit (digit 0).
341
Examples of C
The following diagram shows examples of data transfers for various values of
C.
Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0

3-8-7 MULTIPLE BIT TRANSFER: XFRB(062)

Purpose Transfers the specified number of consecutive bits.
Ladder Symbol
XFRB(062)
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition XFRB(062)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @XFRB(062)

OK OK OK OK

The first three digits of C indicate the first destination bit (m), the number of
bits to transfer (n), and the first source digit (l), as shown in the following dia-
gram.
15 8 7 4 3 0
C n m l
First bit in S (ll): 0 to F
First bit in D (m): 0 to F

Number of bits (n):
00 to FF (0 to 255)
S: First Source Word

Specifies the first source word. Bits are read from right to left, continuing with
consecutive words (up to S+16) when necessary.
15 0
S
to to
S+16 max.
Note The source words must be in the same data area.
342
D: First Destination Word

Specifies the first destination word. Bits are written from right to left, continu-
ing with consecutive words (up to D+16) when necessary.
15 0
D
to to
D+16 max.
Note The destination words must be in the same data area.
Area C S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Specified values --- ---
only
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to 5+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description XFRB(062) transfers up to 255 consecutive bits from the source words (begin-
ning with bit l of S) to the destination words (beginning with bit m of D). Bits in
the destination words that are not overwritten by the source bits are left
unchanged.
The beginning bits and number of bits are specified in C, as shown in the fol-
lowing diagram.
343
It is possible for the source words and destination words to overlap. By trans-
ferring data overlapping several words, the data can be packed more effi-
ciently in the data area. (This is particularly useful when handling position
data for position control.)
Since the source words and destination words can overlap, XFRB(062) can
be combined with ANDW(034) to shift m bits by n spaces.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions Up to 255 bits of data can be transferred per execution of XFRB(062).

Be sure that the source words and destination words do not exceed the end of
the data area.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 20 bits beginning with
CIO 020006 are copied to the 20 bits beginning with CIO 030000.
20 bits
3-8-8 BLOCK TRANSFER: XFER(070)

Purpose Transfers the specified number of consecutive words.
Ladder Symbol
XFER(070)
N N: Number of words
344
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition XFER(070)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @XFER(070)
OK OK OK OK
Operands N: Number of Words

Specifies the number of words to be transferred. The possible range for N is
0000 to FFFF (0 to 65,535 decimal).
Specifies the first source word.
15 0
S
to to
S+(N−1)

Specifies the first destination word.
15 0
D
to to
D+(N−1)
Area N S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF --- ---
(binary) or &0 to
&65535
345
Area N S D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description XFER(070) copies N words beginning with S (S to S+(N–1)) to the N words

beginning with D (D to D+(N–1)).
N words
to to
S+(N−1) D+
(N−1)
It is possible for the source words and destination words to overlap, so

XFER(070) can perform word-shift operations.
&10
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions Be sure that the source words (S to S+N–1) and destination words (D to
D+N–1) do not exceed the end of the data area.
Some time will be required to complete XFER(070) when a large number of
words is being transferred. In this case, the XFER(070) transfer might not be
completed if a power interruption occurs during execution of the instruction.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 10 words D00100
through D00109 are copied to D00200 through D00209.
&10
10
words
346
3-8-9 BLOCK SET: BSET(071)

Purpose Copies the same word to a range of consecutive words.
Ladder Symbol
BSET(071)
S S: Source word
St St: Starting word
E E: End word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BSET(071)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BSET(071)

OK OK OK OK

Specifies the source data or the word containing the source data.
St: Starting Word
Specifies the first word in the destination range.
E: End Word
Specifies the last word in the destination range.
St
to
Source data Destination range

St
Note St and E must be in the same data area.
Area S St E
347
Area S St E
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, 15–(– –) IR
Description BSET(071) copies the same source word (S) to all of the destination words in
the range St to E.
Source word Destination words
St
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if St is greater than E.
Precautions Be sure that the starting word (St) and end word (E) are in the same data area
and that St ≤ E.
Some time will be required to complete BSET(071) when the source data is
being transferred to a large number of words. In this case, the BSET(071)
transfer might not be completed if a power interruption occurs during execu-
tion of the instruction.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the source data in D00100
is copied to D00200 through D00209.
348
S
St
St:
E
E:
3-8-10 DATA EXCHANGE: XCHG(073)

Purpose Exchanges the contents of the two specified words.
Ladder Symbol
XCHG(073)
E1 E1: First exchange word
E2 E2: Second exchange word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition XCHG(073)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @XCHG(073)

OK OK OK OK
Area E1 E2
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
349
Area E1 E2
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description XCHG(073) exchanges the contents of E1 and E2.

E1 E2
Flags
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the content of D00100 is
exchanged with the content of D00200.
3-8-11 DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE: XCGL(562)

Purpose Exchanges the contents of a pair of consecutive words with another pair of
consecutive words.
Ladder Symbol
XCGL(562)
E1 E1: First exchange word
E2 E2: Second exchange word
350
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition XCGL(562)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @XCGL(562)

OK OK OK OK
Area E1 E2
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- ---
Data Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description XCHG(073) exchanges the contents of E1+1 and E1 with the contents of
E2+1 and E2.
E1 E1+1 E2 E2+1
To exchange 3 or more words, use XFER(070) to transfer the words to a third

set of words (a buffer) as shown in the following diagram.
351
E1 1st XFER(070)
operation
Buffer
2nd XFER(070)
operation
E2
3rd XFER(070)
operation
Flags
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00100
and D00101 are exchanged with the contents of D00200 and D00201.
3-8-12 SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE: DIST(080)

Purpose Transfers the source word to a destination word calculated by adding an offset
value to the base address.
Ladder Symbol
DIST(080)
S S: Source word
Bs Bs: Destination base address
Of Of: Offset
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DIST(080)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DIST(080)
352

OK OK OK OK
Operands Bs: Destination Base Address

Specifies the destination base address. The offset is added to this address to
calculate the destination word.
Of: Offset
This value is added to the base address to calculate the destination word. The
offset can be any value from 0000 to FFFF (0 to 65,535 decimal), but Bs and
Bs+Of must be in the same data area.
15 0
Bs
to
to
Bs+Of
Area S Bs Of
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF --- #0000 to #FFFF
(binary) (binary) or &0 to
&65535
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
353
Description DIST(080) copies S to the destination word calculated by adding Of to Bs.

The same DIST(080) instruction can be used to distribute the source word to
various words in the data area by changing the value of Of.
S Bs Of
Bs+n
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON if the source data is 0000.
Negative Flag N ON if the leftmost bit of the source data is 1.
Precautions Be sure that the offset does not exceed the end of the data area, i.e., Bs and
Bs+Of are in the same data area.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00100 will
be copied to D00210 (D00200 + 10) if the contents of D00300 is 10 (0A hexa-
decimal). The contents of D00100 can be copied to other words by changing
the offset in D00300.
S: D00100
Copied by DIST(080).
S
Bs Of:
Bs: 0 0 0 A
Of
4-digit hexadecimal
Offset +10 words
D00210
3-8-13 DATA COLLECT: COLL(081)

Purpose Transfers the source word (calculated by adding an offset value to the base
address) to the destination word.
Ladder Symbol
COLL(081)
Bs Bs: Source base address
Of Of: Offset
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition COLL(081)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @COLL(081)
354

OK OK OK OK
Operands Bs: Source Base Address

Specifies the source base address. The offset is added to this address to cal-
culate the source word.
Of: Offset
This value is added to the base address to calculate the source word. The off-
set can be any value from 0000 to FFFF (0 to 65,535 decimal), but Bs and
Bs+Of must be in the same data area.
15 0
Bs
to to
Of
Area Bs Of D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #FFFF ---
(binary) or &0 to
&65535
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
355
Description COLL(081) copies the source word (calculated by adding Of to Bs) to the des-
tination word. The same COLL(081) instruction can be used to collect data
from various source words in the data area by changing the value of Of.
Bs Of
Bs+n
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Negative Flag N ON if the leftmost bit of the source data is 1.
Precautions Be sure that the offset does not exceed the end of the data area, i.e., Bs and
Bs+Of are in the same data area.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00110
(D00100 + 10) will be copied to D00300 if the content of D00200 is 10 (0A
hexadecimal). The contents of other words can be copied to D00300 by
changing the offset in D00200.
D00200 0 0 0 A
Bs: D00100
Bs 4-digit hexadecimal
D00101
Of
Offset +10 words
D
D00110 Copied by COLL(081).
3-8-14 MOVE TO REGISTER: MOVR(560)

Purpose Sets the PLC memory address of the specified word, bit, or timer/counter
Completion Flag in the specified Index Register. (Use MOVRW(561) to set the
PLC memory address of a timer/counter PV in an Index Register.)
Ladder Symbol
MOVR(560)
S S: Source (desired word or bit)
D D: Destination (Index Register)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MOVR(560)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MOVR(560)
356

OK OK OK OK
Operands D: Destination
The destination must be an Index Register (IR0 to IR15).
Area S D
CIO 000000 to CIO 614315
W00000 to W51115
H00000 to H51115
A448 to A959
A00000 to A44715
A44800 to A95915
(Completion Flag)
(Completion Flag)
Task Flag TK0000 to TK0031 ---
DM Area D00000 to D32767 ---
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers --- IR0 to IR15
Indirect addressing ---
using Index Registers
Description MOVR(560) finds the PLC memory address (absolute address) of S and
writes that address in D (an Index Register).
Internal I/O memory address of S
Index Register
If a timer or counter is specified in S, MOVR(560) will write the PLC memory

address of the timer/counter Completion Flag in D. Use MOVRW(561) to write
the PLC memory address of the timer/counter PV in D.
357
Flags
Precautions MOVR(560) cannot set the PLC memory addresses of timer/counter PVs.
Use MOVRW(561) to set the PLC memory addresses of timer/counter PVs.
The contents of an index register in an interrupt task is not predictable until it
is set. Be sure to set a register using MOVR(560) in an interrupt task before
using the register.
Any changes to the contents of an IR or DR made in an interrupt task will not
affect the contents of the register in a cyclic task.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, MOVR(560) writes the
PLC memory address of CIO 0020 to IR0.
Internal I/O memory address
S: 0020 14
Internal I/O memory

address of CIO 0020
D: IR0 14
3-8-15 MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REGISTER: MOVRW(561)

Purpose Sets the PLC memory address of the specified timer or counter’s PV in the
specified Index Register. (Use MOVR(560) to set the PLC memory address of
a word, bit, or timer/counter Completion Flag in an Index Register.)
Ladder Symbol
MOVRW(561)
S S: Source (desired TC number)
D D: Destination (Index Register)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MOVR(561)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MOVR(561)

OK OK OK OK
Operands D: Destination
The destination must be an Index Register (IR0 to IR15).
358
Area S D
CIO Area ---
Work Area ---
Holding Bit Area ---
Auxiliary Bit Area ---
(present value)
(present value)
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Description MOVRW(561) finds the PLC memory address for the PV of the timer or
counter specified in S and writes that address in D (an Index Register).
Internal I/O memory address of S
Timer/counter PV only
Index Register
MOVRW(561) will set the PLC memory address of the timer or counter’s PV in
D. Use MOVR(560) to set the PLC memory address of the timer or counter
Completion Flag.
Flags
Precautions MOVRW(561) cannot set the PLC memory addresses of data area words,
bits, or timer/counter Completion Flags. Use MOVR(560) to set these PLC
memory addresses.
359
Data Shift Instructions Section 3-9
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, MOVRW(561) writes the
PLC memory address for the PV of timer T0000 to IR1.
Internal I/O memory address
S:
3-9 Data Shift Instructions

This section describes instructions used to shift data within or between words,
but in differing amounts and directions.
SHIFT REGISTER SFT 010 361
REVERSIBLE SHIFT REGIS- SFTR 084 362
TER
ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT ASFT 017 365
REGISTER
WORD SHIFT WSFT 016 368
ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT ASL 025 370
DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT ASLL 570 371
ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT ASR 026 373
DOUBLE SHIFT RIGHT ASRL 571 374
ROTATE LEFT ROL 027 376
DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT ROLL 572 378
ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT RLNC 574 383
CARRY
DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT WITH- RLNL 576 385
OUT CARRY
ROTATE RIGHT ROR 028 380
DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT RORL 573 381
ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT RRNC 575 387
CARRY
DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT RRNL 577 388
WITHOUT CARRY
ONE DIGIT SHIFT LEFT SLD 074 390
ONE DIGIT SHIFT RIGHT SRD 075 392
SHIFT N-BIT DATA LEFT NSFL 578 393
SHIFT N-BIT DATA RIGHT NSFR 579 395
SHIFT N-BITS LEFT NASL 580 397
DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS LEFT NSLL 582 400
SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT NASR 581 403
DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS NSRL 583 405
RIGHT
360
3-9-1 SHIFT REGISTER: SFT(010)

Purpose Operates a shift register.
Ladder Symbol
Data input SFT(010)
Shift input St St: Starting word
Reset input E E: End word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SFT(010)

Area St E
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
361
Description When the execution condition on the shift input changes from OFF to ON, all
the data from St to E is shifted to the left by one bit (from the rightmost bit to
the leftmost bit), and the ON/OFF status of the data input is placed in the
rightmost bit.
E St+1, St+2, ... St
Lost
Status of data input
for each shift input
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the indirect IR address for St and E is not in the CIO,
AR, HR, or WR data areas.
Precautions The results will not be predictable if two SFT(010) instructions are used with
overlapping shift registers. All words in the range ST to E must be used in only
one SFT(010) instruction.
The bit data shifted out of the shift register is discarded.
When the reset input turns ON, all bits in the shift register from the rightmost
designated word (St) to the leftmost designated word (E) will be reset (i.e., set
to 0). The reset input takes priority over other inputs.
St must be less than or equal to E, but even when St is set to greater than E
an error will not occur and one word of data in St will be shifted.
When St and E are designated indirectly using index registers and the actual
addresses in I/O memory are not within memory areas for data, an error will
occur and the Error Flag will turn ON.
Examples Shift Register Exceeding 16 Bits
The following example shows a 48-bit shift register using words CIO 0128 to
CIO 0130. A 1-s clock pulse is used so that the execution condition produced
by CIO 000005 is shifted into a 3-word register between CIO 012800 and
CIO 013015 every second.
Data input
E: CIO 0130 St+1: CIO 0129 St: CIO 0128 Contents of
CIO 000005
Shift input Lost
(1-s clock)
Reset
3-9-2 REVERSIBLE SHIFT REGISTER: SFTR(084)

Purpose Creates a shift register that shifts data to either the right or the left.
362
Ladder Symbol
SFTR(084)
C C: Control word
E E: End word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SFTR(084)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SFTR(084)

OK OK OK OK
15 14 13 12
Shift direction
1 (ON): Left
0 (OFF): Right
Data input
Shift input
Reset
Area C St E
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
363
Area C St E
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description When the execution condition of the shift input bit (bit 14 of C) changes to ON,
all the data from St to E is moved in the designated shift direction (designated
by bit 12 of C) by 1 bit, and the ON/OFF status of the data input is placed in
the rightmost or leftmost bit. The bit data shifted out of the shift register is
placed in the Carry Flag (CY).
E St Data input
Data input E St Shift direction
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when St is greater than E.
Carry Flag CY ON when 1 is shifted into it.
OFF when 0 is shifted into it.
OFF when reset is set to 1.
Precautions The above shift operations are applicable when the reset bit (bit 15 of C) is set
to OFF.
When reset (bit 15 of C) turns ON all bits in the shift register, from St to E will
be reset (i.e., set to 0).
When St is greater than E, an error will be generated and the Error Flag will
turn ON.
Examples Shifting Data

If shift input CIO 030014 goes ON when CIO 000000 is ON, and the reset bit
CIO 030015 is OFF, words CIO 0100 through CIO 0102 will shift one bit in the
direction designated by CIO 030012 (e.g., 1: Right) and the contents of input
bit CIO 030013 will be shifted into the rightmost bit, CIO 010000. The con-
tents of CIO 010215 will be shifted to the Carry Flag (CY).
C
St C: 0300
E
Shift direction
Shift input bit: 1

Reset input bit: 0
Data input:
CIO 030013
364
Resetting Data
If CIO 030014 is ON when CIO 000000 is ON, and the reset bit, CIO 030015,
is ON, words CIO 0100 through CIO 0102 and the Carry Flag will be reset to
OFF.
Controlling Data
Resetting Data
All bits from St to E and the Carry Flag are set to 0 and no other data can be
received when the reset input bit (bit 15 of C) is ON.
Shifting Data Left (from Rightmost to Leftmost Bit)

When the shift input bit (bit 14 of C) is ON, the contents of the input bit (bit 13
of C) is shifted to bit 00 of the starting word, and each bit thereafter is shifted
one bit to the left. The status of bit 15 of the end word is shifted to the Carry
Flag.
Data
input
Shifting Data Right (from Leftmost to Rightmost Bit

When the shift input bit (bit 14 of C) is ON, the contents of the input bit (bit 13
of C) (I/O) is shifted to bit 15 on the end word, and each bit thereafter is
shifted one bit to the right. The status of bit 00 of the starting word is shifted to
the Carry Flag.
Data
input
3-9-3 ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT REGISTER: ASFT(017)

Purpose Shifts all non-zero word data within the specified word range either towards St
or toward E, replacing 0000Hex word data.
Ladder Symbol
ASFT(017)
C C: Control word
E E: End word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ASFT(017)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ASFT(017)

OK OK OK OK
365
15 14 13 12
Shift direction
0: Non-zero data shifted toward E
1: Non-zero data shifted toward St
Shift Enable Bit
0: Shift disabled
1: Shift enabled
Clear Bit
0: Data not reset
1: All data from St to E is reset
Area C St E
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description When the Shift Enable Bit (bit 14 of C) is ON, all of the words with non-zero
content within the range of words between St and E will be shifted one word in
the direction determined by the Shift Direction Bit (bit 13 of C) whenever the
word in the shift direction contains all zeros. If ASFT(017) is repeated suffi-
cient times, all all-zero words will be replaced by non-zero words. This will
result in all the data between St and E being divided into zero and non-zero
data.
366
St Shift direction
Convert Shift enabled

...
Clear
Convert
St
Non-zero data
...
Zero data
E
Note ASFT(017) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
CJ/NSJ Series PLC Programming Manual (W394) for details.
Flags
ON if the Communications Port Enabled Flag for the com-
munications port number specified as the Com Port num-
ber for Background Execution is OFF when background
processing is specified.
Precautions When the Clear Flag (bit 15 of C) goes ON, all bits in the shift register, from St
to E, will be reset (i.e., set to 0). The Clear Flag has priority over the Shift
Enable Bit (bit 14 of C).
When St is greater than E an error will be generated and the Error Flag will
turn ON.
Examples Shifting Data:

If the Shift Enable Bit, CIO 030014, goes ON when CIO 000000 is ON, all
words with non-zero data content from CIO 0100 through CIO 0109 will be
shifted in the direction designated by the Shift Direction Bit, CIO 030013 (e.g.,
1: Toward St) if the word to the left of the non-zero data is all zeros.
367
C
St
E C: 0300
Shift direction
1: Non-zero data shifted toward E
Shift Enable Bit: 1
Clear
Before ASFT(017) is executed After one execution After two executions
St:
Non-zero data is
shifted toward St
E:
3-9-4 WORD SHIFT: WSFT(016)

Purpose Shifts data between St and E in word units.
Ladder Symbol
WSFT(016)
S S: Source word
E E: End word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition WSFT(016)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @WSFT(016)

OK OK OK OK
Area S St E
368
Area S St E
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description WSFT(016) shifts data from St to E in word units and the data from the source
word S is places into St. The contents of E is lost.
E St
Lost
Flags
Precautions When St is greater than E, an error will be generated and the Error Flag will
turn ON.
Note When large amounts of data are shifted, the instruction execution time is quite
long. Be sure that the power is not cut while WSFT(016) is being executed,
causing the shift operation to stop halfway through.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, data from CIO 0100 through CIO 0102 will be
shifted one word toward E. The contents of CIO 0300 will be stored in
CIO 0100 and the contents of CIO 0102 will be lost.
St
E
S: CIO 0300
E: CIO 0100 St: CIO 0101 St: CIO 0102

Lost
369
3-9-5 ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT: ASL(025)

Purpose Shifts the contents of Wd one bit to the left.
Ladder Symbol
ASL(025)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ASL(025)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ASL(025)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ASL(025) shifts the contents of Wd one bit to the left (from rightmost bit to left-
most bit). “0” is placed in the rightmost bit and the data from the leftmost bit is
shifted into the Carry Flag (CY).
15 0
370
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON when the shift result is 0.
Carry Flag CY ON when 1 is shifted into the Carry Flag (CY).
Negative Flag N ON when the leftmost bit is 1 as a result of the shift.
Precautions When ASL(025) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the shift the contents of Wd is zero, the Equals Flag will turn
ON.
If as a result of the shift the contents of the leftmost bit of Wd is 1, the Nega-
tive Flag will turn ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, CIO 0100 will be shifted one bit to the left. “0” will
be placed in CIO 010000 and the contents of CIO 010115 will be shifted to the
Carry Flag (CY).
Wd
3-9-6 DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT: ASLL(570)

Purpose Shifts the contents of Wd and Wd +1 one bit to the left.
Ladder Symbol
ASLL(570)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ASLL(570)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ASLL(570)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
371
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ASLL(570) shifts the contents of Wd and Wd +1 one bit to the left (from right-
most bit to leftmost bit). “0” is placed in the rightmost bit of Wd and the con-
tents of the leftmost bit of Wd and Wd +1 are shifted into the Carry Flag (CY).
Wd+1 Wd
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When ASLL(570) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the shift the contents of Wd and Wd +1 are zero, the Equals
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the shift the contents of the leftmost bit of Wd +1 is 1, the Neg-
ative Flag will turn ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, word CIO 0100 and CIO 0101 will shift one bit to
the left. “0” is placed into CIO 010000 and the contents of CIO 010015 will be
shifted to the Carry Flag (CY).
372
Wd
3-9-7 ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT: ASR(026)

Purpose Shifts the contents of Wd one bit to the right.
Ladder Symbol
ASR(026)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ASR(026)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ASR(026)
OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
373
Area Wd
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ASR(026) shifts the contents of Wd one bit to the right (from leftmost bit to
rightmost bit). “0” will be placed in the leftmost bit and the contents of the
rightmost bit will be shifted into the Carry Flag (CY).
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Negative Flag N OFF
Precautions When ASR(026) is executed, the Error Flag and the Negative Flag will turn
OFF.
ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, word CIO 0100 will shift one bit to the right. “0” will
be placed in CIO 010015 and the contents of CIO 010000 will be shifted to the
Carry Flag (CY).
Wd
3-9-8 DOUBLE SHIFT RIGHT: ASRL(571)

Purpose Shifts the contents of Wd and Wd +1 one bit to the right.
Ladder Symbol
ASRL(571)
Wd Wd: Word
374
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ASRL(571)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ASRL(571)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ASRL(571) shifts the contents of Wd and Wd +1 one bit to the right (from left-
most bit to rightmost bit). “0” will be placed in the leftmost bit of Wd +1 and the
contents of the rightmost bit of Wd will be shifted into the Carry Flag (CY).
Wd+1 Wd
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
375

Negative Flag N OFF
Precautions When ASRL (571) is executed, the Error Flag and the Negative Flag will turn
OFF.
Flag will turn ON.
the right. “0” will be placed into CIO 010115 and the contents of CIO 010000
will be shifted to the Carry Flag (CY).
Wd
3-9-9 ROTATE LEFT: ROL(027)

Purpose Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the left including the Carry Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
ROL(027)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ROL(027)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ROL(027)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
376
Area Wd
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ROL(027) shifts all bits of Wd including the Carry Flag (CY) to the left (from
rightmost bit to leftmost bit).
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When ROL(027) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
ON.
Note It is possible to set the Carry Flag contents to 1 or 0 immediately before exe-
cuting this instruction, by using the Set Carry (STC(040)) or Clear Carry
(CLC(041)) instructions.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, word CIO 0100 and the Carry Flag (CY) will shift
one bit to the left. The contents of CIO 010015 will be shifted to the Carry Flag
(CY) and the Carry Flag contents will be shifted to CIO 010000.
377
Wd
Wd: CIO 0100
Instruction executed once
3-9-10 DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT: ROLL(572)

Purpose Shifts all Wd and Wd +1 bits one bit to the left including the Carry Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
ROLL(572)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ROLL(572)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ROLL(572)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
378
Area Wd
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ROLL(572) shifts all bits of Wd and Wd +1 including the Carry Flag (CY) to
the left (from rightmost bit to leftmost bit).
Wd+1 Wd
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When ROLL(572) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the shift the contents of the leftmost bit of Wd + 1 is 1, the Neg-
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, word CIO 0100, CIO 0101 and the Carry Flag (CY)
will shift one bit to the left. The contents of CIO 010015 will be shifted to the
Carry Flag (CY) and the Carry Flag contents will be shifted to CIO 010000.
Wd
Wd+1: CIO 0101 Wd: CIO 0100
379
3-9-11 ROTATE RIGHT: ROR(028)

Purpose Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the right including the Carry Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
ROR(028)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ROR(028)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ROR(028)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ROR(028) shifts all bits of Wd including the Carry Flag (CY) to the right (from
leftmost bit to rightmost bit).
380
Wd
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When ROR(028) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, word CIO 0100 and the Carry Flag (CY) will shift
one bit to the right. The contents of CIO 010000 will be shifted to the Carry
Flag (CY) and the Carry Flag contents will be shifted to CIO 010015.
Wd
Wd: CIO 0100
3-9-12 DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT: RORL(573)

Purpose Shifts all Wd and Wd +1 bits one bit to the right including the Carry Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
RORL(573)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RORL(573)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RORL(573)
381

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description RORL(573) shifts all bits of Wd and Wd +1 including the Carry Flag (CY) to
the right (from leftmost bit to rightmost bit).
Wd+1 Wd
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When RORL(573) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
Flag will turn ON.
382
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, word CIO 0100, CIO 0101 and the Carry Flag (CY)
will shift one bit to the right. The contents of CIO 010000 will be shifted to the
Carry Flag (CY) and the Carry Flag contents will be shifted to CIO 010115.
Wd
Wd+1: CIO 0101 Wd: CIO 0100
3-9-13 ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT CARRY: RLNC(574)

Purpose Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the left not including the Carry Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
RLNC(574)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RLNC(574)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RLNC(574)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
383
Area Wd
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description RLNC(574) shifts all bits of Wd to the left (from rightmost bit to leftmost bit).
The contents of the leftmost bit of Wd shifts to the rightmost bit and to the
Carry Flag (CY).
Wd
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When RLNC(574) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, word CIO 0100 will shift one bit to the left (exclud-
ing the Carry Flag (CY)). The contents of CIO 010015 will be shifted to
CIO 010000.
384
Wd
Wd: CIO 0100
3-9-14 DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT CARRY: RLNL(576)

Purpose Shifts all Wd and Wd +1 bits one bit to the left not including the Carry Flag
(CY).
Ladder Symbol
RLNL(576)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RLNL(576)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RLNL(576)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
385
Area Wd
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description RLNL(576) shifts all bits of Wd and Wd +1 to the left (from rightmost bit to left-
most bit). The contents of the leftmost bit of Wd +1 is shifted to the rightmost
bit of Wd, and to the Carry Flag (CY).
Wd+1 Wd
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When RLNL(576) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
Flag will turn ON.
the left (excluding the Carry Flag (CY)). The contents of CIO 010115 will be
shifted to CIO 010000.
Wd
Wd+1: CIO 0101 Wd: CIO 0100
386
3-9-15 ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT CARRY: RRNC(575)

Purpose Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the right not including the Carry Flag (CY). The
contents of the rightmost bit of Wd shifts to the leftmost bit and to the Carry
Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
RRNC(575)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RRNC(575)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RRNC(575)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description RRNC(575) shifts all bits of Wd to the right (from leftmost bit to rightmost bit)
not including the Carry Flag (CY).
387
Wd
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When RRNC(575) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, word CIO 0100 will shift one bit to the right (exclud-
ing the Carry Flag (CY)). The contents of CIO 010000 will be shifted to
CIO 010015.
Wd
Wd: CIO 0100

CY
3-9-16 DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT CARRY: RRNL(577)

Purpose Shifts all Wd and Wd +1 bits one bit to the right not including the Carry Flag
(CY). The contents of the rightmost bit of Wd +1 is shifted to the leftmost bit of
Wd, and to the Carry Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
RRNL(577)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RRNL(577)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RRNL(577)
388

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description RRNL(577) shifts all bits of Wd and Wd +1 to the right (from leftmost bit to
rightmost bit) not including the Carry Flag (CY).
Wd+1 Wd
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When RRNL(577) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
Flag will turn ON.
389
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, words CIO 0100 and CIO 0101 will shift one bit to
the right, (excluding the Carry Flag (CY)). The contents of CIO 010000 will be
shifted to CIO 010115.
Wd
Wd+1: CIO 0101 Wd: CIO 0100
3-9-17 ONE DIGIT SHIFT LEFT: SLD(074)

Purpose Shifts data by one digit (4 bits) to the left.
Ladder Symbol
SLD(074)
E E: End word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SLD(074)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SLD(074)

OK OK OK OK
Area St E
390
Area St E
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SLD(074) shifts data between St and E by one digit (4 bits) to the left. “0” is
placed in the rightmost digit (bits 3 to 0 of St), and the content of the leftmost
digit (bits 15 to 12 of E) is lost.
E S t
Lost
Flags
turn ON.
long. Be sure that the power is not cut while SLD(074) is being executed,
causing the shift operation to stop halfway through.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, words CIO 0100 through CIO 0102 will shift by one
digit (4 bits) to the left. A zero will be placed in bits 0 to 3 of word CIO 0100
and the contents of bits 12 to 15 of CIO 0102 will be lost.
St
E
E: CIO 0102 St+1: CIO 0101 St: CIO 0100
Lost
391
3-9-18 ONE DIGIT SHIFT RIGHT: SRD(075)

Purpose Shifts data by one digit (4 bits) to the right.
Ladder Symbol
SRD(075)
E E: End word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SRD(075)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SRD(075)

OK OK OK OK
Area St E
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
392
Description SRD(075) shifts data between St and E by one digit (4 bits) to the right. “0” is
placed in the leftmost digit (bits 15 to 12 of E), and the content of the rightmost
digit (bits 3 to 0 of St) is lost.
E S t
Lost
Flags
turn ON.
When SRD(075) is executed, the Equals Flag and Negative Flag will turn
OFF.
long. Always take care that the power is not cut while SRD(075) is being exe-
cuted, causing the shift operation to stop halfway through.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, words CIO 0100 through CIO 0102 will shift by one
digit (4 bits) to the right. A zero will be placed in bits 12 to 15 of CIO 0102 and
the contents of bits 0 to 3 of word CIO 0100 will be lost.
St
E
E: CIO 0102 St+1: CIO 0101 St: CIO 0100
Lost
3-9-19 SHIFT N-BIT DATA LEFT: NSFL(578)

Purpose Shifts the specified number of bits to the left.
Ladder Symbol
NSFL(578)
D D: Beginning word for shift
C C: Beginning bit
N N: Shift data length
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NSFL(578)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @NSFL(578)

OK OK OK OK
Operands C: 0000 to 000F hex (0 to 15)

N: 0000 to FFFF hex (0 to 65535)
393
Note All words in the shift register must be in the same area.
Area D C N
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
&15 &65535
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description NSFL(578) shifts the specified number of bits by the shift data length (N) from
the beginning bit (C) in the rightmost word, as designated by D one bit to the
left (towards the leftmost word and the leftmost bit). “0” is place into the begin-
ning bit and the contents of the leftmost bit in the shift area are shifted to the
Carry Flag (CY).
Shifts one bit to the left

N−1 bit
N−1 bit
394
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when C data is not between 0000 and 000F hex.
Precautions When the shift data length (N) is 0, the contents of the beginning bit will be
copied to the Carry Flag (CY), and its contents will not be changed.
Only the bits shifted into rightmost word in the shift area (i.e. leftmost word
data) will be changed.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, all bits from the beginning bit 3 to the shift data
length (B hex) will be shifted one bit to the left (from the rightmost bit to the
leftmost bit). “0” will be placed into bit 3 of CIO 0100. The contents of the left-
most bit in the shift area (bit 13 of CIO 0100) are copied into the Carry Flag
(CY).
D
C &3
N &11
C: Starting from bit 3

N: 11 bits
D: CIO 0100
D: CIO 0100
0
3-9-20 SHIFT N-BIT DATA RIGHT: NSFR(579)

Purpose Shifts the specified number of bits to the right.
Ladder Symbol
NSFR(579)
D D: Beginning word for shift
C C: Beginning bit
N N: Shift data length
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NSFR(579)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @NSFR(579)

OK OK OK OK
395
Operands C: 0000 to 000F hex (0 to 15)

N: 0000 to FFFF hex (0 to 65535)
Note All words in the shift register must be in the same area.
Area D C N
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
&15 &65535
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description NSFR(579) shifts the specified number of bits by the shift data length (N) from
the beginning bit (C) in the rightmost word as designated by D one bit to the
right (towards the rightmost word and the rightmost bit). “0” will be placed into
the beginning bit and the contents of the rightmost bit in the shift area will be
shifted to the Carry Flag (CY).
Shifts one bit to the right

N-1 bit
N-1 bit
396
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when C data is not between 0000 and 000F hex.
Precautions When the shift data length (N) is 0, the contents of the beginning bit will be
copied to the Carry Flag (CY), and its contents will not be changed.
Only the bits shifted into rightmost word in the shift area (i.e. leftmost word
data) will be changed.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, all bits from the beginning bit 2 to end of the shift
data length 11 bits (B hex), will be shifted one bit to the right, (from the left-
most bit to the rightmost bit). “0” is shifted into bit 12 of CIO 0100. The con-
tents of the rightmost bit in the shift area (bit 2 of CIO 0100) are copied into
the Carry Flag (CY).
&2
&11
C: Starting from bit 2

N: 11 bits
3-9-21 SHIFT N-BITS LEFT: NASL(580)

Purpose Shifts the specified 16 bits of word data to the left by the specified number of
bits.
Ladder Symbol
NASL(580)
D D: Shift word
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NASL(580)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @NASL(580)

OK OK OK OK
397

15 12 11 8 7 0
C
0
No. of bits to shift: 00 to 10 Hex
Always 0.
Data shifted into register
0 Hex: 0 shifted in
8 Hex: Contents of rightmost bit shifted in
Area D C
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- Specified values only
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description NASL(580) shifts D (the shift word) by the specified number of binary bits
(specified in C) to the left (from the rightmost bit to the leftmost bit). Either
zeros or the value of the rightmost bit will be placed into the specified number
of bits of the shift word starting from the rightmost bit.
398
Shift n-bits
Contents of "a" or "0" shifted in
Lost
N bits
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when the control word C (the number of bits to shift) is
not within range.
Precautions For any bits which are shifted outside the specified word, the contents of the
last bit is shifted to the Carry Flag (CY), and all other data is lost.
When the number of bits to shift (specified in C) is “0,” the data will not be
shifted. The appropriate flags will turn ON and OFF, however, according to
data in the specified word.
When the contents of the control word C is out of range, an error will be gen-
erated and the Error Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the shift the contents of D is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag will
turn ON.
If as a result of the shift the contents of the leftmost bit of D is 1, the Negative
Flag will turn ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, The contents of CIO 0100 is shifted 10 bits to the
left (from the rightmost bit to the leftmost bit). The number of bits to shift is
specified in bits 0 to 7 of word CIO 0300 (control data). The contents of bit 0 of
CIO 0100 is copied into bits from which data was shifted and the contents of
the rightmost bit which was shifted out of range is shifted into the Carry Flag
(CY). All other data is lost.
399
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C 8 0 0 A
No. of bits to shift: 10 bits (0A Hex)
Always 0.
Lost
Rightmost bit
No. of bits to shift: 10 bits

(Contents of the rightmost
bit is inserted.)
3-9-22 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS LEFT: NSLL(582)

Purpose Shifts the specified 32 bits of word data to the left by the specified number of
bits.
Ladder Symbol
NSLL(582)
D D: Shift word
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NSLL(582)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @NSLL(582)

OK OK OK OK
400
15 12 11 8 7 0
C
0
Always 0.
0 Hex: 0 shifted in
Area D C
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6142 CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to D32767
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_32766 En_00000 to En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description NSLL(582) shifts D and D+1 (the shift words) by the specified number of
binary bits (specified in C) to the left (from the rightmost bit to the leftmost bit).
Either zeros or the value of the rightmost bit will be placed into the specified
number of bits of the shift word starting from the rightmost bit.
Shift n-bits
Contents of "a" or "0" shifted in
Lost
N bits
401
Flags
not within range.
When the contents of the control word C are out of range, an error will be gen-
If as a result of the shift the contents of D is 0000, the Equals Flag will turn
ON.
If as a result of the shift the contents of the leftmost bit of D, D +1 is 1, the
Negative Flag will turn ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, CIO 0100 and CIO 0101 will be shifted to the left
(from the rightmost bit to the leftmost bit) by 10 bits. The number of bits to shift
is specified in bits 0 to 7 of word CIO 0300 (control data). The contents of bit 0
of CIO 0100 is copied into bits from which data was shifted and the contents
of the rightmost bit which was shifted out of range is shifted into the Carry
Flag (CY). All other data is lost.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C
8 0 0 A
Always 0.
8 Hex: Contents of right-
most bit shifted in
402
Lost
Rightmost bit a
0100
0100

(Contents of the rightmost
bit is shifted in)
3-9-23 SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT: NASR(581)

Purpose Shifts the specified 16 bits of word data to the right by the specified number of
bits.
Ladder Symbol
NASR(581)
D D: Shift word
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NASR(581)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @NASR(581)

OK OK OK OK

15 12 11 8 7 0
C 0
Always 0.
0 Hex: 0 shifted in
Area D C
A448 to A959
403
Area D C
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description NASR(581) shifts D (the shift word) by the specified number of binary bits
(specified in C) to the right (from the rightmost bit to the leftmost bit). Either
zeros or the value of the rightmost bit will be placed into the specified number
of bits of the shift word starting from the rightmost bit.
Contents of "a" or
"0" shifted in
Lost
N bits
Flags
not within range.
last bit is shifted to the Carry Flag (CY), and all other data is discarded.
404
If as a result of the shift the contents of D is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag will
turn ON.
If as a result of the shift the contents of the leftmost bit of D is 1, the Negative
Flag will turn ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, CIO 0100 will be shifted 10 bits to the right (from
the leftmost bit to the rightmost bit). The number of bits to shift is specified in
bits 0 to 7 of word CIO 0300. The contents of bit 15 of CIO 0100 is copied into
the bits from which data was shifted and the contents of the leftmost bit of
data which was shifted out of range, is shifted into the Carry Flag (CY). All
other data is lost.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C
8 0 0 A
Always 0.
8 Hex: Contents of leftmost bit shifted in
Leftmost bit
Lost

(Contents of the leftmost bit is
inserted.)
3-9-24 DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT: NSRL(583)

Purpose Shifts the specified 32 bits of word data to the right by the specified number of
bits.
Ladder Symbol
NSRL(583)
D D: Shift word
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NSRL(583)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @NSRL(583)
405

OK OK OK OK

15 12 11 8 7 0
C 0
Always 0.
0 Hex: 0 shifted in
Area D C
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers -2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to -2048 to +2047 ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description NSRL(583) shifts D and D+1 (the shift words) by the specified number of
binary bits (specified in C) to the right (from the leftmost bit to the rightmost
bit). Either zeros or the value of the rightmost bit will be placed into the speci-
fied number of bits of the shift word starting from the rightmost bit.
406
Shift n-bits
Contents of "a" or
"0" shifted in
Lost
N bits
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when the control word C (the number of bits to shift)
is not within range.
shifted. The appropriate flags will turn ON or OFF, however, according to data
in the specified word.
If as a result of the shift the contents of D +1 is 00000000 hex, the Equals Flag
will turn ON.
If as a result of the shift the contents of the leftmost bit of D +1 is 1, the Nega-
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, CIO 0100 and CIO 0101 will be shifted 10 bits to
the right (from the leftmost bit to the rightmost bit). The number of bits to shift
is specified in bits 0 to 7 of word CIO 0300 (control data). The contents of bit
15 of CIO will be copied into the bits from which data was shifted and the con-
tents of the leftmost bit of data which was shifted out of range will be shifted
into the Carry Flag (CY). All other data is lost.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C 8 0 0 A
Always 0.
8 Hex: Contents of leftmost bit shifted in
407
Leftmost bit Lost
CY
1

(Contents of the leftmost
bit is inserted.)
408
Increment/Decrement Instructions Section 3-10
3-10 Increment/Decrement Instructions

3-10-1 INCREMENT BINARY: ++(590)
Purpose Increments the 4-digit hexadecimal content of the specified word by 1.
Ladder Symbol
++(590)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ++(590)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @++(590)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The ++(590) instruction adds 1 to the binary content of Wd. The specified
word will be incremented by 1 every cycle as long as the execution condition
of ++(590) is ON. When the up-differentiated variation of this instruction
409
(@++(590)) is used, the specified word is incremented only when the execu-
tion condition has gone from OFF to ON.
Wd Wd
The Equals Flag will be turned ON if the result is 0000, the Carry Flag will be
turned ON when a digit changes from F to 0, and the Negative Flag will be
turned ON when bit 15 of Wd is ON in the result.
Both the Equals Flag and the Carry Flag will be turned ON when the content
of Wd changes from FFFF to 0000.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals = ON if the content of Wd is 0000 after execution.
Flag OFF in all other cases.
Carry Flag CY ON if a digit in Wd went from F to 0 during execution.
Negative N ON if bit 15 of Wd is ON after execution.
Examples Operation of ++(590)

In the following example, the content of D00100 will be incremented by 1
every cycle as long as CIO 000000 is ON.
Incremented every cycle

while CIO 000000 is ON.
Wd: D00100 Wd: D00100
0 0 1 9 0 0 1 A
: Execution of ++(590)
Increment Increment Increment Increment
Operation of @++(590)
The up-differentiated variation is used in the following example, so the content
of D00100 will be incremented by 1 only when CIO 000000 has gone from
OFF to ON.
@++ Incremented only for

up-differentiation.
Wd: D00100 Wd: D00100
0 0 1 9 0 0 1 A
: Execution of @++(590)
Increment Increment
410
3-10-2 DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY: ++L(591)

Purpose Increments the 8-digit hexadecimal content of the specified words by 1.
Ladder Symbol
++L(591)
Wd Wd: First word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ++L(591)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @++L(591)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The ++L(591) instruction adds 1 to the 8-digit hexadecimal content of Wd+1
and Wd. The content of the specified words will be incremented by 1 every
cycle as long as the execution condition of ++L(591) is ON. When the up-dif-
ferentiated variation of this instruction (@++L(591)) is used, the content of the
411
specified words is incremented only when the execution condition has gone
from OFF to ON.
Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
The Equals Flag will be turned ON if the result is 0000 0000, the Carry Flag
will be turned ON when a digit changes from F to 0, and the Negative Flag will
be turned ON if bit 15 of Wd+1 is ON in the result.
of changes from FFFF FFFF to 0000 0000.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON if the result is 0000 0000 after execution.
Carry Flag CY ON if a digit in Wd+1 or Wd went from F to 0 during
execution.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of Wd+1 is ON after execution.
Examples Operation of ++L(591)

In the following example, the 8-digit hexadecimal content of D00101 and
D00100 will be incremented by 1 every cycle as long as CIO 000000 is ON.
Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100 Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100
: Execution of ++L(591)
Operation of @++L(591)
of D00101 and D00100 will be incremented by 1 only when CIO 000000 has
gone from OFF to ON.
@++L Incremented only for

up-differentiation.
Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100 Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100
: Execution of @++L(591)
Increment Increment
412
3-10-3 DECREMENT BINARY: – –(592)

Purpose Decrements the 4-digit hexadecimal content of the specified word by 1.
Ladder Symbol
− −(592)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition – – (592)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @– – (592)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The – –(592) instruction subtracts 1 from the binary content of Wd. The spec-
ified word will be decremented by 1 every cycle as long as the execution con-
dition of – –(592) is ON. When the up-differentiated variation of this instruction
(@– –(592)) is used, the specified word is decremented only when the execu-
Wd Wd
413
The Equals Flag will be turned ON if the result is 0000, the Carry Flag will be
turned ON when a digit changes from 0 to F, and the Negative Flag will be
turned ON if bit 15 of Wd is ON in the result.
Both the Carry Flag and the Negative Flag will be turned ON when the content
of Wd changes from 0000 to FFFF.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON if the content of Wd is 0000 after execution.
Carry Flag CY ON if a digit in Wd went from 0 to F during execution.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of Wd is ON after execution.
Examples Operation of – –(592)

In the following example, the content of D00100 will be decremented by 1
Decremented every cycle

Wd: D00100 Wd: D00100
−1
: Execution of − −(592)
Decrement Decrement Decrement Decrement
Operation of @– –(592)
of D00100 will be decremented by 1 only when CIO 000000 has gone from
OFF to ON.
@− − Decremented only
for up-differentiation.
Wd: D00100 Wd: D00100
−1
: Execution of @− −(592)
Decrement Decrement
414
3-10-4 DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY: – –L(593)

Purpose Decrements the 8-digit hexadecimal content of the specified words by 1.
Ladder Symbol
− −L(593)
Wd Wd: First word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition – –L(593)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @– –L(593)
Executed Once for Downward Not supported
Differentiation

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The – –L(593) instruction subtracts 1 from the 8-digit hexadecimal content of
Wd+1 and Wd. The content of the specified words will be decremented by 1
every cycle as long as the execution condition of – –L(593) is ON. When the
up-differentiated variation of this instruction (@– –L(593)) is used, the content
415
of the specified words is decremented only when the execution condition has
Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
The Equals Flag will be turned ON if the result is 0000 0000, the Carry Flag
will be turned ON when a digit changes from 0 to F, and the Negative Flag will
be turned ON if bit 15 of Wd+1 is ON in the result.
Both the Carry Flag and the Negative Flag will be turned ON when the content
changes from 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Carry Flag CY ON if a digit in Wd+1 or Wd went from 0 to F during exe-
cution.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of Wd+1 is ON after execution.
Examples Operation of – –L(593)

In the following example, the 8-digit hexadecimal content of D00101 and
D00100 will be decremented by 1 every cycle as long as CIO 000000 is ON.
Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100 Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100

−1
: Execution of − −L(593)
Operation of @– –L(593)
of D00101 and D00100 will be decremented by 1 only when CIO 000000 has
Decremented only
@ − −L Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100 Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100
−1
: Execution of @ − −L(593)
Decrement Decrement
416
3-10-5 INCREMENT BCD: ++B(594)

Purpose Increments the 4-digit BCD content of the specified word by 1.
Ladder Symbol
++B(594)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ++B(594)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @++B(594)
Differentiation

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n= 0 to C)
addresses in BCD @ E00000 to @ E32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The ++B(594) instruction adds 1 to the BCD content of Wd. The specified
word will be incremented by 1 every cycle as long as the execution condition
of ++B(594) is ON. When the up-differentiated variation of this instruction
(@++B(594)) is used, the specified word is incremented only when the execu-
417
Wd Wd
The Equals Flag will be turned ON if the result is 0000 and the Carry Flag will
be turned ON when a digit changes from 9 to 0.
of Wd changes from 9999 to 0000.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the content of Wd is not BCD.
Carry Flag CY ON if a digit in Wd went from 9 to 0 during execution.
Precautions The content of Wd must be BCD. If it is not BCD, an error will occur and the
Error Flag will be turned ON.
Examples Operation of ++B(594)
In the following example, the BCD content of D00100 will be incremented by 1
Wd: D00100 Wd: D00100
: Execution of ++B(594)
Operation of @++B(594)
of D00100 will be incremented by 1 only when CIO 000000 has gone from
OFF to ON.
Incremented only for

@++B up-differentiation.
Wd: D00100 Wd: D00100
: Execution of @++B(594)
Increment Increment
418
3-10-6 DOUBLE INCREMENT BCD: ++BL(595)

Purpose Increments the 8-digit BCD content of the specified words by 1.
Ladder Symbol
++BL(595)
Wd Wd: First word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ++BL(595)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @++BL(595)
Differentiation

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The ++BL(595) instruction adds 1 to the 8-digit BCD content of Wd+1 and
Wd. The content of the specified words will be incremented by 1 every cycle
as long as the execution condition of ++BL(595) is ON. When the up-differen-
tiated variation of this instruction (@++BL(595)) is used, the content of the
419
specified words is incremented only when the execution condition has gone
from OFF to ON.
Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
The Equals Flag will be turned ON if the result is 0000 0000 and the Carry
Flag will be turned ON when a digit changes from 9 to 0.
of changes from 9999 9999 to 0000 0000.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the content of Wd+1 and Wd is not BCD.
Carry Flag CY ON if a digit in Wd+1 or Wd went from 9 to 0 during exe-
cution.
Precautions The content of Wd+1 and Wd must be BCD. If it is not BCD, an error will occur
and the Error Flag will be turned ON.
Examples Operation of ++BL(595)

In the following example, the 8-digit BCD content of D00101 and D00100 will
be incremented by 1 every cycle as long as CIO 000000 is ON.
Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100 Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100
: Execution of ++BL(595)
Operation of @++BL(595)
The up-differentiated variation is used in the following example, so the BCD
content of D00101 and D00100 will be incremented by 1 only when
CIO 000000 has gone from OFF to ON.
Incremented only for
up-differentiation.
@++BL
Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100 Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100
: Execution of @++BL(595)
Increment Increment
420
3-10-7 DECREMENT BCD: – –B(596)

Purpose Decrements the 4-digit BCD content of the specified word by 1.
Ladder Symbol
− −B(596)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition – –B(596)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @– –B(596)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The – –B(596) instruction subtracts 1 from the BCD content of Wd. The spec-
ified word will be decremented by 1 every cycle as long as the execution con-
dition of – –B(596) is ON. When the up-differentiated variation of this
instruction (@– –B(596)) is used, the specified word is decremented only
when the execution condition has gone from OFF to ON.
421
Wd −1 Wd
The Equals Flag will be turned ON if the result is 0000 and the Carry Flag will
be turned ON when a digit changes from 0 to 9.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the content of Wd is not BCD.
Carry Flag CY ON if a digit in Wd went from 0 to 9 during execution.
Precautions The content of Wd must be BCD. If it is not BCD, an error will occur and the
Examples Operation of – –B(596)

In the following example, the BCD content of D00100 will be decremented by
1 every cycle as long as CIO 000000 is ON.
Wd: D00100 Wd: D00100
−1
: Execution of − − B(596)
Operation of @– –B(596)
content of D00100 will be decremented by 1 only when CIO 000000 has gone
from OFF to ON.
@ − −B Decremented only
Wd: D00100 Wd: D00100
−1
: Execution of @− −B(596)
Decrement Decrement
422
3-10-8 DOUBLE DECREMENT BCD: – –BL(597)

Purpose Decrements the 8-digit BCD content of the specified words by 1.
Ladder Symbol
− −BL(597)
Wd Wd: First word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition – –BL(597)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @– –BL(597)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The – –BL(597) instruction subtracts 1 from the 8-digit BCD content of Wd+1
and Wd. The content of the specified words will be decremented by 1 every
cycle as long as the execution condition of – –BL(597) is ON. When the up-
differentiated variation of this instruction (@– –BL(597)) is used, the content
423
of the specified words is decremented only when the execution condition has
Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
The Equals Flag will be turned ON if the result is 0000 0000 and the Carry
Flag will be turned ON when a digit changes from 0 to 9.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the content of Wd+1 and Wd is not BCD.
Carry Flag CY ON if a digit in Wd+1 or Wd went from 0 to 9 during exe-
cution.
Precautions The content of Wd+1 and Wd must be BCD. If it is not BCD, an error will occur
and the Error Flag will be turned ON.
Examples Operation of – –BL(597)

In the following example, the 8-digit BCD content of D00101 and D00100 will
be decremented by 1 every cycle as long as CIO 000000 is ON.

Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100 Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100
−1
: Execution of − −BL(597)
Operation of @– –BL(597)
content of D00101 and D00100 will be decremented by 1 only when
CIO 000000 has gone from OFF to ON.
Decremented only
@− −BL Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100 Wd+1: D00101 Wd: D00100
−1
: Execution of @− −BL(597)
Decrement Decrement
424
Symbol Math Instructions Section 3-11
3-11 Symbol Math Instructions

This section describes the Symbol Math Instructions, which perform arith-
metic operations on BCD or binary data.
SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH- + 400 426
OUT CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY +L 401 428
ADD WITHOUT CARRY
SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH +C 402 430
CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY +CL 403 432
ADD WITH CARRY
BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY +B 404 434
DOUBLE BCD ADD WITHOUT +BL 405 435
CARRY
BCD ADD WITH CARRY +BC 406 437
DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH +BCL 407 439
CARRY
SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT – 410 440
WITHOUT CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY –L 411 442
SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY
SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT –C 412 446
WITH CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY –CL 413 448
SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT –B 414 451
CARRY
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT –BL 415 452
WITHOUT CARRY
BCD SUBTRACT WITH –BC 416 456
CARRY
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT –BCL 417 457
WITH CARRY
SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY * 420 459
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY *L 421 461
MULTIPLY
UNSIGNED BINARY MULTI- *U 422 463
PLY
DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY *UL 423 465
MULTIPLY
BCD MULTIPLY *B 424 467
DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY *BL 425 469
SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE / 430 471
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY /L 431 473
DIVIDE
UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE /U 432 475
DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY /UL 433 477
DIVIDE
BCD DIVIDE /B 434 479
DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE /BL 435 481
425
3-11-1 SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +(400)

Purpose Adds 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
+(400)
Au Au: Augend word
Ad Ad: Addend word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +(400)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+(400)

OK OK OK OK
Area Au Ad R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
426
Description +(400) adds the binary values in Au and Ad and outputs the result to R.
Au (Signed binary)
Ad (Signed binary)
+
CY will turn
ON when there CY R (Signed binary)
is a carry.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON when the result is 0.
Carry Flag CY ON when the addition results in a carry.
Overflow Flag OF ON when the result of adding two positive numbers is in
the range 8000 to FFFF hex.
Underflow Flag UF ON when the result of adding two negative numbers is in
the range 0000 to 7FFF hex.
Negative Flag N ON when the leftmost bit of the result is 1.
Precautions When +(400) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the addition, the content of R is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag will
turn ON.
If the addition results in a carry, the Carry Flag will turn ON.
If the result of adding two positive numbers is negative (in the range 8000 to
FFFF hex), the Overflow Flag will turn ON.
If the result of adding two negative numbers is positive (in the range 0000 to
7FFF hex), the Underflow Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the addition, the content of the leftmost bit of R is 1, the Nega-
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00100 and D00110 will
be added as 4-digit signed binary values and the result will be output to
D00120.
427
3-11-2 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +L(401)

Purpose Adds 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
+L(401)
Au Au: 1st augend word
Ad Ad: 1st addend word
R R: 1st result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +L(401)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+L(401)

OK OK OK OK
Area Au Ad R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
428
Description +L(401) adds the binary values in Au and Au+1 and Ad and Ad+1 and outputs
the result to R.
Au+1 Au (Signed binary)
Ad+1 Ad (Signed binary)

+
CY will turn
ON when there CY R+1 R (Signed binary)
is a carry.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Overflow Flag OF ON when the result of adding two positive numbers is in
the range 80000000 to FFFFFFFF hex.
Underflow Flag UF ON when the result of adding two negative numbers is in
the range 00000000 to 7FFFFFFF hex.
Precautions When +L(401) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the addition, the content of R, R+1 is 00000000 hex, the
Equals Flag will turn ON.
If the result of adding two positive numbers is negative (in the range
80000000 to FFFFFFFF hex), the Overflow Flag will turn ON.
If the result of adding two negative numbers is positive (in the range
00000000 to 7FFFFFFF hex), the Underflow Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the addition, the content of the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1, the
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, D00100 and D00110 and D00111 and D00110 will
be added as 8-digit signed binary values and the result will be output to
D00120 and D00120.
429
3-11-3 SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY: +C(402)

Purpose Adds 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants with the Carry
Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
+C(402)
Au Au: Augend word
Ad Ad: Addend word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +C(402)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+C(402)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Au Ad R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
430
Description +C(402) adds the binary values in Au, Ad, and CY and outputs the result to R.
Au (Signed binary)
Ad (Signed binary)
+ CY
CY will turn
is a carry.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON when the addition result is 0.
Overflow Flag OF ON when the addition result of adding two positive num-
bers and CY is in the range 8000 to FFFF hex.
Underflow Flag UF ON when the addition result of adding two negative num-
bers and CY is in the range 0000 to 7FFF hex.
Precautions When +C(402) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
turn ON.
If the result of adding two positive numbers and CY is negative (in the range
8000 to FFFF hex), the Overflow Flag will turn ON.
If the result of adding two negative numbers and CY is positive (in the range
0000 to 7FFF hex), the Underflow Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the addition, the content of the leftmost bit of R is 1, the Nega-
Note To clear the Carry Flag (CY), execute the Clear Carry (CLC(041)) instruction.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, D00100, D00110, and CY will be added as 4-digit
signed binary values and the result will be output to D00220.
431
3-11-4 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH CARRY: +CL(403)

Purpose Adds 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants with the Carry
Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
+CL(403)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +CL(403)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+CL(403)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Au Ad R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
432
Description +CL(403) adds the binary values in Au and Au+1, Ad and Ad+1, and CY and
outputs the result to R.
Au+1 Au (Signed binary)
Ad+1 Ad (Signed binary)
+ CY
CY will turn
ON when there (Signed binary)
CY R+1 R
is a carry.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Carry Flag CY ON when the results in a carry.
Overflow Flag OF ON when the result of adding two positive numbers and
CY is in the range 80000000 to FFFFFFFF hex.
Underflow Flag UF ON when the result of adding two negative numbers and
CY is in the range 00000000 to 7FFFFFFF hex.
Precautions When +CL(403) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the addition, the content of R, R+1 is 00000000 hex, the
If the result of adding two positive numbers and CY is negative (in the range
80000000 to FFFFFFFF hex), the Overflow Flag will turn ON.
If the result of adding two negative numbers and CY is positive (in the range
00000000 to 7FFFFFFF hex), the Underflow Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the addition, the content of the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1, the
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, D00201, D00200, D00211, D00210, and CY will be
added as 8-digit signed binary values, and the result will be output to D00221
and D00220.
433
3-11-5 BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +B(404)

Purpose Adds 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
+B(404)
Au Au: Augend word
Ad Ad: Addend word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +B(404)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+B(404)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Au Ad R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(BCD)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
434
Description +B(404) adds the BCD values in Au and Ad and outputs the result to R.
Au (BCD)
+ Ad (BCD)
CY will turn
ON when there CY R (BCD)
is a carry.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Au is not BCD.
ON when Ad is not BCD.
Precautions If Au or Ad is not BCD, an error is generated and the Error Flag will turn ON.
turn ON.
If an addition results in a carry, the Carry Flag will turn ON.
be added as 4-digit BCD values, and the result will be output to D00120.
3-11-6 DOUBLE BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY: +BL(405)

Purpose Adds 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
+BL(405)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +BL(405)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+BL(405)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
435
Area Au Ad R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #99999999 ---
(BCD)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description +BL(405) adds the BCD values in Au and Au+1 and Ad and Ad+1 and outputs
the result to R, R+1.
Au +1 Au (BCD)
Ad+1 Ad (BCD)
+
CY will turn
is a carry.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Au, Au +1 is not BCD.
ON when Ad, Ad +1 is not BCD.
436
Precautions If Au, Au +1 or Ad, Ad +1 are not BCD, an error is generated and the Error
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the addition, the content of R, R +1 is 00000000 hex, the
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00101 and D00100 and
D00111 and D00110 will be added as 8-digit BCD values, and the result will
be output to D00121 and D00120.
3-11-7 BCD ADD WITH CARRY: +BC(406)

Purpose Adds 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants with the Carry Flag
(CY).
Ladder Symbol
+BC(406)
Au Au: Augend word
Ad Ad: Addend word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +BC(406)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+BC(406)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Au Ad R
(n = 0 to C)
437
Area Au Ad R
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to 9999 ---
(BCD)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description +BC(406) adds BCD values in Au, Ad, and CY and outputs the result to R.
Au (BCD)
Ad (BCD)
+ CY
CY will turn
is a carry.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Au is not BCD.
ON when Ad is not BCD.
Precautions If Au or Ad is not BCD, an error is generated and the Error Flag will turn ON.
turn ON.
Note To clear the Carry Flay (CY), execute the Clear Carry (CLC(041)) instruction.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00100, D00110, and CY
will be added as 4-digit BCD values, and the result will be output to D00120.
438
3-11-8 DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH CARRY: +BCL(407)

Purpose Adds 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants with the Carry Flag
(CY).
Ladder Symbol
+BCL(407)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +BCL(407)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+BCL(407)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Au Ad R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #99999999 ---
(BCD)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
439
Description +BCL(407) adds the BCD values in Au and Au+1, Ad and Ad+1, and CY and
outputs the result to R, R+1.
Au +1 Au (BCD)
Ad+1 Ad (BCD)
+ CY
CY will turn (BCD)

ON when there CY R+1 R
is a carry.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Au, Au +1 is not BCD.
ON when Ad, Ad +1 is not BCD.
Precautions If Au, Au +1 or Ad, Ad +1 are not BCD, an error is generated and the Error
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the addition, the content of R, R +1 is 00000000 hex, the
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00101, D00100, D00111,
D00110, and CY will be added as 8-digit BCD values, and the result will be
output to D00121 and D00120.
3-11-9 SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –(410)

Purpose Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
−(410)
Mi Mi: Minuend word
Su Su: Subtrahend word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition –(410)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @–(410)
440

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Mi Su R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description –(400) subtracts the binary values in Su from Mi and outputs the result to R.
When the result is negative, it is output to R as a 2’s complement. (Refer to 3-
11-10 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –L(411)
for an example of handling 2’s complements.)
Mi (Signed binary)
Su (Signed binary)
−
CY will turn ON CY R (Signed binary)

when there is a
borrow.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
441

Carry Flag CY ON when the subtraction results in a borrow.
Overflow Flag OF ON when the result of subtracting a negative number from
a positive number is in the range 8000 to FFFF hex.
Underflow Flag UF ON when the result of subtracting a negative number from
a positive number is in the range 0000 to 7FFF hex.
Precautions When –(410) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the subtraction, the content of R is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag
will turn ON.
If the subtraction results in a borrow, the Carry Flag will turn ON.
If the result of subtracting a negative number from a positive number is nega-
tive (in the range 8000 to FFFF hex), the Overflow Flag will turn ON.
If the result of subtracting a positive number from a negative number is posi-
tive (in the range 0000 to 7FFF hex), the Underflow Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the subtraction, the content of the leftmost bit of R is 1, the
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00110 will be subtracted
from D00100 as 4-digit signed binary values and the result will be output to
D00120.
3-11-10 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –L(411)

Purpose Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
−L(411)
Mi Mi: Minuend word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition –L(411)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @–L(411)

OK OK OK OK
442
Area Mi Su R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description –L(411) subtracts the binary values in Su and Su+1 from Mi and Mi+1 and
outputs the result to R, R+1. When the result is negative, it is output to R and
R+1 as a 2’s complement.
Mi+1 Mi (Signed binary)
− Su+1 Su (Signed binary)
CY will turn
is a borrow.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Overflow Flag OF ON when the result of subtracting a negative number
from a positive number is in the range 80000000 to
FFFFFFFF hex.
443

Underflow Flag UF ON when the result of subtracting a positive number from
a negative number is in the range 00000000 to
7FFFFFFF hex.
Precautions When –L(411) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the subtraction, the content of R, R+1 is 00000000 hex, the
If the result of subtracting a negative number from a positive number is nega-
tive (in the range 80000000 to FFFFFFFF hex), the Overflow Flag will turn
ON.
If the result of subtracting a positive number from a negative number is posi-
tive (in the range 00000000 to 7FFFFFFF hex), the Underflow Flag will turn
ON.
If as a result of the subtraction, the content of the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1, the
be subtracted from D00101 and D00100 as 8-digit signed binary values and
the result will be output to D00121 and D00120.
−L
Examples If the result of the subtraction is a negative number (Mi<Su or Mi+1, Mi

<Su+1, Su), the result is output as the 2’s complement and the Carry Flag
(CY) will turn ON to indicate that the result of the subtraction is negative. To
convert the 2’s complement to the true number, an instruction which subtracts
the result from 0 is necessary using the Carry Flag (CY) as an execution con-
dition.
Note 2’s Complement
A 2’s complement is the value obtained by subtracting each binary digit from 1
and adding one to the result. For example, the 2’s complement for 1101 is cal-
culated as follows: 1111 (F hexadecimal) – 1101 (D hexadecimal) + 1 (1 hexa-
decimal) = 0011 (3 hexadecimal). The 2’s complement for 3039 (hexadecimal)
is calculated as follows: FFFF (hexadecimal) – 3039 (hexadecimal) + 0001
(hexadecimal) – CFC7 (hexadecimal). Therefore, in case of 4-digit hexadeci-
mal value, the 2’s complement can be calculated as follows: FFFF (hexadeci-
mal) – a (hexadecimal) + 0001 (hexadecimal) = b (hexadecimal). To obtain the
true number from the 2’s complement b (hexadecimal): a (hexadecimal) =
10000 (hexadecimal) – b (hexadecimal). For example, to obtain the true num-
ber from the 2’s complement CFC7 (hexadecimal): 10000 (hexadecimal) –
CFC7 = 3039.
444
Example 1 Signed data Unsigned data
FFFF Hex −1 65535 Note 1. Since the Negative Flag is ON, the result (FFFE hex) is a
−) 0001 Hex −) +1 −) 1
negative value (2's complement) and is thus −2.
FFFE Hex −2 Note 1 65534 Note 2 2. Since the Carry Flag is OFF, the result (FFFE hex) is an
unsigned positive value of 65534.
Negative Flag ON
Carry Flag OFF
Example 2 Signed data Unsigned data
FFFD Hex −3 65533 3. Since the Negative Flag is ON, the result (FFFE hex) is a
−) FFFF Hex −) −1 −) 65535
negative value (2's complement) and is thus −2.
FFFE Hex −2 Note 3 65534 Note 4 4. Since the Carry Flag is ON, the result (FFFE hex) is a
negative value (2's complement) and becomes −2 when
Negative Flag ON converted to a true value.
Carry Flag OFF
Program Example 20F55A10 – B8A360E3 = –97AE06D3.

In this example, the eight-digit binary value in CIO 0121 and CIO 0120 is sub-
tracted from the value in CIO 0201 and CIO 0200, and the result is output in
eight-digit binary to D00101 and D00100. If the result is negative, the instruc-
tion at (2) will be executed, and the actual result will then be output to D00101
and D00100.
000000
RSET
002100
−L (1)
0200
0120
D00100
CY
−L (2)
#00000000
D00100
D00100
CY
SET "−"display
002100
Subtraction at 1
Mi+1: CIO 0201 Mi: CIO 0200
2 0 F 5 5 A 1 0
Su+1: CIO 0121 Su: CIO 0120

− B 8 A 3 6 0 E 3
CY R+1: D00101 R+1: D00100

1 6 8 5 1 F 9 2 D
The Carry Flag (CY) is ON, so the result is subtracted from 0000 0000 to
obtain the actual number.
445
Subtraction at 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Su+1: D00101 Su: D00100

− 6 8 5 1 F 9 2 D
CY R+1: D00101 R+1: D00100

1 9 7 A E 0 6 D 3
Final Subtraction Result

Mi+1: CIO 0201 Mi: CIO 0200
2 0 F 5 5 A 1 0
Su+1: D00101 Su: D00100

− 6 8 5 1 F 9 2 D
CY R+1: D00101 R+1: D00100

1 9 7 A E 0 6 D 3
The Carry Flag (CY) is turned ON, so the actual number is –97AE06D3.
Because the content of D00101 and D00100 is negative, CY is used to turn
ON CIO 002100 to indicate this.
3-11-11 SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –C(412)

Purpose Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants with the
Carry Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
−C(412)
Mi Mi: Minuend word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition –C(412)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @–C(412)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Mi Su R
446
Area Mi Su R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description –C(412) subtracts the binary values in Su and CY from Mi, and outputs the
result to R. When the result is negative, it is output to R as a 2’s complement.
Mi (Signed binary)
Su (Signed binary)
– CY
CY will turn
is a borrow.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON when the subtraction result is 0.
Overflow Flag OF ON when the result of subtracting a negative number and
CY from a positive number is in the range 8000 to FFFF
hex.
Underflow Flag UF ON when the result of subtracting a positive number and
CY from a negative number is in the range 0000 to 7FFF
hex.
447
Precautions When –C(412) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
will turn ON.
If the result of subtracting a negative number and CY from a positive number
is negative (in the range 8000 to FFFF hex), the Overflow Flag will turn ON.
If the result of subtracting a positive number and CY from a negative number
is positive (in the range 0000 to 7FFF hex), the Underflow Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the subtraction, the content of the leftmost bit of R is 1, the
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00110 and CY will be
subtracted from D00100 as 4-digit signed binary values and the result will be
output to D00120.
3-11-12 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –CL(413)

Purpose Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants with the
Carry Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
–CL(413)
Mi Mi: Minuend word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition –CL(413)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @–CL(413)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Mi Su R
448
Area Mi Su R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description –CL(413) subtracts the binary values in Su and Su+1 and CY from Mi and
Mi+1, and outputs the result to R, R+1. When the result is negative, it is output
to R, R+1 as a 2’s complement.
Mi+1 Mi (Signed binary)
Su+1 Su (Signed binary)
– CY
CY will turn
is a borrow.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Carry Flag CY ON when the results in a borrow.
Overflow Flag OF ON when the result of subtracting a negative number and
CY from a positive number is in the range 80000000 to
FFFFFFFF hex.
Underflow Flag UF ON when the result of subtracting a positive number and
CY from a negative number is in the range 00000000 to
7FFFFFFF hex.
449
Precautions When –CL(413) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the subtraction, the content of R, R+1 is 00000000 hex, the
If the result of subtracting a negative number and CY from a positive number
is negative (in the range 80000000 to FFFFFFFF hex), the Overflow Flag will
turn ON.
If the result of subtracting a positive number and CY from a negative number
is positive (in the range 00000000 to 7FFFFFFF hex), the Underflow Flag will
turn ON.
If as a result of the subtraction, the content of the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1, the
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00111, D00110 and CY
will be subtracted from D00101 and D00100 as 8-digit signed binary values,
and the result will be output to D00121 and D00120.
If the result of the subtraction is a negative number (Mi<Su or Mi+1, Mi

<Su+1, Su), the result is output as a 2’s complement. The Carry Flag (CY) will
turn ON. To convert the 2’s complement to the true number, a program which
subtracts the result from 0 is necessary, as an input condition of the Carry
Flag (CY). The Carry Flag turning ON thus indicates that the result of the sub-
traction is negative.
A 2’s complement is the value obtained by subtracting each binary digit from 1
and adding one to the result.
Example: The 2’s complement for the binary number 1101 is as follows:
1111 (F hex) – 1101 (D hex) + 1 (1 hex) = 0011 (3 hex).
Example: The 2’s complement for the 4-digit hexadecimal number 3039 is as
follows:
FFFF hex – 3039 hex + 0001 hex = CFC7 hex.
Accordingly, the 2’s complement for the 4-digit hexadecimal value “a” is as fol-
lows:
FFFF hex – a hex + 0001 hex = b hex.
And to obtain the true number “a” hex from the 2’s complement “b” hex:
a hex + 10000 hex – b hex.
Example: To obtain the true number from the 2’s complement CFC& hex:
10000 hex – CFC7 hex = 3039 hex.
450
3-11-13 BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –B(414)

Purpose Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
–B(414)
Mi Mi: Minuend word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition –B(414)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @–B(414)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Mi Su R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(BCD)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
451
Description –B(414) subtracts the BCD values in Su from Mi and outputs the result to R. If
the result of the subtraction is negative, the result is output as a 10’s comple-
ment.
Mi (BCD)
– Su (BCD)
CY will turn
is a borrow.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Mi is not BCD.
ON when Su is not BCD.
Precautions If Mi and/or Su are not BCD, an error is generated and the Error Flag will turn
ON.
will turn ON.
If an addition results in a borrow, the Carry Flag will turn ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00110 is subtracted from
D00100 as 4-digit BCD values, and the result will be output to D00120.
3-11-14 DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY: –BL(415)

Purpose Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
–BL(415)
Mi Mi: 1st minuend word
Su Su: 1st subtrahend word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition –BL(415)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @–BL(415)
452

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Mi Su R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #99999999 ---
(BCD)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description –BL(415) subtracts the BCD values in Su and Su+1 from Mi and Mi+1 and
outputs the result to R, R+1. If the result is negative, it is output to R, R+1 as a
10’s complement.
Mi +1 Mi (BCD)
Su+1 Su (BCD)
–
CY will turn
is a borrow.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Mi and/or Mi +1 are not BCD.
ON when Su and/or Su +1 are not BCD.
453

Precautions If Mi, Mi +1 and/or Su, Su +1 are not BCD, an error is generated and the Error
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the subtraction, the content of R, R +1 is 00000000 hex, the
be subtracted from D00101 and D00100 as 8-digit BCD values, and the result
will be output to D00121 and D00120.

<Su+1, Su), the result is output as a 10’s complement. The Carry Flag (CY)
will turn ON. To convert the 10’s complement to the true number, a program
which subtracts the result from 0 is necessary, as an input condition of the
Carry Flag (CY). The Carry Flag turning ON thus indicates that the result of
the subtraction is negative.
A 10’s complement is the value obtained by subtracting each digit from 9 and
adding one to the result. For example, the 10’s complement for 7556 is calcu-
lated as follows: 9999 – 7556 + 1 = 2444. For a four digit number, the 10’s
complement of A is 9999 – A + 1 = B. To obtain the true number from the 10’s
complement B: A = 10000 – B. For example, to obtain the true number from
the 10’s complement 2444: 10000 – 2444 = 7556.
Program Example 9,583,960 – 17,072,641 = –7,488,681.

In this example, the eight-digit BCD content of CIO 0121 and CIO 0120 is
subtracted from the content of CIO 0201 and CIO 0200, and the result is out-
put in eight-digit BCD to D00101 and D00100. The result is negative, so the
instruction at (2) will be executed, and the true value will then be output to
D00101 and D00100.
454
000000
RSET
002100
−BL (1)
0200
0120
D00100
CY
−BL (2)
#00000000
D00100
D00100
CY
SET "−" display
002100
Subtraction at 1
Mi+1: CIO 0201 Mi: CIO 0200
0 9 5 8 3 9 6 0
Su+1: CIO 0121 Su: CIO 0120

– 1 7 0 7 2 6 4 1
09583960 + (100000000 – 17072641)
CY R+1: D00101 R+1: D00100

1 9 2 5 1 1 3 1 9
The Carry Flag (CY) is ON, so the result is subtracted from 0000 0000.
Subtraction at 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Su+1: D00101 Su: D00100

– 9 2 5 1 1 3 1 9
00000000 + (100000000 – 92511319)

CY R+1: D00101 R+1: D00100
1 0 7 4 8 8 6 8 1
Final Subtraction Result

Mi+1: CIO 0201 Mi: CIO 0200
2 0 F 5 5 A 1 0
Su+1: D00101 Su: D00100

– 6 8 5 1 F 9 2 D
CY R+1: D00101 R+1: D00100

1 0 7 4 8 8 6 8 1
The Carry Flag (CY) will be turned ON, so the actual number is –7,488,681.
Because the content of D00101 and D00100 is negative, CY is used to turn
ON CIO 002100 to indicate this.
455
3-11-15 BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –BC(416)

Purpose Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants with the Carry Flag
(CY).
Ladder Symbol
–BC(416)
Mi Mi: Minuend word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition –BC(416)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @–BC(416)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Mi Su R
EM Area without bank E00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #9999 ---
(BCD)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
456
Description –BC(416) subtracts BCD values in Su and CY from Mi and outputs the result
to R. If the result is negative, it is output to R as a 2’s complement.
Mi (BCD)
Su (BCD)
– CY
CY will turn
is a borrow.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Mi is not BCD.
ON when Su is not BCD.
Precautions If Mi and/or Su are not BCD, an error is generated and the Error Flag will turn
ON.
will turn ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00110 and CY will be
subtracted from D00100 as 4-digit BCD values, and the result will be output to
D00120.
3-11-16 DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT WITH CARRY: –BCL(417)

Purpose Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants with the Carry
Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
–BCL(417)
Mi Mi: 1st minuend word
Su Su: 1st subtrahend word
457
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition –BCL(417)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @–BCL(417)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Mi Su R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #99999999 ---
(BCD)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description –BCL(417)subtracts the BCD values in Su, Su+1, and CY from Mi and Mi+1
and outputs the result to R, R+1. If the result is negative, it is output to R, R+1
as a 10’s complement.
Mi +1 Mi (BCD)
Su+1 Su (BCD)
– CY
CY will turn
is a borrow.
458
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Mi and/or Mi +1 are not BCD.
ON when Su and/or Su +1 are not BCD.
Precautions If Mi, Mi +1 and/or Su, Su +1 are not BCD, an error is generated and the Error
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the subtraction, the content of R, R +1 is 00000000 hex, the
If an subtraction results in a borrow, the Carry Flag will turn ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00111, D00110, and CY
will be subtracted from D00101 and D00100 as 8-digit BCD values, and the
result will be output to D00121 and D00120.

<Su+1, Su), the result is output as a 10’s complement. The Carry Flag (CY)
will turn ON. To convert the 10’s complement to the true number, a program
which subtracts the result from 0 is necessary, as an input condition of the
Carry Flag (CY). The Carry Flag turning ON thus indicates that the result of
the subtraction is negative.
A 10’s complement is the value obtained by subtracting each digit from 9 and
adding one to the result. For example, the 10’s complement for 7556 is calcu-
lated as follows: 9999 – 7556 + 1 = 2444. For a four digit number, the 10’s
complement of A is 9999 – A + 1 = B. To obtain the true number from the 10’s
complement B: A = 10000 – B. For example, to obtain the true number from
the 10’s complement 2444: 10000 – 2444 = 7556.
3-11-17 SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *(420)

Purpose Multiplies 4-digit signed hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
*(420)
Md Md: Multiplicand word
Mr Mr: Multiplier word
R R: Result word
459
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition *(420)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @*(420)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Md Mr R
CIO 6142
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32766
E32766
(n = 0 to C) En_32766
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description *(420) multiplies the signed binary values in Md and Mr and outputs the result
to R, R+1.
Md (Signed binary)
× Mr (Signed binary)
R +1 R (Signed binary)
460
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When *(420) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the multiplication, the content of R is 0000 hex, the Equals
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the multiplication, the content of the leftmost bit of R+1 and R
is 1, the Negative Flag will turn ON.
be multiplied as 4-digit signed hexadecimal values and the result will be out-
put to D00120.
Example in Function Block Definition

In the following example, an array variable is used to get the result from the
function block as one word.
a*b→c
* Function Block Variables

Multiplicand: a (data type: INT)
a
Multiplier: b (data type: INT)
b Result: c (data type: INT)
Temporary variable: tmp (data type: WORD, 2-element array)
tmp[0]
MOV
tmp[0]
3-11-18 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *L(421)

Purpose Multiplies 8-digit signed hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
*L(421)
Md Md: 1st multiplicand word
Mr Mr: 1st multiplier word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition *L(421)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @*L(421)
461

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Md Mr R
CIO 6140
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to
D32764
E32764
(n = 0 to C) En_32764
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description *L(421) multiplies the signed binary values in Md and Md+1 and Mr and Mr+1
and outputs the result to R, R+1, R+2, and R+3.
Md + 1 Md (Signed binary)
× Mr + 1 Mr (Signed binary)
R+3 R+2 R+1 R (Signed binary)
462
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When *L(421) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the multiplication, the content of R, R+1, R+2, R+3 is 0000
hex, the Equals Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the multiplication, the content of the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1,
the Negative Flag will turn ON.
and D00110 will be multiplied as 8-digit signed hexadecimal values and the
result will be output to D00121 and D00120.
3-11-19 UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *U(422)

Purpose Multiplies 4-digit unsigned hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
*U(422)
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition *U(422)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @*U(422)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Md Mr R
CIO 6142
463
Area Md Mr R
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32766
E32766
(n = 0 to C) En_32766
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_ 32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description *U(420) multiplies the binary values in Md and Mr and outputs the result to R,
R+1.
Md (Unsigned binary)
× Mr (Unsigned binary)
R +1 R (Unsigned binary)
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When *U(422) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the multiplication, the content of R, R+1 is 0000 hex, the
be multiplied as 4-digit unsigned binary values and the result will be output to
D00121 and D00120.
464

a*b→c
Function Block Variables
Multiplicand: a (data type: UINT)
*U
Multiplier: b (data type: UINT)
a Result: c (data type: UINT)
b
tmp[0]
MOV
tmp[0]
c
3-11-20 DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY: *UL(423)

Purpose Multiplies 8-digit unsigned hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
*UL(423)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition *UL(423)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @*UL(423)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Md Mr R
CIO 6140
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to
D32764
465
Area Md Mr R
E32764
(n = 0 to C) En_32764
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description *UL(423) multiplies the unsigned binary values in Md and Md+1 and Mr and
Mr+1 and outputs the result to R, R+1, R+2, and R+3.
Md + 1 Md (Unsigned binary)
× Mr + 1 Mr (Unsigned binary)
R+3 R+2 R+1 R (Unsigned binary)
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When *UL(423) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the multiplication, the content of R, R+1, R+2, R+3 is 0000
hex, the Equals Flag will turn ON.
and D00110 will be multiplied as 8-digit unsigned binary values and the result
will be output to D00123, D00122, D00121, and D00120.
466
3-11-21 BCD MULTIPLY: *B(424)

Purpose Multiplies 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
*B(424)
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition *B(424)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @*B(424)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Md Mr R
CIO 6142
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32766
E32766
(n = 0 to C) En_32766
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
467
Area Md Mr R
Constants #0000 to #9999 ---
(BCD)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description *B(424) multiplies the BCD content of Md and Mr and outputs the result to R,
R+1.
Md (BCD)
× Mr (BCD)
R +1 R (BCD)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Md is not BCD.
ON when Mr is not BCD.
Precautions If Md and/or Mr are not BCD, an error will be generated and the Error Flag will
turn ON.
If as a result of the multiplication, the content of R, R+1 is 0000 hex, the
be multiplied as 4-digit BCD values and the result will be output to D00121
and D00120.
468

a*b→c
Multiplicand: a (data type: WORD)
*B
Multiplier: b (data type: WORD)
a Result: c (data type: WORD)
b
tmp[0]
MOV
tmp[0]
c
3-11-22 DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY: *BL(425)

Purpose Multiplies 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
*BL(425)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition *BL(425)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @*BL(425)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Md Mr R
CIO 6140
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to
D32764
E32764
(n = 0 to C) En_32764
(n = 0 to C)
469
Area Md Mr R
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #99999999 ---
(BCD)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description *BL(425) multiplies BCD values in Md and Md+1 and Mr and Mr+1 and out-
puts the result to R, R+1, R+2, and R+3.
Md + 1 Md (BCD)
× Mr + 1 Mr (BCD)
R+3 R+2 R+1 R (BCD)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Md and/or Md+1 are not BCD.
ON when Mr and/or Mr +1 are not BCD.
Precautions If Md, Md+1 and/or Mr, Mr+1 are not BCD, an error will be generated and the
Error Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the multiplication, the content of R, R+1, R+2, R+3 is
00000000 hex, the Equals Flag will turn ON.
and D00110 will be multiplied as 8-digit unsigned BCD values and the result
will be output to D00123, D00122, D00121 and D00120.
470
3-11-23 SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /(430)

Purpose Divides 4-digit (single-word) signed hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
/(430)
Dd Dd: Dividend word
Dr Dr: Divisor word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition /(430)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @/(430)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Dd Dr R
CIO 6142
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32766
E32766
(n = 0 to C) En_32766
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF #0001 to #FFFF ---
(binary) (binary)
471
Area Dd Dr R
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description /(430) divides the signed binary (16 bit) values in Dd by those in Dr and out-
puts the result to R, R+1. The quotient is placed in R and the remainder in
R+1.
Dd (Signed binary)
÷ Dr (Signed binary)
R +1 R (Signed binary)
Remainder Quotient
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when the result is 0.
Equals Flag = ON when as a result of the division, R is 0.
Negative Flag N ON when the leftmost bit of the R is 1.
Precautions When the content of Dr is 0, an error will be generated and the Error Flag will
turn ON.
If as a result of the division, the content of R is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag will
turn ON.
If as a result of the division, the content of the leftmost bit of R is 1, the Nega-
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00100 will be divided by
D00110 as 4-digit signed binary values and the quotient will be output to
D00120 and the remainder to D00121.
472

In the following example, an array variable is used to get the quotient and
remainder from the function block.
a / b → c ··· d
Dividend: a (data type: INT)
/
Divisor: b (data type: INT)
a Quotient: c (data type: INT)
Remainder: d (data type: INT)
b Temporary variable: tmp (data type: WORD, 2-element array)
tmp[0]
MOV
tmp[0]
c
MOV
tmp[0]
d
3-11-24 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /L(431)

Purpose Divides 8-digit (double-word) signed hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
/L(431)
Dd Dd: 1st dividend word
Dr Dr: 1st divisor word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition /L(431)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @/L(431)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Dd Dr R
CIO 6140
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to
D32764
E32764
473
Area Dd Dr R
(n = 0 to C) En_32764
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #00000001 to ---
#FFFFFFFF #FFFFFFFF
(binary) (binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description /L(431) divides the signed binary values in Dd and Dd+1 by those in Dr and
Dr+1 and outputs the result to R, R+1, R+2, and R+3. The quotient is output
to R and R+1 and the remainder is output to R+2 and R+3.
Dd + 1 Dd (Signed binary)
÷ Dr + 1 Dr (Signed binary)
R+3 R+2 R+1 R (Signed binary)
Remainder Quotient
Flags
Equals Flag = ON when as a result of the division, R+1, R is 0.
Negative Flag N ON when the leftmost bit of the R+1, R is 1.
Precautions When the remainder of the result, R+3, R+2 is 0,the Error Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the division, the content of R+1, R is 00000000 hex, the
If as a result of the division, the content of the leftmost bit of R+1, R is 1, the
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, D00101 and D00100 are
divided by D00111 and D00110 as 8-digit signed hexadecimal values and the
474
quotient will be output to D00121 and D00120 and the remainder to D00123
and D00122.
3-11-25 UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /U(432)

Purpose Divides 4-digit (single-word) unsigned hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
/U(432)
Dr Dr: Divisor word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition /U(432)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @/U(432)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Dd Dr R
CIO 6142
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32766
E32766
(n = 0 to C) En_32766
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
475
Area Dd Dr R
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF #0001 to #FFFF ---
(binary) (binary)
Data Registers DR0 to 15 ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description /U(432) divides the unsigned binary values in Dd by those in Dr and outputs
the quotient to R and the remainder to R+1.
Dd (Unsigned binary)
÷ Dr (Unsigned binary)
R +1 R (Unsigned binary)
Remainder Quotient
Flags
Equals Flag = ON when as a result of the division, R is 0.
Negative Flag N ON when the leftmost bit of the R is 1.
Precautions If as a result of the division, the content of R+1 is 0, the Error Flag will turn
ON.
turn ON.
If as a result of the division, the content of the leftmost bit of R is 1, the Nega-
D00110 as 4-digit unsigned binary values and the quotient will be output to
D00120 and the remainder will be output to D00121.
476

a / b → c ··· d
Dividend: a (data type: UINT)
/U
Divisor: b (data type: UINT)
a Quotient: c (data type: UINT)
Remainder: d (data type: UINT)
tmp[0]
MOV
tmp[0]
MOV
tmp[0]
3-11-26 DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE: /UL(433)

Purpose Divides 8-digit (double-word) unsigned hexadecimal data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
/UL(433)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition /UL(433)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @/UL(433)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Dd Dr R
CIO 6140
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to
D32764
E32764
477
Area Dd Dr R
(n = 0 to C) En_32764
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #00000001 to ---
#FFFFFFFF #FFFFFFFF
(binary) (binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description /UL(433) divides the unsigned binary values in Dd and Dd+1 by those in Dr
and Dr+1 and outputs the quotient to R, R+1 and the remainder to R+2, and
R+3.
Dd + 1 Dd (Unsigned binary)
÷ Dr + 1 Dr (Unsigned binary)
R+3 R+2 R+1 R (Unsigned binary)

Remainder Quotient
Flags
Equals Flag = ON when as a result of the division R+1, R is 0.
Negative Flag N ON when the leftmost bit of the R+1, R is 1.
Precautions When the content of Dr, Dr+1 is 0, the Error Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the division, the content of R, R+1, is 0000 hex, the Equals
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the division, the content of the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1, the Neg-
be divided by D00111 and D00110 as 8-digit unsigned hexadecimal values
478
and the quotient will be output to D00121 and D00120 and the remainder to
D00123 and D00122.
3-11-27 BCD DIVIDE: /B(434)

Purpose Divides 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
/B(434)
Dr Dr: Divisor word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition /B(434)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @/B(434)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Dd Dr R
CIO 6142
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32766
E32766
(n = 0 to C) En_32766
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
479
Area Dd Dr R
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #9999 #0001 to #9999 ---
(BCD) (BCD)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description /B(434) divides the BCD content of Dd by those of Dr and outputs the quotient
to R and the remainder to R+1.
Dd (BCD)
÷ Dr (BCD)
R +1 R (BCD)
Remainder Quotient
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Dd is not BCD.
ON when Dr is not BCD.
ON when the remainder is 0.
Equals Flag = ON when R is 0.
Precautions If Dd or Dr are not BCD or if the remainder (R+1) is 0, an error will be gener-
ated and the Error Flag will turn ON.
turn ON.
If as a result of the division, the leftmost bit of R is 1, the Negative Flag will
turn ON.
D00110 as 4-digit BCD values and the quotient will be output to D00120 and
the remainder to D00120.

480
a / b → c ··· d
Dividend: a (data type: WORD)
/B
Divisor: b (data type: WORD)
a Quotient: c (data type: WORD)
Remainder: d (data type: WORD)
tmp[0]
MOV
tmp[0]
c
MOV
tmp[0]
3-11-28 DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE: /BL(435)

Purpose Divides 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
/BL(435)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition /BL(435)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @/BL(435)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Area Dd Dr R
CIO 6140
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to
D32764
E32764
(n = 0 to C) En_32764
(n = 0 to C)
481
Area Dd Dr R
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #00000001 to ---
#99999999 #99999999
(BCD) (BCD)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description /BL(435) divides BCD values in Dd and Dd+1 by those in Dr and Dr+1 and
outputs the quotient to R, R+1 and the remainder to R+2, R+3.
Dd + 1 Dd (BCD)
÷ Dr + 1 Dr (BCD)
R+3 R+2 R+1 R (BCD)

Remainder Quotient
Flags
Error Flag ER ON when Dd, Dd+1 is not BCD.
ON when Dr, Dr +1 is not BCD.
Precautions If Dd, Dd+1 and/or Dr, Dr+1 are not BCD or the content of Dr, Dr+1 is 0, an
error will be generated and the Error Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the division, the content of R, R+1 is 00000000 hex, the
be divided by D00111 and D00110 as 8-digit BCD values and the quotient will
be output to D00121 and D00120 and the remainder to D00123 and D00122.
482
Conversion Instructions Section 3-12
3-12 Conversion Instructions

This section describes instructions used for data conversion.
BCD TO BINARY BIN 023 483
DOUBLE BCD TO DOUBLE BINL 058 485
BINARY
BINARY TO BCD BCD 024 487
DOUBLE BINARY TO DOUBLE BCDL 059 489
BCD
2’S COMPLEMENT NEG 160 491
DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT NEGL 161 493
16-BIT TO 32-BIT SIGNED SIGN 600 494
BINARY
DATA DECODER MLPX 076 496
DATA ENCODER DMPX 077 500
ASCII CONVERT ASC 086 504
ASCII TO HEX HEX 162 508
COLUMN TO LINE LINE 063 512
LINE TO COLUMN COLM 064 514
SIGNED BCD TO BINARY BINS 470 517
DOUBLE SIGNED BCD TO BISL 472 520
BINARY
SIGNED BINARY TO BCD BCDS 471 523
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY TO BDSL 473 525
BCD
GRAY CODE CONVERSION GRY 474 529
FOUR-DIGIT NUMBER TO STR4 601 534
ASCII
EIGHT-DIGIT NUMBER TO STR8 602 537
ASCII
SIXTEEN-DIGIT NUMBER TO STR16 603 539
ASCII
ASCII TO FOUR-DIGIT NUM- NUM4 604 541
BER
ASCII TO EIGHT-DIGIT NUM- NUM8 605 544
BER
ASCII TO SIXTEEN-DIGIT NUM16 606 545
NUMBER
3-12-1 BCD TO BINARY: BIN(023)

Purpose Converts BCD data to binary data.
Ladder Symbol
BIN(023)
S S: Source word
R R: Result word
483
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BIN(023)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BIN(023)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BIN(023) converts the BCD data in S to binary data and writes the result to R.
(BCD) R (BIN)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the content of S is not BCD.
Equals Flag = ON if the result is 0000.
Negative Flag N OFF
484
Example The following diagram shows an example BCD-to-binary conversion.
R
×103 ×102 ×101 ×100 ×163 ×162 ×161 ×160
In this example, N words of BCD data is converted to binary data.

If N = 3, the three words of BCD starting from D00010 will be converted to
binary data one word at a time when CIO 00000 turns ON. The resulting
binary data will be stored starting from D00100.
00000
MOVR
D10
IR0 D00010 BCD#0100
D00011 BCD#0200
MOVR D00012 BCD#0300
D100
IR1 BCD
FOR BIN
&3
D00100 Decimal &100 (Hexadecimal #0064)
00000
BIN D00101 Decimal &200 (Hexadecimal #00C8)
,IR0+ D00102 Decimal &300 (Hexadecimal #012C)
,IR1+
NEXT
3-12-2 DOUBLE BCD TO DOUBLE BINARY: BINL(058)

Purpose Converts 8-digit BCD data to 8-digit hexadecimal (32-bit binary) data.
Ladder Symbol
BINL(058)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BINL(058)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BINL(058)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
485
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BINL(058) converts the 8-digit BCD data in S and S+1 to 8-digit hexadecimal
(32-bit binary) data and writes the result to R and R+1.
S+1 S R+1 R
(BCD) (BCD) (BIN) (BIN)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the contents of S+1, S are not BCD.
Negative Flag N OFF
Examples The following diagram shows an example of 8-digit BCD-to-binary conversion.
R+1 R
×107×106×105×104×103×102×101×100 ×167×166×165×164×163 ×162×161×160
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 8-digit BCD value in
CIO 0010 and CIO 0011 is converted to hexadecimal and stored in D00200
and D00201.
486
S+1: CIO 0011 S: CIO 0010

0 0 2 0 0 0 5 0 200050=3X164+13X162+7X161+2X160
x107 x106 x105 x104 x103 x102 x101 x100
0 0 0 3 0 D 7 2
x167 x166 x165 x164 x163 x162 x161 x160
R+1: D00201 R: D00200
3-12-3 BINARY TO BCD: BCD(024)

Purpose Converts a word of binary data to a word of BCD data.
Ladder Symbol
BCD(024)
S S: Source word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BCD(024)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BCD(024)

OK OK OK OK

S must be between 0000 and 270F hexadecimal (0000 and 9999 decimal).
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
487
Area S R
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BCD(024) converts the binary data in S to BCD data and writes the result to
R.
(BIN) R (BCD)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the content of S exceeds 270F (9999 decimal).
Precautions The content of S must not exceed 270F (9999 decimal).

Example The following diagram shows an example BCD-to-binary conversion.
R
×163 ×162 ×161 ×160 ×103 ×102 ×101 ×100
In this example, N words of binary data is converted to BCD data.

If N = 3, the three words of binary starting from D00010 will be converted to
binary data one word at a time when CIO 00000 turns ON. The resulting BCD
data will be stored starting from D00100.
488
00000
MOVR
D10
IR0 D00010 Decimal &100 (Hexadecimal #0064)
D00011 Decimal &200 (Hexadecimal #00C8)
MOVR D00012 Decimal &300 (Hexadecimal #012C)
D100
IR1 BIN
FOR BCD
&3
D00100 BCD #0100
00000
BCD D00101 BCD #0200
,IR0+ D00102 BCD #0300
,IR1+
NEXT
3-12-4 DOUBLE BINARY TO DOUBLE BCD: BCDL(059)

Purpose Converts 8-digit hexadecimal (32-bit binary) data to 8-digit BCD data.
Ladder Symbol
BCDL(059)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BCDL(059)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BCDL(059)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S: First Source Word

The content of S+1 and S must be between 0000 0000 and 05F5 E0FF hexa-
decimal (0000 0000 and 9999 9999 decimal).
Area S R
489
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BCDL(059) converts the 8-digit hexadecimal (32-bit binary) data in S and S+1
to 8-digit BCD data and writes the result to R and R+1.
S+1 S R+1 R
(BCD) (BCD) (BIN) (BIN)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the contents of S and S+1 exceed 05F5 E0FF
(9999 9999 decimal).
Precautions The content of S+1 and S must not exceed 05F5 E0FF (9999 9999 decimal).
Examples The following diagram shows an example of 8-digit BCD-to-binary conversion.
R+1 R
×167×166×165×164 ×163×162×161×160 ×107×106×105×104×103 ×102×101×100
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the hexadecimal value in

CIO 0011 and CIO 0010 is converted to a BCD value and stored in D00200
and D00201.
490
S+1: CIO 0011 S: CIO 0010

MBS 0 0 2 D 3 2 0 A LSB
x167 x166 x165 x164 x163 x162 x161 x160
2X165 +13X164+3X163+2X162+10=2961930
R+1: D00101 R: D00100

MBS 0 2 9 6 1 9 3 0 LSB
7 x106 x105 x104 x103 x102 x101 x100
x10
3-12-5 2’S COMPLEMENT: NEG(160)

Purpose Calculates the 2’s complement of a word of hexadecimal data.
Ladder Symbol
NEG(160)
S S: Source word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NEG(160)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @NEG(160)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
491
Area S R
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description NEG(160) calculates the 2’s complement of S and writes the result to R. The
2’s complement calculation basically reverses the status of the bits in S and
adds 1.
2's complement
(Complement + 1)
(S) (R)
Note This operation (reversing the status of the bits and adding 1) is equivalent to
subtracting the content of S from 0000.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of the result is ON.
Note The result for 8000 hex will be 8000 hex.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, NEG(160) calculates the
2’s complement of the content of D00100 and writes the result to D00200.
Actual Equivalent
calculation subtraction
Reverse bit status
−)
Add 1
492
3-12-6 DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT: NEGL(161)

Purpose Calculates the 2’s complement of two words of hexadecimal data.
Ladder Symbol
NEGL(161)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NEGL(161)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @NEGL(161)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Note R and R+1 must be in the same data area.
493
Description NEGL(161) calculates the 2’s complement of S+1 and S and writes the result
to R+1 and R. The 2’s complement calculation basically reverses the status of
the bits in S+1 and S and adds 1.
2's complement
(Complement + 1)
(S+1, S) (R+1, R)
Note This operation (reversing the status of the bits and adding 1) is equivalent to
subtracting the content of S+1 and S from 0000 0000.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON if the result is 0000 0000.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of R+1 is ON.
Note The result for 8000 hex will be 8000 hex.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, NEGL(161) calculates the
2’s complement of the content of D00101 and D00100 and writes the result to
D00201 and D00200.
Actual Equivalent
calculation subtraction
Reverse bit status
−)
Add 1
3-12-7 16-BIT TO 32-BIT SIGNED BINARY: SIGN(600)

Purpose Expands a 16-bit signed binary value to its 32-bit equivalent.
Ladder Symbol
SIGN(600)
S S: Source word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SIGN(600)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SIGN(600)
494

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32766
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Note R and R+1 must be in the same data area.
Description SIGN(600) converts the 16-bit signed binary number in S to its 32-bit signed
binary equivalent and writes the result in R+1 and R.
The conversion is accomplished by copying the content of S to R and writing
FFFF to R+1 if bit 15 of S is 1 or writing 0000 to R+1 if bit 15 of S is 0.
Source word (S)

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
If bit 15 of S is 1, FFFF is transferred to R+1. The content of S is
If bit 15 of S is 0, 0000 is transferred to R+1. transferred "as is" to R.
2nd result word (R+1) 1st result word (R)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
495
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of R+1 is ON.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SIGN(600) converts the
16-bit signed binary content of D00100 (#8000 = –32,768 decimal) to its 32-
bit equivalent (#FFFF 8000 = –32,768 decimal) and writes that result to
D00201 and D00200.
Example: 8000 Hex
3-12-8 DATA DECODER: MLPX(076)

Purpose Reads the numerical value in the specified digit (or byte) in the source word,
turns ON the corresponding bit in the result word (or 16-word range), and
turns OFF all other bits in the result word (or 16-word range).
Ladder Symbol
MLPX(076)
S S: Source word
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MLPX(076)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MLPX(076)

OK OK OK OK

The data in the source word indicates the location of the bit(s) that will be
turned ON.
C: Control Word
The control word specifies whether MLPX(076) will perform a 4-to-16 bit con-
version or an 8-to-256 bit conversion, the number of digits or bytes to be con-
verted, and the starting digit or byte.
496
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
0
Specifies the first digit/byte to be converted
4-to-16: 0 to 3 (digit 0 to 3)
8-to-256: 0 or 1 (byte 0 or 1)
Number of digits/bytes to be converted

4-to-16: 0 to 3 (1 to 4 digits)
8-to-256: 0 or 1 (1 or 2 bytes)
Conversion process
0: 4-to-16 bits (digit to word)
1: 8-to-256 bits (byte to 16-word range)
R: First result word

There can be anywhere from 1 to 32 result words, depending upon the type of
conversion process and number of digits/bytes being converted. The result
words must be in the same data area.
Area S C R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- Specified values ---
only
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description MLPX(076) can perform 4-to-16 bit or 8-to-256 bit conversions. Set the left-
most digit of C to 0 to specify 4-to-16 bit conversion and set it to 1 to specify 8-
to-256 bit conversion.
4-to-16 bit Conversion
When the leftmost digit of C is 0, MLPX(076) takes the value of the specified
digit in S (0 to F) and turns ON the corresponding bit in the result word. All
497
other bits in the result word will be turned OFF. Up to four digits can be con-
verted.
C
l =1 (Convert 2 digits.)
n=2 (Start with third digit.)

(Bit m of R is turned ON.)
R
R+1
When two or more digits are being converted, MLPX(076) will read the digits
in S from right to left and will wrap around to the rightmost digit after the left-
most digit, if necessary.
The following diagram shows some example values for C and the 4-to-16 bit
conversions that they produce.
C: #0010 C: #0030 C: #0031
R R R
R+1 R+1 R+1
R+2 R+2
R+3 R+3

When the leftmost digit of C is 1, MLPX(076) takes the value of the specified
byte in S (00 to FF) and turns ON the corresponding bit in the range of 16
result words. All other bits in the result words will be turned OFF. Up to two
bytes can be converted.
C
l=1 (Convert 2 bytes.)
n=1 (Start with second byte.)

(Bit m of R to R+15 is turned ON.)
R+1 16
R+14
R+15
R+16
R+17
R+30
R+31
When two bytes are being converted, MLPX(076) will read the bytes in S from
right to left and will wrap around to the rightmost byte if the leftmost byte
(byte 1) has been specified as the starting byte.
498
C: #1010 C: #1011
Digit 1 Digit 0 Digit 1 Digit 0
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if C is not within the specified ranges.
Examples 4-to-16 bit Conversion

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, MLPX(076) will convert 3
digits in S beginning with digit 1 (the second digit), as indicated by C (#0021).
The corresponding bits in D00100, D00101, and D00102 will be turned ON.
S
C
Bits 0 to 3: Starting digit (Digit 1)
R
C: # Bits 4 to 7: Number of digits (3 digits)
Digits
S: 0100
R: Digit 1 contains 6, so bit 6 is turned ON.

Digit 2 contains A, so bit 10 is turned ON.
Digit 3 contains F, so bit 15 is turned ON.

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, MLPX(076) will convert the
2 bytes in S beginning with byte 1 (the leftmost byte), as indicated by C
(#1011). The corresponding bits in D00100 to D00115 and D00116 to D00131
will be turned ON.
499
000000
MLPX
S 0100
K #1011
D D00100
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Bits 0 to 3: Starting byte (Byte 1)

C: # 1 0 1 1
Bits 4 to 7: Number of bytes (2 bytes)
Byte 1 Byte 0
S: 0100 2 D 1 A
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D: D00100
D00101
D00102 1
Byte 1 contains 2D, so bit 13 (D)
D00103
of R+2 is turned ON.
D00115
D00116
D00117 1
D00118 Byte 0 contains 1A, so bit 10 (A)
of R+1 is turned ON.
D00131
3-12-9 DATA ENCODER: DMPX(077)

Purpose FInds the location of the first or last ON bit within the source word (or 16-word
range), and writes that value to the specified digit (or byte) in the result word.
Ladder Symbol
DMPX(077)
R R: Result word
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DMPX(077)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DMPX(077)

OK OK OK OK

There can be anywhere from 1 to 32 source words, depending upon the type
of conversion process and number of digits/bytes being converted. The
source words must be in the same data area.
500
R: Result Word
The locations of the bits that were ON in the source word(s) are written to the
digits/bytes in R starting with the specified first digit/byte.
C: Control Word
The control word specifies whether DMPX(077) will perform a 16-to-4 bit con-
version or an 256-to-8 bit conversion, whether the leftmost or rightmost ON bit
will be encoded, the number of digits or bytes that will be converted, and the
starting digit or byte where the results will be written.
Specifies the first digit/byte to receive converted data.

16-to-4: 0 to 3 (digit 0 to 3)
256-to-8: 0 or 1 (byte 0 or 1)
Number of digits/bytes to be converted
16-to-4: 0 to 3 (1 to 4 digits)
256-to-8: 0 or 1 (1 or 2 bytes)
Bit to encode
0: Leftmost bit (highest bit address)
1: Rightmost bit (lowest bit address)
Conversion process
0: 16-to-4 bits (word to digit)
1: 256-to-8 bits (16-word range to byte)
Area S R C
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- --- Specified values
only
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
501
Description DMPX(077) can perform 16-to-4 bit or 256-to-8 bit conversions. Set the left-
most digit of C to 0 to specify 16-to-4 bit conversion and set it to 1 to specify
256-to-8 bit conversion.
When the fourth (leftmost) digit of C is 0, DMPX(077) finds the locations of the
leftmost or rightmost ON bits in up to 4 source words and writes these loca-
tions to R beginning with the specified digit. (Set the third digit of C to 0 to find
the leftmost ON bits or 1 to find the rightmost ON bits.)
C
FInds leftmost bit
m l=1 (Convert
2 words.)

(Location of leftmost bit (m)
is written to R.) Leftmost bit
n=2 (Start with digit 2.)
When two or more digits are being converted, DMPX(077) will write the values
to the digits in R from right to left and will wrap around to the rightmost digit
after the leftmost digit, if necessary.
C: #0011 C: #0030 C: #0013
R Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0 R Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
R Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
C: #0032
R Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
502

When the fourth (leftmost) digit of C is 1, DMPX(077) finds the locations of the
leftmost (highest bit address) or rightmost (lowest bit address) ON bits in one
or two 16-word ranges of source words. The locations of these bits are written
to R beginning with the specified byte. (Set the third digit of C to 0 to find the
leftmost ON bits or 1 to find the rightmost ON bits.)
C
l =0 (Convert one 16-word range.)
Leftmost Rightmost
bit bit
Finds leftmost bit

(The location of the leftmost bit in the
16-word range (m) is written to R.)
n=1 (Start with byte 1.)
When two bytes are being converted, DMPX(077) will write the values to the
bytes in R from right to left and will wrap around to the rightmost byte if the
leftmost byte (byte 1) has been specified as the starting byte.
C: #1010 C: #1011
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if any of the source words contains 0000 hex (i.e., no
bit to encode).
ON if C is not within the specified ranges.
Precautions If the conversion data contains 0000 hex, but other data is to be encoded,
separate the conversion by using more than one DMPX(077) instructions.
DMPX(077) D0000 D0100 #0300
503
DMPX(077) D0000 D0100 #0000

DMPX(077) D0001 D0100 #0001
DMPX(077) D0002 D0100 #0002
DMPX(077) D0003 D0100 #0003
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, DMPX(077) will find the
leftmost ON bits in CIO 0100, CIO 0101, and CIO 0102 and write those loca-
tions to 3 digits in R beginning with digit 1 (the second digit), as indicated by C
(#0021).
S
R
C C: #
DMPX(077) finds the
leftmost ON bits.
S:
Starting digit
(Digit 1)
Digits
R: D00100
3-12-10 ASCII CONVERT: ASC(086)

Purpose Converts 4-bit hexadecimal digits in the source word into their 8-bit ASCII
equivalents.
Ladder Symbol
ASC(086)
S S: Source word
Di Di: Digit designator
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ASC(086)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ASC(086)

OK OK OK OK

Up to four digits in the source word can be converted. The digits are num-
bered 0 to 3, right to left.
504
Di: Digit Designator

The digit designator specifies various parameters for the conversion, as
Specifies the first digit in S to be converted (0 to 3).

Number of digits to be converted (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First byte of D to be used.
0: Rightmost byte
1: Leftmost byte
Parity 0: None
1: Even
2: Odd
D: First destination word

The converted ASCII data is written to the destination word(s) beginning with
the specified byte in D. Three destination words (D to D+3) will be required if 4
digits are being converted and the leftmost byte is selected as the first byte in
D. The destination words must be in the same data area.
Any bytes in the destination word(s) that are not overwritten with ASCII data
will be left unchanged.
Area S Di D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
only
505
Area S Di D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ASC(086) treats the contents of S as 4 hexadecimal digits, converts the des-
ignated digit(s) of S into their 8-bit ASCII equivalents, and writes this data into
the destination word(s) beginning with the specified byte in D.
Di
First digit to convert
Number of
digits (n+1)
Left (1) Right (0)
Note Refer to Appendix A in the CS/CJ-series Programming Consoles Operation

Manual (W341) for a table of extended ASCII characters.
Parity
It is possible to specify the parity of the ASCII data for use in error control dur-
ing data transmissions. The leftmost bit of each ASCII character will be auto-
matically adjusted for even, odd, or no parity.
When no parity (0) is designated, the leftmost bit will always be zero. When
even parity (1) is designated, the leftmost bit will be adjusted so that the total
number of ON bits is even. When odd parity (2) is designated, the leftmost bit
of each ASCII character will be adjusted so that there is an odd number of ON
bits. The status of the parity bit does not affect the meaning of the ASCII code.
Examples of even parity:
When adjusted for even parity, ASCII “31” (00110001) will be “B1” (10110001:
parity bit turned ON to create an even number of ON bits); ASCII “36”
(00110110) will be “36” (00110110: parity bit remains OFF because the num-
ber of ON bits is already even).
Examples of odd parity:
When adjusted for odd parity, ASCII “36” (00110110) will be “B6” (10110110:
parity bit turned ON to create an odd number of ON bits); ASCII “46”
(01000110) will be “46” (01000110: parity bit remains OFF because the num-
ber of ON bits is already odd).
Examples of Di
When two or more digits are being converted, ASC(086) will read the bytes in
S from right to left and will wrap around to the rightmost byte if necessary. The
following diagram shows some example values for Di and the conversions that
they produce.
506
Di: #0011 Di: #0112 Di: #0030
Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
Leftmost Rightmost Leftmost Leftmost Rightmost

Rightmost Leftmost Rightmost
Di: #0130
Leftmost
Leftmost Rightmost
Rightmost
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the content of Di is not within the specified ranges.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, ASC(086) converts three
hexadecimal digits in D00100 (beginning with digit 1) into their ASCII equiva-
lents and writes this data to D00200 and D00201 beginning with the leftmost
byte in D00200. In this case, a digit designator of #0121 specifies no parity,
the starting byte (when writing) = leftmost byte, the number of digits to read =
3, and the starting digit (when reading) = digit 1.
S
Di
D
Di: #
Number of digits
Starting digit
Digits
S: D00100
Starting byte
(leftmost byte)
D:
With CPU Units with unit version 4.0 of later, there are instructions to convert
4, 8, and 16 digits of numeric data to ASCII (STR4(524), STR8(527), and
STR16(528)).
507
3-12-11 ASCII TO HEX: HEX(162)

Purpose Converts up to 4 bytes of ASCII data in the source word to their hexadecimal
equivalents and writes these digits in the specified destination word.
Ladder Symbol
HEX(162)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition HEX(162)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @HEX(162)

OK OK OK OK

The contents of the source words are treated as ASCII data. Up to three
source words can be used. (Three source words will be required if 4 bytes are
being converted and the leftmost byte is selected as the first byte in S.) The
source words must be in the same data area.
Di: Digit Designator
The digit designator specifies various parameters for the conversion, as
Specifies the first digit in D to receive converted data (0 to 3).

Number of bytes to be converted (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First byte of S to be converted.
0: Rightmost byte
1: Leftmost byte
Parity 0: None
1: Even
2: Odd
D: Destination word
The converted hexadecimal digits are written into D from right to left, begin-
ning with the specified first digit. Any digits in the destination word that are not
overwritten with the converted data will be left unchanged.
508
Area S Di D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
only
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description HEX(162) treats the contents of the source word(s) as ASCII data represent-
ing hexadecimal digits (0 to 9 and A to F), converts the specified number of
bytes to hexadecimal, and writes the hexadecimal data to the destination
word beginning at the specified digit.
An error will occur if the source words contain data which is not an ASCII
equivalent of hexadecimal digits. The following table shows hexadecimal dig-
its and their ASCII equivalents (excluding parity bits).
Flags
Hexadecimal digits (4 bits) ASCII equivalent (2 hexadecimal digits)
0 to 9 30 to 39
A to F 41 to 46

Manual (W341) for a table of extended ASCII characters.
509
The following diagram shows the basic operation of HEX(162) with Di=0021.
C: 0021
Di
First byte to convert
Left (1) Right (0)
Number of digits (n+1)
First digit to write
Parity
It is possible to specify the parity of the ASCII data for use in error control dur-
ing data transmissions. The leftmost bit in each byte is the parity bit. With no
parity the parity bit should always be zero, with even parity the status of the
parity bit should result in an even number of ON bits, and with odd parity the
status of the parity bit should result in an odd number of ON bits.
The following table shows the operation of HEX(162) for each parity setting.
Parity setting Operation of HEX(162)
(leftmost digit of Di)
No parity (0) HEX(162) will be executed only when the parity bit in each
byte is 0. An error will occur if a parity bit is non-zero.
Even parity (1) HEX(162) will be executed only when there is an even num-
ber of ON bits in each byte. An error will occur if a byte has
an odd number of ON bits.
Odd parity (2) HEX(162) will be executed only when there is an odd num-
ber of ON bits in each byte. An error will occur if a byte has
an even number of ON bits.
Examples of Di
When two or more bytes are being converted, HEX(162) will write the con-
verted digits to the destination word from right to left and will wrap around to
the rightmost digit if necessary. The following diagram shows some example
values for Di and the conversions that they produce.
Di: #0112 Di: #0030 Di: #0131
Leftmost Leftmost Rightmost Leftmost
Rightmost Leftmost Rightmost Leftmost Rightmost
Rightmost

510
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if there is a parity error in the ASCII data.
ON if the ASCII data in the source words is not equivalent
to hexadecimal digits
ON if the content of Di is not within the specified ranges.
Precautions An error will occur and the Error Flag will be turned ON if there is a parity error
in the ASCII data, the ASCII data in the source words is not equivalent to
hexadecimal digits, or the content of Di is not within the specified ranges.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, HEX(162) converts the
ASCII data in D00100 and D00101 according to the settings of the digit desig-
nator. (Di=#0121 specifies no parity, the starting byte (when reading) = left-
most byte, the number of bytes to read = 3, and the starting digit (when
writing) = digit 1.)
HEX(162) converts three bytes of ASCII data (3 characters) beginning with
the leftmost byte of D00100 into their hexadecimal equivalents and writes this
data to D00200 beginning with digit 1.
S
Di
D Di: #
Starting byte
(leftmost byte)
S:
Number of digits
Starting digit (digit 1)
3 digits
D: D00200
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, HEX(162) converts the

ASCII data in D00010 beginning with the rightmost byte and writes the hexa-
decimal equivalents in D00300 beginning with digit 1.
The digit designator setting of #1011 specifies even parity, the starting byte
(when reading) = rightmost byte, the number of bytes to read = 2, and the
starting digit (when writing) = digit 1.)
511
Starting digit in D: Digit 1

Number of bytes: 2
Starting byte in S: Rightmost
Parity: Even
Parity bits: Result in even parity
S: D00100
Starting byte: rightmost
Conversion
Starting digit (digit 1)
D: D00300 Not changed
Number of bytes (2 bytes)

Not changed
With CPU Units with unit version 4.0 of later, there are instructions to convert
ASCII to 4, 8, and 16 digits of numeric data (NUM4(517), NUM8(520), and
NUM16(522)).
3-12-12 COLUMN TO LINE: LINE(063)

Purpose Converts a column of bits from a 16-word range (the same bit number in 16
consecutive words) to the 16 bits of the destination word.
Ladder Symbol
LINE(063)
N N: Bit number
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition LINE(063)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @LINE(063)

OK OK OK OK

Specifies the first source word. S and S+15 must be in the same data area.
N: Bit Number
Specifies the bit number (0000 to 000F or &0 to &15) to be copied from the
source words.
512
Area S N D
CIO 6128
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to D32767
D32752
E32752
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_00000 to En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
En_32752
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to 000F ---
(binary) or &0 to
&15
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description LINE(063) copies the 16 bits with bit number N from the 16-word range S to
S+15 to the destination word D. Bit N of S+m is copied to bit m of D, i.e., bit N
of S is copied to bit 00 of D and bit N of S+15 is copied to bit 15 of D.
N
Bit Bit
15 00
S 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
S+1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
S+2 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
S+3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
S+15 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Bit Bit
15 00
D 0 . . . 0 1 1 1
513
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the specified range of 0000 to 000F.
Equals Flag = ON if D is 0000 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, LINE(063) copies bit 5
from D00100 to D00115 to the 16 bits in D00200.
&5 N: #0005
S:
to to
D: D00200
3-12-13 LINE TO COLUMN: COLM(064)

Purpose Converts the 16 bits of the source word to a column of bits in a 16-word range
of destination words (the same bit number in 16 consecutive words).
Ladder Symbol
COLM(064)
S S: Source word
N N: Bit number
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition COLM(064)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @COLM(064)

OK OK OK OK
Operands D: First Destination Word

Specifies the first destination word. D and D+15 must be in the same data
area.
514
N: Bit Number
Specifies the bit number (0000 to 000F or &0 to &15) to be overwritten by the
source word.
Area S D N
CIO 6143 CIO 6128 CIO 6143
D32767 D32752 D32767
E32767 E32752 E32767
En_32767 En_32752 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF --- #0000 to #000F
(binary) (binary) or &0 to
&15
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
515
Description COLM(064) copies the 16 bits from S to the 16 bits with bit number N in the
16-word range D to D+15. Bit m of S is copied to bit N of D+m, i.e., bit 00 of S
is copied to bit N of D and bit 15 of S is copied to bit N of D+15.
Bit Bit
15 00
S 0 . . . . . . . 0 1 1 1
Bit Bi Bit
15 00
D 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
D+1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
D+2 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
D+3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
D+15 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the specified range of 0000 to 000F.
Equals Flag = ON if bit N is 0 in all 16 words D to D+15 after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, COLM(064) copies the 16
bits in D00200 (bits 00 through 15) to bit 5 in D00100 through D00115.
S: D00200
D:
to to
516
3-12-14 SIGNED BCD TO BINARY: BINS(470)

Purpose Converts one word of signed BCD data to one word of signed binary data.
Ladder Symbol
BINS(470)
C C: Control word
S S: Source word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BINS(470)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BINS(470)

OK OK OK OK

Specifies the signed BCD format. C must be 0000 to 0003.
Area C S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #0003 ---
(binary)
517
Area C S D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BINS(470) converts signed BCD data to signed binary data. First the signed
BCD data format and range in word S are checked against the setting in the
control word (C). If the source data is correct, the signed BCD data in S is
converted to signed binary and output to D. If the source data is incorrect, the
Error Flag will be turned ON and the instruction will not be executed.
Signed BCD format

specified in C
When the converted data is negative, it will be output as the 2’s complement
and the Negative Flag be will turned ON. NEG(160) can be used to determine
the absolute value of a negative signed binary number. Refer to 3-12-52’S
COMPLEMENT: NEG(160) for details.
A value of –0 in the source data will be treated as 0 and will not cause an
error. Also, the status of bits 13 to 15 of S is not checked when C=0000.
Note Some Special I/O Units output signed BCD data. Calculations using this data
will normally be easier if it is first converted to signed binary data with
BINS(470).
The control word specifies the signed BCD format as shown below.
C = 0000 (Input Data Range: –999 to 999 BCD)
3 digits BCD, 12 bits

Sign bit (0: Positive; 1: Negative)
Status of 3 bits: 0

3 bits of digit 4 (0 to 7)

0 to 9: Fourth digit BCD
F: Negative (−)
A to E: Error
518

A: Negative (−1)
F: Negative (−)
B to E: Error
The following table shows the possible BCD values for each signed BCD for-
mat and the corresponding signed binary values.
Setting Signed BCD values Signed binary values
C=0000 –999 to –1 and 0 to 999 FC19 to FFFF and 0000 to 03E7
C=0001 –7999 to –1 and 0 to 7999 E0C1 to FFFF and 0000 to 1F3F
C=0002 –999 to –1 and 0 to 9999 FC19 to FFFF and 0000 to 270F
C=0003 –1999 to –1 and 0 to 9999 F831 to FFFF and 0000 to 270F
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if C is not within the specified range of 0000 to 0003.
ON if C=0002 and the leftmost digit of S is A to E.
ON if C=0003 and the leftmost digit of S is B to E.
ON if the content of S is not BCD.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of D is ON after execution.
Examples BCD Format 0 (C=#0000)

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the signed BCD data for-
mat and range in D00100 are checked against the format specified in the con-
trol word (0000). The source data is correct, so the signed BCD data in
D00100 is converted to signed binary and output to D00200.
S: D00100
1123 Signed BCD data (–123)
D: D00200
FF85 Signed binary data
BCD Format 0 (C=#0003)

When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the signed BCD data for-
mat and range in D00100 are checked against the format specified in the con-
trol word (0003). The source data is correct, so the signed BCD data in
D00300 is converted to signed binary and output to D00400.
S: D00300
A369 Signed BCD data
(–1,369)
D: D00400
FAA7 Signed binary data
519
3-12-15 DOUBLE SIGNED BCD TO BINARY: BISL(472)

Purpose Converts double signed BCD data to double signed binary data.
Ladder Symbol
BISL(472)
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BISL(472)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BISL(472)

OK OK OK OK

Area C S D
CIO 6143
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to D32766
D32767
E32767
En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #0003 ---
(binary)
520
Area C S D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BISL(472) converts the double signed BCD data in S+1 and S to double
signed binary data and writes the result in D+1 and D. First the signed BCD
data format and range in words S+1 and S are checked against the setting in
the control word (C). If the source data is correct, the signed BCD data S+1
and S is converted to signed binary and output to D+1 and D. If the source
data is incorrect, the Error Flag will be turned ON and the instruction will not
be executed.
Signed BCD format

specified in C
When the converted data is negative, it will be output as the 2’s complement
and the Negative Flag be will turned ON. NEGL(161) can be used to deter-
mine the absolute value of a negative double signed binary number. Refer to
3-12-6 DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT: NEGL(161) for details.
Values of –0 in the source data will be treated as 0 and will not cause an error.
Also, the status of bits 13 to 15 of S+1 is not checked when C=0000.
Note Some Special I/O Units output signed BCD data. Calculations using this data
will normally be easier if it is first converted to signed binary data with
BISL(472).
The control word specifies the signed BCD format as shown below.
C = 0000 (Input Data Range: –999 9999 to 999 9999 BCD)
S+1 S

Status of 3 bits: 0

S+1 S

521

S+1 S

0 to 9: Eighth digit BCD
F: Negative (–)
A to E: Error

S+1 S

A: Negative (–1)
F: Negative (–)
B to E: Error
The following table shows the possible BCD values for each signed BCD for-
mat and the corresponding signed binary values.
Setting Signed BCD values Signed binary values
C=0000 –999 9999 to –1 FF67 6981 to FFFF FFFF
0 to 999 9999 0000 0000 to 0098 967F
C=0001 –7999 9999 to –1 FB3B 4C01 to FFFF FFFF
0 to 7999 9999 0000 0000 to 04C4 B3FF
C=0002 –999 9999 to –1 FF67 6981 to FFFF FFFF
0 to 9999 9999 0000 0000 to 05F5 E0FF
C=0003 –1999 9999 to –1 FECE D301 to FFFF FFFF
0 to 9999 9999 0000 0000 to 05F5 E0FF
Flags
ON if C=0002 and the leftmost digit of S+1 is A to E.
ON if C=0003 and the leftmost digit of S+1 is B to E.
ON if the content of S+1 and S is not BCD.
Equals Flag = ON if D+1 contains 0000 0000 after execution.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of D+1 is ON after execution.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the double signed BCD
data format and range in D00101 and D00100 are checked against the format
specified in the control word (0002). The source data is correct, so the double
signed BCD data in D00101 and D00100 is converted to double signed binary
and output to D00201 and D00200.
S+1: D00101 S: D00100
F345 6789
Double signed BCD data
(–3,456,789)
D+1: D00201 D: D00200

FFCB 40EB Double signed binary data
522
3-12-16 SIGNED BINARY TO BCD: BCDS(471)

Purpose Converts one word of signed binary data to one word of signed BCD data.
Ladder Symbol
BCDS(471)
C C: Control word
S S: Source word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BCDS(471)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BCDS(471)

OK OK OK OK
Operand C: Control Word

S: Source Word
Contains the signed binary data to be converted. The content of S must be
within the valid range of the BCD format specified in C.
Setting Allowed values for S
C=0000 FC19 to FFFF or 0000 to 03E7
C=0001 E0C1 to FFFF or 0000 to 1F3F
C=0002 FC19 to FFFF or 0000 to 270F
C=0003 F831 to FFFF or 0000 to 270F
D: Destination word
Contains the converted signed BCD data. See the description section below
for an explanation of the BCD formats.
Area C S D
(n = 0 to C)
523
Area C S D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #0003 ---
(binary)
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to 1–2048 to +2047 ,IR5
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BCDS(471) converts signed binary data to signed BCD data. First the signed
binary data in word S is checked to verify that it is within the valid range for the
signed BCD format specified in the control word (C). If the source data is cor-
rect, the signed binary data in S is converted to signed BCD and output to D.
If the source data is incorrect, the Error Flag will be turned ON and the
instruction will not be executed.
Signed BCD format

specified in C
Note 1. Values of –0 in the source data will be treated as 0 and will not cause an
error.
2. Some Special I/O Units require signed BCD data inputs. BCDS(471) can
be used to convert signed binary data for output to these Units.
The control word specifies the signed BCD format that will be used for the
result, as shown below.
C = 0000 (Output Data Range: –999 to 999 BCD)

Status of 3 bits: 0

524

F: Negative (–)

A: Negative (–1)
F: Negative (–)
The following table shows the possible signed binary values for each signed
BCD format. An error will occur if the source data is not within the allowed
range for the specified signed BCD format.
Setting Signed binary values Signed BCD values
C=0000 FC19 to FFFF and 0000 to 03E7 –999 to –1 and 0 to 999
C=0001 E0C1 to FFFF and 0000 to 1F3F –7999 to –1 and 0 to 7999
C=0002 FC19 to FFFF and 0000 to 270F –999 to –1 and 0 to 9999
C=0003 F831 to FFFF and 0000 to 270F –1999 to –1 and 0 to 9999
Flags
ON if C=0000 and the source data is not within the allowed
ranges (FC19 to FFFF or 0000 to 03E7).
ranges (E0C1 to FFFF or 0000 to 1F3F).
ranges (FC19 to FFFF or 0000 to 270F).
ranges (F831 to FFFF or 0000 to 270F).
Negative Flag N ON if C=0000 or 0001 and the result’s sign bit is ON after
execution.
ON if C=0002 and the leftmost digit of the result is F.
ON if C=0003 and the leftmost digit of the result is A or F.
3-12-17 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY TO BCD: BDSL(473)

Purpose Converts double signed binary data to double signed BCD data.
Ladder Symbol
BDSL(473)
C C: Control word
525
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BDSL(473)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BDSL(473)

Source words S+1 and S contain the double signed binary data to be con-
verted. Their content must be within the valid range of the BCD format speci-
fied in C.
Setting Allowed values for S+1 and S
C=0000 FF67 6981 to FFFF FFFF or 0000 0000 to 0098 967F
C=0001 FB3B 4C01 to FFFF FFFF or 0000 0000 to 04C4 B3FF
C=0002 FF67 6981 to FFFF FFFF or 0000 0000 to 05F5 E0FF
C=0003 FECE D301 to FFFF FFFF or 0000 0000 to 05F5 E0FF

Destination words D+1 and D contain the converted double signed BCD data.
See the description section below for an explanation of the BCD formats.
Area C S D
CIO 6143
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to D32766
D32767
E32767
En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #0003 ---
(binary)
526
Area C S D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BDSL(473) converts double signed binary data to double signed BCD data.
First the double signed binary data in S+1 and S is checked to verify that it is
within the valid range for the signed BCD format specified in the control word
(C). If the source data is correct, the double signed binary data in S+1 and S
is converted to double signed BCD and output to D+1 and D. If the source
data is incorrect, the Error Flag will be turned ON and the instruction will not
be executed.
Signed BCD format

specified in C

Note 1. Values of –0 in the source data will be treated as 0 and will not cause an
error.
2. Some Special I/O Units require signed BCD data inputs. BDSL(473) can
be used to convert double signed binary data for output to these Units.
The control word specifies the signed BCD format that will be used for the
result, as shown below.
C = 0000 (Output Data Range: –999 9999 to 999 9999 BCD)
S+1 S

Status of 3 bits: 0

S+1 S


S+1 S

F: Negative (–)
527

S+1 S

A: Negative (–1)
F: Negative (–)
The following table shows the possible double signed binary values for each
signed BCD format. An error will occur if the source data is not within the
allowed range for the specified signed BCD format.
Setting Signed binary values Signed BCD values
C=0000 FF67 6981 to FFFF FFFF –999 9999 to –1
0000 0000 to 0098 967F 0 to 999 9999
C=0001 FB3B 4C01 to FFFF FFFF –7999 9999 to –1
0000 0000 to 04C4 B3FF 0 to 7999 9999
C=0002 FF67 6981 to FFFF FFFF –999 9999 to –1
0000 0000 to 05F5 E0FF 0 to 9999 9999
C=0003 FECE D301 to FFFF FFFF –1999 9999 to –1
0000 0000 to 05F5 E0FF 0 to 9999 9999
Flags
ON if C=0000 and the source data is not within the range:
FF67 6981 to FFFF FFFF or 0000 0000 to 0098 967F.
FB3B 4C01 to FFFF FFFF or 0000 0000 to 04C4 B3FF.
FF67 6981 to FFFF FFFF or 0000 0000 to 05F5 E0FF.
FECE D301 to FFFF FFFF or 0000 0000 to 05F5 E0FF.
Negative Flag N ON if C=0000 or 0001 and the result’s sign bit is ON after
execution.
ON if C=0002 and the leftmost digit of the result is F.
ON if C=0003 and the leftmost digit of the result is A or F.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the double signed binary
data in D00101 and D00100 are checked against the format specified in the
control word (0003). The source data is correct, so the double signed binary
data in D00101 and D00100 is converted to double signed BCD and output to
D00201 and D00200.
S+1: D00101 S: D00100
FF8B 344F Double signed binary data
D+1: D00201 D: D00200

F765 4321 Double signed BCD data
(–7,654,321)
528
3-12-18 GRAY CODE CONVERT: GRY(474)

Purpose Converts the gray binary code in a specified word to standard binary data,
BCD data, or an angle at the specified resolution.
This instruction is supported by only CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later
(including CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units from lot number 030201 or
later).
Ladder Symbol
GRY(474)
C C: First control word
S S: Source word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition GRY(474)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @GRY(474)

OK OK OK OK

Specifies the parameters for the conversion as shown below.
15 12 11 87 43 0
Do not
C use (0).
Resolution
0 or 1 to F hex (1 to 15 decimal) bits
0 hex = User specified in bits 12 to 15 of C+2.
Conversion Mode
0 hex = Binary Mode, 1 hex = BCD Mode, 2 hex = 360° Mode
Operating Mode
0 hex = Gray binary code conversion
C+1
Zero Point Compensation (0000 to 7FFF Hex (Binary Data))

Note: Zero point compensation that exceeds the resolution set in the word C of the control
data cannot be specified.
15 12 11 0
C+2
Encoder Remainder Compensation (Binary Data)

Note: The range that can be set depends on the user-specified resolution.
User-specified Resolution
0 hex = 256, 1 hex = 360, 2 hex = 720, 3 hex = 1,024, 4 to F hex = Do not use.
Note: The above setting is valid when the resolution is set to 0 hex in bits 00 to 03 of C.
529
S: Source Word
Contains the gray binary code to be converted. The range must be within the
number of bits determined by the resolution specified in bits 00 to 03 of C. All
bits outside of the number of bits for the specified resolution will be ignored.
For example, if the specified resolution is 08 hex and S contains FFFF hex,
the gray binary code will be taken as 00FF hex.

Destination words D+1 and D contain the results of converting the gray binary
code at the resolution specified in bits 00 to 03 of the control data word C and
the conversion mode specified in bits 04 to 07 of the control data word C. The
leftmost word is output to D+1 and the rightmost word is output to D. The
ranges of data that are output are as follows:
Binary Mode: 0000 0000 to 0000 7FFF hex
BCD Mode: 0000 0000 to 0003 2767
360° Mode: 0000 0000 to 0000 3599
(0.0° to 359.9° in 0.1° increments, BCD)
D Rightmost word
D+1 Leftmost word
Area C S D
CIO 6142 CIO 6143 CIO 6142
D32766 D32767 D32766
E32766 E32767 E32766
En_32766 En_32767 En_32766
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #FFFF ---
(binary)
530
Area C S D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description GRY(474) converts the gray binary code in the word specified in S at the res-
olution specified in C using one of the following conversion modes (binary,
BCD, or 360°), also specified in C, and places the results in D and D+1.
Conversion mode Function
Binary Mode Gray binary code is converted to binary data between
0000 0000 and 0000 7FFF hex. Zero point offset and remainder
compensation is applied and then the result is output to D and
D+1.
BCD Mode Gray binary code is converted to BCD data. Zero point offset
and remainder compensation is applied, the data is converted
to BCD between 0000 0000 and 0003 2767, and then the result
is output to D and D+1.
360° Mode Gray binary code is converted to BCD data. Zero point offset
and remainder compensation is applied, the data is converted
to an angle between 0000 0000 and 0000 3599 (0.0° to 359.9°
in 0.1° increments), and then the result is output to D and D+1.
Note 1. GRY(474) is normally used when inputting, through a DC Input Unit, a par-
allel signal (2n) from an absolute encoder that outputs a gray binary code.
2. If the word specified for S is allocated to an Input Unit, the input data con-
verted by GRY(474) will be for the gray binary code from the previous CPU
Unit cycle, i.e., it will be one cycle time old.
Restrictions The following restrictions apply to GRY(474).
■ Restrictions on the CPU Unit

GRY(474) can be used only for the following models of CPU Unit and only for
CPU Units manufactured on or after 1 February 2003 (lot number 030201 or
later, including CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later).
• CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
• CJ1M-CPU@@
• CJ1G-CPU@@H
• CJ1H-CPU@@H
• CS1G-CPU@@H
• CS1H-CPU@@H
• CS1D-CPU@@S
The manufacturing date can be confirmed using the lot number given on the
side or bottom of the CPU Unit. Lot numbers indicate the manufacturing date
as follows:
YYMMDD nnnn
YY = Rightmost two digits of the year, MM = Month as a numeric value,
DD = Day of month, nnnn = Serial number
Note If GRY(474) is transferred to a CPU Unit that does not support it and the pro-
gram is read from a Programming Console, “?” will be displayed for GRY(474)
to indicate an illegal instruction. If GRY(474) is executed with an ON input
531
condition in a CPU Unit that does not support it, an error will occur and pro-
gram execution will stop.
■ Restrictions on the CX-Programmer

GRY(474) can be used only with CX-Programmer version 3.2 or later.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if bits 12 to 15 of C are not 0 hex (operating mode =
gray binary code conversion).
ON if the zero point offset in C+1 is not within the specified
resolution (including user-specified resolutions).
ON if bits 04 to 07 of C are not 0 hex (= Binary Mode),
1 hex (= BCD Mode), or 2 hex (= 360° Mode).
ON if the specified encoder remainder compensation
exceeds the set user-specified resolution when bits 00 to
03 of C are 0 hex (= user-specified resolution).
ON if the converted binary value is less than the encoder
remainder compensation when bits 00 to 03 of C are 0 hex
(= user-specified resolution).
ON if the converted binary value is less than the resolution
when bits 00 to 03 of C are 0 hex (= user-specified resolu-
tion).
Equals Flag = OFF in all cases.
Negative Flag N OFF in all cases.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the gray binary code in
CIO 0010 is converted according to the settings in the control data in D00000
to D00002 and the result is output to D00200 and D00201.
000000
GRY
C D00000
S 0010
D D00200
532
■ Example 1: Converting to Binary Data with an 8-bit Resolution and Zero

Point Offset of 001A Hex
15 12 11 87 43 0
C: D00000 0 0 0 8
Resolution: 8-bit
Conversion mode: Binary Mode
Operating mode: Gray binary code conversion
C+1: D00001 001A
Zero point offset: 001A hex
C+2: D00002 0 000

User-specified resolution: Not used.
S: 0010 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 Gray binary code

Converted and offset.
D: D00200 0017 Result of binary conversion and offsetting stored.
D+1: D00201 0000
■ Example 2: Converting to Angle Data with a 10-bit Resolution and Zero

Point Offset of 0151 Hex
15 12 11 87 43 0
C: D00000 0 0 2 A
Resolution: 10-bit
Conversion mode: 360° Mode
C+1: D00001 0151
Zero point offset: 0151 hex
C+2: D00002 0 000
User-specified resolution: Not used.

D: D00200 3488 Angle data stored.
D+1: D00201 0000
533
■ Example 3: Converting to BCD Data with for an OMRON E6C2-AG5C

Absolute Encoder (Resolution: 360/rotation, Encoder Remainder
Compensation: 76) and Zero Point Offset of 0000 Hex
15 12 11 87 43 0
C: D00000 0 0 1 0
Resolution: User-specified
Conversion mode: BCD Mode
C+1: D00001 0000

Zero point offset: 0000 hex
C+2: D00002 1 04C

User-specified resolution: 360, Encoder remainder compensation: 04C hex (76 decimal)

D: D00200 0100 Result of BCD conversion and offsetting stored.
D+1: D00201 0000
■ Example 4: Converting to BCD Data with for an OMRON E6C2-AG5C

Absolute Encoder (Resolution: 360/rotation, Encoder Remainder
Compensation: 76) and Zero Point Offset of 000A Hex
15 12 11 87 43 0
C: D00000 0 0 1 0
Resolution: User-specified
Conversion mode: BCD Mode
C+1: D00001 000A

Zero point offset: 000A hex
C+2: D00002 1 04C

User-specified resolution: 360, Encoder remainder compensation: 04C hex (76 decimal)

D: D00200 0100 Result of BCD conversion and offsetting stored.
D+1: D00201 0000
3-12-19 FOUR-DIGIT NUMBER TO ASCII: STR4(601)

Purpose Converts a 4-digit hexadecimal number (#0000 to #FFFF) to ASCII data (4
characters).
This instruction is supported by CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 4.0
or later only.
534
Ladder Symbol
STR4
S S: Number
D D: ASCII text
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition STR4(601)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @STR4(601)

OK OK OK OK OK
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32766
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description STR4(601) converts the numerical data in S (4-digit hexadecimal, #0000 to

#FFFF) to ASCII data (4 characters) and writes the result to D and D+1.
535
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
S 1 2 3 4
Hexadecimal: #1234
ASCII
15 8 7 0
D 31 32
D+1 33 34
Note If the source data is 0, the Equals Flag will turn ON.
If the leftmost bit of the source data is 1, the Negative Flag will turn ON.
Restrictions The following restrictions apply to STR4(601).

STR4(601) can be used in CPU Units with unit version 4.0 or later only.
STR4(601) can be used in CX-Programmer version 7 or higher only.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Negative Flag N ON when the leftmost bit of the source data is 1.
Examples
■ Example 1: Converting 3 Words of Numerical Data to ASCII Data
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 3 words of numerical
data starting at D00010 are converted, one word at a time, to ASCII data. The
converted ASCII data is stored in the DM Area starting at D00100.
536
000000
MOVR
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D00010
IR0 S: D00010 0 1 2 3
S+1: D00011 4 5 6 7
000000
MOVR S+2: D00012 8 9 A B
D00100
IR1 Hexadecimal
FOR ASCII
15 8 7 0
&3
D: D00100 30 31
00000
STR4 D+1: D00101 32 33
S ,IR0+ D+2: D00102 34 35
D ,IR1++ D+3: D00103 36 37
D+4: D00104 38 39
D+5: D00105 41 42
NEXT
■ Example 2: Converting Hexadecimal Data to ASCII Data in BCD Format

When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the source data in D00000
(&1234 in decimal) is converted to BCD data and the result is stored tempo-
rarily in D00010. Next, the BCD data is converted to ASCII data and the result
is output to D00100 and D00101.
000001 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
BCD
&1234 Decimal
D00000 D00000 0 4 D 2
(#04D2 hexadecimal)
D00010
Binary (hexadecimal)
STR4
S D00010 BCD
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D D00100
S: D00010 1 2 3 4
BCD
ASCII (BCD)
15 8 7 0
D: D00100 31 32
D+1: D00101 33 34
3-12-20 EIGHT-DIGIT NUMBER TO ASCII: STR8(602)

Purpose Converts an 8-digit hexadecimal number (#0000 0000 to #FFFF FFFF) to
ASCII data (8 characters).
or later only.
537
Ladder Symbol
STR8
S S: Number
D D: ASCII text
Variations

OK OK OK OK OK
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to D32764
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 0000 to #FFFF FFFF ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description STR8(602) converts the numerical data in S and S+1 (8-digit hexadecimal,
#0000 0000 to #FFFF FFFF) to ASCII data (8 characters) and writes the
result to D, D+1, D+2, and D+3.
538
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
S 5 6 7 8
S+1 1 2 3 4
Hexadecimal: #12345678
ASCII
15 8 7 0
D 31 32
D+1 33 34
D+2 35 36
D+3 37 38


Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
3-12-21 SIXTEEN-DIGIT NUMBER TO ASCII: STR16(603)

Purpose Converts a 16-digit hexadecimal number (#0000 0000 0000 0000 to
#FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF) to ASCII data (16 characters).
or later only.
Ladder Symbol
STR16
S S: Number
D D: ASCII text
Variations

OK OK OK OK OK
539
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32764 D00000 to D32760
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description STR16(603) converts the numerical data in S to S+3 (16-digit hexadecimal,

#0000 0000 0000 0000 to #FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF) to ASCII data (16 char-
acters) and writes the result to D to D+7.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
S C D E F
S+1 8 9 A B
S+2 4 5 6 7
S+3 0 1 2 3
Hexadecimal: #1234567890ABCDEF
ASCII
15 8 7 0
D 30 31
D+1 32 33
D+2 34 35
D+3 36 37
D+4 38 39
D+5 41 42
D+6 43 44
D+7 45 46
540

Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
3-12-22 ASCII TO FOUR-DIGIT NUMBER: NUM4(604)

Purpose Converts 4 characters of ASCII data to a 4-digit hexadecimal number.
or later only.
Ladder Symbol
NUM4
S S: ASCII text
D D: Number
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition NUM4(604)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @NUM4(604)

OK OK OK OK OK
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
541
Area S D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description NUM4(604) converts the 4 characters of ASCII data in S and S+1 to numeri-
cal data (4-digit hexadecimal) and writes the result to D.
The Error Flag will be turned ON if the ASCII data in S and S+1 contains any
characters that are not hexadecimal digits. In this case, the instruction will not
be executed.
15 8 7 0
S 31 32
S+1 33 34
ASCII
Hexadecimal
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D 1 2 3 4
Note If the numerical data is 0, the Equals Flag will turn ON.
If the leftmost bit of the numerical data is 1, the Negative Flag will turn ON.
Restrictions The following restrictions apply to NUM4(604).

NUM4(604) can be used in CPU Units with unit version 4.0 or later only.
NUM4(604) can be used in CX-Programmer version 7 or higher only.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the source words contain any ASCII characters that
are not hexadecimal equivalents (0 to 9, a to f, or A to F).
542
Examples
■ Example 1: Converting 3 Sets of 4 ASCII Characters to the Equivalent
Hexadecimal Digits
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 6 words of ASCII data
starting at D00010 are converted, two words at a time, to numerical data. The
converted numerical data is stored in the DM Area starting at D00100.
15 8 7 0
000000
MOVR S: D00010 31 32
D00010 S+1: D00011 41 42
IR0 S+2: D00012 38 39
S+3: D00013 45 46
000000
MOVR S+4: D00014 30 30
D00100 S+5: D00015 30 30
IR1
ASCII
FOR
&3 Hexadecimal
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
000000
NUM4 D: D00100 1 2 A B
S ,IR0++ D+1: D00101 8 9 E F
D ,IR1+ D+2: D00102 0 0 0 0
NEXT
■ Example 2: Converting ASCII Data in BCD Format to Hexadecimal Data

When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, the ASCII characters in
D00000 and D00001 are converted to BCD data and the result is stored tem-
porarily in D00010. Next, the BCD data is converted to hexadecimal and the
result is output to D00100.
000001
NUM4 15 8 7 0
S D00000
S: D00000 31 32
D D00010 S+1: D00001 33 34
BIN
ASCII (BCD)
D00010
D00100
BCD
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D: D00010 1 2 3 4
BCD
Binary (hexadecimal)
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
0 4 D 2
&1234 Decimal
D00100 (#04D2 hexadecimal)
543
3-12-23 ASCII TO EIGHT-DIGIT NUMBER: NUM8(605)

Purpose Converts 8 characters of ASCII data to an 8-digit hexadecimal number.
or later only.
Ladder Symbol
NUM8
S S: ASCII text
D D: Number
Variations

OK OK OK OK OK
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32764 D00000 to D32766
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description NUM8(605) converts the 8 characters of ASCII data in S to S+3 to numerical

data (4-digit hexadecimal) and writes the result to D and D+1.
544
The Error Flag will be turned ON if the ASCII data contains any characters
that are not hexadecimal digits. In this case, the instruction will not be exe-
cuted.
15 8 7 0
S 31 32
S+1 33 34
S+2 35 36
S+3 37 38
ASCII
Hexadecimal 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D 5 6 7 8
D+1 1 2 3 4


Flags
3-12-24 ASCII TO SIXTEEN-DIGIT NUMBER: NUM16(606)

Purpose Converts 16 characters of ASCII data to an 16-digit hexadecimal number.
or later only.
Ladder Symbol
NUM16
S S: ASCII text
D D: Number
Variations
545

OK OK OK OK OK
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32760 D00000 to D32764
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description NUM16(606) converts the 16 characters of ASCII data in S to S+7 to numeri-

cal data (4-digit hexadecimal) and writes the result to D and D+3.
The Error Flag will be turned ON if the ASCII data contains any characters
that are not hexadecimal digits. In this case, the instruction will not be exe-
cuted.
546
15 8 7 0
S 30 31
S+1 32 33
S+2 34 35
S+3 36 37
S+4 38 39
S+5 41 42
S+6 43 44
S+7 45 46
ASCII
Hexadecimal
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D C D E F
D+1 8 9 A B
D+2 4 5 6 7
D+3 0 1 2 3


Flags
547
Logic Instructions Section 3-13
3-13 Logic Instructions

This section describes instructions which perform logic operations on word
data.
LOGICAL AND ANDW 034 548
DOUBLE LOGICAL AND ANDL 610 550
LOGICAL OR ORW 035 551
DOUBLE LOGICAL OR ORWL 611 553
EXCLUSIVE OR XORW 036 555
DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE OR XORL 612 557
EXCLUSIVE NOR XNRW 037 559
DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE NOR XNRL 613 560
COMPLEMENT COM 029 562
DOUBLE COMPLEMENT COML 614 564
3-13-1 LOGICAL AND: ANDW(034)

Purpose Takes the logical AND of corresponding bits in single words of word data and/
or constants.
Ladder Symbol
ANDW(034)
I1 I1: Input 1
I2 I2: Input 2
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ANDW(034)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ANDW(034)

OK OK OK OK
Area I1 I2 R
(n = 0 to C)
548
Area I1 I2 R
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ANDW(034) takes the logical AND of data specified in I1 and I2 and outputs
the result to R.
• The logical AND is taken of corresponding bits in I1 and I2 in succession.
• When the content of corresponding bits in both I1 and I2 are 1 or when
either is 0, a 0 will be output to the corresponding bit in R.
I1, I2 → R
I1 I2 R
1 1 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Negative Flag N ON when the leftmost bit of R is 1.
Precautions When ANDW(034) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the AND, the content of R is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag will
turn ON.
If as a result of the AND, the leftmost bit of R is 1, the Negative Flag will turn
ON.
549
3-13-2 DOUBLE LOGICAL AND: ANDL(610)

Purpose Takes the logical AND of corresponding bits in double words of word data and/
or constants.
Ladder Symbol
ANDL(610)
I1 I1: Input 1
I2 I2: Input 2
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ANDL(610)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ANDL(610)

OK OK OK OK
Area I1 I2 R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
550
Description ANDL(610) takes the logical AND of data specified in I1, I1+1 and I2, I2+1 and
(I1, I1+1), (I2, I2+1) → (R, R+1)
I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
1 1 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When ANDL(610) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the AND, the content of R, R+1 is 00000000 hex, the Equals
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the AND, the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1, the Negative Flag will
turn ON.
Examples When the execution condition CIO 00000000 is ON, the logical AND is taken
of corresponding bits in CIO 0011, CIO 0010 and CIO 0021, CIO 0020 and
the results will be output to corresponding bits in D00201 and D00200.
S1: 0010 CH S2: 0020 CH D: D00200

S1+1: 0011 CH S2+1: 0021 CH D+1: D00201
Note: The vertical arrow indicates logical AND.
3-13-3 LOGICAL OR: ORW(035)

Purpose Takes the logical OR of corresponding bits in single words of word data and/or
constants.
Ladder Symbol
ORW(035)
I1 I1: Input 1
I2 I2: Input 2
R R: Result word
551
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ORW(035)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ORW(035)

OK OK OK OK
Area I1 I2 R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to+2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to+2047 ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ORW(035) takes the logical OR of data specified in I1 and I2 and outputs the
result to R.
• The logical OR is taken of corresponding bits in I1 and I2 in succession.
• When either one of the corresponding bits in I1 and I2 are 1 or when both
of them are 0, a 0 will be output to the corresponding bit in R.
I1 + I2 → R
I1 I2 R
1 1 1
1 0 1
552
I1 I2 R
0 1 1
0 0 0
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When ORW(035) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the OR, the content of R is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag will turn
ON.
If as a result of the OR, the leftmost bit of R is 1, the Negative Flag will turn
ON.
3-13-4 DOUBLE LOGICAL OR: ORWL(611)

Purpose Takes the logical OR of corresponding bits in double words of word data and/
or constants.
Ladder Symbol
ORWL(611)
I1 I1: Input 1
I2 I2: Input 2
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ORWL(611)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ORWL(611)

OK OK OK OK
Area I1 I2 R
553
Area I1 I2 R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ORWL(611) takes the logical OR of data specified in I1 and I2 as double-word

data and outputs the result to R, R+1.
• When any of the corresponding bits in I1, I1+1, I2, and I2 +1are 1, a 1 will
be output to the corresponding bit it R+1. When any of them are 0, a 0 will
be output to the corresponding bit in R+1.
(I1, I1+1) + (I2, I2+1) → (R, R+1)
I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When ORWL(611) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the OR, the content of R, R+1 is 00000000 hex, the Equals
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of the OR, the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1, the Negative Flag will turn
ON.
554
Examples When the execution condition CIO 00000000 is ON, the logical OR is taken of
corresponding bits in CIO 0021, CIO 0020 and CIO 0301, CIO 0300 and the
results will be output to corresponding bits in D00501 and D00500.
S1: 0020 CH S2: 0300 CH D: D00500

S1+1: 0021 CH S2+1: 0301 CH D+1: D00501
Note: The vertical arrow indicates logical OR.
3-13-5 EXCLUSIVE OR: XORW(036)

Purpose Takes the logical exclusive OR of corresponding bits in single words of word
Ladder Symbol
XORW(036)
I1 I1: Input 1
I2 I2: Input 2
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition XORW(036)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @XORW(036)

OK OK OK OK
Area I1 I2 R
(n = 0 to C)
555
Area I1 I2 R
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description XORW(036) takes the logical exclusive OR of data specified in I1 and I2 and
• The logical exclusive OR is taken of corresponding bits in I1 and I2 in suc-
cession.
• When the content of corresponding bits of I1 and I2 are different, a 1 will
be output to the corresponding bit of R and when there are different, 0 will
be output to the corresponding bit in R.
I1, I2 + I1, I2 → R
I1 I2 R
1 1 0
1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When XORW(036) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the OR, the content of R is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag will turn
ON.
If as a result of the OR, the leftmost bit of R is 1, the Negative Flag will turn
ON.
556
3-13-6 DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE OR: XORL(612)

Purpose Takes the logical exclusive OR of corresponding bits in double words of word
Ladder Symbol
XORL(612)
I1 I1: Input 1
I2 I2: Input 2
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition XORL(612)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @XORL(612)

OK OK OK OK
Area I1 I2 R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
557
Description XORL(612) takes the logical exclusive OR of data specified in I1 and I2 as

double-word data and outputs the result to R, R+1.
• When the content of any of the corresponding bits in I1, I1+1, I2, and I2
+1are different, a 1 will be output to the corresponding bit it R, R+1. When
any of them are the same, a 0 will be output to the corresponding bit in R,
R+1.
(I1, I1+1), (I2, I2+1) + (I1, I1+1), (I2, I2+1)→ (R, R+1)
I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
1 1 0
1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When XORL(612) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the exclusive OR, the content of R, R+1 is 00000000 hex, the
If as a result of the exclusive OR, the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1, the Negative
Flag will turn ON.
Examples When the execution condition CIO 00000000 is ON, the logical exclusive OR
is taken of corresponding bits in CIO 0901, CIO 0900 and D01001, D01000
and the results will be output to corresponding bits in D01201 and D01200.
S: 0900 CH S: D01000 D: D01200

S1+1: 0901 CH S2+1: D01001 D+1: D01201
Note: The symbol indicates exclusive logical OR.
558
3-13-7 EXCLUSIVE NOR: XNRW(037)

Purpose Takes the logical exclusive NOR of corresponding single words of word data
and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
XNRW(037)
I1 I1: Input 1
I2 I2: Input 2
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition XNRW(037)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @XNRW(037)

OK OK OK OK
Area I1 I2 R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
559
Description XNRW(037) takes the logical exclusive NOR of data specified in I1 and I2 and
• The logical exclusive NOR is taken of corresponding bits in I1 and I2 in
succession.
• When the content of corresponding bits of I1 and I2 are different, a 0 will
be output to the corresponding bit of R and when they are different, 1 will
be output to the corresponding bit in R.
I1, I2 + I1, I2 → R
I1 I2 R
1 1 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When XNRW(037) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the NOR, the content of R is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag will
turn ON.
If as a result of the NOR, the leftmost bit of R is 1, the Negative Flag will turn
ON.
3-13-8 DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE NOR: XNRL(613)

Purpose Takes the logical exclusive NOR of corresponding bits in double words of
word data and/or constants.
Ladder Symbol
XNRL(613)
I1 I1: Input 1
I2 I2: Input 2
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition XNRL(613)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @XNRL(613)

OK OK OK OK
560
Area I1 I2 R
Work Area W000 toW 510
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description XNRL(613) takes the logical exclusive NOR of data specified in I1 and I2 and
• When the content of any of the corresponding bits in I1, I1+1, I2, and I2
+1are different, a 0 will be output to the corresponding bit in R, R+1.
When any of them are the same, a 1 will be output to the corresponding
bit in R, R+1.
(I1, I1+1), (I2, I2+1) + (I1, I1+1), (I2, I2+1) → (R, R+1)
I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
1 1 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
561
Precautions When XNRL(613) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of the exclusive NOR, the content of R, R+1 is 00000000 hex, the
If as a result of the exclusive NOR, the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1, the Negative
Flag will turn ON.
Examples When the execution condition CIO 00000000 is ON, the logical exclusive
NOR is taken of corresponding bits in CIO 0801, CIO 0800, and CIO 0101,
CIO 0100 and the results will be output to corresponding bits in D00501 and
D00500.
S1: 0800 CH S2: 0100 CH D: D00500

S1+1: 0801 CH S2+1: 0101 CH D+1: D00501
Note: The symbol indicates exclusive logical NOR.
3-13-9 COMPLEMENT: COM(029)

Purpose Turns OFF all ON bits and turns ON all OFF bits in Wd.
Ladder Symbol
COM(029)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition COM(029)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @COM(029)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
562
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description COM(029) reverses the status of every specified bit in Wd.

Wd→Wd: 1 → 0 and 0 → 1
Note When using the COM instruction, be aware that the status of each bit will
change each cycle in which the execution condition is ON.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When COM(029) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of COM, the content of R is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag will turn
ON.
If as a result of COM, the leftmost bit of R is 1, the Negative Flag will turn ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of each bit will
be D00100 is reversed.
563
3-13-10 DOUBLE COMPLEMENT: COML(614)

Purpose Turns OFF all ON bits and turns ON all OFF bits in Wd and Wd+1.
Ladder Symbol
COML(614)
Wd Wd: Word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition COML(614)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @COML(614)

OK OK OK OK
Area Wd
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description COML(614) reverses the status of every specified bit in Wd and Wd+1.
(Wd+1, Wd)→(Wd+1, Wd)
Note When using the COM instruction, be aware that the status of each bit will
change each cycle in which the execution condition is ON.
564
Special Math Instructions Section 3-14
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions When COML(614) is executed, the Error Flag will turn OFF.
If as a result of COML, the content of R, R+1 is 00000000 hex, the Equals
Flag will turn ON.
If as a result of COML, the leftmost bit of R+1 is 1, the Negative Flag will turn
ON.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the status of each bit in
D00100 and D00101 will be reversed.
3-14 Special Math Instructions

This section describes instructions used for special math calculations.
BINARY ROOT ROTB 620 565
BCD SQUARE ROOT ROOT 072 567
ARITHMETIC PROCESS APR 069 571
FLOATING POINT DIVIDE FDIV 079 583
BIT COUNTER BCNT 067 587
3-14-1 BINARY ROOT: ROTB(620)

Purpose Computes the square root of the 32-bit signed binary contents (positive value)
of the specified words and outputs the integer portion of the result to the spec-
ified result word.
Ladder Symbol
ROTB(620)
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ROTB(620)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ROTB(620)
565

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ROTB(620) computes the square root of the 32-bit binary number in S+1 and
S and outputs the integer portion of the result to R. The non-integer remainder
is eliminated.
S+1 S R
Binary data (32 bits) Binary data (16 bits)
The range of data that can be specified for words S+1 and S is 0000 0000 to
3FFF FFFF. If a number from 4000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF is specified, it will be
treated as 3FFF FFFF for the square root computation. An error will occur if
the content of the source words is greater than 7FFF FFFF, i.e., if bit 15 of
S+1 is 1.
566
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if bit 15 of S+1 is 1 (ON).
Overflow Flag OF ON if the content of S+1 and S is 4000 0000 to
7FFF FFFF.
Underflow Flag UF OFF
Negative Flag N OFF
Precautions The content of S+1 and S must be less than 8000 0000.
The operands of this instruction (S+1, S, and R) are all treated as binary val-
ues. If the input data is BCD, use the ROOT(072) instruction.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, ROTB(620) calculates the
square root of the data in CIO 0002 and CIO 0001, and writes the integer por-
tion of the result in D00100.
CIO 0002 CIO 0001
014B 5A91
Square root computation
D00100 (remainder eliminated)
1234
3-14-2 BCD SQUARE ROOT: ROOT(072)

Purpose Computes the square root of an 8-digit BCD number and outputs the integer
portion of the result to the specified result word.
Ladder Symbol
ROOT(072)
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ROOT(072)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ROOT(072)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
567
Area S R
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #99999999 ---
(BCD)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ROOT(072) computes the square root of the 8-digit BCD number in S+1 and
S and outputs the integer portion of the result to R. The non-integer remainder
is eliminated.
S+1 S R
BCD data (8 digits) BCD data (4 digits)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the data in S+1 and S is not BCD.
Precautions The operands of this instruction (S+1, S, and R) are all treated as BCD val-
ues. If the input data is binary, use the ROTB(620) instruction.
Examples Square Root of 8-digit Number

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, ROOT(072) calculates the
square root of the data in D00001 and D00000, and writes the integer portion
of the result in D00100.
Note Figures after the decimal point are truncated for 8-digit numbers.
568
Truncated
Square Root of a 4-digit Number

The following example shows how to take the square root of a 4-digit number
and round off the result. This program example calculates the square root of
the 4-digit number in CIO 0010, rounds off the result, and writes it to
CIO 0011. (Basically, the 4-digit number is multiplied by 10,000 (1002) and the
result is divided by 100, increasing the precision of the calculation by a factor
of 100.)
Note Figures after the decimal point are rounded for 4-digit numbers.
569
The values after the decimal point

should be rounded.
@BSET 1
@MOV 2
@ROOT 3
@MOV
@MOV
@MOVD
@MOVD
@INC
1,2,3... 1. The source words (D00101 and D00100) to be are cleared to 0000 0000.
D00101 D00100
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0000 0000
2. The 4-digit number is moved to D00101.

010
6 0 1 7
D00101 D00100
6 0 1 7 0 0 0 0
3. ROOT(072) calculates the square root of D00101 and D00100 and writes
the result to D00102.
570
D00101 D00100
6017 0000
60, 170, 000 = 7, 756.932 …
D00100 Square root computation
(Remainder eliminated)
7756
4. D00103 and the result word, CIO 0011, are cleared to 0000 0000.
D00103 CIO 0011
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0000 0000
5. The result of the square root calculation is divided by 100, with the integer
portion written to CIO 0011 and the remainder going to D00103.
D00102
7 7 5 6
CIO 0011 D00103

0 0 7 7 5 6 0 0
6. If the content of D00103 is greater than 4900, CIO 0011 is incremented by

1. In this case, the result is 78.
5600 > 4900?
CIO 0011
0 0 7 8
3-14-3 ARITHMETIC PROCESS: APR(069)

Purpose Calculates the sine, cosine, or a linear extrapolation of the source data.
The linear extrapolation function allows any relationship between X and Y to
be approximated with line segments.
Ladder Symbol
APR(069)
C C: Control word
S S: Source data
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition APR(069)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @APR(069)

OK OK OK OK
571
Operands Sine Function (C = 0000 Hex)

Operand Value Data range
C 0000 hex ---
S 0000 to 0900 (BCD) 0° to 90°
D 0000 to 9999 (BCD) 0.0000 to 0.9999
9999 (BCD) 1.0000
Cosine Function (C = 0001 Hex)

C 0001 hex ---
S 0000 to 0900 (BCD) 0° to 90°
D 0000 to 9999 (BCD) 0.0000 to 0.9999
9999 (BCD) 1.0000
Linear Extrapolation Function (C = Data area address)

C Data area address ---
S 16-bit unsigned BCD data 0000 to 9999
16-bit unsigned binary data 0 to 65,535
16-bit signed binary data1 −32,768 to 32,767
32-bit signed binary data 1 −2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
Floating-point data 1 −∞,

−3.402823 × 1038 to −1.175494 × 10−38,
1.175494 × 10−38 to 3.402823 × 1038,
+∞
D 16-bit unsigned BCD data 0000 to 9999
16-bit unsigned binary data 0 to 65,535
16-bit signed binary data 1 −32,768 to 32,767
32-bit signed binary data1 −2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
Floating-point data 1 −∞,

−3.402823 × 1038 to −1.175494 × 10−38,
1.175494 × 10−38 to 3.402823 × 1038,
+∞
Note 1. Signed binary data and floating-point data are supported by CS1-H, CJ1-
H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units only.
2. If C is a word address, APR(069) extrapolates the Y value for the X value
in S based on coordinates (forming line segments) entered in advance in
a table beginning at C. Refer to the Description section below for details.
Area C S R
572
Area C S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Specified values only ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The operation of APR(069) depends on the control word C. If C is 0000 or

0001, APR(069) computes the sine or cosine of S with S in units of tenths of
degrees.
If C is a word address, APR(069) extrapolates the Y value for the X value in S
based on coordinates (forming line segments) entered in advance in a table
beginning at C.
Sine Function (C=0000)
When C is 0000, APR(069) calculates the SIN(S) and writes the result to R.
The range for S is 0000 to 0900 BCD (0.0° to 90.0°) and the range for R is
0000 to 9999 BCD (0.0000 to 0.9999). The remainder of the result beyond the
fourth decimal place is eliminated.
Cosine Function (C=0001)
When C is 0001, APR(069) calculates the COS(S) and writes the result to R.
The range for S is 0000 to 0900 BCD (0.0° to 90.0°) and the range for R is
0000 to 9999 BCD (0.0000 to 0.9999). The remainder of the result beyond the
fourth decimal place is eliminated.
Linear Extrapolation
APR(069) linear extrapolation is specified when C is a word address.
The content of word C specifies the number of coordinates in a data table
starting at C+2, the form of the source data, and whether data is BCD or
573
binary. In CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units, the source data can
also be signed binary data or floating-point data.
Unsigned Integer Data (Binary or BCD)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C 0 0 0 0 0
Number of coordinates minus one (m−1),

00 to FF hex (1 ≤ m ≤ 256)
Floating-point specification for S and D
0: Integer data
Signed data specification for S and D
0: Unsigned binary data
Source data form

0: f(x) = f(S)
1: f(x) = f(Xm − S)
Output (D) data format

0: Binary
1: BCD
Input (S) data format

0: Binary
1: BCD
Signed Integer Data (Binary)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

00 to FF hex (1 ≤ m ≤ 256)
0: Integer data
Data length specification for S and D (note 1)

0: 16-bit signed binary data
1: 32-bit signed binary data
Signed data specification for S and D

1: Signed binary data
Single-precision Floating-point Data

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

00 to FF hex (1 ≤ m ≤ 256)
1: Single-precision floating-point data
If 16-bit binary or BCD data is being used, the line-segment data is contained
in words C+ 1 through C+2m+2. If 32-bit binary or floating point data is being
used (CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units only), the line-segment data is
contained in words C+ 1 through C+4m+4.
Bits 00 to 07 contain the number (binary) of line coordinates less 1, m–1. Bits
08 to 12 are not used. Bit 13 specifies either f(x)=f(S) or f(x)=f(Xm–S): OFF
specifies f(x)=f(S) and ON specifies f(x)=f(Xm–S). Bit 14 determines whether
the output is BCD or binary: OFF specifies binary and ON specifies BCD. Bit
574
15 determines whether the input is BCD or binary: OFF specifies binary and
ON specifies BCD.
16-bit BCD16-bit binary (signed 32-bit signed binary data Floating-point data
or unsigned) or 16-bit BCD data
C+1 X0 (rightmost 16 bits) C+1 X0 (rightmost 16 bits)
C+1 X0 (*1)
C+2 X0 (leftmost 16 bits) C+2 X0 (leftmost 16 bits)
C+2 Y0
C+3 Y0 (rightmost 16 bits) C+3 Y0 (rightmost 16 bits)
C+3 X1
C+4 Y0 (leftmost 16 bits) C+4 Y0 (leftmost 16 bits)
C+4 Y1
C+5 X1 (rightmost 16 bits) C+5 X1 (rightmost 16 bits)
C+5 X2
C+6 X1 (leftmost 16 bits) C+6 X1 (leftmost 16 bits)
C+6 Y2
C+7 Y1 (rightmost 16 bits) C+7 Y1 (rightmost 16 bits)
C+8 Y1 (leftmost 16 bits) C+8 Y1 (leftmost 16 bits)
Xn
to to to to
Yn
C+ (4n+1) Xn (rightmost 16 bits) C+ (4n+1) Xn (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (4n+2) Xn (leftmost 16 bits) C+ (4n+2) Xn (leftmost 16 bits)
C+ (2m+1) Xm
C+ (4n+3) Yn (rightmost 16 bits) C+ (4n+3) Yn (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (2m+2) Ym
C+ (4n+4) Yn (leftmost 16 bits) C+ (4n+4) Yn (leftmost 16 bits)
Note: Write Xm (max. X
value in the table) in word to to to to
C+1 when the I/O data in C+ (4m+1) Xm (rightmost 16 bits) C+ (4m+1) Xm (rightmost 16 bits)
S and D contain unsigned
data (bit 11 of C = 0). C+ (4m+2) Xm (leftmost 16 bits) C+ (4m+2) Xm (leftmost 16 bits)
C+ (4m+3) Ym (rightmost 16 bits) C+ (4m+3) Ym (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (4m+4) Ym (leftmost 16 bits) C+ (4m+4) Ym (leftmost 16 bits)
Note The X coordinates must be in ascending order: X1 < X2 < ... < Xm. Input all
values of (Xn, Yn) as binary data, regardless of the data format specified in
control word C.
Operation of the Linear Extrapolation Function
APR(069) processes the input data specified in S with the following equation
and the line-segment data (Xn, Yn) specified in the table beginning at C+1.
The result is output to the destination word(s) specified with D.
Y (Binary data)
Ymax
Y0
X0 Xmax
X (Binary data)
A B C
1. For S < X0
Converted value = Y0
2. For X0 ≤ S ≤ Xmax, if Xn < S < Xn+1
Converted value = Yn +[{Yn + 1 − Yn}/{Xn + 1 − Xn}] × {Input data S − Xn}
575
Y (binary data)
Equation:
Yn+1−Yn
f(Y)= Yn+
Xn+1−Xn (S−Xn)
Yn+1
Calculation
D result Yn+1−Yn
Yn
Xn+1−Xn
S−Xn
Xn S Xn+1 X (binary data)
Input data
3. Xmax < S
Converted value = Ymax
Up to 256 endpoints can be stored in the line-segment data table beginning at
C+1. The following 5 kinds of I/O data can be used:
• 16-bit unsigned BCD data
• 16-bit unsigned binary data
• 16-bit signed binary data (CS1-H/CJ1-H/CJ1M Only)
• 32-bit signed binary data (CS1-H/CJ1-H/CJ1M Only)
• Single-precision floating-point data (CS1-H/CJ1-H/CJ1M Only)
Setting the Data Format in Control Word C
• 16-bit Unsigned BCD Data
The input data and/or the output data can be 16-bit unsigned BCD data.
Also, the linear extrapolation function can be set to operate on the value
specified in S directly or on Xm–S. (Xm is the maximum value of X in the
line-segment data.)
Setting name Bit in C Setting
Input data (S) format 15 0: Binary
1: BCD
Output data (D) format 14 0: Binary
1: BCD
Source data form 13 0: Operate on S
1: Operate on Xm–S
Signed data specification for S and D 11 0: Unsigned data
Data length specification for S and D 10 Invalid (fixed at 16 bits)
Floating-point specification 09 0: Integer data
576
• 16-bit Unsigned Binary Data

The input data and/or the output data can be 16-bit unsigned binary data.
Also, the linear extrapolation function can be set to operate on the value
specified in S directly or on Xm–S. (Xm is the maximum value of X in the
line-segment data.)
1: BCD
1: BCD
Source data form 13 0: Operate on S
1: Operate on Xm–S
Signed data specification for S and D 11 0: Unsigned data
Data length specification for S and D 10 Invalid (fixed at 16 bits)
• 16-bit Signed Binary Data (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D Only)
Source data form 13 0
Signed data specification for S and D 11 1: Signed data
Data length specification for S and D 10 0: 16-bit signed binary data
• 32-bit Signed Binary Data (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D Only)
Signed data specification for S and D 11 1: Signed data
Data length specification for S and D 10 1: 32-bit signed binary data
Note If the “Data length specification for S and D” in bit 10 of C is set to 1

and a 16-bit constant is input for S, the input data will be converted
to 32-bit signed binary before the linear extrapolation calculation.
• Floating-point Data (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D Only)
Signed data specification for S and D 11 0
Data length specification for S and D 10 0
Floating-point specification 09 1: Floating-point data
Note If the “Floating-point specification” in bit 09 of C is set to 1, a constant

cannot be input for S.
577
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if C is a constant greater than 0001.
ON if C is a word address but the X coordinates are not in
ascending order (X1 ≤ X2 ≤ ... ≤ Xm).
ON if C is a word address and bits 9, 11, and 15 of C indi-
cate BCD input, but S is not BCD.
ON if C is a word address and bit 9 of C indicates floating-
point data, but S is a one-word constant.
ON if C is 0000 or 0001 but S is not BCD between 0000
and 0900.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of R is ON.
Precautions The actual result for SIN(90°) and COS(0°) is 1, but 9999 (0.9999) will be out-
put to R.
An error will occur if C is a constant greater than 0001.
An error will occur if linear extrapolation is specified but the X coordinates are
not in ascending order (X1 < X2 < ... < Xn< S< Xn+1).
An error will occur if linear extrapolation is specified and BCD input is speci-
fied (bit 15 of C ON) but S is not BCD.
An error will occur if a trigonometric function is specified (C=0000 or 0001) but
S is not BCD between 0000 and 0900.
Examples Sine Function (C: #0000)

The following example shows APR(069) used to calculate the sine of 30°.
Source data Result
S: D00000 R: D00100
0 101 100 10–1 10–1 10–2 10–3 10–4
0 3 0 0 5 0 0 0
Set the source data in 10–1 degrees. Result data has four significant digits,
(0000 to 0900, BCD) fifth and higher digits are ignored.
(0000 to 9999, BCD)
Cosine Function (C: #0001)

The following example shows APR(069) used to calculate the cosine of 30°.
(SIN(30) = 0.8660)
Source data Result
S: D00010 R: D00200
0 101 100 10–1 10–1 10–2 10–3 10–4
0 3 0 0 8 6 6 0
–1
Set the source data in 10 degrees. Result data has four significant digits,
(0000 to 0900, BCD) fifth and higher digits are ignored.
(0000 to 9999, BCD)
578
Linear Extrapolation (C: Word Address)

Using 16-bit Unsigned BCD or Binary Data
APR(069) processes the input data specified in S based on the control data in
C and the line-segment data specified in the table beginning at C+1. The
result is output to D.
Y Word Coordinate
C+1 Xm (max. X
Ym value)
C+2 Y0
Y4
C+3 X1
C+4 Y1
Y3
Y1 C+5 X2
C+6 Y2
Y2 ↓ ↓
Y0
C+(2m+1) Xm (max. X
X value)
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 Xm C+(2m+2) Ym
• Yn = f(Xn), Y0 = f(X0)
• Be sure that Xn–1 < Xn in all cases.
• Input all values of (Xn, Yn) as binary data.
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y4
Y3
Ym
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 Xm X
This example shows how to construct a linear extrapolation with 12 coordi-

nates. The block of data is continuous, as it must be, from D00000 to D00026
(C to C + (2 × 12 + 2)). The input data is taken from CIO 0010, and the result
is output to CIO 0011.
Content Coordinate Bit Bit

15 00
D00000 000B Hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

D00001 05F0 Hex X12
Y0 x=S (m–1 = 11: 12 line
D00002 0000 Hex segments)
D00003 0005 Hex X1
D00004 0F00 Hex Y1 Output and input
D00005 001A Hex X2 both binary
D00006 0402 Hex Y2
↓ ↓ ↓
D00025 05F0 Hex X12
D00026 1F20 Hex Y12
In this case, the source word, CIO 0010, contains 0014, and f(0014) = 0726 is
output to R, CIO 0011.
579
$1F20
$0F00
(x,y)
$0726
$0402
X
(0,0)
$0005 $0014 $001A $05F0
The linear-extrapolation calculation is shown below.

0402 – 0F00
Y = 0F00 + --------------------------------- × ( 0014 – 0015 )
001A – 0005
Ω = 0F00 – ( 0086 × 000F )
Ω = 0726 Values are all hexadecimal (Hex).
580

Using 32-bit Signed Binary Data (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D Only)
In this example, APR(069) is used to convert the fluid height in a tank to fluid
volume based on the shape of the holding tank.
Fluid height to volume
conversion table
(32-bit signed binary data)
C+1 X0 (rightmost 16 bits)
C+2 X0 (leftmost 16 bits)
C+3 Y0 (rightmost 16 bits)
C+4 Y0 (leftmost 16 bits)
Variation from
standard = X C+6 X1 (leftmost 16 bits)
Fluid volume= Y C+8 Y1 (leftmost 16 bits)
to to
C+ (4n+1) Xn (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (4n+2) Xn (leftmost 16 bits)
C+ (4n+3) Yn (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (4n+4) Yn (leftmost 16 bits)
to to
C+ (4m+1) Xm (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (4m+2) Xm (leftmost 16 bits)
C+ (4m+3) Ym (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (4m+4) Ym (leftmost 16 bits)
000000
APR
C
Linear extrapolation of table
S
R
Y: Fluid volume
Ym
R
R+1 X: Variation from standard
Y data range:
−2,147,483,648 to The linear extrapolation can use
2,147,483,647 signed source data if 32-bit signed
binary data is used.
Y0 0
X0
Xm
S
S+1
High-resolution 32-bit
signed binary data X data range: −2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
581

Using Floating-point Data (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D Only)
In this example, APR(069) is used to convert the fluid height in a tank to fluid
volume based on the shape of the holding tank.
Fluid height to volume
conversion table
(Floating-point data) C+3 Y0 (rightmost 16 bits)
Fluid volume Fluid height = X to to
=Y
C+ (4n+1) Xn (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (4n+2) Xn (leftmost 16 bits)
C+ (4n+3) Yn (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (4n+4) Yn (leftmost 16 bits)
to to
C+ (4m+1) Xm (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (4m+2) Xm (leftmost 16 bits)
C+ (4m+3) Ym (rightmost 16 bits)
C+ (4m+4) Ym (leftmost 16 bits)
000000
APR
C
S
Linear extrapolation of table
R
Y: Fluid volume
Ym
Y data range:
−∞, −3.402823 × 1038 to The linear extrapolation can
R
−1.175494 × 10−38, provide a smooth, high-resolution
1.175494 × 10−38 to R+1 curve floating-point data is used.
3.402823 × 1038, or +∞
Y0
0
X0 Xm X: Fluid height
S
S+1
High-resolution
floating point data
X data range:
−∞, −3.402823 × 1038 to −1.175494 × 10−38,
1.175494 × 10−38 to 3.402823 × 1038, or +∞
582
3-14-4 FLOATING POINT DIVIDE: FDIV(079)

Purpose Divides one 7-digit floating-point number by another. The floating-point num-
bers are expressed in scientific notation (7-digit mantissa and 1-digit expo-
nent).
Ladder Symbol
FDIV(079)
Dd Dd: First dividend word
Dr Dr: First divisor word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FDIV(079)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FDIV(079)

OK OK OK OK
Area Dd Dr R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
583
Description FDIV(079) divides the floating-point value in Dd and Dd+1 by that in Dr and
Dr+1 and places the result in R and R+1.
Quotient
R+1 R
Dr+1 Dr Dd+1 Dd
To represent the floating-point values, the rightmost seven digits are used for
the mantissa and the leftmost digit is used for the exponent, as shown in the
diagram below. The leftmost digit can range from 0 to F; positive exponents
range from 0 to 7 and negative exponents range from 8 to F (0 to –7). The
rightmost 7 digits must be BCD.
First word Second word

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
mantissa (rightmost 4 digits)

exponent (0 to 7) mantissa (leftmost 3 digits)
sign of exponent 0: +
1: – = 0.1111113 x 10–2
Two more examples of floating-point values are:

6123 4567: 0.1234567 × 106 (6 = 0110 binary)
B123 4567: 0.1234567 × 10–3 (B = 1011 binary)
The following table shows the maximum and minimum values allowed.
Limit 8-digit hexadecimal Floating-point
Maximum value 7999 9999 0.9999999 × 107
Minimum value F000 0001 0.0000001 × 10–7
(Divisor and dividend)
Minimum value F100 0000 0.1000000 × 10–7
(Result)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the mantissa (leftmost 7 digits) in Dd+1 and Dd is
not BCD.
ON if the mantissa (leftmost 7 digits) in Dr+1 and Dr is not
BCD.
ON if the divisor (Dr+1 and Dr) is 0.
ON if the result is not between 0.1000000 × 10–7 and
0.9999999 × 107.
Precautions The result is expressed as a floating-point value, so it has 7 significant digits.

The eighth and higher digits are eliminated.
The result must be between 0.1000000 × 10–7 and 0.9999999 × 107.
584
Examples Basic Floating-point Division

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FDIV(079) divides the
floating-point number in D00101 and D00100 by the floating-point number in
CIO 0021 and CIO 0020 and writes the result to D00301 and D00300.
D00101 D00100
A 5 6 7 0 0 0 0 0.5670000 × 10–2
CIO 0021 CIO 0020

÷ B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0.1234567 × 10–3
D00301 D00300
2 4 5 9 2 7 0 3 0.4592703 × 102
Floating-point Division of Two BCD Numbers

In this example, the 4-digit BCD number in D00000 is divided by the 4-digit
BCD number in D00001 and the floating-point result is written to D00003 and
D00002.
To perform the floating point division, the BCD value in D00000 is converted
to floating-point format in D00101 and D00100 and the BCD value in D00001
is converted to floating-point format in D00103 and D00102.
585
@MOV
1
@MOV
@MOV
@MOV
@MOVD 3
@MOVD 4
@MOVD 5
@MOVD 6
@FDIV 7
1,2,3... 1. D00100 and D00102 are set to 0000.

2. D00101 and D00103 are set to 4000.
D00101 D00100 D00103 D00102

4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4000 0000 4000 0000
3. MOVD(083) is used to move the digits of the original source words to the
proper digits in the 2-word floating-point formats.
586
D00000 D00001
3 4 5 2 0 0 7 9
D00101 D00100 D00103 D00102

4 3 4 5 2 0 0 0 4 0 0 7 9 0 0 0
4. FDIV(079) divides the floating-point number in D00101 and D00100 by the

floating-point number in D00103 and D00102.
D00101 D00100
4 3 4 5 2 0 0 0 0.3452000 × 104
÷ D00103 D00102
4 0 0 7 9 0 0 0 0.0079000 × 104
D00003 D00002
2 4 3 6 9 6 2 0 0.4369620 × 102
3-14-5 BIT COUNTER: BCNT(067)

Purpose Counts the total number of ON bits in the specified word(s).
Ladder Symbol
BCNT(067)
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BCNT(067)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BCNT(067)

OK OK OK OK
Operands N: Number of words

The number of words must be 0001 to FFFF (1 to 65,535 words).
S: First source word
S and S+(N–1) must be in the same data area.
Area N S R
587
Area N S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary) or &1 to
&65,535
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BCNT(067) counts the total number of bits that are ON in all words between S
and S+(N–1) and places the result in R.
N words
Counts the number
to of ON bits.
S+(N–1) Binary result
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is 0000.
ON if result exceeds FFFF.
Precautions An error will occur if N=0000 or the result exceeds FFFF.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, BCNT(067) counts the
total number of ON bits in the 10 words from CIO 0100 through CIO 0109 and
writes the result to D00100.
000000
BCNT Counts the number
N &10 of ON bits (35).
to to
S D100
R D00100
R:D00100 23 hexadecimal
(35 decimal)
588
Floating-point Math Instructions Section 3-15
3-15 Floating-point Math Instructions

The Floating-point Math Instructions convert data and perform floating-point
arithmetic operations. CS/CJ-series CPU Units support the following instruc-
tions.
FLOATING TO 16-BIT FIX 450 594
FLOATING TO 32-BIT FIXL 451 596
16-BIT TO FLOATING FLT 452 597
32-BIT TO FLOATING FLTL 453 599
FLOATING-POINT ADD +F 454 601
FLOATING-POINT SUB- –F 455 603
TRACT
FLOATING-POINT MULTI- *F 456 605
PLY
FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE /F 457 607
DEGREES TO RADIANS RAD 458 609
RADIANS TO DEGREES DEG 459 610
SINE SIN 460 612
HIGH-SPEED SINE SINQ 475 614
COSINE COS 461 615
HIGH-SPEED COSINE COSQ 476 617
TANGENT TAN 462 619
HIGH-SPEED TANGENT TANQ 477 621
ARC SINE ASIN 463 623
ARC COSINE ACOS 464 625
ARC TANGENT ATAN 465 627
SQUARE ROOT SQRT 466 629
EXPONENT EXP 467 631
LOGARITHM LOG 468 633
EXPONENTIAL POWER PWR 840 635
MOVE FLOATING-POINT MOVF 469 649
(SINGLE)
In addition to the instructions listed above, the CS1-H/CJ1-H CPU Units sup-
port the following floating-point comparison and conversion instructions. Refer
to 3-16-21 Double-precision Floating-point Input Instructions for details on
double-precision floating-point instructions.
Single-precision Floating- LD, AND, OR 329 to 334 636
point Symbol Comparison +
Instructions =F, <>F, <F, <=F, >F,
(*CS1-H/CJ1-H/CJ1M or >=F
Only)
FLOATING-POINT TO FSTR 448 640
ASCII (*CS1-H/CJ1-H/
CJ1M Only)
ASCII TO FLOATING- FVAL 449 645
POINT (*CS1-H/CJ1-H/
CJ1M Only)
Data Format Floating-point data expresses real numbers using a sign, exponent, and man-
tissa. When data is expressed in floating-point format, the following formula
applies.
589
Real number = (–1)s 2e–127 (1.f)

s: Sign
e: Exponent
f: Mantissa
The floating-point data format conforms to the IEEE754 standards. Data is
expressed in 32 bits, as follows:
Sign Exponent Mantissa
s e f
31 30 23 22 0
Data No. of bits Contents

s: sign 1 0: positive; 1: negative
e: exponent 8 The exponent (e) value ranges from 0 to 255.
The actual exponent is the value remaining after
127 is subtracted from e, resulting in a range of
–127 to 128. “e=0” and “e=255” express special
numbers.
f: mantissa 23 The mantissa portion of binary floating-point
data fits the formal 2.0 > 1.f ≥1.0.
Number of Digits The number of effective digits for floating-point data is seven digits for deci-
mal.
Floating-point Data The following data can be expressed by floating-point data:

• –∞
• –3.402823 x 1038 ≤ value ≤ –1.402398 x 10–45
•0
• 1.402398 x 10–45 ≤ value ≤ 3.402823 x 1038
• +∞
• Not a number (NaN)
–45 –45
−1.402398 x 10 1.402398 x 10
–∞ –3.402823 x 1038 –1 0 1 3.402823 x 1038 + ∞
Special Numbers The formats for NaN, ±∞, and 0 are as follows:
NaN*: e = 255, f ≠ 0
+∞: e = 255, f = 0, s= 0
–∞: e = 255, f = 0, s= 1
0: e=0
*NaN (not a number) is not a valid floating-point number. Executing floating-
point calculation instructions will not result in NaN.
Writing Floating-point When floating-point is specified for the data format in the I/O memory edit dis-
Data play in the CX-Programmer, standard decimal numbers input in the display
are automatically converted to the floating-point format shown above
(IEEE754-format) and written to I/O Memory. Data written in the IEEE754-for-
mat is automatically converted to standard decimal format when monitored on
the display.
590
15 7 6 0
n f
n+1 s e
It is not necessary for the user to be aware of the IEEE754 data format when
reading and writing floating-point data. It is only necessary to remember that
floating point values occupy two words each.
Numbers Expressed as Floating-point Values

The following types of floating-point numbers can be used.
Mantissa (f) Exponent (e)
0 Not 0 and All 1’s (255)
not all 1’s
0 0 Normalized number Infinity
Not 0 Non-normalized NaN
number
Note A non-normalized number is one whose absolute value is too small to be

expressed as a normalized number. Non-normalized numbers have fewer sig-
nificant digits. If the result of calculations is a non-normalized number (includ-
ing intermediate results), the number of significant digits will be reduced.
Normalized Numbers Normalized numbers express real numbers. The sign bit will be 0 for a positive
number and 1 for a negative number.
The exponent (e) will be expressed from 1 to 254, and the real exponent will
be 127 less, i.e., –126 to 127.
The mantissa (f) will be expressed from 0 to 233 – 1, and it is assume that, in
the real mantissa, bit 233 is 1 and the binary point follows immediately after it.
Normalized numbers are expressed as follows:
(–1)(sign s) x 2(exponent e)–127 x (1 + mantissa x 2–23)
Example
31 30 23 22 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sign: –
Exponent: 128 – 127 = 1
Mantissa: 1 + (222 + 221) x 2–23 = 1 + (2–1 + 2–2) = 1 + 0.75 = 1.75
Value: –1.75 x 21 = –3.5
Non-normalized Numbers Non-normalized numbers express real numbers with very small absolute val-
ues. The sign bit will be 0 for a positive number and 1 for a negative number.
The exponent (e) will be 0, and the real exponent will be –126.
The mantissa (f) will be expressed from 1 to 233 – 1, and it is assume that, in
the real mantissa, bit 233 is 0 and the binary point follows immediately after it.
Non-normalized numbers are expressed as follows:
(–1)(sign s) x 2–126 x (mantissa x 2–23)
Example
31 30 23 22 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sign: –
Exponent: –126
Mantissa: 0 + (222 + 221) x 2–23 = 0 + (2–1 + 2–2) = 0 + 0.75 = 0.75
Value: –0.75 x 2–126
591
Zero Values of +0.0 and –0.0 can be expressed by setting the sign to 0 for positive
or 1 for negative. The exponent and mantissa will both be 0. Both +0.0 and
–0.0 are equivalent to 0.0. Refer to Floating-point Arithmetic Results, below,
for differences produced by the sign of 0.0.
Infinity Values of +∞ and –∞ can be expressed by setting the sign to 0 for positive or 1
for negative. The exponent will be 255 (28 – 1) and the mantissa will be 0.
NaN NaN (not a number) is produced when the result of calculations, such as 0.0/
0.0, ∞/∞, or ∞–∞, does not correspond to a number or infinity. The exponent
will be 255 (28 – 1) and the mantissa will be not 0.
Note There are no specifications for the sign of NaN or the value of the mantissa
field (other than to be not 0).
Floating-point Arithmetic Results

Rounding Results The following methods will be used to round results when the number of digits
in the accurate result of floating-point arithmetic exceeds the significant digits
of internal processing expressions.
If the result is close to one of two internal floating-point expressions, the
closer expression will be used. If the result is midway between two internal
floating-point expressions, the result will be rounded so that the last digit of
the mantissa is 0.
Overflows, Underflows, Overflows will be output as either positive or negative infinity, depending on
and Illegal Calculations the sign of the result. Underflows will be output as either positive or negative
zero, depending on the sign of the result.
Illegal calculations will result in NaN. Illegal calculations include adding infinity
to a number with the opposite sign, subtracting infinity from a number with the
opposite sign, multiplying zero and infinity, dividing zero by zero, or dividing
infinity by infinity.
The value of the result may not be correct if an overflow occurs when convert-
ing a floating-point number to an integer.
Precautions in Handling The following precautions apply to handling zero, infinity, and NaN.
Special Values • The sum of positive zero and negative zero is positive zero.
• The difference between zeros of the same sign is positive zero.
• If any operand is a NaN, the results will be a NaN.
• Positive zero and negative zero are treated as equivalent in comparisons.
• Comparison or equivalency tests on one or more NaN will always be true
for != and always be false for all other instructions.
Floating-point Calculation Results

When the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that
can be expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±∞. If the result is positive, it will be output as +∞; if
negative, then –∞.
The Equals Flag will only turn ON when both the exponent (e) and the man-
tissa (f) are zero after a calculation. A calculation result will also be output as
zero when the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that
can be expressed for floating-point data. In that case the Underflow Flag will
turn ON.
Example In this program example, the X-axis and Y-axis coordinates (x, y) are provided
by 4-digit BCD content of D00000 and D00001. The distance (r) from the ori-
592
gin and the angle (θ, in degrees) are found and output to D00100 and
D00101. In the result, everything to the right of the decimal point is truncated.
P (100, 100)
y
0 x
000000
(1)
D00000
D00200
D00001
D00201
D00200
D00202
D00201
D00204
(2)
D00202
D00202
D00206
D00204
D00204
D00208
D00206
D00208
D00210
D00210
D00212
(3)
D00204
D00202
D00214
D00214
D00216
D00216
D00218
(4)
D00212
D00220
D00218
D00221
D00220
D00100
D00221
D00101
593
Calculations Examples
Distance r = χ 2 + y 2
Distance r = 100 2 + 1002 = 141.4214
y
Angle θ = tan−1  --χ-  Angle θ = tan−1  100
----------  × 180 ÷ π = 45.0

100
DM Contents
D00000 #0100 x D00100 0141 r
(BCD) (BCD)
D00001 #0100 y D00101 0045
(BCD) (BCD)
1. This section of the program converts the data from BCD to floating-point.
a) The data area from D00200 onwards is used as a work area.
b) First BIN(023) is used to temporarily convert the BCD data to binary
data, and then FLT(452) is used to convert the binary data to floating-
point data.
c) The value of x that has been converted to floating-point data is output
to D00203 and D00202.
d) The value of y that has been converted to floating-point data is output
to D00205 and D00204.
2. In order to find the distance r, Floating-point Math Instructions are used to
calculate the square root of x2+y2. The result is then output to D00213 and
D00212 as floating-point data.
3. In order to find the angle θ, Floating-point Math Instructions are used to
calculate tan–1 (y/x). ATAN(465) outputs the result in radians, so DEG(459)
is used to convert to degrees. The result is then output to D00219 and
D00218 as floating-point data.
4. The data is converted back from floating-point to BCD.
a) First FIX(450) is used to temporarily convert the floating-point data to
binary data, and then BCD(024) is used to convert the binary data to
BCD data.
b) The distance r is output to D00100.
c) The angle θ is output to D00101.
3-15-1 FLOATING TO 16-BIT: FIX(450)

Purpose Converts a 32-bit floating-point value to 16-bit signed binary data and places
the result in the specified result word.
Ladder Symbol
FIX(450)
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FIX(450)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FIX(450)
594

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description FIX(450) converts the integer portion of the 32-bit floating-point number in
S+1 and S (IEEE754-format) to 16-bit signed binary data and places the
result in R.
S+1 S Floating-point data (32 bits)
R Signed binary data (16 bits)
Only the integer portion of the floating-point data is converted, and the fraction
portion is truncated. The integer portion of the floating-point data must be
within the range of –32,768 to 32,767.
Example conversions:
A floating-point value of 3.5 is converted to 3.
A floating-point value of –3.5 is converted to –3.
595
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the data in S+1 and S is not a number (NaN).
ON if the integer portion of S+1 and S is not within the
range of –32,768 to 32,767.
Precautions The content of S+1 and S must be floating-point data and the integer portion
must be in the range of –32,768 to 32,767.
3-15-2 FLOATING TO 32-BIT: FIXL(451)

Purpose Converts a 32-bit floating-point value to 32-bit signed binary data and places
the result in the specified result words.
Ladder Symbol
FIXL(451)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FIXL(451)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FIXL(451)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
596
Area S R
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –()IR15
Description FIXL(451) converts the integer portion of the 32-bit floating-point number in
S+1 and S (IEEE754-format) to 32-bit signed binary data and places the
result in R+1 and R.
S+1 S Floating-point data (32 bits)
R+1 R Signed binary data (32 bits)
portion is truncated. (The integer portion of the floating-point data must be
within the range of –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.)
A floating-point value of 2,147,483,640.5 is converted to 2,147,483,640.
A floating-point value of –214,748,340.5 is converted to –214,748,340.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the data in S+1 and S is not a number (NaN).
ON if the integer portion of S+1 and S is not within the
range of –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of R+1 is ON after execution.
Precautions The content of S+1 and S must be floating-point data and the integer portion
must be in the range of –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
3-15-3 16-BIT TO FLOATING: FLT(452)

Purpose Converts a 16-bit signed binary value to 32-bit floating-point data and places
Ladder Symbol
FLT(452)
S S: Source word
597
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FLT(452)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FLT(452)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32766
(n= 0 to C) (n= 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description FLT(452) converts the 16-bit signed binary value in S to 32-bit floating-point
data (IEEE754-format) and places the result in R+1 and R. A single 0 is
added after the decimal point in the floating-point result.
S Signed binary data (16 bits)
R+1 R Floating-point data (32 bits)
Only values within the range of –32,768 to 32,767 can be specified for S. To
convert signed binary data outside of that range, use FLTL(453).
598
A signed binary value of 3 is converted to 3.0.
A signed binary value of –3 is converted to –3.0.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Equals Flag = ON if both the exponent and mantissa of the result are 0.
Negative Flag N ON if the result is negative.
Precautions The content of S must contain signed binary data with a (decimal) value in the
range of –32,768 to 32,767.
3-15-4 32-BIT TO FLOATING: FLTL(453)

Purpose Converts a 32-bit signed binary value to 32-bit floating-point data and places
Ladder Symbol
FLTL(453)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FLTL(453)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FLTL(453)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
599
Area S R
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description FLTL(453) converts the 32-bit signed binary value in S+1 and S to 32-bit float-
ing-point data (IEEE754-format) and places the result in R+1 and R. A single
0 is added after the decimal point in the floating-point result.
S+1 S Signed binary data (32 bits)
R+1 R Floating-point data (32 bits)
Signed binary data within the range of –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 can

be specified for S+1 and S. The floating point value has 24 significant binary
digits (bits). The result will not be exact if a number greater than 16,777,215
(the maximum value that can be expressed in 24-bits) is converted by
FLTL(453).
Example Conversions:
A signed binary value of 16,777,215 is converted to 16,777,215.0.
A signed binary value of –16,777,215 is converted to –15,777,215.0.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions The result will not be exact if a number with an absolute value greater than
16,777,215 (the maximum value that can be expressed in 24-bits) is con-
verted.
600
3-15-5 FLOATING-POINT ADD: +F(454)

Purpose Adds two 32-bit floating-point numbers and places the result in the specified
result words.
Ladder Symbol
+F(454)
Au Au: First augend word
Ad AD: First addend word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +F(454)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+F(454)

OK OK OK OK
Area Au Ad R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
601
Description +F(454) adds the 32-bit floating-point number in Ad+1 and Ad to the 32-bit
floating-point number in Au+1 and Au and places the result in R+1 and R.
(The floating point data must be in IEEE754 format.)
Au+1 Au Augend (floating-point data, 32 bits)
Addend (floating-point data, 32 bits)

+ Ad+1 Ad
R+1 R Result (floating-point data, 32 bits)
If the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that can
be expressed as floating-point data, the Overflow Flag will turn ON and the
result will be output as ±∞.
If the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that can be
expressed as floating-point data, the Underflow Flag will turn ON and the
result will be output as 0.
The various combinations of augend and addend data will produce the results
Augend
Addend 0 Numeral +∞ –∞ NaN
0 0 Numeral +∞ –∞
Numeral Numeral See note 1. +∞ –∞
+∞ +∞ +∞ +∞ See note 3.
(See note 2.)
–∞ –∞ –∞ See note 3. –∞
(See note 2.)
NaN See note 3.
Note 1. The results could be zero (including underflows), a numeral, +∞, or –∞.
2. With CJ1H-CPU@@H-R CPU Units, an undetermined value will be output.
3. The Error Flag will be turned ON and the instruction will not be executed.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the augend or addend data is not recognized as
floating-point data.
ON if the augend or addend data is not a number (NaN).
ON if +∞ and –∞ are added.
Overflow Flag OF ON if the absolute value of the result is too large to be
expressed as a 32-bit floating-point value.
Underflow Flag UF ON if the absolute value of the result is too small to be
Precautions The augend (Au+1 and Au) and Addend (Ad+1 and Ad) data must be in
IEEE754 floating-point data format.
602
3-15-6 FLOATING-POINT SUBTRACT: –F(455)

Purpose Subtracts one 32-bit floating-point number from another and places the result
in the specified result words.
Ladder Symbol
–F(455)
Mi Mi: First Minuend word
Su Su: First Subtrahend word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition –F(455)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @–F(455)

OK OK OK OK
Area Mi Su R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
603
Description –F(455) subtracts the 32-bit floating-point number in Su+1 and Su from the
32-bit floating-point number in Mi+1 and Mi and places the result in R+1 and
R. (The floating point data must be in IEEE754 format.)
Mi+1 Mi Minuend (floating-point data, 32 bits)
Su
– Su+1 Subtrahend (floating-point data, 32 bits)
The various combinations of minuend and subtrahend data will produce the
results shown in the following table.
Minuend
Subtrahend 0 Numeral +∞ –∞ NaN
+∞ –∞ –∞ See note 3. –∞
–∞ +∞ +∞ +∞ See note 3.
NaN See note 3.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the minuend or subtrahend data is not recognized
as floating-point data.
ON if the minuend or subtrahend is not a number (NaN).
ON if +∞ is subtracted from +∞.
ON if –∞ is subtracted from –∞.
Precautions The Minuend (Mi+1 and Mi) and Subtrahend (Su+1 and Su) data must be in
604
3-15-7 FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY: *F(456)

Purpose Multiplies two 32-bit floating-point numbers and places the result in the speci-
fied result words.
Ladder Symbol
*F(456)
Md Md: First Multiplicand word
Mr Mr: First Multiplier word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition *F(456)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @*F(456)

OK OK OK OK
Area Md Mr R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
605
Description *F(456) multiplies the 32-bit floating-point number in Md+1 and Md by the 32-
bit floating-point number in Mr+1 and Mr and places the result in R+1 and R.
(The floating point data must be in IEEE754 format.)
Md+1 Md Multiplicand (floating-point data, 32 bits)
× Mr+1 Mr Multiplier (floating-point data, 32 bits)
The various combinations of multiplicand and multiplier data will produce the
Multiplicand
Multiplier 0 Numeral +∞ –∞ NaN
0 0 0 See note 3. See note 3.
Numeral 0 See note 1. +/–∞ +/–∞
+∞ See note 3. +/–∞ +∞ –∞
(See note 2.)
–∞ See note 3. +/–∞ –∞ +∞
(See note 2.)
NaN See note 3.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the multiplicand or multiplier data is not recognized
ON if the multiplicand or multiplier is not a number (NaN).
ON if +∞ and 0 are multiplied.
ON if –∞ and 0 are multiplied.
Precautions The Multiplicand (Md+1 and Md) and Multiplier (Mr+1 and Mr) data must be in
606
3-15-8 FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE: /F(457)

Purpose Divides one 32-bit floating-point number by another and places the result in
the specified result words.
Ladder Symbol
/F(457)
Dd Dd: First Dividend word
Dr Dr: First Divisor word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition /F(457)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @/F(457)

OK OK OK OK
Area Dd Dr R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
607
Description /F(457) divides the 32-bit floating-point number in Dd+1 and Dd by the 32-bit
floating-point number in Dr+1 and Dr and places the result in R+1 and R. (The
floating point data must be in IEEE754 format.)
Dd+1 Dd Dividend (floating-point data, 32 bits)
÷ Dr+1 Dr Divisor (floating-point data, 32 bits)
The various combinations of dividend and divisor data will produce the results
Multiplicand
0 See note 4. +/–∞ +∞ –∞
(See note 3.) (See note 3.) (See note 3.)
+∞ 0 0 (See notes See note 4. See note 4.
1 and 3.)
–∞ 0 0 (See notes See note 4. See note 4.
1 and 3.)
NaN See note 4.
Note 1. The results will be zero for underflows.

2. The results could be zero (including underflows), a numeral, +∞, or –∞.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the dividend or divisor data is not recognized as
ON if the dividend or divisor is not a number (NaN).
ON if the dividend and divisor are both 0.
ON if the dividend and divisor are both +∞ or –∞.
Precautions The Dividend (Dd+1 and Dd) and Divisor (Dr+1 and Dr) data must be in
608
3-15-9 DEGREES TO RADIANS: RAD(458)

Purpose Converts a 32-bit floating-point number from degrees to radians and places
Ladder Symbol
RAD(458)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RAD(458)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RAD(458)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
609
Description RAD(458) converts the 32-bit floating-point number in S+1 and S from
degrees to radians and places the result in R and R+1. (The floating point
source data must be in IEEE754 format.)
S+1 S Source (degrees, 32-bit floating-point data)
R+1 R Result (radians, 32-bit floating-point data)
Degrees are converted to radians by means of the following formula:

Degrees × π/180 = radians
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the source data is not recognized as floating-point
data.
ON if the source data is not a number (NaN).
Precautions The source data in S+1 and S must be in IEEE754 floating-point data format.
3-15-10 RADIANS TO DEGREES: DEG(459)

Purpose Converts a 32-bit floating-point number from radians to degrees and places
Ladder Symbol
DEG(459)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DEG(459)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DEG(459)

OK OK OK OK
610
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to+2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to+2047 ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description DEG(459) converts the 32-bit floating-point number in S+1 and S from radians
to degrees and places the result in R+1 and R. (The floating point source data
must be in IEEE754 format.)
S+1 S Source (radians, 32-bit floating-point data)
R+1 R Result (degrees, 32-bit floating-point data)
Radians are converted to degrees by means of the following formula:

Radians × 180/π = degrees
611
Flags
data.
3-15-11 SINE: SIN(460)

Purpose Calculates the sine of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) and places
Ladder Symbol
SIN(460)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SIN(460)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SIN(460)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
612
Area S R
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SIN(460) calculates the sine of the angle (in radians) expressed as a 32-bit
floating-point value in S+1 and S and places the result in R+1 and R.
(The floating point source data must be in IEEE754 format.)
SIN S+1 S Source (32-bit floating-point data)
R+1 R Result (32-bit floating-point data)
Specify the desired angle (–65,535 to 65,535) in radians in S+1 and S. If the
angle is outside of the range –65,535 to 65,535, an error will occur and the
instruction will not be executed. For information on converting from degrees to
radians, see 3-15-22 LOGARITHM: LOG(468) DEGREES TO RADIANS:
RAD(458).
The following diagram shows the relationship between the angle and result.
R S: Angle (radian) data
R: Result (sine)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the source data is not a number (NaN).
ON if the absolute value of the source data exceeds
65,535.
Overflow Flag OF OFF
613

3-15-12 HIGH-SPEED SINE: SINQ(475)

Purpose Calculates the sine of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) and places
Ladder Symbol
SINQ(475)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SINQ(475)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SINQ(475)

OK OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Can be specified. ---
Data Registers ---
614
Area S R
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SINQ(475) calculates the sine of the angle (in radians) expressed as a 32-bit
floating-point value in S+1 and S and places the result in R+1 and R.

angle is outside of the range –65,535 to 65,535, an unpredictable value will be
output, but the Error Flag will not be turned ON. For information on converting
between degrees and radians, see 3-15-9 DEGREES TO RADIANS:
RAD(458) and 3-15-10 RADIANS TO DEGREES: DEG(459).
R
S
3 π 0 π 3
−2 π − π −π − π π 2π
2 2 2 2
−1
S: Angle (radian) data
R: Result (sine)
Precautions SINQ(475) differs from SIN(460) in the following respects:

• The instruction has improved performance.
• The instruction length is 8 steps.
• The Condition Flags are not refreshed.
• An unpredictable value will be output if the angle data is out-of-range.
• The data cannot be input or output at a Programming Console. A question
mark will be displayed.
3-15-13 COSINE: COS(461)

Purpose Calculates the cosine of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) and places
Ladder Symbol
COS(461)
615
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition COS(461)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @COS(461)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description COS(461) calculates the cosine of the angle (in radians) expressed as a 32-
bit floating-point value in S+1 and S and places the result in R+1 and R.
COS S+1 S Source (32-bit floating-point data)
616

radians, see 3-15-9 DEGREES TO RADIANS: RAD(458).
R: Result (cosine)
Flags
65,535.
3-15-14 HIGH-SPEED COSINE: COSQ(476)

Purpose Calculates the cosine of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) and places
Ladder Symbol
COSQ(476)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition COSQ(476)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @COSQ(476)

OK OK OK OK OK
617
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description COSQ(476) calculates the cosine of the angle (in radians) expressed as a 32-
COS S+1 S Source (32-bit floating-point data)
D
R: Result (cosine)
1
S
0
−
3 − π π 3
−2 π 2 π −π 2 2 π 2 π 2π
−1
618
Precautions COSQ(476) differs from COS(461) in the following respects:

3-15-15 TANGENT: TAN(462)

Purpose Calculates the tangent of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) and
Ladder Symbol
TAN(462)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TAN(462)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TAN(462)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
619
Area S R
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description TAN(462) calculates the tangent of the angle (in radians) expressed as a 32-
TAN S+1 S Source (32-bit floating-point data)
radians, see 3-15-9 DEGREES TO RADIANS: RAD(458).
R
R: Result (tangent)
Flags
65,535.
620

3-15-16 HIGH-SPEED TANGENT: TANQ(477)

Purpose Calculates the tangent of a 32-bit floating-point number (in radians) and
Ladder Symbol
TANQ(477)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TANQ(477)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TANQ(477)

OK OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
621
Area S R
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description TANQ(477) calculates the tangent of the angle (in radians) expressed as a 32-
TAN S+1 S Source (32-bit floating-point data)
be expressed as floating-point data, the result will be output as ±∞ or 0.
R
0
S
− 3 π π π 3
−
−2 π 2 −π 2 2 π 2 π 2π
−1

R: Result (tangent)
Precautions TANQ(477) differs from TAN(462) in the following respects:

622
• An unpredictable value will be output if the angle data is nπ/2

(n = ...., -3, -1, 1, 3.....).
3-15-17 ARC SINE: ASIN(463)

Purpose Calculates the arc sine of a 32-bit floating-point number and places the result
in the specified result words. (The arc sine function is the inverse of the sine
function; it returns the angle that produces a given sine value between –1 and
1.)
Ladder Symbol
ASIN(463)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ASIN(463)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ASIN(463)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
623
Area S R
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ASIN(463) computes the angle (in radians) for a sine value expressed as a
32-bit floating-point number in S+1 and S and places the result in R+1 and R.
–1
The source data must be between –1.0 and 1.0. If the absolute value of the
source data exceeds 1.0, an error will occur and the instruction will not be
executed.
The result is output to words R+1 and R as an angle (in radians) within the
range of –π/2 to π/2.
The following diagram shows the relationship between the input data and
result.
R
S: Input data (sine value)

R: Result (radians)
Flags
data.
ON if the absolute value of the source data exceeds 1.0.
624
3-15-18 ARC COSINE: ACOS(464)

Purpose Calculates the arc cosine of a 32-bit floating-point number and places the
result in the specified result words. (The arc cosine function is the inverse of
the cosine function; it returns the angle that produces a given cosine value
between –1 and 1.)
Ladder Symbol
ACOS(464)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ACOS(464)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ACOS(464)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
625
Area S R
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ACOS(464) computes the angle (in radians) for a cosine value expressed as a
32-bit floating-point number in S+1 and S and places the result in R+1 and R.
COS–1 S+1 S Source (32-bit floating-point data)
executed.
range of 0 to π.
result.
S: Input data (cosine value)
R R: Result (radians)
Flags
data.
626
3-15-19 ARC TANGENT: ATAN(465)

Purpose Calculates the arc tangent of a 32-bit floating-point number and places the
result in the specified result words. (The arc tangent function is the inverse of
the tangent function; it returns the angle that produces a given tangent value.)
Ladder Symbol
ATAN(465)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ATAN(465)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ATAN(465)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
627
Description ATAN(465) computes the angle (in radians) for a tangent value expressed as
a 32-bit floating-point number in S+1 and S and places the result in R+1 and
R.
TAN–1 S+1 S Source (32-bit floating-point data)
result.
R
S: Input data (tangent)

R: Result (radians)
Flags
data.
628
3-15-20 SQUARE ROOT: SQRT(466)

Purpose Calculates the square root of a 32-bit floating-point number and places the
result in the specified result words.
Ladder Symbol
SQRT(466)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SQRT(466)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SQRT(466)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
629
Description SQRT(466) calculates the square root of the 32-bit floating-point number in
S+1 and S and places the result in R+1 and R. (The floating point source data
must be in IEEE754 format.)
S+1 S Source (32-bit floating-point data)
The source data must be positive; if it is negative, an error will occur and the
result.
R
S: Input data
R: Result
Flags
data.
ON if the source data is negative.
Negative Flag N OFF
630
3-15-21 EXPONENT: EXP(467)

Purpose Calculates the natural (base e) exponential of a 32-bit floating-point number
Ladder Symbol
EXP(467)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition EXP(467)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @EXP(467)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
Counter Area C0000 to 4094
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
631
Description EXP(467) calculates the natural (base e) exponential of the 32-bit floating-
point number in S+1 and S and places the result in R+1 and R. In other words,
EXP(467) calculates ex (x = source) and places the result in R+1 and R.
S+1 S Source (32-bit floating-point data)

e
Note The constant e is 2.718282.
result.
R
S: Input data
R: Result
Flags
data.
Negative Flag N OFF
632
3-15-22 LOGARITHM: LOG(468)

Purpose Calculates the natural (base e) logarithm of a 32-bit floating-point number and
Ladder Symbol
LOG(468)

Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition LOG(468)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @LOG(468)

OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
633
Description LOG(468) calculates the natural (base e) logarithm of the 32-bit floating-point
number in S+1 and S and places the result in R+1 and R.
loge S+1 S Source (32-bit floating-point data)
result.
R
S: Input data
R: Result
Flags
data.
634
3-15-23 EXPONENTIAL POWER: PWR(840)

Purpose Raises a 32-bit floating-point number to the power of another 32-bit floating-
point number.
Ladder Symbol
PWR(840)
B B: First base word
E E: First exponent word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PWR(840)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @PWR(840)

OK OK OK OK
Area B E R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
635
Description PWR(840) raises the 32-bit floating-point number in B+1 and B to the power
of the 32-bit floating-point number in E+1 and E. In other words, PWR(840)
calculates XY (X = B+1 and B; Y = E+1 and E).
Exponent data
E+1 E
B+1 B R+1 R
Base data
For example, when the base words (B+1 and B) contain 3.1 and the exponent
words (E+1 and E) contain 3, the result is 3.13 or 29.791.
be expressed as floating-point data, the Overflow Flag will turn ON.
expressed as floating-point data, the Underflow Flag will turn ON.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the base (B+1 and B) or exponent (E+1 and E) is
not recognized as floating-point data.
ON if the base (B+1 and B) or exponent (E+1 and E) is
not a number (NaN).
ON if the base (B+1 and B) is 0 and the exponent (E+1
and E) is less than 0. (Division by 0)
ON if the base (B+1 and B) is negative and the exponent
(E+1 and E) is non-integer. (Root of a negative number)
Precautions The base (B+1 and B) and the exponent (E+1 and E) must be in IEEE754
floating-point data format.
3-15-24 Single-precision Floating-point Comparison Instructions

Purpose These input comparison instructions compare two single-precision floating
point values (32-bit IEEE754 constants and/or the contents of specified
words) and create an ON execution condition when the comparison condition
is true.
Units only.
Note Refer to 3-7-1 Input Comparison Instructions (300 to 328) for details on the
signed and unsigned binary input comparison instructions and 3-16-21 Dou-
ble-precision Floating-point Input Instructions for details on double-precision
floating-point input comparison instructions.
636
Ladder Symbol
Symbol & options
Variations
son instruction

OK OK OK OK
Area S1 S2
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to #FFFFFFFF (binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers IR0 to IR15 (for unsigned data only)
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The input comparison instruction compares the data specified in S1 and S2 as
single-precision floating point values (32-bit IEEE754 data) and creates an
ON execution condition when the comparison condition is true. When the data
is stored in words, S1 and S2 specify the first of two words containing the 32-
bit data. It is also possible to input the floating-point data as an 8-digit hexa-
decimal constant.
637


<F

<F
OR connection
<F

Options
With the three input types and six symbols, there are 18 different possible
combinations.
Symbol Option (data format)
= (Equal) F: Single-precision floating-point data
<> (Not equal)
< (Less than)
> (Greater than)

tions of the 18 single-precision floating-point input comparison instructions.
(C1=S1+1, S1 and C2=S2+1, S2.)
329 LD=F LOAD FLOATING EQUAL True if
AND=F AND FLOATING EQUAL C1 = C2
OR=F OR FLOATING EQUAL
638

330 LD<>F LOAD FLOATING NOT EQUAL True if
AND<>F AND FLOATING NOT EQUAL C1 ≠ C2
OR<>F OR FLOATING NOT EQUAL
331 LD<F LOAD FLOATING LESS THAN True if
AND<F AND FLOATING LESS THAN C1 < C2
OR<F OR FLOATING LESS THAN
332 LD<=F LOAD FLOATING LESS THAN OR EQUAL True if
AND<=F AND FLOATING LESS THAN OR EQUAL C1 ≤ C2
OR<=F OR FLOATING LESS THAN OR EQUAL
333 LD>F LOAD FLOATING GREATER THAN True if
AND>F AND FLOATING GREATER THAN C1 > C2
OR>F OR FLOATING GREATER THAN
325 LD>=F LOAD FLOATING GREATER THAN OR EQUAL True if
AND>=F AND FLOATING GREATER THAN OR EQUAL C1 ≥ C2
OR>=F OR FLOATING GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Greater Than > ON if S1+1, S1 > S2+1, S2.
Flag
Greater Than or > = ON if S1+1, S1 ≥ S2+1, S2.
Equal Flag
Equal Flag = ON if S1+1, S1 = S2+1, S2.
Not Equal Flag = ON if S1+1, S1 ≠ S2+1, S2.
Less Than Flag < ON if S1+1, S1 < S2+1, S2.
Less Than or <= ON if S1+1, S1 ≤ S2+1, S2.
Equal Flag

Example AND FLOATING LESS THAN: AND<F(331)

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the floating point data in
D00101, D00100 is compared to the floating point data in D00201, D00200. If
the content of D00101, D00100 is less than that of D00201, D00200, execu-
tion proceeds to the next line and CIO 005000 is turned ON. If the content of
D00101, D00100 is not less than that of D00201, D00200, execution does not
proceed to the next instruction line.
005000
000000
<F
D00100
D00200
639
FLOATING LESS THAN Comparison (<F)

15 0 15 0
S1 :D00100 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 S2 :D00200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
S1+1:D00101 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 S2+1:D00201 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Decimal value: 2.3 Decimal value: −3.5
2.3>−3.5
Does not yield an ON condition.
15 0 15
S1 :D00100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S2 :D00200 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
S1+1:D00101 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S2+1:D00201 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
Decimal value: 4,294,967,296 Decimal value: 5,566,555,656
4294967296<5566555656
Yields an ON condition.
3-15-25 FLOATING-POINT TO ASCII: FSTR(448)

Purpose Expresses a 32-bit floating-point value (IEEE754-format) in standard decimal
notation or scientific notation and converts that value to ASCII text.
only.
Ladder Symbol
FSTR(448)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FSTR(448)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FSTR(448)

OK OK OK OK
Area S C D
CIO 6142 CIO 6141 CIO 6143
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to D32765 D00000 to D32767
EM Area without bank E00000 to E32766 E00000 to E32765 E00000 to E32767
640
Area S C D
En_32766 En_32765 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM @ D00000 to @ D00000 to @ D00000 to
addresses in binary @ D32767 @ D32767 @ D32767
@ E00000 to @ E00000 to @ E00000 to
@ E32767 @ E32767 @ E32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_00000 to @ En_00000 to
@ En_32767 @ En_32767 @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM *D00000 to *D00000 to *D00000 to
addresses in BCD *D32767 *D32767 *D32767
*E00000 to *E00000 to *E00000 to
*E32767 *E32767 *E32767
*En_00000 to *En_00000 to *En_00000 to
*En_32767 *En_32767 *En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
Constants #00000000 to ---
#FFFFFFFF
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –()IR15
,IR0 to ,IR15
Description FSTR(448) expresses the 32-bit floating-point number in S+1 and S

(IEEE754-format) in decimal notation or scientific notation according to the
control data in words C to C+2, converts the number to ASCII text, and out-
puts the result to the destination words starting at D.
The following diagram shows the contents of the 3 control words.
0000 hex: Decimal format
0001 hex: Scientific notation
Data format
Total characters 0002 to 0018 hex (2 to 24 characters, see note)
Fractional digits 0000 to 0007 hex (see note)
Note: There are limits on the total number of characters

and the number of fractional digits. See Limits on the
Number of ASCII Characters on page 643 for details.
• The content of C (Data format) specifies whether to express the number

in S+1, S in decimal notation or scientific notation.
• Decimal notation
Expresses a real number as an integer and fractional part.
Example: 124.56
• Scientific notation
Expresses a real number as an integer part, fractional part, and expo-
nent part.
Example: 1.2456E-2 (1.2456×10-2)
641
• The content of C+1 (Total characters) specifies the number of ASCII char-
acters after conversion including the sign symbol, numbers, decimal point
and spaces.
• The content of C+2 (Fractional digits) specifies the number of digits (char-
acters) below the decimal point.
The ASCII text is stored in D and subsequent words in the following order:
leftmost byte of D, rightmost byte of D, leftmost byte of D+1, rightmost byte of
D+1, etc.
Decimal notation (C=0000 hex)
−1.23456
Conversion to
ASCII text
2D 20 20 31 2E 32 33 34 35 36
(−) (SP)(SP) (1) (,) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(SP represents a space.)
Rounded off
Stored in destination words beginning with D.
Example: −1.23456 15 87 0
Total characters = 8 (C+1 = 0008 hex)
D: 2D 20
S Floating-point 20 31 Fractional digits = 3 (C+2 = 0003 hex)
S+1 data 2E 32
33 34
00 00
ASCII characters are stored in order.
(Leftmost byte → rightmost byte)
Scientific notation (C=0001 hex)

− 1.23E+00
Conversion to
ASCII text
2D 20 31 2E 32 33 45 2B 30 31
(−) (SP) (1) (,) (2) (3) (E) (+) (0) (0)
(SP represents a space.)
Stored in destination words beginning with D.

15 87 0
2D 20
Total characters = 10 (C+1 = 000A hex)
31 2E Fractional digits = 2 (C+2 = 0002 hex)
32 33
45 2B
30 30
00 00
ASCII characters are stored in order.
(Leftmost byte → rightmost byte)
642
Storage of ASCII Text

After the floating-point number is converted to ASCII text, the ASCII characters are stored in the destina-
tion words beginning with D, as shown in the following diagrams. Different storage methods are used for
decimal notation and scientific notation.
Decimal notation (C=0000 hex)
Total number of characters
Integer part Fractional part
Sign Decimal point
.
If there are more fractional digits in the source data than specified in C+1, the extra digits will be rounded
off. If there are fewer fractional digits, zeroes (ASCII: 30 hex) will added to the end of the source data.
A decimal point (ASCII: 2E hex) is added if the number fractional digits is greater than 0.
Spaces (ASCII: 20 hex) are added if the integer part of the floating-point data is shorter than the integer part of the result
(total number of characters - sign digit - decimal point - fractional digits).
Positive number: Space (20 hex)
Negative number: Minus sign (2D hex)
Scientific notation (C=0001 hex)

Fractional
Integer part part Exponential part
Sign Decimal point Sign
. E
0 to 9 are written as 00 to 09.

Positive: Plus sign (2B hex)
Negative: Minus sign (2D hex)
Letter E (ASCII: 45 hex) is written here.
If there are more fractional digits in the source data than specified in C+1, the extra digits will be rounded off.
If there are fewer fractional digits, zeroes (ASCII: 30 hex) will added to the end of the source data.
A decimal point (ASCII: 2E hex) is added if the number fractional digits is greater than 0.
Spaces (ASCII: 20 hex) are added if the integer part of the floating-point data is shorter than the integer part of the result (total
number of characters - sign digit - decimal point - fractional digits - E digit).
Positive number: Space (20 hex)
Note Either one or two bytes of zeroes are added to the end of ASCII text as an end
code.
Total number of characters odd: 00 hex is stored after the ASCII text.
Total number of characters even: 0000 hex is stored after the ASCII text.
Limits on the Number of ASCII Characters
There are limits on the number of ASCII characters in the converted number.
The Error Flag will be turned ON if the number of characters exceeds the
maximum allowed.
1. Limits on the Total Number of ASCII Characters
a) Decimal Notation (C = 0000 hex)
• When there is no fractional part (C+2 = 0000 hex):
2 ≤ Total Characters ≤ 24
• When there is a fractional part (C+2 = 0001 to 0007 hex):
(Fractional digits + 3) ≤ Total Characters ≤ 24
b) Scientific Notation (C = 0001 hex)
6 ≤ Total Characters ≤ 24
(Fractional digits + 7) ≤ Total Characters ≤ 24
2. Limits on the Number of Digits in the Integer Part
643

1 ≤ Number of Integer Digits ≤ 24
1 ≤ Number of Integer Digits ≤ (24 − Fractional digits − 2)
1 digit (fixed)
3. Limits on the Number of Digits in the Fractional Part
• Fractional Digits ≤ 7
• Also: Fractional Digits ≤ (Total Number of ASCII Characters − 3)
• Fractional Digits ≤ 7
• Also: Fractional Digits ≤ (Total Number of ASCII Characters − 3)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the data in S+1 and S is not a valid floating-point
number (NaN).
ON if the data in S+1 and S is +∞ or –∞.
ON if the Data Format setting in C is not 0000 or 0001.
ON if the Total Characters setting in C+1 is not within the
allowed range. (See 1. Limits on the Total Number of
ASCII Characters above for details.)
ON if the Fractional Digits setting in C+2 is not within the
allowed range. (See 3. Limits on the Number of Digits in
the Fractional Part above for details.)
Equals Flag = ON if the conversion result is 0.
Examples Converting to ASCII Text in Decimal Notation

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FSTR(448) converts the
floating-point data in D00001 and D00000 to decimal-notation ASCII text and
writes the ASCII text to the destination words beginning with D00100. The
contents of the control words (D00010 to D00012) specify the details on the
data format (decimal notation, 7 characters total, 3 fractional digits).
644
000000 FSTR
D00000
D00010
D00100
15 0 Conversion
D00000 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0.327457
D00001 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
Storage D00010 0000(Hex)

Decimal notation
conditions D00011 0007(Hex) Total characters = 7 characters
D00012 0003(Hex) Fractional digits = 3 digits (characters)
Total number of characters Rounded off

0.327457
Spaces Fractional part
D00100 20 (Space) 20 (Space)
D00101 30 (0) 2E (.)
D00102 33 (3) 32 (2)
D00103 37 (7) 00
Converting to ASCII Text in Scientific Notation

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FSTR(448) converts the
floating-point data in D00001 and D00000 to scientific-notation ASCII text and
writes the ASCII text to the destination words beginning with D00100. The
contents of the control words (D00010 to D00012) specify the details on the
data format (scientific notation, 11 characters total, 3 fractional digits).
000000 FSTR
D00000
D00010
D00100
15 0 Conversion
D00000 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0.327457
D00001 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
D00010 0001(Hex) Scientific notation

Storage
conditions D00011 000B(Hex) Total characters = 11 characters
D00012 0003(Hex) Fractional digits = 3 digits (characters)
3.27457E-01
Spaces Fractional Rounded off
part
D00100 20 (Space) 20 (Space)
D00101 33 (3) 2E (.)
D00102 32 (2) 37 (7)
D00103 35 (5) 45 (E)
D00104 2D (−) 30 (0)
D00105 31 (1) 00
3-15-26 ASCII TO FLOATING-POINT: FVAL(449)

Purpose Converts a number expressed in ASCII text (decimal or scientific notation) to
a 32-bit floating-point value (IEEE754-format) and outputs the floating-point
value to the specified words.
only.
645
Ladder Symbol
FVAL(449)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FVAL(449)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FVAL(449)

OK OK OK OK
Description FVAL(449) converts the specified ASCII text number (starting at word S) to a
32-bit floating-point number (IEEE754-format) and outputs the result to the
destination words starting at D.
FVAL(449) can convert ASCII text in decimal or scientific notation if it meets
the following conditions:
Up to 6 characters are valid, excluding the sign, decimal point, and exponent.
Any characters beyond the 6th character will be ignored.
• Decimal Notation
Real numbers expressed with an integer and fractional part.
Example: 124.56
• Scientific Notation
Real numbers expressed as an integer part, fractional part, and exponent
part.
Example: 1.2456E-2 (1.2456×10-2)
The data format (decimal or scientific notation) is detected automatically.
The ASCII text must be stored in S and subsequent words in the following
order: leftmost byte of S, rightmost byte of S, leftmost byte of S+1, rightmost
byte of S+1, etc.
Decimal notation
15 87 0
Conversion of ASCII text number to
2D 20
32-bit floating-point data 32-bit floating-point data
20 31 1110100101111001
32 33 −123.456
1100001011110110
2E 34 Sign Exponent
35 36 Stored in D and D+1.
37 38
00 00 15 0
D 1110100101111001
− SP SP 1 2 3 . 4 5 6 7 8
D+1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
(2D)(20)(20)(31)(32)(33)(2E)(34)(35)(36)(37)(38)
Spaces are If there are more than 6 digits, the 7th

ignored during and higher digits are ignored.
conversion (Digits do not include the sign, decimal
point, and exponent characters.)
646
Scientific notation
15 87 0
Conversion of ASCII text number
2D 20 to 32-bit floating-point data 32-bit floating-point data
20 31
2E 32 −1.234×102 1100110011001101
33 34 1100001011110110
45 2B Sign Exponent Stored in D and D+1.
30 32
00 00
− SP SP 1 . 2 3 4 E + 0 2 15 0
(2D)(20)(20)(31)(2E)(32)(33)(34)(45)(2D)(31)(38) D 1100110011001101
D+1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
Spaces are
ignored during
conversion
Storage of ASCII Text The following diagrams show how the ASCII text number is converted to float-
ing-point data. Different conversion methods are used for numbers stored with
decimal notation and scientific notation.
ASCII Character Storage
S FVAL(449) converts the ASCII characters
starting with the leftmost byte of S and
continuing until a byte containing 00 hex is
reached. There must be a byte containing
00 hex within the first 25 bytes.
00
Up to 00 hex
(25 characters max.)
Decimal notation
15 87 0 25 characters max.
Sign (20)
(20) Digit Integer part Fractional part
Sign
SP SP 00
Decimal
00 point The 7th and higher digits are ignored.
(The sign, decimal point, and exponent
characters are not counted as digits.)
Any spaces (20 hex) or zeroes (30 hex)
before the first digit are ignored.
Positive number: Space (20 hex) or Plus sign (2B hex)
Scientific notation
15 87 0 25 characters max.
Sign (20)
Digit Integer part Fractional part Exponential part
(20)
Sign Sign
. (2E) Digit SP E 00
Digit Decimal Positive: + (2B hex)
E (45) Sign point Negative: - (2D hex)
Digit Digit E (45)
The 7th and higher digits are ignored.
00
(The sign, decimal point, and exponent
characters are not counted as digits.)
Any spaces (20 hex) or zeroes (30 hex)
before the first digit are ignored.
Positive number: Space (20 hex) or Plus sign (2B hex)
647
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the digits (integer and fractional parts) in the source
data starting at S are not 30 to 39 hex (0 to 9).
ON if the first two digits of the exponential part do not con-
tain 45 and 2B hex (E+) or 45 and 2D hex (E-). (integer
and fractional parts) in the source data starting at S are
not 30 to 39 hex (0 to 9).
ON if there are two or more exponential parts in the
source data.
ON if the data is +∞ or –∞ after conversion.
ON is the are 0 characters in the text data.
ON if a byte containing 00 hex is not found within the first
25 characters.
Equals Flag = ON if the conversion result is 0.
Examples Converting ASCII Text in Decimal Notation to Floating-point Data

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FVAL(449) converts the
specified decimal-notation ASCII text number in the source words starting at
D00000 to floating-point data and writes the result to destination words
D00100 and D00101.
000000
FVAL
D00000
D00100
The 7th and higher digits are ignored.
(The sign, decimal point, and leading
zeroes/spaces are not counted.)
Ignored
− 01. 234521
D00000 2D (−) 20 (Space) Conversion
D00001 30 (0) 31 (1) 15 0
D00002 2E (.) 32 (2) 0000010011000000
D00003 33 (3) 34 (4) 1011111110011110
D00004 35 (5) 32 (2)
D00005 31 (1) 00
Storage
15 0
D00100 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
D00101 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Converting ASCII Text in Scientific Notation

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FVAL(449) converts the
specified scientific-notation ASCII text number in the source words starting at
D00000 to floating-point data and writes the result to destination words
D00100 and D00101.
648
000000
FVAL
D00000
D00100
Ignored Ignored
− 1 . 23 4 5 E- 0 2
D00000 2D (−) 20 (Space) Conversion

15 0
D00001 31 (1) 2E (.)
D00002 32 (2) 33 (3) 0100001010101111
D00003 34 (4) 35 (5) 1011110001001010
D00004 45 (E) 2D (−)
D00005 30 (0) 32 (2)
D00006 00 00 Storage
15 0
D00100 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
D00101 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
3-15-27 MOVE FLOATING-POINT (SINGLE): MOVF(469)

Purpose Transfers the specified 32-bit floating-point number to the destination words.
This instruction is supported by CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
Ladder Symbol
MOVF(469)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MOVF(469)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MOVF(469)

OK OK OK OK OK
Area S R
(n = 0 to C)
649
Area S R
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description MOVF(469) outputs the single-precision floating-point number (32-bit source

data in IEEE754 format) from source words S+1 and S to destination words
D+1 and D.
S+1 S Source words
D+1 D Destination words
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Negative Flag N ON if the source data is negative.
Precautions When MOVF(469) is executed, the Error Flag is turned OFF.

If the source data in S+1 and S is 0, the Equals Flag is turned ON. If the
source data is non-zero, the Equals Flag is turned OFF.
If the source data in S+1 and S is negative, the Negative Flag is turned ON.
Operation Example
W00000 When input condition W00000 is ON, the content of D00000 and D00001 (+3.0)
MOVF
+3.0 is stored in floating-point format (IEEE754 format).
D00000
D00001 D00000
#4040 #0000 Equivalent to +3.0 in floating-point format
650
Double-precision Floating-point Instructions (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D Only) Section 3-16
3-16 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions (CS1-H, CJ1-

H, CJ1M, or CS1D Only)
The Double-precision Floating-point Instructions convert data and perform
floating-point arithmetic operations on double-precision floating-point data.
The CS1-H/CJ1-H CPU Units support the following 20 instructions.
DOUBLE FLOATING TO 16-BIT FIXD 841 657
DOUBLE FLOATING TO 32-BIT FIXLD 842 658
16-BIT TO DOUBLE FLOATING DBL 843 660
32-BIT TO DOUBLE FLOATING DBLL 844 661
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT ADD +D 845 663
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT SUBTRACT –D 846 665
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY *D 847 667
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE /D 848 669
DOUBLE DEGREES TO RADIANS RADD 849 671
DOUBLE RADIANS TO DEGREES DEGD 850 673
DOUBLE SINE SIND 851 674
DOUBLE COSINE COSD 852 676
DOUBLE TANGENT TAND 853 678
DOUBLE ARC SINE ASIND 854 680
DOUBLE ARC COSINE ACOSD 855 682
DOUBLE ARC TANGENT ATAND 856 684
DOUBLE SQUARE ROOT SQRTD 857 686
DOUBLE EXPONENT EXPD 858 688
DOUBLE LOGARITHM LOGD 859 690
DOUBLE EXPONENTIAL POWER PWRD 860 692
Double-precision Floating-point Symbol LD, AND, 335 to 340 694
Comparison Instructions OR
+
=D, <>D,
<D, <=D,
>D, or >=D
Data Format Floating-point data expresses real numbers using a sign, exponent, and man-
tissa. When data is expressed in floating-point format, the following formula
applies.
Real number = (–1)s 2e–1,023 (1.f)
s: Sign
e: Exponent
f: Mantissa
The floating-point data format conforms to the IEEE754 standards. Data is
expressed in 32 bits, as follows:
Sign Exponent Mantissa
s e f
63 62 52 51 0
651
Data No. of bits Contents

s: sign 1 0: positive; 1: negative
e: exponent 11 The exponent (e) value ranges from 0 to 2,047.
The actual exponent is the value remaining after
1,023 is subtracted from e, resulting in a range
of –1,023 to 1,024. “e=0” and “e=2,047” express
special numbers.
f: mantissa 52 The mantissa portion of binary floating-point
data fits the format 2.0 > 1.f ≥1.0.
Number of Digits Fifteen digits are effective for double-precision floating-point data.
Floating-point Data The following data can be expressed by floating-point data:
• –∞
• –1.79769313486232 x 10308 ≤ value ≤ –2.22507385850720 x 10–308
•0
• 2.22507385850720 x 10–308 ≤ value ≤ 1.79769313486232 x 1030
• +∞
• Not a number (NaN)
−2.22507385850720×10-308 2.22507385850720×10-308
−∞ +∞
−1 0 1
−1.79769313486232×10308 1.79769313486232×10308
Special Numbers The formats for NaN, ±∞, and 0 are as follows:
NaN*: e = 2,047 and f ≠ 0
+∞: e = 2,047, f = 0, and s= 0
–∞: e = 2,047, f = 0, and s= 1
0: e = 0 and f = 0
*NaN (not a number) is not a valid floating-point number. Executing Double-
precision Floating-point instructions will not result in NaN.
Writing Floating-point When double-precision floating-point is specified for the data format in the I/O
Data memory edit display in the CX-Programmer, standard decimal numbers input
in the display are automatically converted to the double-precision floating-
point format shown above (IEEE754-format) and written to I/O Memory. Data
written in the IEEE754-format is automatically converted to standard decimal
format when monitored on the display.
s e f
6362 5251 4847 3231 1615 0
n+3 n+2 n+1 n
It is not necessary for the user to be aware of the IEEE754 data format when
reading and writing double-precision floating-point data. It is only necessary to
remember that double-precision floating point values occupy four words each.
652
Numbers Expressed as Floating-point Values

The following types of floating-point numbers can be used.
Mantissa (f) Exponent (e)
0 Not 0 and All 1’s (1,024)
not all 1’s (1,024)
0 0 Normalized number Infinity
Not 0 Non-normalized NaN
number
Note A non-normalized number is one whose absolute value is too small to be

expressed as a normalized number. Non-normalized numbers have fewer sig-
nificant digits. If the result of calculations is a non-normalized number (includ-
ing intermediate results), the number of significant digits will be reduced.
Normalized Numbers Normalized numbers express real numbers. The sign bit will be 0 for a positive
number and 1 for a negative number.
The exponent (e) will be expressed from 1 to 2,046, and the real exponent will
be 1,023 less, i.e., –1,022 to 1,023.
The mantissa (f) will be expressed from 0 to (252 – 1), and it is assumed that,
in the real mantissa, bit 252 is 1 and the decimal point follows immediately
after it.
Normalized numbers are expressed as follows:
(–1)(sign s) x 2(exponent e)–1,023 x (1 + mantissa x 2–52)
Example
32 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
63 62 52 51 33
Sign: –
Exponent: 1,024 – 1,023 = 1
Mantissa: 1 + (251 + 250) x 2–52 = 1 + (2–1 + 2–2) = 1 + (0.75) = 1.75
Value: –1.75 x 21 = –3.5
Non-normalized numbers Non-normalized numbers express real numbers with very small absolute val-
ues. The sign bit will be 0 for a positive number and 1 for a negative number.
The exponent (e) will be 0, and the real exponent will be –1,022.
The mantissa (f) will be expressed from 1 to (252 – 1), and it is assumed that,
in the real mantissa, bit 252 is 0 and the decimal point follows immediately
after it.
Non-normalized numbers are expressed as follows:
(–1)(sign s) x 2–1,022 x (mantissa x 2–52)
Example
32 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
64 63 52 51 33
Sign: –
Exponent: –1,022
Mantissa: 0 + (251 + 250) x 2–52 = 0 + (2–1 + 2–2) = 0 + (0.75) = 0.75
Value: –0.75 x 2–1,022 = 1.668805 x 10–308
653
Zero Values of +0.0 and –0.0 can be expressed by setting the sign to 0 for positive
or 1 for negative. The exponent and mantissa will both be 0. Both +0.0 and –
0.0 are equivalent to 0.0. Refer to Floating-point Arithmetic Results, below, for
differences produced by the sign of 0.0.
Infinity Values of +∞ and –∞ can be expressed by setting the sign to 0 for positive or 1
for negative. The exponent will be 2,047 (211 – 1) and the mantissa will be 0.
NaN NaN (not a number) is produced when the result of calculations, such as 0.0/
0.0, ∞/∞, or ∞–∞, does not correspond to a number or infinity. The exponent
will be 255 (28 – 1) and the mantissa will be not 0.
Note There are no specifications for the sign of NaN or the value of the mantissa
field (other than to be not 0).
Floating-point Arithmetic Results

Rounding Results The following methods will be used to round results when the number of digits
in the accurate result of floating-point arithmetic exceeds the significant digits
of internal processing expressions.
If the result is close to one of two internal floating-point expressions, the
closer expression will be used. If the result is midway between two internal
floating-point expressions, the result will be rounded so that the last digit of
the mantissa is 0.
Overflows, Underflows, Overflows will be output as either positive or negative infinity, depending on
and Illegal Calculations the sign of the result. Underflows will be output as either positive or negative
zero, depending on the sign of the result.
Illegal calculations will result in NaN. Illegal calculations include adding infinity
to a number with the opposite sign, subtracting infinity from a number with the
opposite sign, multiplying zero and infinity, dividing zero by zero, or dividing
infinity by infinity.
The value of the result may not be correct if an overflow occurs when convert-
ing a floating-point number to an integer.
Precautions in Handling The following precautions apply to handling zero, infinity, and NaN.
Special Values • The sum of positive zero and negative zero is positive zero.
• The difference between zeros of the same sign is positive zero.
• If any operand is a NaN, the results will be a NaN.
• Positive zero and negative zero are treated as equivalent in comparisons.
• Comparison or equivalency tests on one or more NaN will always be true
for != and always be false for all other instructions.
Double-precision Floating-point Calculation Results

When the absolute value of the result is greater than the maximum value that
can be expressed for floating-point data, the Overflow Flag will turn ON and
the result will be output as ±∞. If the result is positive, it will be output as +∞; if
negative, then –∞.
The Equals Flag will only turn ON when both the exponent (e) and the man-
tissa (f) are zero after a calculation. A calculation result will also be output as
zero when the absolute value of the result is less than the minimum value that
can be expressed for floating-point data. In that case the Underflow Flag will
turn ON.
654
Comparing Single-precision and Double-precision Calculations

This example shows the differences in between single-precision and double-
precision calculations when the following vector expressed in polar coordi-
nates is converted to rectangular coordinates A (x,y).
π
j θ
r = re 360
In this example, the 4-digit BCD angle (θ, in degrees) is read from D00000
and the 4-digit BCD distance (r) is read from D01000.
Y
A (x, y) = A (rcos θ, rsin θ)

r r
θ
0 X
• Ladder Program for the • Ladder Program for the

Single-precision Calculation Double-precision Calculation
000000 000000
BIN BIN
D00000 D00000
D00100 D00100
BIN BIN
D01000 D01000
D01000 D01000
FLT DBL
D00100 D00100
D00200 D00200
FLT DBL
D01000 D01000
D01200 D01200
RAD RADD
D00200 D00200
D00200 D00200
COS COSD
D00200 D00200
D00300 D00300
SIN SIND
D00200 D00200
D00400 D00400
*F *D
D01200 D01200
D00300 D00300
D10000 D10000
*F *D
D01200 D01200
D00400 D00400
D20000 D20000
END END
655
1. This program section converts the BCD data 1. This program section converts the BCD data
to single-precision floating-point data (32 bits, to double-precision floating-point data (64
IEEE754-format). bits, IEEE754-format).
a) The BIN(023) instructions convert the a) The BIN(023) instructions convert the
BCD data to binary and the FLT(452) in- BCD data to binary and the DBL(843) in-
structions convert the binary data to sin- structions convert the binary data to dou-
gle-precision floating-point data. ble-precision floating-point data.
b) The floating-point data for the angle θ is b) The floating-point data for the angle θ is
output to D00200 and D00201. output to words D00200 to D00203.
c) RAD(458) converts the angle data in c) RADD(849) converts the angle data in
D00200 and D00201 to radians. words D00200 to D00203 to radians.
d) The floating-point data for the radius r is d) The floating-point data for the radius r is
output to D01200 and D01201. output to words D01200 to D01203.
2. This program section calculates the sin θ and 2. This program section calculates the sin θ and
the cos θ as single-precision floating-point val- the cos θ as double-precision floating-point
ues. values.
a) The value for cos θ is output to D00300 a) The value for cos θ is output to words
and D00301. D00300 to D00303.
b) The value for sin θ is output to D00400 b) The value for sin θ is output to words
and D00401. D00400 and D00403.
3. This program section calculates x (r × cos θ) 3. This program section calculates x (r × cos θ)
and y (r × sin θ). and y (r × sin θ).
a) The value for x (r × cos θ) is output to a) The value for x (r × cos θ) is output to
D10000 and D10001. words D10000 to D10003.
b) The value for y (r × sin θ) is output to b) The value for y (r × sin θ) is output to
D20000 and D20001. D20000 and D20003.
Coordinate Floating-point Real number Coordinate Floating-point Real number

number number
x 4116 59CF 3.4202015399933 x 4022 CB39 3.4202014332567
y 405A E495 9.3969259262085 E973 5C32
y 400B 5C92 9.3969262078591
91AC 8EEB
Comparison of the Calculation Results

When the real-number results are compared, it is clear that the double-preci-
sion calculation yields a more accurate result.
656
3-16-1 DOUBLE FLOATING TO 16-BIT: FIXD(841)

Purpose Converts a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point value to 16-bit signed
binary data and places the result in the specified result word.
only.
Ladder Symbol
FIXD(841)
S D: Destination word
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FIXD(841)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FIXD(841)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32764 D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
657
Description FIXD(841) converts the integer portion of the double-precision (64-bit) float-
ing-point number in words S to S+3 (IEEE754-format) to 16-bit signed binary
data and places the result in D.
S+3CH S+2CH S+1CH SCH
Floating-point data (64 bits)
DCH
Signed binary data (16 bits)
portion is truncated. The integer portion of the floating-point data must be
within the range of –32,768 to 32,767.
A floating-point value of 3.5 is converted to 3.
A floating-point value of –3.5 is converted to –3.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the source data (S to S+3) is not a number (NaN).
ON if the integer portion of the source data (S to S+3) is
not within the range of –32,768 to 32,767.
3-16-2 DOUBLE FLOATING TO 32-BIT: FIXLD(842)

Purpose Converts a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point value to 32-bit signed
binary data and places the result in the specified result words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
FIXDL(842)
S D: First destination word
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FIXLD(842)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FIXLD(842)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
658
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32764 D00000 to D32766
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description FIXLD(842) converts the integer portion of the double-precision (64-bit) float-
ing-point number in words S to S+3 (IEEE754-format) to 32-bit signed binary
data and places the result in D+1 and D.
D+1CH DCH
portion is truncated. (The integer portion of the floating-point data must be
within the range of –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.)
A floating-point value of 2,147,483,640.5 is converted to 2,147,483,640.
A floating-point value of –2,147,483,640.5 is converted to –2,147,483,640.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the data in words S to S+3 is not a number (NaN).
ON if the integer portion of words S to S+3 is not within
the range of –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 of D+1 is ON after execution.
659
Precautions The content of words S to S+3 must be floating-point data and the integer por-
tion must be in the range of –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
3-16-3 16-BIT TO DOUBLE FLOATING: DBL(843)

Purpose Converts a 16-bit signed binary value to double-precision (64-bit) floating-
point data and places the result in the specified destination words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
DBL(843) S: Source word

D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DBL(843)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DBL(843)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32764
(n= 0 to C) (n= 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
660
Area S D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description DBL(843) converts the 16-bit signed binary value in S to double-precision (64-
bit) floating-point data (IEEE754-format) and places the result in words D to
D+3. A single 0 is added after the decimal point in the floating-point result.
SCH
D+3CH D+2CH D+1CH DCH

Only values within the range of –32,768 to 32,767 can be specified for S. To
convert signed binary data outside of that range, use DBLL(844).
A signed binary value of 3 is converted to 3.0.
A signed binary value of –3 is converted to –3.0.
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions The content of S must contain signed binary data with a (decimal) value in the
range of –32,768 to 32,767.
3-16-4 32-BIT TO DOUBLE FLOATING: DBLL(844)

Purpose Converts a 32-bit signed binary value to double-precision (64-bit) floating-
point data and places the result in the specified destination words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
DBLL(844)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DBLL(844)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DBLL(844)
661

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to D32764
(n = 0 to C) (n= 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description DBLL(844) converts the 32-bit signed binary value in S+1 and S to double-
precision (64-bit) floating-point data (IEEE754-format) and places the result in
words D to D+3. A single 0 is added after the decimal point in the floating-
point result.
S+1CH SCH

Signed binary data within the range of –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 can

be specified for S+1 and S. The floating point value has 24 significant binary
digits (bits). The result will not be exact if a number greater than 16,777,215
(the maximum value that can be expressed in 24-bits) is converted by
DBLL(844).
Example Conversions:
A signed binary value of 16,777,215 is converted to 16,777,215.0.
A signed binary value of –16,777,215 is converted to –15,777,215.0.
662
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions The result will not be exact if a number with an absolute value greater than
16,777,215 (the maximum value that can be expressed in 24-bits) is con-
verted.
3-16-5 DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT ADD: +D(845)

Purpose Adds two double-precision (64-bit) floating-point numbers and places the
result in the specified destination words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
+D(845)
Au: First augend word
Au Ad: First addend word
Ad D: First destination word
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +D(845)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+D(845)

OK OK OK OK
Area Au Ad D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
663
Area Au Ad D
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description +D(845) adds the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in words Ad

to Ad+3 the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in words Au to
Au+3 and places the result in words D to D+3. (The floating point data must
be in IEEE754 format.)
S1+3CH S1+2CH S1+1CH S1CH
Augend (floating-point data, 64-bits)

+ Addend (floating-point data, 64-bits)

Result (floating-point data, 64-bits)
The various combinations of augend and addend data will produce the results
Augend
Addend 0 Numeral +∞ –∞ NaN
+∞ +∞ +∞ +∞ See note 2.
–∞ –∞ –∞ See note 2. –∞
NaN See note 2.
664
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the augend or addend data is not recognized as
ON if the augend or addend data is not a number (NaN).
ON if +∞ is to –∞.
expressed as a double-precision floating-point value.
Precautions The augend (Au to Au+3) and Addend (Ad to Ad+3) data must be in IEEE754
3-16-6 DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT SUBTRACT: –D(846)

Purpose Subtracts one double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number from another
and places the result in the specified destination words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
–D(846)
Mi: First Minuend word
Mi Su: First Subtrahend word
Su D: First destination word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition –D(846)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @–D(846)

OK OK OK OK
Area Mi Su D
665
Area Mi Su D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description –D(846) subtracts the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in words

Su to Su+3 from the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in Mi to
Mi+3 and places the result in words D to D+3. (The floating point data must be
in IEEE754 format.)
Minuend (floating-point data, 64-bits)

− Subtrahend (floating-point data, 64-bits)

The various combinations of minuend and subtrahend data will produce the
Minuend
Subtrahend 0 Numeral +∞ –∞ NaN
+∞ –∞ –∞ See note 2. –∞
–∞ +∞ +∞ +∞ See note 2.
NaN See note 2.
666
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the minuend or subtrahend data is not recognized
ON if the minuend or subtrahend is not a number (NaN).
ON if +∞ is subtracted from +∞.
ON if –∞ is subtracted from –∞.
Precautions The Minuend (Mi to Mi+3) and Subtrahend (Su to Su+3) data must be in
3-16-7 DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY: *D(847)

Purpose Multiplies two double-precision (64-bit) floating-point numbers and places the
result in the specified result words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
*D(847)
Md: First Multiplicand word
Md Mr: First Multiplier word
Mr D: First destination word
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition *D(847)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @*D(847)

OK OK OK OK
Area Md Mr D
667
Area Md Mr D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description *D(847) multiplies the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in words

Md to Md+3 by the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in words Mr
to Mr+3 and places the result in words D to D+3. (The floating point data must
Multiplicand (floating-point data, 64-bits)

× Multiplier (floating-point data, 64-bits)

The various combinations of multiplicand and multiplier data will produce the
Multiplicand
0 0 0 See note 2. See note 2.
+∞ See note 2. +/–∞ +∞ –∞
–∞ See note 2 +/–∞ –∞ +∞
NaN See note 2.
668
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the multiplicand or multiplier data is not recognized
ON if the multiplicand or multiplier is not a number (NaN).
ON if +∞ and 0 are multiplied.
ON if –∞ and 0 are multiplied.
Precautions The Multiplicand (Md to Md+3) and Multiplier (Mr to Mr+3) data must be in
3-16-8 DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE: /D(848)

Purpose Divides one double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number by another and
places the result in the specified destination words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
/D(848)
Dd: First Dividend word
Dd Dr: First Divisor word
Dr D: First destination word
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition /D(848)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @/D(848)

OK OK OK OK
Area Dd Dr D
669
Area Dd Dr D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description /D(848) divides the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in words

Dd to Dd+3 by the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in words Dr
to Dr+3 and places the result in words D to D+3. (The floating point data must
S1+3 S1+2 S1+1 S1
Dividend (floating-point data, 64-bits)
S2+3 S2+2 S2+1 S2

÷ Divisor (floating-point data, 64-bits)
D+3 D+2 D+1 DCH

The various combinations of dividend and divisor data will produce the results
Dividend
Divisor 0 Numeral +∞ –∞ NaN
0 See note 3. +/–∞ +∞ –∞
+∞ 0 See note 2. See note 3. See note 3.
–∞ 0 See note 2. See note 3. See note 3.
NaN See note 3.
2. The results will be zero for underflows.
670
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the dividend or divisor data is not recognized as
ON if the dividend or divisor is not a number (NaN).
ON if the dividend and divisor are both 0.
ON if the dividend and divisor are both +∞ or –∞.
Precautions The Dividend (Dd to Dd+3) and Divisor (Dr to Dr+3) data must be in IEEE754
3-16-9 DOUBLE DEGREES TO RADIANS: RADD(849)

Purpose Converts a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number from degrees to
radians and places the result in the specified result words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
RADD(849)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RADD(849)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RADD(849)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
671
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description RADD(849) converts the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in

words S to S+3 from degrees to radians and places the result in words D to
D+3. (The floating point source data must be in IEEE754 format.)
Source (degrees, 64-bit floating-point data)

Result (radians, 64-bit floating-point data)
Degrees are converted to radians by means of the following formula:

Degrees × π/180 = radians
Flags
data.
672
Precautions The source data in words S to S+3 must be in IEEE754 floating-point data for-
mat.
3-16-10 DOUBLE RADIANS TO DEGREES: DEGD(850)

Purpose Converts a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number from radians to
degrees and places the result in the specified result words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
DEGD(850)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DEGD(850)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DEGD(850)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
673
Area S D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description DEGD(850) converts the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in

words S to S+3 from radians to degrees and places the result in words D to
D+3. (The floating point source data must be in IEEE754 format.)
Source (radians, 64-bit floating-point data)

Result (degrees, 64-bit floating-point data)
Radians are converted to degrees by means of the following formula:

Radians × 180/π = degrees
Flags
data.
mat.
3-16-11 DOUBLE SINE: SIND(851)

Purpose Calculates the sine of a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number (in
radians) and places the result in the specified destination words.
only.
674
Ladder Symbol
SIND(851)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SIND(851)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SIND(851)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SIND(851) calculates the sine of the angle (in radians) expressed as a dou-
ble-precision (64-bit) floating-point value in words S to S+3 and places the
result in words D to D+3.
SIN( S+3 S+2 S+1 S ) → D+3 D+2 D+1 D
675
Specify the desired angle (–65,535 to 65,535) in radians in words S to S+3. If

the angle is outside of the range –65,535 to 65,535, an error will occur and the
instruction will not be executed. For information on converting between
degrees and radians, see 3-16-9 DOUBLE DEGREES TO RADIANS:
RADD(849) or 3-16-10 DOUBLE RADIANS TO DEGREES: DEGD(850).
R: Result (sine)
Flags
65,535.
Overflow Flag OF Unchanged
Underflow Flag UF Unchanged
mat.
3-16-12 DOUBLE COSINE: COSD(852)

Purpose Calculates the cosine of a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number (in
only.
Ladder Symbol
COSD(852)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition COSD(852)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @COSD(852)

OK OK OK OK
676
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description COSD(852) calculates the cosine of the angle (in radians) expressed as a
double-precision (64-bit) floating-point value in words S to S+3 and places the
COS( S+3 S+2 S+1 S ) → D+3 D+2 D+1 D

R: Result (cosine)
677
Flags
65,535.
mat.
3-16-13 DOUBLE TANGENT: TAND(853)

Purpose Calculates the tangent of a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number (in
only.
Ladder Symbol
TAND(853) S: First source word

D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TAND(853)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TAND(853)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
678
Area S D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description TAND(853) calculates the tangent of the angle (in radians) expressed as a
double-precision (64-bit) floating-point value in words S to S+3 and places the
TAN( S+3 S+2 S+1 S ) → D+3 D+2 D+1 D

R
R: Result (tangent)
679
Flags
65,535.
expressed as a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point
value.
mat.
3-16-14 DOUBLE ARC SINE: ASIND(854)

Purpose Calculates the arc sine of a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number
and places the result in the specified destination words. (The arc sine function
is the inverse of the sine function; it returns the angle that produces a given
sine value between –1 and 1.)
only.
Ladder Symbol
ASIND(854)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ASIND(854)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ASIND(854)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
680
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ASIND(854) computes the angle (in radians) for a sine value expressed as a
double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in words S to S+3 and places
the result in words D to D+3.
SIN–1( S+3 S+2 S+1 S ) → D+3 D+2 D+1 D
executed.
The result is output to words D to D+3 as an angle (in radians) within the
result.
R
S: Input data (sine value)

R: Result (radians)
681
Flags
data.
mat.
3-16-15 DOUBLE ARC COSINE: ACOSD(855)

Purpose Calculates the arc cosine of a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number
and places the result in the specified result words. (The arc cosine function is
the inverse of the cosine function; it returns the angle that produces a given
cosine value between –1 and 1.)
only.
Ladder Symbol
ACOSD(855)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ACOSD(855)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ACOSD(855)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
682
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ACOSD(855) computes the angle (in radians) for a cosine value expressed as
a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in words S to S+3 and places
the result in words D to D+3.
COS–1( S+3 S+2 S+1 S ) → D+3 D+2 D+1 D
executed.
range of 0 to π.
result.
S: Input data (cosine value)
R R: Result (radians)
683
Flags
data.
mat.
3-16-16 DOUBLE ARC TANGENT: ATAND(856)

Purpose Calculates the arc tangent of a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number
and places the result in the specified result words. (The arc tangent function is
the inverse of the tangent function; it returns the angle that produces a given
tangent value.)
only.
Ladder Symbol
ATAND(856)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ATAND(856)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ATAND(856)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
684
Area S D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description ATAND(856) computes the angle (in radians) for a tangent value expressed as
a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in words S to S+3 and places
the result in D to D+3.
TAN–1( S+3 S+2 S+1 S ) → D+3 D+2 D+1 D
result.
R
S: Input data (tangent)

R: Result (radians)
685
Flags
data.
mat.
3-16-17 DOUBLE SQUARE ROOT: SQRTD(857)

Purpose Calculates the square root of a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number
only.
Ladder Symbol
SQRTD(857)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SQRTD(857)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SQRTD(857)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
686
Area S D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SQRTD(857) calculates the square root of the double-precision (64-bit) float-
ing-point number in words S to S+3 and places the result in words D to D+3.
S+3 S+2 S+1 S → D+3 D+2 D+1 D
result.
R
S: Input data
R: Result
687
Flags
data.
value.
mat.
3-16-18 DOUBLE EXPONENT: EXPD(858)

Purpose Calculates the natural (base e) exponential of a double-precision (64-bit) float-
ing-point number and places the result in the specified result words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
EXPD(858)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition EXPD(858)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @EXPD(858)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
688
Area S D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description EXPD(858) calculates the natural (base e) exponential of the double-precision

(64-bit) floating-point number in words S to S+3 and places the result in words
D to D+3. In other words, EXP(467) calculates ex (x = source) and places the
S+3 S+2 S+1 S
e → D+3 D+2 D+1 D
result.
R
S: Input data
R: Result
689
Flags
data.
value.
value.
mat.
3-16-19 DOUBLE LOGARITHM: LOGD(859)

Purpose Calculates the natural (base e) logarithm of a double-precision (64-bit) float-
ing-point number and places the result in the specified destination words.
only.
Ladder Symbol
LOGD(859)
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition LOGD(859)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @LOGD(859)

OK OK OK OK
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
690
Area S D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description LOGD(859) calculates the natural (base e) logarithm of the double-precision

(64-bit) floating-point number in words S to S+3 and places the result in words
D to D+3.
loge S+3 S+2 S+1 S → D+3 D+2 D+1 D
result.
R
S: Input data
R: Result
691
Flags
data.
value.
mat.
3-16-20 DOUBLE EXPONENTIAL POWER: PWRD(860)

Purpose Raises a double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number to the power of
another double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number.
only.
Ladder Symbol
PWRD(860)
B: First base word
B
E: First exponent word
E D: First destination word
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PWRD(860)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @PWRD(860)

OK OK OK OK
Area B E D
692
Area B E D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description PWRD(860) raises the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point number in

words B to B+3 to the power of the double-precision (64-bit) floating-point
number in words E to E+3. In other words, PWR(840) calculates XY (X = con-
tent of B to B+3; Y = content of E to E+3).
Exponent data
S2+3 S2+2 S2+1 S2
S1+3 S1+2 S1+1 S1 → D+3 D+2 D+1 D
Base data
For example, when the base words (B to B+3) contain 3.1 and the exponent
words (E to E+3) contain 3, the result is 3.13 or 29.791.
be expressed as floating-point data, the Overflow Flag will turn ON.
expressed as floating-point data, the Underflow Flag will turn ON.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the base data (B to B+3) or exponent data (E to
E+3) is not recognized as floating-point data.
ON if the base data (B to B+3) or exponent data (E to
E+3) is not a number (NaN).
ON if the base data (B to B+3) is 0 and the exponent data
(E to E+3) is less than 0. (Division by 0)
ON if the base data (B to B+3) is negative and the expo-
nent data (E to E+3) is non-integer. (Root of a negative
number)
693

Precautions The base data (B to B+3) and the exponent data (E to E+3) must be in
3-16-21 Double-precision Floating-point Input Instructions

Purpose These input comparison instructions compare two double-precision floating
point values (64-bit IEEE754 format) and create an ON execution condition
when the comparison condition is true.
Units only.
Note Refer to 3-7-1 Input Comparison Instructions (300 to 328) for details on the
signed and unsigned binary input comparison instructions and 3-15-24 Sin-
gle-precision Floating-point Comparison Instructions for details on single-pre-
cision floating-point input comparison instructions.
Ladder Symbol
Symbol & options
Variations
son instruction

OK OK OK OK
Area S1 S2
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
694
Area S1 S2
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The input comparison instruction compares the data specified in S1 and S2 as
double-precision floating point values (64-bit IEEE754 data) and creates an
ON execution condition when the comparison condition is true. When the data
is stored in words, S1 and S2 specify the first of four words containing the 64-
bit data. The 64-bit floating-point data cannot be input as constants.

<D

<D
OR connection
<D

695
Options
With the three input types and six symbols, there are 18 different possible
combinations.
Symbol Option (data format)
= (Equal) D: Double-precision floating-point data
<> (Not equal)
< (Less than)
> (Greater than)

tions of the 18 single-precision floating-point input comparison instructions.
(C1=S1+3, S1+2, S1+1, S1 and C2=S2+3, S2+2, S2+1, S2.)
335 LD=D LOAD DOUBLE FLOATING EQUAL True if
AND=D AND DOUBLE FLOATING EQUAL C1 = C2
OR=D OR DOUBLE FLOATING EQUAL
336 LD<>D LOAD DOUBLE FLOATING NOT EQUAL True if
AND<>D AND DOUBLE FLOATING NOT EQUAL C1 ≠ C2
OR<>D OR DOUBLE FLOATING NOT EQUAL
337 LD<D LOAD DOUBLE FLOATING LESS THAN True if
AND<D AND DOUBLE FLOATING LESS THAN C1 < C2
OR<D OR DOUBLE FLOATING LESS THAN
338 LD<=D LOAD DOUBLE FLOATING LESS THAN OR True if
EQUAL C1 ≤ C2
AND<=D AND DOUBLE FLOATING LESS THAN OR EQUAL
OR<=D OR DOUBLE FLOATING LESS THAN OR EQUAL
339 LD>D LOAD DOUBLE FLOATING GREATER THAN True if
AND>D AND DOUBLE FLOATING GREATER THAN C1 > C2
OR>D OR DOUBLE FLOATING GREATER THAN
340 LD>=D LOAD DOUBLE FLOATING GREATER THAN OR True if
EQUAL C1 ≥ C2
AND>=D AND DOUBLE FLOATING GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
OR>=D OR DOUBLE FLOATING GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL
Flags In this table, C1 = content of S1 to S1+3 and C2 = content of S2 to S2+3.

Error Flag ER OFF
Greater Than > ON if C1 > C2.
Greater Than or > = ON if C1 ≥ C2.
Equal Flag OFF in all other cases.
Equal Flag = ON if C1 = C2.
Not Equal Flag = ON if C1 ≠ C2.
696
Table Data Processing Instructions Section 3-17

Less Than Flag < ON if C1 < C2.
Less Than or <= ON if C1 ≤ C2.
Equal Flag OFF in all other cases.

Example AND DOUBLE FLOATING LESS THAN: AND<D(331)
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the floating point data in
words D00100 to D00103 is compared to the floating point data in words
D00200 to D00203. If the content of D00100 to D00103 is less than that of
D00200 to D00203, execution proceeds to the next line and CIO 005000 is
turned ON. If the content of D00100 to D00103 is not less than that of D00200
to D00203, execution does not proceed to the next instruction line.
005000
000000
<D
D00100
D00200
DOUBLE FLOATING LESS THAN Comparison (<D)

15 0 15 0
S1 :D00100 1000101101000100 S1 :D00100 0111100100111110
S1+1:D00101 1110011101101100 S2+1:D00101 1010100001011000
S1+2:D00102 1010100111111011 S2+2:D00102 1100110100110101
S1+3:D00103 0100000000001011 S2+3:D00103 0011111111110111
Decimal value: 3.4580 Decimal value: –1.4876
34580>14876
Does not yield an ON condition.
15 0 15 0
S1 :D00100 1101111010010001 S1 :D00100 0101010001010011
S1+1:D00101 1010100110110110 S2+1:D00101 1010100000101011
S1+2:D00102 1110110110110000 S2+2:D00102 0100100100100100
S1+3:D00103 1100101000000010 S2+3:D00103 0100100111110000
Decimal value: −3.4580E+48 Decimal value: 1.4876E+48
−3.4580E+48<1.4876E+48
Yields an ON condition.
3-17 Table Data Processing Instructions

This section describes instructions used to handle table data, stacks, and
other ranges of data. The 5 instructions at the bottom of the table (marked
with an asterisk) are supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU
Units only.
SET STACK SSET 630 703
PUSH ONTO STACK PUSH 632 706
FIRST IN FIRST OUT FIFO 633 709
LAST IN FIRST OUT LIFO 634 712
DIMENSION RECORD TABLE DIM 631 715
697

SET RECORD LOCATION SETR 635 718
GET RECORD NUMBER GETR 636 720
DATA SEARCH SRCH 181 722
SWAP BYTES SWAP 637 725
FIND MAXIMUM MAX 182 727
FIND MINIMUM MIN 183 731
SUM SUM 184 735
FRAME CHECKSUM FCS 180 738
STACK NUMBER OUTPUT SNUM 638 742
STACK DATA READ SREAD 639 744
STACK DATA OVERWRITE SWRIT 640 747
STACK DATA INSERT SINS 641 750
STACK DATA DELETE SDEL 642 753
All of these instructions define or operate on a group of words. The group of

words in a stack are defined by SSET(630), the group of words in a record-
table are defined by DIM(631), and the group of words used in a range
instruction are defined independently in each instruction.
Group Purpose Instructions
Stack Operate FIFO (first-in first-out) or LIFO SSET(630), PUSH(632),
(last-in first-out) data tables. FIFO(633), LIFO(634),
SREAD(639), SWRIT(640),
SINS(641), SDEL(642), and
SNUM(638)
Record-table Operate tables of data made up of DIM(631), SETR(635), and
records. (Record size is user-defined.) GETR(636)
Range Operates on a range of words to find FCS(180), SRCH(181),
values such as the checksum, a particu- MAX(182), MIN(183),
lar value, the maximum value, or mini- SUM(184), and SWAP(637)
mum value in the range.
Stack Instructions Stack instructions act on specially defined data tables called stacks. The first
two words of the stack contain the PLC memory address of the last word in
the stack and the second two words contain the stack pointer (the PLC mem-
ory address of the word that will be overwritten by the next PUSH(632)
instruction).
I/O memory
Stack region
698
The following diagram shows the basic structure of a stack.

PC memory
Stack region Example Stack region address
PC memory address of the
last word in the stack Words in
stack region 16 words
PC memory address of the
Pointer
next data word (stack pointer)
Data region Pointer
End of
stack
The following instructions define or act on stack regions. Basically,

PUSH(632) stores data in the next available data word in the stack. FIFO(633)
and LIFO(634) read data from the stack. FIFO(633) reads the first word that
was stored, while LIFO(634) reads the last word that was stored.
The last five instructions are supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D
CPU Units only. SNUM(638) counts the number of data elements (words) in
the specified stack; for example, this instruction could be used to indicate the
number of items on a conveyor. Use the SREAD(639), SWRIT(640),
SINS(641), and SDEL(642) instructions to read, overwrite, insert, and delete
data elements in a stack. For example, when items are being handled on a
conveyor, these instructions can add, remove, or change a data element in
the stack that corresponds to an item on the conveyor.
PUSH(632)
Stores data in the address indicated by the stack pointer and increments the
pointer by one.
Stack Stack
Pointer A
Pointer
FIFO(633)
Reads first (oldest) word of data that was stored in the stack, shifts the
remaining data down one word, and decrements the pointer by one.
Stack Stack
Pointer to last
word in stack
Pointer
to
to Data region Data region
Pointer
Pointer
Reads the content of A, decrements the pointer

by 1, deletes A, and shifts remaining data down.
699
LIFO(634)
Reads the last (most recent) word of data that was stored in the stack. Decre-
ments the pointer by one and reads the data at this address (the most recent
data stored in the stack). The read data will not be cleared.
Stack Stack
B B
Pointer
A Data region A Data region
Pointer
A is the last word Decrements the pointer by one

stored in the stack. and reads content of A.
SREAD(639)
Reads the data from the specified data element in the stack. The offset value
indicates the location of the desired word (the number of words before the cur-
rent pointer position).
Stack Stack
Pointer to last
word in stack
Pointer
: :
A A
B B
-n Data region Data region
(n=3) C C
Pointer Pointer
(Unchanged)
Data in pointer position - n Last word of

(n=3 in this example.) data in stack
A
Reads data from pointer
position - n.
(n=3 in this example.)
700
SWRIT(640)
Writes the source data to the specified data element in the stack (overwriting
the existing data). The offset value indicates the location of the desired word
(the number of words before the current pointer position).
Stack Stack
Pointer to last M
word in stack Overwrites data at pointer
position - n.
Pointer (n=3 in this example.)
: :
A M
-n B B
(n=3) C Data region C Data region
Pointer Pointer
(Unchanged)
Data in pointer position - n Last word of

(n=3 in this example.) data in stack
SINS(641)
Inserts the source data at the specified location in the stack and shifts the rest
of the data in the stack downward. The offset value indicates the location of
the desired word (the number of words before the current pointer position).
Stack Stack
Pointer to last M Pointer to last
word in stack Data in pointer word in stack
position n Pointer
Pointer
Insert
: :
A M
B Data region A Data region
-n
(n=3) C B
Pointer Pointer C
(Incremented by 1)
Inserts data element M at pointer
Data in pointer position - n Last word of position - n, shifts the existing data
(n=3 in this example.) data in stack (A, B, and C) down, and increments
the pointer value by 1.
701
SDEL(642)
Deletes the data element at the specified location in the stack and shifts the
rest of the data in the stack upward. The offset value indicates the location of
the desired word (the number of words before the current pointer position).
Stack Stack
Pointer to last Pointer to last

word in stack word in stack
Pointer Pointer
: :
A B
-n B C
C Data C Data region
(n=3) Pointer
region
Pointer (Decre-
mented by 1)
Data in pointer position - n

(n=3 in this example.) Last word of
data in stack
A
Deletes the data element at pointer
position - n, shifts the remaining
data upward, and decrements the
pointer value by 1.
SNUM(638)
Counts the amount of stack data (number of words of data) from the stack
pointer to the beginning of the data region.
Stack Stack
Pointer to last Pointer to last
word in stack word in stack
Pointer Pointer
A A
B B
C C
Data Data region
D region D
E E
Pointer Pointer
(Unchanged)
Counts data elements (N).

0005
Record-table Instructions A series of data consisting of more than one record with the same number of
words in each record is called table data. Table data stored in the specified I/O
memory are can be registered as the table area using the DIM instruction. Up
to 16 separate tables can be defined with table numbers 0 to 15.
Table number 0
Table number 1
702
The following diagram shows the basic structure of a record table. Each
record in a table has the same number of words.
Table
Record
Same number of words

Record
in each record
Record
Index Registers (IR) can be used to indirectly reference table data. Address
calculation of the record can be easily made by using the SETR(635) (SET
RECORD NUMBER) instruction and GETR(636) (GET RECORD NUMBER).
Range Instructions The range instructions included here act on a specified range of words to find
the maximum value (MAX(182)) or minimum value (MIN(183)), search for a
particular value (SRCH(181)), calculate the sum (SUM(184)) or FCS
(FCS(180)), or swap the contents of the leftmost and rightmost bytes in the
words (SWAP(637)).
MAX or SRCH
MIN search SUM
Range search SWAP
specified in calculation or operation
instruction FCS
calculation
3-17-1 SET STACK: SSET(630)

Purpose Defines a stack of the specified length beginning at the specified word.
Ladder Symbol
SSET(630)
TB TB: First stack address

Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SSET(630)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SSET(630)

OK OK OK OK
Operands TB through TB+3: Stack control words

The first four words of the stack contain the PLC memory address of the last
word in the stack and the stack pointer (the PLC memory address of the next
word to be overwritten by PUSH(632)).
703
15 0
TB
PC memory address of the last

word in the stack (rightmost 4 digits)
15 0
TB+1

word in the stack (leftmost 4 digits)
15 0
TB+2
Stack pointer (rightmost 4 digits)

15 0
TB+3
Stack pointer (leftmost 4 digits)
TB+4 through TB+(N–1): Data storage region

The remainder of the stack is used to store data.
15 0
TB+4 Data storage region
---
TB+(N–1)
Note 1. The initial value of the stack pointer is always the PLC memory address of
TB+4.
2. TB and TB+(N–1) must be in the same data area.
Area TB N
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0005 to #FFFF (binary) or
&5 to &65,535
704
Area TB N
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SSET(630) secures a stack with N words beginning at TB and ending at

TB+(N–1). The first two words of the stack (TB+1 and TB) contain the 8-digit
hexadecimal PLC memory address of the last word in the stack. The next two
words (TB+3 and TB+2) contain the stack pointer. The stack pointer is the
PLC memory address of the next word in the stack that will be overwritten by
PUSH(632); its initial value is the address of TB+4.
SSET(630) automatically initializes the data region of the stack (TB+4 through
TB+(N–1)) to zeroes. The following diagram shows the basic structure of a
stack.
PC memory
address
TB
TB+1 m+(N–1)
N words
Last word TB+2 in stack
TB+3
in stack
Stack
pointer
m+(N–1)
SSET(630) just establishes and initializes a stack. Use the following instruc-
tions to store in the stack and read data from the stack.
1,2,3... 1. PUSH(632) stores data in the stack one word at a time.

2. FIFO(633) and LIFO(634) read data from the stack. FIFO(633) reads the
first word that was stored; LIFO(634) reads the last word that was stored.
3. The stack pointer value in the stack control word is automatically updated
when PUSH(632), FIFO(633), or LIFO(634) is executed. Normally, users
need not be concerned about the stack control word. When accessing the
contents of the stack other than by using the above instructions, set the
stack pointer value using the Index Register (IR) for indirect referencing.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the specified range of 0005 to FFFF.
Precautions The minimum value for the number of words in the stack (N) is 5 because N
includes the four words that contain the pointer to the last word in the stack
and the stack pointer. An error will occur if N is not in the range 0005 to FFFF.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SSET(630) secures a 10-
word stack from D00000 to D00009. D00000 and D00001 contain the PLC
memory address of the last word in the stack. D00002 and D00003 contain
the stack pointer. The stack itself begins in D00004.
705
&10
PC memory address
PC memory address
of last word in stack
Stack pointer
Last word Stack 10 words

in stack pointer
3-17-2 PUSH ONTO STACK: PUSH(632)

Purpose Writes one word of data to the specified stack.
Ladder Symbol
PUSH(632)
S S: Source word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PUSH(632)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @PUSH(632)

OK OK OK OK

706
15 0
TB

15 0
TB+1

15 0
TB+2

15 0
TB+3

15 0
TB+(N–1)
Area TB S
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #FFFF (binary)
707
Area TB S
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description PUSH(632) writes the content of S to the address indicated by the stack
pointer (TB+3 and TB+2) and increments the stack pointer by one.
PLC memory PLC
address memory
D D
n n
D+1 D+1
D+2 D+2
m m+1
D+3 Write A. D+3
S A
A m A m
Pointer m+1
Pointer
n Increment n
pointer by 1.
After PUSH(632) has been used to write data into a stack, FIFO(633) and
LIFO(634) can be used to read data from the stack.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the address specified by the stack pointer (TB+3
and TB+2) exceeds the last word in the stack.
(This is a stack overflow error.)
Precautions The stack must be defined in advance with SSET(630).
708
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, PUSH(632) copies the
content of D00200 to the stack beginning at D00000. In this case, the stack
pointer indicates D00007.
PC memory address
PC memory address
Stack pointer
Stack
Last word pointer Write A.
in stack
PC memory address
PC memory address
Stack pointer After the data is written to
D00007, the stack pointer
is incremented by one.
Last word
in stack
A
3-17-3 FIRST IN FIRST OUT: FIFO(633)

Purpose Reads the first word of data written to the specified stack (the oldest data in
the stack).
Ladder Symbol
FIFO(633)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FIFO(633)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FIFO(633)

OK OK OK OK
709

15 0
TB

15 0
TB+1

15 0
TB+2
15 0
TB+3

15 0
---
TB+(N–1)
Area TB D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
710
Area TB D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description FIFO(633) reads the oldest word of data from the stack (TB+4) and outputs
that data to D. Next, the stack pointer (TB+3 and TB+2) is decremented by
one, all of the remaining data in the stack is shifted downward by one word,
and the data read from TB+4 is deleted. The data at the end of the stack (the
address that was indicated by the stack pointer) is left unchanged.
PC memory PC memory
address address
TB TB
Oldest
Stack TB+1 data TB+1
pointer TB+2 TB+2
m–1
TB+3 TB+3
TB+4 TB+4
Stack
pointer m–1
First-in first-out
Use FIFO(633) in combination with PUSH(632). After PUSH(632) has been

used to write data into a stack, FIFO(633) can be used to read data from the
stack on a first-in first-out basis.
FIFO(633) reads the beginning data from the stack and deletes this data to
move the next one forward.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the contents of the stack pointer (TB+3 and TB+2) is
less than or equal to the PLC memory address of first
word in the data region of the stack (TB+4).
(This is a stack underflow error.)
711
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FIFO(633) reads the con-
tent of D00004 (TB+4 for the stack beginning at D00000) and writes that data
to D00300.
TB
TB:
PC memory address
Stack pointer
Last word Stack Read by FIFO(633).
in stack pointer
D: D00300
After the data is written to D00300, the stack pointer is decremented by one
and the remaining data is shifted down. (The content of D00005 is shifted to
D00004 and the content of D00006 is shifted to D00005.)
PC memory address
Stack pointer
Stack
pointer
Last word
in stack –1 D: D00300
3-17-4 LAST IN FIRST OUT: LIFO(634)

Purpose Reads the last word of data written to the specified stack (the newest data in
the stack).
Ladder Symbol
LIFO(634)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition LIFO(634)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @LIFO(634)

OK OK OK OK
712

15 0
TB

15 0
TB+1

15 0
TB+2

15 0
TB+3

15 0
---
TB+(N–1)
Area TB D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
713
Area TB D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description LIFO(634) reads the data from the address indicated by the stack pointer (the
newest word of data in the stack), decrements the stack pointer by one, and
outputs the data to D. The word that was read is left unchanged.
PC memory PC memory
address address
TB TB
Stack TB+1 Newest TB+1
pointer data
TB+2 TB+2
TB+3 TB+3 m–1
Stack
pointer
m–1 m–1 A is left unchanged.
The pointer is Reading

decremented.
Use LIFO(634) in combination with PUSH(632). After PUSH(632) has been

used to write data into a stack, LIFO(634) can be used to read data from the
stack on a last-in first-out basis. After data is stored by PUSH(632), the stack
pointer indicates the address next to the last data.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the contents of the stack pointer (TB+3 and TB+2) is
714
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, LIFO(634) reads the con-
tent of the word indicated by the stack pointer (D00006) and writes that data
to D00300.
TB:
PC memory address
Stack pointer
Stack
pointer
Last word
in stack –1
PC memory address
Stack pointer
Stack
Last word pointer
in stack Read by LIFO(634).
D: D00300
After the data is written to D00300, the stack pointer is decremented by one.
The content of D00006 is left unchanged.
3-17-5 DIMENSION RECORD TABLE: DIM(631)

Purpose Defines the specified I/O memory area as a record table by declaring the
length of each record and the number of records. Up to 16 record tables can
be defined.
Ladder Symbol
DIM(631)
N N: Table number
LR LR: Length of each record
NR NR: Number of records
TB TB: First table word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DIM(631)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DIM(631)
715

OK OK OK OK
Operands N: Table number

Indicates the table number. N must be between 0 and15.
LR: Length of each record
Indicates the number of words in each record. LR must be 0001 to FFFF
hexadecimal (1 to 65,535 words).
NR: Number of records
Indicates the number of records in the table. NR must be 0001 to FFFF hexa-
decimal (1 to 65,535 words).
TB: First table word
Indicates the first word of the table. All of the words in the table must be in the
same data area. In other words TB and TB+LR×NR–1 must be in the same
data area.
Area N LR NR TB
Auxiliary Bit Area --- A000 to A959 A448 to A959
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants 0 to 15 #0001 to #FFFF (binary) or &1 ---
to &65,535
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to IR15 ,IR0+(++) to
,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description DIM(631) registers the words from TB to TB+LR×NR–1 as table number N.

Table number N has NR records and each record is LR words long. The data
within this region cannot be changed once the region has been declared as
records.
Use DIM(631) in combination with SETR(635) (SET RECORD NUMBER) or
GETR(636) (GET RECORD NUMBER) to simplify the calculation of
716
addresses in data tables. Use DIM(631) to divide data into records and then
use SETR(635) to store the first address of the desired record in an Index
Register. The Index Register can then be used as a pointer in other instruc-
tions, such as read, write, search, or compare instructions.
As an example, if temperatures, pressures, or other set values are stored as
records and the records for various models are combined into a table, it is
easy to read the set values for each models for any particular conditions.
Table number (N)
Record 0
Record 1
Number of records LR × NR words
Record NR–1
The two record-table instructions associated with DIM(631) are SETR(635)

and GETR(636). SETR(635) sets the leading PLC memory address of the
specified record number in the specified Index Register. GETR(636) outputs
the record number of the record that includes the specified Index Register
value (PLC memory address).
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if LR or NR is 0000.
Precautions Records in a registered table are identified by their record numbers, which
range from 0 to NR–1.
Depending on the settings for the record length (LR) and number of records
(NR), it is possible that a single table (from TB and TB+LR×NR–1) will overlap
two data areas. Verify that no problems will arise before specifying a table that
overlaps a data area boundary.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, DIM(631) defines record
table number 2 with three 10-word records. The table begins at D00300.
N
LR LR: D00100 Record length: 10 words
NR NR: D00200 Number of records: 3
TB Table number 2
Record 0
10 words
10 words
Record 1
10 words
Record 2
717
3-17-6 SET RECORD LOCATION: SETR(635)

Purpose Writes the location of the specified record (the PLC memory address of the
beginning of the record) in the specified Index Register.
Ladder Symbol
SETR(635)
N N: Table number
R R: Record number
D D: Destination Index Register
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SETR(635)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SETR(635)

OK OK OK OK

Indicates the table number. N must be between 0 and 15.
R: Record number
Indicates the record number of the desired record. R must be 0000 to FFFE
hexadecimal (0 to 65,534). Record numbers begin with 0, so the valid record
numbers are 0 to NR–1 for a table with NR records.
D: Destination Index Register
Indicates the desired Index Register. D must be IR0 to IR15.
Area N R D
CIO Area --- CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 ---
Work Area --- W000 to W511 ---
Holding Bit Area --- H000 to H511 ---
Auxiliary Bit Area --- A000 to A959 ---
Timer Area --- T0000 to T4095 ---
Counter Area --- C0000 to C4095 ---
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767 ---
EM Area without bank --- E00000 to E32767 ---
EM Area with bank --- En_00000 to En_32767 ---
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM --- @ D00000 to @ D32767 ---
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
Indirect DM/EM --- *D00000 to *D32767 ---
*En_00000 to *En_32767
Constants 0 to 15 #0000 to #FFFE (binary) or ---
&0 to 65534
718
Area N R D
Indirect addressing --- ,IR0 to ,IR15 ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048
to +2047 ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,– (– –)IR0 to, – (– –)IR15
Description SETR(635) stores the PLC memory address of the first word of the specified
record in the specified Index Register. The following diagram shows the basic
operation of SETR(635).
Table number (N) PC memory
address
R SETR(635) writes the PC memory address (m)

of the first word of record R to Index Register D.
Record
number (R)
IR@
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified table number (N) has not been defined
with DIM(631).
ON if the specified record number (R) exceeds the high-
est record number in the table (NR–1).
Precautions The record table must be defined in advance with DIM(631).

Valid record numbers range from 0 to NR–1, where NR is the number of
records specified when the table was defined with DIM(631).
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SETR(635) finds the PLC
memory address of the first word of record 3 of table number 10 and stores
this address in Index Register IR11.
PC memory
R address
Table number 10
Record number: 0
to
Record number 3
719
3-17-7 GET RECORD NUMBER: GETR(636)

Purpose Returns the record number of the record at the PLC memory address con-
tained in the specified Index Register.
Ladder Symbol
GETR(636)
N N: Table number
IR IR: Index Register
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition GETR(636)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @GETR(636)

OK OK OK OK

Indicates the table number. N must be between 0 and 15.
IR: Index Register
Indicates the desired Index Register. D must be IR0 to IR15.
D: Destination word
Indicates the word where the record number will be written.
Area N IR D
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants 0 to 15 --- ---
720
Area N IR D
Index Registers --- IR0 to IR15 ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to
–2048 to +2047 ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description GETR(636) finds which record includes the PLC memory address contained
in the specified Index Register and writes that record number in D. The PLC
memory address contained in the Index Register does not have to be the first
word in the record; it can be any word in the record.
The following diagram shows the basic operation of GETR(636).
Table number (N) PC memory

address
GETR(636) writes the record number

IR Record number of the record that includes PC memory
(R) address m to D.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the PLC memory address in the specified Index
Register is not within the specified table (N).
ON if the specified table number (N) has not been defined
with DIM(631).
Precautions The record table must be defined in advance with DIM(631) and the PLC
memory address in the specified Index Register must be within the specified
table.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, GETR(636) finds the
record number of the record that contains the PLC memory address in Index
Register IR11 and writes this record number to D01000.
IR PC memory
Table number 10 address
Record number: 0
to
Record number 3 Record containing
address 10000.
721
3-17-8 DATA SEARCH: SRCH(181)

Purpose Searches for a word of data within a range of words.
In CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU Systems and CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M
CPU Units, this instruction can be run in the background. Refer to the CS/CJ
Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual for details on back-
ground execution.
Ladder Symbol
SRCH(181)
R1 R1: First word in range
Cd Cd: Comparison data
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SRCH(181)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SRCH(181)

OK OK OK OK
Operands C and C+1: Control words

C specifies the number of words in the range and bit 15 of C+1 indicates
whether or not to output the number of matches to DR00.
15 0
C
Number of words in range

15 14 0
C+1 000 0000 0000 0000
0
Output selection Output selection
0: Does not output number of 0000 hex: Does not output number of
matches. matches.
1: Outputs number of matches. 8000 hex: Outputs number of matches.
Note C and C+1 must be in the same data area.

R1: First word in range
R1 specifies the first word in the search range. The words from R1 to R1+(C–
1) are searched for the desired data. (C is the number of words set in C.)
15 0
R1
Search range
to ---
R1+(C–1)
722
Note R1 and R1+C–1 must be in the same data area.
Area C R1 Cd
CIO 6142
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to D32767
D32766
E32766
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_00000 to En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
En_32766
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Specified values --- #0000 to #FFFF
only (binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SRCH(181) searches the range of memory from R1 to R1+C–1 for words that
contain the comparison data (Cd). If a match is found, SRCH(181) writes the
PLC memory address of the word to IR00 and turns the Equals Flag ON.
(If there are two or more matches, just the address of the first word containing
the comparison data is written to IR00.)
When bit 15 of C+1 has been set to 1, SRCH(181) writes the number of
matches to DR00. When bit 15 of C+1 is 0, DR00 is left unchanged.
PC memory
address
R1 Search
C Cd
R1+(C–1)
Match
723
SRCH(181) searches table data that contains one word in each record. For
searching data that contains more than one word per record, use DIM(631),
SETR(635), GETR(636), FOR(512)–NEXT(513), or BREAK(514) together
with an Index Register (IR).
The status of the Equals Flag can be checked immediately after execution to
determine whether or not there was a match.
Note SRCH(181) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
Related Memory Area

Words Name Address Operation
IR00 Output for A595 and When an index register is specified as the out-
Background Execution A596 put for an instruction processed in the back-
ground, A595 and A596 receive the output
instead of IR00.
(A595 contains the rightmost digits, and A596
contains the leftmost digits.)
DR00 Output for A597 When a data register is specified as the output
Background Execution for an instruction processed in the background,
A597 receives the output instead of DR00.
Equals Flag for A59801 This flag is turned ON if matching data is found
Background Execution for a SRCH(181) instruction executed in the
background.
ER/AER Flag for A39510 This flag is turned ON if an error or illegal
Background Execution access occurs during background execution.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the content of C is not within the specified range of
0001 through FFFF.
Equals Flag = ON if one or more of the words in the search range con-
tain the comparison data.
Precautions If no match is found, the contents of IR00 and DR00 are left unchanged.
If background execution is enabled in the PLC Setup, the PLC memory
address of the first word containing a match will be output to Auxiliary Area
words A595 and A596 instead of IR00.
If background execution is enabled in the PLC Setup and control word C+1 is
set to output the total number of matches to DR00 (C+1 = 8000 hex), the total
number of matches will be output to Auxiliary Area word A597 instead of
DR00.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SRCH(181) searches the
10-word range beginning at D00100 for words that have the same content as
D00200. The PLC memory address of the first word containing a match is
written to IR00 and the total number of matches is written to DR00.
724
PC memory
#8000000A
address
R1
Search
Cd
10067
D00200
Number of matches
00010067
0003 Number of matches
If the table length is specified as &10 (10 decimal) or A hexadecimal, the num-
ber of matches will not be output to the data register DR00.
3-17-9 SWAP BYTES: SWAP(637)

Purpose Switches the leftmost and rightmost bytes in all of the words in the range.
CPU Units, this instruction can be run in the background. Refer to CS/CJ
ground execution.
Ladder Symbol
SWAP(637)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SWAP(637)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SWAP(637)

OK OK OK OK

N specifies the number of words in the range and must be 0001 to FFFF
hexadecimal (or &1 to &65,535).
R1 specifies the first word in the range. R1 and R1+(N–1) must be in the
same data area.
Leftmost byte Rightmost byte
15 8 7 0
R1
to
R1+(N–1)
725
Area N R1
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0001 to #FFFF (binary) or ---
&1 to &65,535
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SWAP(637) switches the position of the two bytes in all of the words in the
range of memory from R1 to R1+N–1. This instruction can be used to reverse
the order of ASCII-code characters in each word.
Byte position is swapped.
R1
N
Note SWAP(637) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the N is 0000.
726
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SWAP(637) switches the
data in the leftmost bytes with the data in the rightmost bytes in each word in
the 10-word range from W000 to W009.
N &10
R1
to to to to
3-17-10 FIND MAXIMUM: MAX(182)

Purpose Finds the maximum value in the range.
CPU Units, this instruction can be run in the background. Refer to CS/CJ
ground execution.
Ladder Symbol
MAX(182)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MAX(182)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MAX(182)

OK OK OK OK

C specifies the number of words in the range, bit 15 of C+1 indicates whether
the data will be treated as signed binary or unsigned binary, and bit 14 of C+1
indicates whether or not to output the PLC memory address of the word that
contains the maximum value to IR00.
727
15 0
C
15 14 13 0
C+1 00 0000 0000 0000
0
Output selection
0: Does not output address to IR00.
1: Outputs address to IR00.
Data type
The following table shows the possible values of C.

C+1 Data type Index Register output
0000 Unsigned binary No
4000 Unsigned binary Yes
8000 Signed binary No
C000 Signed binary Yes

1) are searched for the maximum value. (C is the number of words specified in
C.)
15 0
R1 Search range
to ---
R1+(C–1)
Note R1 and R1+(C–1) must be in the same data area.
Area C R1 D
CIO 6142
DM Area D00000 to D32766 D00000 to D32767
En_32766 (n = 0 to C)
(n = 0 to C)
728
Area C R1 D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description MAX(182) searches the range of memory from R1 to R1+C–1 for the maxi-
mum value in the range and outputs that maximum value to D.
When bit 14 of C+1 has been set to 1, MAX(182) writes the PLC memory
address of the word containing the maximum value to IR00. (If two or more
words within the range contain the maximum value, the address of the first
word containing the maximum value is written to IR00.)
When bit 15 of C+1 has been set to 1, MAX(182) treats the data within the
range as signed binary data.
PC memory
address
C W
C words
R1+(W–1) Max.
value
Note MAX(182) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
Related Memory Area

instead of IR00.
729
Flags
0001 through FFFF.
Equals Flag = ON if the maximum value is 0000.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 is ON in the word containing the maximum
value.
Precautions When bit 15 of C+1 has been set to 1, the data within the range is treated as
signed binary data and hexadecimal values 8000 to FFFF are considered
negative. Thus, the results of the search will differ depending on the data-type
setting.
address of the word containing the maximum value will be output to Auxiliary
Area words A595 and A596 instead of IR00.
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, MAX(182) searches
the 10-word range beginning at D00200 for the maximum value. The maxi-
mum value is written to D00300 and the PLC memory address of the word
containing the maximum value is written to IR00.
730
R1
C:D00100 0 0 0 A 10 words
Number of words
C+1: D00101 1
Always 0.
1: Treats data as signed binary.
Decimal
equivalent
R1:
PC memory
address
Max. value
100CA
–2
–1
–3
D: D00300
000100CA
3-17-11 FIND MINIMUM: MIN(183)

Purpose Finds the minimum value in the range.
CPU Units, this instruction can be run in the background. Refer to the CS/CJ
ground execution.
Ladder Symbol
MIN(183)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MIN(183)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MIN(183)
731

OK OK OK OK

C specifies the number of words in the range, bit 15 of C+1 indicates whether
the data will be treated as signed binary or unsigned binary, and bit 14 of C+1
indicates whether or not to output the PLC memory address of the word that
contains the minimum value to IR00.
15 0
C

15 14 13 0
C+1 00 0000 0000 0000
0
Output selection
0: Does not output address to IR00.
Data type
The following table shows the possible values of C.

C+1 Data type Index Register output
0000 Unsigned binary No
4000 Unsigned binary Yes
8000 Signed binary No
C000 Signed binary Yes

1) are searched for the minimum value. (C is the number of words specified in
C.)
15 0
R1 Search range
to ---
R1+(C–1)
Note R1 and R1+C–1 must be in the same data area.
Area C R1 D
CIO 6142
732
Area C R1 D
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to D32767
D32766
E32766
En_32766 (n = 0 to C)
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Specified values ---
only
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description MIN(183) searches the range of memory from R1 to R1+C–1 for the minimum
value in the range and outputs that minimum value to D.
When bit 14 of C+1 has been set to 1, MIN(183) writes the PLC memory
address of the word containing the minimum value to IR00. (If two or more
words within the range contain the minimum value, the address of the first
word containing the minimum value is written to IR00.)
When bit 15 of C+1 has been set to 1, MIN(183) treats the data within the
range as signed binary data.
PC memory
address
R1
C W
C words
Min. value
R1+(W–1)
Note MIN(183) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ/
NSJ Series PLC Programming Manual (W394) for details.
733
Related Memory Area

instead of IR00.
Flags
0001 through FFFF.
Equals Flag = ON if the minimum value is 0000.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 is ON in the word containing the minimum
value.
Precautions When bit 15 of C+1 has been set to 1, the data within the range is treated as
signed binary data and hexadecimal values 8000 to FFFF are considered
negative. Thus, the results of the search will differ depending on the data-type
setting.
address of the word containing the minimum value will be output to Auxiliary
Area words A595 and A596 instead of IR00.
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, MIN(183) searches the
10-word range beginning at D00200 for the minimum value. The minimum
value is written to D00300 and the PLC memory address of the word contain-
ing the minimum value is written to IR00.
734
R1
C: D00100 0 0 0 A 10 words
Number of words
C+1: D00101 1
Always 0.
1: Treats data as signed binary.
Decimal
equivalent
R1:
–2
PC memory
address –1
Min. value
100CF –3
D: D00300
000100CF
3-17-12 SUM: SUM(184)

Purpose Adds the bytes or words in the range and outputs the result to two words.
Ladder Symbol
SUM(184)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SUM(184)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SUM(184)

OK OK OK OK
735

C specifies the number of units (bytes or words) to be summed. (Bit 13 of C+1
determines whether bytes or words are being summed.)
Bits 12 to 15 of C+1 indicate what type of data is being summed, as shown in
the following diagram.
15 0
C
Number of words/bytes in range

15 14 13 12 11 0
C+1 0000 0000 0000
0
Starting byte (Effective if bit 13 is 1.)
0: Leftmost byte
1: Rightmost byte
Units
0: Words
1: Bytes
Data type
0: Binary
1: BCD
Data type (Effective if bit 14 is 0.)

R1 specifies the first word in the range. The length of the range depends on
the number of units as well as the starting byte, if bytes are being added.
15 0
R1 Calculation range
to ---
R1+(C units–1)
Note All of the words in the calculation range must be in the same data area.
The result of the calculation is output to D+1 and D. The leftmost four digits
are stored in D+1 and the rightmost four digits are stored in D.
Area C R1 D
CIO 6142 CIO 6143 CIO 6142
D32766 D32767 D32766
736
Area C R1 D
E32766 E32767 E32766
En_32766 En_32767 En_32766
(n = 0 to C) (n= 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
only
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SUM(184) adds C units of data beginning with the data in R1 and outputs the
result to D+1 and D. The settings in C+1 determine whether the units are
words or bytes, whether the data is binary (signed or unsigned) or BCD, and
whether to start with the right or left byte of R1 if bytes are being added.
When bit 14 of C+1 has been set to 0, SUM(184) treats the data as binary. In
this case, bit 15 determines whether the data is signed (bit 15 = 1) or
unsigned (bit 15 = 0).
When bit 13 of C+1 has been set to 1, SUM(184) adds bytes of data. In this
case, bit 12 determines whether the calculation starts with the rightmost byte
of R1 (bit 12 = 1) or the leftmost byte of R1 (bit 12 = 0).
S
Table length
specified in C
The actual table length specified
+) in C depends upon the units
(words or bytes) set in C+1.
D+1 D
Note SUM(184) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
737
Flags
0001 through FFFF.
ON if the BCD data has been specified, but the range
contains binary data.
Negative Flag N ON if bit 15 is ON in the result.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SUM(184) adds 10 bytes
of unsigned binary data beginning with the rightmost byte of D00100 and
writes the result to D00201 and D00200.
Number of words/bytes
R1
C+1: D00301
Always 0.
Starting byte
1: Rightmost byte
Units
1: Bytes
Data type
0: Binary
Data type
C: D00300 10 bytes
Table length
R1: 2 A
C 3 2 A
9 F 2 0
2 7 2 0
2 A 5 5 The shaded bytes are added.
D C
D: D00200 0 3 7 8
D+1: D00201 0 0 0 0
3-17-13 FRAME CHECKSUM: FCS(180)

Purpose Calculates the FCS value for the specified range and outputs the result in
ASCII.
738
Ladder Symbol
FCS(180)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FCS(180)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FCS(180)

OK OK OK OK

C specifies the number of units (bytes or words) to be used in the FCS calcu-
lation. (Bit 13 of C+1 determines whether bytes or words are being used.)
When bit 13 of C+1 has been set to 1, FCS(180) calculates the FCS value for
bytes of data. In this case, bit 12 determines whether the calculation starts
with the rightmost byte of R1 (bit 12 = 1) or the leftmost byte of R1 (bit 12 = 0).
15 0
C
Number of words/bytes in range

15 14 13 12 11 0
C+1 00 0000 0000 0000
0
Starting byte (Valid only when bit 13 is 1.)
0: Leftmost byte
1: Rightmost byte
Calculation units
0: Words
1: Bytes
0

R1 specifies the first word in the range. The length of the range depends on
the number of units as well as the starting byte, if bytes are being used in the
calculation.
15 0
R1 Calculation range
to to
R1+(C units–1)
Note All of the words in the calculation range must be in the same data area.
739

The result of the calculation is output to D if bytes have been selected.
The result of the calculation is output to D+1 and D if words have been
selected. In this case, the leftmost four digits are stored in D+1 and the right-
most four digits are stored in D.
Area C R1 D
CIO 6142
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to D32767
D32766
E32766
En_32766 (n = 0 to C)
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
only
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description FCS(180) calculates the FCS value for C units of data beginning with the data
in R1, converts the value to ASCII code, and outputs the result to D (for bytes)
or D+1 and D (for words). The settings in C+1 determine whether the units are
words or bytes, whether the data is binary (signed or unsigned) or BCD, and
whether to start with the right or left byte of R1 if bytes are being added.
When bit 13 of C+1 has been set to 1, FCS(180) operates on bytes of data. In
this case, bit 12 determines whether the calculation starts with the rightmost
byte of R1 (bit 12 = 1) or the leftmost byte of R1 (bit 12 = 0).
740
R1
C (Table length)
ASCII conversion
Calculation
FCS value
Note FCS(180) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ/
NSJ Series PLC Programming Manual (W394) for details.
Flags
0001 through FFFF.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FCS(180) calculates the
FCS value for the 10 bytes of data beginning with the rightmost byte of
D00100 and writes the result to D00200.
R1
C+1: D00301
Always 0.
Starting byte (Effective only if bit 13 is 1.)
1: Rightmost byte
Units
1: Bytes
Always 0.
C: D00300 10 bytes
Table length
R1: 0 1
0 2 0 3
0 4 0 5
0 6 0 7
The FCS value for the
0 8 0 0
shaded bytes is calculated
0 0 and converted to ASCII.
D: D00200 3 0 3 8
741
3-17-14 STACK SIZE READ: SNUM(638)

Purpose Counts the amount of stack data (number of words) in the specified stack.
only.
Ladder Symbol SNUM(638)
TB: First stack address
TB D: Destination word
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SNUM(638)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SNUM(638)

OK OK OK OK

available word in the stack.)
15 0
TB
PLC memory address of the last

15 0
TB+1

15 0
TB+2

(Initial value is the rightmost 4 digits of
the PLC memory address for TB+4.)
15 0
TB+3

(Initial value is the leftmost 4 digits of

15 0
TB+(N–1)
742
Area TB D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SNUM(638) counts the number of data words in the specified stack from the
beginning of the data region at TB+4 to the address before the one indicated
by the stack pointer (TB+3 and TB+2). SNUM(638) does not change the data
in the stack or the stack pointer.
Stack PLC memory
address
TB
n
TB+1
TB+2
m
TB+3
TB+4 A
Counts the number of words

Pointer (N) from the address of the
beginning of the stack (TB+4)
to the pointer position −1.
D N
m
Last word
in stack
n
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the number of words of data in the stack (the value
output to D) is 0.
743
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SNUM(638) counts the
number of words from the beginning of the data region at D00004 to the stack
pointer position - 1 (D00006) and outputs the result to D00300. (In this case,
the stack pointer indicates D00007.)
000000
SNUM
D00000
D00300 PLC memory
address
D00000 PLC memory address of
D00001 last word in the stack
D00002 Stack pointer
D00003
Last word Stack D00004
in stack pointer
D00005 D:D00300 0003Hex
D00006
Counts number of data
words. (3 in this example.)
D00007
D00008
D00009
3-17-15 STACK DATA READ: SREAD(639)

Purpose Reads the data from the specified data element in the stack. The offset value
indicates the location of the desired data element (how many data elements
before the current pointer position).
only.
Ladder Symbol
SREAD(639)
C: Offset value
C
D: Destination word
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SREAD(639)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SREAD(639)

OK OK OK OK

744
15 0
TB

15 0
TB+1

15 0
TB+2

15 0
TB+3


15 0
TB+(N–1)
Area TB C D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0001 to #FFFB ---
(Hexadecimal)
745
Area TB C D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SREAD(639) reads the data from the address specified by the stack pointer
(TB+3 and TB+2) minus the offset value in C. SREAD(639) does not change
the data in the stack or the stack pointer.
Stack PLC memory
address
TB n
TB+1
TB+2 m
TB+3
TB+4
Pointer A The data (A) is

B
not changed.
C
m
Offset value
Last word
in stack n
C
Reads the data (A) without
changing the stack pointer.
D A
Reads the data (A) in the specified
word and outputs that data to D.
The address of the desired word is
calculated by subtracting the offset
value from the stack pointer address.
SREAD(639) can be used to read the data for an item currently on a conveyor.
The position of the desired item is simply the number of items back (the offset
value) from the most recent item added to the conveyor.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified read location is not within the stack
area.
ON if the offset value specified in C is 0 or greater than
the maximum data region size (FFFB hex).
Equals Flag = ON if the output data in D is 0000.

The address in the stack pointer must be greater than the PLC memory
address of the beginning of the data region (TB+4). An error will occur if the
stack pointer is less than the PLC memory address of TB+4, i.e., if a stack
underflow error occurs.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SREAD(639) reads the
data in the specified word in the stack starting at D00000 and outputs the data
to D00100. In this case, the stack pointer indicates D00007 and the offset
value is 3, so the data is read from D00004.
746
000000
SREAD
D00000
&3 PLC memory
D00100
address
D00000 PLC memory address
of last word in the stack
D00001
D00002
Stack pointer
D00003
Stack D00004 A
pointer D00005
Last word −3
D00006 D00100 A
in stack D00007
D00008
D00009

D00003
Stack D00004 A
pointer D00005
Last word D00006
D00007 The stack pointer position remains
in stack unchanged after the data is read.
D00008
D00009
3-17-16 STACK DATA OVERWRITE: SWRIT(640)

Purpose Writes the source data to the specified data element in the stack (overwriting
the existing data). The offset value indicates the location of the desired data
element (how many data elements before the current pointer position).
only.
Ladder Symbol
SWRIT(640)
TB: First stack address
TB
C: Offset value
C S: Source word
S
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SWRIT(640)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SWRIT(640)

OK OK OK OK
747

15 0
TB

15 0
TB+1

15 0
TB+2

15 0
TB+3


15 0
TB+(N–1)
Area TB C S
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
748
Area TB C S
Constants --- #0001 to #FFFB #0000 to #FFFF
(Hexadecimal) (Hexadecimal)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SWRIT(640) overwrites the data in the desired word with the data specified in
S. The location of the desired word is calculated by subtracting the offset
value in C from the stack pointer (TB+3 and TB+2). SWRIT(640) does not
change the stack pointer.
Stack PLC memory Stack
address
TB n TB n
TB+1 TB+1
TB+2 m TB+2 m
TB+3 TB+3
TB+4 TB+4
B A
Pointer C C
D D
m Pointer m
Last word n Last word n

Offset value in stack in stack
C
Writes the data (A) without
changing the stack pointer.
S A
Overwrites the data in the desired
word with the data in S.
The address of the desired word is
value from the stack pointer address.
SWRIT(640) can be used to change the data for an item currently on a con-
veyor. The position of the desired item is simply the number of items back (the
offset value) from the most recent item added to the conveyor.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified write location is not within the stack
area.

Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SWRIT(640) writes the
data in D00100 to the specified word in the stack starting at D00000. In this
749
case, the stack pointer indicates D00007 and the offset value is 3, so the data
in D00004 is overwritten.
000000
SWRIT
D00000
&3
PLC memory
D00100 address
D00002 Stack pointer (Overwrite)
D00003 D00100 A
Stack D00004 B
pointer D00005
−3
D00006
Last word
in stack D00007
D00008
D00009

D00003
D00004 A
Stack
pointer D00005
Last word
D00006
in stack The stack pointer position remains
D00007
unchanged after the data is written.
D00008
D00009
3-17-17 STACK DATA INSERT: SINS(641)

Purpose Inserts the source data at the specified location in the stack and shifts the rest
of the data in the stack downward. The offset value indicates the location of
the desired data element (how many data elements before the current pointer
position).
only.
Ladder Symbol
SINS(641)
C: Offset value
C S: Source word
S
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SINS(641)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SINS(641)

OK OK OK OK
750

15 0
TB

15 0
TB+1

15 0
TB+2

15 0
TB+3


15 0
TB+(N–1)
Area TB C S
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
751
Area TB C S
Constants --- #0001 to #FFFB #0000 to #FFFF
(Hexadecimal) (Hexadecimal)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SINS(641) inserts the source data at the desired address and shifts the exist-
ing data down one word. At the same time, SINS(641) increments the stack
pointer (TB+3 and TB+2) by 1. The location of the desired address is calcu-
lated by subtracting the offset value in C from the stack pointer.
Stack PLC memory Stack PLC
address memory
TB n TB n
TB+1 TB+1
TB+2 m TB+2 m+1
TB+3 TB+3
TB+4 TB+4
Inserts the source data (A) The stack pointer is
Pointer and increments the stack incremented by +1.
pointer.
A
B A
C The address of the desired word is B
Offset value D value from the stack pointer address. C
Pointer
m D m
Last word m+1
in stack Last word
n
in stack
C
SINS(641) can be used to insert the data for an item that is inserted in the
midst of items already on a conveyor. The position of the insertion point is
simply the number of items back (the offset value) from the most recent item
added to the conveyor.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the address indicated by the stack pointer (TB+3
and TB+2) is greater than the PLC memory address of
last word in the data region of the stack.
(This is a stack overflow error.)
ON if the offset value specified is greater than the maxi-
mum data region size - 1 (FFFA hex).

SINS(641) inserts one word of data into the stack, so there must be at least
one available word at the end of the stack. If the stack is full, an error will
occur and the source data will not be inserted.
If the address indicated by the stack pointer (TB+3 and TB+2) is already
greater than the address of the last word in the stack (TB+1 and TB) when
SINS(641) is executed, a stack overflow error will occur and the source data
will not be inserted.
752
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SINS(641) inserts the
source data in D00100 at the specified address in the stack starting at
D00000. In this case, the stack pointer indicates D00007 and the offset value
is 3, so the source data is inserted in D00004. The existing data is shifted
down one word and the data in D00007 is overwritten. At the same time the
stack pointer will be incremented from D00007 to D00008.
000000
SINS
D00000
#0003
D00100
PLC
memory
D00001 of last word in the stack
D00002 (Insert)
Stack pointer
D00003
D00100 A
Stack D00004 B
pointer D00005 C
−3
Last word D00006 D
in stack D00007
D00008
D00009
+1

D00003
Stack D00004 A
pointer D00005 B
Last word
in stack D00006 C
D00007 D The stack pointer is incremented
+1 by +1 after the data is inserted.
D00008
D00009
3-17-18 STACK DATA DELETE: SDEL(642)

Purpose Deletes the data element at the specified location in the stack, outputs that
data to the specified destination word, and shifts the remaining the data in the
stack upward. The offset value indicates the location of the desired data ele-
ment (how many data elements before the current pointer position).
only.
Ladder Symbol
SDEL(642)
C: Offset value
C
D: Destination word
D
753
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SDEL(642)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SDEL(642)

OK OK OK OK

15 0
TB

15 0
TB+1

15 0
TB+2

15 0
TB+3


15 0
TB+(N–1)
Area TB C D
754
Area TB C D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0001 to #FFFB ---
(Hexadecimal)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SDEL(642) deletes the data at the specified location in the stack, outputs that
data to the specified destination word, and shifts the remaining the data in the
stack upward. At the same time, SDEL(642) decrements the stack pointer
(TB+3 and TB+2) by 1. The location of the desired address is calculated by
subtracting the offset value in C from the stack pointer.
Stack PLC memory Stack PLC memory
address address
TB n TB n
TB+1 TB+1
TB+2 m TB+2 m-1 The stack pointer is
TB+3 TB+3 decremented by 1.
TB+4 TB+4
Pointer
A B
B C
C
Pointer
m m
Offset value Last word
in stack Last word
n in stack n
C Deletes the specified

word and decrements
the stack pointer.
D A
The address of the desired word
is calculated by subtracting the
offset value from the stack
pointer address.
SDEL(642) can be used to delete the data for an item that is rejected from the
items on a conveyor. The position of the deletion point is simply the number of
items back (the offset value) from the most recent item added to the conveyor.
755
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the content of the stack pointer (TB+3 and TB+2) is
Equals Flag = ON if the output data in D is 0000.

Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, SDEL(642) deletes the
word at the specified address in the stack starting at D00000, outputs the
deleted data to D00100, shifts the remaining data upward, and decrements
the stack pointer.
In this case, the stack pointer indicates D00007 and the offset value is 3, so
the data is deleted from D00004. The remaining data is shifted up one word
and the stack pointer is decremented from D00007 to D00006.
000000
SDEL
D00000
&3 PLC memory
D00100 address
D00003 (Delete/output)
Stack D00004 A
pointer D00005 B
−3 D00100 A
Last word D00006 C
in stack D00007
D00008
D00009
-1
D00003
Stack D00004 B
pointer D00005 C
Last word D00006 C
in stack −1 D00007 The stack pointer is decremented
D00008 by 1 after the data is deleted.
D00009
756
Data Control Instructions Section 3-18
3-18 Data Control Instructions

3-18-1 PID CONTROL: PID(190)
Purpose Executes PID control according to the specified parameters.
Ladder Symbol
PID(190)
S S: Input word
C C: First parameter word
D D: Output word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PID(190)

Parameters The following diagrams show the locations of the parameter data. For details
on the parameters, refer to PID Parameter Settings in this section.
Set value (SV)

Proportional band (P)
Integral constant (Tik)
Derivative constant (Tdk)
Sampling period (τ)
15 8 7 4 32 1 0
C+5 0
Forward/reverse designation
PID constant update timing designation
Manipulated variable output setting
2-PID parameter (α)
Output range
Integral and derivative unit

Input range
Manipulated variable output limit control

PID starting integral manipulated variable
designation
757
Area S C D
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to CIO
6143 CIO 6105 6143
D32767 D32729 D32767
E32767 E32729 E32767
En_32767 En_32729 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants DR0 to DR15 --- DR0 to DR15
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Description When the execution condition is ON, PID(190) carries out target value filtered
PID control with two degrees of freedom according to the parameters desig-
nated by C (set value, PID constant, etc.). It takes the specified input range of
binary data from the contents of input word S and carries out the PID action
according to the parameters that are set. The result is then stored as the
manipulated variable in output word D.
The parameters are obtained when the execution condition turns from OFF to
ON, and the Error Flag will turn ON if the settings are outside of the permissi-
ble range.
If the settings are within the permissible range, PID processing will be exe-
cuted using the initial values. Bumpless operation is not performed at this
time. It will be used for manipulated variables in subsequent PID processing
execution. (Bumpless operation is processing that gradually and continuously
changes the manipulated variable in order to avoid the adverse effects of sud-
den changes.)
When the execution condition turns ON, the PV for the specified sampling
period is entered and processing is performed.
758
PV input (S) PID control
Manipulated variable (D)
The number of valid input data bits within the 16 bits of the PV input (S) is
designated by the input range setting in C+6, bits 08 to 11. For example, if 12
bits (4 hex) is designated for the input range, the range from 0000 hex to 0FFF
hex will be enabled as the PV. (Values greater than 0FFF hex will be regarded
as 0FFF hex.)
The set value range also depends on the input range.
Measured values (PV) and set values (SV) are in binary without sign, from
0000 hex to the maximum value of the input range.
The number of valid output data bits within the 16 bits of the manipulated vari-
able output is designated by the output range setting in C+6, bits 00 to 03. For
example, if 12 bits (4 hex) is designated for the output range, the range from
0000 hex to 0FFF hex will be output as the manipulated variable.
For proportional operation only, the manipulated variable output when the PV
equals the SV can be designated as follows:
0: Output 0%
1: Output 50%.
The direction of proportional operation can be designated as either forward or
reverse.
The upper and lower limits of the manipulated variable output can be desig-
nated.
The sampling period can be designated in units of 10 ms (0.01 to 99.99 s), but
the actual PID action is determined by a combination of the sampling period
and the time of PID(190) instruction execution (with each cycle).
The timing of enabling changes made to PID constants can be set to either 1)
the beginning of PID instruction execution or 2) the beginning of PID instruc-
tion execution and each sampling period. Only the proportional band (P), inte-
gral constant (Tik), and derivative constant (Tdk) can be changed each
sampling cycle (i.e., during PID instruction execution). The timing is set in bit 1
of C+5.
Note The setting in bit 1 of C+5 is supported only by CJ1, CS1-H, CJ1-H CPU Units
and CS1 CPU Units with lot numbers of 001201@@@@ or later (manufactured
December 1, 2000 or later).
Of the PID parameters (C to C+38), only the set value (SV) can be changed
when the execution condition is ON. When changing other values, be sure to
change the execution condition from OFF to ON.
759
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the C data is out of range.
ON if the actual sampling period is more than twice the
designated sampling period.
Greater Than > ON if the manipulated variable after the PID action
Flag exceeds the upper limit.
Less Than Flag < ON if the manipulated variable after the PID action is
below the lower limit.
Carry Flag CY ON while PID control is being executed.
Precautions The same words cannot be used to store the PID parameters for more than
one PID(190) instruction. Even if the same parameters are used, use different
words to store the PID parameters for different PID(190) instructions.
PID(190) is executed as if the execution condition was a STOP-RUN signal.
PID calculations are executed when the execution condition remains ON for
the next cycle after C+9 to C+38 are initialized. Therefore, when using the
Always ON Flag (ON) as an execution condition for PID(190), provide a sepa-
rate process where C+9 to C+38 are initialized when operation is started.
If the C data is out of range, an error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON.
If the actual sampling period is more than twice the designated sampling
period, an error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON. PID control will still
be executed, however.
The Carry Flag turns ON while PID control is being executed.
The Greater Than Flag turns ON if the manipulated variable after the PID
action exceeds the upper limit. At this time, the results are output at the upper
limit.
The Less Than Flag turns ON if the manipulated variable after the PID action
is below the lower limit. At this time, the results are output at the lower limit.
Within the PID parameters (C to C+38), the only value that can be changed
while the input condition is ON is the set value for C. If any other value is
changed, be sure to turn the input condition from OFF to ON to enable the
new value.
Example At the rising edge of CIO 000000 (OFF to ON), the work area in D00209 to
D00238 is initialized according to the parameters (shown below) set in
D00200 to D00208. After the work area has been initialized, PID control is
executed and the manipulated variable is output to CIO 0020.
When CIO 000000 is turned ON, PID control is executed at the sampling
period intervals according to the parameters set in D00200 to D00208. The
manipulated variable is output to CIO 0020.
The PID constants used in PID calculations will not be changed if the propor-
tional band (P), integral constant (Tik), or derivative constant is changed after
CIP 000000 turns ON.
760
C: D00200 012C Set value: 300

C+1: D00201 0064 Proportional band: 10.0%
C+2: D00202 04B0 Integral time: 120.0 s
C+3: D00203 0190 Derivative time: 40.0 s
Parameters C+4: D00204
0032 Sampling period: 0.5 s
C+5: D00205 0000 Reverse operation (bit 00: 0), PID constant updating
C+6: D00206 0494 timing = input condition is ON (bit 01: 0), Manipulated
C+7: D00207 variable output designation: 0% (bit 03: 0),
PV: word 0000
2-PID parameter = 0.65 (bits 04 to 15: 000 hex)
0010 PID control C+8: D00208 0000
Manipulated variable output range: 12 bits (bits 00 to 03: 4
C+9: D00209 Work Area hex), Integral/derivative constants: time designation (bits 04
to
C+38: D00238 to 07: 9 hex), Input range: 12 bits (bits 08 to 11: 4 hex),
Manipulated variable limit control: No (bits 12: 0 hex), PID
Manipulated variable output: starting integral manipulated variable designation = start
CIO 0020 from same integral manipulated value as manipulated
variable output designation (bit 14: 0 and bit 13: 0)
Note When CIO 000000 is OFF, operation can be the same

as manual operation by writing to CIO 0020.
When changing from manual operation to automatic
operation by executing PID(190), extreme changes in
the manipulated value are restricted. (The manipulated
variable after switching to automatic operation will start
at the previous value of the integral manipulated
variable.)
Input Values and The number of valid input data bits for the measured value is designated by
Manipulated Variable the input range setting in C+6, bits 08 to 11, and the number of valid output
Ranges data bits for the manipulated variable output is designated by the output range
setting in C+6, bits 0 to 3. These ranges are shown in the following table.
C+6, bits 08 to 11 or Number of valid bits Range
C+6, bits 00 to 03
0 8 0000 to 00FF hex
1 9 0000 to 01FF hex
2 10 0000 to 03FF hex
3 11 0000 to 07FF hex
4 12 0000 to 0FFF hex
5 13 0000 to 1FFF hex
6 14 0000 to 3FFF hex
7 15 0000 to 7FFF hex
8 16 0000 to FFFF hex
If the range of data handled by an Analog Input Unit or Analog Output Unit
cannot be set accurately by setting the number of valid bits, APR(069)
(ARITHMETIC PROCESS) can be used to convert to the proper ranges
before and after PID(190).
The following program section shows an example for a DRT1-AD04 Analog
Input Unit and DRT1-DA02 Analog Output Unit operating as DeviceNet
slaves. The data ranges for these two Units is 0000 to 1770 hex, which cannot
be specified merely by setting the valid number of digits. APR(069) is thus
used to convert the 0000 to 1770 hex range of the Analog Input Unit to 0000
761
to FFFF hex for input to PID(190) and then the manipulated variable output
from PID(190) is converted back to the range 0000 to 1770 hex, again using
APR(069), for output from the Analog Output Unit.
From Analog Input Unit
Execution
condition
ARP Control Data
C (D01000): 0000 Hex (binary with one table)
D01000 C+1 (D01001): 1770 Hex (Xm)
Analog input value C+2 (D01002): 0000 Hex (Yo)
C+3 (D01003): 1770 Hex (X1)
D02000 C+4 (D01004): FFFF Hex (Y1)
PID
Control Data
D02000 C+6 (D02506):
D02500 @8@8
D03000 Valid number of bits: 16 (0000 to FFFF Hex)
Valid number of bits: 16 (0000 to FFFF Hex)
ARP Control Data
C (D01500): 0000 Hex (binary with one table)
D01500 C+1 (D01501): FFFF Hex (Xm)
D03000 C+2 (D01502): 0000 Hex (Yo)
C+3 (D01503): FFFF Hex (X1)
Analog output value C+4 (D01504): 1770 Hex (Y1)
To Analog Output Unit
Performance Specifications
Item Specifications
PID control method --- Target value filter-type two-degrees-of-freedom PID method (forward/
reverse)
Number of PID control loops --- Unlimited (1 loop per instruction)
Sampling period  0.01 to 99.99 s
PID constant Proportional band P 0.1 to 999.9%
Integral constant Tik 1 to 8191, 9999 (No integral action for sampling period multiple, 9999.)
Derivative constant Tdk 0 to 8191 (No derivative action for sampling period multiple, 0.)
Set value SV 0 to 65535 (Valid up to maximum value of input range.)
Measured value PV 0 to 65535 (Valid up to maximum value of input range.)
Manipulated variable MV 0 to 65535 (Valid up to maximum value of output range.)
Calculation Method Calculations in PID control are performed by the target value filtered control
with two degrees of freedom.
Block Diagram for Target Value PID with Two Degrees of Freedom
When overshooting is prevented with simple PID control, stabilization of dis-
turbances is slowed (1). If stabilization of disturbances is speeded up, on the
other hand, overshooting occurs and response toward the target value is
slowed (2).
When target-value PID control with two degrees of freedom is used, on the
other hand, there is no overshooting, and response toward the target value
and stabilization of disturbances can both be speeded up (3).
Target value filter Proportional + integral elements
Set value 1 + (1 – ) Ti · s + Kp +
SV Kp + Manipulated variable
(target value) 1 + Ti · s Ti · s
– –
Preceding Kp: Proportional constant

derivative-type elements Ti: Integral time
Kp · Td · s Td: Derivative time
Measured PV s: Laplace operator
value (PV) 1 + . Td· s : 2-PID parameter
: Incomplete derivative coefficient
762
Simple PID Control Feed-forward PID Control
(1) (3)
As the target response is slowed, Target response Disturbance response

the disturbance response worsens.
(2)
Overshoot As the disturbance response is

slowed, the target response worsens.
PID Parameter Settings

Control Item Contents Setting range Change with
data ON input
condition
C Set value (SV) The target value of the process Binary data (of the same number Allowed
being controlled. of bits as specified for the input
range)
C+1 Proportional band The parameter for P action 0001 to 270F hex (1 to 9999); Can be
expressing the proportional con- (0.1% to 999.9%, in units of changed with
trol range/total control range. 0.1%) input condition
C+2 Tik A constant expressing the 0001 to 1FFF hex (1 to 8191); ON if bit 1 of
Integral Constant strength of the integral action. As (9999 = Integral operation not C+5 is 1.
this value increases, the integral executed) (See note 1.)
strength decreases.
C+3 Tdk A constant expressing the 0001 to 1FFF hex (1 to 8191);
Derivative Constant strength of the derivative action. (0000 = Derivative operation not
As this value increases, the executed) (See note 1.)
derivative strength decreases.
C+4 Sampling period (τ) Sets the period for executing the0001 to 270F hex (1 to 9999); Not allowed
PID action. (0.01 to 99.99 s, in units of
10 ms)
Bits 04 to 15 2-PID parameter (α) The input filter coefficient. Nor- 000 hex: α = 0.65
of C+5 mally use 0.65 (i.e., a setting of Setting from 100 to 163 hex
000). The filter efficiency means that the value of the right-
decreases as the coefficient most two digits is set from α=
approaches 0. 0.00 to α= 0.99. (See note 2.)
Bit 03 of C+5 Manipulated vari- Designates the manipulated vari- 0: Output 0%
able output designa- able output when the PV equals 1: Output 50%
tion the SV.
Note This setting is enabled
when there is no integral
operation.
Bit 01 of C+5 PID constant The timing of enabling changes 0: At start of PID instruction exe- Allowed
change enable set- made to the proportional band cution
ting (P), integral constant (Tik), and 1: At start of PID instruction exe-
derivative constant (Tdk) for use cution and each sampling period
in PID calculations.
763

data ON input
condition
Bit 00 of C+5 PID forward/reverse Determines the direction of the 0: Reverse action Not allowed
designation proportional action. 1: Forward action
Bits 13 to 14 ID starting integral Determines the initial integral Bit 14 = 0 and bit 13=0:
of C+6 manipulated vari- manipulated variable when PID Start from same integral manipu-
able designation control is started (i.e., when the lated value as manipulated vari-
(unit version 4.0 or input turns ON). able output designation (Pre-Ver.
later only) 4.0 operation).
Bit 14 = 0 or 1 and bit 13 = 1:
Bumpless operation (i.e., start
from an integral manipulated
variable that will not abruptly
change the manipulated vari-
able output and result in a con-
tinuous change).
Bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 0:
Start with integral manipulated
variable = 0.
Bit 12 of C+6 Manipulated vari- Determines whether or not limit 0: Disabled (no limit control)
able output limit control will apply to the manipu- 1: Enabled (limit control)
control lated variable output.
Bits 08 to 11 Input range The number of input data bits. 0: 8 bits 5: 13 bits
of C+6 1: 9 bits 6: 14 bits
2: 10 bits 7: 15 bits
3: 11 bits 8: 16 bits
4: 12 bits
Bits 04 to 07 Integral and deriva- Determines the unit for express- 1: Sampling period multiple
of C+6 tive unit ing the integral and derivative 9: Time (unit: 100 ms)
constants.
Bits 00 to 03 Output range The number of output data bits. 0: 8 bits 5: 13 bits
2: 10 bits 7: 15 bits
3: 11 bits 8: 16 bits
4: 12 bits
C+7 Manipulated vari- The lower limit for when the 0000 to FFFF (binary)
able output lower manipulated variable output limit (See note 3.)
limit is enabled.
C+8 Manipulated vari- The upper limit for when the 0000 to FFFF (binary)
able output upper manipulated variable output limit (See note 3.)
limit is enabled.
Note 1. When the unit is designated as 1, the range is from 1 to 8,191 times the
period. When the unit is designated as 9, the range is from 0.1 to 819.1 s.
When 9 is designated, set the integral and derivative times to within a
range of 1 to 8,191 times the sampling period.
2. Setting the 2-PID parameter (α) to 000 yields 0.65, the normal value.
3. When the manipulated variable output limit control is enabled (i.e., set to
“1”), set the values as follows:
0000 ≤ MV output lower limit ≤ MV output upper limit ≤ Max. value of output range
Sampling Period and The sampling period can be designated in units of 10 ms (0.01 to 99.99 s), but
Cycle Time the actual PID action is determined by a combination of the sampling period
and the time of PID instruction execution (with each cycle). The relationship
between the sampling period and the cycle time is as follows:
• If the sampling period is less than the cycle time, PID control is executed
with each cycle and not with each sampling period.
764
• If the sampling period is greater than or equal to the cycle time, PID con-
trol is not executed with each cycle, but PID(190) is executed when the
cumulative value of the cycle time (the time between PID instructions) is
greater than or equal to the sampling period. The surplus portion of the
cumulative value (i.e., the cycle time’s cumulative value minus the sam-
pling period) is carried forward to the next cumulative value.
For example, suppose that the sampling period is 100 ms and that the cy-
cle time is consistently 60 ms. For the first cycle after the initial execution,
PID(190) will not be executed because 60 ms is less than 100 ms. For the
second cycle, 60 ms + 60 ms is greater than 100 ms, so PID(190) will be
executed. The surplus of 20 ms (i.e., 120 ms – 100 ms = 20 ms) will be
carried forward.
For the third cycle, the surplus 20 ms is added to 60 ms. Because the sum
of 80 ms is less than 100 ms, PID(190) will not be executed. For the fourth
cycle, the 80 ms is added to 60 ms. Because the sum of 140 ms is greater
than 100 ms, PID(190) will be executed and the surplus of 40 ms (i.e.,
120 ms – 100 ms = 20 ms) will be carried forward. This procedure is re-
peated for subsequent cycles.
1 cycle 1 cycle 1 cycle 1 cycle 1 cycle
Processing (80 ms + 60 ms = 140 ms)

Initial processing (60 ms) (60 ms + 60 ms = 120 ms) (20 ms + 60 ms = 80 ms)
(PID processing Not executed. Executed Not executed. Executed
with initial values)
Reading of Less than 100 ms, so Greater than 100 ms, Less than 100 ms, so Greater than 100 ms,
measurement PID is not executed. so PID is executed PID is not executed. so PID is executed and
time and 20 ms is carried 40 ms is carried
forward. forward.
Control Actions Proportional Action (P)

Proportional action is an operation in which a proportional band is established
with respect to the set value (SV), and within that band the manipulated vari-
able (MV) is made proportional to the deviation. An example for reverse oper-
ation is shown in the following illustration.
If the proportional action is used and the present value (PV) becomes smaller
than the proportional band, the manipulated variable (MV) is 100% (i.e., the
maximum value). Within the proportional band, the MV is made proportional
to the deviation (the difference between from SV and PV) and gradually
decreased until the SV and PV match (i.e., until the deviation is 0), at which
time the MV will be at the minimum value of 0% (or 50%, depending on the
setting of the manipulated variable output designation parameter). The MV
will also be 0% when the PV is larger than the SV.
The proportional band is expressed as a percentage of the total input range.
The smaller the proportional band, the larger the proportional constant and
the stronger the corrective action will be. With proportional action an offset
(residual deviation) generally occurs, but the offset can be reduced by making
the proportional band smaller. If it is made too small, however, hunting will
occur.
765
Proportional Action (Reverse Action) Adjusting the Proportional Band

Manipulated variable
100% Proportional band when

MV output designation is Proportional band too narrow (hunting occurring)
0 (output 0%)
50% Proportional band when
MV output designation is Offset
1 (output 50%)
0%
SV
Proportional band just right

Set point
Proportional band too wide (large offset)
Proportional band when Proportional band when
MV output designation is MV output designation is
0 (output 0%) 1 (output 50%)
Integral Action (I)

Combining integral action with proportional action reduces the offset accord-
ing to the time that has passed, so that the PV will match the SV. The strength
of the integral action is indicated by the integral time, which is the time
required for the manipulated variable of the integral action to reach the same
level as the manipulated variable of the proportional action with respect to the
step deviation, as shown in the following illustration. The shorter the integral
time, the stronger the correction by the integral action will be. If the integral
time is too short, the correction will be too strong and will cause hunting to
occur.
Integral Action
Step response
Deviation 0
Manipulated
variable 0
Pi Action and Integral Time

Step response
Deviation
PI action
I action
Manipulated P action
variable
Ti: Integral time
Derivative Action (D)

Proportional action and integral action both make corrections with respect to
the control results, so there is inevitably a response delay. Derivative action
compensates for that drawback. In response to a sudden disturbance it deliv-
ers a large manipulated variable and rapidly restores the original status. A
correction is executed with the manipulated variable made proportional to the
incline (derivative coefficient) caused by the deviation.
The strength of the derivative action is indicated by the derivative time, which
is the time required for the manipulated variable of the derivative action to
reach the same level as the manipulated variable of the proportional action
with respect to the step deviation, as shown in the following illustration. The
longer the derivative time, the stronger the correction by the derivative action
will be.
766
Derivative Action
Step response
Deviation 0
Manipulated
variable 0
PD Action and Derivative Time

Ramp response
Deviation 0
PD action
P action
Manipulated D action
variable 0
Td: Derivative time
PID Action
PID action combines proportional action (P), integral action (I), and derivative
action (D). It produces superior control results even for control objects with
dead time. It employs proportional action to provide smooth control without
hunting, integral action to automatically correct any offset, and derivative
action to speed up the response to disturbances.
Step Response of PID Control Action Output
Step response
Deviation 0
PID action
I action
Manipulated P action
variable 0 D action
Ramp Response of PID Control Action Output
Ramp response
Deviation 0
PID action
I action
P action
D action
Manipulated
variable 0
Direction of Action When using PID control, select either of the following two control directions. In
either direction, the MV increases as the difference between the SV and the
PV increases.
• Forward action: MV is increased when the PV is larger than the SV.
• Reverse action: MV is increased when the PV is smaller than the SV.
767
Reverse Action Forward Action
Output Output
Low SV High Low SV High

temperature temperature temperature temperature
(MV output designation: 50%)
Adjusting PID Parameters The general relationship between PID parameters and control status is shown
below.
• When it is not a problem if a certain amount of time is required for stabili-
zation (settlement time), but it is important not to cause overshooting,
then enlarge the proportional band.
Control by measured PID

SV
When P is enlarged
• When overshooting is not a problem but it is desirable to quickly stabilize

control, then narrow the proportional band. If the proportional band is nar-
rowed too much, however, then hunting may occur.
When P is narrowed
SV
• When there is broad hunting, or when operation is tied up by overshooting

and undershooting, it is probably because integral action is too strong.
The hunting will be reduced if the integral time is increased or the propor-
tional band is enlarged.
(when loose hunting occurs)
SV
Enlarge I or P.
• If the period is short and hunting occurs, it may be that the control system
response is quick and the derivative action is too strong. In that case, set
the derivative action lower.
(when hunting occurs in a short period)
SV
Lower D.
768
3-18-2 PID CONTROL WITH AUTOTUNING: PIDAT(191)

Purpose Executes PID control according to the specified parameters. The PID con-
stants can be autotuned.
only.
Ladder Symbol
PIDAT(191)
S S: Input word
C: First parameter word
C
D: Output word
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PIDAT(191)

769
Parameters The following diagrams show the locations of the parameter data. For details
on the parameters, refer to PID Parameter Settings in this section.
Set value (SV)
Proportional band (P)
Integral constant (Tik)
Derivative constant (Tdk)
Sampling period (τ)
15 8 7 4 32 1 0
C+5 0
Forward/reverse designation
PID constant update timing designation
Manipulated variable output setting
2-PID parameter (α)
Output range
Integral and derivative unit

Input range
Manipulated variable output limit control

15 designation 0
C+7 Manipulated variable output lower limit
C+8 Manipulated variable output upper limit
15 14 13 12 0
C+9 0 0 0
AT Calculation Gain
AT Command Bit
15 0
C+10 Limit-cycle Hysteresis
C+11
Work area
(30 words: Cannot be used by user.)
C+40
Area S C D
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to CIO
6143 CIO 6105 6143
D32767 D32729 D32767
E32767 E32729 E32767
770
Area S C D
En_32767 En_32729 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants DR0 to DR15 --- DR0 to DR15
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Description When the execution condition is ON, PIDAT(191) carries out target value fil-
tered PID control with two degrees of freedom according to the parameters
designated by C (set value, PID constant, etc.). It takes the specified input
range of binary data from the contents of input word S and carries out the PID
action according to the parameters that are set. The result is then stored as
the manipulated variable in output word D.
The parameter settings are read when the execution condition turns from OFF
to ON, and the Error Flag will turn ON if the settings are outside of the permis-
sible range.
If the settings are within the permissible range, PID processing will be exe-
cuted using the initial values. Bumpless operation is not performed at this
time. It will be used for manipulated variables in subsequent PID processing
execution. (Bumpless operation is processing that gradually and continuously
changes the manipulated variable in order to avoid the adverse effects of sud-
den changes.)
When the execution condition turns ON, the PV for the specified sampling
period is entered and processing is performed.
PV input (S) PID control
Manipulated variable (D)
Autotuning
The status of the AT Command Bit (bit 15 of C+9) is checked every cycle. If
this control bit is turned ON in a given cycle, PIDAT(191) will begin autotuning
the PID constants. (The changes in the SV will not be reflected while autotun-
ing is being performed.)
The limit-cycle method is used for autotuning. PIDAT(191) forcibly changes
the manipulated variable (max. manipulated variable ↔ min. manipulated
variable) and monitors the characteristics of the controlled system. The PID
constants are calculated based on the characteristics that were observed,
771
and the new P, I, and D constants are stored automatically in C+1, C+2, and
C+3. At this point, the AT Command Bit (bit 15 of C+9) is turned OFF and PID
control resumes with the new PID constants in C+1, C+2, and C+3.
• If the AT Command Bit is ON when PIDAT(191) execution begins, auto-
tuning will be performed first and then PID control will start with the calcu-
lated PID constants.
• If the AT Command Bit is turned ON during PIDAT(191) execution,
PIDAT(191) interrupts the PID control being performed with the user-set
PID constants, performs autotuning, and then resumes PID control with
the calculated PID constants.
The following flowchart shows the autotuning procedure:
The AT Command Bit (bit 15 of C+9) is
ON at the start of PIDAT(191) execution
or it is turned ON during execution.
PID control is interrupted, the PV is

forcibly changed, and the PID constants
are calculated automatically.
The calculated P, I, and D constants are

set in C+1, C+2, and C+3 respectively.
The AT Command Bit is turned OFF.
PID control starts (or restarts) with the

new PID constants.
Note 1. If autotuning is interrupted by turning OFF the AT Command Bit during au-
totuning, PID control will start with the PID constants that were being used
before autotuning began.
2. Also, if an AT execution error occurs, PID control will start with the PID con-
stants that were being used before autotuning began.
In both cases described in notes 1 and 2, the PID constants will be enabled if
they were already calculated when autotuning was interrupted.
PID Control
The number of valid input data bits within the 16 bits of the PV input (S) is
designated by the input range setting in C+6, bits 08 to 11. For example, if 12
bits (4 hex) is designated for the input range, the range from 0000 hex to 0FFF
hex will be enabled as the PV. (Values greater than 0FFF hex will be regarded
as 0FFF hex.)
The set value range also depends on the input range.
Measured values (PV) and set values (SV) are in binary without sign, from
0000 hex to the maximum value of the input range.
The number of valid output data bits within the 16 bits of the manipulated vari-
able output is designated by the output range setting in C+6, bits 00 to 03. For
example, if 12 bits (4 hex) is designated for the output range, the range from
0000 hex to 0FFF hex will be output as the manipulated variable.
For proportional operation only, the manipulated variable output when the PV
equals the SV can be designated as follows:
0: Output 0%
1: Output 50%.
772
The direction of proportional operation can be designated as either forward or

reverse.
The upper and lower limits of the manipulated variable output can be desig-
nated.
The sampling period can be designated in units of 10 ms (0.01 to 99.99 s), but
the actual PID action is determined by a combination of the sampling period
and the time of PIDAT(191) instruction execution (with each cycle).
The timing of enabling changes made to PID constants can be set to either 1)
the beginning of PIDAT(191) instruction execution or 2) the beginning of PID
instruction execution and each sampling period. Only the proportional band
(P), integral constant (Tik), and derivative constant (Tdk) can be changed
each sampling cycle (i.e., during PID instruction execution). The timing is set
in bit 1 of C+5.
The same words cannot be used to store the PID parameters for more than
one PIDAT(191) instruction. Even if the same parameters are used, use differ-
ent words to store the PID parameters for different PIDAT(191) instructions.
When changing the PID constants manually, set the PID constant change
enable setting (bit 1 of C+5) to 1 so that the values in C+1, C+2, and C+3 are
refreshed each sampling period in the PID calculation. This setting also allows
the PID constants to be adjusted manually after autotuning.
Of the PID parameters (C to C+38), only the following parameters can be
changed when the execution condition is ON. When any other values have
been changed, be sure to change the execution condition from OFF to ON to
enable the new settings.
• Set value (SV) in C
(Can be changed during PID control only. An SV change during autotun-
ing will not be reflected.)
• PID constant change enable setting (bit 1 of C+5)
• P, I, and D constants in C+1, C+2, and C+3
(Changes to these constants will be reflected each sampling period only if
the PID constant change enable setting (bit 1 of C+5) is set to 1.)
• AT Command Bit (bit 15 of C+9)
• AT Calculation Gain (bits 0 to 14 of C+9) and Limit-cycle Hysteresis
(C+10) (These values are read when autotuning starts.)
Note The PIDAT(191) instruction is the same as the PID(190) instruction with the
added autotuning (AT) function, so the PID control operations are identical.
Refer to 3-18-1 PID CONTROL: PID(190) for details on PID control operations
and examples.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the C data is out of range.
ON if the actual sampling period is more than twice the
designated sampling period.
ON if an error occurred during autotuning.
Greater Than > ON if the manipulated variable after the PID action
Flag exceeds the upper limit.
773

Less Than Flag < ON if the manipulated variable after the PID action is
below the lower limit.
Carry Flag CY ON while PID control is being executed.
Precautions PIDAT(191) is executed as if the execution condition was a STOP-RUN signal.

PID calculations are executed when the execution condition remains ON for
the next cycle after C+11 to C+40 are initialized. Therefore, when using the
Always ON Flag (ON) as an execution condition for PIDAT(191), provide a
separate process where C+11 to C+40 are initialized when operation is
started.
If the C data is out of range, an error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON.
If an error occurred during autotuning, the Error Flag will turn ON.
If the actual sampling period is more than twice the designated sampling
period, an error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON. PID control will still
be executed, however.
The Carry Flag turns ON while PID control is being executed.
The Greater Than Flag turns ON if the manipulated variable after the PID
action exceeds the upper limit. At this time, the results are output at the upper
limit.
The Less Than Flag turns ON if the manipulated variable after the PID action
is below the lower limit. At this time, the results are output at the lower limit.
PID Parameter Settings

data ON input
condition
C Set value (SV) The target value of the process Binary data (of the same number Allowed
being controlled. of bits as specified for the input
range)
C+1 Proportional band The parameter for P action 0001 to 270F hex (1 to 9999); Can be
expressing the proportional con- (0.1% to 999.9%, in units of changed with
trol range/total control range. 0.1%) input condition
C+2 Tik A constant expressing the 0001 to 1FFF hex (1 to 8191); ON if bit 1 of
Integral Constant strength of the integral action. As (9999 = Integral operation not C+5 is 1.
this value increases, the integral executed) (See note 1.)
strength decreases.
C+3 Tdk A constant expressing the 0001 to 1FFF hex (1 to 8191);
Derivative Constant strength of the derivative action. (0000 = Derivative operation not
As this value increases, the executed) (See note 1.)
derivative strength decreases.
C+4 Sampling period (τ) Sets the period for executing the 0001 to 270F hex (1 to 9999); Not allowed
PID action. (0.01 to 99.99 s, in units of
10 ms)
Bits 04 to 15 2-PID parameter (α) The input filter coefficient. Nor- 000 hex: α = 0.65
of C+5 mally use 0.65 (i.e., a setting of Setting from 100 to 163 hex
000). The filter efficiency means that the value of the right-
decreases as the coefficient most two digits is set from α=
approaches 0. 0.00 to α= 0.99. (See note 2.)
Bit 03 of C+5 Manipulated vari- Designates the manipulated vari- 0: Output 0%
able output designa- able output for when the PV 1: Output 50%
tion equals the SV.
774

data ON input
condition
Bit 01 of C+5 PID constant The timing of enabling changes 0: At start of PID instruction exe- Allowed
change enable set- made to the proportional band cution
ting (P), integral constant (Tik), and 1: At start of PID instruction exe-
derivative constant (Tdk) for use cution and each sampling period
in PID calculations.
Bit 00 of C+5 PID forward/reverse Determines the direction of the 0: Reverse action Not allowed
designation proportional action. 1: Forward action
Bits 13 to 14 ID starting integral Determines the initial integral Bit 14 = 0 and bit 13=0:
of C+6 manipulated vari- manipulated variable when PID Start from same integral manipu-
able designation control is started (i.e., when the lated value as manipulated vari-
(unit version 4.0 or input turns ON) . able output designation (Pre-Ver.
later only) 4.0 operation).
Bit 14 = 0 or 1 and bit 13 = 1:
Bumpless operation (i.e., start
from an integral manipulated
variable that will not abruptly
change the manipulated vari-
able output and result in a con-
tinuous change).
Bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 0:
Start with integral manipulated
variable = 0.
Bit 12 of C+6 Manipulated vari- Determines whether or not limit 0: Disabled (no limit control)
able output limit control will apply to the manipu- 1: Enabled (limit control)
control lated variable output.
Bits 08 to 11 Input range The number of input data bits. 0: 8 bits 5: 13 bits
2: 10 bits 7: 15 bits
3: 11 bits 8: 16 bits
4: 12 bits
Bits 04 to 07 Integral and deriva- Determines the unit for express- 1: Sampling period multiple
of C+6 tive unit ing the integral and derivative 9: Time (unit: 100 ms)
constants.
Bits 00 to 03 Output range The number of output data bits. 0: 8 bits 5: 13 bits
of C+6 (The number of output bits is 1: 9 bits 6: 14 bits
automatically the same as the 2: 10 bits 7: 15 bits
number of input bits.) 3: 11 bits 8: 16 bits
4: 12 bits
C+7 Manipulated vari- The lower limit for when the 0000 to FFFF (binary)
able output lower manipulated variable output limit (See note 3.)
limit is enabled.
C+8 Manipulated vari- The upper limit for when the 0000 to FFFF (binary)
able output upper manipulated variable output limit (See note 3.)
limit is enabled.
775

data ON input
condition
Bit 15 of C+9 AT Command Bit This control bit starts autotuning. As a Control Bit: Allowed
• Set the AT Command Bit to 1 • 0 → 1:
to perform autotuning. (Auto- Executes autotuning.
tuning can be started while • 1 → 0:
PIDAT(191) is being exe- Interrupts autotuning.
cuted.) (PID(191) turns the bit OFF
• This bit is turned OFF auto- automatically when autotun-
matically when autotuning is ing is completed.
completed.
As a Flag:
Autotuning will be interrupted if
0: Autotuning is not being exe-
the AT Command Bit is turned
cuted.
OFF manually. In this case, the
PID constants will be enabled if 1: Autotuning is being executed.
they were already calculated
when autotuning was inter-
rupted.
Bits 00 to 11 AT Calculation Gain Set this parameter to adjust the 0000 hex: 1.00 (Default) Allowed
of C+9 contribution of the PID calcula- 0001 to 03E8 hex (1 to 1000); (These param-
tion results to the stored values. (0.01 to 10.00, in units of 0.01) eters are read
Normally, leave this parameter when autotun-
set to its default (0000). ing starts.)
• Increase the value when
emphasizing stability.
• Decrease the value when
emphasizing responsiveness.
C+10 Limit-cycle Hystere- Sets the hysteresis when the 0000 hex: 0.20% (Default)
sis limit cycle is generated. The 0001 to 03E8 hex:
default setting for reverse opera- 0.01 to 10.00% in units of 0.01%
tion turns ON the MV with a hys-
teresis of SV−20%. FFFF hex: 0.00%
Increase this setting if a proper Note The percentage is with
limit cycle cannot be generated respect to the input range.
because the PV is unstable.
However, the AT accuracy will
decline if the Limit-cycle Hyster-
esis is higher than necessary.
Note 1. When the unit is designated as 1, the range is from 1 to 8,191 times the
period. When the unit is designated as 9, the range is from 0.1 to 819.1 s.
When 9 is designated, set the integral and derivative times to within a
range of 1 to 8,191 times the sampling period.
2. Setting the 2-PID parameter (α) to 000 yields 0.65, the normal value.
When the manipulated variable output limit control is enabled (i.e., set to
“1”), set the values as follows:
0000 ≤ MV output lower limit ≤ MV output upper limit ≤ Max. value of output range
Example 1: At the rising edge of CIO 000000 (OFF to ON), the work area in D00211 to
Interrupting PID Control to D00240 is initialized according to the parameters (shown below) set in
Perform Autotuning D00200 to D00208. After the work area has been initialized, PID control is
executed and the manipulated variable is output to CIO 0020.
While CIO 000000 is ON, PID control is executed at the sampling period
intervals according to the parameters set in D00200 to D00210. The manipu-
lated variable is output to CIO 0020.
The PID constants used in PID calculations will not be changed even if the
proportional band (P), integral constant (Tik), or derivative constant is
changed after CIO 000000 turns ON.
776
At the rising edge of W 000000 (OFF to ON), SETB(532) turns ON bit 15 of

D00209 (C+9) and starts autotuning. When autotuning is completed, the cal-
culated P, I, and D constants are written to C+1, C+2, and C+3. PID control is
then restarted with the new PID constants.
000000
PIDAT
S 0010
C D00200
D 0020
W00000
SETB
D00209
#000F
C: D00200 0 1 2 C Set value: 300
C+1: D00201 0 0 6 4 Proportional band: 10.0%
C+2: D00202 0 4 B 0 Integral time: 120.0 s
C+3: D00203 0 1 9 0 Derivative time: 40.0 s
Sampling Reverse operation (bit 00: 0), PID constant change enable setting =
C+4: D00204 0 0 3 2 period: 0.5 s OFF (bit 01: 0), set value = manipulated variable output 50% (bit
C+5: D00205 0 0 0 0 03: 1), 2-PID parameter = 0.65 (bits 04 to 15: 000 hex)
Parameters C+6: D00206 0 4 9 4 Manipulated variable output range: 12 bits (bits 00 to 03: 4 hex),
Integral/derivative constant: time designation (bits 04 to 07: 9 hex)
C+7: D00207 0 0 0 0 Input range: 12 bits (bits 08 to 11: 4 hex),
Manipulated variable output limit control disabled (bit 12: 0)
C+8: D00208 0 0 0 0 AT Command Bit OFF (bit 15: 0),
C+9: D00209 AT Calculation Gain = 1.00 (bits 00 to 11: 000 hex)
PV: 0 0 0 0
PID calculation Limit-cycle Hysteresis = 0.20%
CIO 0010 C+10: D00210 0 0 0 0
C+11: D00211 designation = start from same integral
to Work area manipulated value as manipulated variable
MV output: CIO 0020 output designation (bit 14: 0 and bit 13: 0)
C+40: D00240
Calculated PID
PID control starts. constants are set.
CIO 000000
PID control AT executing PID control
W000000
Bit 15 of
D00209
PV
SV
Time
MV
Time
777
Example 2: At the rising edge of CIO 000000 (OFF to ON), autotuning will be performed
Starting PIDAT(191) with first if bit 15 of D00209 (C+9) is ON. When autotuning is completed, the calcu-
Autotuning lated P, I, and D constants are written to C+1, C+2, and C+3. PID control is
then started with the calculated PID constants.
000000
PID
S 0010
C D00200
D 0020
PID control and Calculated PID

autotuning start. constants are set.
CIO 000000
AT executing PID control

Bit 15 of
D00209
PV
SV
Time
MV
Time
Example 3: Autotuning can be interrupted by turning bit 15 of D00209 (C+9) from ON to

Interrupting Autotuning OFF. PID control will be restarted with the P, I, and D constants that were in
Before Completion effect before autotuning was started.
PID control starts.
CIO 000000
PID control AT executing PID control
AT starts AT is interrupted.
Bit 15 of
D00209
PV
SV
PID control is restarted with

the existing PID constants.
Time
778
3-18-3 LIMIT CONTROL: LMT(680)

Purpose Controls output data according to whether or not input data is within upper
and lower limits.
Ladder Symbol
LMT(680)
S S: Input word
C C: First limit word
D D: Output word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition LMT(680)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @LMT(680)

OK OK OK OK
Area S C D
CIO 6143 CIO 6142 CIO 6143
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to 959 A000 to A958 A448 to A959
D32767 D32766 D32767
E32767 E32766 E32767
En_32767 En_32766 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
779
Area S C D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description When the execution condition is ON, LMT(680) controls output data according
to whether or not the specified input data (signed 16-bit binary) is within the
upper and lower limits. The contents of words C and C+1 are as follows:
C Lower limit data (minimum output data)
C+1 Upper limit data (maximum output data)
C and C+1 must have the same area classification.

If the input data (S) is less than the lower limit (C), the lower limit data will be
output to D and the Less Than Flag will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is greater than the upper limit (C+1), the upper limit data
will be output to D and the Greater Than Flag will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is greater than or equal to the lower limit (C) and less than
or equal to the upper limit (C+1), the input data (S) will be output to D.
Upper limit C+1
Lower limit C
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the upper limit is less than the lower limit.
Greater Than > ON if the input data (S) is greater than the upper limit.
Less Than Flag < ON if the input data (S) is less than the lower limit.
Negative Flag N ON if the leftmost bit of the result is “1.”
780
Precautions If the upper limit is less than the lower limit, an error will occur and the Error
Flag will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is greater than the upper limit, the Greater Than Flag will
turn ON.
If the output word D is 0000 hex, the Equals Flag will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is less than the lower limit, the Less Than Flag will turn
ON.
If the status of the leftmost bit of the output word D is “1,” the Negative Flag
will turn ON.
Example If D00100 is 0050 hex (80), then 0064 hex (100) will be output to D00300
because 80 is less than the lower limit of 100.
If D00100 is 00C8 hex (200), then 0064 hex (100) will be output to D00300
because 200 is within the upper and lower limits.
If D00100 is 012C hex (300), then 015E hex (350) will be output to D00300
because 350 is greater than the upper limit of 300.
C: Lower limit: 100

Upper limit: 300
3-18-4 DEAD BAND CONTROL: BAND(681)

Purpose Controls output data according to whether or not input data is within the lower
and upper limits of the range (dead band range.)
Ladder Symbol
BAND(681)
S S: Input word
D D: Output word
781
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BAND(681)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BAND(681)

OK OK OK OK
Area S C D
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO CIO 0000 to CIO CIO 0000 to CIO
6143 6142 6143
D32767 D32766 D32767
E32767 E32766 E32767
En_32767 En_32766 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description When the execution condition is ON, BAND(681) controls output data accord-
ing to whether or not the specified input data (signed 16-bit binary) is within
the upper and lower limits (dead band). The contents of words C and C+1 are
as follows:
C Lower limit data (dead band lower limit)
C+1 Upper limit data (dead band upper limit)
782
If the input data (S) is greater than or equal to the lower limit (C) and less than
or equal to the upper limit (C+1), 0000 (hex) will be output to D and the Equals
Flag will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is less than the lower limit (C), the difference between the
input data minus the lower limit data will be output to D and the Less Than
Flag will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is greater than the upper limit (C+1), the difference
between the input data minus the upper limit data will be output to D and the
Greater Than Flag will turn ON.
Output
Lower limit (C)

Input
Upper limit (C+1)
If the output data is smaller than the 8000 (hex) or if is greater than 7FFF, the
sign will be reversed. For example, for a lower limit of 0100 (hex) and input
data of 8000 (hex), the output data will be as follows:
8000 (hex) [–32768] – 0100 (hex) [256] = 7F00 (hex) [32512]
Flags
Flag will turn ON.
turn ON.
ON.
will turn ON.
Example If D00100 is 00B4 hex (180), then 180–200=FFEC hex (–20) will be output to
D00300 because 180 is less than the lower limit of 200.
If D00100 is 00E6 hex (230), then 0 will be output to D00300 because 230 is
within the upper and lower limits.
If D00100 is 015E hex (350), then 350–300=0032 hex (50) will be output to
D00300 because 350 is greater than the upper limit of 300.
783
Lower limit: 200

Upper limit: 300
Lower limit
Lower Upper
limit: limit:
200 300 Upper limit
3-18-5 DEAD ZONE CONTROL: ZONE(682)

Purpose Adds the specified bias to input data and outputs the result.
Ladder Symbol
ZONE(682)
S S: Input word
D D: Output word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ZONE(682)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ZONE(682)

OK OK OK OK
Area S C D
6143 6142 6143
D32767 D32766 D32767
E32767 E32766 E32767
784
Area S C D
En_32767 En_32766 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description When the execution condition is ON, ZONE(682) adds the specified bias to
the specified input data (signed 16-bit binary) and places the result in a speci-
fied word. The contents of words C and C+1 are as follows:
C Negative bias
C+1 Positive bias

If the input data (S) is less than zero, the input data plus the negative bias will
be output to D and the Less Than Flag will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is greater than zero, the input data plus the positive bias
will be output to D and the Greater Than Flag will turn ON.
If the input data (S) is equal to zero, 0000 will be output to D and the Equals
Flag will turn ON.
Output
Positive bias (C+1)
Input
Negative bias (C)
If the output data is smaller than the 8000 (hex) or if is greater than 7FFF, the
sign will be reversed. For example, for a negative bias value of FF00 (hex) and
input data of 8000 (hex), the output data will be as follows:
8000 (hex) [–32768] – FF00 (hex) [–256] = 7F00 (hex) [32512]
785
Flags
Flag will turn ON.
turn ON.
ON.
will turn ON.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON, a bias of –100 will be applied to the value of
D00100 if that value is less than 0, and the resulting value will be stored in
D00300.
If the value of D00100 is 0, then 0000 hex will be stored in D00300.
If the value of D00100 is greater than 0, then a bias of +100 will be applied
and the resulting value will be stored in D00300.
Decimal values
C: –100
Negative bias
Positive bias
Contents of D00300
Contents of D00200
786
3-18-6 TIME-PROPORTIONAL OUTPUT: TPO(685)

Purpose Inputs the duty ratio or manipulated variable from the specified word, converts
the duty ratio to a time-proportional output based on the specified parameters,
and outputs the result from the specified output.
This instruction is supported only by CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later.
Ladder Symbol
TPO
S S: Input word
C C: First parameter word
R R: Pulse output bit
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TPO(685)

Operands S: Input Word

Specifies the input word containing the input duty ratio or manipulated vari-
able. Bits 04 to 07 of C specify the input type, i.e., whether the input word con-
tains an input duty ratio or manipulated variable. (Set these bits to 0 hex to
specify a input duty ratio or to 1 hex to specify a manipulated variable.)
• Input duty ratio: 0000 to 2710 hex (0.00% to 100.00%)
• Input manipulated variable (See note.): 0000 to FFFF hex (0 to 65,535
max.) (Bits 00 to 03 of C specify the manipulated variable range, i.e., the
number of valid bits in the manipulated variable. Specify the same number
of bits as specified for the output range setting in PID(190).)
Note If S is a manipulated variable, specify the word containing the manip-
ulated variable output from a PID(190) or PIDAT(191) instruction.
C to C+6: Parameters
The following diagram shows the locations of the parameter data. For details
on the parameters, refer to Parameter Settings in this section.
787
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C
Manipulated variable range

Input type
Input read timing
Output limit function
15 0
C+1 Control period
C+2 Output lower limit
C+3 Output upper limit
C+4
Work area
C+5 (3 words, cannot be used by user)
C+6
Note: For details, see the description of each parameter.
R: Pulse Output Bit

Specifies the destination output bit for the pulse output.
Normally, specify an output bit allocated to a Transistor Output Unit and con-
nect a solid state relay to the Transistor Output Unit.
Area S C R
CIO 6143 CIO 6137 CIO 614315
Work Area W000 to W511 W000 to W505 W00000 to
W51115
Holding Bit Area H000 to H511 H000 to H505 H00000 to
H51115
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to 959 A000 to A953 A44800 to
A95915
Timer Area T0000 to T4095 T0000 to T4089 ---
Counter Area C0000 to C4095 C0000 to C4089 ---
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to ---
D32767 D32761
EM Area without bank E00000 to E00000 to ---
E32767 E32761
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_00000 to ---
En_32767 En_32761
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF --- ---
(binary)
Data Registers DR0 to DR15 --- ---
788
Area S C R
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description Receives a duty ratio or manipulated variable input from the word address
specified by S, converts the duty ratio to a time-proportional output (see note)
based on the parameters specified in words C to C+3, and outputs a pulse
output to the bit specified by R.
Note A time-proportional output is changed proportionally based on the ON/OFF
ratio in input word S. The period in which the ON and OFF status changes is
known as the control period and is set in parameter word C+1.
Example: When the control period is 1 s and the input value is 50%, the bit is
ON for 0.5 s and OFF for 0.5 s. When the control period is 1 s and the input
value is 80%, the bit is ON for 0.8 s and OFF for 0.2 s.
Generally, TPO(685) is used together with PID(190) or PIDAT(191) and the
PID instruction’s manipulated variable result word (D) is specified as the input
word (S) for the TPO(685) instruction. Also, an output bit allocated to a Tran-
sistor Output Unit is generally specified as R and a solid state relay is con-
nected to the Transistor Output Unit to perform time-proportional control of a
heater (proportional control of the ON/OFF ratio).
Combining TPO(685) with a PID Control Instruction
When combining TPO(685) with a PID control instruction, the manipulated
variable input is divided by the manipulated variable range to calculate the
duty ratio, that duty ratio is converted to a time-proportional output, and pulses
are output.
000000
PID
S PV input
C PID parameters PID calculation
Manipulated variable (MV)
D00000 Manipulated D00000 MV Output range
variable
= MV range
TPO
D00000 MV
C Parameters MV ÷ MV range
R Pulse output Duty ratio (0.00% to 100.00%)
Conversion to time-proportional
output
In this case, set the same value for the PID Control instruction’s output range
and the TPO(685) instruction’s manipulated variable range. For example,
when the PID Control instruction’s output range and the TPO(685) instruc-
tion’s manipulated variable range are both set to 12 bits (0000 to 0FFF hex),
the duty ratio is calculated by dividing the manipulated variable from the PID
Control instruction by 0FFF hex and TPO(685) converts that duty ratio to a
time-proportional output.
789
External Wiring Example

Connect the Transistor Output Unit to a solid state relay (SSR) as shown in
Heater
Transistor Output Unit
SSR
12 to 24 VDC
COM +
AC
Parameter Settings
Control data Item Contents Setting range Change with
Word Bits ON input
condition
C 00 to 03 Manipulated Specifies the number of input 0 hex: 8 bits 5 hex: 13 bits Allowed
variable range data bits. 1 hex: 9 bits 6 hex: 14 bits
2 hex: 10 bits 7 hex: 15 bits
3 hex: 11 bits 8 hex: 16 bits
4 hex: 12 bits
04 to 07 Input type Specifies whether S contains a 0 hex: Duty ratio Allowed
duty ratio or manipulated vari- Setting range for S: 0000 to
able. 2710 hex (0.00 to 100.00%)
1 hex: Manipulated variable
Setting range for S: 0000 to
FFFF hex (0 to 65,535)
(The maximum setting
depends on the MV range set
with bits 00 to 03 of C.)
08 to 11 Input read timing Specifies the input read timing. 0 hex: Use the beginning value of Allowed
the control period
1 hex: Use lower value
2 hex: Use higher value
3 hex: Continuous adjustment
12 to 15 Output limit con- Specifies whether the output 0 hex: Disabled Allowed
trol limit function is enabled or dis- 1 hex: Enabled (See note.)
abled.
C+1 00 to 15 Control period Control period 0064 to 270F hex (1.00 to 99.99 s) Allowed
(Time period in which the ON/ Note: For example, 1.00 s is set as
OFF changes are made.) 0064 hex, and not 0001 hex.
C +2 00 to 15 Output lower Specifies the lower limit when 0000 to 2710 hex (0 to 100.00%) Allowed
limit the output limit is enabled.
C +3 00 to 15 Output upper Specifies the upper limit when 0000 to 2710 hex (0 to 100.00%) Allowed
limit the output limit is enabled.
C+4 00 to 15 Work area This work area is used by the Cannot be used. ---
C+5 00 to 15 system. It cannot be used by the
user.
C+6 00 to 15
Note When the output limit control function is enabled, set the lower and upper lim-
its as follows: 0000 hex ≤ lower limit ≤ upper limit ≤ 2710 hex.
Execution • The instruction is executed while the input condition is ON.

• When instruction execution starts, the output bit (R) is turned ON/OFF
according to the duty ratio.
790
• The parameters (in C to C+3) are read in real time each time that the
instruction is executed. When changing the parameters, change all of
them at the same time so that different sets of parameters are not mixed.
• The output (R) is turned ON/OFF when the instruction is executed and the
accuracy of the output’s ON/OFF timing is 10 ms max.
• Execution of the instruction stops when the input condition goes OFF. At
that time, the elapsed time value will be reset and the control period will
be initialized.
• The input type setting (bits 04 to 07 of C) determines whether the input
word (S) contains a duty ratio or manipulated variable. When S contains
the manipulated variable, the duty ratio is calculated by dividing the
manipulated variable input by the manipulated variable range (bits 00 to
03 of C).
Input Read Timing Setting The input read timing setting (bits 08 to 11 of C) specifies when the input word
(C bits 08 to 11) (S) is read, as shown in the following table:
Input read timing Description
0: Use the beginning The duty ratio input is read at the beginning of the control
value of the control period and the ratio cannot be changed during the control
period period.
1: Use lower value If the duty ratio input falls below the duty ratio at the
beginning of the control period, the lower value will take
precedence and the output ON time will be reduced
accordingly.
2: Use higher value If the duty ratio input rises above the duty ratio at the
beginning of the control period, the higher value will take
precedence and the output ON time will be increased
accordingly.
3: Continuous adjustment The duty ratio will be read in real time each time the
instruction is executed and the ON/OFF operation will be
repeated within the control period.
The following diagrams show the operation of each input read timing setting.
• Input time setting = 0 (Use the beginning value of the control period.)
Read only at the beginning of the control period.

Control period (a) Control period (a)
100%
Duty ratio 70%

(MV/MV range) 55%
0%
a × 0.55 s a × 0.45 s a × 0.70 s a × 0.30 s
Output
Time
Each control period's output is determined by the duty ratio at the beginning of that period.
Use this setting for general applications.
791
• Input time setting = 1 (Use lower value.)

100%
70%
Duty ratio 55%
(MV/MV range)
35%
55% target 70% target
cut to 35%. is kept.
0%
a × 0.35 s a × 0.65 s a × 0.70 s a × 0.30 s
Output
Time
If the duty ratio falls below the initial value early enough, the duty ratio will be
adjusted and the output will be turned OFF sooner.
Use this setting for applications such as avoiding overshooting when using time-
proportional control to control heating and using a relatively long control period.
• Input time setting = 2 (Use higher value.)
100%
70% target is kept.
Duty ratio 80%
70%
(MV/MV range) 55%
70% target
raised to 80%.
0%
a×
a × 0.45 s a × 0.55 s 0.20 s a × 0.80 s
Output
Time
If the duty ratio rises above the initial value early enough, the duty ratio will be
adjusted and the output will be turned ON sooner. (With this setting the output's
ON/OFF order is reversed and the output goes from OFF to ON.)
Use this setting for applications such as avoiding undershooting when using time-
proportional control to control cooling and using relatively long control period.
792
• Input time setting = 3 (Continuous adjustment)
100%
100%
Duty ratio : Output ON
(MV/MV range) : Output OFF
0%
a× a× a×
a × 0.35 s 0.20 s 0.20 s 0.20 s
Output
Time
Changes in the duty ratio are monitored in real time. If the duty ratio falls
below the initial value early enough, the duty ratio will be adjusted and the
output will be turned OFF sooner. If the duty ratio rises again after that,
the ratio will be adjusted again and the output will be turned ON. This
process is repeated continuously.
Use this setting to improve responsiveness when the control period is
relatively long and the duty ratio changes quickly. This setting is also
appropriate for lighting or power applications that require precise control.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the input data in S is out of range. (The input data
setting range depends on the input type setting.)
ON if the C data is out of range. (The manipulated vari-
able range will cause an error only when the input type is
set to manipulated variable.)
ON if the control period in C+1 is out of range.
ON if the output limit function is enabled but the output
lower limit (C+2) or output upper limit (C+3) is out of
range.
ON if the output limit function is enabled but the output
lower limit (C+2) is less than or equal to the output upper
limit (C+3).
Example Example 1: Combining TPO(685) with PID(190)

When CIO 000000 is ON, TPO(685) takes the manipulated variable output
from PID(190) (contained in D00000), calculates the duty ratio from that
manipulated variable value (Duty ratio = MV ÷ MV range), converts the duty
ratio to a time-proportional output, and outputs the pulses to CIO 002001.
In this case, CIO 0020 is allocated to a Transistor Output Unit and bit
CIO 002001 is connected to a solid state relay for heater control.
793
000000
PID
When CIO 000000 goes from OFF to ON, PID(190)
S 0010 PV input reads the parameters, performs the PID calculation
C D00200 PID parameters with the PV input in CIO 0010, and outputs the
manipulated variable (MV) to D00000.
D D00000 Manipulated variable
TPO TPO(685) calculates the duty ratio by dividing the

S D00000 Manipulated variable MV in D00000 by the MV range (0FFF Hex since
the range is set to 12 bits), converts that duty ratio
C D05000 Parameters to a time-proportional output, and outputs the pulse
R 002001 Pulse output output to bit 01 of CIO 0020.
D00200 Set value (SV)

D00201 Proportional band (P)
:
D00206 4
:
Output range: 4 hex
: (12 bits: 0000 to 0FFF hex)
D05000 1 4
MV range: 4 hex
(12 bits: 0000 to 0FFF hex)
Input type: 1 hex (MV)
Note When using TPO(685) in combination with PID(190) in a cyclic task and also
using an interrupt task, temporarily disable interrupts by executing DI(693)
(DISABLE INTERRUPTS) ahead PID(190) and TPO(685). If interrupts are not
disabled and an interrupt occurs between the PID(190) and TPO(685), the
control period may be shifted.
Cyclic task
DI
PID
S PV input
C PID parameters Reception prohibited
Manipulated
D variable Interrupt task
TPO
Manipulated
S variable
C Parameters
R Pulse output
EI
Reception allowed
Interrupt task
Example 2: Using TPO(685) Alone

When CIO 000000 is ON, TPO(685) takes the duty ratio in D00010, converts
the duty ratio to a time-proportional output, and outputs the pulses to
CIO 000100.
In this case, the control period is 1 s and the output limit function is enabled
with a lower limit 20.00% and an upper limit of 80.00%.
794
000000
TPO TPO(685) takes the duty ratio in D00010, converts
that duty ratio to a time-proportional output, and
S D00010 Duty ratio
outputs the pulse output to bit 00 of CIO 0001.
C D00000 Parameters
R 000100 Pulse output
D00000 1 1 0 0 Duty ratio input, read initial value, and enable output limit function.
D00001 0 0 6 4 Control period = 1.00 s
D00002 0 7 D 0 Output lower limit = 20.00%
D00003 1 F 4 0 Output upper limit = 80.00%
D00004 Do not set.
D00005 Do not set.
D00006 Do not set.
:
:
D00010 0 to 2710 hex 0 to 100.00%
3-18-7 SCALING: SCL(194)

Purpose Converts unsigned binary data into unsigned BCD data according to the
specified linear function.
Ladder Symbol
SCL(194)
S S: Source word
P1 P1: First parameter word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SCL(194)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SCL(194)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Operands The contents of the four words starting with the first parameter word (P1) are
795
15 0
P1
Scaled value for point A (Ar)

0000 to 9999 (4-digit BCD)
15 0
P1+1
Unscaled value for point A (As)

0000 to FFFF (binary)
15 0
P1+2
Scaled value for point B (Br)

0000 to 9999 (4-digit BCD)
15 0
P1+3
Unscaled value for point B (Bs)

0000 to FFFF (binary)
Note P1 to P1+3 must be in the same area.
Area S P1 R
6143 6140 6143
D32767 D32764 D32767
E32767 E32764 E32767
En_32767 En_32764 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
796
Area S P1 R
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SCL(194) is used to convert the unsigned binary data contained in the source
word S into unsigned BCD data and place the result in the result word R
according to the linear function defined by points (As, Ad) and (Bs, Bd). The
address of the first word containing the coordinates of points (As, Ar) and (Bs,
Br) is specified for the first parameter word P1. These points define by 2 val-
ues (As and Bs) before scaling and 2 values (Ar and Br) after scaling.
The following equations are used for the conversion.
(Bd – Ad)
R = Bd – × BCD conversion of (Bs – S)
BCD conversion of (Bs – As)
The slope of the line is as follows:
(Bd – Ad)
R = Bd –
BCD conversion of (Bs – As)
Points A and B can define a line with either a positive or negative slope. Using
a negative slope enables reverse scaling.
The result will be rounded to the nearest integer. If the result is less than
0000, 0000 will be output as the result. If the result is greater than 9999, 9999
will be output.
R (unsigned BCD) Scaling is performed according
to the linear function defined by
points A and B.
Point B P (BCD) Converted value

P1+1 (BIN)
Point A
P1+2 (BCD)
Converted value
P1+3 (BIN)
S (unsigned binary)
SCL(194) can be used to scale the results of analog signal conversion values
from Analog Input Units according to user-defined scale parameters. For
example, if a 1 to 5-V input to an Analog Input Unit is input to memory as 0000
to 0FA0 hexadecimal, the value in memory can be scaled to 50 to 200°C
using SCL(194).
SCL(194) converts unsigned binary to unsigned BCD. To convert a negative
value, it will be necessary to first add the maximum negative value in the pro-
gram before using SCL(194) (see example).
SCL(194) cannot output a negative value to the result word, R. If the result is
a negative value, 0000 will be output to R.
797
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the contents of C (Ar) or C+1 (Br) is not BCD.
ON if the contents of C+1 (As) and C+3 (Bs) are equal.
Precautions An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if the values for Ar (C) and
Br (C+2) are not in BCD, or if the values for As (C+1) and Bs (C+3) are equal.
The Equals Flag will turn ON when the contents of the result word D is 0000.
Examples In the following example, it is assume that an analog signal from 1 to 5 V is

converted and input to D00000 as 0000 to 0FA0 hexadecimal. SCL(194) is
used to convert (scale) the value in CIO 0200 to a value between 0000 and
0300 BCD.
When CIO 000000 is ON, the contents of D00000 is scaled using the linear
function defined by point A (0000, 0000) and point B (0FA0, 0300). The coor-
dinates of these points are contained in D00100 to D00103, and the result is
output to D00200.
D00000
P1
R
Contents of D00200 (R)
P1: D00100 (BCD)

Point B P1+1: D00101 (BIN)
P1+2: D00102 (BCD)
P1+3: D00103 (BIN)
Point A
Contents of D00000 (S)
Negative Values
An Analog Input Unit actually inputs values from FF38 to 1068 hexadecimal
for 0.8 to 5.2 V. SCL(194), however, can handle only unsigned binary values
between 0000 and FFFF hexadecimal, making it impossible to use SCL(194)
directly to handle signed binary values below 1 V (0000 hexadecimal), i.e.,
FF38 to FFFF hexadecimal. In an actual application, it is thus necessary to
add 00C8 hexadecimal to all values so that FF38 hexadecimal is represented
as 0000 hexadecimal before using SCL(194), as shown in the following exam-
ple.
798
x+00C8 He
The value in CIO

0200 plus 00C8
hexadecimal
Contents of D 00200 (R) Point A (00C8 Hex → 0000 (BCD))

Point B (1068 Hex → 0300 (BCD))
P1: D00100 (BCD)
P1+1: D00101 (BIN)
Point B
P1+2: D00102 (BCD)
P1+3: D00103 (BIN)
Point A
Contents of D 00000 (S)
In this example, values from 0000 to 00C8 hexadecimal will be converted to

negative values. SCL(194), however, can output only unsigned BCD values
from 0000 to 9999, so 0000 BCD will be output whenever the contents of
D00000 is between 0000 and 00C8 hexadecimal.
Reverse Scaling
Reverse scaling can also be used by setting As < Bs and Ar > Br. The follow-
ing relationship will result.
R (unsigned BCD)
Point A
Point B
S (unsigned binary)
Reverse scaling can be used, for example, to convert (reverse scale) 1 to 5 V

(0000 to 0FA0 hexadecimal) to 0300 to 0000, respectively, as shown in the fol-
lowing diagram.
R
Point A
Point B
799
3-18-8 SCALING 2: SCL2(486)

Purpose Converts signed binary data into signed BCD data according to the specified
linear function. An offset can be input in defining the linear function.
Ladder Symbol
SCL2(486)
S S: Source word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SCL2(486)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SCL2(486)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Operands The contents of the three words starting with the first parameter word (P1) are
15 0
P1
Offset of linear function

8000 to 7FFF (signed binary)
15 0
P1+1
∆X
15 0
P1+2
∆Y
0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Area S P1 R
6143 6141 6143
800
Area S P1 R
D32767 D32765 D32767
E32767 E32765 E32767
En_32767 En_32765 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SCL2(486) is used to convert the signed binary data contained in the source
word S into signed BCD data (the BCD data contains the absolute value and
the Carry Flag shows the sign) and place the result in the result word R
according to the linear function defined by the slope (∆X, ∆Y) and an offset.
The address of the first word containing ∆X, ∆Y, and the offset is specified for
the first parameter word P1. The sign of the result is indicated by the status of
the Carry Flag (ON: negative, OFF: positive).
∆Y
R = BCD conversion of ∆X x ((BCD conversion of S) – (BCD conversion of offset)
The slope of the line is ∆Y/∆X.
The offset and slope can be a positive value, 0, or a negative value. Using a
negative slope enables reverse scaling.
The result will be rounded to the nearest integer.
The result in R will be the absolute BCD conversion value and the sign will be
indicated by the Carry Flag. The result can thus be between –9999 and 9999.
If the result is less than –9999, –9999 will be output as the result. If the result
is greater than 9999, 9999 will be output.
801
Positive Offset Negative Offset

R (signed BCD) R (signed BCD)
∆Y
∆Y
Offset ∆X
∆X
S (signed binary) S (signed binary)

Offset
Offset of 0000
P1 Offset (Signed binary) R (signed BCD)
P1+1 ∆Y (Signed binary)
P1+2 ∆X (Signed BCD)
∆Y
Offset = 0000 hex
∆X
S (signed binary)
SCL2(486) can be used to scale the results of analog signal conversion val-
ues from Analog Input Units according to user-defined scale parameters. For
example, if a 1 to 5-V input to an Analog Input Unit is input to memory as 0000
to 0FA0 hexadecimal, the value in memory can be scaled to –100 to 200°C
using SCL2(486).
SCL2(486) converts signed binary to signed BCD. Negative values can thus
be handled directly for S. The result of scaling in R and the Carry Flag can
also be used to output negative values for the scaling result.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the contents of C+1 (∆X) is 0000.
ON if the contents of C+2 (∆Y) is not BCD.
Carry Flag CY ON if the result is negative.
OFF if the result is zero or positive.
Precautions An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if the value for ∆X (C+1) is
0000 or if the value for ∆Y (C+2) is not BCD.
The Carry Flag will turn ON if the value placed in the result word is negative.
Examples Scaling 1 to 5-V Analog Input to 0 to 300

In the following example, it is assumed that an analog signal from 1 to 5 V is
converted and input to CIO 0205 as 0000 to 0FA0 hexadecimal. SCL2(486) is
used to convert (scale) the value in CIO 0205 to a value between 0000 and
0300 BCD.
When CIO 000000 is ON, the contents of CIO 0205 is scaled using the linear
function defined by ∆X (0FA0), ∆Y (0300), and the offset (0). These values are
contained in D00100 to D00102, and the result is output to D00200.
802
P1
Contents of R (D00200)
R
P1: Offset
P1+1: ∆X
P1+2: ∆Y
Contents of S (CIO 0205)
1068Hex
(∆X)
Scaling 1 to 5-V Analog Input to –200 to 200

In the following example, it is assume that an analog signal from 1 to 5 V is
converted and input to CIO 2005 as 0000 to 0FA0 hexadecimal. SCL2(486) is
used to convert (scale) the value in CIO 2005 to a value between –0200 and
0200 BCD.
When CIO 000000 is ON, the contents of CIO 2005 is scaled using the linear
function defined by ∆X (0FA0), ∆Y (0400), and the offset (07D0). These values
are contained in D00100 to D00102, and the result is output to D00200.
P1
Contents of R (D00200)
R
P1: D00100 Offset
P1+1: D00101 0 F A 0 ∆X
P1+2: D00102 ∆Y
Offset
07D0 Hex 0400 (∆Y)
Contents of S (CIO 0200)
0FA0 Hex
(∆X)
803
3-18-9 SCALING 3: SCL3(487)

Purpose Converts signed BCD data into signed binary data according to the specified
linear function. An offset can be input in defining the linear function.
Ladder Symbol
SCL3(487)
S S: Source word
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SCL3(487)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SCL3(487)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Operands The contents of the five words starting with the first parameter word (P1) are
15 0
P1
Offset of linear function

15 0
P1+1
∆X
0001 to 9999 (BCD)
15 0
P1+2
∆Y
15 0
P1+3
Maximum conversion
15 0
P1+4
Minimum conversion
804
Area S P1 R
6143 6139 6143
A448 to A959 A448 to A955
D32767 D32763 D32767
E32767 E32763 E32767
En_32767 En_32763 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SCL3(487) is used to convert the signed BCD data (the BCD data contains
the absolute value and the Carry Flag shows the sign) contained in the source
word S into signed binary data and place the result in the result word R
according to the linear function defined by the slope (∆X, ∆Y) and an offset.
The maximum and minimum conversion values are also specified. The
address of the first word containing ∆X, ∆Y, the offset, the maximum conver-
sion, and the minimum conversion is specified for the first parameter word P1.
The sign of the result is indicated by the status of the Carry Flag (ON: nega-
tive, OFF: positive). Use STC(040) and CLC(041) to turn the Carry Flag ON
and OFF.
∆Y
R = Binary conversion of ∆X x ((Binary conversion of S)+(Offset))
The slope of the line is ∆Y/∆X.
The offset and slope can be a positive value, 0, or a negative value. Using a
negative slope enables reverse scaling.
The result will be rounded to the nearest integer.
805
The source value in S is treated as an absolute BCD value and the sign is
indicated by the Carry Flag. The source value can thus be between –9999
and 9999.
If the result is less than the minimum conversion value, the minimum conver-
sion value will be output as the result. If the result is greater than the maxi-
mum conversion value, the maximum conversion value will be output.
Positive Offset Negative Offset
R (signed binary) R (signed binary)

Max conversion Max conversion
∆Y ∆Y
∆X ∆X
Min. conversion Offset Offset S (signed BCD)
S (signed BCD)
Min. conversion
Offset of 0000
R (signed binary)
Max conversion
∆Y
∆X
S (signed BCD)
Min. conversion
SCL3(487) is used to convert data using a user-defined scale to signed binary

for Analog Output Units. For example, SCL3(487) can convert 0 to 200 °C to
0000 to 0FA0 (hex) and output an analog output signal 1 to 5 V from the Ana-
log Output Unit.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the contents of S is not BCD.
ON if the contents of C+1 (∆X) is not between 0001 and
9999 BCD.
Negative Flag N ON when the MSB of the R (the result) is 1.
Precautions An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if the contents of S is not
BCD or if the value for ∆X (C+1) is not between 0001 and 9999 BCD.
The Negative Flag will turn ON if the MSB of the result in R is 1, i.e., if the
result is negative.
Examples When a value from 0 to 200 is scaled to an analog signal (1 to 5 V, for exam-
ple), a signed BCD value of 0000 to 0200 is converted (scaled) to signed
806
binary value of 0000 to 0FA0 for an Analog Output Unit. When CIO 000000
turns ON in the following example, the contents of D00000 is scaled using the
linear function defined by ∆X (0200), ∆Y (0FA0), and the offset (0). These val-
ues are contained in D00100 to D00102. The sign of the BCD value in
D00000 is indicated by the Carry Flag. The result is output to CIO 2011.
P1
R
Contents of R (2011, signed binary) P1: Offset
P1+1: ∆X
P1+2: ∆Y
P1+3: Max. conversion
P1+4: Min. conversion
∆Y (0FA0 Hex)
Contents of S (D00000, signed BCD)
∆X (0200)
3-18-10 AVERAGE: AVG(195)

Purpose Calculates the average value of an input word for the specified number of
cycles.
Ladder Symbol AVG(195)
S S: Source word
N N: Number of cycles
R R: Result word
R+1: First work area word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition AVG(195)

areas areas
Operands N: Number of Cycles

The number of cycles must be between 0001 and 0040 hexadecimal (0 to 64
cycles).
R: Result Word and R+1: First Work Area Word
R will contain the average value after the specified number of cycles. R+1 pro-
vides information on the averaging process and R+2 to R+N+1 contain the
previous values of S as shown in the following diagram.
807
R: Average
R+1: Processing information
15 14 0
R+1
Used by system.
Average Valid Flag
OFF: Not valid (AVG(195) has not yet been executed the specified number of cycles.)
ON: Valid.
R+2: Previous value #1
R+N+1: Previous value #N
Note R to R+N+1 must be in the same area.
Area S N R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF #0001 to #0040 ---
(binary) (binary)
Index Registers ---
Description For the first N–1 cycles when the execution condition is ON, AVG(195) writes
the values of S in order to words starting with R+2. The Previous Value
Pointer (bits 00 to 07 of R+1) is incremented each time a value is written. Until
the Nth value is written, the contents of S will be output unchanged to R and
the Average Value Flag (bit 15 of R+1) will remain OFF.
When the Nth value is written to R+N+1, the average of all the values that
have been stored will be computed, the average will be output to R as an
unsigned binary value, and the Average Value Flag (bit 15 of R+1) will be
808
turned ON. For all further cycles, the value in R will be updated for the most
current N values of S.
The maximum value of N is 64. If a value greater than 64 is specified, opera-
tion will use a value of 64.
The Previous Value Pointer will be reset to 0 after N–1 values have been writ-
ten.
The average value output to R will be rounded to the nearest integer.
S: Source word
N: Number of cycles
R+1 Pointer
R+2
S Cycle 1
R+3
S Cycle 2
N values
S Cycle N
R+N+1
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the contents of N is 0.
Precautions The contents of the First Work Area Word (D+1) is cleared to 0000 each time
the execution condition changes from OFF to ON.
The contents of the First Work Area Word (D+1) will not be cleared to 0000
the first time the program is executed at the start of operation. If AVG(195) is
to be executed in the first program scan, clear the First Work Area Word from
the program.
If N (Number of Cycles) contains 0000, an error will occur and the Error Flag
will turn ON.
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00100 will
be stored one time each scan for the number of scans specified in D00200.
The contents will be stored in order in the ten words from CIO 0302 to CIO
0311. The average of the contents of these ten words will be placed in CIO
0300 and then bit 15 of CIO 0301 will be turned ON.
809
S: D00100
S
N N: D00200 (10 times)
R
R: CIO 0300
Pointer
R+1: CIO 0301
R+2: CIO 0302 S, scan 1
R+3: CIO 0303 S, scan 2
R+11: CIO 0311 S, scan n
Examples In the following example, the content of CIO 0040 is set to #0000 and then
incremented by 1 each cycle. For the first two cycles, AVG(195) moves the
content of CIO 0040 to D01002 and D01003. The contents of D01001 will
also change (which can be used to confirm that the results of AVG(195) has
changed). On the third and later cycles AVG(195) calculates the average
value of the contents of D01002 to D01004 and writes that average value to
D01000.
@MOV
1st cycle 2nd cycle 3rd cycle 4th cycle

CIO 0040 0000 0001 0002 0003
D01000 0000 0001 0001 0002 Average

D01001 0001 0002 8000 8001 Pointer
D01002 0000 0000 0000 0003 3 previous values of IR 40
D01003 --- 0001 0001 0001
D01004 --- --- 0002 0002
810
Subroutines Section 3-19
3-19 Subroutines
3-19-1 SUBROUTINE CALL: SBS(091)
Purpose Calls the subroutine with the specified subroutine number and executes that
program.
Ladder Symbol
SBS(091)
N N: Subroutine number
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SBS(091)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SBS(091)

OK OK OK OK
Operands N: Subroutine number

Specifies the subroutine number between 0 and 1023 decimal.
Note For CJ1M-CPU11 and CJ1M-CPU21 CPU Units, the subroutine number must
be between the range &0 to &255 decimal.
Area N
CIO Area ---
Work Area ---
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants 0 to 1023 (decimal) (See note.)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Note For CJ1M-CPU11 and CJ1M-CPU21 CPU Units, the range is &0 to &255 dec-
imal.
Description SBS(091) calls the subroutine with the specified subroutine number. The sub-
routine is the program section between SBN(092) and RET(093). When the
811
subroutine is completed, program execution continues with the next instruc-

tion after SBS(091).
Main program
Subroutine
program
(SBN(092) to
RET(093))
Program end
Subroutines can be nested up to 16 levels. Nesting is when another subrou-

tine is called from within a subroutine program, such as shown in the following
example, which is nested to 3 levels.
SBN 10 SBN 11 SBN 12
SBN 11 SBS 12
RET RET RET
812
Main program
Subroutine Execution condition ON

program n
Two-level
nesting
Subroutine
program m
Program end
Note A subroutine can be called more than once in a program.
Subroutines and Observe the following precautions when using differentiated instructions
Differentiation (DIFU(013), DIFU(014), or up/down differentiated instructions) in subroutines.
The operation of differentiated instructions in a subroutine is unpredictable if a
subroutine is executed more than once in the same cycle. In the following
example, subroutine 0001 is executed when CIO 000000 is ON and
CIO 000100 is turned ON by DIFU(013) when CIO 000001 has gone from
OFF to ON. If CIO 000001 is ON in the same cycle, subroutine 0001 will be
executed again but this time DIFU(013) will turn CIO 000100 OFF without
checking the status of CIO 000001.
1 1
3
1
5
1
Subroutine
0001 4 The subroutine is
executed again.
813
In contrast, a differentiated instruction (UP, DOWN, DIFU(013) or DIFD(014))

would maintain the ON status if the instruction was executed and the output
was turned ON but the same subroutine was not called a second time.
1
1
3
1
The subroutine is not executed
in following cycles.
000100
2
In the following example, subroutine 0001 is executed if CIO 000000 is ON.

Output CIO 000100 is turned ON by DIFU(013) when CIO 000001 has gone
from OFF to ON. If CIO 000000 is OFF in the following cycle, subroutine
0001 will not be executed again and output CIO 000100 will remain ON.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if nesting exceeds 16 levels.
ON if the specified subroutine number does not exist.
ON if a subroutine calls itself.
ON if a subroutine being executed is called.
ON if the specified subroutine is not defined in the current
task.
Precautions Each subroutine must have a unique subroutine number. Do not use the same
subroutine number for more than one subroutine.
SBS(091) and the corresponding SBN(092) must be programmed in the same
task. An error will occur if the corresponding SBN(092) is not in the task.
SBS(091) will be treated as NOP(000) when it is within a program section
interlocked by IL(002) and ILC(003).
When SBS(091) is executed in the following cases, the subroutine will not
actually be called and the Error Flag will be turned ON:
1,2,3... 1. The specified subroutine is not defined within the current task.
2. The subroutine is calling itself.
3. Subroutine nesting exceeds 16 levels.
4. The specified subroutine is being executed.
Examples Example 1: Sequential (Non-nested) Subroutines

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, subroutine 1 is executed
and program execution returns to the next instruction after SBS(091). The
remainder of the main program (through the instruction just before SBN(092)
1) is then executed.
814
1
CIO 000000 ON
Main program
Subroutine 1 Order of execution

Subroutine program: 2 A→S→B
S
A→B
Example 2: Sequential (Non-nested) Subroutines

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, subroutine 1 is executed
and program execution returns to the next instruction after SBS(091) 1. When
CIO 000001 is ON, subroutine 2 is executed and program execution returns
to the next instruction after SBS(091) 2.
815
1
CIO 000000 ON
Main program
3
CIO 000001 ON
Order of execution
2 A→S1→B→S2→C
A→S1→B→C
A→B→S2→C
A→B→C
Subroutines
Program end
Example 3: Nested Subroutines

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, subroutine 1 is executed.
If CIO 000001 is ON, subroutine 2 is executed from within subroutine 1 and
program execution returns to the next instruction after SBS(091) 2 when sub-
routine 2 is completed. Execution of subroutine 1 continues and program exe-
cution returns to the next instruction after SBS(091) 1 when subroutine 1 is
completed.
816
1
CIO 000000 ON
1
Order of execution
A→S1-1→S2→S1-2→B
2 Subroutine 1
A→S1-1→S1-2→B
CIO 000001 ON A→B
A→B
2
3
Subroutine 2
3-19-2 MACRO: MCRO(099)

Purpose Calls the subroutine with the specified subroutine number and executes that
program using the input parameters in S to S+3 and the output parameters in
D to D+3.
Ladder Symbol
MCRO(099)
S S: First input parameter word
D D: First output parameter word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MCRO(099)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MCRO(099)
817

OK OK OK OK

be between the range 0 to 255 decimal.
Area N S D
A448 to A956
DM Area --- D00000 to D32764
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants 0 to 1023 (deci- ---
mal) (See note.)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047, IR0 to –2048 to
+2047, IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to IR15, IR0+(++)
to IR015+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Note For CJ1M-CPU11 and CJ1M-CPU21 CPU Units, the range is 0 to 255 deci-
mal.
Description MCRO(099) calls the subroutine with the specified subroutine number just like
SBS(091). Unlike SBS(091), MCRO(099) operands S and D can be used to
change bit and word addresses in the subroutine, although the structure of
the subroutine is constant.
When MCRO(099) is executed, the contents of S through S+3 are copied to
A600 through A603 (macro area inputs) and the specified subroutine is exe-
cuted. When the subroutine is completed, the contents of A604 through A607
(macro area outputs) are copied to D through D+3 and program execution
continues with the next instruction after MCRO(099).
818
MCRO(099)
Execution of subrou-
tine between
SBN(092) and
RET(093).
MCRO(099)
The subroutine uses A600 to

A603 as inputs and A604 to
A607 as outputs.
MCRO(099) can be used to consolidate two or more subroutines with the

same structure but different input and output addresses into a single subrou-
tine program. When MCRO(099) is executed, the specified input and output
data is transferred to the specified subroutine.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if nesting exceeds 16 levels.
ON if the specified subroutine number does not exist.
ON if a subroutine calls itself.
ON if a subroutine being executed is called.
ON if the specified subroutine is not defined in the current
task.
The following table shows relevant words in the Auxiliary Area.

Name Address Operation
Macro area input A600 to When MCRO(099) is executed the four words
words A603 from S to S+3 are copied to A600 to A603. These
input words are passed to the subroutine.
Macro area input A604 to After the subroutine specified in MCRO(099) has
words A607 been executed, the output data in these output
words and copied to D to D+3.
Precautions The four words of input data (words or bits) in A600 to A603 and the four
words of output data (words or bits) in A604 to A607 must be used in the sub-
routine called by MCRO(099). It is not possible to pass more than four words
of data.
It is possible to nest MCRO(099) instructions, but the data in the macro area
input and output words (A600 to A607) must be saved before calling another
subroutine because all MCRO(099) instructions use the same 8 words.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, two MCRO(099) instruc-
tions pass different input and output data to subroutine 1.
1,2,3... 1. The first MCRO(099) instruction passes the input data in CIO 0100 to
CIO 0103 and executes the subroutine. When the subroutine is complet-
ed, the output data is stored in CIO 0300 to CIO 0303.
819
2. The second MCRO(099) instruction passes the input data in CIO 0200 to
CIO 0203 and executes the subroutine. When the subroutine is complet-
ed, the output data is stored in CIO 0400 to CIO 0403.
Input data is passed when

the subroutine is called. Macro area input words
Input
1
Execution of
subroutine 1
Output
Output data is passed when
Subroutine 1 returning from the subroutine. Macro area output words
D: 0300 A604
D+1: 0301 A605
D+2: 0302 A606
D+3: 0303 A607
The second MCRO(099) instruction operates in the same way, but the input
data in CIO 0200 to CIO 0203 is passed to A600 to A603 and the output
data in A604 to A607 is passed to CIO 0400 to CIO 0403.
Just the addresses

are different.
820
3-19-3 SUBROUTINE ENTRY: SBN(092)

Purpose Indicates the beginning of the subroutine program with the specified subrou-
tine number. Used in combination with RET(093) to define a subroutine
region.
Ladder Symbol
SBN(092)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SBN(092)


Area N
CIO Area ---
Work Area ---
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants 0 to 1023 (decimal)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Description SBN(092) indicates the beginning of the subroutine with the specified subrou-
tine number. The end of the subroutine is indicated by RET(093).
The region of the program beginning at the first SBN(092) instruction is the
subroutine region. A subroutine is executed only when it has been called by
SBS(091) or MCRO(099).
821
SBS MCRO
n n
SBN
n Subroutine
region
RET
Precautions When the subroutine is not being executed, the instructions are treated as
NOP(000).
Place the subroutines after the main program and just before the END(001)
instruction in the program for each task. If part of the main program is placed
after the subroutine region, that program section will be ignored.
OR
Subroutine region
This part of the

program won't be
executed.
Note The input method for the subroutine number, N, is different for the CX-Pro-
grammer and a Programming Console. Input #0 to #1023 on the CX-Program-
mer and 0000 to 1023 on a Programming Console.
Be sure to place each subroutine in the same program (task) as its corre-
sponding SBS(091) or MCRO(099) instruction. A subroutine in one task can-
not be called from another task. It is possible to program a subroutine within
an interrupt task.
822
Not allowed OK
Task 1 Task
Task 2
The step instructions, STEP(008) and SNXT(009) cannot be used in subrou-

tines.
Not allowed
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, subroutine 10 is executed

and program execution returns to the next instruction after the SBS(091) or
MCRO(099) instruction that called the subroutine.
OR
#10 #10
#10
Subroutine 10
823
3-19-4 SUBROUTINE RETURN: RET(093)

Purpose Indicates the end of a subroutine program. Used in combination with
SBN(092) to define a subroutine region.
Ladder Symbol
RET(093)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RET(093)

Description RET(093) indicates the end of a subroutine and SBN(092) indicates the
beginning of a subroutine. See 3-19-3 SUBROUTINE ENTRY: SBN(092) for
more details on the operation of subroutines.
When program execution reaches RET(093), it is automatically returned to
the next instruction after the SBS(091) or MCRO(099) instruction that called
the subroutine. When the subroutine has been called by MCRO(099), the out-
put data in A604 through A607 is written to D through D+3 before program
execution is returned.
Place the subroutine program area (SBN(092) to RET(093)) in the same task
as the SBS(091) or MCRO(099) instruction of the same number. Subroutines
in other tasks cannot be called.
NOP(000).
Example See 3-19-3 SUBROUTINE ENTRY: SBN(092) for examples of the operation
of RET(093).
3-19-5 GLOBAL SUBROUTINE CALL: GSBS(750)

Purpose Calls the global subroutine with the specified subroutine number and exe-
cutes that program. The same global subroutine can be called from two or
more tasks.
only.
GSBS(750) is used in combination with GSBN(751) and GRET(752), the
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE ENTRY and GLOBAL SUBROUTINE RETURN
instructions.
Ladder Symbol
GSBS(750)
N: Global subroutine number
N
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition GSBS(750)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @GSBS(750)
824

OK OK OK OK
Operands N: Global subroutine number

Specifies the global subroutine number between 0 and 1023 decimal.
Area N
CIO Area ---
Work Area ---
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
mal.
Description GSBS(750) calls the global subroutine with the specified global subroutine
number. The global subroutine is the program section between GSBN(751)
and GRET(752). When the global subroutine is completed, program execution
continues with the next instruction after GSBS(750).
This instruction can be written into multiple tasks with the same global subrou-
tine number to call that program from the different tasks. The program can be
modularized by making global subroutines into standard subroutines that are
common to many tasks.
The global subroutine region (between GSBN(751) and GRET(752)) must be
defined in interrupt task 0. If it is defined in another task, an error will occur
and the Error Flag will be turned ON when the GSBS(750) instruction is exe-
cuted.
The GSBS(750) instruction can be written in both cyclic tasks (including extra
cyclic tasks) and interrupt tasks.
825
Cyclic or interrupt task Cyclic or interrupt task Execution Execution

condition ON condition ON
000000 000001
GSBS GSBS
n n
Main
program B C
B C
Interrupt task 0
GSBN
n Global subroutine
program
(GSBN(751) to
GRET(752))
A A A
GRET
END
Multiple global subroutine regions (GSBN(751) to GRET(752)) can be defined

in interrupt task 0.
826
Cyclic or interrupt task Execution

condition ON
000000
GSBS
n
B
B
Execution
000001 condition ON
GSBS
m
D D
END
Interrupt task 0
GSBN
n
A
GRET
Subroutine functions GSBN

divided by task.
m
C C
GRET
END
An SBS(091) or GSBS(750) instruction can be written within a subroutine

region (SBN(092) to RET(093)) or global subroutine region (GSBN(751) to
GRET(752)) to “nest” subroutines. Subroutines can be nested up to 16 levels.
Interrupt task 0
GSBN 10 GSBN 11 GSBN 12
to to to
GSBS 11 GSBS 12 GRET
to to
GRET GRET
Global Subroutines and Observe the following precautions when using differentiated instructions (UP,
Differentiation DOWN, DIFU(013), DIFU(014), or up/down differentiated instructions) in sub-
routines.
The operation of differentiated instructions in a global subroutine is unpredict-
able if a subroutine is executed more than once in the same cycle. In the fol-
lowing example, global subroutine 0001 is executed when CIO 000000 is ON
827
and CIO 000100 is turned ON by DIFU(013) when CIO 000001 has gone
from OFF to ON. If CIO 000001 is ON in the same cycle, global subroutine
0001 will be executed again but this time DIFU(013) will not detect the rising
edge of CIO 000001 and CIO 000100 will be turned OFF.
Cyclic task 1
000000
GSBS
1
Cyclic task 2
000001
GSBS
1
Interrupt task 0
GSBN
1
000001 Executed
again
DIFU
000100
GRET
In contrast, the output of a differentiated instruction (DIFU(013) or DIFD(014))

would remain ON if the instruction was executed and the output was turned
ON but the same global subroutine was not called a second time.
In the following example, global subroutine 0001 is executed if CIO 000000 is
ON. Output CIO 000100 is turned ON by DIFU(013) when CIO 000001 has
gone from OFF to ON. If CIO 000000 is OFF in the following cycle, subrou-
tine 0001 will not be executed again and output CIO 000100 will remain ON.
828
Cyclic task 1
000000
GSBS
1
Interrupt task 0 The subroutine is

not executed in
following cycles.
GSBN
1
000001
DIFU
000100
GRET
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if nesting exceeds 16 levels (counting both regular
and global subroutines).
ON if the specified global subroutine does not exist.
ON if a global subroutine calls itself.
ON if a global subroutine being executed is called.
ON if the specified subroutine is not defined in interrupt
task 0.
Precautions The GLOBAL SUBROUTINE ENTRY instruction, GSBN(751), and the corre-
sponding GLOBAL SUBROUTINE RETURN instruction, GRET(752) must be
programmed in interrupt task 0. If the global subroutine region is not pro-
grammed in interrupt task 0, an error will occur and the Error Flag will be
turned ON when the GSBS(750) instruction is executed.
The regular SUBROUTINE CALL instruction, SBS(091), cannot call a global
subroutine region (GSBN(751) to GRET(752)).
GSBS(750) will not be executed when it is within a program section inter-
locked by IL(002) and ILC(003), so interlocks are not allowed within global
subroutine regions.
The same global subroutine region (GSBN(751) to GRET(752)) can be called
more than once.
When GSBS(750) is executed in the following cases, the global subroutine will
not actually be called and the Error Flag will be turned ON:
1,2,3... 1. The specified global subroutine is not defined.

2. Subroutine nesting (counting both regular and global subroutines) ex-
ceeds 16 levels.
3. The global subroutine is calling itself.
4. The specified global subroutine is being executed.
5. The specified global subroutine is not defined in interrupt task 0.
829
Examples Example 1
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, global subroutine 1 is exe-
cuted and program execution returns to the next instruction after GSBS(750).
Status of CIO 000000 Order of program execution
ON A→S→B
OFF A→B
When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, global subroutine 1 is exe-

cuted and program execution returns to the next instruction after GSBS(750).
Status of CIO 000000 Order of program execution
ON C→S→D
OFF C→D
Cyclic or interrupt task Cyclic or interrupt task
A C
000000 000001
GSBS CIO 000000 ON GSBS
CIO 000000 ON
n n
B D
END END
Interrupt task 0
GSBN
1
Global
subroutine
program S
GRET
END
Example 2
Two or more global subroutine programs can be programmed in interrupt task
0. In this case, interrupt task 0 can be divided and used as the subroutine
function’s task.
830
When CIO 000000 is ON, global subroutine program 1 is executed.

When CIO 000001 is ON, global subroutine program 2 is executed.
Cyclic or interrupt task
000000
GSBS
CIO 000000 ON
1
000001
GSBS CIO 000001 CIO 000001 ON
OFF
2
Subroutine program
S
END
It is possible to debug problems

within particular tasks by using
Interrupt task 0 regular subroutines in the local task
only as well as global subroutines
that are shared with other tasks.
GSBN
1
Global subroutine
program S1
GRET
GSBN
2
Global subroutine
program S2
GRET
831
3-19-6 GLOBAL SUBROUTINE ENTRY: GSBN(751)

Purpose Indicates the beginning of the global subroutine program with the specified
subroutine number. Used in combination with GRET(752) to define a global
subroutine region.
only.
GSBN(751) is used in combination with GSBS(750) and GRET(752), the
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE CALL and GLOBAL SUBROUTINE RETURN
instructions.
Ladder Symbol
GSBN(751)
N: Global subroutine number
N
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition GSBN(751)

Not allowed Not allowed --- OK
Operands N: Global subroutine number

Specifies the global subroutine number between 0 and 1023 decimal.
Area N
CIO Area ---
Work Area ---
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
mal.
Description GSBN(751) indicates the beginning of the global subroutine with the specified
subroutine number. The end of the subroutine is indicated by GRET(752).
832
The region of the program beginning at the first GSBN(751) instruction is the
subroutine region. A subroutine is executed only when it has been called by
GSBS(750).
The global subroutine region (between GSBN(751) and GRET(752)) must be
defined in interrupt task 0. If it is defined in another task, an error will occur
and the Error Flag will be turned ON when the GSBS(750) instruction is exe-
cuted.
The GSBS(750) instruction can be written both cyclic tasks (including extra
cyclic tasks) and interrupt tasks.
GSBS
n
Interrupt task 0
GSBN
n
Global
subroutine
region
GRET
END
Precautions • When the subroutine is not being executed, the instructions are treated as
NOP(000).
• Place the global subroutine region (GSBN(751) to GRET(752)) in inter-
rupt task 0 just before the END(001) instruction. When two or more global
subroutines are being used, group them together in interrupt task 0 after
the end of the main program. If part of the main program is placed after
the global subroutine region, that program section will be ignored.
Interrupt task 1
GSBN
n Global
subroutine
region
GRET
This part of the
program will not
be executed.
END
833
• The input method for the global subroutine number, N, is different for the
CX-Programmer and a Programming Console. Input #0 to #1023 on the
CX-Programmer and 0000 to 1023 on a Programming Console.
• Always place the global subroutines in interrupt task 0. An error will occur
if a global subroutine is called and the subroutine is not in interrupt task 0.
Not allowed OK
Cyclic task 1 Cyclic task 1
GSBS GSBS
n n
END END
Cyclic task 2 Interrupt task 0
GSBN GSBN
n n
GRET GRET
END END
• The step instructions, STEP(008) and SNXT(009) cannot be used in glo-

bal subroutines.
GSBN
SNXT
Not allowed
STEP
GRET
834
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, global subroutine 10 is

executed and program execution returns to the next instruction after the
GSBS(750) instruction that called the subroutine.
000000
GSBS
#10
Interrupt task 0
GSBN
#10 Global subroutine
region
GRET
END
3-19-7 GLOBAL SUBROUTINE RETURN: GRET(752)

Purpose Indicates the end of a subroutine program. Used in combination with
GSBN(751) to define a subroutine region.
only.
GRET(752) is used in combination with GSBS(750) and GSBN(751), the
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE CALL and GLOBAL SUBROUTINE ENTRY instruc-
tions.
Ladder Symbol
GRET(752)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition GRET(752)

Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed OK
Description GRET(752) indicates the end of a global subroutine and GSBN(751) indicates
the beginning of a global subroutine. See 3-19-6 GLOBAL SUBROUTINE
ENTRY: GSBN(751) for more details on the operation of global subroutines.
When program execution reaches GRET(752) it is automatically returned to
the next instruction after the GSBS(750) instruction that called the global sub-
routine.
NOP(000).
Example See 3-19-6 GLOBAL SUBROUTINE ENTRY: GSBN(751) for examples of the
operation of GRET(752).
835
Interrupt Control Instructions Section 3-20
3-20 Interrupt Control Instructions

The CS/CJ-series CPU Units support the following interrupts. For details,
refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series Programmable Controllers Program-
ming Manual (W394).
Type Execution condition Setting procedure
I/O Interrupts Interrupt input from the Interrupt Use the MSKS instruction to assign
Input Unit on the CPU Rack inputs from Interrupt Input Units on
turns ON/OFF. the CPU Rack.
Scheduled Scheduled (fixed intervals) Use the MSKS instruction to set the
Interrupts interrupt interval. See Scheduled
Interrupt Time Units in PLC Setup.
Power OFF When power turns OFF (After See Power OFF Interrupt Task and
Interrupt the default power OFF detec- Power OFF Detection Delay Time in
tion time + power OFF detec- PLC Setup.
tion delay time)
External When requested by an Special None (always valid)
Interrupts I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit on the
CPU Rack or by an Inner Board
(CS Series only)
Outline of Interrupt Control Instructions

SET INTERRUPT MASK: Both I/O interrupt tasks and scheduled interrupt tasks are masked (disabled)
MSKS(690) when the PLC enters RUN mode. MSKS(690) can be used to unmask or
mask I/O interrupts and set the time intervals for scheduled interrupts.
Note The power OFF interrupt is set in the PLC Setup.
CLEAR INTERRUPT: CLI(691) clears or retains recorded interrupt inputs for I/O interrupts or sets
CLI(691) the time to the first scheduled interrupt for scheduled interrupts. It also clears
or retains recorded high-speed counter interrupts for CJ1M CPU Units.
READ INTERRUPT MASK: MSKR(692) reads the current interrupt processing settings that were set with
MSKR(692) MSKS(690).
DISABLE INTERRUPTS: DI(693) disables execution of all interrupt tasks except the power OFF inter-
DI(693) rupt.
ENABLE INTERRUPTS: EI(694) enables execution of all interrupt tasks except the power OFF inter-
EI(694) rupt.
Precautions in Using Interrupt Tasks

Precautions for All Interrupts
When IORF(097), FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R only), IORD(222), or IOWR(223) is
being executed within an interrupt task to refresh I/O in a Special I/O Unit,
cyclic refreshing with that Special I/O Unit must be disabled in the PLC Setup.
If cyclic refreshing with the Special I/O Unit is enabled in the PLC Setup and
one of the following operations occurs during an interrupt task, a non-fatal
Duplicate Refresh Error will occur and the Interrupt Task Error Flag (A40213)
will be turned ON.
• I/O refreshing is performed for the same Special I/O Unit by IORF(097) or
FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R only).
• The same Special I/O Unit’s data area is read by IORD(222) or written by
IOWR(223).
Be sure that the interrupt task does not require more than 10 ms if a C200H
Special I/O Unit or SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Rack is connected. If an
836
interrupt task longer than 10 ms is executed during I/O refreshing with the
Special I/O Unit or Slave Rack, a non-fatal will occur and the Interrupt Task
Error Flag (A40213) will be turned ON.
Interrupts have different priority levels. A power OFF interrupt is given the
highest priority, followed by I/O interrupts, external interrupts, and finally
scheduled interrupts. Lower numbered I/O interrupts are given priority over a
higher numbered I/O interrupts.
Precautions for I/O Interrupts
Only interrupt inputs from regular CS/CJ-series Interrupt Input Units and
C200H Interrupt Input Units are supported for interrupt tasks. Interrupt inputs
from Inner Boards and Special I/O Units are not supported.
Mount the Interrupt Input Unit in the CPU Rack. If a CJ1-H CPU Unit is being
used, mount the Unit in slots 0 to 4, and if a CJ1M CPU Unit is being used,
slots 0 to 2. It will not be possible to start the I/O interrupt task unless the
Interrupt Input Unit is mounted in one of these slots.
Words are allocated to Interrupt Input Units in the order that they are mounted
from left to right.
All interrupt inputs that have been detected will be cleared when the interrupt
mask is cleared.
The CS1W-INT01 and the C200HS-INT01 cannot be used at the same time.
There is no limit on the number of I/O interrupt inputs that can be recorded,
but only one interrupt is recorded for each I/O interrupt number. Furthermore,
the recorded interrupt is not cleared until its interrupt task has been com-
pleted, so a new interrupt input will be ignored if it is received while its inter-
rupt task is being executed.
Precautions for Scheduled Interrupts
Be sure that the time interval is longer than the time required to execute the
scheduled interrupt task.
For scheduled interrupts, MSKS(690) is used only to set the scheduled inter-
rupt interval and does not set the time to the first scheduled interrupt. To accu-
rately control the time to the first interrupt and the interrupt interval, program
CLI(691) to set the time to the first schedule interrupt just before programming
MSKS(690). If MSKS(690) is used to restart a schedule interrupt for a CJ1M
CPU Unit, however, the time to the first scheduled interrupt will be accurate
even if CLI(691) is not used.
The time unit for the scheduled interrupt is set in the PLC Setup as the Sched-
uled Interrupt Interval.
Related Memory Area

Maximum Interrupt A440 The maximum processing time for an interrupt
Task Processing task is stored in binary data in 0.1-ms units and is
Time cleared at the start of operation.
Interrupt Task with A441 The interrupt task number with maximum pro-
Maximum Process- cessing time is stored in binary data. Here, 8000
ing Time to 80FF Hex correspond to task numbers 00 to
FF Hex.
A44115 will turn ON when the first interrupt
occurs after the start of operation. The maximum
processing time for subsequent interrupt tasks
will be stored in the rightmost two digits in hexa-
decimal and will be cleared at the start of opera-
tion.
837

Interrupt Task Error A40213 ON in the following cases:
Flag 1) An interrupt task longer than 10 ms was exe-
cuted during I/O refreshing with a C200H Special
I/O Unit or Remote I/O Slave Rack. (CS Series
only)
2) Interrupt Task Error Detection is enabled in the
PLC Setup, and one of the following conditions
occurs for the same Special I/O Unit.
• There is a conflict between an IORF(097),
FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R only), IORD(222), or
IOWR(223) instruction executed in the inter-
rupt task and an IORF(097), FIORF(225) (CJ1-
H-R only), IORD(222), or IOWR(223) instruc-
tion executed in the cyclic task.
• There is a conflict between an IORF(097),
FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R only), IORD(222), or
IOWR(223) instruction executed in the inter-
rupt task and the CPU Unit’s I/O refreshing
(END refreshing).
Note When a Special I/O Unit’s Cyclic Refresh-
ing is enabled in the PLC Setup, and an
IORF(097), FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R only),
IORD(222), or IOWR(223) instruction is
executed for the same Special I/O Unit,
there will be duplicate refreshing and an
Interrupt Task Error will occur.
Interrupt Task Error A42615 Indicates whether Interrupt Task Error 1 or 2
Cause Flag occurred.
Interrupt Task Error A42600 to For error 1:
Task Number A42611 Indicates the interrupt task number.
For error 2:
Indicates the unit number of the Special I/O Unit
where the multiple I/O refreshing occurred.
Related PLC Setup

Settings Scheduled Interrupts
Name Description Settings
Scheduled Specifies the time unit to use to specify the sched- 0: 10 ms
Interrupt Inter- uled interrupt time. Set the time unit when executing (default)
val scheduled interrupts. 1: 1.0 ms
The scheduled interrupt time is set using 2: 0.1 ms
MSKS(690). (See note.)
Note CJ1-H-R and CJ1M CPU Units only.
Power OFF Interrupt
Name Description Settings
Power OFF If the Power OFF Interrupt Task setting is turned ON, 0: OFF,
Interrupt Task then a power OFF interrupt task will start if power 1: ON
turns OFF.
Power OFF Power OFF is recognized when this time plus the 0 to 10 ms (1-
Detection default power OFF detection time (10 to 25 ms for AC ms units)
Delay Time power supplies and 2 to 25 ms for DC power sup-
plies) expires.
838
3-20-1 SET INTERRUPT MASK: MSKS(690)

Purpose Controls whether I/O interrupt tasks and scheduled interrupt tasks are exe-
cuted. When the program execution starts, the interrupt inputs that generate
I/O interrupt tasks are masked (disabled), and the internal timers creating the
timer interrupts that generate scheduled interrupt tasks are stopped.
Use MSKS(690) to enable the I/O interrupts and timer interrupts, so that the
corresponding interrupt tasks can be executed.
Ladder Symbol
MSKS(690)
N N: Interrupt identifier
C C: Control data
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MSKS(690)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MSKS(690)

OK OK OK OK OK
839
Operands
■ Disabling/Enabling an I/O Interrupt Task’s Interrupt Input
Inputs to a CS1W-INT01/CJ1W-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit (16 inputs/Unit)
Operand Contents
N Specify the Interrupt Input Unit’s unit number.
0: Unit number 0 (interrupt tasks 100 to 115)
C Interrupt mask.
Set to 0000 to FFFF hex.
Bits 0 to 15 correspond to each interrupt task. Individual bit settings
are as follows:
0: Enable (unmask) the interrupt.
1: Disable (mask) the interrupt.
Inputs to a C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit (8 inputs/Unit)

Operand Contents
C Interrupt mask.
Set to 0000 to 00FF hex
are as follows:
0: Enable (unmasks) the interrupt.
1: Disable (masks) the interrupt.
Inputs to a CJ1M CPU Unit’s Built-in Inputs (4 inputs/Unit)

Operand Contents
N Specify the interrupt input number.
10: Interrupt input 0 (interrupt task 140)
C Interrupt mask.
0000 hex: Enable (unmask) the interrupt (direct mode).
0001 hex: Disable (mask) the interrupt (direct mode).
0002 hex: Start decrementing counter and enable interrupt (counter
mode).
0003 hex: Start incrementing counter and enable interrupt (counter
mode).
840
■ Specifying Up/Down Differentiation of an Interrupt Input

(CS1W-INT01, CJ1W-INT01, and CJ1M CPU Unit Built-in Inputs Only)
Operand Contents
C Specify either the rising or falling edge of the interrupt input signal.
Set to 0000 to FFFF hex. Bits 0 to 15 correspond to each interrupt
task. Individual bit settings are as follows:
0: Up-differentiation (Detect rising edge.)
1: Down-differentiation (Detect falling edge.)

Operand Contents
C Interrupt mask.
0000 hex: Up-differentiation (Detect rising edge.)
0001 hex: Down-differentiation (Detect falling edge.)
Note When the up/down differentiation setting is changed, all detected in-
terrupt inputs will be cleared.
■ Disabling/Enabling a Scheduled Interrupt Task’s Timer Interrupt

Operand Contents
N Specify the scheduled interrupt number.
4: Interrupt task 0 (interrupt task 2)
Note Only scheduled interrupt 0 can be used with the CJ1M-CPU11/21.
C Scheduled interrupt Scheduled interrupt set time
time units (Set in the
PLC Setup.)
Any time unit setting 0 decimal (0000 hex):
Disable interrupt. (Stop internal timer.)
10 ms 1 to 9,999 decimal (0001 to 270F hex):
Enable interrupt. (Start internal timer with inter-
rupt interval between 10 and 99,990 ms.)
rupt interval between 1 and 9,999 ms.)
0.1 ms CJ1M CPU Units
5 to 9,999 decimal (0005 to 270F hex):
rupt interval between 0.5 and 999.9 ms.)
Note Settings 0001 to 0004 cannot be used. An error
will occur if one of these settings is used.
CJ1-H-R CPU Units
2 to 9,999 decimal (0002 to 270F hex):
rupt interval between 0.2 and 999.9 ms.)
Note Setting 0001 cannot be used. An error will occur
if 0001 is set.
841
■ Resetting and Starting Scheduled Interrupts (CJ1M CPU Units Only)

Operand Contents
14: Scheduled interrupt 0 (interrupt task 2)
PLC Setup.)
Disable interrupt. (Stop internal timer.)
Enable interrupt. (Reset internal timer value, and
then start the timer with an interrupt interval
between 10 and 99,990 ms.)
then start timer with an interrupt interval
between 1 and 9,999 ms.)
0.1 ms 5 to 9,999 decimal (0005 to 270F hex):
then start timer with interrupt interval between
0.5 and 999.9 ms.)
Note Settings 0001 to 0004 cannot be used. An error
will occur if one of these settings is used.
Area N S
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM --- @ D00000 to @ 32767
addresses in binary @ E00000 to @ 32767
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Specified values only
842
Area N S
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047, IR0 to
–2048 to +2047, IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description MSKS(690) controls the execution of interrupt tasks. The value of N specifies
the interrupt task and the kind of processing that will be performed.
1. N = 0 to 3: Enabling/Disabling the Interrupt Inputs of I/O Interrupt Tasks
• Enables or disables the interrupt inputs specified by N, based on the sta-
tus of the bits in C. With this function, MSKS(690) can control whether or
not each task is executed.
• When an interrupt input is enabled, any interrupts detected up to that
point will be cleared.
2. N = 6 to 13: Specifying the Differentiation of Interrupt Inputs
• Specifies whether the interrupt inputs specified by N are up-differentiated
or down-differentiated, based on the status of the bits in C.
• Use the differentiation specification together with the enabling/disabling
function. If MSKS(690) is not executed to specify up or down differentia-
tion, the interrupt inputs are up-differentiated (the default setting).
• When MSKS(690) is executed to specify an interrupt input’s up or down
differentiation, any interrupts detected up to that point will be cleared.
3. N = 4 or 5: Specifying Timer Interrupts of Scheduled Interrupt Tasks
• Sets the time interval (specified by C) for the specified scheduled interrupt
task (specified by N) and starts the internal timer. The internal timer can
also be stopped by setting C to 0. With this function, MSKS(690) can con-
trol whether or not each scheduled task is executed.
• When MSKS(690) is used to restart the internal timer, the time from the
execution of MSKS(690) to the start of the first scheduled interrupt task is
uncertain, because the existing internal timer PV is used.
• When you want to specify the interrupt start time, use CLI(691) together
with MSKS(690).
4. N = 14 or 15: Resetting and Restarting Scheduled Interrupt Tasks
• Sets the time interval (specified by C) for the specified scheduled interrupt
task (specified by N), resets the internal timer’s PV, and starts the internal
timer. Since the internal timer’s PV is reset, this function maintains the
proper interval from the execution of MSKS(690) until the start of the first
interrupt (CJ1M CPU Units only).
Note 1. The CJ1M-CPU11/21 supports only one scheduled interrupt task, interrupt
task 2 for scheduled interrupt 0.
2. The time unit used to set the scheduled interrupt time is set as the Sched-
ule Interrupt Interval in the PLC Setup.
Precautions 1. Be sure that the time interval is longer than the time required to execute
the scheduled interrupt task.
2. For scheduled interrupts, MSKS(690) is used only to set the scheduled in-
terrupt interval and does not set the time to the first scheduled interrupt. To
accurately control the time to the first interrupt and the interrupt interval,
843
program CLI(691) to set the time to the first schedule interrupt just before
programming MSKS(690). If MSKS(690) is used to restart a schedule in-
terrupt for a CJ1M CPU Unit, however, the time to the first scheduled inter-
rupt will be accurate even if CLI(691) is not used.
3. The longest interrupt task processing time is stored in A440 (Maximum In-
terrupt Task Processing Time). At the same time, the task number of the
interrupt task with the longest interrupt task processing time is stored in
A441 (Interrupt Task with Maximum Processing Time).
Related PLC Setup Scheduled Interrupts

Settings Name Description Settings
Scheduled Inter- Specifies the time unit to use to spec- 0:10 ms (default)
rupt Interval ify the scheduled interrupt time. Set 1: 1.0 ms
the time unit when executing sched-
uled interrupts. 2: 0.1 ms
The scheduled interrupt time is set (CJ1M and CJ1-H-R CPU
using MSKS(690). Units only)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the specified range of 0 to 5 (0 to 15 for
the CJ1M CPU Unit’s built-in interrupt inputs).
Errors when specifying I/O Interrupts:
• When using C200HS-INT01 interrupt inputs, the Error Flag
will go ON if C is not between 0000 and 00FF hex.
• When using the CJ1M CPU Unit’s built-in interrupt inputs,
the Error Flag will go ON if C is not between 0 and 3.
Errors when specifying Scheduled Interrupts:
• When the time units are set to 10 ms or 1 ms, the Error Flag
will go ON if C is not between 0 and 9,999 decimal (0000 to
270F hex).
• When using a CJ1M CPU Unit with the time units set to 0.1
ms, the Error Flag will go ON if C is not between 5 and
9,999 decimal (0005 to 270F hex).
• When using a CJ1-H-R CPU Unit with the time units set to
0.1 ms, the Error Flag will go ON if C is not between 2 and
9,999 decimal (0002 to 270F hex).
Equals Flag = OFF
Negative N OFF
Flag
844
Related Auxiliary Area

Flags and Words Name Address Operation
Interrupt Task A40213 ON in the following cases:
Error Flag 1. An interrupt task longer than 10 ms was executed dur-
ing I/O refreshing with a C200H Special
I/O Unit or Remote I/O Slave Rack. (CS Series only)
2. If Interrupt Task Error Detection is enabled in the PLC
Setup, the Interrupt Task Error Flag will turn ON if the
following conditions occur for the same Special I/O
Unit.
• There is a conflict between an IORF, FIORF (CJ1-
H-R only), IORD, or IOWR instruction executed in
the interrupt task and an IORF, FIORF (CJ1-H-R
only), IORD, or IOWR instruction executed in the
cyclic task.
• There is a conflict between an IORF, FIORF (CJ1-
H-R only), IORD, or IOWR instruction executed in
the interrupt task and the CPU Unit’s I/O refreshing
(END refreshing).
Note When Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing is enabled in the
PLC Setup, and an IORF, FIORF (CJ1-H-R only), IORD, or
IOWR instruction is executed for the same Special I/O Unit,
there will be duplicate refreshing and an Interrupt Task
Error will occur.
Interrupt Task A42600 Indicates the unit number of the Special I/O Unit where
Error Task to the simultaneous duplicate I/O refreshing occurred.
Number A42611
Operation Examples Examples for CS1W-INT01/CJ1W-INT01

When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, MSKS(690) unmasks
(enables) interrupt inputs in Interrupt Input Unit 0.
000000
MSKS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D00100 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
N 0
S D00100
3 F 2 7
0: Enabled
1: Masked
When CIO 000001 turns ON in the following example, MSKS(690) sets the
rising/falling edge designations for Interrupt Input Unit 0.
000001
MSKS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D00101 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
N 2
S D00101
0 5 0 2
0: Rising edge
1: Falling edge
Example for Scheduled Interrupts

1. When W00000 goes from OFF to ON in the following example, MSKS(690)
sets a 15-second time interval for scheduled interrupt 0, and starts the in-
ternal timer. (In this case, the scheduled time interval units are set to 1 ms.)
2. When W00001 goes from OFF to ON, the internal timer is stopped for
scheduled interrupt 0, which stops the generation of timer interrupts.
845
W00000
@MSKS
N 4
C & 15
W00001
@MSKS
N 4
C &0
Scheduled interrupt task number 2
Cyclic task 15 ms 15 ms 15 ms
2. Execution of MSKS(690)
1. Execution of MSKS(690)
(Interrupt stopped)
(Interrupt enabled, 15 ms)
15 ms
3-20-2 READ INTERRUPT MASK: MSKR(692)

Purpose Reads the current interrupt control settings that were set with MSKS(690).
Ladder Symbol
MSKR(692)
N N: Interrupt number
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MSKR(692)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MSKR(692)

OK OK OK OK OK
846
Operands
■ Reading the Interrupt Mask Settings Set for I/O Interrupt Tasks
Operand Contents
D Range: 0000 to FFFF hex
Bits 0 to 15 correspond to each interrupt task. The meaning of the
individual flags is as follows:
0: Interrupt enabled (unmasked).
1: Interrupt disabled (masked).

Operand Contents
D Range: 0000 to 00FF hex
0: Interrupt enabled (unmasked).
1: Interrupt disabled (masked).

Operand Contents
D 0000 hex: Interrupts enabled (unmasked) in direct mode.
0001 hex: Interrupts disabled (masked) in direct mode.
0002 hex: Interrupts enabled for decrementing counter in counter
mode.
0003 hex: Interrupts enabled for incrementing counter in counter
mode.
847
■ Reading the Up/Down Differentiation Settings of I/O Interrupt Tasks

(CS1W-INT01, CJ1W-INT01, and CJ1M CPU Unit Built-in Inputs Only)
Operand Contents
D Range: 0000 to FFFF hex.
0: Up-differentiation (Detect rising edge.)
1: Down-differentiation (Detect falling edge.)

Operand Contents
D 0000 hex: Up-differentiation (Detect rising edge.)
0001 hex: Down-differentiation (Detect falling edge.)
■ Reading the Set Value of a Scheduled Interrupt Task’s Internal Timer

Operand Contents
PLC Setup.)
Interrupt disabled. (Internal timer stopped.)
Interrupt enabled. (Internal timer started with
interrupt interval between 10 and 99,990 ms.)
interrupt interval between 1 and 9,999 ms.)
interrupt interval between 0.1 and 999.9 ms.)
■ Reading the Present Value of a Scheduled Interrupt Task’s Internal Timer

(CJ1M CPU Units Only)
Operand Contents
848
Operand Contents
C Scheduled interrupt Internal timer PV
PLC Setup.)
Interrupt timer PV between 0 and 99,990 ms
Interrupt timer PV between 1 and 9,999 ms.
Interrupt timer PV between 0.0 and 999.9 ms.)
Area N D
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047, IR0 to
–2048 to +2047, IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description MSKR(692) reads the interrupt task settings that were set with MSKS(690).
The value of N specifies the interrupt task and the kind of information that will
be read.
1. N = 0 to 3: Reading the Interrupt Mask Status of I/O Interrupt Tasks
Reads the masked/unmasked status of the interrupt inputs specified by N,
and outputs that information to the bits in D.
2. N = 6 to 13: Reading the Up/Down Differentiation of Interrupt Inputs
Reads the up/down differentiation settings of the interrupt inputs specified
by N, and outputs that information to the bits in D.
3. N = 4 or 5: Reading a Scheduled Interrupt Task’s Time Interval
849
Reads the operating status of the internal timer of the scheduled interrupt
task specified by N, and outputs that information to D. With this function,
MSKR(692) can indicate whether the internal timer is stopped or operat-
ing, and indicate the interrupt time interval if it is operating.
4. N = 14 or 15: Reading a Scheduled Interrupt Task’s Internal Timer PV
Reads the internal timer PV of the scheduled interrupt task specified by N,
and outputs that information to D. The internal timer’s PV is the time that
has elapsed since the scheduled interrupt started (when MSKS(690) was
executed), or the time that has elapsed since the last scheduled interrupt
started (CJ1M CPU Units only).
2. The time unit used to set the scheduled interrupt time is set as the Sched-
ule Interrupt Interval in the PLC Setup.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the specified range of 0 to 5 (0 to 15
for the CJ1M).
Precautions MSKR(692) can be executed in the main program or in interrupt tasks.
Operation Examples Example for CS1W-INT01/CJ1W-INT01

When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, MSKR(692) reads the
current mask status of Interrupt Input Unit 2 and stores it in D00100.
000000
MSKR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D00100 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
N 0
D D00100
F 5 F 2
0: Interrupt enabled
1: Interrupt masked
When CIO 000001 turns ON in the following example, MSKS(690) reads the
rising/falling edge designations for Interrupt Input Unit 0 and stores it in
D00101.
000001
MSKR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D00101 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
N 2
D D00101
0 3 1 9
0: Rising edge
1: Falling edge
Example for Scheduled Interrupts

When W00000 goes from OFF to ON while the internal timer is operating for
scheduled interrupt 1, MSKR(692) reads the interrupt time interval setting and
outputs the setting to D00100.
850
W00000
@MSKR
N 5
D D00100
Scheduled interrupt task number 3
Cyclic task 24 ms 24 ms 24 ms 12 ms 12 ms
Execution of MSKS Execution of MSKR Execution of MSKS Execution of MSKR

(Interrupt enabled, 24 ms) (Reads 24.) (Interrupt enabled, 12 ms) (Reads 12.)
24 ms
3-20-3 CLEAR INTERRUPT: CLI(691)

Purpose Clears/retains recorded interrupt inputs, sets the time to the first scheduled
interrupt for scheduled interrupt tasks, or clears/retains recorded high speed
counter interrupts (CJ1M CPU Units only).
Ladder Symbol
CLI(691)
N N: Interrupt number
C C: Control data
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CLI(691)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @CLI(691)

OK OK OK OK OK
851
Operands
■ Clearing/Retaining an I/O Interrupt Task’s Recorded Interrupt Inputs
Operand Contents
C Set to 0000 to FFFF hex.
are as follows:
0: Retain the recorded interrupt.
1: Clear the recorded interrupt.

Operand Contents
C Set to 0000 to 00FF hex
are as follows:
0: Retain the recorded interrupt.
1: Clear the recorded interrupt.

Operand Contents
C 0000 hex: Retain the recorded interrupt.
0001 hex: Clear the recorded interrupt.
■ Setting the TIme to the First Scheduled Interrupts

Operand Contents
Note Only scheduled interrupt 0 can be used with the CJ1M-
CPU11/21.
PLC Setup.)
Sets time to first interrupt between 10 and
99,990 ms.
Sets time to first interrupt between 1 and
9,999 ms.)
Sets time to first interrupt between 0.1 and
999.9 ms.)
852
■ Clearing/Retaining High-speed Counter Interrupts (CJ1M Only)

Operand Contents
N Specify the high-speed counter input.
10: High-speed counter input 0 (interrupt task 2)
11: High-speed counter input 1 (interrupt task 3)
C 0000 hex: Retain the recorded interrupt.
0001 hex: Clear the recorded interrupt.
Area N C
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- DR0 to DR15
Data Registers Specified values only
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047, IR0 to –
2048 to +2047, IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description Depending on the value of N, CLI(691) clears the specified recorded I/O inter-
rupts, sets the time before execution of the first scheduled interrupt, or clears
the specified recorded high-speed counter interrupts (CJM1 CPU Units only).
With the CJ1M, it can also be used to clear interrupts for the high-speed
counters.
N = 0 to 3, or 6 to 9: Clearing Interrupt Inputs
CLI(691) clears a recorded interrupt input specified by N, when the corre-
853
sponding bit of C is ON and retains the recorded interrupt input when the cor-
responding bit is OFF.
Interrupt
Interrupt input n input n
Internal
Internal status status
Recorded interrupt cleared Recorded interrupt retained
If an I/O interrupt task is being executed and an interrupt input with a different
interrupt number is received, that interrupt number is recorded internally. The
recorded I/O interrupts are executed later in order of their priority (from the
lowest number to the highest).
If you want to ignore interrupt inputs that are received while an interrupt task is
being executed, use CLI(691) to clear the recorded interrupts before they are
executed.
N = 4 or 5: Setting the Time to the First Scheduled Interrupt Task
When N is 4 or 5, the content of C specifies the time interval to the first sched-
uled interrupt task.
MSKS(690)
Execution of scheduled
interrupt task.
Time to first
scheduled interrupt
2. The time unit for the scheduled interrupt tasks is set in the PLC Setup as
the Scheduled Interrupt Interval.
■ N = 10 or 11: Clearing High-speed Counter Interrupts (CJ1M Only)
When N is 10 or 11, CLI(691) clears or retains the recorded high-speed
counter interrupt (either target or range comparison) specified by N.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the specified range of 0 to 5 (0, 1, or
4 to 11 for CJ1M).
ON if C is not within the specified range of 0000 to 00FF
hex when N is 0 to 3 (for I/O interrupts and C200HS-INT
only).
ON if C is not 0000 or 0001 hex (for high-speed counter
interrupts and CJ1M built-in interrupt inputs only).
ON if C is not within the specified range of 0 to 9,999 dec-
imal (0000 to 270F hex) for scheduled interrupts.
Interrupts have different priority levels. A power OFF interrupt is given the
highest priority, followed by I/O interrupts, external interrupts, and finally
scheduled interrupts. Lower numbered I/O interrupts are given priority over a
higher numbered I/O interrupts.
Operation Examples Example for CS1W-INT01/CJ1W-INT01

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, CLI(691) clears the
recorded interrupts for the specified interrupt inputs in Interrupt Input Unit 0.
854
000000
CL1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D00100 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
N 0
S D00100
F 5 F 2
0: Recorded interrupt input retained

1: Recorded interrupt input cleared
Setting the Time to the First Scheduled Interrupt

1. When W00000 goes from OFF to ON, CLI(691) sets the time to the first
execution of scheduled interrupt 0 to 24 ms. (In this case, the scheduled
time interval units are set to 1 ms in the PLC Setup.)
2. When W00001 goes from OFF to ON, CLI(691) sets the time to the first
execution of scheduled interrupt 0 to 12 ms, and starts the internal timer.
(In this case, the scheduled time interval units are set to 1 ms in the PLC
Setup.)
W00000
@CLI
N 4
C &24
W00001
@MSKS
N 4
C &12
Scheduled interrupt task 2
12 ms 12 ms
Cyclic task
1. Execution of CLI(691) 2. Execution of CLI(691)

(Sets 24 ms to first task.) (Enables interrupt and sets 12 ms.)
24 ms
3-20-4 DISABLE INTERRUPTS: DI(693)

Purpose Disables execution of all interrupt tasks except the power OFF interrupt.
When a CS1D CPU Unit for Single-CPU System or a CS1-H, CJ1-H, or CJ1M
CPU Unit is being used and the power OFF interrupt task is disabled, it is pos-
sible to disable power OFF interrupt processing simultaneously.
Ladder Symbol
DI(693)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DI(693)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DI(693)
855

OK OK OK Not allowed
Description DI(693) is executed from the main program to temporarily disable all interrupt
tasks except the power OFF interrupt (I/O interrupts, scheduled interrupts,
and external interrupts).
All interrupt tasks will be disabled until they are enabled again by execution of
EI(694).
CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units and Power OFF Interrupts
When a CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Unit is being used, power OFF inter-
rupt processing can be disabled simultaneously when A503 (the Disable Set-
ting for Power OFF Interrupts) is set to A5A5 hex. Even if a power interruption
is detected after DI(693) has been executed, the CPU Unit will be reset after
the program’s instructions have been executed in order up to EI(694) or the
END(001) instruction in the last task.
If the power OFF interrupt task is enabled, the CPU Unit will be reset after
execution of the power OFF interrupt task. For details, refer to information on
the power OFF interrupt task in the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if DI(693) is executed from an interrupt task.
Related Flags and Words The following word is in the Auxiliary Area.
Name Address Contents
Disable Setting for Power A530 A5A5 hex:
OFF Interrupts Enables the Disable Setting for Power
OFF Interrupts. Power OFF processing
(excluding execution of the Power OFF
interrupt task) is masked between the
DI(694) and EI(694) instructions, so
instructions up to EI(694) are exe-
cuted.
Precautions All interrupt tasks will remain disabled until EI(694) is executed.
DI(693) cannot be executed from an interrupt task.
DI(693) cannot be executed for more than one cyclic task. To disable more
than one cycle execution task, insert DI(693) in each cyclic task. Any inter-
rupts that occur while one cycle execution task is being executed will be exe-
cuted after the cycle execution task has been completed unless they are
disabled by CLI(691) as shown in the following example.
When using DI(693) to disable Power OFF Interrupt Processing in a CS1-H,
CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Unit, it is possible to disable the processing through
the cyclic tasks. (The disabled condition is released after the completion of all
tasks that were started.)
856
Task No. 0
DI
DI instruction is valid.
END
Interrupt tasks are executed under

Task No. 1 registered conditions.
DI
DI instruction is valid.
END
CPU Unit is being used, the power OFF interrupt task is disabled, and A530 is
set to A5A5 hex, the CPU Unit will be reset after execution of EI(694) in the
event that a power interruption is detected during execution of the instructions
between DI(693) and EI(694).
Task No. 0
DI
END
The mask on power
OFF interrupt
processing is enabled.
Task No. 1
EI
END
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, DI(693) disables all inter-
rupt tasks other than the power OFF interrupt task.
000000 With CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU
Systems or CS1-H, CJ1-H, or CJ1M
CPU Units:
Power OFF interrupt processing can be
disabled at the same time if the power
OFF interrupt task is disabled.
Disables execution of all interrupt tasks
(except the power OFF interrupt).
857
3-20-5 ENABLE INTERRUPTS: EI(694)

Purpose Enables execution of all interrupt tasks that were disabled with DI(693).
CPU Unit is being used and the power OFF interrupt task is disabled, EI(694)
simultaneously releases the disabled power OFF interrupt processing.
Ladder Symbol
EI(694)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for Normally ON EI(694)
Condition

Description EI(694) is executed from the main program to temporarily enable all interrupt
tasks that were disabled by DI(693). DI(693) disables all interrupts except the
power OFF interrupt (I/O interrupts, scheduled interrupts, and external inter-
rupts).
CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units and Power OFF Interrupts
When a CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Unit is being used and power OFF
interrupt processing has been disabled with DI(693), EI(694) will also release
the hold on power OFF interrupt processing. After DI(593) has been executed,
the CPU Unit will not be reset even if a power interruption is detected. The
CPU Unit will be reset after all of the instruction s between DI(693) and
EI(694) have been executed. Refer to 3-20-4 DISABLE INTERRUPTS:
DI(693) for details on using DI(693) to disable power OFF interrupt process-
ing.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if EI(694) is executed from an interrupt task.
Related Flags and Words The following word is in the Auxiliary Area.
Disable Setting for Power A530 A5A5 hex:
OFF Interrupts Enables the Disable Setting for Power
OFF Interrupts. Power OFF processing
(excluding execution of the Power OFF
interrupt task) is masked between the
DI(694) and EI(694) instructions, so
instructions up to EI(694) are exe-
cuted.
Any other value:
Disables the Power OFF Processing
mask.
858
Precautions EI(694) does not require an execution condition. It is always executed with an
ON execution condition. EI(694) enables the interrupt tasks that were disabled
by DI(693).
It cannot unmask I/O interrupts that have not been unmasked by MSKS(690)
or set scheduled interrupts that have not been set by MSKS(690).
EI(694) cannot be executed in an interrupt task.
Examples In the following example, EI(694) enables all interrupt tasks that were disabled
by DI(693).
Disables execution of all interrupt tasks

(except the power OFF interrupt).
000000
Enables execution of all disabled

interrupt tasks.
Note When the power OFF interrupt task is disabled for a CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M
CPU Unit, or CS1D CPU Unit for Single-CPU System, power OFF processing
will also be enabled at the same time.
Task No. 0
DI
All interrupt
tasks disabled.
END
Power OFF
processing
Task No. 1 disabled.
EI
END
3-20-6 Summary of Interrupt Control

The interrupt control instructions control or read settings for I/O interrupts and
scheduled interrupts. (DI(693) and EI(694) control the operation of external
interrupts as well as I/O interrupts and scheduled interrupts.)
859
The instructions that act on individual interrupts have an operand, N, that

identifies the source of the interrupt. Numbers 0 to 3 indicate Interrupt Input
Units 0 to 3 and numbers 4 and 5 indicate scheduled interrupts 2 and 3.
I/O Interrupt Processing (N=0 to 3)

An I/O interrupt is caused by an input signal from an Interrupt Input Unit. Up to
four Interrupt Input Units can be connected to the PLC. Unit numbers 0 to 3
are assigned to the Units based on their position in the PLC from left to right.
The following program example demonstrates the operation of MSKS(690)
and CLI(691) when they are used to control I/O interrupts.
Operation of MSKS(690) Both I/O interrupt tasks and scheduled interrupt tasks are masked (disabled)
when the PLC is first turned on. MSKS(690) can be used to unmask or mask
I/O interrupts and set the time intervals for scheduled interrupts.
In this example, MSKS(690) uses the contents of D00100 to unmask interrupt
inputs 0 to 3 and mask interrupt inputs 4 to 7 from Interrupt Input Unit 0.
F 0
Interrupt inputs from Unit 0
Interrupt mask settings
1=Mask (Disable) 0=Unmask (Enable)
When interrupt input 3 goes from OFF to ON, execution of the main program
will be interrupted and I/O interrupt task 3 (interrupt task 103) will be exe-
cuted. Execution of the main program execution is resumed at the point of
interruption after I/O interrupt task 3 has been completed.
I/O Interrupt Task When two or more interrupt inputs are received simultaneously, the interrupts
Priority Levels will be executed in order of their interrupt numbers from lowest to highest (100
to 131).
Unit Interrupt tasks
Interrupt Input Unit 0 Inputs 0 to 7 correspond to I/O interrupt tasks 100 to 107.
When more interrupt inputs are received while an interrupt task is being exe-
cuted, the recorded interrupts will be executed in order of their priority after
the current interrupt task is completed.
If a scheduled interrupt occurs, the scheduled interrupt task will take priority
over the I/O interrupt tasks.
860
Operation of CLI(691) If an interrupt input is received while a different I/O interrupt task is being exe-
cuted, the input’s interrupt number is recorded internally until the current task
and any higher priority tasks have been completed. CLI(691) can be used to
clear recorded interrupts before they are executed, but cannot clear interrupt
tasks that are being executed.
In this example, CLI(691) uses the contents of D00101 to clear all of the
recorded interrupt inputs from Interrupt Input Unit 0 except inputs 0, 2, and 3.
F 2
Interrupt inputs from Unit 0
Interrupt clear/retain settings
1=Clear recorded input 0=Retain recorded input
After completion of interrupt task 3, recorded interrupts are executed in order

of their priority. Since an input from interrupt input 0 was recorded, I/O inter-
rupt task 0 (interrupt task 100) will be executed when task 3 is completed.
Interrupt input 1 is not retained by CLI(691), so that input is cleared.
Interrupt input 1 is cleared by CLI(691).
Interrupt input 0
Already recorded, so
Interrupt input 1 later input is ignored.
Interrupt input 2
Recorded interrupts
I/O Interrupt task

Task 3 Task 0 Task 3
CLI(691) is executed. Interrupt inputs 0 and 3

are retained and input 1 is cleared.
If interrupt inputs 0 through 3 all go ON and CLI(691) is not executed, all of the
inputs will be recorded and the interrupt tasks will be executed in order after
interrupt task 3 is completed. (The interrupt tasks are executed in order of
their priority, from the lowest interrupt number to the highest.)
Interrupt task 3
Interrupt task 0
Interrupt task 1
Interrupt task 2
Interrupt task 3
Note 1. It is not always necessary to use CLI(691).

2. When CLI(691) is not executed, all of the I/O interrupt inputs received dur-
ing the execution of an interrupt task will be recorded. If a recorded input
is received again, the later input will be ignored.
3. When two or more I/O interrupt inputs are recorded, they are executed in
order of their priority. The order in which the recorded inputs were received
is irrelevant.
861
Scheduled Interrupt Processing (N=4 or 5)

A scheduled interrupt is repeated at regular intervals set with MSKS(690) and
independent of the timing of the PLC cycle. N numbers 4 and 5 correspond to
scheduled interrupt numbers 2 and 3, respectively.
Scheduled Interrupt The main features of scheduled interrupt processing are listed below.
Processing
1,2,3... 1. The scheduled interrupts are masked (disabled) when the PLC is first
turned on.
2. Set the time to the first scheduled interrupt (after execution of MSKS(690))
with CLI(691). The time to the first scheduled interrupt is unpredictable if it
is not set with CLI(691).
3. The scheduled time interval setting and interrupt processing
• Set the scheduled time interval with MSKS(690).
• After MSKS(690) has been executed and the time to the first sched-
uled interrupt (set with CLI(691)) has passed, the task currently being
processed will be interrupted and the scheduled interrupt task will be
executed.
• When the scheduled interrupt task execution reaches an END(001) in-
struction, program execution will resume at the point where the sched-
uled interrupt occurred.
• Program execution will be interrupted and the scheduled interrupt task
will be executed again when the scheduled time interval has passed.
The scheduled interrupt task will be executed repeatedly until it is dis-
abled.
4. Disabling a Scheduled Interrupt
• A scheduled interrupt task can be disabled by setting the scheduled
time interval to 0000 with MSKS(690).
• When enabling the scheduled interrupt task again, be sure to set the
time to the first scheduled interrupt with CLI(691) before setting the
scheduled time interval again with MSKS(690).
Scheduled Interrupt In the following example, the scheduled time interval units are set to 10 ms in
Operation the PLC Setup.
862
1-cycle
ON Flag
at startup
1,2,3... 1. The time to the first scheduled interrupt is set to 20 ms with CLI(691).
2. The scheduled time interval is set to 100 ms and execution of scheduled
interrupt 2 is enabled with MSKS(690).
3. Scheduled interrupt 2 is executed 20 ms after execution of MSKS(690) and
every 100 ms thereafter.
4. After scheduled interrupt processing has begun, the time to the next
scheduled interrupt can be changed with CLI(690), but this setting is effec-
tive only one time.
5. After scheduled interrupt processing has begun, the scheduled time inter-
val can be changed by executing MSKS(690). In this case, the time interval
is changed from 100 ms to 200 ms.
6. Scheduled interrupt processing is disabled by executing MSKS(690) with
a time interval of 0000.
The following timing chart shows the operation of the example listed above.
1, 2 4 5 6
Main program
execution
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Scheduled interrupt
task execution
20 ms 100 ms 100 ms 50 ms 100 ms100 ms 200 ms
Precautions Be sure that the scheduled time interval is longer than the time required to
execute the scheduled interrupt task. If the scheduled time interval is too
short, the interrupt task will be executed continuously and a Cycle Time Too
Long Error will occur. (A long scheduled interrupt task can seriously affect the
main program’s overall execution time.)
The scheduled interrupt is executed after the specified time interval plus the
execution time for one instruction. Normally the time required to execute one
instruction is negligible, but it can cause errors when instructions that take a
863
High-speed Counter/Pulse Output Instructions Section 3-21
long time are being used; it can also cause errors in timers (TIM and TIMH)
and data tracing. Be particularly careful when the scheduled time interval
units are set to 0.5 ms or 1 ms in the PLC Setup.
Interrupts are accepted even while one instruction is being executed. There-
fore, if an interrupt is accepted while an instruction requiring a long processing
time is being executed, correct processing results may not be obtained
because both the interrupt task and the instruction may access the same
data. In such a case, use DI(693) and EI(694) to disable and enable the inter-
rupt.
Interrupt task
Interrupt
during
execution
Interrupts
disabled
3-21 High-speed Counter/Pulse Output Instructions

This section describes instructions used to control the high-speed counters
and pulse outputs.
Instruction Mnemonic Function Page
code
MODE CONTROL INI 880 864
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER PV READ PRV 881 868
COUNTER FREQUENCY CONVERT PRV2 881 874
REGISTER COMPARISON TABLE CTBL 882 878
SPEED OUTPUT SPED 885 882
SET PULSES PULS 886 887
PULSE OUTPUT PLS2 887 890
ACCELERATION CONTROL ACC 888 896
ORIGIN SEARCH ORG 889 903
PULSE WITH VARIABLE DUTY FACTOR PWM 891 906
3-21-1 MODE CONTROL: INI(880) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only)

Purpose INI(880) can be used to execute the following operations for built-in I/O of
CJ1M CPU Units:
• To start comparison with the high-speed counter comparison table
• To stop comparison with the high-speed counter comparison table
• To change the PV of the high-speed counter.
• To change the PV of interrupt inputs in counter mode.
864
• To change the PV of the pulse output (origin fixed at 0).

• To stop pulse output.
This instruction is supported by CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 CPU Units only.
Ladder Symbol
INI(880)
P
C P: Port specifier
C: Control data
NV NV: First word with new PV
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition INI(880)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @INI(880)

OK OK OK OK
Operands P: Port Specifier

P specifies the port to which the operation applies.
P Port
0000 hex Pulse output 0
0010 hex High-speed counter 0
0100 hex Interrupt input 0 in counter mode
1000 hex PWM(891) output 0
C: Control Data
The function of INI(880) is determined by the control data, C.
C INI(880) function
0000 hex Starts comparison.
0001 hex Stops comparison.
0002 hex Changes the PV.
0003 hex Stops pulse output.
NV: First Word with New PV

NV and NV+1 contain the new PV when changing the PV.
If C is 0002 hex (i.e., when changing a PV), NV and NV+1 contain the new PV.
Any values in NV and NV+1 are ignored when C is not 0002 hex.
865
15 0
S Lower word of new PV
S+1 Upper word of new PV
For Pulse Output or High-speed Counter Input:

0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex
For Interrupt Input in Counter Mode:

0000 0000 to 0000 FFFF hex
Area P C NV
CIO Area --- --- CIO 0000 to CIO 6142
Work Area --- --- W000 to W510
Holding Bit Area --- --- H000 to H510
Auxiliary Bit Area --- --- A448 to A958
Timer Area --- --- T0000 to T4094
DM Area --- --- D00000 to D32766
EM Area without bank --- --- ---
EM Area with bank --- --- ---
Indirect DM/EM --- --- @ D00000 to @ D32767
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM --- --- *D00000 to *D32767
addresses in BCD
Constants See descrip- See descrip- ---
tion of oper- tion of oper-
and. and.
Data Registers --- --- ---
Index Registers --- --- ---
Indirect addressing --- --- ,IR0 to ,IR15
–2048 to +2047 ,IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to
IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description INI(880) performs the operation specified in C for the port specified in P. The
possible combinations of operations and ports are shown in the following
table.
P: Port specifier C: Control data
0000 hex: 0001 hex: 0002 hex: 0003 hex:
Start Stop Change PV Stop pulse
comparison comparison output
0000 or 0001 hex: Not allowed. Not allowed. OK OK
Pulse output
0010 or 0011 hex: OK OK OK Not allowed.
High-speed counter
input
0100, 0101, 0102, or Not allowed. Not allowed. OK Not allowed.
0103 hex: Interrupt
input in counter mode
1000 or 1001 hex: Not allowed. Not allowed. Not allowed. OK
PWM (891) output
866
■ Starting Comparison (C = 0000 hex)

If C is 0000 hex, INI(880) starts comparison of a high-speed counter’s PV to
the comparison table registered with CTBL(882).
Note A target value comparison table must be registered in advance with
CTBL(882). If INI(880) is executed without registering a table, the Error Flag
will turn ON.
■ Stopping Comparison (C = 0001 hex)

If C is 0001 hex, INI(880) stops comparison of a high-speed counter’s PV to
the comparison table registered with CTBL(882).
■ Changing a PV (C = 0002 hex)

If C is 0002 hex, INI(880) changes a PV as shown in the following table.
Port and mode Operation Setting range
Pulse output (P = 0000 or 0001 The present value of the 8000 0000 to 7FFF
hex) pulse output is changed. FFFF hex
The new value is speci- (-2,147,483,648 to
fied in NV and NV+1. 2,147,483,647)
Note: This instruction
can be executed only
when pulse output is
stopped. An error will
occur if it is executed
during pulse output.
High- Linear DifferentialThe present value of the 8000 0000 to 7FFF
speed Mode inputs, high-speed counter is FFFF hex
counter increment/ changed. The new value (-2,147,483,648 to
input (P = decrement is specified in NV and 2,147,483,647)
0010 or pulses, or NV+1.
0011 pulse + Note: An error will occur
hex) direction for the instruction if the
inputs specified port is not set
Increment for a high-speed 0000 0000 to FFFF
pulse input counter. FFFF hex
(0 to 4,294,967,295)
Ring Mode 0000 0000 to FFFF
FFFF hex
(0 to 4,294,967,295)
Interrupt inputs in counter The present value of the 0000 0000 to 0000
mode (P = 0100, 0101, 0102, interrupt input is FFFF hex
or 0103 hex) changed. The new value (0 to 65,535)
is specified in NV and Note: An error will occur
NV+1. if a value outside this
range is specified.
■ Stopping Pulse Output (P = 1000 or 1001 hex and C = 0003 hex)

If C is 0003 hex, INI(880) immediately stops pulse output for the specified
port. If this instruction is executed when pulse output is already stopped, then
the pulse amount setting will be cleared.
867
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified range for P, C, or NV is exceeded.
ON if the combination of P and C is not allowed.
ON if a comparison table has not been registered but
starting comparison is specified.
ON if a new PV is specified for a port that is currently out-
putting pulses.
ON if changing the PV of a high-speed counter is speci-
fied for a port that is not specified for a high-speed
counter.
ON if a value that is out of range is specified as the PV for
an interrupt input in counter mode.
ON if INI(880) is executed in an interrupt task for a high-
speed counter and an interrupt occurs when CTBL(882)
is executed.
ON if executed for a port not set for an interrupt input in
counter mode.
Example When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, SPED(885) starts out-
putting pulses from pulse output 0 in Continuous Mode at 500 Hz. When CIO
000001 turns ON, pulse output is stopped by INI(880).
000000
@SPED D00100 01F4
Target frequency: 500 Hz
#0000 Pulse output 0 D00101 0000
#0000 CW/CCW method, CW, Continuous Mode
D00100
000001
@INI
#0000 Pulse output 0
#0003 Stop pulse output
0000 (Not used.)
3-21-2 HIGH-SPEED COUNTER PV READ: PRV(881) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23

Only)
Purpose PRV(881) reads the following data on the built-in I/O of CJ1M CPU Units.
• PVs: High-speed counter PV, pulse output PV, interrupt input PV in
counter mode.
• The following status information.
Status type Contents
Pulse output status Pulse Output Status Flag
PV Underflow/Overflow Flag
Pulse Output Amount Set Flag
Pulse Output Completed Flag
Pulse Output Flag
No-origin Flag
At Origin Flag
Pulse Output Stopped Error Flag
High-speed counter input status Comparison In-progress Flag
PV Underflow/Overflow Flag
PWM(891) output status Pulse Output In-progress Flag
868
• Range comparison results

• Pulse output frequency of pulse output 0 or pulse output 1
(Supported only by CJ1M CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.)
• High-speed counter frequency for high-speed counter input 0.
Ladder Symbol
PRV(881)
P
P: Port specifier
C C: Control data
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PRV(881)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @PRV(881)

OK OK OK OK

P specifies the port to which the operation applies.
P Port
C: Control Data
The function of INI(880) is determined by the control data, C.
C PRV(881) function Variations
0000 hex Reads the PV. ---
0001 hex Reads status. ---
869
C PRV(881) function Variations

0002 hex Reads range comparison results. ---
00@3 hex P = 0000 or 0001: C = 0003 hex:
Reads the output frequency of Standard operation
pulse output 0 or pulse output 1. C = 0013 hex:
P = 0010: 10-ms sampling method for high fre-
Reads the frequency of high- quency (supported only by CJ1M
speed counter input 0. CPU Units Ver. 3.0 or later)
C = 0023 hex:
100-ms sampling method for high
frequency (supported only by CJ1M
CPU Units Ver. 3.0 or later)
C = 0033 hex:
1-s sampling method for high fre-
quency (supported only by CJ1M
CPU Units Ver. 3.0 or later)

The PV is output to D or to D and D+1.
15 0
D Lower word of PV
D+1 Upper word of PV
2-word PV
Pulse output PV, high-speed counter input PV,
high-speed counter input frequency for high-speed counter input 0
15 0
D PV
1-word PV
Interrupt input PV in counter mode, status, range comparison results
Area P C D
Timer Area --- --- T0000 to T4094
DM Area --- --- D00000 to D32766
addresses in binary
addresses in BCD
and. and.
870
Area P C D
–2048 to +2047 ,IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to
IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description PRV(881) reads the data specified in C for the port specified in P. The possi-
ble combinations of data and ports are shown in the following table.
P: Port specifier C: Control data
0000 hex: 0001 hex: 0002 hex: 00@3 hex: Read frequency
Read PV Read status Read range 0003 hex: 0013 hex: 0013 hex: 0013 hex:
comparison Pulse 10-ms 100-ms 1-s
results output read sampling sampling sampling
high-speed method method method
counter
frequency
0000 or 0001 hex: OK OK Not allowed. OK (See Not allowed. Not allowed. Not allowed.
Pulse output note.)
0010 or 0011 hex: OK OK OK OK (high- OK (See OK (See OK (See
High-speed speed note.) note.) note.)
counter input counter 0 (high-speed (high-speed (high-speed
only) counter 0 counter 0 counter 0
only) only) only)
0100, 0101, 0102, OK Not allowed. Not allowed. Not allowed. Not allowed. Not allowed. Not allowed.
or 0103 hex:
Interrupt input in
counter mode
1000 or 1001 hex: Not allowed. OK Not allowed. Not allowed. Not allowed. Not allowed. Not allowed.
PWM (891) output
Note CJ1M CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later only.
■ Reading a PV (C = 0000 hex)

If C is 0000 hex, PRV(881) reads a PV as shown in the following table.
Port and mode Operation Setting range
Pulse output (P = The present value of the 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
0000 or 0001 hex) pulse output is stored in (−2,147,483,648 to
D and D+1. 2,147,483,647)
High-speed Linear The present value of the 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
counter Mode high-speed counter is (−2,147,483,648 to
input (P = stored in D and D+1. 2,147,483,647)
0010 or Ring 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex
0011 hex) Mode (0 to 4,294,967,295)
Interrupt inputs in The present value of the 0000 to FFFF hex
counter mode interrupt input is stored (0 to 65,535)
(P = 0100, 0101, in D.
0102, or 0103 hex)
871
■ Reading Status (C = 0001 hex)

If C is 0001 hex, PRV(881) reads status as shown in the following table.
Port and Operation Results of reading
mode
Pulse out- The pulse 15 0
put output sta- D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
tus is
Pulse Output Status Flag
stored in OFF: Constant speed
ON: Accelerating/decelerating
D. PV Overflow/Underflow Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
Pulse Output Amount Set Flag

OFF: Not set
ON: Set
Pulse Output Completed Flag
OFF: Output not completed
ON: Output completed
Pulse Output In-progress Flag

OFF: Stopped
ON: Outputting
No-origin Flag
OFF: Origin established
ON: Origin not established
At-origin Flag
OFF: Not stopped at origin
ON: Stopped at origin
Pulse Output Stopped Error Flag

OFF: No error
ON: Pulse output stopped due to error
High- The high- 15 0
speed speed D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
counter counter Comparison In-progress Flag

input status is OFF: Stopped
ON: Comparing
stored in PV Overflow/Underflow Flag
D. OFF: Normal
ON: Error
PWM(891) The 15 0
output PWM(891) D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
output is Pulse Output In-progress Flag

OFF: Stopped
stored in ON: Outputting
D.
■ Reading the Results of Range Comparison (C = 0002 hex)

If C is 0002 hex, PRV(881) reads the results of range comparison and stores it
in D as shown in the following diagram.
15 0
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Comparison Result 1
OFF: Not in range ON: In range
Comparison Result 2
Comparison Result 3
Comparison Result 4
Comparison Result 5
Comparison Result 6
Comparison Result 7
Comparison Result 8
■ Reading Pulse Output or High-speed Counter Frequency (C = 00@3 hex)

If C is 00@3 hex, PRV(881) reads the frequency being output from pulse out-
put 0 or 1 or the frequency being input to high-speed counter 0 and stores it in
D and D+1.
872
Frequency Ranges
Value of P Conversion result
0000 or 0001 hex 0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex (0 to 100,000)
(Reading the frequency
of pulse output 0 or 1)
0010 hex Counter input method: Any input method other than 4×
(Reading the frequency differential phase mode
of high-speed counter 0) Result = 00000000 to 000186A0 hex (0 to 100,000)
Note If a frequency higher than 100 kHz has been input,
the output will remain at the maximum value of
000186A0 hex.
Counter input method: 4× differential phase mode
Result = 00000000 to 00030D40 hex (0 to 200,000)
Note If a frequency higher than 200 kHz has been input,
the output will remain at the maximum value of
00030D40 hex.
Pulse Frequency Calculation Methods

When the CPU Unit is a CJ1M CPU Unit with version number 3.0 or later,
there are two ways to calculate the frequency of pulses output from pulse out-
put 0 or 1 or pulses input to high-speed counter 0.
1. Standard Calculation Method (Earlier Method)
The count is calculated by counting each pulse regardless of the frequen-
cy. At high frequencies, the rising or falling edges of some pulses will be
corrupted, resulting in errors (roughly 1% error max. at 100 kHz).
2. High-frequency Calculation Method
In this case, the counting method is switched at high and low frequencies.
• High-frequency counting
At high frequencies (above 1 kHz), the function counts the number of
pulses within a fixed interval (the sampling time) and calculates the fre-
quency from that count. One of the following three sampling times can
be selected by setting the rightmost two digits of C.
Sampling time Value of C Description
10 ms 0013 hex Counts the number of pulses every 10 ms.
The error is 10% max. at 1 kHz.
100 ms 0023 hex Counts the number of pulses every 100 ms.
1s 0033 hex Counts the number of pulses every 1 s. The
error is 0.1% max. at 1 kHz.
• Low-frequency counting
At frequencies below 1 kHz, the Standard Calculation Method is used,
regardless of the sampling time setting.
873
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified range for P or C is exceeded.
ON if the combination of P and C is not allowed.
ON if reading range comparison results is specified even
though range comparison is not being executed.
ON if reading the output frequency is specified for any-
thing except for high-speed counter 0.
ON if specified for a port not set for a high-speed counter.
ON if executed for a port not set for an interrupt input in
counter mode.
Precautions If the counter is reset when P is 0010 hex (high-speed counter 0) and C is
0013, 0023, or 0033 hex (sampling method for high frequency), the data read
during the sampling time when the counter was reset will not be dependable.
Examples
■ Example 1
When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following programming example,
CTBL(882) registers a range comparison table for high-speed counter 0 and
starts comparison. When CIO 000001 turns ON, PRV(881) reads the range
comparison results at that time and stores them in CIO 0100.
000000
@CTBL
#0000 High-speed counter input 0
#0001 Range comparison table
registration and comparison start
D00100
000001
@PRV
#0002 Read range comparison results
0100
■ Example 2
When CIO 000100 turns ON in the following programming example, PRV(881)
reads the frequency of the pulse being input to high-speed counter 0 at that
time and stores it as a hexadecimal value in D00200 and D00201.
000100
PRV
#0003 Read input frequency
D00200
3-21-3 COUNTER FREQUENCY CONVERT: PRV2(883)

Purpose PRV2(883) reads the pulse frequency input from a high-speed counter and
either converts the frequency to a rotational speed or converts the counter PV
to the total number of revolutions. The result is output to the destination words
as 8-digit hexadecimal. Pulses can be input from high-speed counter 0 only.
This instruction is supported only by the CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 CPU Unit Ver.
2.0 or later.
874
Ladder Symbol
PRV2
C1 C1: Control data
C2 C2: Pulses per revolution
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PRV2(883)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @PRV2(883)

OK OK OK OK
Operands C1: Control Data

The function of PRV2(883) is determined by the control data, C1.
C1 PRV2(883) function
0@*0 hex Converts frequency to rotation speed.
(See note.)
0001 hex Converts counter PV to total number of revolutions.
Note The second digit of C (@) specifies the units and the third digit (*) specifies
the frequency calculation method.
C1 0
Conversion Type
0 hex: Frequency to speed
1 hex: Counter PV to total revolutions
(When Conversion Type is "Frequency to speed")
Pulse Frequency Calculation Method
0 hex: Standard calculation method
1 hex: High-frequency calculation method, 10-ms sampling (See note.)
2 hex: High-frequency calculation method, 100-ms sampling (See note.)
3 hex: High-frequency calculation method, 1,000-ms sampling (See note.)
(When Conversion Type is "Frequency to speed")
Speed Unit
0 hex: r/min
1 hex: r/s (See note.)
2 hex: r/h (See note.)
C2: Pulses per Revolution

Specifies the number of pulses per revolution (0001 to FFFF hex).
The PV is output to D or to D and D+1.
15 0
D Conversion result (Rightmost 4 digits)
D+1 Conversion result (Leftmost 4 digits)
Area C1 C2 D
CIO Area --- CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to
CIO 6143 CIO 6142
Work Area --- W000 to W511 W000 to W510
875
Area C1 C2 D
Holding Bit Area --- H000 to H511 H000 to H510
Timer Area --- T0000 to T4095 T0000 to T4094
Counter Area --- C0000 to C4095 C0000 to C4094
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32766
Indirect DM/EM --- @ D00000 to @ @ D00000 to @
addresses in binary D32767 D32767
Indirect DM/EM --- *D00000 to *D00000 to
addresses in BCD *D32767 *D32767
Constants See descrip- --- ---
tion of oper-
and.
–2048 to +2047 ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description PRV2(883) converts the pulse frequency input from high-speed counter 0,
according to the conversion method specified in C1 and the pulses/revolution
coefficient specified in C2, and outputs the result to D and D+1.
Select one of the following conversion methods by setting C1 to 0000 hex or
0001 hex.
Converting Frequency to Rotation Speed (C1 = 0@*0 hex)
If C1 is 0@*0 hex, PRV2(883) calculates the rotation speed (r/min) from the
frequency data and pulses/revolution setting. The second digit of C (@) speci-
fies the units and the third digit (*) specifies the frequency calculation method.
1. Rotation Speed Units
• Rotation Speed Units = r/min
When the second digit of C (@) is 0, PRV2(883) calculates the rotation
speed in r/min from the frequency data and pulses/revolution setting.
Rotation speed (r/min) = (Frequency ÷ Pulses/revolution) × 60
• Rotation Speed Units = r/s (CJM1 CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or later only)
speed in r/s from the frequency data and pulses/revolution setting.
Rotation speed (r/s) = Frequency ÷ Pulses/revolution
• Rotation Speed Units = r/h (CJM1 CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or later only)
speed in r/h from the frequency data and pulses/revolution setting.
Rotation speed (r/h) = (Frequency ÷ Pulses/revolution) × 60 × 60
• Range of Conversion Results
• Counter input method: Any method besides 4× differential phase mode
Conversion result = 00000000 to 000186A0 hex (0 to 100,000)
876
(If a frequency higher than 100 kHz has been input, the output will re-
main at the maximum value of 000186A0 hex.)
• Counter input method: 4× differential phase mode
Conversion result = 00000000 to 00030D40 hex (0 to 200,000)
(If a frequency higher than 200 kHz has been input, the output will re-
main at the maximum value of 00030D40 hex.)
2. Frequency Calculation Method
When the CPU Unit is a CJ1M CPU Unit with version number 3.0 or later,
there are two ways to calculate the frequency of pulses input to high-speed
counter 0.
a) Standard Calculation Method (C1 = 0@00)
The count is calculated by counting each pulse regardless of the fre-
quency. At high frequencies, the rising or falling edges of some pulses
will be corrupted, resulting in errors (about 1% error max. at 100 kHz).
b) High-frequency Calculation Method
In this case, the counting method is switched at high and low frequen-
cies. (Supported by CJM1 CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or later only)
• High-frequency counting (C1 = 0@10, 0@20, or 0@30)
At high frequencies (above 1 kHz), the function counts the number of
pulses within a fixed interval (the sampling time) and calculates the fre-
quency from that count. One of the following three sampling times can
be selected by the third digit of C1.
Sampling time Value of C1 Description
10 ms 0@10 hex Counts the number of pulses every 10 ms.
100 ms 0@20 hex Counts the number of pulses every 100 ms.
1s 0@30 hex Counts the number of pulses every 1 s. The
error is 0.1% max. at 1 kHz.
• Low-frequency counting
At frequencies below 1 kHz, the Standard Calculation Method is used,
regardless of the sampling time setting.
Converting Counter PV to Total Number of Revolutions (C1 = 0001 hex)
If C1 is 0001 hex, PRV2(883) calculates the cumulative number of revolutions
from the counter PV and pulses/revolution setting.
Conversion result = Counter PV ÷ Pulses/revolution
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if high-speed counter 0 is disabled in the settings.
ON if C1 is not in the specified range (0000 or 0001).
ON if the pulses/revolution setting in C2 is 0000.
Precautions If the counter is reset when C1 specifies frequency-rotational speed conver-

sion for a high frequency, the data read during the sampling time when the
counter was reset will not be dependable.
877
Examples
■ Example 1
When CIO 000100 is ON in the following programming example, PRV2(883)
reads the present pulse frequency at high-speed counter 0, converts that
value to rotation speed (r/min), and outputs the hexadecimal result to D00201
and D00200.
000100
PRV2
#0000 Converting frequency to rotation speed
#0003 Pulses per revolution
D00200
■ Example 2
When CIO 000100 is ON in the following programming example, PRV2(883)
reads the counter PV, converts that value to number of revolutions, and out-
puts the hexadecimal result to D00301 and D00300.
000100
PRV2
#0001 Converting counter PV to total number of revolutions
#0003 Pulses per revolution
D00300
3-21-4 REGISTER COMPARISON TABLE: CTBL(882) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23

Only)
Purpose CTBL(882) is used to register a comparison table and perform comparisons
for a high-speed counter PV. Either target value or range comparisons are
possible. An interrupt task is executed when a specified condition is met.
Ladder Symbol
CTBL(882)
P
P: Port specifier
C C: Control data
TB TB: First comparison table word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CTBL(882)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @CTBL(882)

OK OK OK OK
878

P specifies the port for which pulses are to be counted as shown in the follow-
ing table.
P Port
C: Control Data
The function of CTBL(882) is determined by the control data, C, as shown in
the following table.
C CTBL(882) function
0000 hex Registers a target value comparison table and starts comparison.
0001 hex Registers a range comparison table and performs one comparison.
0002 hex Registers a target value comparison table. Comparison is started with
INI(880).
0003 hex Registers a range comparison table. Comparison is started with INI(880).
TB: First Table Comparison Word

TB is the first word of the comparison table. The structure of the comparison
table depends on the type of comparison being performed.
For target value comparison, the length of the comparison table is determined
by the number of target values specified in TB. The table can be between 4
and 145 words long, as shown below.
15 0
TB Number of target values 0001 to 0030 hex (1 to 48 target values)
TB+1 Lower word of target value 1

00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex
TB+2 Upper word of target value 1
TB+3 Interrupt task number for target value 1
TB+142 Lower word of target value 48

00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex
TB+143 Upper word of target value 48
TB+144 Interrupt task number for target value 48
Interrupt Task Number

15 14 12 11 87 4 3 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Interrupt task number

Direction 00 to FF hex (0 to 255)
OFF: Incrementing,
ON: Decrementing
For range comparison, the comparison table always contains eight ranges.
The table is 40 words long, as shown below. If it is not necessary to set eight
ranges, set the interrupt task number to FFFF hex for all unused ranges.
879
15 0
TB Lower word of range 1 lower limit
0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex (See note.)
TB+1 Upper word of range 1 lower limit
TB+2 Lower word of range 1 upper limit

TB+3 Upper word of range 1 upper limit
Range 1 interrupt task number
TB+35 Lower word of range 8 lower limit

TB+36 Upper word of range 8 lower limit
TB+37 Lower word of range 8 upper limit

TB+38 Upper word of range 8 upper limit
TB+39 Range 8 interrupt task number
Interrupt task number

0000 to 00FF hex: Interrupt task number 0 to 255
AAAA hex: Do not execute interrupt task.
FFFF hex: Ignore the settings for this range.
Note Always set the upper limit greater than or equal to the lower limit for any one
range.
Area P C TB
Timer Area --- --- T0000 to T4095
DM Area --- --- D00000 to D32767
addresses in binary
addresses in BCD
and. and.
–2048 to +2047 ,IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to
IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description CTBL(882) registers a comparison table or registers and comparison table

and starts comparison for the port specified in P and the method specified in
C. Once a comparison table is registered, it is valid until a different table is
registered or until the CPU Unit is switched to PROGRAM mode.
Each time CTBL(882) is executed, comparison is started under the specified
conditions. When using CTBL(882) to start comparison, it is normally suffi-
880
cient to use the differentiated version (@CTBL(882)) of the instruction or an

execution condition that is turned ON only for one scan.
Note If an interrupt task that has not been registered is specified, a fatal program
error will occur the first time an interrupt is generated.
■ Registering a Comparison Table (C = 0002 or 0003 hex)
If C is set to 0002 or 0003 hex, a comparison table will be registered, but com-
parison will not be started. Comparison is started with INI(880).
■ Registering a Comparison Table and Starting Comparison (C = 0000 or
0001 hex)
If C is set to 0000 or 0001 hex, a comparison table will be registered, and
comparison will be started.
■ Stopping Comparison
Comparison is stopped with INI(880). It makes no difference what instruction
was used to start comparison.
■ Target Value Comparison
The corresponding interrupt task is called and executed when the PV
matches a target value.
• The same interrupt task number can be specified for more than one target
value.
• The direction can be set to specify whether the target value is valid when
the PV is being incremented or decremented. If bit 15 in the word used to
specify the interrupt task number for the range is OFF, the PV will be com-
pared to the target value only when the PV is being incremented, and if bit
00 is ON, only when the PV is being decremented.
• The comparison table can contain up to 48 target values, and the number
of target values is specified in TB (i.e., the length of the table depends on
the number of target values that is specified).
• Comparisons are performed for all target values registered in the table.
Note 1. An error will occur if the same target value with the same comparison di-
rection is registered more than once in the same table.
2. If the high-speed counter is set for incremental pulse mode, an error will
occur if decrementing is set in the table as the direction for comparison.
3. If the count direction changes while the PV equals a target value that was
reached in the direction opposite to that set as the comparison direction,
the comparison condition for that target value will not be met. Do not set
target values at peak and bottom values of the count value.
Range Comparison
The corresponding interrupt task is called and executed when the PV enters a
set range.
• The same interrupt task number can be specified for more than one target
value.
• The range comparison table contains 8 ranges, each of which is defined
by a lower limit and an upper limit. If a range is not to be used, set the
interrupt task number to FFFF hex to disable the range.
• The interrupt task is executed only once when the PV enters the range.
• If the PV is within more than one range when the comparison is made, the
interrupt task for the range closest to the beginning of the table will be
given priority and other interrupt tasks will be executed in following cycles.
881
• If there is no reason to execute an interrupt task, specify AAAA hex as the

interrupt task number. The range comparison results can be read with
PRV(881) or using the Range Comparison In-progress Flags.
Note An error will occur if the upper limit is less than the lower limit for any one
range.
Flags
ON if the number of target values specified for target
value comparison is set to 0.
ON if the number of target values specified for target
value comparison exceeds 48.
ON if the same target value is specified more than once in
the same comparison direction for target comparison.
ON if the upper value is less than the lower value for any
range.
ON if the set values for all ranges are disabled during a
range comparison.
ON if the high-speed counter is set for incremental pulse
mode and decrementing is set in the table as the direction
for comparison.
ON if an instruction is executed when the high-speed
counter is set to Ring Mode and the specified value
exceeds the maximum ring value.
ON if specified for a port not set for a high-speed counter.
ON if executed for a different comparison method while
comparison is already in progress.
Example When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following programming example,

CTBL(882) registers a target value comparison table and starts comparison
for high-speed counter 0. The PV of the high-speed counter is counted incre-
mentally and when it reaches 500, it equals target value 1 and interrupt task 1
is executed. When the PV is incremented to 1000, it equals target value 2 and
interrupt task 2 is executed.
000000
@CTBL D00100 0002 Two target values
#0000 High-speed counter input 0 D00101 01F4
Target value 1: 0000 01F4 hex (500)
#0000 Register target comparison table D00102 0000
and start comparison
D00100 D00103 0001 Incrementing, Interrupt task number 1
D00104 03E8
Target value 2: 0000 03E8 hex (1000)
D00105 0000
D00106 0002 Incrementing, Interrupt task number 2
3-21-5 SPEED OUTPUT: SPED(885) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only)

Purpose SPED(885) is used to set the output pulse frequency for a specific port and
start pulse output without acceleration or deceleration. Either independent
mode positioning or continuous mode speed control is possible. For indepen-
dent mode positioning, the number of pulses is set using PULS(886).
SPED(885) can also be executed during pulse output to change the output
frequency, creating stepwise changes in the speed.
882
Ladder Symbol
SPED(885)
P
M P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
F F: First pulse frequency word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SPED(885)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SPED(885)

OK OK OK OK

The port specifier specifies the port where the pulses will be output.
P Port
M: Output Mode
The value of M determines the output mode.
15 12 11 87 4 3 0
M
Mode
0 hex: Continuous
1 hex: Independent
Direction
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
Pulse output method (See note.)
0 hex: CW/CCW
1 hex: Pulse + direction
Always 0 hex.
Note: Use the same pulse output method when using both pulse outputs 0 and 1.
F: First Pulse Frequency Word

The value of F and F+1 sets the pulse frequency in Hz.
15 0
F Lower word of target frequency 0 to 100,000 Hz
F+1 Upper word of target frequency (0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex)
Area P M F
Timer Area --- --- T0000 to T4094
DM Area --- --- D00000 to D32766
883
Area P M F
addresses in binary
addresses in BCD
Constants See descrip- See descrip- See description of oper-
tion of oper- tion of oper- and.
and. and.
–2048 to +2047 ,IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to
IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SPED(885) starts pulse output on the port specified in P using the method
specified in M at the frequency specified in F. Pulse output will be started each
time SPED(885) is executed. It is thus normally sufficient to use the differenti-
ated version (@SPED(885)) of the instruction or an execution condition that is
turned ON only for one scan.
Pulse frequency
Target frequency
Time
SPED(885) executed.
In independent mode, pulse output will stop automatically when the number of
pulses set with PULS(886) in advance have been output. In continuous mode,
pulse output will continue until stopped from the program.
An error will occur if the mode is changed between independent and continu-
ous mode while pulses are being output.
■ Continuous Mode Speed Control
When continuous mode operation is started, pulse output will be continued
until it is stopped from the program.
884
Note Pulse output will stop immediately if the CPU Unit is changed to PROGRAM
mode.
Operation Purpose Application Frequency changes Description Procedure/
instruction
Starting To output Changing the Outputs pulses at a SPED(885) (Con-
pulse output with spec- speed (fre- Pulse frequency specified frequency. tinuous)
ified quency) in
speed one step Target frequency
Time
Execution of SPED(885)
Changing To Changing the Changes the fre- SPED(885) (Con-

settings change speed during Pulse frequency quency (higher or tinuous)
speed in operation lower) of the pulse ↓
one step Target frequency output in one step.
SPED(885) (Con-
tinuous)
Present frequency
Time
Execution of
SPED(885)
Stopping Stop Immediate Stops the pulse out- SPED(885) (Con-

pulse output pulse out- stop Pulse frequency put immediately. tinuous)
put ↓
Present frequency
INI(880)
Time
Execution of INI(880)
Stop Immediate Pulse frequency Stops the pulse out- SPED(885) (Con-
pulse out- stop put immediately. tinuous)
put ↓
Present frequency
SPED(885) (Con-
tinuous, Target fre-
quency of 0 Hz)
Time
Execution of SPED(885)
■ Independent Mode Positioning

When independent mode operation is started, pulse output will be continued
until the specified number of pulses has been output.
Note 1. Pulse output will stop immediately if the CPU Unit is changed to PRO-
GRAM mode.
2. The number of output pulses must be set each time output is restarted.
3. The number of output pulses must be set in advance with PULS(881).
Pulses will not be output for SPED(885) if PULS(881) is not executed first.
885
4. The direction set in the SPED(885) operand will be ignored if the number
of pulses is set with PULS(881) as an absolute value.
instruction
Starting To output Positioning Starts outputting PULS(886)
pulse output with spec- without accel- Pulse frequency Specified number of pulses at the speci-
pulses (Specified with ↓
ified eration or fied frequency and
speed deceleration PULS(886).) stops immediately SPED(885)
Target when the specified (Independent)
frequency number of pulses
has been output.
Time Note The target
position (spec-
Execution of Outputs the specified ified number of
SPED(885) number of pulses pulses) can-
and then stops. not be
changed dur-
ing position-
ing.
Changing To Changing the Specified number SPED(885) can be PULS(886)
settings change speed in one
Pulse executed during
frequency of pulses ↓
speed in step during (Specified with Number of pulses positioning to
one step operation New target PULS(886).) specified with change (raise or SPED(885)
frequency PULS(886) does lower) the pulse out- (Independent)
Original target not change. put frequency in one ↓
frequency step. SPED(885)
The target position (Independent)
Time (specified number of
Execution of SPED(885) pulses) is not
(independent mode) changed.
SPED(885) (independent
mode) executed again to
change the target
frequency. (The target
position is not changed.)
Stopping To stop Immediate Pulse frequency Stops the pulse out- PULS(886)
pulse output pulse out- stop put immediately and ↓
put (Num- clears the number of
ber of Present output pulses set- SPED(885)
frequency (Independent)
pulses ting.
setting is ↓
not pre- INI(880)
served.) Time PLS2(887)
Execution of Execution ↓
SPED(885) of INI(880) INI(880)
Stop Immediate Stops the pulse out- PULS(886)

pulse out- stop
Pulse frequency put immediately and ↓
put (Num- clears the number of
ber of output pulses set- SPED(885)
Present frequency (Independent)
pulses ting.
setting is ↓
not pre- SPED(885),
served.) (Indepen-
Time dent, Target
Execution of Execution of frequency of
SPED(885) SPED(885) 0 Hz)
886
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified range for P, M, or F is exceeded.
ON if PLS2(887) or ORG(889) is already being executed
to control pulse output for the specified port.
ON if SPED(885) or INI(880) is used to change the mode
between continuous and independent output during pulse
output.
ON if SPED(885) is executed in an interrupt task when an
instruction controlling pulse output is being executed in a
cyclic task.
ON if SPEC(885) is executed in independent mode with
an absolute number of pulses and the origin has not been
established.

PULS(886) sets the number of output pulses for pulse output 0. An absolute
value of 5,000 pulses is set. SPED(885) is executed next to start pulse output
using the CW/CCW method in the clockwise direction in independent mode at
a target frequency of 500 Hz.
000000
@PULS D00100 1388
Number of output pulses: 5,000
#0000 D00101 0000
#0000
D00110 01F4
D00100 Target frequency: 500 Hz
D00111 0000
@SPED
Pulse frequency
#0000
#0001
Target frequency:
D00110 500 Hz
5,000 pulses
Time
PULS(881) and the
SPED(885) executed.
3-21-6 SET PULSES: PULS(886) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only)

Purpose PULS(886) is used to set the pulse output amount (number of output pulses)
for pulse outputs that are started later in the program using SPED(885) or
ACC(888) in independent mode.
Ladder Symbol
PULS(886)
P
T P: Port specifier
T: Pulse type
N N: Number of pulses
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PULS(886)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @PULS(886)
887

OK OK OK OK

The port specifier indicates the port. The parameters set in D and N will apply
to the next SPED(885) or ACC(888) instruction in which the same port output
location is specified.
P Port
T: Pulse Type
T specifies the type of pulses that are output as follows:
T Pulse type
0000 hex Relative
0001 hex Absolute
N and N+1: Number of Pulses

N and N+1 specify the number of pulses for relative pulse output or the abso-
lute target position for absolute pulse in 8-digit hexadecimal.
15 0
N Lower word with number of pulses
N+1 Upper word with number of pulses
Relative pulse output:

0 to 2,147,483,647 (0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex)
Absolute pulse output:

−2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex)
The actual number of movement pulses that will be output are as follows:
For relative pulse output, the number of movement pulses = the set number of
pulses. For absolute pulse output, the number of movement pulses = the set
number of pulses − the PV.
Area P T N
Timer Area --- --- T0000 to T4094
DM Area --- --- D00000 to D32766
addresses in binary
addresses in BCD
Constants See descrip- See descrip- See description of oper-
tion of oper- tion of oper- and.
and. and.
888
Area P T N
–2048 to +2047 ,IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to
IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description PULS(886) sets the pulse type and number of pulses specified in T and N for
the port specified in P. Actual output of the pulses is started later in the pro-
gram using SPED(885) or ACC(888) in independent mode.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified range for P, T, or N is exceeded.
ON if PULS(886) is executed for a port that is already out-
putting pulses.
ON if PULS(886) is executed in an interrupt task when an
cyclic task.
Precautions • An error will occur if PULS(886) is executed when pulses are already
being output. Use the differentiated version (@PULS(886)) of the instruc-
tion or an execution condition that is turned ON only for one scan to pre-
vent this.
• The calculated number of pulses output for PULS(886) will not change
even if INI(880) is used to change the PV of the pulse output.
• The direction set for SPED(885) or ACC(888) will be ignored if the num-
ber of pulses is set with PULS(881) as an absolute value.
• It is possible to move outside of the range of the PV of the pulse output
amount (−2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647).

PULS(886) sets the number of output pulses for pulse output 0. An absolute
value of 5,000 pulses is set. SPED(885) is executed next to start pulse output
using the CW/CCW method in the clockwise direction in independent mode at
a target frequency of 500 Hz.
000000
@PULS D00100 1388
Number of output pulses: 5,000
#0000 D00101 0000
#0000
D00110 01F4
D00100 Target frequency: 500 Hz
D00111 0000
@SPED
#0000
#0001
D00110
889
3-21-7 PULSE OUTPUT: PLS2(887) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only)

Purpose PLS2(887) outputs a specified number of pulses to the specified port. Pulse
output starts at a specified startup frequency, accelerates to the target fre-
quency at a specified acceleration rate, decelerates at the specified decelera-
tion rate, and stops at approximately the same frequency as the startup
frequency. Only independent mode positioning is supported.
PLS2(887) can also be executed during pulse output to change the number of
output pulses, target frequency, acceleration rate, or deceleration rate.
PLS2(887) can thus be used for sloped speed changes with different acceler-
ation and deceleration rates, target position changes, target and speed
changes, or direction changes.
Ladder Symbol
PLS2(887)
P
M P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
S
S: First word of settings table
F F: First word of starting frequency
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PLS2(887)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @PLS2(887)

OK OK OK OK

The port specifier indicates the port.
P Port
M: Output Mode
The content of M specifies the parameters for the pulse output as follows:
15 12 11 87 4 3 0
M
Relative/absolute specifier
0 hex: Relative pulses
1 hex: Absolute pulses
Direction
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
0 hex: CW/CCW
Always 0 hex.
890
S: First Word of Settings Table

The contents of S to S+5 control the pulse output as shown in the following
diagrams.
15 0
S1 Acceleration rate 1 to 2,000 Hz (0001 to 07D0 hex)
S1+1 Deceleration rate 1 to 2,000 Hz (0001 to 07D0 hex)
Specify the increase or decrease in the frequency per pulse control period (4 ms).
S1+2 Lower word with target frequency 1 to 100,000 Hz

(0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex)
S1+3 Upper word with target frequency
Specify the frequency after acceleration in Hz.
S1+4 Lower word with number of output pulses
S1+5 Upper word with number of output pulses
Relative pulse output: 0 to 2,147,483,647

(0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex)
Absolute pulse output: −2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

(8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex)
The actual number of movement pulses that will be output are as follows:
For relative pulse output, the number of movement pulses = the set number of
pulses. For absolute pulse output, the number of movement pulses = the set
number of pulses − the PV.
F: First Word of Starting Frequency
The starting frequency is given in F and F+1.
15 0
F Lower word with starting frequency 0 to 100,000 Hz
(0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex)
F+1 Upper word with starting frequency
Specify the starting frequency in Hz.
Area P M S F
CIO Area --- --- CIO 0000 to CIO 6138 CIO 0000 to CIO 6142
Work Area --- --- W000 to W506 W000 to W510
Holding Bit Area --- --- H000 to H506 H000 to H510
Auxiliary Bit Area --- --- A448 to A954 A448 to A958
Timer Area --- --- T0000 to T4090 T0000 to T4094
Counter Area --- --- C0000 to C4090 C0000 to C4094
DM Area --- --- D00000 to D32762 D00000 to D32766
EM Area without bank --- --- --- ---
EM Area with bank --- --- --- ---
Indirect DM/EM --- --- @ D00000 to @ D32767 @ D00000 to @ D32767
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM --- --- *D00000 to *D32767 *D00000 to *D32767
addresses in BCD
Constants See description See description --- See description of oper-
of operand. of operand. and.
Data Registers --- --- --- ---
891
Area P M S F
Index Registers --- --- --- ---
Indirect addressing --- --- ,IR0 to ,IR15 ,IR0 to ,IR15
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to
–2048 to +2047 ,IR15 –2048 to +2047 ,IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to IR15 DR0 to DR15, IR0 to IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++) ,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15 ,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description PLS2(887) starts pulse output on the port specified in P using the mode spec-
ified in M at the start frequency specified in F (1 in diagram). The frequency is
increased every pulse control period (4 ms) at the acceleration rate specified
in S until the target frequency specified in S is reached (2 in diagram). When
the target frequency has been reached, acceleration is stopped and pulse
output continues at a constant speed (3 in diagram).
The deceleration point is calculated from the number of output pulses and
deceleration rate set in S and when that point is reached, the frequency is
decreased every pulse control period (4 ms) at the deceleration rate specified
in S until the starting frequency specified in S is reached, at which point pulse
output is stopped (4 in diagram).
Pulse output is started each time PLS2(887) is executed. It is thus normally
sufficient to use the differentiated version (@PLS2(887)) of the instruction or
an execution condition that is turned ON only for one scan.
Pulse frequency
C
Target frequency B D
Starting frequency A
Time
PLS2(887) executed.
PLS2(887) can be used only for positioning.

With the CJ1M CPU Units, PLS2(887) can be executed during pulse output
for ACC(888) in either independent or continuous mode, and during accelera-
tion, constant speed, or deceleration. (See note.) ACC(888) can also be exe-
cuted during pulse output for PLS2(887) during acceleration, constant speed,
or deceleration.
Note Executing PLS2(887) during speed control with ACC(888) (continuous mode)
with the same target frequency as ACC(888) can be used to achieve interrupt
feeding of a fixed distance. Acceleration will not be performed by PLS2(887)
for this application, but if the acceleration rate is set to 0, the Error Flag will
turn ON and PLS2(887) will not be executed. Always set the acceleration rate
to a value other than 0.
892

mode.
Opera- Purpose Application Frequency changes Description Procedure/
tion instruction
Start- Complex Positioning with Pulse frequency Specified number Accelerates and decel- PLS2(887)
ing trapezoi- trapezoidal accel- of pulses erates at a fixed rates.
pulse dal con- eration and The pulse output is
output trol deceleration Target stopped when the
(Separate rates frequency Acceler- Deceleration specified number of
ation rate
used for acceler- rate pulses has been out-
ation and decel- Starting Stop put. (See note.)
eration; starting frequency frequency
speed) Note The target posi-
Time tion (specified
The number of Execution of Output stops. number of
pulses can be PLS2(887) Target Deceleration point pulses) can be
changed during frequency changed during
positioning. reached. positioning.
Chang- To Changing the tar- Specified number of PLS2(887) can be exe- PLS2(887)
ing set- change get speed (fre- Pulse cuted during position-
frequency pulses (Specified with ↓
tings speed quency) during PULS(886).) ing to change the
Changed target PLS2(887)
smoothly positioning acceleration rate,
(with (different acceler- frequency deceleration rate, and
unequal ation and decel- Target frequency Acceleration/ target frequency. PULS(886)
accelera- eration rates) deceleration
tion and
rate
Note To prevent the ↓
decelera- Time target position ACC(888)
tion rates) from being (Indepen-
Execution of changed inten- dent)
ACC(888) PLS2(887) executed to change tionally, the origi- ↓
(independent the target frequency and accel- nal target
mode) position must be PLS2(887)
eration/deceleration rates.
(The target position is not specified in
changed. The original target absolute coordi-
position is specified again.) nates.
To Changing the tar- PLS2(887) can be exe- PLS2(887)

change get position dur-
Number of pulses cuted during position-
Specified changed with ↓
target ing positioning Pulse number of PLS2(887). ing to change the
position (multiple start frequency pulses target position (num- PLS2(887)
function) ber of pulses), acceler- PULS(886)
Target ation rate, deceleration ↓
frequency Acceleration/ rate, and target fre-
deceleration
quency. ACC(888)
rate
(Indepen-
Time Note If a constant dent)
Execution of
speed cannot be ↓
maintained after PLS2(887)
PLS2(887) changing the set-
PLS2(887) executed to
change the target position. tings, an error
(The target frequency and will occur and
acceleration/deceleration the original oper-
rates are not changed.) ation will con-
tinue to the
original target
position.
893

tion instruction
Chang- To Changing the tar- Number of pulses PLS2(887) can be exe- PULS(886)
ing set- change get position and Number of changed with cuted during position- ↓
Pulse
tings, target target speed (fre- pulses specified PLS2(887). ing to change the
contin- position quency) during
frequency
with PLS2(887). target position (num- ACC(888)
Changed target (Indepen-
ued and positioning (mul- ber of pulses), acceler-
speed tiple start func- frequency
ation rate, deceleration dent)
smoothly tion) Target frequency
Acceleration/ rate, and target fre- ↓
deceleration
rate quency. PLS2(887)
Note If a constant
Time speed cannot be
Execution of
PLS2(887) maintained after
PLS2(887) executed to
change the target frequency,
changing the set-
acceleration rate and tings, an error
deceleration rate. will occur and
the original oper-
ation will con-
tinue to the
original target
position.
Changing the PLS2(887) can be exe- PLS2(887)
acceleration and Number of pulses cuted during position-
Pulse specified by ↓
deceleration frequency Acceleration rate n PLS2(887) #N. ing (acceleration or
PLS2(887)
rates during posi- New target deceleration) to
tioning (multiple frequency Acceleration
rate 3
change the accelera- PULS(886)
start function) Original target Acceleration tion rate or decelera- ↓
frequency rate 2
Acceleration tion rate.
rate 1 ACC(888)
Time (Indepen-
Execution of dent)
PLS2(887) #1 Execution of PLS2(887) #N
Execution of PLS2(887) #3 ↓
Execution of PLS2(887)
PLS2(887) #2
To Changing the PLS2(887) can be exe- PLS2(887)
change direction during
Specified cuted during position-
Pulse number of ↓
direction positioning frequency pulses ing with absolute pulse
specification to change PLS2(887)
Change of direction at the to absolute pulses and PULS(886)
Target specified deceleration rate reverse direction.
frequency Number of pulses ↓
(position) changed ACC(888)
by PLS2(887) (Indepen-
Time dent)
Execution ↓
of PLS2
(887) Execution of PLS2(887)
PLS2(887)
Stop- Stop Immediate stop Pulse frequency Stops the pulse output PLS2(887)
ping pulse out- immediately and clears ↓
put (Num- the number of output
pulse ber of Present pulses. INI(880)
output pulses frequency
setting is
not pre-
served.) Time
Execution of Execution
SPED(885) of INI(880)
Stop Decelerate to a Pulse frequency Decelerates the pulse PLS2(887)

pulse out- stop output to a stop. ↓
put
smoothly. Present ACC(888)
Deceleration rate (Indepen-
(Number frequency
of pulses dent, target
setting is frequency of
Target 0 Hz)
not pre- frequency = 0 Time
served.)
Execution of Execution of
PLS2(887) ACC(888)
894
Note Triangular Control

If the specified number of pulses is less than the number required to reach the
target frequency and return to zero, the function will automatically reduce the
acceleration/deceleration time and perform triangular control (acceleration
and deceleration only.) An error will not occur.
Specified number
of pulses
Pulse frequency (Specified with
PLS2(887).)
Target
frequency
Time
Execution of
PLS2(887)
■ Switching from Continuous Mode Speed Control to Independent Mode

Positioning
Example application Frequency changes Description Procedure/
instruction
Change from speed PLS2(887) can be exe- ACC(888)
control to fixed distance Outputs the number of cuted during a speed (Continu-
positioning during oper- pulses specified in control operation started ous)
ation PLS2(887) (Both relative with ACC(888) to
and absolute pulse ↓
change to positioning
specification can be used.) operation. PLS2(887)
Pulse frequency
Target
frequency
Time
Execution of
ACC(888)
(continuous Execution of
mode) PLS2(887)
Fixed distance feed Pulse

interrupt frequency
Present
frequency
Time
Execution of
ACC(888)
(continuous Execution of PLS2(887)
mode) with the following settings
• Number of pulses = num-
ber of pulses until stop
• Relative pulse specification
• Target frequency = present
frequency
• Acceleration rate = 0001 to
07D0 hex
• Deceleration rate = target
deceleration rate
895
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified range for P, M, S, or F is exceeded.
ON if PLS2(887) is executed for a port that is already out-
putting pulses for SPED(885) or ORG(889).
ON if PLS2(887) is executed in an interrupt task when an
cyclic task.
ON if PLS2(887) is executed for an absolute pulse output
but the origin has not been established.

PLS2(887) starts pulse output from pulse output 0 with an absolute pulse
specification of 100,000 pulses. Pulse output is accelerated at a rate of
500 Hz every 4 ms starting at 200 Hz until the target speed of 50 kHz is
reached. From the deceleration point, the pulse output is decelerated at a rate
of 250 Hz every 4 ms starting until the starting speed of at 200 Hz is reached,
at which point pulse output is stopped.
000000
@PLS2 D00100 01F4 Acceleration rate: 500 Hz/4 ms
#0000 D00101 00FA Deceleration rate: 250 Hz/4 ms
#0000 D00102 C350
Target frequency: 50 kHz
D00100 D00103 0000
D00110 D00104 86A0
Pulse output amount: 100,000 pulses
D00105 0001
Pulse frequency D00110 00C8

Start frequency: 200 Hz
D00111 0000
Target frequency
50 kHz
100,000 pulses
Start frequency
200 Hz
Time
PLS2(887) executed.
3-21-8 ACCELERATION CONTROL: ACC(888) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only)

Purpose ACC(888) outputs pulses to the specified output port at the specified fre-
quency using the specified acceleration and deceleration rate. (Acceleration
rate is the same as the deceleration rate.) Either independent mode position-
ing or constant mode speed control is possible. For positioning, ACC(888) is
used in combination with PULS(886). ACC(888) can also be executed during
pulse output to change the target frequency or acceleration/deceleration rate,
enabling smooth (sloped) speed changes.
Ladder Symbol
ACC(888)
P
M P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
S S: First word of settings table
896
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ACC(888)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ACC(888)

OK OK OK OK

P Port
M: Output Mode
The content of M specifies the parameters for the pulse output as follows:
15 12 11 87 4 3 0
M
Mode
0 hex: Continuous mode
1 hex: Independent mode
Direction
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
0 hex: CW/CCW
Always 0 hex.
S: First Word of Settings Table

The content of S to S+2 controls the pulse output as shown in the following
diagrams.
15 0
S Acceleration/deceleration rate 1 to 2,000 Hz (0001 to 07D0 hex)
Specify the increase or decrease in the frequency per pulse control period (4 ms).
S+1 Lower word with target frequency 0 to 100,000 Hz

(0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex)
S+2 Upper word with target frequency
Specify the frequency after acceleration in Hz.
Area P M S
Timer Area --- --- T0000 to T4093
DM Area --- --- D00000 to D32765
897
Area P M S
Indirect DM/EM --- --- @ D00000 to @
addresses in binary D32767
addresses in BCD
Constants See description See description ---
of operand. of operand.
–2048 to +2047 ,IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to
IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –
)IR15
Description ACC(888) starts pulse output on the port specified in P using the mode speci-
fied in M using the target frequency and acceleration/deceleration rate speci-
fied in S. The frequency is increased every pulse control period (4 ms) at the
acceleration rate specified in S until the target frequency specified in S is
reached.
Pulse output is started each time ACC(888) is executed. It is thus normally
sufficient to use the differentiated version (@ACC(888)) of the instruction or
Pulse frequency
Acceleration/deceleration rate
Target frequency
Time
ACC(888) executed. ACC(888) executed.
In independent mode, pulse output stops automatically when the specified

number of pulses has been output. In continuous mode, pulse output contin-
ues until it is stopped from the program.
An error will occur if an attempt is made to switch between independent and
continuous mode during pulse output.
With the CJ1M CPU Units, PLS2(887) can be executed during pulse output
for ACC(888) in either independent or continuous mode, and during accelera-
tion, constant speed, or deceleration. (See note.) ACC(888) can also be exe-
cuted during pulse output for PLS2(887) during acceleration, constant speed,
or deceleration.
Note Executing PLS2(887) during speed control with ACC(888) (continuous mode)
with the same target frequency as ACC(888) can be used to achieved inter-
rupt feeding of a fixed distance. Acceleration will not be performed by
PLS2(887) for this application, but if the acceleration rate is set to 0, the Error
Flag will turn ON and PLS2(887) will not be executed. Always set the acceler-
ation rate to a value other than 0.
898
■ Continuous Mode Speed Control

Pulse output will continue until it is stopped from the program.
mode.
instruction
Starting To output Accelerating the Pulse frequency Outputs pulses and ACC(888)
pulse output with speci- speed (frequency) changes the fre- (Continu-
fied accel- at a fixed rate quency at a fixed ous)
eration and Target frequency rate.
Acceleration/
speed deceleration
rate
Present frequency
Time
Execution of
ACC(888)
Changing To change Changing the Pulse frequency Changes the fre- ACC(888) or
settings speed speed smoothly quency from the SPED(885)
smoothly during operation present frequency (Continu-
Target frequency Acceleration/ at a fixed rate. The ous)
deceleration frequency can be
rate ↓
Present frequency accelerated or
ACC(888)
decelerated.
Time (Continu-
ous)
Execution of
ACC(888)
Changing the Pulse frequency Changes the accel- ACC(888)

speed in a Acceleration rate n eration or decelera- (Continu-
polyline curve Target frequency tion rate during ous)
during operation Acceleration acceleration or ↓
rate 2
deceleration.
Acceleration
rate 1
ACC(888)
(Continu-
Present frequency ous)
Time
Execution of ACC(888)
Decelerating to a The deceleration ACC(888)

stop Pulse frequency rate is changed (Continu-
while decelerating. ous)
Present Acceleration/deceleration rate 1
frequency Note If the target ↓

Acceleration/ frequency is ACC(888)
deceleration rate 2
Target set to 0 Hz, (Continu-
frequency = 0 Time the current ous)
deceleration ↓ACC(888)
rate will be (Continu-
Execution of ACC(888) used. ous, target
(target frequency = 0)
frequency of
0 Hz)
899

instruction
Stopping To stop Immediate stop Immediately stops ACC(888)
pulse output pulse out- Pulse frequency pulse output. (Continu-
put ous)
Present frequency
↓
INI(880)
(Continu-
Time ous)
Execution of ACC(888) Execution of INI(880)
To stop Immediate stop Immediately stops ACC(888)

pulse out- Pulse frequency pulse output. (Continu-
put Present frequency ous)
↓
SPED(885)
(Continu-
Time ous, target
Execution of ACC(888) Execution of SPED(885) frequency of
0)
To stop Decelerating to a Pulse frequency Decelerated pulse ACC(888)
pulse out- stop output to a stop. (Continu-
put Present frequency ous)
smoothly Note If the target
Acceleration/deceleration rate
frequency of ↓
(value set when starting)
the second ACC(888)
ACC(888) (Continu-
Target frequency = 0 Time instruction is ous, target
Execution of ACC(888) 0 Hz, the frequency of
deceleration 0)
rate from the
first
ACC(888)
instruction
will be used.

When independent mode operation is started, pulse output will be continued
until the specified number of pulses has been output.
The deceleration point is calculated from the number of output pulses and
deceleration rate set in S and when that point is reached, the frequency is
decreased every pulse control period (4 ms) at the deceleration rate specified
in S until the specified number of points has been output, at which point pulse
output is stopped.
Note 1. Pulse output will stop immediately if the CPU Unit is changed to PRO-
GRAM mode.
2. The number of output pulses must be set each time output is restarted.
3. The number of output pulses must be set in advance with PULS(881).
Pulses will not be output for ACC(888) if PULS(881) is not executed first.
4. The direction set in the ACC(888) operand will be ignored if the number of
pulses is set with PULS(881) as an absolute value.
900

tion instruction
Starting Simple trap- Positioning with Specified number of Accelerates and PULS(886)
pulse out- ezoidal con- trapezoidal accel- Pulse frequency pulses (Specified decelerates at the ↓
put trol eration and decel- same fixed rate and
eration (Same
with PULS(886).) stops immediately ACC(888)
(Indepen-
rate used for Target when the specified
acceleration and Acceleration/ number of pulses dent)
frequency deceleration
deceleration; no rate has been output.
starting speed) (See note.)
The number of Time
pulses cannot be Note The target
changed during Execution of Outputs the specified position
positioning. ACC(888) number of pulses and (specified
then stops. number of
pulses) can-
not be
changed dur-
ing position-
ing.
Changing To change Changing the tar- Specified ACC(888) can be PULS(886)
settings speed get speed (fre- number of executed during ↓
smoothly quency) during pulses positioning to
(with the positioning Pulse Number of pulses change the acceler- ACC(888) or
frequency (Specified with specified with SPED(885)
same accel- (acceleration rate PULS(886).) ation/deceleration
Changed target PULS(886) does (Indepen-
eration and = deceleration rate and target fre-
decelera- frequency not change.
quency. dent)
rate)
tion rates) Target frequency ↓
Acceleration/
The target position
deceleration (specified number ACC(888)
rate
of pulses) is not (Indepen-
Time changed. dent)
Execution of
ACC(888)
(independent ACC(888) (independent
mode) mode) executed again to
change the target frequency.
(The target position is not
changed, but the
acceleration/deceleration rate
is changed.)
Stopping To stop Immediate stop Pulse frequency Pulse output is PULS(886)

pulse out- pulse out- stopped immedi- ↓
put put. (Num- Present ately and the
ber of remaining number ACC(888)
frequency (Indepen-
pulses set- of output pulses is
ting is not cleared. dent)
preserved.) ↓
Time INI(880)
Execution of Execution of
ACC(888) INI(880)
To stop Decelerating to a Pulse frequency Decelerates the PULS(886)

pulse output stop pulse output to a ↓
smoothly. stop.
(Number of Present ACC(888) or
Deceleration rate
pulses set- frequency Note If ACC(888) SPED(885)
ting is not started the (Indepen-
preserved.) Target operation, the dent)
frequency = 0 Time original ↓
acceleration/
Execution of Execution of deceleration ACC(888)
rate will (Indepen-
PLS2(887) ACC(888) dent, inde-
remain in
effect. pendent,
If SPED(885) target fre-
started the quency of 0)
operation, the PLS2(887)
acceleration/ ↓
deceleration
rate will be ACC(888)
invalid and (Indepen-
the pulse out- dent, target
put will stop frequency of
immediately. 0)
Note Triangular Control

If the specified number of pulses is less than the number required to reach the
target frequency and return to zero, the function will automatically reduce the
acceleration/deceleration time and perform triangular control (acceleration
901
and deceleration only.) An error will not occur.
Specified number
of pulses
Pulse frequency (Specified with
PLS2(887).)
Target
frequency
Time
Execution of
PLS2(887)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified range for P, M, or S is exceeded.
ON if pulses are being output using ORG(889) for the
specified port.
ON if ACC(888) is executed to switch between indepen-
dent and continuous mode for a port that is outputting
pulses for SPED(885), ACC(888), or PLS2(887).
ON if ACC(888) is executed in an interrupt task when an
cyclic task.
ON if ACC(888) is executed for an absolute pulse output
in independent mode but the origin has not been estab-
lished.

ACC(888) starts pulse output from pulse output 0 in continuous mode in the
clockwise direction using the CW/CCW method. Pulse output is accelerated
at a rate of 20 Hz every 4 ms until the target frequency of 500 Hz is reached.
When CIO 000001 turns ON, ACC(888) changes to an acceleration rate of
10 Hz every 4 ms until the target frequency of 1,000 Hz is reached.
000000
@ACC D00100 0014 Acceleration/deceleration rate: 20 Hz
#0000 D00101 01F4
Target frequency: 500 Hz
#0000 D00102 0000
D00100
D00105 000A Acceleration/deceleration rate: 10 Hz
000001
D00106 03E8
@ACC Target frequency: 1,000 Hz
D00107 0000
#0000
#0000
D00105
Pulse frequency
Target frequency
1000 Hz
10 Hz/4 ms
500 Hz
20 Hz/4 ms
Time
ACC(888) executed. ACC(888) executed.
902
3-21-9 ORIGIN SEARCH: ORG(889) (CJ1M-CPU21/22/23 Only)

Purpose ORG(889) performs an origin search or origin return operation.
■ Origin Search
Pulses are output using the specified method to actually drive the motor and
establish the origin based on origin proximity input and origin input signals.
■ Origin Return
The positioning system is returned to the pre-established origin.
Ladder Symbol
ORG(889)
P
P: Port specifier
C C: Control data
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ORG(889)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ORG(889)

OK OK OK OK

P Port
C: Control Data
The value of C determines the origin search method.
15 12 11 87 4 3 0
C
Always 0 hex.
Always 0 hex.
0 hex: CW/CCW
Mode
0 hex: Origin search
1 hex: Origin return
Area P C
CIO Area --- ---
Work Area --- ---
Holding Bit Area --- ---
Auxiliary Bit Area --- ---
Timer Area --- ---
903
Area P C
Counter Area --- ---
DM Area --- ---
addresses in binary
addresses in BCD
Constants See description of operand. See description of operand.
Indirect addressing --- ---
Description ORG(889) performs an origin search or origin return operation for the port
specified in P using the method specified in C.
The following parameters must be set in the PLC Setup before ORG(889) can
be executed. Refer to the CJ-series Built-in I/O Operation Manual for details.
Origin search Origin return
Origin Search Function Enable/Disable Origin Search/Return Initial Speed
Origin Search Operating Mode Origin Return Target Speed
Origin Search Operation Setting Origin Return Acceleration Rate
Origin Detection Method Origin Return Deceleration Rate
Origin Search Direction Setting
Origin Search/Return Initial Speed
Origin Search High Speed
Origin Search Proximity Speed
Origin Compensation
Origin Search Acceleration Rate
Origin Search Deceleration Rate
Limit Input Signal Type
Origin Proximity Input Signal Type
Origin Input Signal Type
An origin search or origin return is started each time ORG(889) is executed. It

is thus normally sufficient to use the differentiated version (@ORG(889)) of
the instruction or an execution condition that is turned ON only for one scan.
■ Origin Search (Bits 12 to 15 of C = 0 hex)
ORG(889) starts outputting pulses using the specified method at the Origin
Search Initial Speed (1 in diagram). Pulse output is accelerated to the Origin
Search High Speed using the Origin Search Acceleration Rate (2 in diagram).
Pulse output is then continued at constant speed until the Origin Proximity
Input Signal turns ON (3 in diagram), from which point pulse output is deceler-
ated to the Origin Search Proximity Speed using the Origin Search Decelera-
tion Rate (4 in diagram). Pulses are then output at constant speed until the
Origin Input Signal turns ON (5 in diagram). Pulse output is stopped when the
Origin Input Signal turns ON (6 in diagram).
When the origin search operation has been completed, the Error Counter
Reset Output will be turned ON. The above operation, however, depends on
the operating mode, origin detection method, and other parameters. Refer to
the CJ-series Built-in I/O Operation Manual for details.
904
Origin Proximity Input Signal
Origin Input Signal
Pulse frequency
Origin search
high speed
C Origin search
B D
Origin search deceleration rate
acceleration rate
Origin search
E
proximity speed
Origin search F
A initial speed
Time
ORG(889) executed. Stop
■ Origin Return (Bits 12 to 15 of C = 1 hex)

ORG(889) starts outputting pulses using the specified method at the Origin
Return Initial Speed (1 in diagram). Pulse output is accelerated to the Origin
Return Target Speed using the Origin Return Acceleration Rate (2 in diagram)
and pulse output is continued at constant speed (3 in diagram). The decelera-
tion point is calculated from the number of pulses remaining to the origin and
the deceleration rate and when that point is reached, the pulse output is
decelerated (4 in diagram) at the Origin Return Deceleration Rate until the
Origin Return Start Speed is reached, at which point pulse output is stopped
at the origin (5 in diagram).
Pulse frequency Origin return
target speed
C
B Origin return
Origin return D deceleration rate
acceleration
rate
Origin return
A initial speed E
Time
ORG(889) executed. Stop
Flags
ON if ORG(889) is specified for a port during pulse output
for SPED(885), ACC(888), or PLS2(887).
ON if ORG(889) is executed in an interrupt task when an
cyclic task.
ON if the origin search or origin return parameters set in
the PLC Setup are not within range.
ON if the Origin Search High Speed is less than or equal
to the Origin Search Proximity Speed or the Origin Search
Proximity Speed is less than or equal to the Origin Search
Initial Speed.
ON if the Origin Return Target speed is less than or equal
to the Origin Return Initial Speed.
ON if an origin return operation is attempted when the ori-
gin has not been established.
905

ORG(889) starts an origin return operation for pulse output 0 by outputting
pulses using the CW/CCW method. According to the PLC Setup, the initial
speed is 100 pps, the target speed is 200 pps, and the acceleration and
deceleration rates are 50 Hz/4 ms.
000000 Speed
@ORG
#0000 Pulse output 0 200 pps
#1000 Origin return, CW/CWW method
100 pps
Time
ORG(889) executed. Output stopped.
The PLC Setup parameters are as follows:

Parameter Setting
Pulse Output 0 Starting Speed for Origin Search and 0000 0064 hex: 100 pps
Origin Return
Pulse Output 0 Origin Return Target Speed 0000 00C8 hex: 200 pps
Pulse Output 0 Origin Return Acceleration Rate 0032 hex: 50 hex/4 ms
Pulse Output 0 Origin Return Deceleration Rate 0032 hex: 50 hex/4 ms
3-21-10 PULSE WITH VARIABLE DUTY FACTOR: PWM(891) (CJ1M-CPU21/

22/23 Only)
Purpose PWM(891) is used to output pulses with the specified duty factor from the
specified port.
Ladder Symbol
PWM
P
F P: Port specifier
F: Frequency
D D: Duty factor
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PWM(891)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @PWM(891)

OK OK OK OK

P Port
0000 hex Pulse output 0 (duty factor: in increments of 1%)
0001 hex Pulse output 1 (duty factor: in increments of 1%)
1000 hex Pulse output 0 (duty factor: in increments of 0.1%)
(CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 only)
1001hex Pulse output 1 (duty factor: in increments of 0.1%)
(CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 only)
906
F: Frequency
F specifies the frequency of the pulse output between 0.1 and 6,553.5 Hz
(0.1 Hz units, 0001 to FFFF hex). The accuracy of the PMW(891) waveform
that is actually output (ON duty +5%/−0%) applies only to 0.1 to 1,000.0 Hz
due to limitations in the output circuits.
D: Duty Factor
D specifies the duty factor of the pulse output, i.e., the percentage of time that
the output is ON. The value of D must be between the following range.
• Pre-Ver. 2.0 CJ1m CPU Units
0% and 100% (1% units, 0000 to 0064 hex)
• Ver. 2.0 CJ1m CPU Units
0.0% and 100.0% (0.1% units, 0000 to 03E8 hex)
Area P F D
CIO Area --- CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
Work Area --- W000 to W511 W000 to W511
Holding Bit Area --- H000 to H511 H000 to H511
Counter Area --- C0000 to C4095 C0000 to C4095
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32767
Indirect DM/EM --- @ D00000 to @ @ D00000 to @
addresses in binary D32767 D32767
Indirect DM/EM --- *D00000 to *D32767 *D00000 to *D32767
addresses in BCD
Constants See 0000 to FFFF hex 0000 to 0064 hex
descrip-
tion of
operand.
Data Registers --- DR0 to DR15 DR0 to DR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description PWM(891) outputs the frequency specified in F at the duty factor specified in
D from the port specified in P. PWM(891) can be executed during duty-factor
pulse output to change the duty factor without stopping pulse output. Any
attempts to change the frequency will be ignored.
Pulse output is started each time PWM(891) is executed. It is thus normally
sufficient to use the differentiated version (@PWM(891)) of the instruction or
The pulse output will continue either until INI(880) is executed to stop it (C =
0003 hex: stop pulse output) or until the CPU Unit is switched to PROGRAM
mode.
907
Step Instructions Section 3-22
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified range for P, F, or D is exceeded.
ON if pulses are being output using ORG(889) for the
specified port.
ON if PWM(891) is executed in an interrupt task when an
cyclic task.

PWM(891) starts pulse output from pulse output 0 at 200 Hz with a duty factor
of 50%. When CIO 000001 turns ON, the duty factor is changed to 25%.
000000 Duty factor: 50% Duty factor: 25%
@PWM
#07D0 Frequency: 200.0 Hz
#0032 Duty factor: 50% CIO 000000 ON CIO 000001 ON
000001
@PWM
#07D0 Frequency: 200.0 Hz
#0019 Duty factor: 25%
3-22 Step Instructions

This section describes Step Instructions, which are used to set up break
points between sections in a large program so that the sections can be exe-
cuted as units and reset upon completion.
STEP DEFINE STEP 008 909
STEP START SNXT 009 909
In CS/CJ-series PLCs, STEP(008)/SNXT(009) can be used together to create

step programs.
Instruction Operation Diagram
SNXT(009): STEP START Controls progression to the Corresponds
next step of the program.
STEP(008): STEP DEFINE Indicates the start of a Corresponds
step. Repeats the same
step program until the con-
ditions for progression to
the next step are estab-
lished.
908
Corresponds
Starts the step programming area
a turns ON
Proceeds to the next step
Process A
Process A Process A repeated until b turns ON.
b turns ON
Process B
Process B Process B repeated until c turns ON.
c turns ON
Process C
Process C Process C repeated until d turns ON.
Proceeds to the end of the ladder

step programming area
End d turns ON
Step programming area completed
Note Work bits are used as the control bits for A, B, C and D.
3-22-1 STEP DEFINE and STEP START: STEP(008)/SNXT(009)

Purpose SNXT(009) is placed immediately before the STEP(008) instruction and con-
trols step execution by turning the specified control bit ON. If there is another
step immediately before SNXT(009), it also turns OFF the control bit of that
process.
STEP(008) is placed immediately after the SNXT(009) instruction and before
each process. It defines the start of each process and specified the control bit
for it. It is also placed at the end of the step programming area after the last
SNXT(009) to indicate the end of the step programming area. When it
appears at the end of the step programming area, STEP(008) does not take a
control bit.
Ladder Symbols
SNXT(009)
B B: Bit
909
When defining the beginning of a step, a control bit is specified as follows:
STEP(008)
B B: Bit
When defining the end of a step a control bit is not specified as follows:
STEP(008)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition STEP(008)/
SNXT(009)

areas areas
Not allowed OK Not allowed Not allowed
Area B
CIO Area ---
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SNXT(009)
SNXT(009) is used in the following three ways:
1,2,3... 1. To start step programming execution.
2. To proceed to the next step control bit.
3. To end step programming execution.
910
The step programming area is from the first STEP(008) instruction (which
always takes a control bit) to the last STEP(008) instruction (which never
takes a control bit).
Starting Step Execution
SNXT(009) is placed at the beginning of the step programming area to start
step execution. It turns ON the control bit specified for B for the next
STEP(008) and proceeds to step B (all instructions after STEP(008) B). A dif-
ferentiated execution condition must be used for the SNXT(009) instruction
that starts step programming area execution, or step execution will last for
only one cycle.
Proceeding to the Next Step
When SNXT(009) occurs in the middle of the step programming area, it is
used to proceed to the next step. It turns OFF the previous control bit and
turns ON the next control bit B, for the next step, thereby starting step B (all
instructions after STEP(008) B).
Ending the Step Programming Area
When SNXT(009) is placed at the very end of the step programming area, it
ends step execution and turns OFF the previous control bit. The control bit
specified for B is a dummy bit. This bit will however be turned ON, so be sure
to select a bit that will not cause problems.
STEP(008)
STEP(008) functionS in following 2 ways, depending on its position and
whether or not a control bit has been specified.
1,2,3... 1. Starts a specific step.

2. Ends the step programming area (i.e., step execution).
Starting a Step
STEP(008) is placed at the beginning of each step with an operand, B, that
serves as the control bit for the step.
The control bit B will be turned ON by SNXT(009) and the instruction in the
step will be executed from the one immediately following STEP(008). A20012
(Step Flag) will also turn ON when execution of a step begins.
After the first cycle, step execution will continue until the conditions for chang-
ing the step are established, i.e., until the SNXT(009) instruction turns ON the
control bit in the next STEP(008).
When SNXT (009) turns ON the control bit for a step, the control bit B of the
current instruction will be reset (turned OFF) and the step controlled by bit B
will become interlocked.
Handling of outputs and instructions in a step will change according to the
ON/OFF status of the control bit B. (The status of the control bit is controlled
by SNXT(009)). When control bit B is turned OFF, the instructions in the step
are reset and are interlocked. Refer to the following tables.
Control bit status Handling
ON Instructions in the step are executed normally.
ON→OFF Bits and instructions in the step are interlocked
as shown in the next table.
OFF All instructions in the step are processed as
NOPs.
911
Interlock Status (IL)

Instruction output Status
Bits specified for OUT, OUT NOT All OFF
TIM, TIMX(551), TIMH(015), PV 0000 hex (reset)
TIMHX(551), TMHH(540), TIM- Completion Flag OFF (reset)
HHX(552), TIML(542), and TIMLX(553)
TIMU(541), TIMUX(556), TMUH(544), PV Cannot be read.
and TMUHX(557) Completion Flag OFF (reset)
(CJ1-H-R CPU Units only)
Bits or words specified for other instructions (see note) Holds the previous sta-
tus (but the instructions
are not executed)
Note Indicates all other instructions, such as TTIM(087), TTIMX(555), MTIM(543),

MTIMX(554), SET, REST, CNT, CNTX(546), CNTR(012), CNTRX(548),
SFT(010), and KEEP(011).
The STEP(008) instruction must be placed at the beginning of each step.
STEP(008) is placed at the beginning of a step area to define the start of the
step.
Ending the Step Programming Area
STEP(008) is placed at the end of the step programming area without an
operand to define the end of step programming When the control bit preced-
ing a SNXT(009) instruction is turned OFF, step execute is stopped by
SNXT(009).
Flags:STEP(008)
Error Flag ER ON when the specified bit B is not in the WR area.
ON when STEP(008) is used in an interrupt program.
Flags:SNXT(009)
Error Flag ER ON when the specified bit B is not in the WR area.
ON when SNXT(009) is used in an interrupt program.
Precautions The control bit, B, must be in the Work Area for STEP(008)/SNXT(009).
A control bit for STEP(008)/SNXT(009) cannot be use anywhere else in the
ladder diagram. If the same bit is used twice, as duplication bit error will occur.
If SBS(091) is used to call a subroutine from within a step, the subroutine out-
puts and instructions will not be interlocked when the control bit turns OFF.
Control bits within one section of step programming must be sequential and
from the same word.
SNXT(009) will be executed only once, i.e., on the rising edge of the execution
condition.
Input SNXT(009) at the end of the step programming area and make sure that
the control bit is a dummy bit in the Work Area. If a control bit for a step is
used in the last SNXT(009) in the step programming area, the corresponding
step will be started when SNXT(009) is executed.
An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if the operand B specified
for SNXT(009) or STEP(008) is not in the Work Area or if the step program
has been placed anywhere but in a cyclic task.
912
A20012 (Step Flag) is turned ON for one cycle when STEP(008) is executed.
This flag can be used to conduct initialization once the step execution has
started.
Placement Conditions for Step Programming Areas (STEP B to STEP)
STEP(008) and SNXT(009) cannot be used inside of subroutines, interrupt
programs, or block programs.
Be sure that two steps are not executed during the same cycle.
Instructions that Cannot be Used Within Step Programs
The instructions that cannot be used within step programs are listed in the fol-
lowing table.
Function Mnemonic Name
Sequence Control Instruc- END(001) END
tions IL(002) INTERLOCK
ILC(003 INTERLOCK CLEAR
JMP(004) JUMP
JME(005) JUMP END
CJP(510) CONDITIONAL JUMP
CJPN(511) CONDITIONAL JUMP
NOT
JMP0(515) MULTIPLE JUMP
JME0(516) MULTIPLE JUMP END
Subroutine Instructions SBN(092) SUBROUTINE ENTRY
RET(093) SUBROUTINE RETURN
Start
1 cycle
Related Bits
Name Address Details
Step Flag A20012 ON for one cycle when a
step program is started
using STEP(008). Can be
used to reset timers and
perform other processing
when starting a new step.
913
Step a starts when C turns ON
A executed
When d turns ON, b starts (A is interlocked)
B executed
e turns ON (B is interlocked)
End of step programming area
Normal ladder
program Returns to normal ladder program
914
CIO 00000 turns ON, step W00000 starts
Step W00000 starts from the next instruction
Step (A) ladder program Step W00000

W00000 turns OFF, W00001 turns ON and step W00001 starts
Step W00001 starts from the next instruction
Step (B) ladder program Step W00001
W00001 turns OFF and dummy bit W10000 turns ON
Normal ladder program
Examples Sequential Control
000001 (Step (A) starting condition)
Step (A) W00000
000002 (Step (A) → Step (B) transition condition)
Step (B) W00001
000003 (Step (B) → Step (C) transition condition)
Step (C) W00002
000004 (Step (C) reset conditions)
End
915
Step W00000 (A)
Step (A) ladder program
Step W00001 (B)

Step (B) ladder program
Step W00002 (C)

Step (C) ladder program
Branching Control
000001 (Step (A) 000002 (Step (B) starting condition)

starting condition)
Step (A) W00000 Step (B) W00001
000003 (Step (A) →

Step (C) transition 000004 (Step (B) → Step (C) transition condition)
condition)
Step (C) W00002
End
916
Step W00000
(A)
Step W00001
Step (B) ladder program (B)
Step W00002
(C)
The above programming is used when steps A and B cannot be executed

simultaneously. For simultaneous execution of A and B, delete the execution
conditions illustrated below.
000002 000001
Note In the above example, where SNXT(009) is executed for W00002, the branch-
ing moves onto the next steps even though the same control bit is used twice.
This is not picked up as an error in the program check using the CX-Program-
mer. A duplicate bit error will only occur in a step ladder program only when a
control bit in a step instructions is also used in the normal ladder diagram.
917
Parallel Control
000001 (Step (A), (C) simultaneous starting condition)
Step (A) W00000 Step (C) W00002
000002 (Step (A) →

Step (B) transition 000003 (Step (C) → Step (D)
condition) transition condition)
Step (B) W00001 Step (D) W00002
000004 (When both Step (B) and Step (D)

are complete, moves to Step (E)
Step (E) W00004
End
918
Step W00000 (A)

Step W00001
Step (B) ladder program (B)
Step W00002 (C)

Step W00003
(D)
Step (D) ladder program
Step (E) ladder program Step W00004

(E)
919
Application Examples The following three examples demonstrate the three types of execution con-
trol possible with step programming. Example 1 demonstrates sequential exe-
cution; Example 2, branching execution; and Example 3, parallel execution.
Example 1: The following process requires that three processes, loading, part installation,
Sequential Execution and inspection/discharge, be executed in sequence with each process being
reset before continuing on the next process. Various sensors (SW1, SW2,
SW3, and SW4) are positioned to signal when processes are to start and end.
Solenoid 1 Robot hand
Solenoid 2
Photomicro-
SW 1 sensor
SW 2 SW 4
SW 3
Conveyor belt 1 Conveyor belt 2 Conveyor belt 3
Loading Part installation Inspection/discharge
The following diagram demonstrates the flow of processing and the switches
that are used for execution control.
SW1
Process A Loading
SW2
Process B Part Installation
SW3
Process C Inspection/discharge
SW4
End
The program for this process, shown below, utilizes the most basic type of
step programming: each step is completed by a unique SNXT(009) that starts
the next step. Each step starts when the switch that indicates the previous
step has been completed turns ON.
920

Process
A started. 000000 @LD 000001
000001 SNXT(009) W00000
000002 STEP(008) W00000
Process A
Programming for process A 000100 LD 000002

000101 SNXT(009) W00001
000102 STEP(008) W00001
Process
A reset.
Process Process B
B started.
000100 LD 000003
000101 SNXT(009) W00002
000102 STEP(008) W00002
Programming for process B

Process C
000200 LD 000004
Process
B reset. 000201 SNXT(009) W00003
Process 000202 STEP(008) W00003
C started.
Programming for process C
Process
C reset.
Example 2: The following process requires that a product is processed in one of two ways,
Branching Execution depending on its weight, before it is printed. The printing process is the same
regardless of which of the first processes is used. Various sensors are posi-
tioned to signal when processes are to start and end.
Printer
SW C1
SW D
Guide SW A1 SW A2
SW C2
Process A
Conveyer A
Process B
Conveyer B
SW B1 SW B2
Weight scale
Process C
921
that are used for execution control. Here, either process A or process B is
used depending on the status of SW A1 and SW B1.
SW A1 SW B1
Process A Process B
SW A2 SW B2
Process C
SW D
End
922
The program for this process, shown below, starts with two SNXT(009)
instructions that start processes A and B. Because of the way CIO 000001
(SW A1) and CIO 000002 (SW B1) are programmed, only one of these will be
executed with an ON execution condition to start either process A or process
B. Both of the steps for these processes end with a SNXT(009) that starts the
step (process C).

000000 @LD 000001
Process 000001 AND NOT 000002
A started. 000002 SNXT(009) 010000
000003 LD NOT 000001
000004 @AND 000002
000005 SNXT(009) 010001
000006 STEP(008) 010000
Process A
Programming for process A
000100 LD 000003
000101 SNXT(009) 010002
Process
000102 STEP(008) 010001
A reset.
Process
C started. Process B
000100 LD 000004
000101 SNXT(009) 010002
000102 STEP(008) 010002
Process C
Process B
reset. 000200 LD 000005
Process C 000201 SNXT(009) 024614
started.
000202 STEP(008) ---
Process
C reset.
Note In the above programming, CIO 010002 is used in two

SNXT(009) instructions. This will not produce a duplication
error during the program check.
923
Example 3: The following process requires that two parts of a product pass simulta-
Parallel Execution neously through two processes each before they are joined together in a fifth
process. Various sensors are positioned to signal when processes are to start
and end.
SW1 SW3 Conveyer B SW5 SW7
Process A
Conveyer A
Process B
Process E
Conveyer E
Process D
Process C
SW4 Conveyer D SW6
SW2 Conveyer C
that are used for execution control. Here, process A and process C are started
together. When process A finishes, process B starts; when process C fin-
ishes, process D starts. When both processes B and D have finished, process
E starts.
SW 1 and SW2 both ON
Process A Process C
SW3 SW4
Process B Process D
SW5 and SW6 both ON
Process E
SW7
End
The program for this operation, shown below, starts with two SNXT(009)
instructions that start processes A and C. These instructions branch from the
same instruction line and are always executed together, starting steps for both
A and C. When the steps for both A and C have finished, the steps for process
B and D begin immediately.
When both process B and process D have finished (i.e., when SW5 and SW6
turn ON), processes B and D are reset together by the SNXT(009) at the end
of the programming for process B. Although there is no SNXT(009) at the end
of process D, the control bit for it is turned OFF by executing SNXT(009)
W00004. This is because the OUT for bit W00003 is in the step reset by
SNXT(009) W00004, i.e., W00003 is turned OFF when SNXT(009) W00004
is executed. Process B is thus reset directly and process D is reset indirectly
before executing the step for process E.
924
Process A Address Instruction Operands

started.
Process C 000000 @LD 000001
started. 000001 SNXT(009) W00000
000002 SNXT(009) W00002
000003 STEP(008) W00000
Process A
000100 LD 000002
000101 SNXT(009) W00001
Programming for process A
000102 STEP(008) W00001
Process A
reset. Process B
Process B
started. 000100 LD 000003
000101 OUT W00003
000101 AND 000004
000101 SNXT(009) W00004
000102 STEP(008) W00002
W00003 W00003 Used to
turn off
process D. Process C
000200 LD 000003
Process E
started. 000201 SNXT(009) W00003
000202 STEP(008) W00003
Process D
000300 STEP(008) W00004

Process E
Process C
reset. 000400 LD 000005
Process D 000401 SNXT(009) 024613
started. 000402 STEP(008) ---
W00003
Programming for process D
Programming for process E
Process E
reset.
925
Basic I/O Unit Instructions Section 3-23
3-23 Basic I/O Unit Instructions

This section describes instructions used with I/O Units.
I/O REFRESH IORF 097 926
SPECIAL I/O UNIT I/O REFRESH FIORF 225 929
CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH DLNK 226 932
7-SEGMENT DECODER SDEC 078 937
INTELLIGENT I/O READ IORD 222 962
INTELLIGENT I/O WRITE IOWR 223 967
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT DSW 210 940
TEN KEY INPUT TKY 211 945
HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT HKY 212 948
MATRIX INPUT MTR 213 953
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT 7SEG 214 957
3-23-1 I/O REFRESH: IORF(097)

Purpose Refreshes the specified I/O words.
Ladder Symbol
IORF(097)
E E: End word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition IORF(097)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @IORF(097)

OK OK OK OK
Operands St: Starting Word

CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 (I/O Bit Area) or
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 (Special I/O Unit Bit Area)
E: End Word
CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 (I/O Bit Area) or
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 (Special I/O Unit Bit Area)
Note St and E must be in the same memory area.
Area St E
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959
Auxiliary Area ---
Special Bit Area ---
Timer Area ---
926
Area St E
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM addresses ---
in binary
Indirect DM/EM addresses ---
in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Indirect addressing using ,IR0 to IR15
Index Registers –2048 to +2047, IR0 to IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to IR15,
IR0 to IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to IR15
Description IORF(097) refreshes the I/O words between St and E, inclusively. IORF(097)
is used to refresh words allocated to Basic I/O Units or Special I/O Units
mounted on the CPU Rack or Expansion Racks. IORF(097) cannot be used to
refresh words in both areas at the same time (i.e., with the same instruction).
Basic I/O Units are allocated words between CIO 0000 and CIO 0999, and
Special I/O Units are allocated words between CIO 2000 and CIO 2959.
When refreshing is specified for words in the Special I/O Unit bit area, all 10
words allocated to the Unit will be refreshed as long as the first word of the 10
words allocated to the Unit is included in the specified range of words.
I/O bit area or I/O Unit or
Special I/O Unit bit area Special I/O Unit
St I/O refreshing
If words for which there is no Unit mounted exist between St and E, nothing
will be done for those words and only the words allocated to Units will be
refreshed.
Both C200H Special I/O Units and CS Special I/O Units can be refreshed
using the same instruction. (CS Series only)
All of the words allocated to C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units must be
refreshed at one time. The Unit’s I/O words will be refreshed if the first word
allocated to the Unit is in the specified range of I/O words. (The Unit’s words
will not be refreshed if the starting word is after the first word allocated to the
Unit, but they will be refreshed even if the end word is before the last word
allocated to the Unit.) (CS Series only)
IORF(097) can be used in interrupt tasks, allowing high-speed response for
the specific I/O words refreshed in the interrupt task. (See Precautions.)
927
Comparison with The following table shows how IORF(097) differs from FIORF(225) and
FIORF(225) and DLNK(226).
DLNK(226) Instruction Operation
IORF(097) • I/O refreshing of words used by Basic I/O Units
• I/O refreshing of the CIO words and DM words used by Special
I/O Units
FIORF(225) • I/O refreshing of the CIO words and DM words used by a Spe-
cial I/O Unit
DLNK(226) • I/O refreshing of the CS1 CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area
(25 words)
• I/O refreshing of the CS1 CPU Bus Unit Area in the DM Area
(100 words)
• Refreshing of data specific to the CPU Bus Unit, such as data
link data or DeviceNet Remote I/O Communications data
Applicable Units The following Units can be refreshed with IORF(097). These Unit can be
refreshed only when they are on the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack. They
cannot be refreshed if they are on Slave Racks.
CS-series Basic I/O Units, C200H Basic I/O Units (CS Series only), C200H
Group-2 High-density I/O Units (CS Series only), CJ-series Basic I/O Units,
and Special I/O Units (including High-density Units. All words allocated to the
Units can be refreshed.)
Note The Units that can be refreshed with IORF(097) are not necessarily the same
as the Units that can be refreshed with immediate refreshing specifications (!).
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if St is greater than E.
ON if St and E are in different memory areas.
With the CS1D CPU Units: ON if the active and standby
CPU Units could not be synchronized.
Precautions An error will occur if words in both the I/O Bit Area (CIO 0000 to CIO 0999)
and the Special I/O Unit Bit Area (CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) are specified for
the same instruction.
I/O refreshing will not be performed for Units for which an I/O table error has
occurred. (CS Series only)
The I/O refreshing initiated by IORF(097) will be stopped midway if an I/O bus
error occurs during I/O refreshing.
IORF(097) can be used in an interrupt task, which allows high-speed process-
ing of specific I/O data with an interrupt. If IORF(097) is used in an interrupt
task, always disable cyclic refreshing of the specified Special I/O Unit by turn-
ing ON the corresponding Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing Disable Bit in the
PLC Setup.
When cyclic refreshing of the specified Special I/O Unit is enabled in the PLC
Setup (the corresponding Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing Disable Bit is
OFF), a non-fatal Duplicate Refresh Error will occur and the Interrupt Task
Error Flag (A40213) will go ON in the following cases.
• Words allocated to the same Special I/O Unit were already refreshed by
IORF(097) or FIORF(225).
• Words allocated to the same Special I/O Unit were read or written by
IORD(222) or IOWR(223).
928
When cyclic refreshing of a Special I/O Unit is disabled, execute IORF(097) or

FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only) to refresh the Unit’s data within 11
seconds after program execution starts. If IORF(097) or FIORF(225) is not
executed within 11 seconds to refresh the Unit’s data, a CPU Unit Monitor
Error will occur in the Special I/O Unit and the ERH and RUN Indicators will be
lit.
Examples Refreshing Words in the I/O Bit Area

The following example shows how to refresh 16 words from CIO 0015 to
CIO 0030 when CIO 000000 turns ON.
I/O Unit
St:
St I/O refreshing
E
E:
Refreshing Words in the Special I/O Unit Bit Area

The following example shows how to refresh 30 words from CIO 2000 to
CIO 2029 when CIO 000000 turns ON.
Special I/O Unit
St:
I/O refreshing
St
E
E:
3-23-2 SPECIAL I/O UNIT I/O REFRESH: FIORF(225)

Purpose Performs I/O refreshing immediately for the specified Special I/O Unit’s allo-
cated CIO Area and DM Area words.t with the specified unit number.
This instruction is supported by the CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
Ladder Symbol
FIORF(225)
N N: Unit number
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FIORF(225)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FIORF(225)

Function block Block program Step program Subroutin Interrupt
definitions areas areas es tasks
OK OK OK OK OK
Operands N: Unit number

Specifies the Special I/O Unit’s unit number (0000 to 005F hex or 0 to 95 dec-
imal).
Note If the Special I/O Unit uses more than one unit number, specify the lowest unit
number.
929
Area N
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #005F (binary) or 0 to 95 (decimal)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description FIORF(225) performs immediate I/O refreshing of the CIO Area words and
DM Area words allocated to the Special I/O Unit with the unit number speci-
fied by N. Refer to the Special I/O Unit’s Operation Manual for details on the
data area words that are immediately refreshed.
CPU Unit Special I/O Unit
with unit number N
Words allocated to Special I/O Unit
with unit number N
Allocated CIO Area words
Refresh
Allocated DM Area words
930
The following table shows how FIORF(225) differs from IORF(097) and
DLNK(226).
Instruction Operation
I/O Units
cial I/O Unit
(25 words)
(100 words)
FIORF(225) and IORF(097) both refresh the words allocated to Special I/O
Units, but differ in the following ways.
• FIORF(225) has a faster instruction execution time.
• WIth FIORF(225), the relevant words are specified by the unit number
rather than word addresses.
Purpose A Special I/O Unit’s regular cyclic I/O refreshing can be disabled in the PLC
Setup (by turning ON the Unit’s Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refresh Disable Bit),
and I/O refreshing can be performed with the Unit only when necessary by
executing FIORF(225). This function allows a particular Special I/O Unit’s data
to be refreshed when necessary, without increasing the cyclic I/O refreshing
time at other times.
Units Refreshed by
FIORF(225) Unit type (See note.) Refreshable by FIORF(255)
Basic I/O Units No
The following areas allocated to a Special I/O Unit Yes
(The words allocated to the specified Unit are
refreshed together.)
• Allocated CIO Area words
• Allocated DM Area words
CPU Bus Units No
Note This table applies to Units mounted in a CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack. It
does not apply to Units mounted in a SYSMAC Bus Slave Rack.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified unit number is not between 0000 and
005F hex (between 0 and 95 decimal).
ON if the PLC does not have a Special I/O Unit with the
unit number specified by N.
ON if the specified Special I/O Unit uses more is allocated
words for two or more unit numbers, but the unit number
specified by N is not the lowest of those unit numbers.
Equals Flag = ON if the I/O refreshing was completed normally.
OFF if FIORF(225) was executed while the specified Spe-
cial I/O Unit was being refreshed during cyclic refreshing.
Precautions I/O refreshing by FIORF(225) will be stopped if an I/O Bus Error occurs while
during I/O refreshing.
931
FIORF(225) can be used in an interrupt task, which allows high-speed pro-

cessing of specific I/O data with an interrupt. If FIORF(225) is used in an inter-
rupt task, always disable cyclic refreshing of the specified Special I/O Unit by
turning ON the corresponding Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing Disable Bit in
the PLC Setup.
IORF(097) or FIORF(225).
When cyclic refreshing of a Special I/O Unit is disabled, execute IORF(097) or
FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only) to refresh the Unit’s data within 11
seconds after program execution starts. If IORF(097) or FIORF(225) is not
executed within 11 seconds to refresh the Unit’s data, a CPU Unit Monitor
Error will occur in the Special I/O Unit and the ERH and RUN Indicators will be
lit.
Operation Examples When CIO 000000 is ON, FIORF(225) immediately refreshes the CIO Area
and DM Area words allocated to the Special I/O Unit set as unit number 0.
000000
FIORF
N &0
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit
Words allocated to Special I/O Unit with unit number 0
with unit number 0
Allocated CIO Area words
Refresh
Allocated DM Area words
3-23-3 CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH: DLNK(226)

Purpose Performs I/O refreshing immediately for the CPU Bus Unit with the specified
unit number. The following data is refreshed.
• The words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit in the PLC’s CPU Bus Unit
Areas (25 words in the CIO Area and 100 words in the DM Area)
• Specific data refreshing for Units such as Units that support data links
only.
Ladder Symbol
DLNK(226)
N: Unit number
N
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DLNK(226)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DLNK(226)
932

OK OK OK OK
Operands N: Unit number

Specifies the CPU Bus Unit’s unit number (0000 to 000F hex or 0 to 15 deci-
mal).
Area N
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #000F (binary) or 0 to 15 (decimal)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description DLNK(226) performs immediate I/O refreshing for the CPU Bus Unit with the
specified unit number. The data listed below is refreshed. Refer to the Precau-
tions below for details on the execution conditions to use for immediate
refreshing.
1. The words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit in the PLC’s CPU Bus Unit Areas
(25 words in the CIO Area and 100 words in the DM Area)
2. Data specific the CPU Bus Unit such as data link data or DeviceNet Re-
mote I/O Communications data (refreshed together with the data in the
CPU Bush Unit Areas)
CPU Bus Unit Data refreshing specific to the Unit
Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC Data link refreshing
Link Unit
DeviceNet Unit Remote I/O communications refreshing
(Does not include C200H
DeviceNet Master Units.)
933
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit with
Data areas used by the CPU unit number N
Bus Unit with unit number N
Words allocated
in CIO Area
Refresh
Words allocated
in DM Area
Data link area
The following table shows how DLNK(226) differs from FIORF(225) and
IORF(097).
Instruction Operation
I/O Units
cial I/O Unit
(25 words)
(100 words)
DLNK(226) refreshes data between the CPU Unit and specified CPU Bus
Unit. There are two special factors to consider when using DLNK(226):
1,2,3... 1. When exchanging data through a data link or DeviceNet remote I/O com-
munications, the data exchange is not performed with the other Units at the
same time that DLNK(226) is executed. The data exchange will be per-
formed when the network communications cycle reaches the Unit in ques-
tion and data is exchanged with that Unit. Consequently, the actual data
exchange may be delayed by as much as the communications cycle time
of the network.
2. DLNK(226) cannot perform I/O refreshing with a CPU Bus Unit if that Unit
is currently exchanging data. If DLNK(226) is executed too frequently, I/O
refreshing will not be performed. We recommend allowing a delay between
executions of DLNK(226) that is longer than the communications cycle
time.
934
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the specified unit number is not between 0000 and
000F hex (between 0 and 15 decimal).
ON if the PLC does not have a CPU Bus Unit with the
specified unit number.
Equals Flag = OFF if the I/O refreshing could not be performed because
the CPU Bus Unit was refreshing data.
OFF if there was a CPU Bus Unit Error or CPU Bus Unit
Setup Error in the specified CPU Bus Unit.
OFF if DLNK(226) was executed in an interrupt task,
there was a conflict with regular I/O refreshing, and over-
lapping refreshing occurred.
ON if the I/O refreshing was completed normally.
Precautions I/O refreshing will not be performed if a CPU Bus Unit Error (A40207) or CPU
Bus Unit Setup Error (A40203) has occurred in the specified CPU Bus Unit.
I/O refreshing will be stopped if an I/O Bus Error occurs while I/O refreshing is
being performed by DLNK(226).
DLNK(226) refreshes data between the CPU Unit and specified CPU Bus
Unit. Some time is required for the data exchange with the CPU Bus Unit (for
example, a data link with a Controller Link Unit).
If the specified CPU Bus Unit is exchanging data, DLNK(226) will not be exe-
cuted and the Equals Flag will be turned OFF. We recommend programming
the execution conditions shown below so that the execution of DLNK(226) will
be retried automatically.
Execution
condition b
DLNK
N
Equals Flag
a a
Equals Flag b
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, DLNK(226) performs

immediate I/O refreshing (in this case, data link refreshing within the PLC) for
the CPU Bus Unit with unit number 1 (in this case, a Controller Link Unit).If I/O
refreshing cannot be performed because the Controller Link Unit is refreshing
data, the Equals Flag will be turned OFF causing W001 to be turned ON so
that the instruction execution will be retried in the next cycle. When the I/O
refreshing is completed normally, the Equals Flag will be turned ON and the
instruction will not be retried in the next cycle.
935
000000 W000
DLNK
&1
Equals Flag
W001 W001
Equals Flag
W000
Controller Link Unit

000000 with unit number 1
DLNK
Refresh
&1
Data link
refreshing
Data link area
Controller Link
The actual timing for data link area refreshing in this example is as follows:
• When transmitting: Data is transmitted over the network the next time that
the token right is acquired. (The transmitted data is delayed up to 1 com-
munications cycle time max.)
• When receiving: The data that is input was received from the network the
last time that the token right was acquired. (The data received is delayed
up to 1 communications cycle time max.)
Examples of Data Transfer Processing:
• Transferring Data from the Previous I/O Refreshing
Cycle time Refreshing data link
data within PLC
Data transfer processing

Data link
One communications
cycle time
936
• Transferring Data with Execution of DLNK(226)

Cycle time
Refreshing data link
data within PLC
Data transfer processing

Data link
One communications
cycle time
3-23-4 7-SEGMENT DECODER: SDEC(078)

Purpose Converts the hexadecimal contents of the designated digit(s) into 8-bit, 7-seg-
ment display code and places it into the upper or lower 8-bits of the specified
destination words.
Ladder Symbol
SDEC(078)
S S: Source word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SDEC(078)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SDEC(078)

OK OK OK OK
Operands: Digit Designator

15 12 11 87 43 0
Di 0 1/0 m n
First digit of S to convert (0 to 3)

0: Digit 0 (bits 0 to 3 of S)
Number of digits to convert
0 to 3: 1 to 4 digits
First half of D to receive converted data
0: Rightmost 8 bits (1st half)
1: Leftmost 8 bits (2nd half)
Not used; set to 0.
937
Area S Di D
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM @D00000 to @D32767
addresses in binary @E00000 to @E32767
@En_00000 to @En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
only
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SDEC(078) regards the data specified by S as 4-digit hexadecimal data, con-
verts the digits specified in S by Di (first digit and number of digits) to 7-seg-
ment data and outputs the results to D in the bits specified in Di.
Di
Number of digits
First digit to convert
Rightmost 8 bits (0)
7-segment
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if settings in Di are not within the specified ranges.
938
Precautions If more than one digit is specified for conversion in Di, digits are converted in
order toward the most-significant digit. Digit 0 is the next digit after digit 3.
Results are stored in D in order from the specified portion toward higher-
address words. If just one of the bytes in a destination word receives con-
verted data, the other byte is left unchanged.
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, the contents of the 3
digits beginning with digit 1 in D00100 will be converted from hexadecimal
data to 7-segment data, and the results will be output to the upper byte of
D00200 and both bytes of D00201. The specifications of the bytes to be con-
verted and the location of the output bytes are made in CIO 0100.
Di
Di: 0100 3
S: D00100
Hexadecimal to 7-segment data conversion

(F 71, 1 06, and 2 5B)
D:
939
7-segment Data The following table shows the data conversions from a hexadecimal digit (4
bits) to 7-segment code (8 bits).
Original data Converted code (segments) Display
Original data
Digit Bits – g f e d c b a Hex
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 3F LSB
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 06 1 a
a
2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 5B 1 b
1 c f b
3 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 4F g
1 d
4 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 66
1 e e c
5 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 6D
1 f
6 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 7D d
1 g
7 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 27
0
8 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
MSB
9 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 6F
A 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 77
B 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 7C
C 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 39
D 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 5E
E 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 79
F 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 71
3-23-5 DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT – DSW(210)

Purpose Reads the value set on a external digital switch (or thumbwheel switch) con-
nected to an I/O Unit and stores the 4-digit or 8-digit value in the specified
words.
Ladder Symbol
DSW(210)
I I: Input word
O O: Output word
D D: First result word
C1 C1: Number of digits
C2 C2: System word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DSW(210)
940

Operands I: Input Word (Data Line D0 to D3 Inputs)

Specify the input word allocated to the Input Unit and connect the digital
switch’s D0 to D3 data lines to the Input Unit as shown in the following dia-
gram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
I − − − − − − − −
D3 D0
D2 D1
Leftmost 4 digits D1 D2 Rightmost 4 digits
D0 D3
O: Output Word (CS/RD Control Signal Outputs)

Specify the output word allocated to the Output Unit and connect the digital
switch’s control signals (CS and RD signals) to the Output Unit as shown in
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
O − − − − − − − − − −
CS0
CS1
One Round Flag CS2 CS signals
RD0 Read signal CS3
D: First Result Word

Specifies the leading word address where the external digital switch’s set val-
ues will be stored.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D+1
(See note.)
Note: Only when C1 = 0001 hex to read 8 digits.
C1: Number of Digits

Specifies the number of digits that will be read from the external digital switch.
Set C1 to 0000 hex to read 4 digits or 0001 hex to read 8 digits.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C1
Number of digits
0000 hex: 4 digits
0001 hex: 8 digits
C2: System Word

Specifies a work word used by the instruction. This word cannot be used in
any other application.
941
15 0
C2
System word
(Cannot be accessed by the user.)
Area I O D C1 C2
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 --- CIO 0000 to
CIO 6143
Work Area W000 to W511 --- W000 to W511
Holding Bit Area H000 to H511 --- H000 to H511
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to A448 to A953 --- A448 to A959
A959
Timer Area T0000 to T4095 --- T0000 to T4095
Counter Area C0000 to C4095 --- C0000 to C4095
DM Area D00000 to D32767 --- D00000 to
D32767
EM Area without E00000 to E32767 --- E00000 to
bank E32767
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_32767 --- En_00000 to
(n = 0 to C) En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM @ D00000 to @ D32767 --- @ D00000 to @
addresses in binary @ E00000 to @ E32767 D32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767 @ E00000 to @
E32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM *D00000 to *D32767 --- ---
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- 0000 or ---
0001 hex
Data Registers DR0 to DR15 DR0 to DR15
Index Registers ---
Indirect addressing ,IR0 to ,IR15 ,IR0 to ,IR15
using Index Regis- –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 –2048 to +2047
ters to –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to
,IR15 +2047 ,IR15
DR0 to DR15, IR0 to DR0 to DR15, IR0
IR15 to IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR0+(++) to
,IR15+(++) ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– – ,–(– –)IR0 to, –(–
)IR15 –)IR15
Description DSW(210) outputs control signals to bits 00 to 04 of O, reads the specified

number of digits (either 4-digit or 8-digit, specified in C1) of digital switch data
line data from I, and stores the result in D and D+1. (If 4 digits are read, the
result is stored in D. If 8 digits are read, the result is stored in D and D+1.)
942
DSW(210) reads the 4-digit or 8-digit switch data once every 16 cycles, and
then starts over and continues reading the data. The One Round Flag (bit 05
of O) is turned ON once every 16 CPU Unit cycles.
DSW(210) reads the 4-digit or 8-digit data once in 16 cycles, and then starts
over and reads the data again in the next 16 cycles.
When executed, DSW(210) begins reading the switch data from the first of the
sixteen cycles, regardless of the point at which the last instruction was
stopped.
There is no restriction on the number of times that DSW(210) can appear in
the program (unlike the C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H Series).
External Connections Connect the digital switch or thumbwheel switch to Input Unit contacts 0 to 7
and Output Unit contacts 0 to 4, as shown in the following diagram. The fol-
lowing example illustrates connections for an A7B Thumbwheel Switch.
ID212 Input Unit

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A7B
10
11
Thumbwheel
Switch
12
13 8 4 21
14
15 OD212
COM
COM Switch no. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Output Unit DC
COM
Note The data read signal is not connected in this example.
The inputs and outputs can be connected to the following kinds of Basic I/O
Units and High-density I/O Units as long as they are not mounted in a SYS-
MAC BUS Remote I/O Rack.
• DC Input Units with 8 or more input points
• Transistor Output Units with 8 or more output points
943
Timing Chart
I
Four digits: 00 to 03
100 101 102 103 Input data
Eight digits: 00 to 03, 04 to 07 Leftmost Rightmost
4 digits 4 digits
O
D+1 D
00
When only 4 digits are read,
only word D is used.
01
CS signals
02
03
04 RD (read) signal
05 One Round Flag
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
16 cycles to complete one round of execution
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions Do not read or write the system word (C2) from any other instruction.
DSW(210) will not operate correctly if the system word is accessed by another
instruction. The system word is not initialized by DSW(210) in the first cycle
when program execution starts. If DSW(210) is being used from the first cycle,
clear the system word from the program.
DSW(210) will not operate correctly if I/O refreshing is not performed with the
Input Unit and Output Unit connected to the digital switch or thumbwheel
switch after DSW(210) is executed. Consequently, set the input time constant
for the Input Units used for the data line input word to a value that is shorter
than the cycle time, or do not connect the digital switch or thumbwheel switch
to the following Units.
• Basic I/O Units or High-density I/O Units mounted in a SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slave Rack
• Communications Slaves (DeviceNet or CompoBus/S Slaves)
Example In this example, DSW(210) is used to read an 8-digit number from a digital
switch and outputs the resulting value constantly to D00000 and D00001. The
digital switch is connected through CIO 0100 (allocated to a CS1W-ID211 16-
point DC Input Unit) and CIO 0200 (allocated to a CS1W-OD211 16-point
Transistor Output Unit).
944
Since 8 digits of data are being read, C1 (D32000 in this case) is set to 0001
hex. D32001 is used as the system word.
P_On
DSW(210)
Always ON Flag I 0100
O 0200
D D00000
C1 D32000
C2 D32001
3-23-6 TEN KEY INPUT – TKY(211)

Purpose Reads numeric data from a ten-key keypad connected to an Input Unit and
stores up to 8 digits of BCD data in the specified words.
Ladder Symbol
TKY(211)
I I: Input word
D1 D1: First register word
D2 D2: Key input word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TKY(211)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TKY(211)

Operands I: Input Word (Data Line Inputs)

Specify the input word allocated to the Input Unit and connect the ten-key key-
pad’s 0 to 9 data lines to the Input Unit as shown in the following diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
I − − − − − −
9 0
8 1
7 2
6 3 Bits 00 to 09 correspond
4 to keys 0 to 9.
5
D1: First Register Word

Specifies the leading word address where the ten-key keypad’s numeric input
(up to 8 digits) will be stored.
945
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D1
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D1+1
D2: Key Input Word

Bits 00 to 10 of D2 indicate key inputs. When one of the keys on the keypad (0
to 9) has been pressed, the corresponding bit of D2 (0 to 9) is turned ON. Bit
10 of D2 will be ON while any key is being pressed.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D2 − − − − −
ON when any
key is pressed. 0
1
9 2
8 3 ON when the corre-
ON when the corresponding key is press-
sponding key is press- 7 4
6 5 ed. (Remains on until
ed. (Remains on until another key is pressed.)
another key is pressed.)
Note TKY(211) does not require a system word, unlike other I/O instructions such
as HKY(212).
Area I D1 D2
6143 6142 6143
D32767 D32766 D32767
E32767 E32766 E32767
En_32767 En_32766 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
946
Area I D1 D2
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description TKY(211) reads numeric data from input word I, which is allocated to a ten-
key keypad connected to an Input Unit, and stores up to 8 digits of BCD data
in register words D1 and D1+1. In addition, each time that a key is pressed,
the corresponding bit in D2 (0 to 9) will be turned ON and remains ON until
another key is pressed. Bit 10 of D2 will be ON while any key is being pressed
and OFF when no key is being pressed.
The two-word register in D1 and D1+1 operates as an 8-digit shift register.
When a key is pressed on the ten-key keypad, the corresponding BCD digit is
shifted into the least significant digit of D1. The other digits of D1, D1+1 are
shifted left and the most significant digit of D1+1 is lost.
When executed, TKY(211) begins reading the key input data from the first
cycle, regardless of the point at which the last instruction was stopped.
When one of the keypad keys is being pressed, input from the other keys is
disabled.
There is no restriction on the number of times that TKY(211) can appear in
External Connections Connect the ten-key keypad so that the switches for keys 0 through 9 are
input to contacts 0 through 9 of the Input Unit, as shown in the following dia-
gram.
ID212 0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 9
12
13
14 10-key
15
COM
COM
0V
DC Input Unit
The Input Unit must be a DC Input Unit or High-density Input Unit with at least
16 inputs and the Input Unit cannot be mounted in a SYSMAC BUS Remote
I/O Rack.
947
Timing Chart
I
D1+1 D1
00
Before
execution 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
01
02 Input from 10-key
to 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
(1)
09
"1" key input
D2
(2) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
00
01 Turn ON flags corre- "0" key input

sponding to 10-key
inputs (The flags re- (3) 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2
02 main ON until the
to next input.)
"2" key input
09
(4) 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 9
10 ON if a key is pressed.
"9" key input

(1) (2) (3) (4)
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions TKY(211) will not operate correctly if I/O refreshing is not performed Input Unit
connected to the ten-key keypad after TKY(211) is executed. Consequently,
set the input time constant for the Input Units used for the data line input word
to a value that is shorter than the cycle time, or do not connect the ten-key
keypad to the following Units.
Example In this example, TKY(211) reads key inputs from a ten-key keypad and stores
the inputs in CIO 200 and CIO 201. The ten-key keypad is connected to
CIO 0100 (allocated to a CS1W-ID211 16-point DC Input Unit).
P_On
TKY(211)
D1 0200
D2 D00000
3-23-7 HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT – HKY(212)

Purpose Reads numeric data from a hexadecimal keypad connected to an Input Unit
and Output Unit and stores up to 8 digits of hexadecimal data in the specified
words.
948
Ladder Symbol
HKY(212)
I I: Input word
O O: Output word
D D: First register word
C C: System word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition HKY(212)

Operands I: Input Word (Data Line D0 to D3 Inputs)

Specify the input word allocated to the Input Unit and connect the hexadeci-
mal keypad’s D0 to D3 data lines to the Input Unit as shown in the following
diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
I − − − − − − − − − − − −
0
1
2 Bits 00 to 03 correspond
3 to Input Unit inputs 0 to 3.
O: Output Word (Selection Signal Outputs)

Specify the output word allocated to the Output Unit and connect the hexa-
decimal keypad’s selection signals to the Output Unit as shown in the follow-
ing diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
O − − − − − − − − − − − −
0
1
Bits 00 to 03 correspond to
2
Output Unit outputs 0 to 3.
3
949
D: First Register Word

Specifies the leading word address where the hexadecimal keypad’s numeric
input (up to 8 digits) will be stored. (In addition, each time that a key is
pressed, the corresponding bit in D+2 (0 to F) will be turned ON and remains
ON until another key is pressed.)
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D+1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D+2
15 0
14 1
13 2
12 3
11 4 ON when the corresponding key
10 5 is pressed. (Remains on until
9 6 another key is pressed.)
8 7
C: System Word
15 0
C
System word
Area I O D C
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to CIO CIO 0000 to
CIO 6143 6141 CIO 6143
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to A448 to A448 to A957 A448 to A959
A957 A959
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D00000 to
D32765 D32767
EM Area without E00000 to E32767 E00000 to E00000 to
bank E32765 E32767
En_32767 En_32765 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
950
Area I O D C
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
using Index Regis- –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to +2047 ,IR15
ters
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description HKY(212) outputs the selection signals to bits 00 to 03 of O, reads the data in
order from bits 00 to 03 of I, and stores up to 8 digits of hexadecimal data in
register words D and D+1.
HKY(212) inputs each digit in 3 to 12 cycles, and then starts over and contin-
ues inputting. In addition, each time that a key is pressed, the corresponding
bit in D+2 (0 to F) will be turned ON and remains ON until another key is
pressed.
HKY(212) determines which key is pressed by identifying which input is ON
when a given selection signal is ON, so it can take anywhere from 3 to 12
cycles for one hexadecimal digit to be read. After the key input is read,
HKY(212) starts over and reads another digit in the next 3 to 12 cycles.
When executed, HKY(212) begins reading the key input data from the first
selection signal, regardless of the point at which the last instruction was
stopped.
The two-word register in D1 and D1+1 operates as an 8-digit shift register.
When a key is pressed on the ten-key keypad, the corresponding hexadeci-
mal digit is shifted into the least significant digit of D1. The other digits of D1,
D1+1 are shifted left and the most significant digit of D1+1 is lost.
When one of the keypad keys is being pressed, input from the other keys is
disabled.
There is no restriction on the number of times that HKY(212) can appear in
the program (unlike the CQM1H Series).
951
External Connections Connect the hexadecimal keypad to Input Unit contacts 0 to 3 and Output Unit
contacts 0 to 3, as shown in the following diagram.
OD212
C D E F
0
1
8 9 A B 2
3
4 5 6 7 4
5
0 1 2 3 6
7
8
ID212 9
0 10
1 11
2
3 12
13
4
14
5
15
6
COM
7
COM
8
9
10
11
Output Unit
12
13
14
15
COM
COM
Input Unit
Timing Chart
I
00
01
02 16-key selection
signals
03
16-key
0
to
9
to Status of 16 keys
F
D+2
00
to Turn ON flags corre-
09 sponding to input
to keys (The flags re-
15 main ON until the
O next input.)
04
ON for a 12-cycle
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 period if a key is
pressed.
Once per 12 cycles
0000 0000 0000 000F 0000 00F9

D+1 D D+1 D D+1 D
952
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions Do not read or write the system word (C) from any other instruction. HKY(212)
will not operate correctly if the system word is accessed by another instruc-
tion. The system word is not initialized by HKY(212) in the first cycle when
program execution starts. If HKY(212) is being used from the first cycle, clear
the system word from the program.
HKY(212) will not operate correctly if I/O refreshing is not performed with the
Input Unit and Output Unit connected to the hexadecimal keypad after
HKY(212) is executed. Consequently, set the input time constant for the Input
Units used for the data line input word to a value that is shorter than the cycle
time, or do not connect the hexadecimal keypad to the following Units.
Example In this example, HKY(212) reads up to 8 digits of hexadecimal data from a
hexadecimal keypad and stores the data in D00000 and D00001. The hexa-
decimal keypad is connected through CIO 0100 (allocated to a CS1W-ID211
16-point DC Input Unit) and CIO 0200 (allocated to a CS1W-OD211 16-point
Transistor Output Unit). D32000 is used as the system word.
P_On
HKY(212)
O 0200
D D00000
C D32000
3-23-8 MATRIX INPUT: MTR(213)

Purpose Inputs up to 64 signals from an 8 × 8 matrix connected to an Input Unit and an
Output Unit (using 8 input points and 8 output points) and stores that 64-bit
data in the 4 destination words.
Ladder Symbol
MTR(213)
I I: Input word
O O: Output word
C C: System word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MTR(213)

953
Operands I: Input Word

Specify the input word allocated to the Input Unit and connect the 8 input sig-
nal lines to the Input Unit as shown in the following diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
I − − − − − − − −
0
1
2
3
4 Bits 00 to 07 correspond to
5 Input Unit inputs 0 to 7.
6
7
O: Output Word (Selection Signal Outputs)

Specify the output word allocated to the Output Unit and connect the 8 selec-
tion signals to the Output Unit as shown in the following diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
O − − − − − − − −
0
1
2
3
4 Bits 00 to 07 correspond to
5 Output Unit outputs 0 to 7.
6
7
D: First Register Word

Specifies the leading word address of the 4 words that contain the data from
the 8 × 8 matrix.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D
15 0
14 1
13 2
12 3
11 4 Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
10 5 matrix elements 0 to 15.
9 6
8 7
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D+1
15 0
14 1
13 2
12 3
9 6
8 7
954
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D+2
15 0
14 1
13 2
12 3
9 6
8 7
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D+3
15 0
14 1
13 2
12 3
9 6
8 7
C: System Word
15 0
C
System word
Area I O D C
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to CIO CIO 0000 to
CIO 6143 614 CIO 6143
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to A448 to A448 to A956 A448 to A959
A959 A959
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D00000 to
D32764 D32767
EM Area without E00000 to E32767 E00000 to E00000 to
bank E32764 E32767
En_32767 En_32764 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
955
Area I O D C
Index Registers ---
ters
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description MTR(213) outputs the selection signals to bits 00 to 07 of O, reads the data in
order from bits 00 to 07 of I, and stores the 64 bits of data in the 4 words D
through D+3. MTR(213) reads the status of the 64-bit matrix every 24 CPU
Unit cycles. The One Round Flag (bit 08 of O) is turned ON for one cycle in
every 24 cycles after each of the selection signals has been turned ON.
When executed, MTR(213) begins reading the matrix status from the begin-
ning of the matrix, regardless of the point at which the last instruction was
stopped.
There is no restriction on the number of times that MTR(213) can appear in
External Connections Connect the hexadecimal keypad to Input Unit contacts 0 to 3 and Output Unit
contacts 0 to 3, as shown in the following diagram.
8th row
7th row
OD212
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
1st row
A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ID211 I/O Unit
956
Timing Chart
00
01
02
03 Selection signals
04
05
06
07
00
: Matrix status
32
:
64
00
: Bits indicating status of inputs
32
: (Bit ON when input is ON)
64
08 One Round Flag
One round completed in 24 cycles
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
Precautions Do not read or write the system word (C) from any other instruction.
MTR(213) will not operate correctly if the system word is accessed by another
instruction. The system word is not initialized by MTR(213) in the first cycle
when program execution starts. If MTR(213) is being used from the first cycle,
clear the system word from the program.
MTR(213) will not operate correctly if I/O refreshing is not performed with the
Input Unit and Output Unit connected to the external matrix after MTR(213) is
executed. Consequently, set the input time constant for the Input Units used
for the data line input word to a value that is shorter than the cycle time, or do
not connect the external matrix to the following Units.
Example In this example, MTR(213) reads the 64 bits of data from the 8 × 8 matrix and
stores the data in W000 to W003. The 8 × 8 matrix is connected through
CIO 0100 (allocated to a CS1W-ID211 16-point DC Input Unit) and CIO 0200
(allocated to a CS1W-OD211 16-point Transistor Output Unit). D32000 is
used as the system word.
P_On
MTR(213)
O 0200
D W000
C D32000
3-23-9 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT – 7SEG(214)

Purpose Converts the source data (either 4-digit or 8-digit BCD) to 7-segment display
data, and outputs that data to the specified output word.
957
Ladder Symbol
7SEG(214)
S S: Source word
O O: Output word
C C: Control data
D D: System word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition 7SEG(214)


Specify the first source word containing the data that will be converted to 7-
segment display data.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
S
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
S+1
O: Output Word (Data and Latch Outputs)

Specify the output word allocated to the Output Unit and connect the 7-seg-
ment display to the Output Unit as shown in the following diagram.
• Converting 4 digits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
O − − − − − − −
One Round Flag

LE3 D0
LE2 D1
Latch outputs 4-digit data output
LE1 D2
LE0 D3
• Converting 8 digits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
O − − −
One Round Flag

LE3 D0
LE2 D1
Latch outputs LE1 Leftmost 4-digit data output
D2
LE0 D3
D0
D1
D2 Rightmost 4-digit data output
D3
958
C: Control Data
The value of C indicates the number of digits of source data and the logic for
the Input and Output Units, as shown in the following table. (The logic refers to
the transistor output’s NPN or PNP logic.)
Source data Display’s data input logic Display’s latch input logic C
4 digits (S) Same as Output Unit Same as Output Unit 0000
Different from Output Unit 0001
Different from Output Unit Same as Output Unit 0002
8 digits Same as Output Unit Same as Output Unit 0004
(S, S+1) Different from Output Unit 0005
Different from Output Unit Same as Output Unit 0006
D: System Word
15 0
D
System word
Area S O C D
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 --- CIO 0000 to
CIO 6143
Work Area W000 to W511 --- W000 to W511
Holding Bit Area H000 to H511 --- H000 to H511
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to A448 to --- A448 to A959
A959 A959
Timer Area T0000 to T4095 --- T0000 to T4095
Counter Area C0000 to C4095 --- C0000 to C4095
DM Area D00000 to D32767 --- D00000 to D32767
EM Area without E00000 to E32767 --- E00000 to E32767
bank
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_32767 --- En_00000 to
(n = 0 to C) En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @
En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- --- 0000 to ---
0007
Data Registers --- DR0 to --- DR0 to DR15
DR15
959
Area S O C D
Index Registers ---
Indirect addressing IR0 to IR15, –2048 to --- ,IR0 to ,IR15
using Index Regis- +2047, IR0 to IR15 –2048 to +2047 ,IR0
ters DR0 to DR15, IR0 to to –2048 to +2047
IR15 ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++) DR0 to DR15, IR0 to
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15 IR15
,IR0+(++) to
,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –
)IR15
Description 7SEG(214) reads the source data, converts it to 7-segment display data, and
outputs that data (as leftmost 4 digits D0 to D3, rightmost 4 digits D0 to D3,
latch output signals LE0 to LE3) to the 7-segment display connected to the
output indicated by O. The value of C indicates the number of digits of source
data (either 4-digit or 8-digit) and the logic for the Input and Output Units.
7SEG(214) displays the 4-digit or 8-digit data in 12 cycles, and then starts
over and continues displaying the data.
The One Round Flag (bit 08 of O when converting 4 digits, bit 12 of O when
converting 8 digits) is turned ON for one cycle in every 12 cycles after
7SEG(214) has turned ON each of the latch output signals. After the 7-seg-
ment data is output in 12 cycles, 7SEG(214) starts over and converts the
present contents of the source word(s) in the next 12 cycles.
When executed, 7SEG(214) begins on latch output 0 at the beginning of the
round, regardless of the point at which the last instruction was stopped.
Even if the connected 7-segment display has fewer than 4 digits or 8 digits in
its display, 7SEG(214) will still output 4 digits or 8 digits of data.
External Connections Connect the 7-segment display to the Output Unit as shown in the following
diagram. This example shows an 8-digit display. With a 4-digit display, the
data outputs (D0 to D3) would be connected to outputs 0 to 3 and the latch
outputs (LE0 to LE3) would be connected to outputs 4 to 7. Output point 12
(for 8-digit display) or output point 8 (for 4-digit display) will be turned ON
when one round of data has been output, but it is not necessary to connect
them unless required by the application.
960
7-segment display
Leftmost 4 digits Rightmost 4 digits
D0 VDD VDD D0
D1 (+) (+) D1
D2 VSS VSS D2
D3 (0) (0) D3
LE3 LE2 LE1 LE0 LE3 LE2 LE1 LE0
OD212
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DC
COM
Output Unit
• 4-digit display: Transistor Output Units with 8 or more output points
• 8-digit display: Transistor Output Units with 16 or more output points
Timing Chart
Function Bit(s) in O Output status (Data and latch logic depends on C)
(4 digits, 1 (4 digits, 2
block) blocks)
Data output 00 to 03 00 to 03
04 to 07 100 101 102 103 Note 0 to 3: Data output for word S
4 to 7: Data output for word S+1
Latch output 0 04 08
One Round Flag 08 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1
12 cycles required to complete one round
Flags
Error Flag ER OFF
961
Precautions Do not read or write the system word (D) from any other instruction.
7SEG(214) will not operate correctly if the system word is accessed by
another instruction. The system word is not initialized by 7SEG(214) in the
first cycle when program execution starts. If 7SEG(214) is being used from
the first cycle, clear the system word from the program.
7SEG(214) will not operate correctly if I/O refreshing is not performed with the
Output Unit connected to the 7-segment display after 7SEG(214) is executed.
Consequently, do not connect the external matrix to the following Units.
Example In this example, 7SEG(214) converts the 8 digits of BCD data in D00100 and
D00101 and outputs the data through CIO 0100 to a 7-segment display con-
nected to a CS1W-OD211 16-point Transistor Output Unit.
There are 8 digits of data being output and the 7-segment display’s logic is the
same as the Output Unit’s logic, so the control data (C) is set to 0004. D32000
is used as the system word, D.
P_On
7SEG(214)
Always ON Flag S D00100
O 0100
C 004
D D32000
3-23-10 INTELLIGENT I/O READ: IORD(222)

Purpose Reads the contents of memory area of a Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit
(see note).
Note There are restrictions in functionality for CPU Bus Units. Refer to Restrictions
later in this section.
Ladder Symbol
IORD(222)
C C: Control data
S S: Transfer source and number of words
D D: Transfer destination
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition IORD(222)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @IORD(222)

OK OK OK OK
Operands C: Depends on Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit.

S: Special I/O Unit: 0000 to 005F hex
(to specify unit numbers 0 to 95)
962
CPU Bus Unit: 8000 to 800F hex

(to specify unit numbers 0 to F hex)
S+1: Number of words to transfer
(0001 to 0080 Hex, depends on Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit)
S+1 S
S+1: Leftmost 4 digits
S: Rightmost 4 digits
Area C S D
6143 6142 6143
D32767 D32766 D32767
E32767 E32766 E32767
En_32767 En_32766 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary) only
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description IORD(222) reads the number of words designated in S+1 from the memory
area of the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit whose unit number is designated
by S and outputs the data to D. Only Special I/O Units or CPU Bus Units
mounted on CPU Racks or Expansion I/O Racks can be designated. Refer to
the operation manual of the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit from which data
is being read for specific details for each Unit.
963
S
S+1
or CPU Bus Unit
Desig-
nated
number
of words
read.
Restrictions The following restrictions apply to reading from a CPU Bus Unit.

CS1-H CPU Units
Reading from a CPU Bus Unit is possible only for the following models of CPU
Unit and only for CPU Units manufactured on or after 18 April 2003 (lot num-
ber 030418 or later).
• CS1G-CPU@@H
• CS1H-CPU@@H
as follows:
YYMMDD nnnn
CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units
Reading from a CPU Bus Unit is possible only for CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later.
Note If IORD(222) is executed for a CPU Bus Unit running under a CPU Unit that
does not support using IORD(222) for CPU Bus Units, an error will occur and
the ER Flag will turn ON.

Unit numbers for CPU Bus Units can be specified for S with CX-Programmer
version 3.0 or higher.
964
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the number of words to transfer (S) is outside the
range of 0001 to 0080 hex.
ON if the unit number (S) is outside the range of 0000 to
005F hex or 8000 to 800F hex.
ON if the designated Special I/O Unit is on SYSMAC
BUS.
ON if a Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit not affected by
IORD(222) is designated.
ON if a Special I/O Unit with a Special I/O Unit setting
error or a Special I/O Unit error is designated.
ON if a CPU Bus Unit with a CPU Bus Unit setting error or
a CPU Bus Unit error is designated.
Equals Flag = ON if reading operation is completed normally.
OFF if reading operation is not completed normally.
Precautions The Equals Flag will turn ON if the reading operation is completed normally.
The Equals Flag will turn OFF if the reading operation cannot be completed
normally due to the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit being busy.
Whenever any of the following occur, an error will occur and the Error Flag will
turn ON.
• The number of words to transfer (S) is outside the range of 0001 to 0080
(hex).
• The unit number (S) is outside the range of 0000 to 005F hex or 8000 to
800F hex.
• The designated Special I/O Unit is on SYSMAC BUS.
• A Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit not affected by IORD(222) is desig-
nated.
• A Special I/O Unit with a Special I/O Unit setting error or a Special I/O
Unit error is designated.
• A CPU Bus Unit with a CPU Bus Unit setting error or a CPU Bus Unit
error is designated.
When IORD(222) is executed, the execution results are reflected in the condi-
tion flags. In particular, the Equals Flag turns ON when reading is completed.
Input the condition flags such as the Equals Flag with output branching from
the same input conditions as the IORD(222) instruction.
If the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit is busy, the reading operation will not
be executed. Use the Equals Flag to create a self-maintaining program, as
shown below, so that IORD(222) will be executed with each cycle until the
reading operation is executed.
965
B
IORD
C
S
D
A = B
When the input condition is met, self maintenance is performed by output A

and IORD(222) is executed with each cycle until the Equals Flag turns ON.
When the reading is completed and the Equals Flag turns ON, output B turns
ON and the self maintenance is cleared.
Be sure to place condition flags directly after IORD(222) instructions, and not
after any other instructions. If a condition flag is placed after another instruc-
tion, it will be affected by the execution results of that instruction.
IORD(222) can be used in an interrupt task, which allows high-speed pro-
cessing of specific I/O data with an interrupt. If IORD(222) is used in an inter-
the PLC Setup.
IORF(097) or FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only).
966
Example In this example, IORD(222) is used to read data.

When CIO 000000 is turned ON, 10 words are read from the Special
I/O Unit with unit number 3, and are stored in D00100 to D00109.
S+1 S
S
Number of words Unit number: 3

to transfer: 10
The control code (C) varies depending on the Special I/O Unit.
CPU Unit Special I/O Unit (Unit #3)
10 words
3-23-11 INTELLIGENT I/O WRITE: IOWR(223)

Purpose Outputs the contents of the CPU Unit’s I/O memory area to a Special I/O Unit
or CPU Bus Unit (see note).
Note There are restrictions in functionality for CPU Bus Units. Refer to Restrictions
later in this section.
Ladder Symbol
IOWR(223)
C C: Control data
S S: Transfer source and number of words
D D: Transfer destination and number of words
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition IOWR(223)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @IOWR(223)

OK OK OK OK
Operands C: Depends on Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit.

D: Special I/O Unit: 0000 to 005F hex
(to specify unit numbers 0 to 95)
CPU Bus Unit: 8000 to 800F hex
(to specify unit numbers 0 to F hex)
967
D+1: Number of words to transfer

(0000 to 0080 Hex, depends on Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit)
D+1 D
D+1: Leftmost 4 digits
D: Rightmost 4 digits
Area C S D
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 CIO 0000 to CIO
6142
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32766
E32766
(n = 0 to C) En_32766
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF Specified values
(binary) only
Data Registers DR0 to DR15 --- ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description IOWR(223) writes the designated number of words (D) from the first source
word (designated by S) onwards and outputs them to the Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit that has the unit number designated by D. Only Special I/O
Units or CPU Bus Units mounted on CPU Racks or Expansion I/O Racks can
be designated.
968
D
D+1
Unit number of Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit
Desig-
nated
number of
words
written.
Restrictions The following restrictions apply to reading from a CPU Bus Unit.
CS1-H CPU Units
Writing to a CPU Bus Unit is possible only for the following models of CPU
Unit and only for CPU Units manufactured on or after 18 April 2003 (lot num-
ber 030418 or later).
• CS1G-CPU@@H
• CS1H-CPU@@H
as follows:
YYMMDD nnnn
CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units
Writing to a CPU Bus Unit is possible only for CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later.
Note If IOWR(223) is executed for a CPU Bus Unit running under a CPU Unit that
does not support using IOWR(223) for CPU Bus Units, an error will occur and
the ER Flag will turn ON.

Unit numbers for CPU Bus Units can be specified for S with CX-Programmer
version 3.0 or higher.
969
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the number of words to transfer (D) is outside the
range of 0001 to 0080 hex.
ON if the unit number (D) is outside the range of 0000 to
005F hex or 8000 to 800F hex.
ON if S is designated by a constant when the number of
words to be transferred (D+1) is not 0001 hex.
ON if the designated Special I/O Unit is on SYSMAC
BUS.
ON if a Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit not affected by
IOWR(223) is designated.
ON if a Special I/O Unit with a Special I/O Unit setting
error or a Special I/O Unit error is designated.
ON if a CPU Bus Unit with a CPU Bus Unit setting error or
a CPU Bus Unit error is designated.
Equals Flag = ON if writing operation is completed normally.
OFF if writing operation is not completed normally.
Precautions When “0001” is designated for the number of words to be transferred (D+1),
the data for S can be designated by a constant. If a constant is designated for
S when the number of words to be transferred is not “0001,” an error will occur
and the Error Flag will turn ON.
The Equals Flag will turn ON if the writing operation is completed normally.
The Equals Flag will turn OFF if the writing operation cannot be completed
normally due to the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit being busy.
Whenever any of the following occur, an error will occur and the Error Flag will
turn ON.
• There is an I/O Unit verification error, a Special I/O Unit setting error, a
Special I/O Unit setting error, or a Special I/O Unit error at the Special I/O
Unit.
• There is an I/O Unit verification error, a CPU Bus Unit setting error, a CPU
Bus Unit setting error, or a CPU Bus Unit error at the CPU Bus Unit.
• The number of words to transfer (D) is outside the range of 0001 to 0080
(hex).
• The unit number (D) is outside the range of 0000 to 005F hex or 8000 to
800F hex.
• The designated Special I/O Unit is on SYSMAC BUS.
• A Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit not affected by IOWR(223) is desig-
nated.
• A Special I/O Unit with a Special I/O Unit setting error or a Special I/O
Unit error is designated.
• A CPU Bus Unit with a CPU Bus Unit setting error or a CPU Bus Unit
error is designated.
When IOWR(223) is executed, the execution results are reflected in the condi-
tion flags. In particular, the Equals Flag turns ON when reading is completed.
Input the condition flags such as the Equals Flag with output branching from
the same input conditions as the IOWR(223) instruction.
If the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit is busy, the writing operation will not be
executed. Use the Equals Flag to create a self-maintaining program, as
970
shown below, so that IOWR(223) will be executed with each cycle until the
writing operation is executed.
B
IOWR
C
S
D
A = B
When the input condition is met, self maintenance is performed by output A

and IOWR(223) is executed with each cycle until the Equals Flag turns ON.
When the writing is completed and the Equals Flag turns ON, output B turns
ON and the self maintenance is cleared.
Be sure to place condition flags directly after IOWR(223) instructions, and not
after any other instructions. If a condition flag is placed after another instruc-
tion, it will be affected by the execution results of that instruction.
IOWR(223) can be used in an interrupt task, which allows high-speed pro-
cessing of specific I/O data with an interrupt. If IOWR(223) is used in an inter-
the PLC Setup.
IORF(097) or FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only).
971
Serial Communications Instructions Section 3-24
Example In this example, IOWR(223) is used to write data.

When CIO 000000 is turned ON, the 10 words in D00100 to
D00109 are written to the Special I/O Unit.
D+1 D
Number of words Unit number: 3

to transfer: 10
The control code (C) varies depending on the Special I/O Unit.
CPU Unit Special I/O Unit (Unit #3)
10 words
3-24 Serial Communications Instructions

This section describes instructions used for serial communications.
PROTOCOL MACRO PMCR 260 974
TRANSMIT TXD 236 983
RECEIVE RXD 235 993
TRANSMIT VIA SERIAL COMMU- TXDU 256 1005
NICATIONS UNIT
RECEIVE VIA SERIAL COMMU- RXDU 255 1013
NICATIONS UNIT
CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP STUP 237 1021
3-24-1 Serial Communications

There are two types of serial communications instruction. The TXD(236),
RXD(235), TXDU(256), and RXDU(255) instructions send and receive data in
no-protocol (custom) communications with an external device. PMCR(260)
sends and receives data using user-defined protocols with an external device.
The difference is shown in the following tables.
Note 1. The TXD(236) and RXD(235) instructions transfer data only through the
CPU Unit’s built-in serial port or a serial port on a Serial Communications
Board (Ver. 1.2 or later).
2. The TXDU(256) and RXDU(255) instructions transfer data only through a
Serial Communications Unit (Ver. 1.2 or later).
972
Instructions Communications frames Function

TXD(236), Sends or receives data in one direction only.
Any of the following can be used.
RXD(235), A send delay can be set.
TXDU(256), No Start or End Code Start and End Code
and Data Data
RXDU(255)
Only Start Code CR+LF End Code
Data Data
Only End Code Start and CR+LF End Code

Data Data
PMCR(260) Up to 16 steps can be defined for sending

The following type of frames (messages) can be created
and receiving.
to meet the requirements of the external device.
Steps can be changed and retry processing
Header Address Data Error check Terminator
performed based on responses.
Communications steps Communications monitoring times can be
can be created. set.
I/O memory Symbols can be read/written for the PLC.
Read/write Repeat symbols can be used.
Other.
Instructions Mode Communications ports

TXD(236) No-protocol Serial port in CPU Unit or Serial Communications Board
and (custom)
CPU Unit
RXD(235)
TXD(236)/
RXD(235) TXD(236) and RXD(235)
use serial ports on the
CPU Unit or Serial
Communications Boards
RXD(235) (Ver. 1.2 or later).
TXD(236)
TXDU(256) No-protocol Serial Port of Serial Communications Unit (Version 1.2 or later)
and (custom)
RXDU(255) Serial Communications unit CPU Unit
TXDU/RXDU
RXD
TXD
PMCR(260) Protocol macro Serial Communications Board (CS Series Serial Communications Unit
only)
Serial Communications Unit
Serial Commu-
nications Board
Receive
Receive
Send
Send
973
3-24-2 PROTOCOL MACRO: PMCR(260)

Purpose Calls and executes a communications sequence registered in a Serial Com-
munications Board (CS Series only) or Serial Communications Unit.
Ladder Symbol
PMCR(260)
C1 C1: Control word 1
C2 C2: Control word 2
S S: First send word
R R: First receive word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition PMCR(260)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @PMCR(260)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Operands C1: Control Word 1 and C2: Control Word 2

The contents of the two control words are shown below.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C1
Unit address of communications partner

CS1 CPU Bus Unit: Unit number + 10 hex
Inner Board: E1 hex (CS Series only)
Serial port number (physical port)
1 to 2 hex (1 hex: Port 1, 2 hex: Port 2)
Communications port number (logical port)
0 to 7 hex (F hex: Automatic allocation)
15 0
C2
Communications sequence number

0000 to 03E7 hex (000 to 999 decimal)
Note Refer to Automatic Allocation of Communications Ports on page 1032 for

details on using automatic allocation of the communications port number (log-
ical port).
S: First Send Word and Send Area
The first word of the words required to send data is specified. S contains the
number of words to be sent +1 (i.e., including the S word) and send data
starts in S+1. Between 0000 and 00FA hex (0 and 250 decimal) words can be
sent.
If there is no operand specified in the execution sequence, such as a direct or
linked word, specify the constant #0000 for S. If a word address or register is
974
specified, the data in the word or register must always be 0000. An error will
occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if any other constant or a word address
is given and PMCR(260) will not be executed.
Number of send words + 1
n words of data must be

to prepared in advance.
R: First Receive Word and Receive Area

Received data is automatically stored in words starting with R+1 and the num-
ber of words received plus R (i.e., including R) is automatically written to R
between 0000 and 00FA hex (0 and 250 decimal).
Setting Before Executing PMCR
Set the data specified by m (beginning with D) as the initial data for the
receive buffer (backup data for receive failure). Data m can be set to 0002 to
00FA (hex) (2 to 255). If 0000 (hex) or 0001 (hex) is specified for m, the initial
value of the receive buffer will be cleared to 0.
Always set a word address for R even if there is no receive data. If a constant
is set, an error will occur, the Error Flag will turn ON, and PMCR(260) will not
be executed. If there is no receive data, R will not be used and can be used for
other purposes.
If there is no operand specified in the execution sequence, such as a direct or
linked word, specify the constant #0000 for R. If a word address or register is
specified, the data in the word or register must always be 0000.
Number of received words +1
R
The m words of data that is
to received is stored here.
Area C1 C2 S R
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to A447 A448 to
A448 to A959 A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
975
Area C1 C2 S R
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Specified 0000 to #0000 (binary)
values only 03E7Hex
(0 to 999)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description PMCR(260) will execute the communications sequence specified in C2 using

the logical port specified in bits 12 to 15 of C1 and the physical port specified
in bits 8 to 11 of C1 for the unit address specified in bits 0 to 7 of C1.
If a symbol is specified as the operand for a send message, the number of
send words specified in S and beginning from S+1 will be used as the send
area. If a symbol is specified as the operand for a receive message, receive
data is placed in memory staring with R+1 and the number of words received
is automatically written to R if the transmission is successful.
If the transmission fails, the data (R+1 onward) set before PMCR(260) was
executed will be read from the receive buffer and stored in the R+1 onward
again.
CPU Unit Serial Communications Unit

Port
to
R
External
to
device
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the Communications Port Enabled Flag is OFF for
the specified logical port when PMCR(260) is executed.
ON if C1 is not within the specified ranges. (Error flag will
not turn ON if the C2 data is outside the specified ranges.
The end code will be stored in the Communications Port
Completion Code (A203 to A210) of the auxiliary area.)
ON if the number of words of S or R exceeds 249 (when
words are specified).
976
Precautions The data in the send area specified with S is actually sent using the symbol
read option, R( ), in a send message.
Data is actually received to the receive area specified by R using the symbol
write option, W( ), in a receive message.
Refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344) for procedures for desig-
nating symbols R( ) and W( ).
PMCR(260) can be executed for a serial communications port on a Serial
Communications Board (CS Series only) or Serial Communications Unit. Up
to 16 Serial Communications Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack and
Expansion I/O Racks. The Unit address of the communications partner must
be set in bits 0 to 7 of C1 to specify which Unit/Board is to be used and the
serial port number must be set in bits 8 to 11. Unit addresses are specified as
Unit/Board Unit address
Serial Communications Board E1 hex
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit Unit number + 10 hex
Serial Communications Units

Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Unit address E1 hex (CS Series only)

Unit No. + 10 hex
The corresponding Protocol Macro Execution Flag will turn ON at the start of
PMCR(260) execution. It will turn OFF after the communications sequence
has been completed and data has been written to the specified receive area.
A N.C. input for the corresponding Protocol Macro Execution Flag should be
used as part of the execution condition whenever executing PMCR(260) to be
sure that only one communications sequence is being executed at the same
time for the same physical port. An example is shown below.
Execution Protocol Macro Communications Port
condition Execution Flag Enabled Flag
PMCR(260)
SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) also use the logical ports 0 to 7 to

execution communications sequences through Serial Communications Unit
and Boards (internally using FINS commands). PMCR(260) cannot be exe-
cuted for a logical port that is already being used by SEND(090), RECV(098),
CMND(490)or PMCR(260). To prevent more than one communications
sequence from being executed for the same logical port, the corresponding
Communications Port Enable Flag (A20200 to A20207) should be used as a
N.O. input in the execution condition for PMCR(260), as shown in the above
diagram.
977
CPU Unit
PMCR(260)
PMCR(260)
The Error Flag will turn ON in the following cases.

• The corresponding Communications Port Enable Flag is OFF for the
specified logical port (0 to 7) when PMCR(260) is executed.
• C1 is not within the specified ranges.
Designation of Receive Area
Before executing PMCR(260), users must set backup data in the receive area
for receive processing failure. Once the PMCR(260) is executed, the data in
the receive buffer is automatically stored in the receive area. One example of
the backup data application is as follows: A certain value (backup data) is set
in advance so that the present value will not be read as zero when transmis-
sion failure occurs while protocol is being executed for reading the present
value of a controller.
Related Flags and Words The following flags and words can be used as required when executing
PMCR(260).
Auxiliary Area
Communications Port A20200 to ON when network communications are
Enabled Flag A20207 enabled (including PMCR(260).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to logical ports
0 to 7, respectively.
A Communications Port Enabled Flag
will turn OFF when network communi-
cations are started and will turn ON
when they are completed (regardless of
whether communications end normally
or in error.
978

Communications Port Error A21900 to ON when an error occurs in network
Flag A21907 communications.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to logical ports
0 to 7, respectively.
Flag status will be maintained until the
next network communications start.
The flag will turn OFF when communi-
cations start again even if an error
occurred for the last execution.
Communications Port Com- A203 to A210 Contains the completion code stored
pletion Codes when network communications are per-
formed.
Words A203 to A210 correspond to log-
ical ports 0 to 7, respectively.
The completion code will be 00 while
the communications instruction is being
executed. The new response code will
be stored when execution has been
completed.
The contents of these words is cleared
when operation is started.
Communications Responses
Code Contents
1106 (hex) No corresponding program number
Specified Send/Receive Sequence No. that has not
been registered.
Modify the Send/Receive Sequence No. or add the
number using the CX-Programmer.
2201 (hex) Not operable due to protocol execution
Since one protocol macro has already been executed,
no further execution is accepted.
Add NC condition to program for the Protocol Macro
Execution Flag.
2202 (hex) Not operable due to stoppage
Since the protocol is being switched, no further execu-
tion is accepted.
Add NC condition to program for the Serial Setting
Change Flag.
2401 (hex) No registration table
An error has occurred in the protocol macro data or
data is being transmitted.
Transmit the protocol macro data using the CX-Pro-
grammer.
Others Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands
Reference Manual (W342) for other response codes.
979
Inner Board Area (CS Series Only)

Port 1 Protocol Macro Exe- CIO 190915 ON when PMCR(260) is executed. The
cution Flag flag will remain OFF if execution fails.
Port 2 Protocol Macro Exe- CIO 191915 The flag will turn OFF when the com-
cution Flag munications sequence has been com-
pleted (either an end or abort).
CPU Bus Unit Area

n = 1500 + 25 x unit number
Port 1 Protocol Macro Bit 15 of ON when PMCR(260) is executed. The flag
Execution Flag CIO n+9 will remain OFF if execution fails. The flag
Port 2 Protocol Macro Bit 15 of will turn OFF when the communications
Execution Flag CIO n+19 sequence has been completed (either an
end or abort).
Examples When CIO 0000 is ON in the following example, communications sequence

No. 101 (0065 hex) will be executed as long as the Communications Port
Enabled Flag for port 7 (A20207) is ON and the Port 1 Protocol Macro Execu-
tion Flag (CIO 190915) is OFF.
If an operand is specified for the symbol in a send message, 2 words of data
starting from D00101 will be used as the send area (because the contents of
D00100 is #0003).
If an operand is specified for the symbol in a receive message, 2 words of
data will be stored starting from D00201 and the number of words received +1
will be written to D00200.
980
Protocol Communica-
Macro tions Port En-
Execution abled Flag
Flag
R
Unit address of communications partner

E1 hex: Inner Board
Serial port number (physical port)

2 hex: Port 2
Communications port number (logical port)
7 hex: Logical port 7
Communications sequence number

0065 hex: 101
3 0 1 0 0 Sent
R(1),2: 2 bytes sent
Used as from D00101
2 words send area
2 0 2 0 0 Received
Received W(1),2: 2 bytes received

1 word starting from D00201
data
Note As shown above, the symbol read option, R( ),

in the send message or the symbol write op-
tion, W( ), actually sends/receives data.
Holding the Receive Area The receive buffer is cleared to all zeros immediately before a communica-
tions sequence is executed for PMCR(260). If programming such as that
shown below is used to periodically read PV data or other values and data
cannot be read due to a reception error or other cause, the data being read
will be cleared until the next successful read.
A function is provided to maintain the data in the receive area even when a
reception error occurs. If this function is used, data will be transferred from the
first m words of the receive area to the receive buffer after the buffer is cleared
to all zeros but before the communications sequence is executed. This pre-
vents the receive area from being temporarily cleared to all zeros by writing
the most recent receive data when new receive data is not successfully
obtained.
Specify the number of words of the receive area to be maintained as the value
m. If 0 or 1 is specified, the holding function will be disabled and the receive
area will be cleared to all zeros.
981
The following programming example shows the instructions used to con-

stantly or periodically execute PMCR(260) to read data through a single
receive operation.
Communica- Protocol
tions Port En- Macro
Always ON abled Flag Execution
Flag Flag
Set
Receive
buffer
Data that was set will be

transfer if new data is not
successfully received.
m words
Receive Area Not Held
Communications sequence
Recv
Receive buffer Cleared
Error
Cleared data
Receive area (starting at (all zeros)
R+1) stored.
Receive Area Held
Communications sequence
Receive buffer Cleared and

previous Recv
data stored
Receive area (starting at Error
R+1) Set data stored if no new
data has been received
982
3-24-3 TRANSMIT: TXD(236)

Purpose Outputs the specified number of bytes of data from the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-
232C port or one of the Serial Communications Board’s serial ports. (The
Serial Communications Board must be Ver. 1.2 or later).
Ladder Symbol
TXD(236)
C C: Control word
N N: Number of bytes
0000 to 0100 hex (0 to 256)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TXD(236)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TXD(236)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Operands The contents of the control word, C, is as shown below.

15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C
Byte order
0: Most significant bytes first
1: Least significant bytes first
RS and ER signal control
0: No RS and ER signal control
Always 0 1: RS signal control
2: ER signal control
3: RS and ER signal control
Serial port specifier
0: CPU Unit's RS-232C port
1: Serial Communications
Board port 1
2: Serial Communications
Board port 2
Area S C N
A448 to A959
983
Area S C N
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- Specified values #0000 to #0100
only (binary) or &0 to
&256 (decimal)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description TXD(236) reads N bytes of data from words S to S+(N÷2)–1 and outputs the
raw data in no-protocol mode from the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port or
one of the Serial Communications Board’s serial ports. (The output port is
specified with bits 8 to 11 of C.)
The start and end codes specified for no-protocol mode are added to the data
before the data is output. The start and end codes are specified in the PLC
Setup (for the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port) or the allocated DM Setup Area (for
the Serial Communications Board’s ports).
Data can be sent only when the port’s Send Ready Flag is ON. The Send
Ready Flag is A39205 for the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port, A35605 for Serial
Communications Board port 1, or A35613 for Serial Communications Board
port 2.
Up to 259 bytes can be sent, including the send data (N = 256 bytes max.),
the start code, and the end code.
984
The following diagram shows the order in which data is sent and the contents
of the send frame for various start and end code settings.
N bytes of data is sent in the following order when

1 2 sending the most significant bytes first is specified:
3 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
5 6
No Start or End Code

Data
N send bytes: 256 max.
Only Start Code
Data
Send bytes after ST:
Only End Code 256 max.
Data
Send bytes before ED:
256 max.
Start and End Code
Data
Send bytes between
ST and ED: 256 max.
CR+LF End Code
Data CR LF
Send bytes before
CR+LF: 256 max.
Start and CR+LF End Code
Data
Send bytes between ST
and CR+LF: 256 max.
RS-232C port on CPU Unit
Data sent.
985
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port is specified as the
send port, but no-protocol mode is not set in the PLC
Setup.
ON if one of the Serial Communication Board’s serial
ports is specified as the send port, but no-protocol mode
is not set in the port’s allocated DM Setup Area.
ON if the value of C is not within range.
ON if the value for N is not between 0000 and 0100 hex.
ON if a send is attempted when the Send Ready Flag is
OFF. (The Send Ready Flag is A39205 for the CPU Unit’s
RS-232C port, A35605 for Serial Communications Board
port 1, or A35613 for Serial Communications Board port
2.)
ON (ER Flag in interrupt tasks) if a TXD(236) or
RXD(235) instruction is being executed for the Serial
Communications Board in the cyclic task, the cyclic task
is interrupted, and another TXD(236) or RXD(235)
instruction is executed for the Serial Communications
Board in the interrupt task. (See note.)
ON if a TXD(236) was executed for a serial port on a
Serial Communications Board that was being restarted.
Note The Error (ER) Flag will turn ON immediately after
another TXD(236) or RXD(235) instruction in the
interrupt task.
Precautions TXD(236) can be used only for the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port or one of the
Serial Communications Board’s serial ports. In addition, the port must be set
to no-protocol mode.
The following send-message frame format can be set in the PLC Setup (for
the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port) or the allocated DM Setup Area (for the Serial
Communications Board’s ports).
• Start code: None or 00 to FF hex.
• End code: None, CR+LF, or 00 to FF hex.
The data will be sent with any start and/or end codes specified in the PLC
Setup or the allocated DM Setup Area. If start and end codes are specified,
the codes will be added to the send data (N). In this case, the maximum num-
ber of bytes that can be specified for N is 256 bytes.
Data can be sent only when the port’s Send Ready Flag is ON. (The Send
Communications Board port 1, or A35613 for Serial Communications Board
port 2.)
Data is sent in the order specified in C.
Nothing will be sent if 0 is specified for N.
If RS signal control is specified in C, bit 15 of S will be used as the RS signal.
If ER signal control is specified in C, bit 15 of S will be used as the ER signal.
If RS and ER signal control is specified in C, bit 15 of S will be used as the RS
signal and bit 14 of S will be used as the ER signal.
If 1, 2, or 3 hex is specified for RS and ER signal control in C, TXD(236) will be
executed regardless of the status of the Send Ready Flag (A39205, A35605,
or A35613 depending on the port being used).
If the TXD(236) instruction is executed for a Board that does not support no-
protocol mode (a Serial Communications Board without a version number),
986
the Inner Board Service Disabled Flag (A42404) and the Error Flag will turn
ON.
An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON in the following cases.
• The CPU Unit’s RS-232C port is specified, but no-protocol mode is not
set for the port in the PLC Setup.
• One of the Serial Communications Board’s serial ports is specified, but
no-protocol mode is not set for the port in the allocated DM Setup Area.
the Board does not support no-protocol mode (the Board does not have a
version number).
• The value of C is not within range.
• The value for N is not between 0000 and 0100 hex.
• A send was attempted when the Send Ready Flag was OFF. (The Send
Communications Board port 1, or A35613 for Serial Communications
Board port 2.)
• TXD(236) or RXD(235) was being executed for the Serial Communica-
tions Board in the cyclic task, the cyclic task was interrupted, and another
TXD(236) or RXD(235) instruction was executed for the Serial Communi-
cations Board in the interrupt task.
• TXD(236) was executed for a serial port on a Serial Communications
Board that was being restarted.
Note Do not program TXD(236)/RXD(235) for a Serial Communications Board’s
port (port 1 or 2) in both the cyclic task and interrupt task. A TXD(236)/
RXD(235) instruction cannot be executed for the Serial Communications
Board in the interrupt task if a TXD(236)/RXD(235) instruction is being exe-
cuted for the Serial Communications Board in the cyclic task. An error will
occur and the ER Flag will be turned ON if a TXD(236)/RXD(235) instruction
is executed for the Serial Communications Board in the interrupt task when
another TXD(236)/RXD(235) instruction was being executed for the Serial
Communications Board in the cyclic task. (These instructions cannot be pro-
grammed in both the cyclic and interrupt tasks even if they are executed for
different ports in the Serial Communications Board.)
987
Related Flags and Words The following PLC Setup settings and Auxiliary Area flag can be used as
required when executing TXD(236).
PLC Setup Settings for CPU Unit’s RS-232C Port
Programming Name Settings
Console address
Word Bit
162 0 to 15 No-protocol Mode Send 0000 to 210F hex,
Delay 0 to 99,990 ms decimal (in 10-
ms units)
164 8 to 15 No-protocol Mode Start Code 00 to FF hex
0 to 7 No-protocol Mode End Code 00 to FF hex
165 12 No-protocol Mode Start Code0: None
Specifier 1: Use start code.
8 and 9 No-protocol Mode End Code 0: None
Specifier 1: Use end code.
2: Use CR+LF.
0 to 7 No-protocol Mode Number of 00: 256 bytes
bytes of Data 01 to FF: 1 to 255 bytes
DM Setup Area Settings for Serial Communication Board’s Ports

Setup Area word Bit Name Settings
Port 1 Port 2
D32002 D32012 15 No-protocol Mode Send 0: Default (0 ms)
Delay Specifier 1: Use delay in bits 1 to 14.
0 to 14 No-protocol Mode Send 0000 to 7530 hex
Delay Time 0 to 300,000 ms decimal
(in 10-ms units)
D32004 D32014 8 to 15 No-protocol Mode Start 00 to FF hex
Code
0 to 7
No-protocol Mode End 00 to FF hex
Code
D32005 D32015 12 to 15 No-protocol Mode Start 0: None
Code Specifier 1: Use start code.
8 to 11 No-protocol Mode End 0: None
Code Specifier 1: Use end code.
2: Use CR+LF.
Auxiliary Area
Send Ready Flags
Port Address Contents
CPU Bus Unit’s built-in RS-232C Port A39205 ON when data can be sent in
Serial Communications Board port 1 A35605 the no-protocol mode.
Serial Communications Board port 2 A35613
Inner Board Flags for Serial Communications Board (Ports 1 and 2)

Inner Board Service Dis- A42404 ON when TXD(236) is executed for a
abled Flag Serial Communications Board that
does not support no-protocol mode (a
Board without a version number).
988
Examples
■ Example 1: Sending Data
When CIO 000001 and the RS-232C port’s Send Ready Flag (A39205) are
ON in the following example, the RS signal is set according to the status of
D00300 bit 15 and the ER signal is set according to the status of D00300 bit
14.
000001 A39205
TXD
RS-232C port's
Send Ready Flag S D00300
C D00400
N &0
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C: D00400 0 0 3 0
Byte order
0: Most significant byte to least significant byte

Always 0 3: RS and ER signal control
Serial port 0
specifier
15 14 13 12
S: D00300 1 0 0 0
ER signal set to 0
RS signal set to 1
Most signifi- Least signif-

cant bytes icant bytes
S:
Sent in speci-
fied order.
5 bytes
Start and end codes added according to set-

ting in PC Setup (this example assumes that
both a start and end code have been set).
ST 12 34 AB CD EF ED
ST: Start code (e.g., 02 hex)
ED: End code (e.g., 03 hex)
Sent
■ Example 2: Performing Signal Control

When CIO 000001 and the RS-232C port’s Send Ready Flag (A39205) are
ON in the following example, the RS signal is set according to the status of
D00300 bit 15 and the ER signal is set according to the status of D00300 bit
14.
989
000001 A39205
TXD
RS-232C port's
Send Ready Flag S D00300
C D00400
N &0
C: D00400 0 0 3 0
Byte order
0: Most significant byte to least significant byte
Always 0 RS and ER signal control
3: RS and ER signal control.
15 14 13 12 0: CPU Unit's RS-232C port
S: D00300 1 0 0 0
ER signal set to 0
RS signal set to 1
■ Example 3: Sending Data to a Code Reader

This example shows how to send data to the V530-R150V3 2D Code Reader
as an example of communicating with an external device.
Hardware Configuration
Sync Sensor
Monitor
F150-M05L
Power Supply
Console
(24 VDC)
F 150-KP
Console Cable
RS-232C Cable
XW2Z-200T (2 m)
XW2Z-500T (5 m)
V530-R150V3 Programmable Controller
SYSMAC
CJ 1G-C PU@@H
CJ 1H-CPU@@H
Camera CJ 1M-C PU@@

F150-SLC 20
In this example, the external device is connected to the RS-232C port built
into the CPU Unit.
First, set the reading conditions for the Code Reader.
Communications Settings
The communications settings of the Code Reader as given in the following
table. These are the default settings.
Item Setting
Communications mode No-protocol
Baud rate 38,400 bps
990
Item Setting
Data bit length 8 bits
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Start code None
End code #000D (CR)
Set the PLC communications settings to the same values in the PLC Setup.
Only the end code needs to be set.
Programming Example
If CIO 000001 turns ON while the RS-232C Port Send Ready Flag (A39205)
is ON, three bytes of data starting from the upper byte of D00010 are sent
without conversion to the Code Reader connected to the CPU Unit’s built-in
RS-232C port. These three bytes contain “@GL”, which is the normal read
command used as a trigger input to the Code Reader from the RS-232C line.
00001 A39205
@TXD
RS-232C Port Send S D00010
Ready Flag
C D00020
N &3
00002 A39206
@RXD
RS-232C Port Receive D00100
Ready Flag
D00020
A393 RS-232C Port
Reception Counter
Upper byte Lower byte
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
S: D00010 4 0 5 3 Sent @GL

D00011 4 E 0 0 40 53 4E ED
Three bytes
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C: D00020 0 0 0 0
Byte Order
#0: Most significant bytes first
RS and ER Signal Control

#0: No RS and ER signal control.
Serial Port Specifier

#0: CPU Unit's built-in RS-232C port
Always #0.
991
Controlling Signals
00001
TXD
When CIO 00001 turns ON, the
S D00300 status of bit 15 of D00300 is
C D00400 output as the RS signal and the
status of bit 14 is output as the
N &0 ER signal.
15 14 13 12
S: D00300 1 0 0 0
Turns OFF ER signal.

Turns ON RS signal.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C: D00400 0 0 3 0
Byte Order

#3: RS and ER signal control

Always #0.
Related PLC Setup Settings

CX-Programmer Settings for the CPU Unit’s Built-in RS-232C Port
992

Console address
Word Bit
Delay 0 to 99,990 ms decimal
(in 10-ms units)
8 and 9 No-protocol Mode End Code 0 hex: None
Specifier 1 hex: Use end code.
2 hex: Use CR+LF.
0 to 7 No-protocol Mode Number of 00 hex: 256 bytes (default)
Bytes of Data 01 to FF hex: 1 to 255 bytes

Port 1 Port 2
(in 10-ms units)
Code
0 to 7 No-protocol Mode End 00 to FF hex
Code
D32005 D32015 12 to 15 No-protocol Mode Start 0 hex: None
Code Specifier 1 hex: Use start code.
8 to 11 No-protocol Mode End 0 hex: None
Code Specifier 1 hex: Use end code.
2 hex: Use CR+LF.
0 to 7 Number of Bytes of Data 00 hex: 256 bytes (default)
01 to FF hex: 1 to 255
bytes
3-24-4 RECEIVE: RXD(235)

Purpose Reads the specified number of bytes of data from the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-
232C port or one of the Serial Communications Board’s serial ports. (The
Serial Communications Board must be Ver. 1.2 or later).
Ladder Symbol
RXD(235)
C C: Control word
N N: Number of bytes to store

0000 to 0100 hex (0 to 256 decimal)
993
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RXD(235)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RXD(235)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Operands The contents of the control word, C, is as shown below.

15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C
Byte order
0 Hex: Most significant byte to least significant byte
1 Hex: Lest significant byte to most significant byte
Always 0
CS and DR signal monitoring

0: No CS and DR signal monitoring
1: CS signal monitoring
2: DR signal monitoring
3: CS and DR signal monitoring.
1: Serial Communications Board port 1
2: Serial Communications Board port 2
Area D C N
A448 to A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
&256 (decimal)
994
Area D C N
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description RXD(235) reads data that has been received in no-protocol mode at the CPU
Unit’s built-in RS-232C port or one of the Serial Communications Board’s
serial ports (the port is specified with bits 8 to 11 of C) and stores N bytes of
data in words D to D+(N÷2)–1. If N bytes of data has not been received at the
port, then only the data that has been received will be stored.
Data can be received only when the port’s Receive Ready Flag is ON. The
Receive Ready Flag is A39206 for the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port, A35606 for
Serial Communications Board port 1, or A35614 for Serial Communications
Board port 2. Execute RXD(235) only when the corresponding Receive
Ready Flag is ON.
Up to 259 bytes can be received, including the receive data (N = 256 bytes
max.), the start code, and the end code.
The following diagram shows the order in which data is received and the con-
tents of the receive frame for various settings.
995

1 2 3 4 5 6 0...
Receive bytes: Specified
Only Start Code in the PC Setup
1 2 3 4 5 6 0...
Receive bytes after ST:
Specified in the PC Setup
Only End Code
1 2 3 4 5 6 0...
Receive bytes before
Start and End Code ED: 256 max.
1 2 3 4 5 6 0...
Receive bytes between
CR+LF End Code ST and ED: 256 max.
1 2 3 4 5 6 0... CR LF
Receive bytes before
Start and CR+LF End Code CR+LF: 256 max.
1 2 3 4 5 6 0...
Receive bytes between
ST and CR+LF: 256 max.
Received
CPU Unit's RS-232C port
When receiving the most signifi-

cant bytes first is specified (0):
Bytes
1 cant bytes icant bytes
2 N bytes
3 stored in the
specified or- 1 2
4 Max: 256 bytes der. 3 4
5
5 6
6
When receiving the least signifi-
cant bytes first is specified (0):
1 2
3 4
5 6
996
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port is specified as the
send port, but no-protocol mode is not set in the PLC
Setup.
ON if one of the Serial Communication Board’s serial
ports is specified as the send port, but no-protocol mode
is not set in the port’s allocated DM Setup Area.
ON (ER Flag in interrupt tasks) if a TXD(236) or
RXD(235) instruction is being executed for the Serial
Communications Board in the cyclic task, the cyclic task
is interrupted, and another TXD(236) or RXD(235)
instruction is executed for the Serial Communications
Board in the interrupt task. (See note.)
ON if a RXD(235) was executed for a serial port on a
Serial Communications Board that was being restarted.
Note The Error (ER) Flag will turn ON immediately after
another TXD(236) or RXD(235) instruction in the
interrupt task.
Precautions RXD(235) can be used only for the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port or one of the
Serial Communications Board’s serial ports. In addition, the port must be set
to no-protocol mode.
The following receive message frame format can be set in the PLC Setup (for
the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port) or the allocated DM Setup Area (for the Serial
Communications Board’s ports).
• Start code: None or 00 to FF hex
• End code: None, CR+LF, or 00 to FF hex. If no end code is specified, the
number of bytes to received is set from 00 to FF hex (1 to 256 decimal; 00
specifies 256 bytes).
The Reception Completed Flag (note 1) will turn ON when the number of
bytes specified in the PLC Setup (for the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port) or the
allocated DM Setup Area (for the Serial Communications Board’s ports) has
been received. When the Reception Completed Flag turns ON, the number of
bytes in the Reception Counter (note 2) will have the same value as the num-
ber of receive bytes specified in the PLC Setup or the allocated DM Setup
Area. If more bytes are received than specified, the Reception Overflow Flag
(note 3) will turn ON.
If an end code is specified in the PLC Setup or the allocated DM Setup Area,
the Reception Completed Flag (note 1) will turn ON when the end code is
received or when 256 bytes of data have been received.
Reception will be stopped if 259 bytes of data are received. If more data is
input after that, the Overrun Error Flag (note 5) and Transmission Error Flag
When more data is input to the Serial Communications Board’s serial port
than is specified in N, that data will be discarded when RXD(235) is executed.
In contrast, extra data input to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port will not be dis-
carded when RXD(235) is executed.
When RXD(235) is executed, data is stored in memory starting at D, the
Reception Completed Flag (note 1) will turn OFF (even if the Reception Over-
flow Flag (note 3) is ON).
997
With the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port, if the RS-232C Port Restart Bit
(note 4) is turned ON, the Reception Completed Flag (note 1) will be turned
OFF (even if the Reception Overflow Flag is ON), and the Reception Counter
(note 2) will be cleared to 0.
Data will be stored in memory in the order specified in C.
If 0 is specified for N, the Reception Completed Flag (note 1) will be turned
OFF, the Reception Counter (note 2) will be cleared to 0, and nothing will be
stored in memory.
If CS signal monitoring is specified in C, the status of the CS signal will be
stored in bit 15 of D.
If DR signal monitoring is specified in C, the status of the DR signal will be
If CS and DR signal monitoring is specified in C, the status of the CS signal
will be stored in bit 15 of D and the status of the DR signal will be stored in bit
14 of D.
Receive data will not be stored if CS or DR signal monitoring is specified.
If 1, 2, or 3 hex is specified for RS and ER signal control in C, RXD(235) will
be executed regardless of the status of the Receive Completed Flag (note 1).
If the RXD(235) instruction is executed for a Board that does not support no-
protocol mode (a Serial Communications Board without a version number),
the Inner Board Service Disabled Flag (A42404, non-fatal error) and the Error
Flag will turn ON.
Note 1. Reception Completed Flags

Built-in RS232C port A39206
Serial Communications Board port 1: A35606
2. Reception Counters
3. Reception Overflow Flags
4. RS-232C Port Restart Bit
5. Overrun Error Flags
Serial Communications Board port 1: CIO 190804
6. Transmission Error Flags
7. Inner Board Service Disabled Flag
Serial Communications Board ports 1 and 2: A42404
• The CPU Unit’s RS-232C port is specified, but no-protocol mode is not
set for the port in the PLC Setup.
no-protocol mode is not set for the port in the allocated DM Setup Area.
998

the Board does not support no-protocol mode (the Board does not have a
version number).
• TXD(236) or RXD(235) was being executed for the Serial Communica-
tions Board in the cyclic task, the cyclic task was interrupted, and another
TXD(236) or RXD(235) instruction was executed for the Serial Communi-
cations Board in the interrupt task.
• When RXD(235) is used to read data that was received at the CPU Unit’s
RS-232C port, the remaining data in the port’s reception buffer is not
cleared, so RXD(235) can be executed repeatedly to read a block of data
in parts.
In contrast, when RXD(235) is used to read data that was received at one
of the Serial Communications Board’s ports (Serial Communications
Board version 1.2 or later), the port’s reception buffer is cleared after
RXD(235) is executed. Consequently, RXD(235) can not be executed
repeatedly to read a block of data in parts.
• If an overrun error, framing error, or parity error occurs on the CPU Unit’s
built-in serial port, serial port reception will stop. The serial port must be
restarted to begin reception again.
• RXD(235) was executed for a serial port on a Serial Communications
Board that was being restarted.
required when executing RXD(235).
Console address
Word Bit
Delay 0 to 99,990 ms decimal (in 10-
ms units)
165 12 No-protocol Mode Start Code 0: None
8 and 9 No-protocol Mode End Code 0: None
Specifier 1: Use end code.
2: Use CR+LF.
0 to 7 No-protocol Mode Number of 00: 256 bytes
bytes of Data 01 to FF: 1 to 255 bytes

Port 1 Port 2
Code
Code
999

Port 1 Port 2
D32005 D32015 12 to 15 No-protocol Mode Start 0: None
2: Use CR+LF.
Auxiliary Area Flags for CPU Unit’s RS-232C Port

RS-232C Port Reception A39206 ON when no-protocol reception is com-
Completed Flag pleted.
Number of Receive Bytes Specified:
The flag will turn ON when the specified
number of bytes has been received.
End Code Specified: The flag will turn
ON when the end code is received or
when 256 bytes have been received.
RS-232C Port Reception A39207 ON when more that the expected num-
Overflow Flag ber of receive bytes has been received.
The flag will turn ON when anything is
received after reception has been com-
pleted and execution of the next
RXD(235).
ON when anything is received after the
end code has been received and execu-
tion of the next RXD(235) or when the
257th byte of data is received before the
end code is received.
RS-232C Port Reception A393 Counts in hexadecimal the number of
Counter bytes received in no-protocol mode.
1000
Auxiliary Area Flags for Serial Communication Board’s Ports

Port Name Address Contents
Port 1 Reception Completed A35606 ON when no-protocol reception is com-
Flag pleted.
Reception Overflow A35607 ON when more that the expected num-
Flag ber of receive bytes has been received
in no-protocol mode.
The flag will turn ON when more data is
received after reception was completed
but before the received data was not
read from the buffer with RXD(235).
ON when 257 or more bytes of data are
received without an end code.
Reception Counter A357 Counts in hexadecimal the number of
bytes received in no-protocol mode (0 to
256 decimal).
Overrun Error Flag CIO 1908 ON when 260 or more bytes of data are
bit 04 received in the buffer before RXD(235)
is executed.
Port 2 Reception Completed A35614 ON when no-protocol reception is com-
Flag pleted.
Reception Overflow A35615 ON when more that the expected num-
Flag ber of receive bytes has been received
in no-protocol mode.
The flag will turn ON when more data is
received after reception was completed
but before the received data was not
read from the buffer with RXD(235).
ON when 257 or more bytes of data are
received without an end code.
Reception Counter A358 Counts in hexadecimal the number of
bytes received in no-protocol mode (0 to
256 decimal).
Overrun Error Flag CIO 1918 ON when 260 or more bytes of data are
bit 04 received in the buffer before RXD(235)
is executed.
Ports 1 Inner Board Service A42404 ON when RXD(235) is executed for a
and 2 Disabled Flag Serial Communications Board that does
not support no-protocol mode (a Board
without a version number).
1001
Examples
■ Example 1: Basic Operation
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, data is received from the
RS-232C port and 10 bytes of data are stored starting in D00100.
000000 A39206
RXD
Reception
D D00100
Completed Flag
C D00020
N &10
&10
C: D00200 0 0
Byte order
Always 0 CS and DR signal monitoring

0: No CS and DR signal monitoring

This example assumes that both a start and end cant bytes icant bytes
code have been specified in the PC Setup.
Stored
D:
ST: Start code (e.g., 02 hex)
■ Example 2: Sending Data to a Code Reader

This example shows how to received data from the V530-R150V3 2D Code
Reader as an example of communicating with an external device.
Hardware Configuration
Sync Sensor
Monitor
F150-M05L
Power Supply
Console
(24 VDC)
F 150-KP
Console Cable
RS-232C Cable
XW2Z-200T (2 m)
XW2Z-500T (5 m)
V530-R150V3 Programmable Controller
SYSMAC
CJ 1G-C PU@@H
CJ 1H-CPU@@H
Camera CJ 1M-C PU@@

F150-SLC 20
In this example, the external device is connected to the RS-232C port built
into the CPU Unit.
First, set the reading conditions for the Code Reader.
1002
Communications Settings
The communications settings of the Code Reader as given in the following
table. These are the default settings.
Item Setting
Communications mode No-protocol
Baud rate 38,400 bps
Data bit length 8 bits
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Start code None
End code #000D (CR)
Set the PLC communications settings to the same values in the PLC Setup.
Only the end code needs to be set.
Programming Example
If CIO 000002 turns ON while the RS-232C Port Send Ready Flag (A39205)
is ON, the number of bytes of reading results specified in the RS-232C Port
Reception Counter (A393) are read from the Code Reader connected to the
CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port and stored starting from the upper byte of
D00100.
00001 A39205
TXD
RS-232C Port Send D00010
Ready Flag D00020
&3
00002 A39206
RXD
RS-232C Port Receive S D00100
Ready Flag C D00020
N A393 RS-232C Port
Reception Counter
Upper byte Lower byte
Received 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
30 36 2F 30 38 2F 31 31 S: D00100 3 0 3 6
=”06/08/11 D00101 2 F 3 0
D00102 31 31 20
D00103 4F 4D 52 4F
D00104 37 37 37 36
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C: D00020 0 0 0 0
Byte Order

#0: No RS and ER signal control.
Always #0.
1003
Controlling Signals
00000
RXD When CIO 00001 turns ON, the
D D00100 status of bit 15 of D00300 is
output as the RS signal and the
C D00200 status of bit 14 is output as the
N &10 ER signal.
15 14 13 12
D: D00100 1 0 0 0
Turns OFF ER signal.

Turns ON RS signal.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C: D00400 0 0 3 0
Byte Order

#3: RS and ER signal control

Always #0.
Related PLC Setup Settings

CX-Programmer Settings for the CPU Unit’s Built-in RS-232C Port
1004

Console address
Word Bit
Delay 0 to 99,990 ms decimal
(in 10-ms units)
8 and 9 No-protocol Mode End Code 0 hex: None
Specifier 1 hex: Use end code.
2 hex: Use CR+LF.
0 to 7 No-protocol Mode Number of 00 hex: 256 bytes (default)
Bytes of Data 01 to FF hex: 1 to 255 bytes

Port 1 Port 2
(in 10-ms units)
Code
Code
D32005 D32015 12 to 15 No-protocol Mode Start 0 hex: None
Code Specifier 1 hex: Use start code.
8 to 11 No-protocol Mode End 0 hex: None
Code Specifier 1 hex: Use end code.
2 hex: Use CR+LF.
0 to 7 Number of Bytes of Data 00 hex: 256 bytes (default)
01 to FF hex: 1 to 255
bytes
3-24-5 TRANSMIT VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS UNIT: TXDU(256)

Purpose Outputs the specified number of bytes of data from one of the Serial Commu-
nications Unit’s serial ports. (The Serial Communications Unit must be Ver.
1.2 or later).
Ladder Symbol
TXDU(256)
0000 to 0100 hex (0 to 256)
1005
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TXDU(256)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TXDU(256)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Operands The contents of the control words, C and C+1, are as shown below.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C
Byte order
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C+1
Destination unit address (See note.)

Serial Communications Unit's unit
address (unit number + 10 hex)
Serial port number
0: Specify directly. (See note.)
1: Port 1
2: Port 2
Port number specifier
(Internal logical port)
Specify 0 to 7 or F.
(F: Automatic allocation)
Note The serial port’s unit address can be specified directly by setting the serial
port number to 0 and setting the destination unit address to the serial port’s
unit address. (Set the destination unit address to 80 hex + 4 × unit number for
port 1 or 81 hex + 4 × unit number for port 2.)
Area S C D
6143 6142 6143
D32767 D32766 D32767
E32767 E32766 E32767
1006
Area S C D
En_32767 En_32766 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
&256 (decimal)
Data Registers --- --- DR0 to DR15
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description TXDU(256) reads N bytes of data from words S to S+(N÷2)–1 and outputs the
raw data in no-protocol mode from the Serial Communications Unit with the
unit address specified in bits 0 to 7 of C+1, through the port specified with bits
8 to 11 of C+1. The logical port number can be set to any value between 0
and 7 and is specified with bits 12 to 15 of C+1.
The start and end codes specified for no-protocol mode in the allocated DM
Setup Area are added to the data before the data is output. Up to 259 bytes
can be sent, including the send data (N = 256 bytes max.), the start code, and
the end code.
Data can be sent only when the Communications Port Enabled Flag for the
specified logical port (A20200 to A20207 for ports 0 to 7) is ON and the TXDU
Instruction Executing Flag (in the allocated DM Setup Area) is OFF.
Note The logical port number can be allocated automatically by setting bits 12 to 15
of C+1 to F. For details, refer to Automatic Allocation of Communications Ports
on page 1032.
1007
15 87 0
N bytes of data is sent in the following order when
1 2 sending the most significant bytes first is specified:
3 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
5 6

Data
N send bytes: 256 max.
Only Start Code
Data
Send bytes after ST:
Only End Code 256 max.
Data
Send bytes before ED:
256 max.
Start and End Code
Data
Send bytes between
ST and ED: 256 max.
CR+LF End Code
Data CR LF
Send bytes before
CR+LF: 256 max.
Data
Send bytes between ST
and CR+LF: 256 max.
Serial port on Serial Communications Unit
Data sent.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if all of the logical ports are being used or the Com-
munications Port Enabled Flag for the specified logical
port is OFF when the instruction is executed.
Precautions TXDU(256) can be used only for a Serial Communications Unit’s serial port
that has been set to no-protocol mode.
The following send-message frame formats can be set in the allocated DM
Setup Area.
• End code: None, CR+LF, or 00 to FF hex.
The data will be sent with any combination of start and/or end codes specified
in the allocated DM Setup Area. If start and end codes are specified, the
codes will be added to the send data (N). In this case, the maximum number
of bytes that can be specified for N is 256 bytes.
Data is sent in the order specified in C.
Nothing will be sent if 0 is specified for N.
If RS signal control is specified in C, bit 15 of S will be used as the RS signal.
1008
If ER signal control is specified in C, bit 15 of S will be used as the ER signal.

If RS and ER signal control is specified in C, bit 15 of S will be used as the RS
signal and bit 14 of S will be used as the ER signal.
TXDU(256) uses a logical port (because it sends an internal FINS command)
to output a send sequence command to the Serial Communications Unit (ver-
sion number 1.2 or later). Since SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490),
PMCR(260), and RXDU(255) also use logical ports 0 to 7, TXDU(256) cannot
be executed for a logical port if that logical port is already being used by one
of those instructions or another TXDU(256) instruction.
To ensure that TXDU(256) is not executed while the logical port is busy, pro-
gram the port’s Communications Port Enabled Flag (A20200 to A20207) as a
normally open condition.
CPU Unit
TXDU
TXDU
TXDU(256) can not be executed while the TXDU Instruction Executing Flag
(bit 5 of n+9 or n+19, where n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number) is ON. To
ensure that another TXDU(256) is not executed for the port before the first
TXDU(256) is completed, program the port’s TXDU Instruction Executing Flag
as a normally closed condition.
• The Communications Port Enabled Flag for the specified logical port is
OFF when TXDU(256) is executed.
Note Depending on the external device, it might be necessary to set a send delay
when sending data with TXDU(256). It a send delay is required, set or adjust
the delay time in the allocated DM Setup Area.
required when executing TXD(236).
DM Setup Area Settings
(m = D30000 + 100 × unit number)
Port 1 Port 2
m+2 m+12 15 No-protocol Mode Send 0: Default (0 ms)
(in 10-ms units)
1009

Port 1 Port 2
m+4 m+14 8 to 15 No-protocol Mode Start 00 to FF hex
Code
Code
m+5 m+15 12 to 15 No-protocol Mode Start 0: None
2: Use CR+LF.
Auxiliary Area
Name Address Description
Communications A20200 ON when a communications instruction (including
Port Enabled to TXDU(256) can be executed with the corresponding
Flags A20207 port number. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communica-
tions ports 0 to 7.
The flag is OFF when a communications instruction is
being executed and ON when the execution is com-
pleted (normal end or error end).
Communications A203 to These words contain the completion codes for the
Port Completion A210 corresponding port numbers when communications
Codes instructions have been executed. Words A203 to
A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The code is 00 while the instruction is being executed
and contains the relevant code when execution is
completed.
These words are cleared to 0000 when PLC opera-
tion starts.
Communications A219 ON when an error occurred during execution of a
Port Error Flags communications instruction. When a flag is ON,
check the completion code in A203 to A210 to trou-
bleshoot the error.
OFF when execution has been finished normally. Bits
00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The flag status is retained until the next communica-
tions instruction is executed. Even if an error has
occurred, a flag will be reset to 0 the next time that a
communications instruction is executed for that port.
Completion Codes
Code Meaning
0205 hex Response timeout (This error can occur when the communications
mode is set to host link mode.)
0401 hex Undefined command (This error can occur when the communications
mode is set to protocol macro, NT Link, echoback test, or serial gate-
way mode.)
1001 hex The command is too long.
1002 hex The command is too short.
1003 hex The specified number of data elements does not match the actual
amount of send data.
1004 hex The command format is incorrect.
110C hex Other parameter error
2201 hex Operation could not be performed during operation. (Operation dis-
abled because Unit is busy sending.)
2202 hex Operation could not be performed when stopped. (Operation dis-
abled because Unit is switching protocols.)
1010
Related Flags in the CPU Bus Unit Area

(n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number)
Word Bit Name Status
Port 1 Port 2
n+9 n+19 05 TXDU Instruction 0: TXDU(256) is not being executed.
Executing Flag 1: TXDU(256) is being executed.
Example: Flag Operation The following diagram shows the operation of the Communications Port
Enabled Flag and TXDU Instruction Executing Flag.
Instruction
TXDU(256) execution
CPU Unit
Communications Port Enabled Flag ON
(A20200 to A20207 correspond to
communications ports 0 to 7.)
OFF
TXDU Executing Flag ON

(Bit 5 of n+9 or n+19,
Serial n = CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number)
Communications OFF
Unit
Send processing Send

processing
Send starts. Send completed.
Example: Sending Data When CIO 000000 is ON, A20203 (the Communications Port Enabled Flag) is
ON, and CIO 155905 (the TXDU Instruction Executing Flag for port 1) is OFF
in the following example, TXDU(256) outputs data through serial port 1 of the
Serial Communications Unit with unit number 2. The 5 bytes of output data
are read from the DM Area beginning at the rightmost byte of D00100 and
output through logical port 3 to a general-purpose device such as a printer.
1011
000000 A20203 155905

TXDU
Communications Port TXDU Instruction S D00100
Enabled Flag Executing Flag
C D00200
N &5
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C+0: D00200 0 0 0 1
Byte order

Always 00
15 1211 8 7 4 3 0
C+1: D00201 3 1 1 2
Serial Communications Unit's unit address (Unit

address as CPU Bus Unit)
12 hex = Unit number + 10 hex
Serial port number

1: Port 1

3: Logical port 3
Note:
The serial port's unit address can be specified directly by setting the serial port number to 0 and
setting the Serial Communications Unit's unit address to the serial port's unit address.
(Set the unit address to 80 hex + 4 x unit number for port 1 or 81 hex + 4 x unit number for port 2.)
15 12 11 8 7 43 0
C+1: 3 0 8 8
Serial Communications Unit's unit address

88 hex = 80 hex + 4 x unit number
Serial port number
0: Specify port directly.
3: Logical port 3

15 8 7 0
S: D00100 3 4 1 2
D00101 C D A B
D00102 E F Transfer order 1 2 3 4 A B C D E F
Example allocated DM Setup Area settings: 5 bytes
Start code and end code values

In this example, a start and end code have been
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 specified in the allocated DM Setup Area.
D30204 0 2 0 3
ST 12 34 AB CD EF ED
End code ST: Start code (e.g., 02 hex)
(03 hex) ED: End code (e.g., 03 hex)
Start code
(02 hex)
Start code and end code specifiers Data sent.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D30205: 1 1
End code specifier

(1: Use end code.)
Start code specifier
(1: Use start code.)
1012
3-24-6 RECEIVE VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS UNIT: RXDU(255)

Purpose Reads the specified number of bytes of data from one of the Serial Communi-
cations Unit’s serial ports. (The Serial Communications Unit must be Ver. 1.2
or later).
Ladder Symbol
RXDU(255)
0000 to 0100 hex (0 to 256)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RXDU(255)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RXDU(255)

areas areas
OK OK OK OK
Operands The contents of the control words, C and C+1, are as shown below.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C
Byte order
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C+1
Destination unit address (See note.)

Serial Communications Unit's unit
address (unit number + 10 hex)
Serial port number
0: Specify directly. (See note.)
1: Port 1
2: Port 2
(Internal logical port)
Specify 0 to 7 or F.
(F: Automatic allocation)
Note The serial port’s unit address can be specified directly by setting the serial
port number to 0 and setting the destination unit address to the serial port’s
unit address. (Set the destination unit address to 80 hex + 4 × unit number for
port 1 or 81 hex + 4 × unit number for port 2.)
1013
Area D C D
6143 6142 6143
D32767 D32766 D32767
E32767 E32766 E32767
En_32767 En_32766 En_32767
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
&256 (decimal)
Data Registers --- --- DR0 to DR15
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description RXDU(255) reads data that has been received in no-protocol mode at the
Serial Communications Unit with the unit address specified in bits 0 to 7 of
C+1, through the port specified with bits 8 to 11 of C+1, and stores that data
starting at D. If fewer than N bytes of data have been received at the port, then
only the data that has been received will be stored. The logical port number
can be set to any value between 0 and 7 and is specified with bits 12 to 15 of
C+1.
Execute RXDU(255) to read the received data from the buffer when the
Reception Completed Flag (in the allocated DM Setup Area) is ON.
Up to 259 bytes can be received, including the receive data (N = 256 bytes
max.), the start code, and the end code.
The following diagram shows the order in which data is received and the con-
tents of the receive frame for various settings.
Note The logical port number can be allocated automatically by setting bits 12 to 15
of C+1 to F. For details, refer to Automatic Allocation of Communications Ports
on page 1032.
1014
Data
Number of bytes
Only Start Code (Specified in allocated
DM Setup Area)
ST Data
Number of bytes
Only End Code (Specified in allocated
DM Setup Area)
Data ED
Number of bytes up to ED:
256 max.
Start and End Code
ST Data ED
Number of bytes between
ST and ED: 256 max.
CR+LF End Code
Data LF CR
Number of bytes up to
CR+LF: 256 max.
ST Data CR LF
Number of bytes between
ST and CR+LF: 256 max.
Data received.
Serial port on Serial Communications Unit

Byte order
Bytes Most signifi- Least signif-
1 cant bytes icant bytes
2
15 87 0
3 1 2
N Storage order D
4 (256 bytes max.) 3 4
D+1
5 5 6
D+2
6
Byte order
15 87 0
D 2 1
D+1 4 3
D+2 6 5
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if all of the logical ports are being used or the Com-
munications Port Enabled Flag for the specified logical
port is OFF when the instruction is executed.
Precautions RXDU(255) can be used only for a Serial Communications Unit’s serial port
that has been set to no-protocol mode.
1015
The following receive-message frame formats can be set in the allocated DM

Setup Area.
• End code: None, CR+LF, or 00 to FF hex. If no end code is specified, the
number of bytes to be received is set from 00 to FF hex (1 to 256 decimal;
00 specifies 256 bytes).
The Reception Completed Flag (note 1) will turn ON when the number of
bytes specified the allocated DM Setup Area has been received. When the
Reception Completed Flag turns ON, the number of bytes in the Reception
Counter (note 2) will have the same value as the number of receive bytes
specified in the allocated DM Setup Area. If more bytes are received than
specified, the Reception Overflow Flag (note 3) will turn ON.
If an end code is specified in the allocated DM Setup Area, the Reception
Completed Flag (note 1) will turn ON when the end code is received or when
256 bytes of data have been received. If more data is received after the
Reception Completed Flag (note 1) turns ON and before RXDU(255) is exe-
cuted again, the Reception Overflow Flag (note 3) will turn ON.
Reception will be stopped if 259 bytes of data are received. If more data is
input after that, the Overrun Error Flag (note 4) and Transmission Error Flag
When more data is input to the Serial Communications Board’s serial port
than is specified in N, that data will be discarded when the next RXDU(255)
instruction is executed.
When RXDU(255) is executed, data is stored in memory starting at D, the
Reception Completed Flag (note 1) will turn OFF (even if the Reception Over-
flow Flag (note 3) is ON), and the Reception Counter (note 2) will be cleared
to 0.
Data will be stored in memory in the order specified in C.
If 0 is specified for N, the Reception Completed Flag (note 1) and Reception
Overflow Flag (note 3) will be turned OFF, the Reception Counter (note 2) will
be cleared to 0, and nothing will be stored in memory.
If CS signal monitoring is specified in C, the status of the CS signal will be
If DR signal monitoring is specified in C, the status of the DR signal will be
If CS and DR signal monitoring is specified in C, the status of the CS signal
will be stored in bit 15 of D and the status of the DR signal will be stored in bit
14 of D.
Receive data will not be stored if CS or DR signal monitoring is specified.
If 1, 2, or 3 hex is specified for RS and DR signal control in C, RXDU(255) will
be executed regardless of the status of the Receive Completed Flag (note 1).
RXDU(255) uses a logical port (because it sends an internal FINS command)
to output a receive sequence command to a Serial Communications Unit or
CS-series Serial Communications Board. Since SEND(090), RECV(098),
CMND(490), PMCR(260), and TXDU(256) also use logical ports 0 to 7,
RXDU(255) cannot be executed for a logical port if that logical port is already
being used by one of those instructions or another RXDU(255) instruction.
To ensure that RXDU(255) is not executed while the logical port is busy, pro-
1016
CPU Unit
RXDU
RXDU
RXDU(255) can not be executed while the Reception Completed Flag (bit 6
of n+9 or n+19, where n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number) is ON. Program the
Reception Completed Flag as a normally open condition of RXDU(255).
• The Communications Port Enabled Flag for the specified logical port is
OFF when RXDU(255) is executed.
Note 1. Reception Completed Flags (n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number)

Port 1: Bit 6 of n+9
2. Reception Counters (n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number)
Port 1: n+10
Port 2: n+20
3. Reception Overflow Flags (n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number)
4. Overrun Error Flags (n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number)
5. Transmission Error Flags (n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number)
6. Further data cannot be received until the received data is read from the
buffer with RXDU(255). When the Reception Completed Flag goes ON,
read that data promptly with RXDU(255) before more data is input to the
port.
7. When RXDU(255) is used to read data that was received at one of the Se-
rial Communications Unit’s ports, the port’s reception buffer is cleared after
RXDU(255) is executed. Consequently, RXDU(255) can not be executed
repeatedly to read a block of data in parts.
1017
Related Flags and Words The following words are related to RXDU(255) operation.
DM Setup Area Settings
(m = D30000 + 100 × unit number)
Port 1 Port 2
m+4 m+14 8 to 15 No-protocol Mode Start 00 to FF hex
Code
Code
m+5 m+15 12 to 15 No-protocol Mode Start 0: None
2: Use CR+LF.
Auxiliary Area
Name Address Description
Communications A20200 ON when a communications instruction (including
Port Enabled to RXDU(255)) can be executed with the corresponding
Flags A20207 port number. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communica-
tions ports 0 to 7.
The flag is OFF when a communications instruction is
being executed and ON when the execution is com-
pleted (normal end or error end).
Port Completion A210 corresponding port numbers when communications
Codes instructions have been executed. Words A203 to
A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The code is 00 while the instruction is being executed
and contains the relevant code when execution is
completed.
These words are cleared to 0000 when PLC opera-
tion starts.
Communications A219 ON when an error occurred during execution of a
Port Error Flags communications instruction. When a flag is ON,
check the completion code in A203 to A210 to trou-
bleshoot the error.
OFF when execution has been finished normally. Bits
00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The flag status is retained until the next communica-
tions instruction is executed. Even if an error has
occurred, a flag will be reset to 0 the next time that a
communications instruction is executed for that port.
Completion Codes
Code Meaning
0205 hex Response timeout (This error can occur when the communications
mode is set to host link mode.)
0401 hex Undefined command (This error can occur when the communications
mode is set to protocol macro, NT Link, echoback test, or serial gate-
way mode.)
1001 hex The command is too long.
1002 hex The command is too short.
1004 hex The command format is incorrect.
110C hex Other parameter error
1018
Code Meaning
2201 hex Operation could not be performed during operation. (Operation dis-
abled because Unit is busy sending.)
2202 hex Operation could not be performed when stopped. (Operation dis-
abled because Unit is switching protocols.)
Related Flags in the CPU Bus Unit Area

(n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number)
Word Bit Function
Port 1 Port 2
n+8 n+18 04 Overrun Error Flag
1: The reception buffer contained more than 259
bytes of data before RXDU(255) was executed.
Note: Once this error flag goes ON, it can be turned
OFF only by turning the power OFF and then ON
again or restarting the Board.
n+9 n+19 06 Reception Completed Flag
0: No data received or currently receiving data
1: Reception completed
0 → 1: The Board or Unit has received the specified
number of bytes.
1 → 0: RXD(235) or RXDU(255) was executed to write
the data from the buffer to a CPU Unit data area.
n+9 n+19 07 Reception Overflow Flag
0: The Board or Unit has not received more than
the specified number of bytes.
1: The Board or Unit has received more than the
specified number of bytes.
0 → 1: The Board or Unit received more data after data
reception was completed.
1 → 0: RXD(235) or RXDU(255) was executed to write
the data from the buffer to a CPU Unit data area.
n+10 n+20 05 Reception Counter
Indicates the number of bytes received in hexadecimal,
between 0000 and 0100 hex (0 to 256 decimal).
1019
Example: Flag Operation The following diagram shows the operation of RXDU(255) and related flags.
End code or specified
number of bytes received.
Reception processing
Reception
processing
Serial
Communications
Unit
Reception Completed Flag ON
(Bit 6 of n+9 or n+19,
n = CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number)
OFF
Instruction
RXDU(255)
execution
Communications Port ON
Enabled Flag
CPU Unit (A20200 to A20207 correspond to
communications ports 0 to 7.)
OFF
Write
Writing data to the CPU Unit's processing
data area
Example: Receiving Data When CIO 000000 is ON, A20203 (the Communications Port Enabled Flag) is
ON, and CIO 155906 (the Reception Completed Flag for port 1) is OFF in the
following example, RXDU(255) reads the data received through serial port 1
of the Serial Communications Unit with unit number 2. (Logical communica-
tions port number 3 is used to receive the data from a general-purpose device
such as a bar-code reader.) The 10 bytes of received data are written to the
DM Area beginning at the rightmost byte of D00100.
1020
000000 A20203 155906

RXDU
Communications Reception D D00100
Port Enabled Completed
Flag Flag C D00200
N &10
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C: D00200 0 0 0 1
1: Least significant byte to most significant byte

Always 0
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C+1: D00201 3 1 1 2
Serial Communications Unit's unit address

(CPU Bus Unit's unit address)
12: Unit address + 10 hex
Serial Communications Unit's serial port specifier

1: Serial port No. 1
Communication port No. specifier (internal logic port)

3: Communications port No. 3
Note: The Serial Communications Unit's serial port unit address can
also be directly specified in C+1.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C+1 3 0 8 8
Serial Communications Unit's serial port unit address specifier

88: 80 + (04_Unit No. 2)
0: Directly specified serial port unit address
Communications port No. specifier (internal logic port)
3: Communications port No. 3
Most significant bytes Least significant bytes
15 8 7 0
D: D00100 3 4 1 2
D00101 7 8 5 6
D00102 C D A B Received in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H I J K L
specified
D00103 G H E F order: 10 bytes
D00104 K L I J
Start and end codes added
Note: Allocated DM Area Settings according to setting in PC Setup
• Start code/end code ST 12 34 56 78 AB CD EF GH IJ KL ED

15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D30204: 0 2 0 3 ST: Start code (e.g., 02 hex)
End code (e.g., 03 hex)
Start code (e.g., 02 hex) Data received
• Start code/end code specifier

15 12 11 8 7 43 0
D30205: 1 1
Number of receive data bytes

00: Unlimited (256 bytes max.)
End code specifier
1: Use end code
Start code specifier
1: Use start code
3-24-7 CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP: STUP(237)

Purpose Changes the communications parameters of a serial port on the CPU Unit,
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only), or Serial Communications
Unit (CPU Bus Unit). STUP(237) thus enables the protocol mode to be
changed during PLC operation.
1021
Ladder Symbol
STUP(237)
C C: Control word (port)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition STUP(237)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @STUP(237)

areas areas
Operands The contents of the control word, C, are as shown below.

15 12 11 8 7 0
C
Unit address of port device

CPU Unit: 00 hex
CPU Bus Unit: Unit number + 10 hex
Inner Board: E1 hex (CS Series only)
Serial port number
1 hex: Peripheral port on CPU Unit or Port 1 on CPU Bus Unit or Inner Board
2 hex: Built-in RS-232C port on CPU Unit or Port 2 on CPU Bus Unit or Inner Board
(Settings 3 and 4 hex are reserved.)
Always set to 0.
Area C S
A448 to A959 A448 to A950
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32758
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
1022
Area C S
Constants Specified values only #0000
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description STUP(237) writes 10 words of data from S to S+9 to the communications

setup area of the Unit with the specified unit address, as shown in the follow-
ing table. When the constant #0000 is designated to S, the communications
settings of the corresponding port will be set to default.
Unit address Unit Port No. Serial port Serial port communications
setup area
00 hex CPU Unit 1 hex Port 1 Communications parameters for
the peripheral port in the PLC
Setup
2 hex Port 2 Communications parameters for
the RS-232C port in the PLC
Setup
Unit No. + 10 Serial Communications 1 hex Port 1 10 words starting from D30000 +
hex Unit (CPU Bus Unit) 100 x Unit No.
2 hex Port 2 10 words starting from D30000 +
100 x Unit No. + 10
E1 hex Serial Communications 1 hex Port 1 10 words starting from D32000
Board (Inner Board) (CS 2 hex Port 2 10 words starting from D32010
Series only)
The following data is stored in the 10 words from S to S+9.

Peripheral port on CPU Unit PLC Setup settings in Programming Console
addresses +144 to +153
RS-232C port built into CPU Unit PLC Setup settings in Programming Console
addresses +160 to +169
Serial Communications Unit port 1 m to m+9 (m = D30000 × unit number)
Serial Communications Unit port 2 m+10 to m+19 (m = D30000 × unit number)
Serial Communications Board port 1 D32000 to D32009
Serial Communications Board port 2 D32010 to D32019
When STUP(237) is executed, the corresponding Port Parameters Changing

Flag (A61901, A61902, or A619 to A636) will turn ON. The flag will remain ON
until changing the parameters has been completed.
Use STUP(237) to change communications parameter for a port during oper-
ation based on specified conditions. For example, STUP(237) can be used to
change to Host Link communications for monitoring and programming from a
host computer when specified conditions are meet while execution a commu-
nications sequence for a modem connection.
1023
Differences between CPU Units

If the PLC is turned OFF and then ON again after STUP(237) has been used
to change the communications parameters, the new parameters will be
retained or will revert to the previous parameters, depending on the CPU Unit.
CPU Unit Status of communications parameters
CS1-H, CJ1-H, If the PLC is turned OFF and then ON again, the communications
CJ1M, or CS1D parameters revert to the settings that existed before they were
changed with STUP(237).
CS1 If the PLC is turned OFF and then ON again, the communications
parameters set with STUP(237) are retained.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the values in C are not within range.
ON if STUP(237) is executed for a port whose Communi-
cations Parameter Changing Flag is already ON.
ON if STUP(237) is executed in an interrupt task.
Precautions Communications parameters consist of the protocol mode, baud rate, data
format (protocol macro transmission method and protocol macro maximum
communications data length), and other parameters. Refer to CS/CJ-series
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual (W339) or CS/CJ-series Serial
Communications Boards and Serial Communications Unit Operation Manual
(W336) for the serial port that is to be set for details.
Related Flags and Words The following flags can be used as required when executing STUP(237).
These flags are in the Auxiliary Area.
Peripheral Port Parameters A61901 ON when the communications param-
Changing Flag eters are being changed for the periph-
eral port.
RS-232C Port Parameters A61902 ON when the communications param-
Changing Flag eters are being changed for the RS-
232C port.
Port Parameters Changing A620 bit 01 to ON when the communications param-
Flags for ports 1 to 4 on bit 04 eters are being changed for a port on a
Serial Communications to A635 bit 01 Serial Communications Unit.
Units 1 to 15. to bit 04
Port Parameters Changing A63601 to ON when the communications param-
Flags for ports 1 to 4 on the A63604 eters are being changed for a port on
Serial Communications the Serial Communications Board.
Board (CS Series only)
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, the communications
parameters for serial port 1 of the Serial Communications Board (Inner Board)
are changes to the settings contained in the 10 words from D00100 to
D00109. In this example, the setting are changed the protocol mode to the
protocol macro mode.
1024
S: D00100 6 Port setting: Default, Protocol mode: 6 hex (protocol macro).

S+1: D00101 Baud rate: Default (9,600 bps)
S+2: D00102
to to
S+9: D00109
Transferred
DM words allocated to the communications

setup of the Serial Communications Board.
6
to to
1025
Network Instructions Section 3-25
3-25 Network Instructions

3-25-1 About SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK Operations
The network instructions can be divided into two types, SEND(090)/
RECV(098) and CMND(490). These instructions are transmitted between
Units (CPU Units, CPU Bus Units, and computers) in a network to transfer
data and control operation, such as changing the operating mode.
Instruction Message content Operation
SEND(090)/ Commands to transmit/ CPU Unit Other device
RECV(098) receive data Data transmission
(FINS command) SEND(090) or CPU Unit,
RECV(098) CS1 CPU Bus Unit or
Data reception computer
CMND(490) Arbitrary commands CPU Unit Other device

(FINS command)
Command sent CPU Unit,
CMND(490) CS1 CPU Bus Unit, or
Response returned computer
The commands executed by the network instructions are known as “FINS

commands” and are used for communications between FA control devices.
(Refer to the CS/CJ Series Communications Commands Reference Manual
for details on FINS commands.) With FINS commands it is possible to com-
municate (by the command/response format) with any Unit in any network or
on the CPU Rack itself just by specifying the network address, node number,
and unit number of the destination Unit.
In the following example, a FINS command is sent to the CPU Unit through
node number 2 in network address 00.
Node number 1
Node number 2
CPU Unit (Rack)
Network address 00
(local network)
Network address 01
1,2,3... 1. Network address:

Address of the network (local network = 00)
2. Node number
Logical address in the network
3. Unit number
Unit number of the destination Unit
a) CPU Unit: 00
b) CPU Bus Unit: Unit number +10 hexadecimal
c) Special I/O Unit (except for C200H-series Special I/O Units):
Unit number +20 hexadecimal
1026
d) Inner Board (CS Series only):

E1 hexadecimal
e) Computer: 01
Unit number Destination device
(hexadecimal)
00 Node number
Unit number +10 Node number
E1 Node number
01
Node number
Note It is also possible to directly specify a serial port (unit address) within the des-
tination device.
Serial Communications Unit

Inner Board CPU Unit
Serial port 1 Serial port 1 Serial port 2 (Peripheral)
Serial port 2 Serial port 2 Serial port 1 (RS-232C)
Serial Port Unit Addresses:

• Serial Communications Unit ports
Port 1: 80 hex + 4 × unit number
Unit number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Hexadecimal 80 84 88 8C 90 94 98 9C A0 A4 A8 AC B0 B4 B8 BC
Decimal 128 132 136 140 144 148 152 156 160 164 168 172 176 180 184 188

Unit number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Hexadecimal 81 85 89 8D 91 95 99 9D A1 A5 A9 AD B1 B5 B9 BD
Decimal 129 133 137 141 145 149 153 157 161 165 169 173 177 181 185 189
• Serial Communications Board ports

Port 1: E4 hex (228 decimal)
• CPU Unit ports
Peripheral port: FD hex (253 decimal)
RS-232C port: FC hex (252 decimal)
Network Communications The following examples show three types of network communications: com-
Patterns munications from a PLC to other devices in a network, communications from a
1027
PLC to serial ports on other devices in a network, and communications to a

host computer connected by a Host Link.
Communications to Another Device in the Network
The following example shows communications from a PLC to devices in
another PLC (the CPU Unit, CPU Bus Unit, or Inner Board). For more details,
refer to the Operation Manual for the network (Controller Link or Ethernet)
being used.
To CPU
PLC to PLC Bus Unit To Inner Board
To CPU Unit
This example shows communications from a PLC to a personal computer.
PLC to computer
Communications to a Serial Port in the Network

These examples show communications from a PLC to serial ports in devices
in the network. The first shows communications to serial ports in devices in
another PLC (the CPU Unit, CPU Bus Unit, or Inner Board) and the second
shows communications to a serial port within the CPU Rack itself.
Through the network
Within the CPU Rack
Note Communications can span up to 8 network levels, including the local network.
(The local network is the network where the communications originate.)
SEND(090),
RECV(098), or
CMND(490)
Bridge or gateway Bridge or gateway
Network 1 Network 2 Network 3

(local network)
In order to communicate through the network, it is necessary to register a

routing table in each PLC’s CPU Unit which indicates the route by which data
1028
will be transferred to the desired node. Each routing table is made up of a

local network table and a relay network table.
1,2,3... 1. Local network table

This table shows the unit numbers and network addresses of the nodes
connected to the local PLC.
2. Relay network table
This table shows the node numbers and network addresses of the first re-
lay nodes to destination networks that are not connected to the local PLC.
Communications to a Host Computer (Host Link)
By issuing a SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) instruction to a serial
port set to Host Link mode, the necessary Host Link header and terminator
will be attached to the FINS command and the command will be sent to the
host computer.
Host computer connected to Host computer connected to a Host computer connected to a
the CPU Unit's built-in port Serial Communications Board Serial Port Unit
(CS Series only)
Host computer Host computer Host computer
To port To port To port
CPU Unit
Host Link Host Link Host Link
FINS
command Host Link FCS
and terminator
Serial Communications Serial Communications
Board Unit
Host Link header
Note Host Link communications can be sent through the network. In this case, the
FINS command travels through the network normally. When the command
reaches the Host Link system, the necessary Host Link header and terminator
are attached to the FINS command and the command is sent to the host com-
puter.
Host computer
Host Link
FINS Host Link FCS

command and terminator
FINS command
Host Link header
Serial Gateway Communications to a Component or Host Link Slave

It is possible to send FINS commands (or send/receive data) to a component
or Host Link Slave connected to the PLC through its serial port with the serial
gateway function.
• Sending to a Component
When a CMND(490) instruction is executed to a serial port that supports
the serial gateway function, the serial gateway function converts the com-
mand to a CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, or Modbus-ASCII command.
1029
CMND
PLC
Modbus RTU
Serial cable
Modbus-RTU Slave device
• Sending to a PLC operating as a Host Link Slave

When a CMND(490), SEND(090), or RECV(098) instruction is executed to
a serial port that supports the serial gateway function, the serial gateway
function can send any FINS command or send/receive data.
CMND
PLC
Host link FINS

Serial cable
PLC
Host Link Slave
Communications from a Host Computer (Host Link)

It is possible to send FINS commands from a host computer to the PLC to
which it is connected as well as other devices in the network (CPU Units, Spe-
cial I/O Units, computers, etc.). In this case, the necessary Host Link header
and terminator must be attached to the FINS command when it is sent.
Host computer
Host Link
FINS Host Link FCS

command and terminator FINS command
Host Link header
1030
Communications Flags The operation of the communications flags is outlined below.

• The Communications Port Enabled Flag is reset to 0 when communica-
tions are in progress and set to 1 when communications are completed
(normally or not).
• The status of the Communications Port Error Flag is maintained until the
next time that data is transmitted or received.
• The Communications Port Error Flag will be reset to 0 the next time that
data is transmitted or received, even if there was an error in the previous
operation.
Communications Port
Enabled Flag
Instruction 1 Instruction 2 Instruction 3
Network instruction executing executing executing
(SEND, RECV, or CMND)
Communications Port
Error Flag
Communications Port 0204 0000 (Normal completion)

Completion Code Previous 0000 (Normal
completion completion) Busy
About Communications There are 8 logical communications ports provided, so 8 communications

Port Numbers instructions can be executed simultaneously. Only one instruction can be exe-
cuted at a time for each communications port. Exclusive control must be used
when more than 8 instructions are executed.
These 8 communications port numbers are shared by the network instructions
(SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)), the serial communications
instructions (TXDU(256) and RXDU(255)), and the PROTOCOL MACRO
instruction (PMCR(260)). Be sure not to specify the same port number on two
instructions at the same time.
Controller Link Unit,
Ethernet Unit, or Serial
Communications Unit CPU Unit
Port
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
Instruction 4
Instruction 5
Instruction 6
Instruction 7
Instruction 8
1031
The following diagram shows an example of exclusive control.
Bit A remains ON while the communications

Execution Communications KEEP A instruction is being executed.
condition Port Enabled Flag
Reset B
Creates op- Copies the operand and control data to the

Local Node Destination
erand or desired data area.
control data
Active Flag Node Active with @MOV
Flag or @XFER.
@SEND, Executes the communications instruction.

@RECEIVE,
@CMND
Writes the reset input. (Reset B is turned

Communications DIFU B ON when the communications instruction
Port Enabled Flag is completed.)
For Transmission Error Flag display

(Good if data is retransmitted.)
Communications
Port Error Flag
Exclusive control to prevent simulta-

Execution Communications KEEP C
neous execution:
condition Port Enabled Flag Exclusive control prevents another
communications instruction from being
executed until the instruction above is
Same as above.
Reset D completed.
Automatic Allocation of
Communications Ports
■ Overview
The following instructions all use one communications port (logical port)
between ports 0 to 7.
• Network Communications Instructions: SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490)
• Serial Communications Instructions: PMCR(260), TXDU(256), and
RXDU(255)
In this section, all of the above instructions are referred to as Communications
Instructions.
Each communications port can be used by only one instruction at a time. The
following steps were previously necessary to use the communications ports.
• When programming, it was necessary to keep track of the communica-
tions ports that were being used to designate them in operands.
• In the ladder program, it was necessary to confirm the availability of com-
munications ports before using them.
1032
Example of Previous Programming Requirements

Exclusive control was required by the user when the same communications port was used more than once.
Confirmation of the availability of a communications port
was required using the corresponding Communications Port Enabled Flag, here for port 0.
Execution b
condition (Executing) A20200
KEEP
a
(Executing)
d (Execution completed)
a (Executing)
@Communica-
tions instruction
Communica-
tions port: 0
Exclusive control was required by the user when

b (Executing) the same communications port was used more than once.
@Communica-
tions instruction
It was necessary to keep track of the communications

Communica- port being used by each instruction.
tions port: 0
c (Executing)
@Communica-
tions instruction
Communica-
tions port: 1
Now, for CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units of lot number 020601 or
later (manufactured 1 June 2002 or later), the port number can be specified
as “F” instead of from 0 to 7 to automatically allocate the communications
port, i.e., the next open communications port is used automatically.
@Communica-
tions instruction
When “F” is specified, the next available

Communica- communications port is used automatically.
tions port: F
This saves the programmer from having to keep track of communications

ports while programming. The differences between assigning specific port
numbers and automatically allocating port numbers are given in the following
table.
Item Specific number Automatic allocation
assignments
Specification of the com- 0 to 7 F
munications port number
in the control data
Exclusive control Required. Not required unless more than 8
communications ports are
required at the same time.
Flag applications LD or LD NOT used TST(350) or TSTN(351) used with
with flag corre- A218 (Used Communications Port
sponding to the Number).
specified communi-
cations port.
Network communica- Completion code for Completion codes are accessed
tions completion codes communications by using the I/O memory address
port specified by stored in A216 and A217 (Network
user is accessed. Communications Completion
Code Storage Address) and index
register indirect addressing.
1033
■ Auxiliary Area Bits and Words Used when Automatically Allocating

Communications Ports
Address Bits Name Description
A202 15 Network Communications Port ON when there is a communications port available for automatic
Allocation Enabled Flag allocation. This flag can be used to confirm if all eight communica-
tions ports have already been allocated before executing communi-
cations instructions.
A214 00 to 07 First Cycle Flags after Network Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after communications have
Communications Finished been completed. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to ports 0 to 7. Use the
Used Communications Port Number stored in A218 to determine
which flag to access.
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle after the
communications instruction is executed. Delay accessing
them for at least one cycle.
08 to 15 Do not use.
A215 00 to 07 First Cycle Flags after Network Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after a communications
Communications Error error occurs. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to ports 0 to 7. Use the Used
Communications Port Number stored in A218 to determine which
flag to access.
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle after the
communications instruction is executed. Delay accessing
them for at least one cycle.
08 to 15 Do not use.
A216 --- Network Communications The completion code for a communications instruction is automati-
and Completion Code Storage cally stored at the address with the I/O memory address given in
A217 Address these words. Place this address into an index register and use indi-
rect addressing through the index register to reach the communica-
tions completion code.
A218 --- Used Communications Port When a communications instruction is executed, the number of the
Number communications port that was used is stored in this word. Values
0000 to 0007 hex correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
Note 1. Use the following flowchart to determine whether to use the Network Com-
munications Port Allocation Enabled Flag (A20215) and the Network Com-
munications Completion Code Storage Address (A216 and A217).
Using more than 8 com- YES Use A20215 and perform exclu-
munications ports? sive control.
NO
YES Use A216 and A217 with indirect

Communications comple- addressing via an index register to
tion codes required? check the code.
NO
Use automatic communications

port allocation.
1034
2. The Auxiliary Area bits and words used for user-specified communications
ports are listed in the following table.
Address Bits Name Description
A202 00 to 07 Communications Port Enabled ON when a communications instruction can be executed with the
Flags corresponding port number. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communica-
tions ports 0 to 7.
The completion of communications can be confirmed by monitoring
when a flag turns ON. The flag will turn OFF when execution of a
communications instruction is started.
A203 to --- Communications Port Comple- These words contain the completion codes for the corresponding
A210 tion Codes port numbers when communications instructions have been exe-
cuted. Words A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports 0
to 7.
A219 00 to 07 Communications Port Error ON when an error occurred during execution of a communications
Flags instruction. When a flag is ON, check the completion code in A203
to A210 to troubleshoot the error.
Turn OFF then execution has been finished normally. Bits 00 to 07
correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
Flag/Word Operation
Communica-
tions instruc- Communica-
tion executed. tions completed.
Communications Port Enabled

Flags (A20200 to A20207)
Normal completion:
First Cycle Flags after Network
Communications Finished
(A21400 to A2407)
ON for one cycle
Communications Port Com- Cleared to zeros Response stored

pletion Codes (A203 to A210)
Error completion:
Communications Port Error
Flags (A21900 to A21907)
First Cycle Flags after

Network Communications
Error (A21500 to A21507)
ON for one cycle
1035
■ Applications Methods
To use automatic communications port allocation, set the communications
port number of “F” and then program as shown below.
Completing and Processing Error after Executing Communications
Instructions
Execution condition
KEEP
a
(Executing)
When a (Executing) turns ON, a communications instruction

a (Executing) (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or PMCR(260)) is executed with the
Communications
instructions communications port specified as “F.”
Port: F
The communications port number that was automatically allocated is

stored in a work word b (Used port) from A218 (Used Communications
MOV Port Number).
A218
b Confirms that the First Cycle Flags after Network Communications Finished for the
(Used port)
automatically allocated port number (corresponding bit for word b in A214) is ON.
c (Standby) Confirms that the First Cycle Flags after Network

Communications Error for the automatically allocated port
number (corresponding bit for word b in A215) is OFF.
a (Executing) c (Standby) d (Execution completed)
TST
A214
b
(Used port)
TSTN Network communications

completion processing
A215
b
(Used port)
TST Network communications

error processing
A215
b
(Used port)
Bit c turns OFF the cycle after the Confirms that the First Cycle Flags after Network
communications instruction was Communications Error for the automatically allocated port
executed to enable checking for number (corresponding bit for word b in A215) is OFF.
communications completion or
communications errors.
1036
Accessing the Completion Code after Executing Communications

Instructions
The completion codes are generally used to troubleshoot errors when they
occur. A completion code of 0000 hex can, however, also be used to confirm
that communications have completed normally.
Execution condition
KEEP
a
(Executing)
a (Executing) When a (Executing) turns ON, a communications instruction

Communications (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or PMCR(260)) is executed with
instructions
the communications port specified as “F.”
Port: F
The communications port number that was automatically allocated is

stored in a work word b (Used port) from A218 (Used Communications
MOV Port Number).
A218
b
(Used port)
Places the I/O memory address (A216) containing the completion code
for the communications instruction executed with automatic allocation of
MOVL the communication port into work word e (Code storage location).
A216
e (Code storage Confirms that the First Cycle Flags after Network Communications
location)
Finished for the automatically allocated port number (corresponding bit for
word b in A214) is ON.
c (Standby)
Places the I/O memory

a (Executing) c (Standby) d (Execution completed) address of the communications
response code from work word
TST e (Code storage location) into
index register IR0.
A214
b
(Used port) MOVL
e (Code storage
location)
IR0
<> Network communications

error processing
,IR0
#0000
Bit c turns OFF the cycle after the If the completion code indirectly address via IR0
communications instruction was does not equal #0000, communications error
executed to enable checking the processing is performed.
communication completion code.
Note Both user-specified communications port numbers and automatically speci-

fied communications port numbers can be used in the same program. It is
possible, however, that the communications port numbers specified by the
user will be used for automatic allocation. It is thus important to check the pro-
gram carefully when adding communications instructions that use automatic
communications port allocation to an existing program, as shown in the follow-
ing example.
1037
Programming Example
W00000 A20201
Port: 1
Communications were previously enabled by

W00001 A20201 exclusively controlling operation using W00000 and
W00001.
Automatic
port alloca-
Port: 1 tion was add-
ed to the pro-
gram.
This instruction may, at times, use

communications port 1. Even if W00000
or W00001 is turned ON, A20201 will be
turned OFF by execution of this
Port: F PMCR(260) instruction, so neither of the
CMND(490) instructions will be executed.
Timing the Execution of A Network Instruction just starts the communications processing when its
Network Instructions execution condition is established. The actual communications processing is
executed in the background in the “serial communications port servicing” por-
tion of peripheral servicing.
Background communications
processing
Directs the
Execution Communications Port start of Cycle
Condition Enabled Flag processing time Composes a FINS
only. command based on the
command data and sends it.
CMND
S Cycle
time The communications processing
D (transmission and reception) is
C performed in time-slices over several
cycles during the peripheral
servicing’s “serial communications
port servicing” portion of the cycle.
Stores results when

communications
processing is completed. Receives the response and stores
the information as response data.
The communications results are
reflected in the allocated Auxiliary
Area Flags.
The communications processing is performed as follows:

1. If the corresponding Communications Port Enabled Flag (A20200 to
A20207) is ON when the execution condition is established, the system
performs the following processes:
• Turns OFF the port’s Communications Port Enabled Flag and Commu-
nications Port Error Flag (A21900 to A21907).
• Sets the port’s Communications Port Completion Code (A203 to A210)
to 0000.
• Reads the control words (beginning at C) and starts communications
processing (sending a FINS command or receiving a response.)
2. In the peripheral servicing’s “serial communications port servicing” portion
of the cycle, the system composes a FINS command based on the oper-
ands (see note) and sends the FINS command to the Communications
Unit or other destination node.
1038
Note When SEND(090) is being executed, the contents of S and D are

read and a FINS command for data transmission is composed.
When RECV(098) is being executed, the content of S is read and a
FINS command for data reception is composed.
When CMND(490) is being executed, the content of S is read and the
corresponding FINS command is composed.
3. If the send processing cannot be completed in a the time available in “serial
communications port servicing” period, the processing will be continued in
the next cycle’s serial communications port servicing.
4. When a response is returned, the system performs the following process-
es:
• Refreshes the destination words specified in the Network instruction
with the response data.
• Turns ON the port’s Communications Port Enabled Flag.
• Refreshes the port’s Communications Port Error Flag (A21900 to
A21907) and Communications Port Completion Code (A203 to A210).
3. Processing is
divided up over
several cycles.
Cycle time (First cycle) Cycle time (Second cycle)
Program execution Program execution
END(001) executed. END(001) executed.

1. SEND(090),
RECV(098), or
CMND(490) I/O refreshing I/O refreshing
executed.
Peripheral Peripheral
servicing servicing
Sends command. Receives
response.
2. Communications processing 4. Communications processing

during “serial communications during “serial communications
port servicing” (Composes and port servicing” (Receives
sends FINS command.) response.)
3-25-2 About Explicit Message Instructions

Methods for Using Explicit There are two methods that can be used to send explicit messages from a
Message Communications PLC.
• Use the CMND(490) to send a FINS command code of 2801 hex
(EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND).
• Use the following Explicit Message Instructions. (See note.)
Note These instructions are supported only by CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
Ver. 2.0 or later.
1039
Explicit Message The following instructions, which are used specially for explicit messages, are
Instructions called Explicit Message Instructions.
Instruction Name Outline
EXPLT(720) EXPLICIT MES- Sends an explicit message with any service
SAGE SEND code. Note: Functionally, this instruction is the
same as sending CMND(490) with a FINS com-
mand code of 2801 hex.
EGATR(721) EXPLICIT GET Sends an explicit message with a service code
ATTRIBUTE of 0E hex (GET ATTRIBUTE SINGLE).
ESATR(721) EXPLICIT SET Sends an explicit message with a service code
ATTRIBUTE of 10 hex (SET ATTRIBUTE SINGLE).
EGATR(721) EXPLICIT WORD Uses an explicit message to read data from a
READ CPU Unit.
EGATR(721) EXPLICIT WORD Uses an explicit message to write data to a
WRITE CPU Unit.
Features of Explicit • Explicit Message Instructions do not require giving a 2801 hex FINS com-
Message Instructions mand and are much simpler to program than CMND(490).
• With the EXPLICIT GET/SET ATTRIBUTE instructions, entering the ser-
vice code is not required and only information from the class ID onward
needs to be entered.
• With the EXPLICIT WORD READ/WRITE instructions, the I/O memory
address in the local and remote CPU Units can be specified directly.
Code specifications for area types and hexadecimal word addresses are
not required. (These are required for CMND(490) instructions with service
code 1E (word data read) or 1F hex (word data write).)
This enables easy reading and writing of data between CPU Units using
explicit message communications (like SEND/RECV instructions for FINS
commands).
Operation The Explicit Communications Error Flag is used to determine if communica-

tions ended normally or in error.
For error completions (i.e., when the flag is ON), the Communications Port
Error Flag for FINS commands is used to determine if the explicit message
was never sent (i.e., when the flag is ON) or if there was an error in the explicit
message that was sent (i.e., when the flag is OFF).
The Communications Port Completion Code will contain 0000 hex after a nor-
mal end, an explicit message error code after an explicit communications
error end, and a FINS message completion code after a FINS error end.
Condition Explicit Communications Port Communications Port
Communications Error Error Flag (A21900 to Completion Code (A203
Flag (A21300 to A21907: to A210:
A21307: Communications port Communications port
Communications port No. 0 to 7) No. 0 to 7)
No. 0 to 7)
1) Normal end OFF OFF 0000 hex
2) Error end a) When the explicit ON ON FINS messages comple-
message could not tion code
be sent
b) When the explicit OFF Explicit message error
message was sent code
but an explicit error
response was
returned
1040
1) Normal End An explicit message is sent and a normal response is returned.

The corresponding Explicit Communications Error Flag (A21300 to 07: Com-
munications port No. 0 to 7) will be OFF and the Network Communications
Response Code (A203 to A210: Communications port No. 0 to 7) will contain
the explicit message normal response code of 0000 hex.
DeviceNet network
PLC Rack
OK Explicit message sent

OK
CPU Unit CPU Bus Explicit message
FINS header Explicit message
Unit
(e.g.,
OK DeviceNet OK
Unit)
FINS header FINS response Explicit response Explicit response
Normal explicit response

received Processed normally
DeviceNet
node
(e.g., slave)
Communications Port 1
Enabled Flag 0
Instruction Instruction
Explicit Message being being
Instruction executed executed
Explicit Communications 1
Error Flag 0
Error Flag 0
Communications Port
Completion Code Previous 0000 hex 0000 hex 0000 hex
(normal end)
2) Error End The are two possibilities for error ends, as described in the next two subsec-
tions.
a) When the Explicit Message Could Not Be Sent
In this case, the explicit message was never sent on the network, e.g.,
because the network was not running. Here, both the Explicit Communica-
tions Error Flag (A21300 to A21307: Communications port No. 0 to 7) and the
Communications Port Error Flag (A21900 to A21907: Communications port
No. 0 to 7) will turn ON.
After completion, the Communications Port Completion Code (A203 to A210:
Communications port No. 0 to 7) will contain the FINS message error code.
DeviceNet network
PLC Rack
FINS error Explicit message not sent
OK
CPU Unit CPU Bus
Unit
(e.g.,
Error DeviceNet
Unit)
FINS header FINS response Explicit response
Network not running, etc.
FINS error response No explicit response DeviceNet

node
(e.g., slave)
1041
Enabled Flag 0
Error Flag 0
1
Communications Port
Error Flag 0
Communications Port
Previous 0000 hex FINS end code 0000 hex
Completion Code
b) When the Explicit Message Was Sent But an Explicit Error Response
Was Returned
In this case, the explicit message was sent but an error existed in the explicit
message command frame (code not supported, illegal size, etc.). Here, the
Explicit Communications Error Flag (A21300 to 07: Communications port No.
0 to 7) will turn ON and the Network Communications Error Flag (A21900 to
07: Communications port No. 0 to 7) will remain OFF.
After completion, the Network Communications Response Code (A203 to
A210: Communications port No. 0 to 7) will contain the explicit message error
code.
DeviceNet network
PLC Rack
OK Explicit message sent

OK
CPU Unit CPU Bus Explicit message
Unit
(e.g.,
Error DeviceNet Error
Unit)
FINS header FINS response Explicit error Explicit response
response
Normal error response
received Explicit error
DeviceNet
node
(e.g., slave)
Enabled Flag 0
Error Flag 0
1
Communications Port
Error Flag 0
Communications Port
Previous 0000 hex Explicit error code 0000 hex
Completion Code
1042
Ladder Programming Example 1: User Specification of Communications Port Number

Examples
Communications Port
Execution Enabled Flag
A20200 a (Executing) is turned ON and held ON when the
condition
execution condition and Communications Port
KEEP Enabled Flag (A20200) turn ON.
a (Executing) a (Executing) is turned OFF when d (Execution
d (Execution completed) completed) turns ON.
a (Executing) The explicit message instruction is executed when a (executing)

Explicit turns ON. The port number 0 is specified.
message
instruction
Port: 0 The Communications Port Enabled Flag (A20200) is OFF during

network communications and turns ON when they are completed
(for either normal or error completion).
d (Execution completed) is turned ON when a (Executing) turns
ON and the Communications Port Enabled Flag (A20200) turns
Communications Port ON.
Enabled Flag
a (Executing) A20200
A21300 If the Explicit Communications Error Flag

(A21300) when execution is completed, explicit
Processing after memory communications were completed
completing network normally and normal processing after network
communications communications is performed.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag

A21300 A21900 (A21300) is ON when execution is completed, an
Processing for network error has occurred in explicit message
communications error: communications and the Communications Port
Explicit error Error Flag (A21900) is checked. If it is OFF,
processing for an explicit communications error is
performed on the assumption that an explicit
A21900 message was sent and an explicit message
Processing for network response was received.
communications error:
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag
FINS error (A21300) is ON when execution is completed, an
error has occurred in explicit message
communications and the Communications Port
Error Flag (A21900) is checked. If it is ON,
processing for a FINS communications error is
performed on the assumption that an explicit
message was never sent.
1043
Example 2: Automatic Allocation of Communications Port Number

Execution
condition
KEEP
a (Executing)
a (Executing) The explicit message instruction is executed when a (executing)

Explicit turns ON. The port number F is specified.
message
instruction
Port: F
The automatically allocated port number stored in A218 (application
MOV communications port numbers 0 to 7 is moved to a user-specified work
word b (port).
A218
Detects when the First Cycle Flag after Network Communications Finished
b (port) for the automatically allocated communications port is ON in A214, i.e., the
bit corresponding to b (port).
c (Standby) Detects when the Explicit Communications Error Flag for the
automatically allocated communications port is OFF in A213,
i.e., the bit corresponding to b (port).
a (Executing) c (Standby)
TST d (Execution completed)
A214
b (port)
TSTN Processing after network
A213 communications
b (port)
TST TSTN Network communications

A213 A219 error processing: Explicit
error processing
b (port) b (port)
"c" turns OFF in the cycle after

communications instruction execution TST Network communications
is completed and communications A219 error processing: FINS
completion or errors are detected error processing
from that cycle. b (port)
Detects when the Explicit Communications Error Flag for the

automatically allocated communications port is ON in A213,
i.e., the bit corresponding to b (port).
3-25-3 NETWORK SEND: SEND(090)

Purpose Sends data to a node in the network.
Ladder Symbol
SEND(090)
S S: First source word (local node)
D D: First destination word (remote node)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SEND(090)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SEND(090)
1044

OK OK OK OK
Operands C: First control word

The five control words C to C+4 specify the number of words being transmit-
ted, the destination, and other settings shown in the following table.
Word Bits 00 to 07 Bits 08 to 15
C Number of words: 0001 to maximum allowed1 (4-digit hexadecimal)
C+1 Destination network address: Bits 08 to 11:Serial port number3
00 to 7F (0 to 127)2, 4 (physical port)
1 hex: Port 1
2 hex: Port 2
(Do not set 0, 3, or 4.)
Bits 12 to 15: Always 0.
C+2 Destination unit address: 00 to FE 5 Destination node address:
00 to maximum allowed6
C+3 No. of retries: 00 to 0F (0 to 15) Bits 08 to 11:
Communications port number (inter-
nal logic port): 0 to 7, Automatic allo-
cation: F7
Bits 12 to 15: Response setting
0: Response requested.
8: No response requested.8
C+4 Response monitoring time: 0001 to FFFF (0.1 to 6553.5 seconds)
(The default setting of 0000 sets a monitoring time of 2 seconds.)
Note 1. The maximum number of words allowed depends on the network being
used. For a Controller Link, the allowed range is 0001 to 03DE (1 to 990
words).
2. Set the destination network address to 00 to transmit within the local net-
work. When two or more CPU Bus Units are mounted, the network address
will be the unit number of the Unit with the lowest unit number.
3. The following two methods can be used to send data to the host computer
through a serial port with the host link while initiating communications from
the PLC.
a) Set the destination unit address (bits 00 to 07 of C+2) to the unit ad-
dress of the CPU Unit or Serial Communications Unit/Board and set
the serial port number (bits 08 to 11 of C+1) to 1 for port 1 or 2 for port
2.
Unit address Unit Serial port number Serial port
(C+2, bits 00 (C+1, bits 08 to 11)
to 07)
00 hex CPU Unit 1 hex Built-in RS-
232C port
2 hex Peripheral
port
10 hex + unit Serial Communications 1 hex Port 1
number Unit (CPU Bus Unit) 2 hex Port 2
E1 hex Serial Communications 1 hex Port 1
Board (Inner Board) 2 hex Port 2
(CS Series only)
1045
b) Set the destination unit address directly into bits 00 to 07 of C+2. In this
case, set the serial port number in bits 08 to 11 of C+1 to 0 for direct
specification.
Serial Communication Unit ports
Port Port’s unit address Example: Unit number = 1
Port 1 80 hex + 4 × unit number 80 + 4 × 1 = 84 hex (132 decimal)
Serial Communication Board ports

Port Port’s unit address
Port 1 E4 hex (228 decimal)
CPU Unit ports

Peripheral FD hex (253 decimal)
RS-232C FC hex (252 decimal)
4. When specifying the serial port without a routing table for the serial gate-
way function (conversion to host link FINS), set the serial port’s unit ad-
dress in the destination network address byte.
5. The unit address indicates the Unit, as shown in the following table.
Unit Unit address setting
CPU Unit 00 hex
CPU Bus Unit 10 hex + unit number
Special I/O Unit (except 20 hex + unit number
C200H-series Special I/O
Units)
Inner Board (CS Series E1 hex
only)
Computer 01 hex
Unit connected to net- FE hex
work (not necessary to
specify Unit)
Direct specification of the Serial Communications Unit ports
serial port’s unit address Port 1: 80 hex + 4 × unit number
Serial Communications Board ports
CPU Unit ports
6. The maximum node number depends on the network being used. For a
Controller Link, the allowed range is 00 to 20 hexadecimal (0 to 32). Set
the destination node number to FF to broadcast to all nodes; set it to 00 to
transmit within the local node.
7. Refer to Automatic Allocation of Communications Ports on page 1032 for
details on using automatic allocation of the communications port number
(logical port).
8. When the destination node number is set to FF (broadcast transmission),
there will be no response even if bits 12 to 15 are set to 0.
1046
Area S D C
CIO 6139
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 toA959 A000 to A955
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32763
E32763
(n = 0 to C) En_32763
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 o C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description SEND(090) transfers the data beginning at word S to addresses beginning at

D in the designated device through the PLC’s CPU Bus or over a network.
The number of words to be transmitted is specified in C.
Local node Destination node
Number
of words
to trans-
mit, n
If the destination node number is set to FF, the data will be broadcast to all of
the nodes in the designated network. This is known as a broadcast transmis-
sion.
If a response is requested (bits 12 to 15 of C+3 set to 0) but a response has
not been received within the response monitoring time, the data will be
retransmitted up to 15 times (retries set in bits 0 to 3 of C+3). There will be no
response or retries for broadcast transmissions.
SEND(090) can be used to transmit data to a particular serial port in the des-
tination device as well as the device itself.
1047
Data can be transmitted to a host computer connected to the PLC’s serial port
(when set to host link mode) as well as a PLC or computer connected through
a Controller Link or Ethernet network.
If the Communications Port Enabled Flag is ON for the communications port
specified in C+3 when SEND(090) is executed, the corresponding Communi-
cations Port Enabled Flag (ports 00 to 07: A20200 to A20207) and Communi-
cations Port Error Flag (ports 00 to 07: A21900 to A21907) will be turned OFF
and 0000 will be written to the word that contains the completion code (ports
00 to 07: A203 to A210). Data will be transmitted to the destination node once
the flags have be set.
Transmission through the SEND(090) can be used to transmit data from the PLC to the specified data
Network area in a PLC or computer connected by a Controller Link network or Ethernet
link.
Network
Data
Transmission through When the CPU Unit’s built-in serial port, a Serial Communications Board (CS-
Host Link series only), or Serial Communications Unit is in host link mode and con-
nected one-to-one with a host computer, SEND(090) can be executed to
transmit data from the PLC to the host computer the next time that the PLC
has the right to transmit. It is also possible to transmit to other host computers
connected to other PLCs elsewhere in the network.
Host computer
Host Link
Data
Serial port
If SEND(090) is sent to the serial port of the CPU Unit, a Serial Communica-
tions Board (CS Series only), or Serial Communications Unit, a command is
sent from the serial port to the host computer. The command is a FINS mes-
sage enclosed between a host link header and terminator. The FINS com-
mand is a MEMORY AREA WRITE command (command code 0102) and the
host link header code is 0F hexadecimal.
A program must be created in the host computer to process the received com-
mand (the FINS command enclosed in the host link header and terminator).
If the destination serial port is in the local PLC, set the network address to 00
(local network) in C+1, set the node address to 00 (local PLC) in C+2, and set
the unit address to 00 (CPU Unit), E1 (Inner Board (CS Series only), or unit
number + 10 hexadecimal (Serial Port Unit).
Sending Data to a Host Link Slave PLC Connected by Serial Gateway
The serial gateway function can be used to send data to a PLC connected as
a host link Slave to a Serial Communications Board or Unit. In this case, the
destination node address must be set to the host link unit number + 1.
1048
SEND
PLC
Set the destination node address to the
host link unit number + 1 = S+1.
Data
Serial cable
PLC
Host Link Slave
Host link unit number: S
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the serial port number specified in C+1 is not within
the range of 00 to 04.
ON if the Communications Port Enabled Flag is OFF for
the communications port number specified in C+3.
The following table shows relevant bits and flags in the Auxiliary Area.
Communications A20200 to These flags are turned ON to indicate that net-
Port Enabled Flag A20207 work instructions, including PMCR(260) may be
executed for the corresponding ports (00 to 07).
A flag is turned OFF when a network instruction is
being executed for the corresponding port and
turned ON again when the instruction is com-
pleted.
Communications A21900 to These flags are turned ON to indicate that an
Port Error Flag A21907 error has occurred at the corresponding ports (00
to 07) during execution of a network instruction.
The flag status is retained until the next network
instruction is executed. The flag will be turned
OFF when the next instruction is executed even if
an error occurred previously.
Port Completion A210 corresponding ports (00 to 07) following execution
Codes of a network instruction.
The corresponding word will contain 0000 while
the network instruction is being executed and the
completion code will be written when the instruc-
tion is completed. These words are cleared when
an instruction is executed.
Precautions If the Communications Port Enabled Flag is OFF for the port number specified
in C+3, the instruction will be treated as NOP(000) and will not be executed.
The Error Flag will be turned ON in this case.
When an address in the current bank of the EM Area is specified for D, the
transmitted data will be written to the current EM bank of the destination node.
When data will be transmitted outside of the local network, the user must reg-
ister routing tables in the PLCs (CPU Units) in each network. (Routing tables
indicate the routes to other networks in which destination nodes are con-
nected.)
1049
Refer to the FINS command response codes in the CS/CJ Series Communi-
cations Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details on the completion
codes for network communications.
Only one network instruction may be executed for a communications port at
one time. To ensure that SEND(090) is not executed while a port is busy, pro-
Communications port numbers 00 to 07 are shared by the network instruc-
tions and PMCR(260), so SEND(090) cannot be executed simultaneously
with PMCR(260) if the instructions are using the same port number.
Noise and other factors can cause the transmission or response to be cor-
rupted or lost, so we recommend setting the number of retries to a non-zero
value which will cause SEND(090) to be executed again if the response is not
received within the response monitoring time.
Example 1 When the input condition and A20200 (the Communications Port Enabled
Flag for port 0) are ON in the following example, the ten words from CIO 100
to CIO 109 are transmitted to the host computer connected to port 1 of the
Serial Communications Unit with unit address 10 (hex) at node number 3 in
network 0.
Input
condition A20200
@SEND
0100
C D00200 0 0 0 A Number of words to send: 10 words
0000
C+1 D00201 0 1 0 0 Transmit to network 0 and port 1 of Serial Communications Board
D00200
C+2 D00202 0 0 1 0 Node number 0, unit address 10
C+3 D00203 0 0 0 0 Response requested, port number 0, no retries
C+4 D00204 0 0 0 0 Response monitoring time: 2 seconds (0000: default value)
It is necessary create a program at the host computer to receive the data and
send a response.
Example 2 When CIO 000000 and A20207 (the Communications Port Enabled Flag for
port 07) are ON in the following example, the ten words from D00100 to
D00109 are transmitted to node number 3 in the local network where they are
written to the ten words from D00200 to D00209. The data will be retransmit-
ted up to 3 times if a response is not received within ten seconds.
0 Number of words to send: 10 words

0 Transmit to the local network and the device itself
0 Node number 3, unit address 00 (CPU Unit)
0 Response requested, port number 7, 3 retries
6 Response monitoring time: 0064 hexadecimal (10 seconds)
3-25-4 NETWORK RECEIVE: RECV(098)

Purpose Requests data to be transmitted from a node in the network and receives the
data.
1050
Ladder Symbol
RECV(098)
S S: First source word (remote node)
D D: First destination word (local node)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RECV(098)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RECV(098)

OK OK OK OK

The five control words C to C+4 specify the number of words to be received,
the source of the transmission, and other settings shown in the following table.
C 1
Number of words: 0001 to maximum allowed (4-digit hexadecimal)
C+1 Source network address: Bits 08 to 11:Serial port number
1 hex: Port 1
2 hex: Port 2
C+2 Source unit address5 Source node address:
00 to maximum allowed6
C+3 No. of retries: 00 to 0F (0 to 15) Port number: 00 to 07
(F: Automatic allocation)7
Response is fixed to “required.”
Note 1. The maximum number of words allowed depends on the network being
used. For a Controller Link, the allowed range is 0001 to 03DE (1 to 990
words).
2. Set the source network address to 00 to specify a source within the local
network. When two or more CPU Bus Units are mounted, the network ad-
dress will be the unit number of the Unit with the lowest unit number.
3. The following two methods can be used to receive data from a host com-
puter through a serial port with the host link while initiating communications
from the PLC.
1051
a) Set the source unit address (bits 00 to 07 of C+2) to the unit address
of the CPU Unit or Serial Communications Unit/Board and set the se-
rial port number (bits 08 to 11 of C+1) to 1 for port 1 or 2 for port 2.
(C+2, bits 00 (C+1, bits 08 to 11)
to 07)
232C port
2 hex Peripheral
port
(CS Series only)
b) Set the source unit address directly into bits 00 to 07 of C+2. In this
specification.

CPU Unit ports

dress in the source network address byte.
CPU Unit 00 hex
Special I/O Unit (except C200H- 20 hex + unit number
series Special I/O Units)
Inner Board (CS Series only) E1 hex
Computer 01 hex
1052

Unit connected to network (not FE hex
necessary to specify Unit)
Direct specification of the serial Serial Communications Unit ports
port’s unit address Port 1: 80 hex + 4 × unit number
CPU Unit ports
the source node number to 00 to transmit within the local node.
(logical port).
Area S D C
CIO 6139
A448 to A959 A448 to A955
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32763
E32763
(n = 0 to C) En_32763
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
1053
Description RECV(098) requests the number of words specified in C beginning at word S

to be transferred from the designated device to the local PLC. The data is
received through the PLC’s CPU Bus or over the network and written to the
PLC’s data area beginning at D.
Local node Source node (remote node)
Number of words
to receive
A response is required with RECV(098) because the response contains the

data being received. If the response has not been received within the
response monitoring time set in C+4, the request for data transfer will be
retransmitted up to 15 times (retries set in bits 0 to 3 of C+3).
RECV(098) can be used to request a data transmission from a particular
serial port in the source device as well as the device itself.
Data can be received from a host computer connected to the PLC’s serial port
(when set to host link mode) as well as a PLC or computer connected through
a Controller Link or Ethernet network.
specified in C+3 when SEND(090) is executed, the corresponding Communi-
00 to 07: A203 to A210). Data will be received from the destination node once
the flags have be set.
Transmission through the RECV(098) can be used to receive data transmitted the specified data area in
Network a PLC or computer connected by a Controller Link network or Ethernet link
and write that data to the specified data area in the local PLC.
PLC PLC
Network
Data
Transmission through When the CPU Unit’s built-in serial port, a Serial Communications Board (CS
Host Link Series only), or Serial Communications Unit is in host link mode and con-
nected one-to-one with a host computer, RECV(098) can be executed to
receive data from the host computer the next time that the PLC has the right
to transmit commands. It is also possible to receive data from other host com-
puters connected to other PLCs elsewhere in the network.
Host computer
PLC
Host Link
Data
Serial port
1054
If RECV(098) is executed for the serial port of the CPU Unit, a Serial Commu-
nications Board (CS Series only), or Serial Communications Unit, a command
is sent from the serial port to the host computer. The command is a FINS
message enclosed between a host link header and terminator. The FINS
command is a MEMORY AREA READ command (command code 0101) and
the host link header code is 0F hexadecimal.
A program must be created in the host computer to process the send com-
the unit address to 00 (CPU Unit), E1 (Inner Board, CS Series only), or unit
Receiving Data from a Host Link Slave PLC Connected by Serial Gateway
The serial gateway function can be used to receive data from a PLC con-
nected as a host link Slave to a Serial Communications Board or Unit. In this
case, the source node address must be set to the host link unit number + 1.
RECV
PLC
Set the source node address to the host
link unit number + 1 = S+1.
Data
Serial cable
PLC
Host Link Slave
Flags
A flag is turned OFF when a network instruction
is being executed for the corresponding port and
pleted.
1055

Communications A203 to These words contain the completion codes for
Port Completion A210 the corresponding ports (00 to 07) following exe-
Codes cution of a network instruction.
program execution begins.
When an address in the current bank of the EM Area is specified for D, the
transmitted data will be written to the current EM bank of the destination node.
nected.)
Only one network instruction may be executed for a communications port at
one time. To ensure that RECV(098) is not executed while a port is busy, pro-
Communications port numbers 00 to 07 are shared by the network instruc-
tions and PMCR(260), so RECV(098) cannot be executed simultaneously
with PMCR(260) if the instructions are using the same port number.
value which will cause RECV(098) to be executed again if the response is not
3-25-5 DELIVER COMMAND: CMND(490)

Purpose Sends an FINS command and receives the response. Refer to the CS/CJ
Series Communications Commands Reference Manual for details on FINS
commands.
Ladder Symbol
CMND(490)
S S: First command word
D D: First response word

1056
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CMND(490)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @CMND(490)

OK OK OK OK

The six control words C to C+5 specify the number of bytes of command data
and response data, the destination, and other settings shown in the following
table.
C Bytes of command data: 0002 to maximum allowed1 (4-digit hexadecimal)
C+1 Bytes of response data: 0000 to maximum allowed1 to 3 (4-digit hexadecimal)
C+2 Destination network address: Bits 08 to 11:Serial port number
1 hex: Port 1
2 hex: Port 2
C+3 Destination unit address: Destination node number:
00 to FE5, 7, 9 00 to maximum allowed8
C+4 No. of retries: 00 to 0F (0 to 15) Bits 08 to 11:
Port number (internal logic port):
0 to 7
(F: Automatic allocation)10
Bits 12 to 15: Response setting
0: Response requested.
8: No response requested.11
Note 1. The number of bytes of command data in C is 0002 to the maximum data
length in hexadecimal. For example, the number of bytes would be 0002 to
07C6 hex (2 to 1,990 bytes) for Controller Link systems. The number of
bytes for the local CPU Unit is 07C6 hex (1,990 bytes). The number of
bytes of command data depends on the network.
2. The number of bytes of response data in C+1 is 0000 to the maximum data
length in hexadecimal. For example, the number of bytes would be 0000 to
07C6 hex (0 to 1,990 bytes) for Controller Link systems. The number of
bytes for the local CPU Unit is 07C6 hex (1,990 bytes). The number of
bytes of response data depends on the network.
3. Refer to the operation manual for the specific network for the maximum
data lengths for the command data and response data. For any FINS com-
mand passing through multiple networks, the maximum data lengths for
the command data and response data are determined by the network with
the smallest maximum data lengths.
4. Set the destination network address to 00 to transmit within the local net-
work. When two or more CPU Bus Units are mounted, the network address
will be the unit number of the Unit with the lowest unit number.
1057
5. The following two methods can be used to send a FINS command to a host
computer through a serial port with the host link host link while initiating
communications from the PLC, or the serial gateway function (converted
to CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, or Modbus-ASCII).
a) Set the destination unit address (bits 00 to 07 of C+3) to the unit ad-
dress of the CPU Unit or Serial Communications Unit/Board and set
the serial port number (bits 08 to 11 of C+2) to 1 for port 1 or 2 for port
2.
(C+3, bits 00 (C+2, bits 08 to 11)
to 07)
232C port
2 hex Peripheral
port
(CS Series only)
b) Set the destination unit address directly into bits 00 to 07 of C+3. In this
specification.

CPU Unit ports

dress in the destination network address byte.
CPU Unit 00 hex
Special I/O Unit (except C200H- 20 hex + unit number
series Special I/O Units)
Inner Board (CS Series only) E1 hex
Computer 01 hex
1058

Unit connected to network (not FE hex
necessary to specify Unit)
Direct specification of the serial Serial Communications Unit ports
port’s unit address Port 1: 80 hex + 4 × unit number
CPU Unit ports
the destination node number to FF to broadcast to all nodes; set it to 00 to
transmit within the local node.
9. When specifying the serial port in the serial gateway function (conversion
to host link FINS), set the destination unit address to the host link unit num-
ber of the destination PLC + 1 (setting range: 1 to 32).
(logical port).
11. When the destination node number is set to FF (broadcast transmission),
there will be no response even if bits 12 to 15 are set to 0.
1059
Area S C D
CIO 6138
A448 to A959 A448 to A954
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to
D32762
E32762
(n = 0 to C) En_32763
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description CMND(490) transfers the specified number of bytes of FINS command data
beginning at word S to the designated device through the PLC’s CPU Bus or
over a network. The response is stored in memory beginning at word D.
Local node Destination node
Command
Command
data Interpret
(n bytes)
Response
Response Execute
data
(m bytes)
CMND(490) can be used to transmit command data to a particular serial port

in the destination device as well as the device itself. CMND(490) operates just
like SEND(090) if the FINS command code is 0102 (MEMORY AREA WRITE)
and just like RECV(098) if the code is 0101 (MEMORY AREA READ).
1060
The CPU Unit executing CMND(490) can send a FINS command to itself
(except for CS-series CS1 CPU Units prior to V1@). Use the following control
data settings to achieve this.
• Destination network address (bits 00 to 07 of C+2): 00 hex (local network)
• Serial port No. (bits 08 to 11 of C+2): 0 hex (not used)
• Destination unit address (bits 00 to 07 of C+3): 00 hex (CPU Unit)
• Destination node address (bits 08 to 15 of C+3): 00 hex (local node)
• Number of retries (bits 00 to 03 of C+4): 0 hex (this setting is invalid; set it
to 0)
• Response monitoring time: (bits 00 to 15 of C+5): 0000 to FFFF hex (but
0000 will specify 6553.5 s, and not 2 s as normal)
If the destination node number is set to FF, the command data will be broad-
cast to all of the nodes in the designated network. This is known as a broad-
cast transmission.
If a response is requested (bits 12 to 15 of C+4 set to 0) but a response has
not been received within the response monitoring time, the command data will
be retransmitted up to 15 times (retries set in bits 0 to 3 of C+3). There will be
no response and no retries for broadcast transmissions. For instructions that
require no response, set the response setting to “not required.”
An error will occur if the amount of response data exceeds the number of
bytes of response data set in C+1.
FINS command data can be transmitted to a host computer connected to a
PLC serial port (when set to host link mode) as well as a PLC (CPU Unit,
Inner Board (CS Series only), or CPU Bus Unit) or computer connected
through a Controller Link or Ethernet network.
specified in C+3 when CMND(490) is executed, the corresponding Communi-
00 to 07: A203 to A210). The command data will be transmitted to the desti-
nation node(s) once the flags have be set.
Transmission through the CMND(490) can be used to transmit any FINS command to a personal com-
Network puter or a PLC (CPU Unit, Inner Board (CS Series only), or CPU Bus Unit)
connected by a Controller Link network or Ethernet link.
PLC PLC
Network
FINS command
1061
Transmission through When the CPU Unit’s built-in serial port, a Serial Communications Board (CS
Host Link Series only), or Serial Communications Unit is in host link mode and con-
nected one-to-one with a host computer, CMND(490) can be executed to
transmit any FINS command from the PLC to the host computer the next time
that the PLC has the right to transmit. It is also possible to transmit to other
host computers connected to other PLCs elsewhere in the network.
Host computer
PLC
Host Link
FINS command
CMND(490) can be executed for the either port on the CPU Unit, a Serial
Communications Board (CS Series only), or Serial Communications Unit to
send a command to the connected host computer. (Specify the serial port as
1 hex or 2 hex in bits 08 to 11 of C+2.) The command is a FINS message
enclosed between a host link header and terminator. Any FINS command
command can be sent; the host link header code is 0F hexadecimal.
A program must be created in the host computer to process the received com-
the unit address to 00 (CPU Unit), E1 (Inner Board, CS Series only), or unit
Serial Gateway Communications to a Component or Host Link Slave
It is possible to send FINS commands (or send/receive data) to a component
or Host Link Slave connected to the PLC through its serial port with the serial
gateway function.
• Sending to a Component
(Conversion to CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, or Modbus-ASCII)
The serial gateway function can convert the following FINS commands to
CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, or Modbus-ASCII commands when the FINS
command is sent to a Serial Communications Board or Unit’s serial port or
one of the CPU Unit’s serial ports (peripheral or RS-232C).
Convert to CompoWay/F command: 2803 hex
Convert to Modbus-RTU command: 2804 hex (See note.)
Convert to Modbus-ASCII command: 2805 hex (See note.)
Note The Modbus-RTU and Modbus-ASCII commands cannot be sent to
the CPU Unit’s serial ports.
1062
CMND
PLC
Modbus RTU
Serial cable
Modbus-RTU Slave device
• Sending to a PLC operating as a Host Link Slave

The serial gateway function can be used to send any FINS command to a
PLC that is connected as a host link slave and through a Serial Communi-
cations Board or Unit’s serial port. In this case, the destination node ad-
dress must be set to the host link unit number + 1.
SEND
PLC
Set the destination node address to the
host link unit number + 1 = S+1.
Data
Serial cable
PLC
Host Link Slave
Sending a FINS Command The CPU Unit executing CMND(490) can send a FINS command to itself
to the CPU Unit Executing (excluding CS-series CS1 CPU Units without a suffix of -V@). For example,
CMND(490) (Except for file memory commands (command codes 22@@ hex) can be sent to format
CS-series CS1 CPU Units file memory, delete files, copy files, and perform other operations. Refer to 5-2
Prior to V1) Manipulating Files of the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Programming Manual for
details.
The File Memory Operation Flag (A34313) will turn ON when any FINS com-
mand is sent to the local CPU Unit (even for FINS commands not related to
file memory). Always use A34313 in an NC input condition for CMND(490) to
ensure that only one FINS command is being executed for the CPU Unit at the
same time.
FINS command
PC
Memory Card
EM file memory
1063
Flags
ON if a FINS command is sent to the local CPU Unit while
the File Memory Operation Flag (A34313) is ON.
pleted.
Port Completion A210 corresponding ports (00 to 07) following execu-
Codes tion of a network instruction.
File Memory Opera- A34313 ON when any FINS command is sent to the local
tion Flag CPU Unit (even for FINS commands not related
to file memory) or when any of the following
instructions or operations are performed for file
memory.
FREAD(700) or FWRIT(701)
Program overwrite with control bit in memory
Simple backup operation
nected.)
Communications port numbers 00 to 07 are shared by the network and serial
communications instruction instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098),
CMND(490), PMCR(260), TXDU(256), or RXDU(255)), so only one of these
instructions may be executed for a communications port at one time. To
1064
ensure that CMND(490) is not executed while a port is busy, program the
port’s Communications Port Enabled Flag (A20200 to A20207) as a normally
open condition.
Always use one of the Communications Port Enabled Flags (A20200 to
A20207) in an NO input condition and the File Memory Operation Flag
(A34313) in an NC input condition for CMND(490) when send a FINS com-
mand to the local CPU Unit.
value which will cause CMND(490) to be executed again if the response is not
Examples The following program section shows an example of sending a FINS com-
mand to another CPU Unit.
When CIO 000000 and A20207 (the Communications Port Enabled Flag for
port 07) are ON, CMND(490) transmits FINS command 0101 (MEMORY
AREA READ) to node number 3. The response is stored in D00200 to
D00211.
The MEMORY AREA READ command reads 10 words from D00010 to
D00019. The response contains the 2-byte command code (0101), the 2-byte
completion code, and then the 10 words of data, for a total of 12 words or 24
bytes.
The data will be retransmitted up to 3 times if a response is not received
within ten seconds.
0 Command code: 0101 hexadecimal (MEMORY AREA READ)

0 D00010 (Data area = 82 hexadecimal, address = 000A00)
0
0 Number of words to read = 0A hexadecimal (10 decimal)
0 Bytes of command data: 0008 (8 decimal)

1 Bytes of response data: 0018 (24)
0 Transmit to the local network and the device itself
0 Node number 3, unit address 00 (CPU Unit)
0 Response requested, port number 7, 3 retries
6 Response monitoring time: 0064 hexadecimal (10 seconds)
The following program section shows an example of sending a FINS com-

mand to the local CPU Unit.
port 07) are ON and A34313 (File Memory Operation Flag) is OFF,
CMND(490) transmits FINS command 2215 (CREATE/DELETE DIREC-
TORY) to the local CPU Unit. The response is stored in D00100 to D00101.
Here, the FINS command will create a directory called CS/CJ under the
OMRON directory. The command code (2 bytes) and the end code (2 bytes)
will be returned and stored as the response.
1065
000000 A20207 A34313

@CMND
Communications File Memory S D00006

Port Enabled Flag Operation Flag D D00100
for port 7
C D00000
15 8 7 0
S: D00006 2 2 1 5 Command code: 2215 Hex (CREATE/DELETE DIRECTORY)
S+1: D00007 8 0 0 0 Disk No.: 8000 Hex (Memory Card)
S+2: D00008 0 0 0 0 Parameter: 0000 Hex (create directory)
S+3: D00009 4 3 5 3
S+4: D00010 3 1 2 0
S+5: D00011 2 0 2 0
Subdirectory name: CS1@@@@@. @@@ (@= space)
S+6: D00012 2 0 2 0
S+7: D00013 2 E 2 0
S+8: D00014 2 0 2 0
S+9: D00015 0 0 0 6 Directory name length: 0006 (6 characters)
S+10: D00016 5 C 4 F
S+11: D00017 4 D 5 2 Absolute directory path: \OMRON
S+12: D00018 4 F 4 E
15 8 7 0
S: D00000 0 0 1 A Bytes of command data: 001A (26 decimal)
S+1: D00001 0 0 0 4 Bytes of response data: 0004 (4)
S+2: D00002 0 0 0 0 Destination network address: 00 Hex (local network)
S+3: D00003 0 0 0 0 Destination unit address: 00 Hex, Destination node number: 00 Hex (CPU Unit at local node)
S+4: D00004 0 7 0 0 Response requested, port number 7, 0 retries
S+5: D00005 0 0 0 0 Response monitoring time: 0000 Hex (2 seconds)
3-25-6 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND: EXPLT(720)

Purpose Sends an explicit message with any service code.
This instruction is supported by only CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later.
Ladder Symbol
EXPLT(720)
S S: First word of send message
D D: First word of received message
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition EXPLT(720)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @EXPLT(720)

OK OK OK OK
1066
Operands S: First word of send message

Specifies the first word of the send message (S to S+272 max.).
15 0
S
Set the number of bytes of source data from words S+1 on. For
example, set S to 000A hex if there are 5 words of data (S+1 to
S+5). Do not include the 2 bytes in word S itself. Include the
leftmost bytes of S+1 to S+5, which contain 00.
Also, include the number of bytes of Service Data starting at S+6.
(If the first or last word contains just one byte of data, do not count
the empty byte in that word.)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+1 0 0
Destination Node Address

(00 to max. node address (hex))
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+2 0 0
Service Code (hex)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+3 0 0
Class ID (hex)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+4 0 0
Instance ID (hex)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+5 0 0
Attribute ID (hex)
If the Attribute ID is not used, set it to FFFF hex.

(The Attribute ID cannot be set to 0000 hex.)
15 0
S+6 Service Data
...
to
S+272
When there is Service Data (data other than the

Attribute ID), the byte-order of this data is specified in
bits 12 to 15 of C+1. Up to 534 bytes (267 words) can
be set.
1067
D: First word of received message

Specifies the first word of the received message (D to D+269 max.).
15 0
D
Contains the number of bytes of data from words D+1 on.

Does not include the 2 bytes in word D itself.
This value does include the leftmost bytes of D+1 and D+2, which contain 00.
This value also includes the number of bytes of Service Data starting at D+3.
(If the first or last word contains just one byte of data, the empty byte in that
word is not counted.)
15 12 11 8 7 0
D+1 0 0
Contains the Source node address.

(00 to 3F hex (0 to 63) for DeviceNet))
15 12 11 8 7 0
D+2 0 0
Contains the service code or error code (hex).

Normal response: Returns the command’s Service Code with bit 07 ON.
Error response: Returns 94 hex, regardless of the command’s Service Code.
15 0
D+3 Service Data

...
to
D+269
Contains the response’s service data (data following the

service code). The byte-order of this data is specified in
bits 12 to 15 of C+1. Can contain up to 534 bytes (267
words) of data.
C: First control word

Specifies the first of four control words (C to C+3).
15 0
C
Set the total number of words of response data beginning at D.

The allowed setting range is 0 to 010E hex (270 words).
If the number of words of received data exceeds the value set here, a FINS error will
occur (response too long, code 11 0B) and no data at all will be stored (in the area
starting at D+3).
If the number of words of received data is less than the value set here, the remaining
words (in the area starting at D+3) will be left unchanged.
15 12 11 8 7 0
C+1
FINS unit address of relaying Communications Unit.

CPU Bus Unit: 10 to 1F hex (unit number + 10 hex)
Special I/O Unit: 20 to 7F hex (unit number + 20 hex)
Port number of the communications port (logical port) for the network
instruction: 0 to 7 hex (F hex: Automatic allocation)
Byte order of service data (frame data) stored in areas beginning at S+6 and D+3
0 hex: Stored from leftmost byte (Left → Right → Left → Right ...)
8 hex: Stored from rightmost byte (Right → Left → Right → Left ...)
15 0
C+2
Response monitoring time

0001 to FFFF hex (0.1 to 6553.5 s)
0000 hex: 2 s (default setting)
15 0
C+3
Explicit message format

0000 hex: DeviceNet (same as using the 2801
FINS command)
1068
Area S D C
CIO 6140
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32764
(n = 0 to C) En_32764
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description Sends the explicit message command (stored in the range of words beginning
at S+2) to the node address specified in S+1, via the Communications Unit
with the FINS unit address specified in bits 00 to 07 of C+1. When the
response to the explicit message is received, it is stored in the range of words
beginning at D+2.
Number of Bytes Settings
The number of bytes of send data in S includes the 10 bytes in S+1 to S+5 as
well as the number of bytes of service data beginning at S+6. (For example, if
there is 1 byte of service data, there are 11 bytes of data all together, so S
must be set to 000B hex.)
The number of bytes of received data in D includes the 4 bytes in D+1 and
D+2 as well as the number of bytes of service data beginning at D+3. (For
example, if there is 1 byte of service data, there are 5 bytes of data all
together and D contains 0005 hex.)
The setting in bits 12 to 15 of C+1 (0 or 8 hex) determines the byte-order of
the service data stored at S+6 and D+3.
1069
• Storing Data from the Leftmost Byte

Set bits 12 to 15 of C+1 to 0 hex.
Frame (order of data in line)
A B C D
Data Stored from leftmost byte.

area
15 08 07 00
D+3 A B
D+4 C D
Note: A, B, C, and D represent bytes of data.
• Storing Data from the Rightmost Byte

A B C D
Data Stored from rightmost byte.

area
15 08 07 00
D+3 B A
D+4 D C
Flags
the communications port number specified in C.
The corresponding Explicit Communications Error Flag will be OFF if the

instruction ended normally or ON if an error occurred.
If an error occurred (corresponding flag in A213 ON), the corresponding Com-
munications Port Error Flag can be used to determine whether the explicit
message itself was not sent (corresponding flag in A219 ON) or that the mes-
sage was sent but there was an error in the message (corresponding flag in
A219 OFF).
The corresponding Communications Port Completion Code (A203 to A210)
will be 0000 hex if the instruction ended normally, an explicit message error
code if an explicit messaging error occurred, or a FINS error code if a FINS
error occurred.
For details on the general operation of the explicit message instructions, refer
to 3-25-2 About Explicit Message Instructions.
1070
pleted.
Explicit Communica- A21300 to These flags are turned ON to indicate that an
tions Error Flag A21307 error has occurred at the corresponding ports (00
to 07) during execution of explicit message com-
munications.
The flags will be turned ON if the explicit mes-
sage was not sent or the message was sent but
an error response was returned.
The flag status is retained until the next explicit
message instruction is executed. The flag will be
turned OFF when the next instruction is executed
even if an error occurred previously.
Communications A21900 to These flags are turned ON to indicate that the
Port Error Flag A21907 explicit message itself was not sent from the cor-
responding ports (00 to 07) during execution of
an explicit message instruction.
The corresponding word will contain 0000
while the Explicit Communications Error Flag
is OFF.
The corresponding word will contain a FINS
error code when that port’s Explicit Communi-
cations Error Flag and Communications Port
Error Flag are both ON.
The corresponding word will contain the
appropriate explicit message error code when
that port’s Explicit Communications Error Flag
is ON and the Communications Port Error
Flag is OFF.
Precautions Be sure that the order of bytes in the source data matches the order in the
explicit message’s frame (order of data in the line). For example, when the
service data is in 2-byte or 4-byte units, the order of data in the frame is left-
most to rightmost order in 2-digit pairs, as shown in the following diagram.
Command format
Example: Address 1234 Example: Cumulative time 12345678
hex stored in 34 → 12 order hex stored in 78 → 56 → 34 → 12 order
34 12 78 56 34 12
Service Data:1234Hex Service Data:12345678Hex
1071
The following diagrams show how data is stored in the data areas when the
service data is in 2-byte or 4-byte units.
1. Data in 2-byte Units
• Storing Data from the Leftmost Byte (Bits 12 to 15 of C = 0 hex)
Example: Storing the value 1234 hex in D+3
The data in the frame is in the order 34 → 12.
Frame 34 12
In this case, 1234 hex is
stored from the leftmost
byte in the order 34 → 12.
15 08 07 00
D+3 3 4 1 2
• Storing Data from the Rightmost Byte (Bits 12 to 15 of C = 8 hex)

The data in the frame is in the order 34 → 12.
Frame 34 12
stored from the
rightmost byte in the
order 34 → 12. 15 08 07 00
D+3 1 2 3 4

Example: Storing the value 12345678 hex in D+3 and D+4
The data in the frame is in the order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
Frame 78 56 34 12

stored from the leftmost byte in
the order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
15 08 07 00
D+3 7 8 5 6
D+4 3 4 1 2

The data in the frame is in the order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
Frame 78 56 34 12

stored from the rightmost byte in
the order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
15 08 07 00
D+3 5 6 7 8
D+4 1 2 3 4
Note The examples above only show the storage of received data in D+3, but send
data is stored in S+6 in the same way.
Example In this example, EXPLT(720) is used to read the total ON time or number of
contact operations from a DRT2 Slave (I/O Terminal).
Communications Port
Enabled Flag (Port 6)
000000 A20206
EXPLT
S D00000
D D00100
C D00200
1072
port 06) are ON, EXPLT(720) reads the Total ON Time (s) or Number of Con-
tact Operations from a DRT2 Slave (I/O Terminal). In this case, the Total ON
Time or Number of Contact Operations for input 3 are read.
Service Code = 0E hex, Class ID = 09 hex, Instance ID = 03 hex, and Attribute
ID = 66 hex.
For example, a value of 2,752,039 s is returned as the response for the Total
ON Time.
Explicit message command format
0E 09 03 66
Attribute ID
Instance ID
Class ID
Service Code
Destination node address
CS1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit

(CPU Bus Unit with unit number 2)
EXPLT(720)
CPU instruction
Unit
Unit address 12 hex (because

the unit number is 2)
Explicit DRM2-OD16 Slave

message with node address 45
S: D00000 0 0 0 A Number of bytes of data: S+1 to S+5 = 5 words = 10 bytes = 0A hex

S+1: D00001 0 0 2 D Slave’s node address = 45 = 2D hex
S+2: D00002 0 0 0 E Service Code = 0E hex
S+3: D00003 0 0 0 9 Class ID = 09 hex
S+4: D00004 0 0 0 3 Instance ID = 03 hex (Input 3)
S+5: D00005 0 0 6 6 Attribute ID = 66 hex
D: D00100 0 0 0 8 Contains 08 hex for 8 bytes of received data in response frame.

D+1: D00101 0 0 2 D Returns Slave’s node address = 45 = 2D hex.
D+2: D00102 0 0 8 E Service Code = 8E hex (normal completion)
D+3: D00103 2 7 F E
Service Data = 0029FE27 hex (2,752,039 s decimal)
D+4: D00104 2 9 0 0
C: D00200 0 0 0 4 Set 5 words = 0005 hex since there are 5 words in D to D+5.
Byte order = 0 hex (from leftmost byte), communications port = 6 hex
C+1: D00201 0 6 1 2
(port 6), and the DeviceNet Unit’s unit address = 12 hex
C+2: D00202 0 0 0 0 Response monitoring time = 0000 hex (2 s)
C+3: D00203 0 0 0 0 Explicit format type = 0000 hex (DeviceNet format)
1073
3-25-7 EXPLICIT GET ATTRIBUTE: EGATR(721)

Purpose Sends an information/status read command in an explicit message (Get
Attribute Single, Service Code: 0E hex).
This instruction is supported by only by CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or
later.
Ladder Symbol
EGATR(721)
D D: First word of received message
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition EGATR(721)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @EGATR(721)

OK OK OK OK

Specifies the first word of the send message (S to S+3).
15 12 11 8 7 0
S 0 0
Destination Node Address

00 to max. node address (hex)
(00 to 3F hex (0 to 63) for DeviceNet)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+1 0 0
Class ID (hex)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+2 0 0
Instance ID (hex)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+3 0 0
Attribute ID (hex)
If the Attribute ID is not used, set it

to FFFF hex. (The Attribute ID
cannot be set to 0000 hex.)
1074
D: First word of received message

Specifies the first word of the received message (D to D+267 max.).
15 0
D
Contains the number of bytes of received service data from

words D+1 on. Does not include the 2 bytes in word D itself.
Includes only the number of bytes of Service Data starting at

D+1. (If the first or last word contains just one byte of data, the
empty byte in that word is not counted.)
15 0
D+1 Service Data

to
...
D+267
Contains the response’s service data (data

following the service code). The byte-order of
this data is specified in bits 12 to 15 of C+1.
Can contain up to 534 bytes (267 words) of
data.

Specifies the first of four control words (C to C+3).
15 0
C
Set the maximum number of words of data in the received data beginning at D.
The allowed setting range is 0 to 010C hex (268 words).
If the number of words of received data exceeds the value set here, a FINS
error will occur (response too long, code 11 0B) and no data at all will be stored
(in the area starting at D+3).
If the number of words of received data is less than the value set here, the
remaining words (in the area starting at D+3) will be left unchanged.
15 12 11 8 7 0
C+1

Port number of the communications port (logical port) for the network
instruction: 0 to 7 hex (F hex: Automatic allocation)
Byte order of service data (frame data) stored in areas beginning at S+6 and D+3
15 0
C+2

0001 to FFFF hex (0.1 to 6553.5 s)
15 0
C+3

0000 hex: DeviceNet (same as using the 2801 FINS
command)
Area S D C
CIO 6140 CIO 6143 CIO 6140
1075
Area S D C
D32764 D32767 D32764
E32764 E32767 E32764
En_32764 En_32767 En_32764
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description Sends the “read information/status” explicit message command (stored in

words S+1 to S+3) to the node address specified in S, via the Communica-
tions Unit with the FINS unit address specified in bits 00 to 07 of C+1.
When the response to the explicit message is received, the response’s ser-
vice data (data following the service code) is stored in the range of words
beginning at D+1.
The number of bytes of received data indicated in D is the number of bytes of
service data. (For example, if there is 1 byte of service data, D will contains
0001 hex. D will contain 0001 hex regardless of the byte order setting, i.e.,
whether the byte is stored in the rightmost or leftmost byte of D.)
The setting in bits 12 to 15 of C+1 (0 or 8 hex) determines the byte-order of
the service data stored at S+6 and D+3.
A B C D

area
15 08 07 00
D+1 A B
D+2 C D
1076

A B C D

area
15 08 07 00
D+1 B A
D+2 D C
Flags

A219 OFF).
error occurred.
pleted.
munications.
1077

is OFF.
Flag is OFF.
Command format
Example: Address 1234 hex Example: Cumulative time12345678
stored in 34 → 12 order hex stored in 78 → 56 → 34 → 12 order
34 12 78 56 34 12
The data in the frame is
in the order 34 → 12.
Frame 34 12

15 08 07 00
D+1 3 4 1 2
1078

The data in the frame is in
the order 34 → 12.
Frame 34 12

stored from the rightmost
15 08 07 00
D+1 1 2 3 4

The data in the frame is in the
order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
Frame 78 56 34 12

the order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
15 08 07 00
D+1 7 8 5 6
D+2 3 4 1 2

order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
Frame 78 56 34 12

the order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
15 08 07 00
D+1 5 6 7 8
D+2 1 2 3 4
Example In this example, EGATR(721) is used to read the general status of a DRT2
Slave (I/O Terminal).
Communications Port
000000 A20206
EGATR
S D00000
D D00100
C D00200
port 06) are ON, EGATR(721) reads the general status of the DRT2 Slave (I/O
Terminal). In this case, the Total ON Time or Number of Contact Operations
for input 3 are read.
Service Code = 0E hex, Class ID = 95 hex, Instance ID = 01 hex, and Attribute
ID = 65 hex.
The general status is returned in 1 byte.
1079
0E 95 01 65
Attribute ID
Instance ID
Class ID
Service Code

EGATR(721)
CPU
instruction
Unit

Explicit Slave (I/O Terminal)

S: D00000 0 0 0 A Slave’s node address = 10 = 0A hex

S+1: D00001 0 0 9 5 Class ID = 95 hex
S+2: D00002 0 0 0 1 Instance ID = 01 hex
C: D00200 0 0 0 2 Set 2 words = 0002 hex since there are 2 words in D to D+1.
Byte order = 8 hex (from rightmost byte), communications port = 6
C+1: D00201 8 6 1 2
hex (port 6), and the DeviceNet Unit’s unit address = 12 hex
D: D00100 0 0 0 1 D contains 0 hex for the 1 byte of data returned to the rightmost byte
of D+1.
The Slave’s general status is returned to bits 00 to 07.
D+1: D00101 0 0 4 8 (The data is stored in bits 00 to 07 because the byte order setting in
C+1 bits 12 to 15 was set to 8 hex (from rightmost byte).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D 00101 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
Basic Unit's I/O Power Status Flag

Expansion Unit's I/O Power Status Flag
Low Network Power Voltage Flag
Unit Maintenance Flag General
Sensor Disconnected Flag status
Sensor Power Shorted Flag
Operation Time Over Flag

Connected Device Maintenance Flag
1080
3-25-8 EXPLICIT SET ATTRIBUTE: ESATR(722)

Purpose Sends an information write command in an explicit message (Set Attribute
Single, Service Code: 10 hex).
Ladder Symbol
ESATR(722)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ESATR(722)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ESATR(722)

OK OK OK OK
1081

Specifies the first word of the send message (S to S+271 max.).
15 0
S
Set the number of bytes of source data from words S+1 on.
For example, set S to 0008 hex if there are 4 words of data
(S+1 to S+4). Do not include the 2 bytes in word S itself.
Include the leftmost bytes of S+1 to S+4, which contain 00.
Also, include the number of bytes of Service Data starting at
S+5. (If the first or last word contains just one byte of data, do
not count the empty byte in that word.)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+1 0 0
Destination Node Address 00

to max. node address (hex)
(00 to 3F hex (0 to 63) for
DeviceNet)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+2 0 0
Class ID (hex)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+3 0 0
Instance ID (hex)
15 12 11 8 7 0
S+4 0 0
Attribute ID (hex)
If the Attribute ID is not used, set it

to FFFF hex. (The Attribute ID
cannot be set to 0000 hex.)
15 0
S+5 Service Data
...
to
S+271
When there is Service Data (data other

than the Attribute ID), the byte-order of this
data is specified in bits 12 to 15 of C+1. Up
to 534 bytes (267 words) can be set.

Specifies the first of three control words (C to C+2).
15 12 11 8 7 0
C

Port number of the communications port (logical port) for the
network instruction: 0 to 7 hex (F hex: Automatic allocation)
Byte order of service data (frame data) stored in areas beginning at S+5
15 0
C+1

0001 to FFFF hex (0.1 to 6553.5 s)
15 0
C+2

0000 hex: DeviceNet (same as using the 2801
FINS command)
1082
Area S C
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32765
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
binary @ E00000 to @ E32767
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
BCD *E00000 to *E32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767 (n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description Sends the explicit message command with service code 10 hex (stored in the
range of words beginning at S+2) to the node address specified in S+1, via
the Communications Unit with the FINS unit address specified in bits 00 to 07
of C. When the response to the explicit message is received, it is stored in the
range of words beginning at D+2.
The setting in bits 12 to 15 of C (0 or 8 hex) determines the byte-order of the
service data stored at S+5.
Set bits 12 to 15 of C to 0 hex.
A B C D

area
15 08 07 00
S+5 A B
S+6 C D
1083

Set bits 12 to 15 of C to 8 hex.
A B C D

area
15 08 07 00
S+5 B A
S+6 D C
Flags

A219 OFF).
error occurred.
pleted.
munications.
1084

is OFF.
Flag is OFF.
Command format
Example: Address 1234 hex Example: Cumulative time12345678
stored in 34 → 12 order hex stored in 78 → 56 → 34 → 12 order
34 12 78 56 34 12
Example: Storing the value 1234 hex in S+5
Frame 34 12
15 08 07 00
S+5 3 4 1 2
1085

Example: Storing the value 1234 hex in S+5
Frame 34 12

stored from the rightmost
15 08 07 00
S+5 1 2 3 4

Example: Storing the value 12345678 hex in S+5 and S+6
order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
Frame 78 56 34 12

the order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
15 08 07 00
S+5 7 8 5 6
S+6 3 4 1 2

Example: Storing the value 12345678 hex in S+5 and S+6
order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
Frame 78 56 34 12

the order 78 → 56 → 34 → 12.
15 08 07 00
S+5 5 6 7 8
S+6 1 2 3 4
Example In this example, ESATR(722) is used to overwrite the Number of Contact

Operations set value in a DRT2 Slave (I/O Terminal).
Communications Port
000000 A20206
ESATR
S D00000
C D00100
port 06) are ON, EXPLT(720) writes the Number of Contact Operations set
value for input 2 in a DRT2 Slave (I/O Terminal).
(Service Code = 10 hex,) Class ID = 08 hex, Instance ID = 02 hex, and
Attribute ID = 68 hex.
1086
In this case, the Number of Contact Operations is being set to 500 (1F4 hex),
so the service data is set to 000001F4.
10 08 02 68 F4 01 00 00
Service Data:01F4Hex
Attribute ID
Instance ID
Class ID
Service Code

CPU ESATR(722)
Unit instruction

Explicit Slave (I/O Terminal)

S: D00000 0 0 0 C Number of bytes of data: S+1 to S+6 = 6 words = 12 bytes = 0C hex

S:+1 D00001 0 0 0 A Slave’s node address = 10 = 0A hex
S+2: D00002 0 0 0 8 Class ID = 08 hex
S+3: D00003 0 0 0 2 Instance ID = 02 hex
S+5: D00005 0 1 F 4 Service Data = F401 hex
S+6: D00006 0 0 0 0
C: D00201 8 6 1 2 Byte order = 8 hex (from rightmost byte), communications port = 6

hex (port 6), and the DeviceNet Unit’s unit address = 12 hex
3-25-9 EXPLICIT WORD READ: ECHRD(723)

Purpose Reads data to the local CPU Unit from another CPU Unit in the network. (The
remote CPU Unit must support explicit messages.)
Ladder Symbol
ECHRD(723)
S S: First source word in remote CPU Unit
D D: First destination word in local CPU Unit
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ECHRD(723)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ECHRD(723)
1087

OK OK OK OK
Operands S: First Source Word in Remote CPU Unit

Specifies the leading word address containing the data to be read from the
remote CPU Unit.
D: First Destination Word in Local CPU Unit
Specifies the leading word address where the read data will be stored in the
local CPU Unit.
C: First Control Word
Specifies the first of five control words (C to C+4).
15 12 11 8 7 0
C 0 0
Source node address (remote CPU Unit)

(00 to maximum node address (hex))
Example: DeviceNet: 00 to 3F hex (0 to 63)
15 12 11 8 7 0
C+1 0 0
Read data size (words):

01 to 64 hex (1 to 100 words)
15 12 11 8 7 0
C+2 0

• CPU Bus Unit: 10 to 1F hex (unit number + 10 hex)
• Special I/O Unit: 20 to 7F hex (unit number + 20 hex)
Port number of the communications port
(logical port) for the network instruction:
0 to 7 hex (F hex: Automatic allocation)
15 0
C+3

0001 to FFFF hex (0.1 to 6553.5 s)
15 0
C+4

0000 hex: DeviceNet
(same as using the 2801 FINS command)
Area S D C
CIO 6139
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32763
(n = 0 to C) En_32763
(n = 0 to C)
1088
Area S D C
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description Reads the specified number of words from the first read word (specified in S)
in the remote CPU Unit with the node address specified in C, and stores the
data in the local CPU Unit memory words beginning at D.
Note ECHRD(723) sends an explicit message with the Service Code 1C hex (Byte
Data Read).
Flags

A219 OFF).
error occurred.
For details on the general operation of the network instructions, refer to 3-25-
2 About Explicit Message Instructions.
1089
pleted.
munications.
is OFF.
Flag is OFF.
Example In this example, ECHRD(723) is used to read the I/O memory of the CJ-series
CPU Unit on the DeviceNet network, and store the data in the I/O memory of
the local CPU Unit.
Communications
Port Enabled Flag (Port 6)
000000 A20206
ECHRD
S D00000
D D00100
C D00200
1090
port 06) are ON, ECHRD(723) reads D00000 to D00002 from the I/O memory
of the CJ-series CPU Unit with node address 07 on the DeviceNet Network
and stores the data in D00100 to D00102 of the local CPU Unit.
CS1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit
ECHRD(723) CPU Unit
CPU instruction
Unit

the unit number is 2) Node address 07
DeviceNet
Explicit
message
15 0 15 0
D: D00100 S: D00000
D+1: D00100 S+1: D00001
D+2: S+2: D00002
15 8 7 0
C: D00200 0 0 0 7 Node address of remote CPU Unit to be read = 07 hex (node 07)
C+1: D00201 0 0 0 3 Read data size (number of words) = 3 hex
Communications port = 6 hex (port 6),
C+2: D00202 0 6 1 2
and the DeviceNet Unit’s unit address = 12 hex
3-25-10 EXPLICIT WORD WRITE: ECHWR(724)

Purpose Writes data from the local CPU Unit to another CPU Unit in the network. (The
remote CPU Unit must support explicit messages.)
Ladder Symbol
ECHWR(724)
S S: First source word in local CPU Unit
D D: First destination word in remote CPU Unit
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition ECHWR(724)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @ECHWR(724)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S: First Source Word in Local CPU Unit

Specifies the leading word address in the local CPU Unit containing the write
data.
1091
D: First Destination Word in Remote CPU Unit

Specifies the leading word address of the write destination in the remote CPU
Unit.
C: First Control Word
Specifies the first of five control words (C to C+4).
15 12 11 8 7 0
C 0 0
Source node address (remote CPU Unit)

(00 to maximum node address (hex))
Example: DeviceNet: 00 to 3F hex (0 to 63)
15 12 11 8 7 0
C+1 0 0
Write data size (words):

01 to 64 hex (1 to 100 words)
15 12 11 8 7 0
C+2 0

• CPU Bus Unit: 10 to 1F hex (unit number + 10 hex)
• Special I/O Unit: 20 to 7F hex (unit number + 20 hex)
Port number of the communications port (logical port)
for the network instruction: 0 to 7 hex
(F hex: Automatic allocation)
15 0
C+3

0001 to FFFF hex (0.1 to 6553.5 s)
15 0
C+4
Explicit message format0000 hex:

DeviceNet (same as using the 2801 FINS command)
Area S D C
CIO 6139
DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32763
(n = 0 to C) En_32763
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
1092
Area S D C
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description Writes the specified number of words beginning at S from the local CPU Unit
to the write destination beginning at D in the remote CPU Unit with the node
address specified in C.
Note ECHWR(724) sends an explicit message with the Service Code 1E hex (Byte
Data Write).
Flags

A219 OFF).
error occurred.
pleted.
munications.
1093

is OFF.
Flag is OFF.
Example In this example, ECHWR(724) is used to write data from the I/O memory of
the local CPU Unit to the I/O memory of a CJ-series CPU Unit on the
DeviceNet network.
Communications
Port Enabled Flag (Port 6)
000000 A20206
ECHWR
S D00000
D D00100
C D00200
port 06) are ON, ECHWR(724) reads D00000 to D00002 from the I/O mem-
ory of the local CPU Unit and stores the data in D00100 to D00102 of the CJ-
series CPU Unit with node address 07 on the DeviceNet Network
1094
File Memory Instructions Section 3-26
CS1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit

ECHWR(724)
CPU instruction CPU Unit
Unit
Unit address 12 hex (because Node address 07

DeviceNet
Explicit
message
S: D00000 D: D00100
S+1: D00001 D+1: D00101
S+2: D00002 D+2: D00102
15 8 7 0
C: D00200 0 0 0 7 Node address of remote CPU Unit to be written to = 07 hex (node 07)
C+1: D00201 0 0 0 3 Write data size (number of words) = 3 hex
Communications port = 6 hex (port 6),
C+2: D00202 0 6 1 2
and the DeviceNet Unit’s unit address = 12 hex
3-26 File Memory Instructions

This section describes instructions used with file memory (EM Area or Mem-
ory Cards).
Note File memory can also be manipulated by executing CMND(490) to send a
FINS command to the local CPU Unit. Refer to the CS/CJ-series PLC Opera-
tion Manual for details.

READ DATA FILE FREAD 700 1099
WRITE DATA FILE FWRIT 701 1106
WRITE TEXT FILE TWRIT 704 1113
3-26-1 Precautions when Using Memory Cards

Confirm the following items before using a Memory Card.
Format
Memory Cards are formatted before shipping. There is no need to format
them after purchase. To format them once they have been used, always do so
in the CPU Unit using the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.
If a Memory Card is formatted directly in a notebook computer or other com-
puter, the CPU Unit may not recognize the Memory Card. If this occurs, you
will not be able to use the Memory Card even if it is reformatted in the CPU
Unit.
Number of Files in Root Directory

There is a limit to the number of files that can be placed in the root directory of
a Memory Card (just as there is a limit for a hard disk). Although the limit
depends on the type and format of the Memory Card, it will be between 128
and 512 files. When using applications that write log files or other files at a
specific interval, write the files to a subdirectory rather than to the root direc-
tory.
1095
Subdirectories can be created on a computer or by using the CMND(490)

instruction. Refer to 3-25-5 DELIVER COMMAND: CMND(490) for a specific
example using CMND(490).
Number of Writes
Generally speaking, there is no limit to the number of write operations that can
be performed for a flash memory. For the Memory Cards, however, a limit of
100,000 write operations has been set for warranty purposes. For example, if
the Memory Card is written to every 10 minutes, over 100,000 write opera-
tions will be performed within 2 years.
Minimum File Size

If many small files, such as ones containing only a few words of DM Area
data, are stored on the Memory Card, it will not be possible to use the com-
plete capacity of the Memory Card. For example, if a Memory Card with an
allocation unit size of 4,096 bytes is used, at least 4,096 bytes of memory will
be used for each file regardless of how small the file is. If you save 10 words
of DM Area data to the Memory Card, 4,096 bytes of memory will be used
even though the actual file size is only 68 bytes. Using files of such a small
size greatly reduces the utility rate of the Memory Card. If the allocation unit
size is reduced to increase the utility rate, however, the access speed will be
reduced.
The allocation unit size of the Memory Card can be checked from a DOS
prompt using CHKDSK. The specific procedure is omitted here. Refer to gen-
eral computer references for more information on allocation unit sizes.
Memory Card Access Precautions

When the PLC is accessing the Memory Card, the BUSY indicator will light on
the CPU Unit. Observe the following precautions.
1,2,3... 1. Never turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BUSY indica-
tor is lit. The Memory Card may become unusable if this is done.
2. Never remove the Memory Card from the CPU Unit when the BUSY indi-
cator is lit. Press the Memory Card power OFF button and wait for the
BUSY indicator to go out before removing the Memory Card. The Memory
Card may become unusable if this is not done.
3. Insert the Memory Card with the label facing to the right. Do not attempt to
insert it in any other orientation. The Memory Card or CPU Unit may be
damaged.
4. A few seconds will be required for the CPU Unit to recognize the Memory
Card after it is inserted. When accessing a Memory Card immediately after
turning ON the power supply or inserting the Memory Card, program an
NC condition for the Memory Card Recognized Flag (A34315) as an input
condition, as shown below.
Execution
condition A34315 A34313
FREAD
Memory Card File Memory
Recognized Operation C
Flag Flag
S1
S2
D
Note The structure of data files is as shown below.
1096
File Memory Instructions
FWRIT(701)
FWRIT(701) creates a data file containing the specified data from I/O mem-
ory. The file format can be either binary or CSV. FWRIT(701) can also be
used to add to an existing file or overwrite an existing file from a specified
position.
FREAD(700)
FREAD(700) reads the contents of a data file and stores it in the specified
area of I/O memory. The file format can be either binary or CSV. FREAD(700)
can also be used to read data from a specified position in a file.
TWRIT(704)
TWRIT(704) creates a text file containing ASCII data stored in I/O memory.
TWRIT(704) can also be used to add to an existing file or overwrite an existing
file.
CMND(490)
CMND(490) can be used to format files, delete files, copy files, and change
file names by sending FINS commands for Memory Card operations. For
details, refer to Section 5 File Memory Functions in the SYSMAC CS/CJ
Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W394).
For binary format (.IOM), the data will be as follows when 1234 hex, 5678 hex,
9ABC hex, and DEF0 hex are stored in the file ABC.IOM (although the user
does not normally need to be concerned with this structure):
XX
XX
48 bytes (reserved
to for system use)
I/O memory 1234
XX
5678 12
9ABC 34
DEF0 56
78
8 bytes
9A
BC
DE
F0
Contents of ABC.IOM
For word CSV format (.CSV), the data will be as follows when 1234 hex, 5678
hex, 9ABC hex, and DEF0 hex are stored in the file ABC.CSV (the basic
structure would be the same for text data (.TXT):
31 1
32 2
4 bytes
33 3
I/O memory 34 4
1234 Converted to ASCII
2C , Delimiter
5678 35 5
9ABC 1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0
36 6
DEF0 37 7 4 bytes
38 8
File Displayed as Text Data
2C , Delimiter
to
Contents of ABC.CSV
1097
For long-word CSV format (.CSV), the data will be as follows when 1234 hex,
5678 hex, 9ABC hex, and DEF0 hex are stored in the file ABC.CSV (the basic
structure would be the same for text data (.TXT):
35 5
36 6
37 7
Converted to ASCII 38 8
I/O memory 1234 (higher-addressed
31 1 8 bytes
word first in field)
5678 32 2
9ABC 33 3 56781234,DEF09ABC
DEF0 34 4
2C , Delimiter
File Displayed as Text Data
to
Contents of ABC.CSV
Related Auxiliary Area

Words and Bits Memory Card Detection
Memory Card Type A34300 to Contains a binary number indicating the type
A34302 of Memory Card, if any, that is installed.
(0: None, 4: Flash ROM)
Memory Card Format A34307 ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or
Error Flag a formatting error has occurred.
Memory Card Detected A34315 ON when a Memory Card has been detected.
Flag (version 1 (-V1) or OFF when a Memory Card is not detected.
higher only)
Instruction-related Words and Bits

File Write Error Flag A34308 ON when an error occurred when writing to the
file.
ON when the file being written is write-pro-
tected.
File Write Impossible A34309 ON when the data could not be written
Flag because there was insufficient free memory.
File Read Error Flag A34310 ON when a file could not be read because its
data was corrupted or if it contains the wrong
data type.
File Missing Flag A34311 ON when data could not be read because the
specified file does not exist.
File Memory Operation A34313 ON for any of the following:
Flag The CPU Unit has sent a FINS command to
itself using CMND(490).
FREAD(700) or FWRIT(701) are being exe-
cuted.
The program is being overwritten using a con-
trol bit in memory.
A simple backup operation is being performed.
1098

Accessing File Flag A34314 ON when file data is actually being accessed.
Use this flag as an execution condition to pre-
vent a file memory instruction from being exe-
cuted while another is in progress.
Number of Data to A346 to The contents of these words indicate the sta-
Transfer A347 tus of data file transfers.
When an FREAD(700) or FWRIT(701) instruc-
tion is executed, the number of words or fields
to be transferred is written to these words. The
value is decremented by 1 as each word or
field is transferred.
A346 contains the rightmost 16 bits and A347
contains the leftmost 16 bits of the 32-bit
binary value.
EM File Memory-related Words and Bits

EM File Memory For- A34306 ON when there is a format error in the starting
mat Error Flag bank of EM file memory.
EM File Format Starting A344 Contains the starting bank number of the EM
Bank Area that has been formatted for use as EM
file memory. Contains FFFF when none of the
EM Area has been formatted.
To convert the EM Area for use as file memory,
the PLC Setup’s EM File Memory setting must
be set to 1 and the EM File Memory Starting
Bank (0 to C) must be set. All EM banks from
the starting bank to the last bank will then be
formatted for use as file memory.
3-26-2 READ DATA FILE: FREAD(700)

Purpose Reads the specified data or amount of data from the specified data file in file
memory to the specified data area in the CPU Unit.
Ladder Symbol
FREAD(700)
C C: Control word
S1 S1: Number of words and

First source word
S2 S2: Filename
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FREAD(700)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FREAD(700)

OK OK OK OK

As shown in the following diagram, the first digit indicates whether the source
1099
file is in the Memory Card or EM file memory, the second digit of the control
word indicates whether the actual data or the number of words of data is to be
read, the third digits indicates the presence of carriage returns, and the fourth
digit indicates the data type.
C 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
File memory specifier

0: Memory Card
1: EM file memory
Function specifier
0: Read data.
1: Read number of words.
Carriage returns
0: No returns
8: Return every 10 fields*
9: Return every 1 field*
A: Return every 2 fields*
B: Return every 4 fields*
C: Return every 5 fields*
D: Return every 16 fields*
Data type (-EV1 only)

0: Binary (extension: .IOM, words/field: NA)
1: Non-delimited words (extension: .TXT, words/field: 1)*
2: Non-delimited double-words (extension: .TXT., words/field: 2)*
3: Comma-delimited words (extension: .CSV, words/field: 1)*
4: Comma-delimited double-words (extension: .CSV, words/field: 2)*
5: Tab-delimited words (extension: .TXT, words/field: 1)*
6: Tab-delimited double-words (extension: .,TXT words/field: 2)*
*: Cannot be set for CS-series CS1 CPU Units prior to V1@.
Note 1. Each field will contain 1 word of I/O memory for the word data types and 2
words of I/O memory for the double-word data types.
2. When reading data with carriage returns, bits 00 to 11 of C must be set to
between 8 and D hex.
3. With double-words, the first word of data is stored in the higher memory
address, e.g., 12345678 would be stored with 1234 in D00001 and 5678
in D00000.
S1 and S1+1: Number of Read Items
The 8-digit hexadecimal value in S1 and S1+1 specifies how many words or
fields to read from file memory. If the specified number of words or fields
exceeds the number of words in the data file, the data in the file will be trans-
ferred normally and no error will occur.
S1+1 S1
S1+1 contains the leftmost 4 digits and
S1 contains the rightmost 4 digits.
Data type Bits 12 to 15 of C Contents of S1 and S1+1

Binary 0 hex (binary) Number of words to read from file
memory.
00000000 to 3FFFFFFF hex
1100
Data type Bits 12 to 15 of C Contents of S1 and S1+1

Word 1 hex (non-delimited), Number of fields to read from file
3 hex (comma-delimited), or memory, i.e., the number of words to
5 hex (tab-delimited) read from file memory.
Double-word 2 hex (non-delimited), Number of fields to read from file
4 hex (comma-delimited), or memory, i.e., half the number of words
6 hex (tab-delimited) to read from file memory.
S1+2 and S1+3: First Source Word

The 8-digit hexadecimal value in S1+2 and S1+3 specifies the starting read
word from the beginning of the file.
S1+3 S1+2
S1+3 contains the leftmost 4 digits and
S1+2 contains the rightmost 4 digits.
Data type Bits 12 to 15 of C Contents of S1+2 and S1+3

Binary 0 hex (binary) The word at which to begin reading
from the beginning of file memory.
Word 1 hex (non-delimited), The field at which to begin reading
3 hex (comma-delimited), or from the beginning of file memory, i.e.,
5 hex (tab-delimited) the number of words from the begin-
ning.
Double-word 2 hex (non-delimited), The field at which to begin reading
4 hex (comma-delimited), or from the beginning of file memory, i.e.,
6 hex (tab-delimited) half the number of words from the
beginning.
Note 1. S1+2 and S1+3 are used only for text and CVS data with no carriage re-
turns (i.e., bits 08 to 11 of C set to 0 hex) or for binary data. Always set
S1+2 and S1+3 to 00000000 hex when reading data with carriage returns
(i.e., bits 08 to 11 of C set to between 8 and D hex).
2. S1 to S1+3 must be in the same data area.
3. S1 to S1+3 are used only when reading data.
4. If the specified starting word exceeds the number of words in the data file,
the File Read Error Flag (A34310) will be turned ON and the file data will
not be read.
S2: Filename
S2 is the starting address of the words containing the absolute path and file-
name in ASCII. Use ASCII a to z, A to Z, and 0 to 9.
The full path name to the directory containing the data file can be up to 65
characters long, including the starting slash (ASCII 5C). The filename can be
up to 8 characters long, but null characters (ASCII 00) are not allowed in the
filename because the null character is used to mark the end of the character
string. Do not include the filename extension; the .IOM extension will be
added automatically.
S2 F1 F2 Store the character string beginning
with the leftmost byte in S2.
S2+1 F3 F4 The entire pathname and filename can
be up to 74 characters (bytes) long,
including the initial slash character and
S2+38 F73 F74 ending null character.
1101
Note 1. Be sure that the character string containing the path name and file name
does not exceed the end of the data area.
2. If the specified file or directory does not exist, the File Missing Flag
(A34311) will be turned ON and the file data will not be read.
Write the path name and filename in ASCII beginning with the leftmost byte of
S2, as shown in the following example for \ABC\XYZ.IOM. (The .IOM exten-
sion is added automatically.)
S2 "\" "A" S2 5C 41
S2+1 "B" "C" S2+1 42 43
S2+2 "\" "X" S2+2 5C 58
S2+3 "Y" "Z" S2+3 59 5A
S2+4 NUL S2+4 00

When data is being read, D specifies the starting address where the data read
from file memory will be stored.
When the number of words of data is being read, the number of words is writ-
ten to D and D+1 in 8-digit hexadecimal (00000000 to 7FFFFFF). D contains
the rightmost 4 digits and D+1 contains the leftmost 4 digits.
Description Reading Data (Third Digit of C = 0)

FREAD(700) reads the number of words or fields specified in S1 and S1+1
from the file specified in S2 (with filename extension .IOM, .TXT, or .CSV)
beginning at the address specified in S1+2 and S1+3. The data is then written
to RAM beginning at the word specified in D.
Starting read address File specified
specified in S1+2 and S1+3 in S2 CPU Unit
D Number of words specified

in S1 and S1+1

(Specified by the 1st digit of C.)
Note Data is stored in order by absolute internal memory addresses, so the output
data will overwrite data in the next data area if it exceeds the capacity of the
data area specified in D. See Precautions for more details.
When FREAD(700) is executed, the number of words (or fields) specified in
S1 and S1+1 is written to A346 and A347 (Number of Data to Transfer) and
this value is decremented by 1 as each word or field is transferred. The con-
tent of these words can be checked to verify that the expected number of
words or fields were transferred.
Reading Number of Words of Data (Third Digit of C=1)
FREAD(700) finds the number of words in the file specified in S2 (with file-
name extension .IOM) and writes that 8-digit hexadecimal value to D and
D+1.
1102
File specified
in S2 CPU Unit
Number of words
Number of written to D and D+1.
words

Area C S1 S2 D
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
CIO6143 CIO 6140
Work Area W000 to W000 to W000 to W511
W511 W508
Holding Bit Area H000 to H511 H000 to 508 H000 to W511
Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to A959 A000 to A444 A000 to A447 A448 to A959
A448 to A956 A448 to A959
Timer Area T0000 to T0000 to T0000 to T4095
T4095 T4092
Counter Area C0000 to C0000 to C0000 to C4095
C4095 C4092
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to D00000 to D32767
D32767 D32764
EM Area without E00000 to E00000 to E00000 to E32767
bank E32767 E32764
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_00000 to En_00000 to En_32767
En_32767 En_32764 (n = 0 to C)
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM – @D00000 to @D32767
@En_00000 to @En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM – *D00000 to *D32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Specified val- –
ues only
Data Registers –
Index Registers –
ters
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
1103
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the file memory specified in C does not exist.
ON if the settings in C are not within the specified range.
ON if the filename specified in S2 does not satisfy the
required conditions.
ON if the File Memory Operation Flag was ON.
ON if a constant was not specified for C (only for CS-
series CS1 CPU Units prior to V1@).
ON if data specified for S1 is out of range (all CPU Units
except for CS-series CS1 CPU Units prior to V1@).
ON if an illegal area is specified for D.
The following table shows relevant flags in the Auxiliary Area.

File Read Error Flag A34310 ON when a file could not be read because its
data was corrupted or if it contains the wrong
data type.
File Missing Flag A34311 ON when data could not be read because the
specified file does not exist.
cuted.
trol bit in memory.
Flag
1104

When an FREAD(700) or FWRIT(701) instruc-
tion is executed, the number of words or fields
to be transferred is written to these words. The
value is decremented by 1 as each word or
field is transferred.
binary value.
Precautions During normal instruction processing, FREAD(700) is used only to start read-
ing file memory. The instruction execution times given toward the end of this
manual are thus the times required to start reading, not to complete it. Actual
reading (transfer) is performed by the file access processing in peripheral ser-
vicing. Therefore, once FREAD(700) has been executed, reading is continu-
ously executed even if the execution condition is OFF in following cycles.
When transfer has been completed, the File Memory Operation Flag
(A34313) will turn OFF. This flag can be used for exclusive control of file mem-
ory instructions.
The time required to complete data transfer for FREAD(700) will depend on
the amount of data being transferred, the service time allocated to file access
processing, and other conditions. As a guideline, the transfer times for a cycle
time of 10 ms for a file in the root directory with the default service time set-
tings will be 0.92 s for 1,024 words and 4.64 s for 9,999 words.
The File Memory Operation Flag (A34313) will be turned ON when
FREAD(700) is executed. An error will occur and the instruction will not be
executed if A34313 is already ON.
The File Read Error Flag (A34310) will be turned ON and the instruction will
not be executed if the specified file contains the wrong data type or the file
data is corrupted. For text or CSV files, the character code must be hexadeci-
mal data and delimiters must be every 4 digits for word data and every 8 digits
for double-word data. Data will be read up to the point where an illegal charac-
ter is detected.
A few seconds is required for the CPU Unit to detect a Memory Card after it
has been inserted. If a Memory Card is going to be accessed soon after
power is turned ON or after a Memory Card is inserted, use the Memory Card
Detected Flag (A34315) in a NO input condition as shown below to be sure
that the Memory Card has been detected.
Execution
FREAD
Memory Card File Memory C

Detected Flag Operation Flag S1
S2
D
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, FREAD(700) reads 10
words of data from file \ABC\XYZ.IOM starting with the beginning of the file +
5 words and outputs these 10 words to D00400 through D00409.
1105
File memory: Memory Card

Function: Read data
Number of words to read: 10 words
Starting word: Beginning of file+5 words
Directory name: \ABC

Filename: XYZ
Ignored
File \ABC\XYZ.IOM
CPU Unit
Wd 0
+5 words Wd 5
+10 words
Wd 14
3-26-3 WRITE DATA FILE: FWRIT(701)

Purpose Overwrites or appends data in the specified data file in file memory with the
specified data from the data area in the CPU Unit. If the specified file does not
exist, a new file is created with that filename. Data can be written as binary,
text, or CSV format data.
Ladder Symbol
FWRIT(701)
C C: Control word
D1 D1: First destination word
D2 D2: Filename
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FWRIT(701)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FWRIT(701)

OK OK OK OK
1106

As shown in the following diagram, the third digit of the control word indicates
whether to append or overwrite data in the data file and the fourth digit indi-
cates whether the destination file is in the Memory Card or EM file memory.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
File memory specifier

0: Memory Card
1: EM file memory
Function specifier
0: Append
1: Overwrite
Carriage returns
0: No returns
8: Return every 10 fields*
9: Return every 1 field*
A: Return every 2 fields*
B: Return every 4 fields*
C: Return every 5 fields*
D: Return every 16 fields*
Data type
0: Binary (extension: .IOM, words/field: NA)
1: Non-delimited words (extension: .TXT, words/field: 1)*
2: Non-delimited double-words (extension: .TXT., words/field: 2)*
3: Comma-delimited words (extension: .CSV, words/field: 1)*
4: Comma-delimited double-words (extension: .CSV, words/field: 2)*
5: Tab-delimited words (extension: .TXT, words/field: 1)*
6: Tab-delimited double-words (extension: .,TXT words/field: 2)*
*: Cannot be set for CS-series CS1 CPU Units prior to V1@.
Note 1. Each field will contain 1 word of I/O memory for the word data types and 2
words of I/O memory for the double-word data types.
2. With double-words, the first word of data is read from the higher memory
address, e.g., 12345678 would be written with 1234 from D00001 and
5678 from D00000.
3. If delimiting is specified, the specified of delimiter is added after every word
for word data types and after every two words for double-word data types.
(The code for a comma is added for comma-delimiting and the code for a
tab is added for tab-delimiting.)
4. If non-delimited words or double-words are specified, the data for all fields
is written continuously without any delimiters.
5. If carriage returns are specified, a carriage return will be added after each
set of the specified number of words. If no carriage returns is specified, the
data will be written continuously without carriage returns.
1107
D1 and D1+1: Number of Write Items

The 8-digit hexadecimal value in D1 and D1+1 specifies how many words or
fields to write to file memory.
D1+1 D1
D1+1 contains the leftmost 4 digits and
D1 contains the rightmost 4 digits.
Data type Bits 12 to 15 of C Contents of D1 and D1+1
Binary 0 hex (binary) Number of words to write from file
memory.
Word 1 hex (non-delimited), Number of fields to write from file
3 hex (comma-delimited), or memory, i.e., the number of words to
5 hex (tab-delimited) write from file memory.
Double-word 2 hex (non-delimited), Number of fields to write from file
4 hex (comma-delimited), or memory, i.e., half the number of words
6 hex (tab-delimited) to write from file memory.
D1+2 and D1+3: First Destination Word

The 8-digit hexadecimal value in D1+2 and D1+3 specifies the starting write
word from the beginning of the file.
D1+3 D1+2
D1+3 contains the leftmost 4 digits and
D1+2 contains the rightmost 4 digits.
Data type Bits 12 to 15 of C Contents of D1+2 and D1+3

Binary 0 hex (binary) The word at which to begin writing
from the beginning of file memory.
Word 1 hex (non-delimited), The field at which to begin writing from
3 hex (comma-delimited), or the beginning of file memory, i.e., the
5 hex (tab-delimited) number of words from the beginning.
Double-word 2 hex (non-delimited), The field at which to begin writing from
4 hex (comma-delimited), or the beginning of file memory, i.e., half
6 hex (tab-delimited) the number of words from the begin-
ning.
Note 1. D1+2 and D1+3 are used only when overwriting data, and only 1) For text
and CVS data with no carriage returns (i.e., bits 08 to 11 of C set to 0 hex)
or 2) for binary data. Always set D1+2 and D1+3 to 00000000 hex when
writing data with carriage returns (i.e., bits 08 to 11 of C set to between 8
and D hex).
2. D1 to D1+3 must be in the same data area.
3. If the specified starting word exceeds the number of words in the data file,
the File Write Error Flag (A34308) will be turned ON and the data will not
be written.
D2: Filename
D2 is the starting address of the words containing the absolute path and file-
name in ASCII. Use ASCII a to z, A to Z, and 0 to 9.
The full path name to the directory containing the data file can be up to 65
characters long, including the starting slash (ASCII 5C). The filename can be
up to 8 characters long, but null characters (ASCII 00) are not allowed in the
filename because the null character is used to mark the end of the character
1108
string. Do not include the filename extension; the .IOM, .TXT, or .CSV exten-
sion is added automatically.
D2 F1 F2 Store the character string beginning

with the leftmost byte in D2.
D2+1 F3 F4 The entire pathname and filename can
be up to 74 characters (bytes) long,
including the initial slash character and
D2+38 F73 F74 ending null character.
Note 1. Be sure that the character string containing the pathname and filename
does not exceed the end of the data area.
2. If the specified directory does not exist, the File Missing Flag (A34311) will
be turned ON and the file data will not be written.
Write the pathname and filename in ASCII beginning with the leftmost byte of
D2, as shown in the following example for \ABC\XYZ.IOM. (The extension is
added automatically.)
D2 '\' 'A' D2 5C 41
D2+1 'B' 'C' → D2+1 42 43
D2+2 '\' 'X' D2+2 5C 58
D2+3 'Y' 'Z' D2+3 59 5A
D2+4 NUL → D2+4 00
For information on creating directories from the ladder program, refer to Sec-
tion 5 File Memory Functions in the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programmable
Controllers Programming Manual (W394).
S specifies the starting address containing the data that will be written to the
file memory. Data is read by absolute PLC memory addresses, so
FWRIT(701) will continue reading source data from the next data area if the
number of words being read exceeds the end of the data area specified in S.
Description During normal instruction processing, FWRIT(701) is used only to start writing
of the file memory. The instruction execution times given toward the end of
this manual are thus the times required to start writing, not to complete it.
Actual writing (transfer) is performed by the file access processing in periph-
eral servicing. Therefore, once FWRIT(701) has been executed, writing is
continuously executed even if the execution condition is OFF in following
cycles. When transfer has been completed, the File Memory Operation Flag
ory instructions.
The time required to complete data transfer for FWRIT(701) will depend on
processing, and other conditions. As a guideline, the transfer times for a cycle
time of 10 ms for a file in the root directory with the default service time set-
tings will be 1.97 s (new file) or 1.33 s (existing file) for 1,024 words and 6.64 s
(new file) or 6.12 s (existing file) for 9,999 words.
The source data is read from absolute internal memory addresses in RAM, so
the entire block of data will be read even if the data spans two or more data
areas. For example, if the first destination address is in the Work Area but the
amount of data exceeds the capacity of this area, FWRIT(701) will continue
reading data at the beginning of the next area (in this case, the Timer Area).
Refer to Appendix D in the CS/CJ-series Programmable Controllers Operation
Manual (W339) for a memory map showing the location of data areas in RAM.
When FWRIT(701) is executed, the number of words or fields specified in D1
and D1+1 is written to A346 and A347 (Number of Data to Transfer) and this
value is decremented by 1 as each word or field is transferred. The content of
1109
these words can be checked to verify that the expected number of words or
fields were transferred.
Overwriting Data in an Existing File (Third Digit of C=1)
FWRIT(701) uses data area data starting at the word specified in S to over-
write file memory data in the specified data type. It overwrites the number of
words or fields specified in D1 and D1+1 in the file specified in D2 (with file-
name extension .IOM, .TXT, or .CVS) starting at the address specified in
D1+2 and D1+3.
CPU Unit Starting word File specified in D2
specified in
Starting D1+2 and
address D1+3
specified Number of
in S words specified
in D1 and D1+1
Overwrite
Appending Data to an Existing File (Third Digit of C=0)

FWRIT(701) appends data area data starting at the word specified in S to a
data file in file memory in the specified data type. It appends the number of
words or field specified in D1 and D1+1 to the file specified in D2 (with file-
name extension .IOM, .TXT, or .CVS).
CPU Unit File specified in D2
End of
Starting file Existing
address data
specified Number of words
and D1+1
Append
Creating a New File with Source Data

If the file specified in D2 does not exist, FWRIT(701) creates a new file with
that name and filename extension (.IOM, .TXT, or .CVS) and writes the speci-
fied source data in the specified data type starting at the beginning of the file.
In this case, it does not matter if appending to overwriting data is specified.
Beginning
of file File speci- New file created
CPU Unit fied in D2
Starting
address Number of words
specified specified in D1
and D1+1
in S

Area C D1 D2 S
CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
CIO 6143 CIO 6140
Work Area W000 to W000 to W000 to W511
W511 W508
Holding Bit Area H000 to H511 H000 to 508 H000 to H511
1110
Area C D1 D2 S
A448 to A956 A448 to A959
Timer Area T0000 to T0000 to T0000 to T4095
T4095 T4092
Counter Area C0000 to C0000 to C0000 to C4095
C4095 C4092
DM Area D00000 to D00000 to D00000 to D32767
D32767 D32764
EM Area without E00000 to E00000 to E00000 to E32767
bank E32767 E32764
EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_00000 to En_00000 to En_32767
En_32767 En_32764 (n = 0 to C)
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM – @D00000 to @D32767
@En_00000 to @En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM – *D00000 to *D32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Specified val- –
ues only
Data Registers –
Index Registers –
ters
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the file memory type specified in C does not exist.
ON if the settings in C are not within the specified range.
ON if the filename specified in D2 does not satisfy the
ON if the File Memory Operation Flag was ON.
ON if a constant was not specified for C (only for CS-
series CS1 CPU Units prior to V1).
ON if data specified for D1 is out of range (all CPU Units
except for CS-series CS1 CPU Units prior to V1).
ON if an illegal area is specified for S.
1111

File Write Error Flag A34308 ON when an error occurred when writing to the
file.
Flag because the file was write-protected or there
was insufficient free memory.
No File Flag A34311 ON when the specified directory does not exist
when writing a file.
cuted.
trol bit in memory.
Flag
When an FWRIT(701) instruction is executed,
the number of words or fields to be transferred
is written to these words. The value is decre-
mented by 1 as each word is transferred.
binary value.
Precautions The File Memory Operation Flag (A34313) is turned ON when FWRIT(701) is
executed. An error will occur and the instruction will not be executed if A34313
is already ON.
The File Write Impossible Flag (A34309) will be turned ON and the instruction
will not be executed if data could not be written because the file was write-pro-
tected or there was not enough free memory.
1112
The File Write Error Flag (A34308) will be turned ON and the instruction will
not be executed if the specified file is not the correct data type or the file data
has been corrupted.
Detected Flag (A34315) in a NO input condition as shown below to be sure
that the Memory Card has been detected.
Execution
FWRIT
C
Memory Card File Memory
Detected Flag Operation Flag D1
D2
S
The source data words starting at S are accessed and read during the periph-
eral servicing after FWRIT(701) is executed. If the source data is changed
before the file memory write processing is completed, the changed data may
be written to the file.
3-26-4 WRITE TEXT FILE: TWRIT(704)

Purpose Reads ASCII data from I/O memory and stores that data in the Memory Card
as a text file (writing a new file or appending a file). The data is stored in the
TXT format.
or later only.
Ladder Symbol
TWRIT
C C: Control word
S1 S1: Number of bytes to write
S2 S2: Directory and file name
S3 S3: Write data
S4 S4: Delimiter
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TWRIT(704)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TWRIT(704)

OK OK OK OK OK
Operand C: Control word

#0000: Append file.
#0001: Create new file or overwrite.
S1: Number of write bytes
Specifies the number of bytes to write in the range 0 to 255 decimal or 0000 to
00FF hexadecimal.
1113
S2: First directory/filename word

Specifies the first word of the words containing the file’s directory path and
filename. Input the path and filename in ASCII text.
• Directory name:
The directory name can be 1 to 65 characters long. If the name is less
than 65 characters, do not pad with spaces. Specify the absolute path
from the root directory’s \ (#5C) character.
• Filename:
Filename identifier: The identifier can be 1 to 8 characters long. If the
name is less than 8 characters, do not pad with spaces. Add a NUL char-
acter (#00) at the end of the filename. (The NUL character is not included
as one of the 8 characters.)
Filename extension: None
• Separate the directory name and filename with a \ (#5C) delimiter.
Note The words containing the directory path and filename (starting at S2)
must be in the same data area.
Store the character string beginning with the leftmost
S2 F1
S1+2
F2
byte in S2, in the order leftmost byte → rightmost byte
S2+1 F3 F4 and lower word address → higher word address. The di-
: :
S2+38 F73 F74 rectory name and filename can be up to 74 bytes long,
including the NULL (00 Hex) at the end of the filename.
S3: First write data word

Specifies the first word (I/O memory data area address) containing the data to
be written.
Note It is not necessary for all of the source words (starting at S3) to be in the same
data area. The data will be read in PLC memory address order and written as
a file.
S4: Delimiter character
Specifies the delimiter characters (up to 2 bytes) for the write data in ASCII. If
a delimiter is not required, specify #0000.
Up to 2 bytes can be specified. When 1 byte is being specified, set the right-
most byte to #00.
Typical delimiters (all hexadecimal):
#2C00: Comma (1 byte)
#0A00: Line feed (1 byte)
#0D0A: Carriage return/Line feed (2 bytes)
#0C00: New page (1 byte)
#0900: Tab (1 byte)
Area C S1 S2 S3 S4
1114
Area C S1 S2 S3 S4
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to --- #0000 to
#0001 #FFFF
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to 1–2048 to +2047 ,IR5
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description TWRIT(704) writes the number of bytes of data specified in S1, starting from
the word specified in S3, to a text file (filename.TXT) in the Memory Card with
the filename specified in S2.
A delimiter can be specified in S4 and attached to the end of the text file. The
created text file can be referenced later with a text editor.
Write data
S3 #3132 Characters: 12
S3+1 #3334 Characters: 34
Delimiter
S4 #2C00 Comma
Specified text file
1234,
Creating a New File

Set C = 0001 and specify a new filename to create a new file.
Specified text file
Write data No file
S3 #3536 Characters: 56 Create new
file (C: &1)
Delimiter
S4 #2C00 Comma
56,
Appending an Existing File

Set C = 0000 to append data to an existing file.
1115
Specified text file

1234,
Write data
Append file
(C: &0)
Delimiter
S4 #2C00 Comma
1234,56,
Overwriting an Existing File

Set C = 0001 and specify an existing filename to overwrite an existing file.
Specified text file
Write data 1234,
Overwrite
Delimiter (C: &1)
#2C00 Comma
S4
56,
Reference
During normal instruction execution processing, TWRIT(704) is used only to
start the writing of the file memory. The instruction execution times given
toward the end of this manual are thus the times required to start writing, not
to complete it.
Actual writing (transfer) is performed by the file access processing in periph-
eral servicing. Therefore, once TWRIT(704) has been executed, writing is
continuously executed even if the execution condition is OFF in following
cycles.
The time required to complete data transfer for TWRIT(704) will depend on
processing, and other conditions. As a guideline, if the cycle time is 10 ms and
the file is in the root directory, it will take about 440 ms (new file) or 260 ms
(existing file) to write 100 bytes, and about 450 ms (new file) or 270 ms s
(existing file) to write 255 bytes. These guideline values will vary widely
depending on the type of Memory Card being used and the number of files in
the Memory Card.
When transfer has been completed, the File Memory Operation Flag
ory instructions.
The source data is read from absolute PLC memory addresses in RAM, so
the entire block of data will be read even if the data spans two or more data
areas. For example, if the first source address is in the Work Area but the
amount of data exceeds the capacity of this area, TWRIT(704) will continue
reading data at the beginning of the next area (in this case, the Timer Area).
Refer to Appendix D in the CS/CJ-series Programmable Controllers Operation
Manual (W339) for a memory map showing the location of data areas in RAM.
When TWRIT(704) is executed, the “number of write bytes” specified in S1 is
written to A346 and A347 (Number of Data Items to Transfer) and this value is
decremented by 1 as each byte is transferred. The content of these words can
be checked to verify that the expected number of bytes were transferred.
1116
Data Format Store the data in the I/O memory area in order from leftmost byte → rightmost
byte and lower word address → higher word address, starting from the left-
most byte of S3.
When Writing the String 12345678
Directory Name and • Specify the directory name as the absolute path from the root directory (\).
Filename (S2) The root directory’s \ (#5C) delimiter must be entered. The directory name
can be up to 65 characters long. If there are fewer than 65 characters, it is
not necessary to add spaces after the directory name. Use \ (#5C) delim-
iters to separate directory levels. The allowed characters are “a to z”, “A to
Z”, and “0 to 9”, in ASCII.
• Set the filename as 1 to 8 ASCII characters, using only the “a to z”, “A to
Z”, and “0 to 9” characters. If there are fewer than 8 characters, it is not
necessary to add spaces after the filename. Always insert an NULL (#00)
character after the filename.
• The filename extension is fixed to “.TXT”, so it is not specified.
• Store the directory name and filename in ASCII and in order from leftmost
byte → rightmost byte and lower word address → higher word address,
starting from the leftmost byte of S2.
• If the specified directory does not exist, the No File Flag (A34311) will be
turned ON and the file will not be overwritten.
Example: Writing to Directory \ABC and Filename XYZ
S2 '\' 'A' S2 5C 41
S2+1 'B' 'C' S2+1 42 43 Saved in ASCII.
S2+2 '\' 'Y' S2+2 5C 5B
S2+3 'Y' 'Z' S2+3 59 5A
S2+4 NUL S2+4 00
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if there is no Memory Card.
ON if C is not within the specified range of 0000 or 0001.
ON if the filename specified at S2 does not meet the
ON if the File Memory Operation Flag is ON.
ON if the data area specified for S3 is an invalid area.

Memory Card Format A34307 ON when the Memory Card is not formatted
Error Flag or a formatting error has occurred.
File Write Error Flag A34308 ON when an error occurred when writing to
the file.
Flag because the file was write-protected or
there was insufficient free memory.
1117

No File Flag A34311 ON when the specified directory does not
exist when writing a file.
File Memory Operation A34313 ON for any of the following, otherwise OFF:
Flag • The CPU Unit has sent a command to
• FREAD(700), FWRIT(701), or
TWRIT(704) is being executed.
• The program is being overwritten using a
control bit in memory.
• A simple backup operation is being per-
formed.
Accessing File Flag A34314 ON when file data is actually being
accessed.
Memory Card Detected A34315 ON when a Memory Card has been
Flag detected.
OFF when a Memory Card could not be
detected.
Number of Data Items to A346 and The contents of these words indicate the
Transfer A347 status of data file transfers.
When an file write instruction is executed,
the number of bytes to be transferred is writ-
ten to these words. The value is decre-
mented by 1 as each byte is transferred.
A346 contains the rightmost 16 bits and
A347 contains the leftmost 16 bits of the 32-
bit binary value.
Note When another file memory related operation (file memory format, file copy, file
delete, etc.) is executed from the ladder program, send the file memory
related FINS command to the local CPU Unit with a CMND(490) instruction.
For details, refer to Section 5 File Memory Functions in the SYSMAC CS/CJ
Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W394).
Precautions The File Memory Operation Flag (A34313) is turned ON when TWRIT(704) is
executed. An error will occur and the instruction will not be executed if A34313
is already ON.
The File Write Impossible Flag (A34309) will be turned ON and the instruction
will not be executed if data could not be written because the file was write-pro-
tected or there was not enough free memory.
Detected Flag (A34315) in a NO input condition as shown in the example
below to be sure that the Memory Card has been detected.
Example This example records the daily production total (number of units produced) in
D00100 and D00101 in 8-digit hexadecimal. Every day at 23:00, the program
converts the daily production total to BCD format and appends the file
LOG.TXT in the Memory Card’s root directory.
1118
Display Instructions: DISPLAY MESSAGE: MSG(046) Section 3-27
Always ON Flag
ANDW
A352
#00FF
W0
= UP KEEP
W0 W1.0
W1.1 #0023
W1.0 A34315 A34313 Current date converted

STR4
A353 to ASCII
D300
STR4
A352
D302
MOV Puts 2 spaces between

#2020 the date and data.
D303
Daily production total
BCDL Converts the
D100 day’s production D100, D101 &12345 dec
W100 total to BCD.
STR8 Converts the day’s W100, W101 #000012345 BCD

W100 BCD production
D304 total to ASCII.
D304 #3030 hex
MOV Directory: Root
D305 #3031 hex
#5C4C Filename: LOG
D200 D306 #3233 hex
D307 #3435 hex
MOV
#4F47
D201
MOV
#0000
D202
TWRIT Stores the ASCII data as a text file.

#1
&16 Output file: LOG.TXT
D200 060329 00200000
D300 060330 00010000
#0D0A 060331 00012345
3-27 Display Instructions: DISPLAY MESSAGE: MSG(046)

Purpose Reads the specified sixteen words of extended ASCII and displays the mes-
sage on a Peripheral Device such as a Programming Console.
Ladder Symbol
MSG(046)
N N: Message number
M M: First message word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MSG(046)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MSG(046)
1119

OK OK OK OK
Operands N: Message number

The message number must be 0000 to 0007 hexadecimal (or 0 to 7 decimal).
M: First message word
When displaying a message, M specifies the address of the first of the words
containing the ASCII message. When clearing a message, M can be any
hexadecimal constant (0000 through FFFF).
Area N M
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #0007 (binary) or #0000 to #FFFF (binary)
&0 to &7
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description When the execution condition is ON, MSG(046) registers the 16 words of
ASCII data (up to 32 characters including the null character) from M to M+15
for the message number specified by N. Once a message has been regis-
tered, a Programming Console can be connected and the message will be
displayed after any error messages that have been generated.
After a message has been registered, the message display can be changed
by overwriting the message in the message storage area.
To clear a message that has been registered, execute MSG(046) with S set to
the message number of the message you want to clear and N set to a con-
stant (0000 to FFFF).
1120
A message registered during program execution will be retained even if pro-

gram execution is stopped, but all messages will be cleared when the pro-
gram is executed again.
Manual (W341) for a table showing extended ASCII.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the content of S is not 0000 to 0007 hexadecimal.
Precautions Registered messages are updated each time MSG(046) is executed.

All message characters after the null character (00) are converted to spaces
in the Programming Console display.
The character stored in the leftmost byte is displayed before the character in
the rightmost byte.
An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if N is not between 0 and 7.
Examples The following diagram shows how 16 words of hexadecimal data are con-
verted to a message displayed on the Programming Console.
Programming Console display
N 4
N+1 4
16 words MSG
N+2 4
(32 characters) A B C D E F
N+15 B
16 characters × 2 lines
When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, the 16 words of data in
D00100 through D00115 are read as the 32 characters of ASCII data for mes-
sage number 7 and displayed at the Peripheral device.
N
M
M: 4D 41 16 characters × 2 lines max.

54 45 Reads ASCII
data up to 00.
52 49 MSG
41 4C MATERIAL SHORT
20 53
48 4F Spaces
52 54
D00107
Leave out spaces.
(Values ignored)
D00115
1121
Clock Instructions Section 3-28
ASCII
Four leftmost bits
SP
Four rightmost bits
3-28 Clock Instructions

This section describes instructions used with the system clock.
CALENDAR ADD CADD 730 1122
CALENDAR SUBTRACT CSUB 731 1126
HOURS TO SECONDS SEC 065 1129
SECONDS TO HOURS HMS 066 1131
CLOCK ADJUSTMENT DATE 735 1134
3-28-1 CALENDAR ADD: CADD(730)

Purpose Adds time to the calendar data in the specified words.
Ladder Symbol
CADD(730)
C C: First calendar word
T T: First time word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CADD(730)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @CADD(730)
OK OK OK OK
1122
Operands C through C+2: Calendar Data

Set the calendar data in C through C+2 as shown in the following diagram.
C through C+2 must be in the same data area.
15 8 7 0
C
15 8 7 0
C+1
Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)
15 8 7 0
C+2
T and T+1: Time Data

Set the time data in T and T+1 as shown in the following diagram. T and T+1
15 8 7 0
T
15 0
T+1
Hours: 0000 to 9999 (BCD)
1123
R through R+2: Result Data

R through R+2 contain the result of the addition. R through R+2 must be in the
same data area.
15 8 7 0
R
15 8 7 0
R+1
Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)
15 8 7 0
R+2
Area C T R
CIO 6141 CIO 6142 CIO 6141
D32765 D32766 D32765
E32765 E32766 E32765
En_32765 En_32766 3En_2765
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@En_00000 to @En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
only
Data Registers ---
1124
Area C T R
Index Registers –
,IR005+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description CADD(730) adds the calendar data (words C through C+2) to the time data
(words T and T+1) and outputs the resulting calendar data to R through R+2.
C Minutes Seconds
C+1 Day Hour
C+2 Year Month
T Minutes Seconds
T+1 Hours
R Minutes Seconds
R+1 Day Hour
R+2 Year Month
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the calendar data in C through C+2 is not within the
specified ranges.
ON if the time data in T and T+1 is not within the specified
ranges.
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, the calendar data in
D00100 through D00102 (year, month, day, hour, minutes, seconds) is added
to the time data in D00200 and D00201 (hours, minutes, seconds) and the
result is output to D00300 through D00302.
C
T C:
18:30:20
R 99 12 10 December, 1999
T: 10 minutes, 15 seconds
06 00 600 hours
R: 18:40:35
04 18
00 01 4 January, 2000
1125
3-28-2 CALENDAR SUBTRACT: CSUB(731)

Purpose Subtracts time from the calendar data in the specified words.
Ladder Symbol
CSUB(731)
C C: First calendar word
T T: First time word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CSUB(731)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @CSUB(731)

OK OK OK OK
Operands C through C+2: Calendar Data

Set the calendar data in C through C+2 as shown in the following diagram.
C through C+2 must be in the same data area.
15 8 7 0
C
15 8 7 0
C+1
Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)
15 8 7 0
C+2
1126
T and T+1: Time Data

Set the time data in T and T+1 as shown in the following diagram. T and T+1
15 8 7 0
T
15 0
T+1
R through R+2: Result Data

R through R+2 contain the result of the addition. R through R+2 must be in the
same data area.
15 8 7 0
R
15 8 7 0
R+1
Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)
15 8 7 0
R+2
Area C T R
CIO 6141 CIO 6142 CIO 6141
D32765 D32766 D32765
1127
Area C T R
E32765 E32766 E32765
En_32765 En_32766 3En_2765
(n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C) (n = 0 to C)
@En_00000 to @En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
only
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR005+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description CSUB(731) subtracts the time data (words T and T+1) from the calendar data
(words C through C+2) to and outputs the resulting calendar data to R
through R+2.
C Minutes Seconds
C+1 Day Hour
C+2 Year Month
T Minutes Seconds
T+1 Hours
R Minutes Seconds
R+1 Day Hour
R+2 Year Month
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the calendar data in C through C+2 is not within the
specified ranges.
ON if the time data in T and T+1 is not within the specified
ranges.
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, the time data in
D00200 and D00201 (hours, minutes, seconds) is subtracted from the calen-
dar data in D00100 through D00102 (year, month, day, hour, minutes, sec-
onds) and the result is output to D00300 through D00302.
1128
C: 18:30:20
C 10 July, 1998
T
R
T:
50 hours, 10 minutes, 15 seconds
R: 16:20:05
8 July, 1998
3-28-3 HOURS TO SECONDS: SEC(065)

Purpose Converts time data in hours/minutes/seconds format to an equivalent time in
seconds only.
Ladder Symbol
SEC(065)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition SEC(065)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @SEC(065)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S and S+1: Source Data

Set the hours/minutes/seconds source data in S and S+1, as shown in the fol-
lowing diagram. S and S+1 must be in the same data area.
15 8 7 0
S
15 0
S+1
1129
D and D+1: Result Data

D and D+1 contain the result data in seconds-only format. D and D+1 must be
15 0
D
Rightmost 4 digits
15 0
D+1
Leftmost 4 digits
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
1130
Description SEC(065) converts the 8-digit BCD hours/minutes/seconds data in S and S+1
to 8-digit BCD seconds-only data and outputs the result to D and D+1.
Minutes Seconds
Hours
Seconds
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the minutes data in S (bits 08 to 15) is not BCD and in
the range 00 to 59.
ON if the seconds data in S (bits 00 to 07) is not BCD and in
the range 00 to 59.
Equals Flag = ON if the content of D is 0000 after the operation.
Precautions The maximum value for the source data is 9,999 hours, 59 minutes, and 59
seconds (35,999,999 seconds).
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, the hours/minutes/sec-
onds data in D00200 and D00201 (34 hours, 17 minutes, and 36 seconds) is
converted to seconds-only data and the result is output to D00100 and
D00101.
17 minutes, 36 seconds
34 hours
Hours/minutes/seconds → seconds
123,456 seconds
3-28-4 SECONDS TO HOURS: HMS(066)

Purpose Converts seconds data to an equivalent time in hours/minutes/seconds for-
mat.
Ladder Symbol
HMS(066)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition HMS(066)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @HMS(066)
1131

OK OK OK OK
Operands S and S+1: Source Data

Set the seconds source data in S and S+1, as shown in the following diagram.
S and S+1 must be in the same data area.
15 0
S
Rightmost 4 digits
15 0
S+1
Leftmost 4 digits
D and D+1: Result Data

D and D+1 contain the result data in hours/minutes/seconds format. D and
D+1 must be in the same data area.
15 8 7 0
D
15 0
D+1
Area S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
1132
Area S D
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants 00000000 to 35999999 ---
(BCD)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description HMS(066) converts the 8-digit BCD seconds-only data in S and S+1 to 8-digit
BCD hours/minutes/seconds data and outputs the result to D and D+1.
Seconds
Minutes Seconds
Hours
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the seconds data in S and S+1 is not BCD and in the
range 0 to 35,999,999.
Equals Flag = ON if the content of D is 0000 after the operation.
Precautions The maximum value for the source data is 35,999,999 seconds (9,999 hours,
59 minutes, and 59 seconds).
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, the seconds data in
D00100 and D00101 (123,456 seconds) is converted to hours/minutes/sec-
onds data and the result is output to D00200 and D00201.
S: 123,456 seconds
Seconds → Hours/minutes/seconds
D: 17 minutes, 36 seconds
34 hours
1133
3-28-5 CLOCK ADJUSTMENT: DATE(735)

Purpose Changes the internal clock setting to the setting in the specified source words.
Note The internal clock setting can also be changed from a Peripheral Device or
the CLOCK WRITE FINS command (0702).
Ladder Symbol
DATE(735)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DATE(735)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DATE(735)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S through S+3: New Clock Setting

Set the new clock setting in S through S+3 as shown in the following diagram.
S through S+3 must be in the same data area.
15 8 7 0
S
15 8 7 0
S+1
Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)
15 8 7 0
S+2
15 8 7 0
S+3
Day of the week: 00 = Sunday

01 = Monday
Always set to 00. 02 = Tuesday
03 = Wednesday
04 = Thursday
05 = Friday
06 = Saturday
1134
The following table shows the structure of the Calendar/Clock Area.

Addresses Contents
A35100 to A35107 Second (00 to 59, BCD)
A35108 to A35115 Minute (00 to 59, BCD)
A35200 to A35207 Hour (00 to 23, BCD)
A35208 to A35215 Day of month (01 to 31, BCD)
A35300 to A35307 Month (01 to 12, BCD)
A35308 to A35315 Year (00 to 99, BCD)
A35400 to A35407 Day of week (00 to 06 = Sunday to Saturday, hexadecimal)
A35408 to A35415 Always set to 00.
Area S
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description DATE(735) changes the internal clock setting according to the clock data in
the four source words. The new internal clock setting is immediately reflected
in the Calendar/Clock Area (A351 to A354).
CPU Unit
Internal clock
Minutes Seconds
New setting Day Hour
Year Month
00 Day of week
1135
Debugging Instructions Section 3-29
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the new clock setting in S through S+3 is not within
the specified range.
Precautions An error will not be generated even if the internal clock is set to a non-existent
date (such as November 31).
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, the internal clock is set
to 20:15:30 on Thursday, October 9, 1998.
S:
Minute Second
Day of Hour
the month
Year Month
Always Day of the week

set to
00.
3-29 Debugging Instructions

3-29-1 Trace Memory Sampling: TRSM(045)
Purpose When TRSM(045) is executed, the status of a preselected bit or word is sam-
pled and stored in Trace Memory. TRSM(045) can be used anywhere in the
program, any number of times.
Ladder Symbol
TRSM(045)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle TRSM(045)

OK OK OK OK
1136
Description Before TRSM(045) is executed, the bit or word to be traced must be specified
with a Peripheral Device. Each time that TRSM(045) is executed, the current
value of the specified bit or word is sampled and recorded in order in Trace
Memory. The trace ends when the Trace Memory is full. The contents of Trace
Memory can be monitored from a Peripheral Device when necessary.
PC data area
TRSM(045) executed.
Specified bit or word
Data sampling
Trace Memory
Tracing ends when

Trace Memory is full.
This instruction only indicates when the specified data will be sampled. All
other settings and data trace operations are set with a Peripheral Device. The
other two ways to control data sampling are sampling at the end of each cycle
and sampling at a specified interval (independent of the cycle time).
TRSM(045) does not require an execution condition and is always executed
as if it had an ON execution condition. Connect TRSM(045) directly to the left
bus bar.
Use TRSM(045) to sample the value of the specified bit or word at the point in
the program when the instruction’s execution condition is ON. If the instruc-
tion’s execution condition is ON every cycle, the specified bit or word’s value
will be stored in Trace Memory every cycle.
It is possible to incorporate two or more TRSM(045) instructions in a program.
In this case, the value of the same specified bit or word will be stored in Trace
Memory each time that one of the TRSM(045) instructions is executed.
Use a Peripheral Device to specify
which address will be traced.
Data from
address m is
stored in
Trace
Memory.
Data from
address m is
stored in
Trace Trace Memory
Memory.
Data stored every cycle.
Note Refer to the Peripheral Device’s Operation Manual for details on data tracing.
1137
The data-tracing operations performed with the Peripheral Device are summa-
rized in the following list.
1,2,3... 1. Set the following parameters with the Peripheral Device.

a) Set the address of the bit or word to be traced.
b) Set the trigger condition. One of the three following conditions can con-
trol when data stored into Trace Memory is valid.
i) The Trace Start Bit goes from OFF to ON.
ii) A specified bit goes from OFF to ON.
iii) The value of a specified word matches the set value.
c) Set the sampling interval to “TRSM” for sampling at the execution of
TRSM(045) in the program.
d) Set the delay.
2. When the Sampling Start Bit is turned from OFF to ON with the Peripheral
Device, the specified data will begin being sampled each time that
TRSM(045) is executed and the sampled data will be stored in Trace Mem-
ory. The Trace Busy Flag (A50813) will be turned ON at the same time.
3. When the trigger condition (Trace Start Bit ON, specified bit ON, or value
of specified word matching set value) is met, the sampled data will be valid
beginning with the next sample plus or minus the number of samples set
with the delay setting. The Trace Trigger Monitor Flag (A50811) will be
turned ON at the same time.
4. The trace will end when TRSM(045) has been executed enough times to
fill the Trace Memory. When the trace ends, the Trace Completed Flag
(A50812) will be turned ON and the Trace Busy Flag (A50813) will be
turned OFF.
5. Read the contents of Trace Memory with the Peripheral Device.
The following table shows relevant bits and flags in the Auxiliary Area. Only
A50814 and A50815 are meant to be controlled by the user, and A00815 must
not be turned ON from the program, i.e., it must be turned ON only from a
Peripheral Device.
Trace Trigger Monitor A50811 This flag is turned ON when the trigger condition
Flag has been established with the Trace Start Bit. It is
turned OFF when sampling is started for the next
trace (by the Sampling Start Bit).
Trace Completed A50812 This flag is turned ON when trace samples have
Flag filled the Trace Memory. It is turned OFF the next
time that the Sampling Start Bit goes from OFF to
ON.
Trace Busy Flag A50813 This flag is turned ON when the Sampling Start
Bit goes from OFF to ON. It is turned OFF when
the trace is completed.
1138

Trace Start Bit A50814 The trace trigger conditions are established when
this bit is turned from OFF to ON. Samples will be
recorded after the specified delay (positive delay)
or the specified number of existing samples will
be valid (negative delay).
Sampling Start Bit A50815 When this bit is turned from OFF to ON from a
Peripheral Device, data samples will start being
stored in Trace Memory with one of the following
three methods used to determine sampling:
1) Periodic sampling (10 to 2,550 ms intervals)
2) Sampling at TRSM(045) execution
3) Sampling at the end of each cycle
This bit must be turned ON and OFF from a
Peripheral Device.
Precautions TRSM(045) is processed as NOP(000) when data tracing is not being per-
formed or when the sampling interval set in the parameters with a Peripheral
Device is not set to sample on TRSM(045) instruction execution.
Do not turn the Sampling Start Bit (A50815) ON or OFF from the program.
This bit must be turned ON and OFF from a Peripheral Device.
Example The following example shows the overall data trace operation.
Operated from Peripheral Device

(Sampling Start Bit: A50815)
Trace Start Bit: A50814
Trace Busy Flag: A50813
Trace Completed Flag: A50812
Trace Trigger Monitor Flag: A50811

Delay Valid
setting samples Trace ends when
Trace Memory is full.
Sampling
: Execution of TRSM(045)
Example: word data
Trace Memory
See note.
Valid from here on
Note Trace Memory has a ring structure. Data is stored to the end of the Trace
Memory area and then wraps to the beginning of the area, ending just before
the first valid data sample.
1139
Failure Diagnosis Instructions Section 3-30
3-30 Failure Diagnosis Instructions

This section describes instructions used to define and handle errors.
FAILURE ALARM FAL 006 1140
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM FALS 007 1148
FAILURE POINT DETECTION FPD 269 1156
3-30-1 FAILURE ALARM: FAL(006)

Purpose Generates or clears user-defined non-fatal errors. Non-fatal errors do not stop
PLC operation.
With CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units, FAL(006) can also be used to
generate non-fatal system errors.
Ladder Symbol • Generating or Clearing User-defined Non-fatal Errors
FAL(006)
N N: FAL number
S S: First message word or
constant (0000 to FFFF)
• Generating Non-fatal System Errors (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D

Only)
FAL(006)
N N: FAL number (value in A529)

S S: First word containing the
error code and error details
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FAL(006)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FAL(006)

OK OK OK OK
Operands The function of the operands when FAL(006) is used to generate/clear user
defined errors is slightly different from the function when FAL(006) is used to
generate system errors (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units only).
1140
Generating or Clearing User-defined Non-fatal Errors

The following table shows the function of the operands.
Note The value of operand N must be different from the content of A529
(the system-generated FAL/FALS number).
N S Function
0 #0001 to #01FF Clears the non-fatal error with the correspond-
ing FAL number.
#FFFF Clears all non-fatal errors.
Other* Clears the most serious non-fatal error.
1 to 511 #0000 to #FFFF Generates a non-fatal error with the corre-
(These FAL num- sponding FAL number (no message).
bers are shared Word address Generates a non-fatal error with the corre-
with FALS num- sponding FAL number.
bers.) The 16-character ASCII message contained in
S through S+7 will be displayed on the Pro-
gramming Device.
Note *Other settings would be constants #0200 through #FFFE or a word address.
Generating Non-fatal System Errors (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D Only)
Note The value of operand N must be the same as the content of A529
Operand Function
N 1 to 511 (These FAL numbers are shared with FALS numbers.)
S Error code that will be generated. (See Description below.)
S+1 Error details code that will be generated. (See Description below.)
Area N S
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants 0 to 511 #0000 to #FFFF
(binary)
Data Registers ---
1141
Area N S
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to
+2047 ,IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description The operation of FAL(006) depends on the value of N. Set N to 0000 to clear
an error and set N to 0001 to 01FF to generate an error. A system error will be
generated if the value of N equals the content of A529 (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M,
and CS1D CPU Units only).
Generating Non-fatal User-defined Errors
When FAL(006) is executed with N set to an FAL number (&1 to &511) that is
not equal to the content of A529 (the system-generated FAL/FALS number), a
non-fatal error will be generated with that FAL number and the following pro-
cessing will be performed:
1,2,3... 1. The FAL Error Flag (A40215) will be turned ON. (PLC operation will con-
tinue.)
2. The Executed FAL Number Flag will be turned ON for the corresponding
FAL number. Flags A36001 to A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 0001
to 01FF (1 to 511).
3. The error code will be written to A400. Error codes 4101 to 42FF corre-
spond to FAL numbers 0001 to 01FF (1 to 511).
Note If a fatal error or a more serious non-fatal error occurs at the same
time as the FAL(006) instruction, the more serious error’s error code
will be written to A400.
4. The error code and the time that the error occurred will be written to the
Error Log Area (A100 through A199).
Note The error record will not be written to the Error Log Area if the Don’t
register FAL to error log Option in the PLC Setup is selected. (This
option is supported only by the CS1-H, CCJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D
CPU Units.)
5. The ERR Indicator on the CPU Unit will flash.
6. If a word address has been specified in S, the message beginning at S will
be registered (displayed on the Programming Device).
FAL Error Flag ON
Execution of Corresponding Executed FAL Number Flag ON
FAL(006) Error code written to A400
generates a
non-fatal er- Error code and time written to Error Log Area
ror with FAL
number N. ERR Indicator flashes
Message displayed on
Programming Console
The following table shows the error codes and FAL Error Flags for FAL(006).
FAL number FAL error codes Executed FAL Number Flags
1 to 511 decimal 4101 to 42FF A36001 to A39115
1142
Displaying Messages with Non-fatal User-defined Errors

If S is a word address and an ASCII message has been stored at S, that mes-
sage will be displayed at the Peripheral Device when FAL(006) is executed. (If
a message is not required, set S to a constant.)
The message beginning at S will be registered when FAL(006) is executed.
Once the message is registered, it will be displayed when a Programming
Console is connected.
An ASCII message up to 16 characters long can be stored in S through S+7.
The leftmost (most significant) byte in each word is displayed first.
The end code for the message is the null character (00 hexadecimal). All 16
characters in words S to S+7 will be displayed if the null character is omitted.
If the contents of the words containing the message are changed after
FAL(006) is executed, the message will change accordingly.
When FAL(006) is executed with N set to an FAL number (&1 to &511) that is
equal to the content of A529 (the system-generated FAL/FALS number), a
non-fatal error will be generated with the error code and error details code
specified in S and S+1. The following processing will be performed at the
same time:
Error code written to A400
Execution of FAL(006)
FAL generates a non-fatal Error code and time written to Error Log Area
system error with the
N error code/details The corresponding Auxiliary Area Flags are set
S specified in S and based on the error code and error details.
S+1.
ERR Indicator flashes.
Matching
values
A529CH N
Programming Console.
S Error code
S+1 Error details
1,2,3... 1. The specified error code will be written to A400.

3. The appropriate Auxiliary Area Flags are set based on the error code and
error details.
4. The ERR Indicator on the CPU Unit will flash and PLC operation will con-
tinue.
5. The non-fatal error message for the specified system error will be dis-
played on the Programming Console.
Note 1. FAL(006) can be used to generate non-fatal errors from the system when
debugging the program. For example, a system error can be generated in-
tentionally to check whether or not error messages are being displayed
properly at an interface such as a Programmable Terminal (PT).
2. The value of A529 (the system-generated FAL/FALS number) is a dummy
FAL number (FAL, FALS, and FPD numbers are shared.) used when a
non-fatal error is generated intentionally by the system. This number is a
dummy FAL number, so it does not change the status of the Executed FAL
Number Flags (A36001 to A39115) or the error code.
When it is necessary to generate two or more system errors (fatal and/or
non-fatal errors), different errors can be generated by executing the FAL/
1143
FALS/FPD instructions more than once with the same values in A529 and
N, but different values in S and S+1.
3. If a more serious error (including a system-generated fatal error or
FALS(007) error) occurs at the same time as the FAL(006) instruction, the
more serious error’s error code will be written to A400.
4. To clear a system error generated by FAL(006), turn the PLC OFF and then
ON again. The PLC can be kept ON, but the same processing will be re-
quired to clear the error as if the specified error had actually occurred.
The following table shows how to specify error codes and error details in S
and S+1.
Error name S S+1
Interrupt Task Error 008B hex • Bit 15 OFF: Interrupt task error
Bits 00 to 14: Task number of interrupt task
where error occurred.
• Bit 15 ON: Interrupt task execution conflicted
with Special I/O Unit refreshing
Bits 00 to 14: Unit number of Special I/O Unit
with refreshing conflict
Basic I/O Error 009A hex Rack location of Unit where error occurred
• Bits 08 to 15: Rack number (binary) of Rack
where the affected Unit is mounted
• Bits 00 to 07: Slot number (binary) of slot
where the affected Unit is mounted
PLC Setup Error 009B hex PLC Setup Error Location
I/O Table Verification 00E7 hex --- (not fixed)
Error
Non-fatal Inner 02F0 hex Inner Board Error Information
Board Error • Bits 00 to 03: Invalid
• Bits 04 to 15: Error defined by the Inner Board
CS1 CPU Bus Unit 0200 hex CS1 CPU Bus Unit’s unit number:
Error 0000 to 000F hex
Special I/O Unit 0300 hex Special I/O Unit’s unit number:0000 to 005F hex
Error or 00FF hex (unit number undetermined)
SYSMAC BUS Error 00A0 hex SYSMAC BUS Master Unit’s unit number:
0000 or 0001 hex
Battery Error 00F7 hex --- (not fixed)
CS1 CPU Bus Unit 0400 hex CS1 CPU Bus Unit’s unit number:
Setup Error 0000 to 000F hex
Special I/O Unit 0500 hex Special I/O Unit’s unit number:0000 to 005F hex
Setup Error
Disabling Error Log Entries of User-defined Errors (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M,

or CS1D Only)
Normally when FAL(006) generates a user-defined error, the error code and
the time that the error occurred are written to the Error Log Area (A100
through A199). It is possible to set the PLC Setup so that user-defined errors
generated by FAL(006) are not recorded in the Error Log.
Even though the error will not be recorded in the Error Log, the FAL Error Flag
(40215) will be turned ON, the corresponding flag in the Executed FAL Num-
ber Flags (A36001 to A39115) will be turned ON, and the error code will be
written to A400.
Disable Error Log entries for user-defined FAL(006) errors when you want to
record only the system-generated errors. For example, this function is useful
during debugging if the FAL(006) instructions are used in several applications
and the Error Log is becoming full of user-defined FAL(006) errors.
1144
The following screen capture shows the PLC Setup setting from the CX-Pro-
grammer.
The following table shows the PLC Setup setting from the Programming Con-
sole.
Item Setting
Programming Console Word 129
setting address Bit 15
Name FAL Error Log Registration
Settings 0: Record FAL Errors in Error Log.
1: Do not record FAL Errors in Error Log.
Default setting 0: Record FAL Errors in Error Log.
Times that PLC Setup set- Every cycle (when an FAL Error occurs)
ting is read
Even if PLC Setup word 129 bit 15 is set to 1 (Do not record FAL Errors in
Error Log.), the following errors will be recorded:
• Fatal errors generated by FALS(007)
• Non-fatal errors from the system
• Fatal errors from the system
• Non-fatal errors from the system generated intentionally with FAL(006) or
FPD(269)
• Fatal errors from the system generated intentionally with FALS(007)
Clearing Non-fatal Errors without a Programming Device
1. Clearing User-defined Non-fatal Errors
When FAL(006) is executed with N set to 0, non-fatal errors can be cleared.
The value of S will determine the processing, as shown in the following ta-
ble.
S Process
&1 to &511 (0001 to 01FF hex) The FAL error of the specified number will be
cleared.
FFFF hex All non-fatal errors (including system errors) will
be cleared.
0200 to FFFE hex or word The most serious non-fatal error (even if it is a
specification non-fatal system error) that has occurred.
When more than one FAL error has occurred,
the FAL error with the smallest FAL number will
be cleared.
2. Clearing Non-fatal System Errors (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU
Units Only)
There are two ways to clear non-fatal system errors generated with
FAL(006).
• Turn the PLC OFF and then ON again.
1145
• When keeping the PLC ON, the system error must be cleared as if the
specified error had actually occurred.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the specified range of 0 to 511 deci-
mal.
ON if a non-fatal system error is being generated (CS1-H/
CJ1-H/CJ1M/CS1D Only), but the specified error code or
error details code is incorrect.
The following tables show relevant words and flags in the Auxiliary Area.
• Auxiliary Area Words/Flags for User-defined Errors Only
FAL Error Flag A40215 ON when an error is generated with
FAL(006).
Executed FAL Num- A36001 to When an error is generated with FAL(006),
ber Flags A39115 the corresponding flag will be turned ON.
Flags A36001 to A39115 correspond to FAL
numbers 0001 to 01FF.
• Auxiliary Area Words/Flags for System Errors Only (CS1-H, CJ1-H,

CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units Only)
System-generated A529 A dummy FAL/FALS number is used when a
FAL/FALS number system error is generated with FAL(006). Set
the same dummy FAL/FALS number in this
word (0001 to 01FF hex, 1 to 511 decimal).
• Auxiliary Area Words/Flags for both User-defined and System Errors

Error Log Area A100 to The Error Log Area contains the error codes
A199 and time/date of occurrence for the most
recent 20 errors, including errors generated
by FAL(006).
Error code A400 When an error occurs its error code is stored
in A400. The error codes for FAL numbers
0001 to 01FF are 4101 to 42FF, respectively.
If two or more errors occur simultaneously,
the error code of the most serious error will
be stored in A400.
Precautions N must between 0000 and 01FF. An error will occur and the Error Flag will be
turned ON if N is outside of the specified range.
Examples Generating a Non-fatal Error

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FAL(006) will generate a
non-fatal error with FAL number 31 and execute the following processes.
1,2,3... 1. The FAL Error Flag (A40215) will be turned ON.

2. The corresponding Executed FAL Number Flag (A36114) will be turned
ON.
3. The corresponding error code (411F) will be written to A400.
Note If two or more errors occur at the same time, the error code of the
most serious error (with the highest error code) will be stored in
A400.
1146
4. The error code and the time/date that the error occurred will be written to
the Error Log Area (A100 through A199).
6. The ASCII message in D00100 to D00107 will be displayed at the Periph-
eral Device. (If a message is not required, specify a constant for S.)
31
M M: 4C 4F
57 20
56 4F
MESSAGE
4C 54 LOW VOLTAGE
41 47
45 00
Clearing a Particular Non-fatal Error

When CIO 000001 is ON in the following example, FAL(006) will clear the
non-fatal error with FAL number 31, turn OFF the corresponding Executed
FAL Number Flag (A36114), and turn OFF the FAL Error Flag (A40215).
000001
0 Set N to 0 to clear errors.

M #001F Set M to the desired FAL
number (031(001F)).
Clearing All Non-fatal Errors

When CIO 000002 is ON in the following example, FAL(006) will clear all of
the non-fatal errors, turn OFF the Executed FAL Number Flags (A36001 to
A39115), and turn OFF the FAL Error Flag (A40215).
000002

M Set M to FFFF to clear all non-fatal errors
(both FAL(006) and system errors).
Clearing the Most Serious Non-fatal Error

When CIO 000003 is ON in the following example, FAL(006) will clear the
most serious non-fatal error that has occurred and reset the error code in
A400. If the cleared error was originally generated by FAL(006), the corre-
sponding Executed FAL Number Flag and the FAL Error Flag (A40215) will be
turned OFF.
000003

M #0000 Set M to 0000, another constant between
0200 and FFFE, or a word address to
clear the most serious non-fatal error.
(In this case, M is set to 0000.)
Generating a Non-fatal System Error (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D

Only)
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FAL(006) will generate a
CPU Bus Unit Setup Error for unit number 1. In this case, dummy FAL number
10 is used and the corresponding value (000A hex) is stored in A529.
1147
1,2,3... 1. The specified error code (0400) will be written to A400 if it is the most se-
rious error.
3. The CPU Bus Unit Setup Error Flag (A40203) and CPU Bus Unit Setup Er-
ror Flag for unit number 1 (A42701) will be turned ON.
4. The CPU Unit’s ERR Indicator will flash.
5. A message (CPU BU ST ERR 01) will be displayed at the Programming
Console indicating that an error has occurred with CPU Bus Unit 1.
000000
MOV
#000A
A529
FAL
N 10
S D00200
Matching
values
A529CH 000A
Error code: 0400 (CPU Bus Unit Setup Error)

S: D00200 0400
D00201 0001 Error unit number: 1
3-30-2 SEVERE FAILURE ALARM: FALS(007)

Purpose Generates user-defined fatal errors. Fatal errors stop PLC operation.
With CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units, FALS(007) can also be
used to generate fatal system errors.
Ladder Symbol • Generating User-defined Fatal Errors
FALS(007)
N N: FALS number
S S: First message word or
constant (0000 to FFFF)
• Generating Fatal System Errors (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D Only)
FALS(007)
N N: FALS number (value in A529)

S S: First word containing the error
code and error details
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FALS(007)
1148

OK OK OK OK
Operands Generating User-defined Fatal Errors

Note The value of operand N must be different from the content of A529
Operand Function
N 1 to 511 (These FALS numbers are shared with FAL numbers.)
S Specifies the first of eight words containing an ASCII message to be
displayed on the Programming Device.
Specify a constant (0000 to FFFF) if a message is not required.
Generating Fatal Errors from the System (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CS1D
Only)
Note The value of operand N must be the same as the content of A529
Operand Function
N 1 to 511 (These FALS numbers are shared with FAL numbers.)
S Error code that will be generated. (See Description below.)
S+1 Error details code that will be generated. (See Description below.)
Area N S
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Specified val- #0000 to #FFFF
ues only (binary)
Data Registers ---
1149
Area N S
Index Registers ---
using Index Registers –2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to +2047
,IR15
,IR+(++)0 to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description FALS(007) generates a fatal error. In CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU
Units, FALS(007) can also be used to generate fatal system errors as well as
fatal user-defined errors. (A system error will be generated if the value of N
equals the content of A529.)
Generating Fatal User-defined Errors
When FALS(007) is executed with N set to an FALS number (1 to 511) that is
not equal to the content of A529 (the system-generated FAL/FALS number), a
fatal error will be generated with that FALS number and the following process-
ing will be performed:
1,2,3... 1. The FALS Error Flag (A40106) will be turned ON. (PLC operation will stop.)
2. The error code will be written to A400. Error codes C101 to C2FF corre-
spond to FALS numbers 0001 to 01FF (1 to 511).
Note If an error more serious than the FALS(007) instruction (one with a
higher error code) has occurred, A400 will contain the more serious
error’s error code.
4. The ERR Indicator on the CPU Unit will be lit.
5. If a word address has been specified in S, the ASCII message beginning
at S will be registered (displayed on the Peripheral Device).
FALS Error Flag ON
Execution of Error code written to A400
FALS(007) Error code and time/date written to Error Log Area
generates a
fatal error
with FALS ERR Indicator lit
number N.
Programming Console
The following table shows the error codes for FALS(007).

FALS number FALS error codes
1 to 511 C101 TO C2FF
Note The input method for the FALS number, N, is different for the CX-Programmer
and a Programming Console. Input #1 to #511 on the CX-Programmer and
input 001 to 511 on a Programming Console.
Displaying Messages with Fatal User-defined Errors
If S is a word address, the ASCII message beginning at S will be displayed at
the Programming Device when FALS(007) is executed. (If a message is not
required, set S to a constant.)
1150
The message beginning at S will be registered when FALS(007) is executed.

Once the message is registered, it will be displayed when a Programming
Console is connected.
An ASCII message up to 16 characters long can be stored in S through S+7.
The leftmost (most significant) byte in each word is displayed first.
The end code for the message is the null character (00 hexadecimal). All 16
If the contents of the words containing the message are changed after
FALS(007) is executed, the message will change accordingly.
Error code written to A400
Execution of FALS(007)
FALS generates a fatal system Error code and time written to Error Log Area
N
error with the error
code/details specified in The corresponding Auxiliary Area Flags are set
S S and S+1. based on the error code and error details.
ERR Indicator flashes.
Matching
values
A529CH N
Programming Console.
S Error code
S+1 Error details
When FALS(007) is executed with N set to an FAL number (1 to 511) that is

equal to the content of A529 (the system-generated FAL/FALS number), a
fatal error will be generated with the error code and error details code speci-
fied in S and S+1. The following processing will be performed at the same
time:
1,2,3... 1. The specified error code will be written to A400.

3. The appropriate Auxiliary Area Flags are set based on the error code and
error details.
4. The ERR Indicator on the CPU Unit will light and PLC operation will be
stopped.
5. The fatal error message for the specified system error will be displayed on
the Programming Console.
Note 1. The value of A529 (the system-generated FAL/FALS number) is a dummy

FAL number (FAL, FALS, and FPD numbers are shared.) used when a
non-fatal error is generated intentionally by the system. This number is a
dummy FAL number, so it is not reflected in the error code.
When it is necessary to generate two or more system errors, different er-
rors can be generated by executing the FAL/FALS/FPD instructions more
than once with the same values in A529 and N, but different values in S
and S+1.
2. If a more serious error (including a system-generated fatal error or another
FALS(007) error) occurs at the same time as the FALS(007) instruction,
the more serious error’s error code will be written to A400.
3. To clear a system error generated by FALS(007), turn the PLC OFF and
then ON again. The PLC can be kept ON, but the same processing will be
required to clear the error as if the specified error had actually occurred.
Refer to information on troubleshooting in the CS Series or CJ Series Op-
eration Manual for details.
1151
4. The following table shows how the IOM Hold Bit affects the status of I/O
memory and the status of outputs on Output Units after a fatal system error
has been generated with FALS(007).
IOM Hold Bit Status of I/O memory Status of outputs on Output
(A50012) Units
ON Retained OFF
OFF Cleared OFF
Note Unlike user-defined fatal errors, system errors generated by FALS(007) will
clear I/O memory if the IOM Hold Bit is OFF. The following areas will be
cleared: CIO Area, Work Area, Timer Flags and PVs, Index Registers, and
Data registers.
The following table shows how to specify error codes and error details in S
and S+1.
Error name S S+1
Error code Error details
Memory Error 80F1 hex • Bits 00 to 09: Memory Error Location
Bit 00: User program
Bit 04: PLC Setup
Bit 05: Registered I/O table
Bit 07: Routing table
Bit 08: CPU Bus Unit Setup
Bit 09: Memory Card transfer error
• Bits 10 to 15: Invalid
I/O Bus Error 80C0 hex • Bits 00 to 07: Slot number where the I/O Bus error
occurred
Slot 0 to 9: 00 to 09 hex
Slot unknown: 0F hex
• Bits 08 to 15: Rack number where the I/O Bus
error occurred
Slot 0 to 7: 00 to 07 hex
Rack unknown: 0F hex
Unit Number 80E9 hex CPU Bus Unit’s duplicated unit number
Duplication 0000 to 000F hex
Error
Special I/O Unit’s duplicated unit number
8000 to 805F hex
Rack Number 80EA hex Duplicated Rack number (overlapping word alloca-
Duplication tions)
Error 0000 to 0006 hex
Fatal Inner 82F0 hex Error Cause
Board Error Bits 00 to 03: Error defined by Inner Board
Bits 04 to 15: Invalid
1152
Error name S S+1

Error code Error details
Too Many I/O 80E1 hex Bits 13 to 15: Error Cause
Points Error Bits 00 to 12: Details
• Total number of I/O points is too high.
Bits 13 to 15: 000
Bits 00 to 12: Number of I/O points (binary)
• Number of interrupt inputs is too high.
Bits 13 to 15: 001
Bits 00 to 12: Number of interrupt inputs (binary)
Bits 00 to 12: All zeroes
• A Slave Unit’s unit number is duplicated or a C500
Slave Unit has more than 320 I/O points.
Bits 13 to 15: 010
Bits 00 to 12: Slave Unit’s unit number (binary)
• The unit number of an I/O Interface (excluding
Slave Racks) is duplicated.
Bits 13 to 15: 011
Bits 00 to 12: Unit number (binary)
• A Master Unit’s unit number is duplicated or out-
side of the allowed setting range.
Bits 13 to 15: 100
Bits 00 to 12: Master Unit’s unit number (binary)
• The number of Expansion Racks is too high.
Bits 13 to 15: 101
Bits 00 to 12: Number of Expansion Racks
(binary)
• C200H Special I/O Unit or Remote I/O was not
recognized.
Bits 13 to 15: 110
I/O Table Setting 80E0 hex --- (Not fixed.)
Error
Program Error 80F0 hex • Bits 08 to 15: Error Cause
Bit 15: UM overflow error
Bit 14: Illegal instruction error
Bit 13: Differentiation overflow error
Bit 12: Task error
Bit 11: No END error
Bit 10: Illegal access error
Bit 09: Indirect DM/EM BCD error
Bit 08: Instruction error
• Bits 00 to 07: Invalid
Cycle Time 809F hex --- (Not fixed.)
Overrun Error
Clearing FALS(007) Fatal System Errors (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D
CPU Units Only)
There are two ways to clear fatal system errors generated with FALS(007).
1. Turn the PLC OFF and then ON again.
2. When keeping the PLC ON, the system error must be cleared as if the
specified error had actually occurred.
Clearing FALS(007) User-defined Fatal Errors
To clear errors generated by FALS(007), first eliminate the cause of the error
and then either clear the error from a Programming Device or turn the PLC
OFF and then ON again.
1153
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the specified range of 0001 to 01FF
(1 to 511 decimal).
ON if a fatal system error is being generated (CS1-H/CJ1-
H/CJ1M/CS1D Only), but the specified error code or error
details code is incorrect.
The following tables show relevant words and flags in the Auxiliary Area.
• Auxiliary Area Words/Flags for User-defined Errors Only
FALS Error Flag A40106 ON when an error is generated with
FALS(007).
• Auxiliary Area Words/Flags for System Errors Only (CS1-H, CJ1-H,

CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units Only)
System-generated A529 A dummy FAL/FALS number is used when a
FAL/FALS number system error is generated with FALS(007). Set
the same dummy FAL/FALS number in this
word (0001 to 01FF hex, 1 to 511 decimal).
• Auxiliary Area Words/Flags for both User-defined and System Errors

Error Log Area A100 to The Error Log Area contains the error codes
A199 and time/date of occurrence for the most
recent 20 errors, including errors generated by
FALS(007).
Error code A400 When an error occurs its error code is stored
in A400. The error codes for FALS numbers
0001 to 01FF (1 to 511 decimal) are C101 to
C2FF, respectively.
If two or more errors occur simultaneously, the
error code of the most serious error will be
stored in A400.
Precautions The end code for the message is the null character (00 hexadecimal). All 16
N must between 0001 and 01FF. An error will occur and the Error Flag will be
turned ON if N is outside of the specified range.
Examples Generating a User-defined Error

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FALS(007) will generate a
fatal error with FAL number 31 and execute the following processes.
1,2,3... 1. The FALS Error Flag (A40106) will be turned ON.

2. The corresponding error code (C11F) will be written to A400.
Note A400 will contain the error code of the most serious of all of the errors
that have occurred, including non-fatal and fatal system errors, as
well as errors generated by FAL(006) and FAL(007).
4. The ERR Indicator on the CPU Unit will be lit.
5. The ASCII message in D00100 to D00107 will be displayed at the Periph-
eral Device. (If a message is not required, specify a constant for S.)
1154
31
M
M: 4C 4F
57 20
56 4F
MESSAGE
4C 54 LOW VOLTAGE
41 47
45 00
Generating a Non-fatal System Error (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D

CPU Units Only)
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, FALS(007) will generate a
Too Many I/O Points Error (too many Expansion Racks connected, 9 Racks in
this case). In this case, dummy FAL number 10 is used and the corresponding
value (000A hex) is stored in A529.
1,2,3... 1. The specified error code (80E1) will be written to A400 if it is the most se-
rious error.
3. The Too Many I/O Points Flag (A40111) will be turned ON.
4. The CPU Unit’s ERR Indicator will light and PLC operation will stop.
5. A message (TOO MANY I/O PNT) will be displayed at the Programming
Console indicating that a Too Many I/O Points Error has occurred.
000000
MOV
#000A
A529
FALS
N 10
S D00200
Matching
values
A529CH 000A
S:D00200 80E1 Error code: 80E1 (Too Many I/O Points Error)
D00201 A009 Number of Expansion Racks: 9
1155
3-30-3 FAILURE POINT DETECTION: FPD(269)

Purpose Diagnoses a failure in an instruction block by monitoring the time between
execution of FPD(269) and execution of a diagnostic output and finding which
input is preventing an output from being turned ON.
Ladder Symbol
FPD(269)
C C: Control word
T T: Monitoring time
R R: First register word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FPD(269)


C must be a constant between 0000 and 01FF or between 8000 and 81FF.
The following diagram shows the function of the digits in the control word.
15 12 11 0
C
FAL number: 000 to 1FF
Diagnostic output mode

0: Bit address output only (hexadecimal)
8: Bit address and message output (ASCII)
T: Monitoring Time
T must be between 0 and 9,999 decimal (between 0000 and 270F hex). A
value of 0 disables time monitoring; values in the range of 1 to 270F set the
monitoring time from 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.
R: First Register Word
The functions of the register words are described on page 1159.
Area C T R
A448 to A959
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
1156
Area C T R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Specified values #0000 to #270F ---
only (binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
+2047 ,IR15
Description FPD(269) performs time monitoring and logic diagnosis. The time monitoring
function generates a non-fatal error with the specified FAL number if the diag-
nostic output is not turned ON within the specified monitoring time. The logic
diagnosis function indicates which input is preventing the output from being
turned ON.
Time monitoring function:
Starts timing when execution condition A goes ON.
Generates a non-fatal error if output B isn't turned
ON within the monitoring time.
Execution
condition A
T
R
Error-processing
Next instruction block block (optional)
Logic diagnosis block*
Logic diagnosis
execution condition C
Diagnostic output B
Logic diagnosis function

Determines which input in C prevents
output B from going ON.
Note *The logic diagnosis block begins with the first LD (not LD TR) or LD NOT
instruction after FPD(269) and ends with the first OUT (not OUT TR) or other
right-hand instruction.
1157
Time Monitoring Function

FPD(269) starts timing when it is executed (when execution condition A goes
ON); it will generate a non-fatal error and turn ON the Carry Flag if the diag-
nostic output is not turned ON within the specified monitoring time.
Execution condition
for FPD(269)
Monitoring
Diagnostic output B time (T)
Carry Flag
Non-fatal error generated.
Note The diagnostic output must go ON within the monitoring time. The teaching
function can be used set the monitoring time automatically.
The following processing will be performed when the Carry Flag is turned ON.
(This processing will not be performed if the FAL number is set to 000 in C.)
1,2,3... 1. The FAL Error Flag (A40215) will be turned ON. (PLC operation contin-
ues.)
2. The Executed FAL Number Flag for the specified FAL number will be
turned ON. (Flags A36001 to A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to
1FF.)
3. The corresponding error code will be written to A400. Error codes 4101 to
42FF correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 1FF.
(If a more serious error has occurred (one with a higher error code) at the
same time, the error code of the more serious error will be stored in A400.)
6. If the output mode has been set for bit address and message output (left-
most digit of C set to 8), the ASCII message stored in R+2 through R+10
will be displayed as a non-fatal error message.
Logic Diagnosis Function
Every cycle that the execution condition for FPD(269) is ON, FPD(269) deter-
mines which input bit is causing the diagnostic output to be OFF and writes
the bit’s address to the register area beginning at R.
If input bits CIO 000000 through CIO 000003 are all ON in the following exam-
ple, FPD(269) would determine that the normally closed CIO 000002 condi-
tion is causing output CIO 000100 to remain OFF. FPD(269) would turn ON
the Bit Address Found Flag (bit 15 of R) and write the bit address to register
words R+2 to R+4.
Logic diagnosis block

Logic diagnosis
execution condition
1158
The logic diagnosis function is executed every cycle as long as the execution
condition for FPD(269) is ON. The operation of the logic diagnosis function is
independent of the time monitoring function.
When two or more input bits are preventing the diagnostic output from being
turned ON, the address of the first input bit in the execution condition (on the
highest instruction line and nearest the left bus bar) will be output to R+2
through R+4.
Input bits in LD, LD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR, and OR NOT instructions
(including differentiated and immediate-refreshing variations) will be checked
by the logic diagnosis function. Input bits in other instructions and operands
addressed indirectly through Index Registers will not be checked.
The logic diagnosis block begins with the first LD (not LD TR) or LD NOT
instruction after FPD(269) and ends with the first OUT (not OUT TR) or other
right-hand instruction.
There are two diagnostic output modes, set with the leftmost digit of C.
1,2,3... 1. Bit address output mode (Leftmost digit of C = 0)

Bit 15 of R (the Bit Address Found Flag) is turned ON when an input bit
address has been found and bit 14 of R indicates whether the input is nor-
mally ON or normally OFF.
The 8-digit hexadecimal PLC memory address of the input bit is output to
R+3 and R+2.
2. Bit address and message output mode (Leftmost digit of C = 8)
Bit 15 of R (the Bit Address Found Flag) is turned ON when an input bit
address has been found and bit 14 of R indicates whether the input is nor-
mally ON or normally OFF.
The input bit’s address is output to R+2 through R+4 as 6 ASCII charac-
ters.
Register Word Functions The register words contain the results of the diagnostic function and can also
contain an ASCII error message which is displayed when an error is gener-
ated by the time monitoring function. The function of the register words
depends upon the diagnostic output mode which is set with the leftmost digit
of C.
1159
Bit Address Output (C=0@@@)

When the leftmost digit of C is set to 0, the 8-digit hexadecimal PLC memory
address of the input bit is output to R+2 and R+3. R contains two flags which
indicate whether an input bit has been found and whether it is used in a nor-
mally open or normally closed input condition.
151413 0
R
Not possible to use.

Input type
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
Bit Address Found Flag
0: Not found yet
1: Bit address found
15 0
R+1
R+2 R+3
Bit Address and Message Output (C=8@@@)

When the leftmost digit of C is set to 8, the ASCII address of the input bit is
output to R+2 to R+4. R contains two flags which indicate whether an input bit
has been found and whether it is used in a normally open or normally closed
input condition.
15 14 13 0
R

Input type
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0: Not found yet
1: Bit address found
15 0
R+1
Register words R+2 to R+4 indicate the address of the input which prevented
the diagnostic output from being turned ON. The bit address is output to these
words in ASCII. The following table shows the ASCII representations for each
area.
Area ASCII text Notes
Auxiliary Area A00000 to A95915 ---
Holding Area H00000 to H51115 ---
CIO Area 000000 to 665515 ---
Task Flags TK0000 to TK0031 ---
Timer Area _T0000 to _T4095 The “_” represents an ASCII
Counter Area _C0000 to _C4095 space.
(Character code 20.)
1160
15
R+2 W 5
R+3 1 1 Bit address written in ASCII
R+4 1 5
Register words R+2 through R+5 would have the following values for W51115:
R+2 W 5
R+3 1 1
R+4 1 5
R+5 2D (hexadecimal) Input type (hexadecimal)
30: Normally open
31: Normally closed
The user can store an ASCII message in register words R+6 to R+10. This
message will be displayed on the Programming Device if a non-fatal error is
generated by the time monitoring function. Mark the end of the message with
the null character (00 hexadecimal).
15 8 7 0
R+6
R+7
R+8
R+9
R+10
Disabling Error Log Normally when the FPD(269) Time Monitoring Function generates a non-fatal
Entries of Non-fatal error, the error code and the time that the error occurred are written to the
FPD(269) Errors Error Log Area (A100 through A199). In CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D
(CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, or CPU Units, it is possible to set the PLC Setup so that the non-fatal errors gen-
CS1D Only) erated by FAL(006) are not recorded in the Error Log.
Even though the error will not be recorded in the Error Log, the FAL Error Flag
(40215) will be turned ON, the corresponding flag in the Executed FAL Num-
ber Flags (A36001 to A39115) will be turned ON, and the error code will be
written to A400.
Disable Error Log entries for FPD(269) time-monitoring errors when you want
to record only the system-generated errors. For example, this function is use-
ful during debugging if the FPD(269) and FAL(006) instructions are used in
several applications and the Error Log is becoming full of these errors.
grammer.
1161
The following table shows the PLC Setup setting from the Programming Con-
sole.
Item Setting
Programming Console Word 129
setting address Bit 15
Name FAL Error Log Registration
Settings 0: Record FAL Errors in Error Log.
1: Do not record FAL Errors in Error Log.
Default setting 0: Record FAL Errors in Error Log.
Times that PLC Setup set- Every cycle (when an FAL Error occurs)
ting is read
Even if PLC Setup word 129 bit 15 is set to 1 (Do not record FAL Errors in
Error Log.), the following errors will be recorded:
• Fatal errors generated by FALS(007)
• Non-fatal errors from the system
• Fatal errors from the system
• Non-fatal errors from the system generated intentionally with FAL(006) or
FPD(269)
• Fatal errors from the system generated intentionally with FALS(007)
Setting Monitoring Time If a word address is specified for T, the monitoring time can be set automati-
with the Teaching cally with the teaching function. Use the following procedure when a word
Function address has been set for T.
1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the FPD Teaching Bit (A59800).

2. FPD(269) will measure the time from the point when the execution condi-
tion for FPD(269) goes ON until the diagnostic output is turned ON.
3. If the measured time exceeds the monitoring time setting, a setting 1.5
times the measured time will be stored in T.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if C is not within the specified range of 0000 to 01FF
or 8000 to 81FF.
ON if T is not within the specified range of 0000 to 270F.
Carry Flag CY ON if the diagnostic output is still OFF after the monitoring
time has elapsed.
The following table shows relevant words and flags in the Auxiliary Area.
FAL Error Flag A40215 ON when a non-fatal (FAL) error is registered in time
monitoring.
Executed FAL A36001 to When a non-fatal (FAL) error is registered in time mon-
Number Flags A39115 itoring, the corresponding flag will be turned ON. Flags
A36001 to A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 0001
to 01FF.
Error Log Area A100 to The Error Log Area contains the error codes and time/
A199 date of occurrence for the most recent 20 errors,
including errors generated by FPD(269).
1162

Error code A400 When an error occurs its error code is stored in A400.
The error codes for FAL numbers 0001 to 01FF are
4101 to 42FF, respectively.
If two or more errors occur simultaneously, the error
code of the most serious error will be stored in A400.
FPD Teaching A59800 Turn this bit ON when you want the monitoring time to
Bit be set automatically (teaching function) when
FPD(269) is executed.
Precautions When the time monitoring function is being used, the execution condition for
FPD(269) must remain ON for the entire monitoring time set in T.
The execution condition for FPD(269) must be made up of a combination of
normally open and normally closed inputs.
The error-processing block is optional. When an error-processing block is
included, be sure to use outputs or other right-hand instructions. LD and LD
NOT cannot be used at this point.
FPD(269) can be used more than once in the program, but each instruction
must have a unique register (R) setting.
The monitoring time is refreshed only when FPD(269) is executed. If the cycle
time is longer than 100 ms, the monitoring time will not be refreshed normally
and FPD(269) will not operate correctly because the monitoring time is
updated in units of 100 ms.
Examples The following program example is used to demonstrate the operation of the
time monitoring function and logic diagnosis function. In this example, the
diagnostic output (CIO 020000) does not go ON because CIO 010000 and
CIO 010003 remain OFF in the logic diagnosis execution condition.
Execution
condition
T &100
Error-processing
block (optional)
Logic diagnosis block
Logic diagnosis execution condition
Diagnostic output
The diagnostic output (CIO 020000)

remains OFF because these input
conditions are OFF.
Time Monitoring Function

If the diagnostic output (CIO 020000) does not go ON within 10 seconds after
CIO 030000 and CIO 030001 are both ON, a non-fatal error will be generated
and the following processing will be performed.
1,2,3... 1. The Carry Flag is turned ON.
1163
2. When the rightmost 3 digits of C specify an FAL number of 00A hex (10),
the corresponding Executed FAL Number Flag (A36010) will be turned
ON, the corresponding error code (410A) is written in A400, and the FAL
Error Flag (A40215) is turned ON.
Logic Diagnosis Function (C=000A)
Since the leftmost digit of C is 0 (bit address output mode) the PLC memory
address of CIO 010000 is output to D00303 and D00302. (CIO 010000 is on a
higher instruction line than CIO 010003.)
FAL number = 10
Bit Address Found Flag Diagnostic output mode = 0 (bit address output)
1: Bit address found Input type
0: Normally open
R: Not used.
Not used.
Contains internal I/O memory address.
Logic Diagnosis Function (C=800A)

Since the leftmost digit of C is 8 (bit address and message output mode) the
address of CIO 010000 (010000) is output to D00302 through D00304 in
ASCII.
FAL number = 10
Diagnostic output mode = 8 (bit address and message output)
1: Bit address found Input type
0: Normally open
R: D00300
R+1: D00301 Not used.
R+2: D00302 30 31
R+3: D00303 30 30 Contains bit address in ASCII.
(010000 is converted to ASCII.)
R+4: D00304 30 30
R+5: D00305 2D 30
R+6: D00306 54 25
R+7: D00307 25 F4
User-set FAL error message output to a
25 00 Peripheral Device by the time monitoring
R+8: D00308
00 00 function. The Peripheral Display will show
R+9: D00309
00 00 the following: 010000-0 ERROR.
R+10: D00310
Setting the Monitoring Time with the Teaching Function

The monitoring time can be set automatically with the teaching function when
a word address has been specified for T.
1164
Other Instructions Section 3-31
Execution
condition
The teaching function

can set the monitoring
T time in T automatically.
R
Diagnostic output
To start the teaching function, turn ON A59800 (the FPD Teaching Bit). While
A59800 is ON, FPD(269) measures how long it takes for the diagnostic output
(CIO 020000) to go ON after the execution condition (CIO 030000) goes ON.
If the measured time exceeds the monitoring time in T, the measured time is
multiplied by 1.5 and that value is stored in T as the new monitoring time.
FPD Teaching Bit A59800
Execution condition CIO 030000
No error generated
Diagnostic output CIO 020000
Measured time: ta t's(ta × 1.5)

Teaching
ts: Initial setting in T

ta: Measured time
t’s: New setting in T after teaching
(When ta > ts, t’s = ta × 1.5)
3-31 Other Instructions

This section describes instructions for manipulating the Carry Flag, selecting
the EM bank, and extending the maximum cycle time.
SET CARRY STC 040 1166
CLEAR CARRY CLC 041 1166
SELECT EM BANK EMBC 281 1167
EXTEND MAXIMUM CYCLE TIME WDT 094 1169
SAVE CONDITION FLAGS CCS 282 1171
LOAD CONDITION FLAGS CCL 283 1173
CONVERT ADDRESS FROM CV FRMCV 284 1174
CONVERT ADDRESS TO CV TOCV 285 1179
1165

DISABLE PERIPHERAL SERVICING IOSP 287 1183
ENABLE PERIPHERAL SERVICING IORS 288 1185
3-31-1 SET CARRY: STC(040)

Sets the Carry Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
STC(040)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition STC(040)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @STC(040)

OK OK OK OK
Description When the execution condition is ON, STC(040) turns ON the Carry Flag (CY).
Although STC(040) turns the Carry Flag ON, the flag will be turned ON/OFF
by the execution of subsequent instructions which affect the Carry Flag.
Flags
Carry Flag CY ON
Precautions ROL(027), ROLL(572), ROR(028), and RORL(573) make use of the Carry
Flag in their rotation shift operations. When using any of these instructions,
use STC(040) and CLC(041) to set and clear the Carry Flag.
3-31-2 CLEAR CARRY: CLC(041)

Purpose Turns OFF the Carry Flag (CY).
Ladder Symbol
CLC(041)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CLC(041)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @CLC(041)
1166

OK OK OK OK
Description When the execution condition is ON, CLC(040) turns OFF the Carry Flag
(CY). Although CLC(040) turns the Carry Flag OFF, the flag will be turned ON/
OFF by the execution of subsequent instructions which affect the Carry Flag.
Flags
Carry Flag CY OFF
Precautions +C(402), +CL(403), +BC(406), and +BCL(407) make use of the Carry Flag in
their addition operations. Use CLC(041) just before any of these instructions
to prevent any influence from other preceding instructions.
–C(412), –CL(413), –BC(416), and –BCL(417) make use of the Carry Flag in
their subtraction operations. Use CLC(041) just before any of these instruc-
tions to prevent any influence from other preceding instructions.
ROL(027), ROLL(572), ROR(028), and RORL(573) make use of the Carry
Flag in their rotation shift operations. When using any of these instructions,
use STC(040) and CLC(041) to set and clear the Carry Flag.
Note The +(400), +L(401), +B(404), +BL(405), –(410), –L(411), –B(414), and
–BL(415) instructions do no include the Carry Flag in their addition and sub-
traction operations. In general, use these instructions when performing addi-
tion or subtraction.
3-31-3 SELECT EM BANK: EMBC(281)

Purpose Changes the current EM bank.
Ladder Symbol
EMBC(281)
N N: EM bank number
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition EMBC(281)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @EMBC(281)

OK OK OK OK
Operands N: EM Bank Number

Specifies the new EM bank number in hexadecimal (0000 to 000C).
1167
Area N
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
*En_00000 to *En_32767
Constants #0000 to #000C (binary)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description EMBC(281) changes the current EM (Extended Data Memory) bank to the
one indicated by the EM bank number (N). At the same time, the new EM
bank number is output to A301.
There are up to 13 banks (0 to C) available in the EM Area and there are
32,768 words (E00000 to E32767) in each bank. EM addresses can be identi-
fied in the two following ways. EMBC(281) must be used to change the current
EM bank if the first method is used.
1,2,3... 1. EM addresses can be specified without the bank number, i.e. E00000 to
E32767, to indicate addresses in the current EM bank.
2. EM addresses can be specified with the bank number, i.e. En_00000 to
En_32767 (n = 0 to C), to indicate addresses in a particular EM bank.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the range 0000 to 000C.
ON if N specifies a non-existent EM bank number.
(This error will occur if the specified EM bank has been
registered as file memory in the PLC Setup.)

Current EM Bank A301 Contains the current EM bank number in hexa-
decimal (0000 to 000C).
1168
Precautions The current EM bank number changed in a cyclic task is retained when oper-
ation is switched between tasks. For example, if EMBC(281) is used in task 1
to change the current EM bank from bank B to bank C, bank C will remain the
current EM bank for all cyclic tasks even when operation is switched to task 2.
The current EM bank number changed in an interrupt task is valid only during
execution of the interrupt in which it was changed. The previous EM bank
number will be returned to once execution of the interrupt task has been com-
pleted.
An error will occur if the specified EM bank has been registered as file mem-
ory in the PLC Setup.
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, the current EM bank
number is changed to bank C and the new bank number (000C hex) is output
to A301.
3-31-4 EXTEND MAXIMUM CYCLE TIME: WDT(094)

Purpose Extends the maximum cycle time, but only for the cycle in which the instruc-
tion is executed. WDT(094) can be used to prevent errors for long cycle times
when a longer cycle time is temporarily required for special processing.
Ladder Symbol
WDT(094)
T T: Timer setting
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition WDT(094)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @WDT(094)

OK OK OK OK
Operands T: Timer Setting

Specifies the watchdog timer setting between 0000 and 0F9F hexadecimal or
between &0000 and &3999 decimal.
Area T
CIO Area ---
Work Area ---
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
1169
Area T
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants 0000 to 0F9F (binary)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Description WDT(094) extends the maximum cycle time for the cycle in which this instruc-
tion is executed. The watchdog timer setting in the PLC Setup is extended by
an interval of T × 10 ms (0 to 39,990 ms).
grammer.
The following table shows the watchdog timer settings in the PLC Setup. The
default value for the maximum cycle time is 1,000 ms, although it can be set
anywhere from 1 to 40,000 ms in 10-ms units.
Name Function Settings
Watch cycle A Cycle Time Too Long error (fatal 0: Default setting (1,000 ms)
time error) will be registered if the cycle time 1: User time setting
exceeds the maximum setting.
Sets the maximum cycle time. 0001 to 0FA0
(This setting is valid only when the first (1 to 40,000 ms, 10-ms units)
setting has been set to 1.)
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the watchdog timer setting exceeds 40 seconds.
The following table shows relevant flags and words in the Auxiliary Area.
Cycle Time Too Long A40108 ON when the present cycle time exceeds the
Flag maximum cycle time (watch cycle time) set in the
PLC Setup. This is a fatal error which causes pro-
gram execution to stop.
Maximum Cycle A262 and These words contain the maximum cycle time in
Time A263 32-bit binary. This value is updated every cycle.
Present Cycle Time A264 and These words contain the present cycle time in 32-
A265 bit binary. This value is updated every cycle.
Precautions WDT(094) can be used more than once in a cycle. When WDT(094) is exe-
cuted more than once the cycle time extensions are added together, although
1170
the total must not exceed 40,000 ms. If WDT(094) cannot be executed again if
the cycle has already been extended to 40,000 ms.
Examples The default maximum cycle time (1,000 ms) is used in this example.
1,2,3... 1. When CIO 000000 turns ON, the first WDT(094) instruction extends the
maximum cycle time by 300 ms (30 × 10 ms). Thus, the maximum cycle
time is 1,300 ms at this point.
2. When CIO 000001 turns ON, the second WDT(094) instruction attempts
to extend the maximum cycle time by another 39,000 ms. Since the new
maximum cycle time (40,300 ms) exceeds the upper limit of 40,000 ms, the
extra 300 ms is ignored. As a result, the second WDT(094) instruction ac-
tually extends the maximum cycle time by 38,700 ms.
3. When CIO 000002 turns ON, the third WDT(094) instruction attempts to
extend the maximum cycle time by another 1,000 ms. Since the maximum
cycle time has already reached the upper limit of 40,000 ms, the third
WDT(094) instruction is not executed.
3-31-5 SAVE CONDITION FLAGS: CCS(282)

Saves the current status of the Condition Flags in a separate area within the
CPU Unit. The current status of the Flags is preserved so that it can be read
(restored) with CCL(283) at a different location in the program, in a different
task, or even in a later cycle.
only.
Ladder Symbol
CCS(282)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CCS(282)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @CCS(282)

OK OK OK OK
Description When the execution condition is ON, CCS(282) stores the current status of
the Condition Flags (except for the ALWAYS ON and ALWAYS OFF Flags) in
1171
a separate area in the CPU Unit. The Status of the following Condition Flags
will be preserved: ER, CY, >, =, <, N, OF, UF, >=, <>, and <=.
The preserved status of the Condition Flags can be read (restored) later only
with CCL(283), the LOAD CONDITION FLAGS instruction. The status can be
read in any of the following cases:
• Within a task
• Between different cyclic tasks
• Between cycles
Within a task Between cyclic tasks
CCS
CCS
CCL
CCL
Between cycles
A
CCL(283) is executed to read the status
CCS
in the next cycle after CCS(282) was
B executed to save the status.
CCL
Note 1. The status of the Condition Flags cannot be saved/loaded between a cyclic
task and interrupt task.
2. When CCS(282) is executed, it overwrites the previous Condition Flag in-
formation that was saved.
All of the Condition Flags are cleared when operation switches from one task
to another. Use the CCS(282) and CCL(283) instructions to save and load the
Condition Flag status between tasks or cycles.
For example, the CCS(282) and CCL(283) instructions make it possible to use
the CY Flag status (time monitoring diagnosis error) from the execution of
1172
FPD(269) at a later point in the program, not immediately after execution of

the instruction.
Task
FPD The results of the comparison are stored in the Condition Flags.
(In this case, the results of the COMPARE Instruction can be used
in instruction B even if those results are affected by execution of
instruction A.)
Preserves the status of the Condition Flags in a separate location

CCS in the CPU Unit.
Instruction A
CCL Restores the status of the Condition Flags.
The Equals Flag will reflect the result of the COMPARE instruction,
Instruction B
not the result of instruction A.
Flags There are no flags affected by these instructions.

Examples In the following example, CCS(282) preserves the results of a Comparison so
that this result can be used as an execution condition later in the program.
000000
CMP When CIO 000000 is ON in the following
D00000 example, CMP(020) will compare the
contents of D00000 and D00300 and those
D00300
results will be preserved by CCS(282).
CCS
CCL The preserved Condition Flags are restored

by CCL(283).
=
MOV This MOV(021) instruction is executed if the
D00000 result of the CMP(020) instruction caused the
D00200 Equals flag to be turned ON.
3-31-6 LOAD CONDITION FLAGS: CCL(283)

Restores the status of the Condition Flags that were saved in a separate area
within the CPU Unit by CCS(282). It is also possible to use CCL(283) inde-
pendently to clear the Condition Flags.
only.
Ladder Symbol
CCL(283)
1173
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CCL(283)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @CCL(283)

OK OK OK OK
Description When the execution condition is ON, CCL(283) restores (reads) the status of
the Condition Flags (except for the ALWAYS ON and ALWAYS OFF Flags).
The Status of the following Condition Flags will be restored (read): ER, CY, >,
=, <, N, OF, UF, >=, <>, and <=.
Condition Flags are shared by all instructions, so the status of these Flags
may change many times during the PLC cycle as each instruction is executed.
Previously, it was necessary to place conditions using the Condition Flags
immediately after the controlling instruction so that the status of the Condition
Flags would not be affected by intervening instructions. The CCS(282) and
CCL(283) instructions allow the controlling instruction to be separated from
the execution conditions that rely on the result.
For example, CCS(282) can store the status of the Equals Flag after execu-
tion of a Comparison Instruction and the result can be restored later. The
result does not have to be used immediately after execution of the instruction.
Task
Instruction A
CCL(283) is used alone to clear the

CCL Condition Flags after execution of
instruction A so that those results do not
affect instruction B and later instructions.
Instruction B
Refer to 3-31-5 SAVE CONDITION FLAGS: CCS(282) for more examples

showing how to use CCS(282) and CCL(283).
Flags There are no flags affected by these instructions.
3-31-7 CONVERT ADDRESS FROM CV: FRMCV(284)

Purpose Converts a CV-series PLC memory address to its corresponding CS/CJ-
series PLC memory address. FRMCV(284) can be useful when converting
CV-series programs that use PLC memory addresses so that they are com-
patible with CS/CJ-series PLCs.
only.
1174
Ladder Symbol
FRMCV(284)
S: Word containing the CV-
S series PLC memory address
D: Destination Index Register
D
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FRMCV(284)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FRMCV(284)

OK OK OK OK
Description When the execution condition is ON, FRMCV(284) executes the following
operations.
1. The CV-series PLC memory address specified in S is converted to its
equivalent CV-series data area address.
2. FRMCV(284) determines the CS/CJ-series PLC memory address that cor-
responds to the same CV-series data area address.
3. The CS/CJ-series PLC memory address is output to D. (An index register
(IR0 to IR15) must be specified for D.)
The following example shows FRMCV(284) used to convert the CV-series
PLC memory address for D00001.
FRMCV
D00000
IR1
D00000 #2001
1. The CV-series PLC memory address is

converted to its equivalent CV-series data
area address.
CV-series PLC CV-series data
memory address area address
2001 Hex D00001
2. The corresponding CV-series data area

address is converted to its CS/CJ-series
PLC memory address.
CS/CJ-series data CS/CJ-series

area address PLC memory
D00001 10001 Hex
Storage
3. The CS/CJ-series PLC memory
address is stored in D.
IR1 10001 Hex
1175
Data area address CV-series PLC memory address

0000CH 0000Hex
0001CH 0001Hex
D00000 2000Hex
Convert
D00001 2001Hex S
Specify the CV-series PLC
memory address in S. (In this
Corresponding E32765 FFFDHex case, 2001 hex is the PLC
data area memory address of D00001.)
address CS/CJ-series
0000CH 0C000Hex
0001CH 0C001Hex
D00000 Convert 10000Hex

D00001 10001Hex The corresponding CS/CJ-series PLC
memory address is stored in D. (In this
case, data area address D00001 is
EC_32767 FFFFFHex converted to PLC memory address
10001 hex and stored.)
D: IR1 10001Hex
Note If there is no CS/CJ-series equivalent to the specified CV-series PLC memory

address, an error will occur, the Error Flag will be turned ON, and the address
will not be converted.
When an Index Register is used as an operand with a “,IR” prefix, the instruc-
tion will operate on the word indicated by the PLC memory address in the
Index Register, not the Index Register itself. Once the desired PLC memory
address has been stored in an Index Register, the Index Register itself can be
used as an operand for an instruction.
The FRMCV(284) instruction can be used to convert a CV-series program
with the following two kinds of programming for use in a CS/CJ-series PLC.
See the Examples later in this section for an example.
1. When using indirect binary mode DM addressing (*DM)
(when indirectly specifying a data area address with a PLC memory ad-
dress in DM)
2. When using CV-series PLC memory addresses directly as values
(when storing PLC memory addresses in Index Registers with direct ad-
dressing using an instruction such as MOV(021))
Area S D
DM Area D00000 to D32767 ---
(n = 0 to C)
1176
Area S D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants Any constant except 09FF hex, 0A00 ---
to 0AFF hex, or 0D00 to 0E3F hex
Indirect addressing ,IR0 to ,IR15 ---
+2047 ,IR15
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if S specifies one of the following PLC memory
addresses that do not exist in the CS/CJ-series:
Temporary Relay (TR) Area (09FF hex)
CPU Bus Link (G) Area (0A00 to 0AFF hex)
SFC Areas (0D00 to 0E3F hex)
1177
Examples Example 1: Converting a CV-series Program with *DM Indirect Binary

Mode DM Addressing
In this FRMCV(284) example, a DM word is specified in S, the PLC memory
address there is stored in an Index Register, and the Index Register is used
for indirectly addressed.
• CV-series program • CS/CJ-series program
(Program using indirect DM
binary mode addressing)
000000 Equivalent program 000000
MOV FRMCV
S #1234 S D00000
D D IR0
PLC Setup
Indirect DM data: MOV
When indirect DM addresses are in binary, the content of S #1234
the DM word is treated as a PLC memory address and
specifies the corresponding address in I/O memory. D ,IR0
In this case, the value in D00000 is 0200 hex. The In this case, the value in D00000 is 0200 hex. The
corresponding data area address is CIO 0512, so corresponding CV-series data area address is CIO 0512.
#1234 is transferred to CIO 0512. The CS/CJ-series PLC memory address for CIO 0512 is
Word address: 0000C200 hex, so this value is stored in IR0. The
CS/CJ-series PLC destination operand in MOV(021) indirectly addresses the
D00000 0200 Hex memory address content of IR0, so #1234 is transferred to CIO 0512.
CS/CJ-series PLC
Word address: memory address
CIO 0512 #1234 CS/CJ-series word
0200 Hex
address: D00000 0200 Hex
MOV(021)
#1234 CV-series PLC
CV-series word memory address:
address: CIO0512 0200 Hex FRMCV
(284)
Equivalent
CS/CJ-series PLC
memory address:
CS/CJ-series word OC0200 Hex
address: CIO 0512
CS/CJ-series word
address: IR0 000OC0200 Hex
CS/CJ-series PLC
CS/CJ-series word memory address: MOV
address: CIO 0512 #1234 OC0200 Hex (021)
MOV(021)
#1234
1178
Example 2: Converting a CV-series Program with PLC Memory

Addresses Stored directly in Index Registers
In this FRMCV(284) example, the CV-series PLC memory address is speci-
fied directly in S.
• CV-series program • CS/CJ-series program
(Program using PLC memory
addresses stored directly in IR)
000000
000000
Equivalent program
FRMCV
MOV
S #0200
S #0200
D IR0
D IR0
In this case, the PLC memory address

0200 hex is stored in Index Register IR0.
0200Hex
In this case, the CV-series PLC memory address 0200
hex corresponds to CIO 0512. The CS/CJ-series PLC
memory address for CIO 0512 is 0000C200 hex, so this
value is stored in IR0.
IR0 #0200
CV-series word
address
CV-series PLC
CIO 0512 0200Hex memory address: 0200
hex
CS/CJ-series
word address CIO 0512 CS/CJ-series PLC
memory address:
00C200 hex
IR #000C200
3-31-8 CONVERT ADDRESS TO CV: TOCV(285)

Purpose Converts a CS/CJ-series PLC memory address to its corresponding CV-
series PLC memory address. TOCV(285) can be useful when converting CS/
CJ-series programs that use PLC memory addresses so that they are com-
patible with CV-series PLCs.
only.
Ladder Symbol
TOCV(285) S: Index Register containing the
S CS/CJ-series PLC memory
address
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TOCV(285)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TOCV(285)
1179

OK OK OK OK
Description When the execution condition is ON, TOCV(285) executes the following oper-
ations.
1. The CS/CJ-series PLC memory address specified in S is converted to its
equivalent CS/CJ-series data area address. (An index register (IR0 to
IR15) must be specified for S.)
2. TOCV(284) determines the CV-series PLC memory address that corre-
sponds to the same CS/CJ-series data area address.
3. The CV-series PLC memory address is output to D.
The following example shows TOCV(285) used to convert the CS/CJ-series
PLC memory address for D00001.
TOCV
IR1
D00100
IR1 10001 Hex
1. The CS/CJ-series PLC memory

address is converted to its equivalent CS/
CJ-series data area address.
CS/CJ-series PLC CS/CJ-series data
memory address area address
10001 Hex D00001
2. The corresponding CV-series data area

address is converted to its CV-series PLC
memory address.
CV-series data CV-series PLC

area address memory address
D00001 2001 Hex
Storage
3. The CV-series PLC memory
address is stored in D.
D00100 2001 Hex
1180
Data area address CS/CJ-series PLC memory address

0000CH 0C000Hex
0001CH 0C001Hex
D00000 10000Hex
Convert
D00001 10001Hex S
Specify the CS/CJ-series
PLC memory address in S.
EC_32767 FFFFFHex (In this case, 10001 hex is
the PLC memory address of
CV-series D00001.)
Corresponding
data area 0000CH 0000Hex
address 0001CH 0001Hex
D00000 Convert 2000Hex The corresponding CV-series

PLC memory address is
D00001 2001Hex stored in D. (In this case,
data area address D00001 is
converted to PLC memory
E32765 FFFDHex address 2001 hex and
stored.)
D: D00100 2001Hex
Note 1. If there is no CV-series equivalent to the specified CS/CJ-series PLC mem-

ory address, an error will occur, the Error Flag will be turned ON, and the
address will not be converted.
2. The CV-series PLC memory address data stored by TOCV(285) can be
transferred to a CV-series PLC using CX-Programmer.
3. The same data area address that was used in the CS/CJ-series program
can be specified in the CV-series program by using indirect Index Register
addressing ( “,IR” prefix) or indirect binary mode DM addressing (*DM).
Area S D
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants See note 1. ---
1181
Area S D
Index Registers IR0 to IR15 ---
+2047 ,IR15
Note 1. An error will occur and the Error Flag will be turned ON if S specifies one
of the following PLC memory addresses that do not exist in the CV-series:
Area or addresses PLC memory addresses
Task Flag Area 0000 B800 to 0000 B801 hex
A512 to A959 0000 BA40 to 0000 BBFF hex
CIO 2556 to CIO 6143 0000 C9FC to 0000 D7FF hex
T1024 to T4095 0000 BE40 to 0000 BEFF hex and
0000 E400 to 0000 EFFF hex
C1024 to C4095 0000 BF40 to 0000 BFFF hex and
0000 F400 to 0000 FFFF hex
HR Area 0000 D800 to 0000 D9FF hex
WR Area 0000 DE00 to 0000 DFFF hex
D24576 to D32767 0001 6000 to 0001 7FFF hex
EM bank specification 0001 8000 to 000F 7FFF hex
E32766 to D32767 000F FFFE to 000F FFFF hex
2. An error will occur and the Error Flag will be turned ON if an area other
than the Index Register Area is specified for S.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if S specifies a PLC memory address that does not
exist in the CV-series PLCs.
ON if S is not a constant or Index Register.
Example Converting a CS/CJ-series Program with Indirect Index Register

Addressing
1. In this TOCV(285) example, an Index Register is specified in S. The CS/
CJ-series PLC memory address in that Index Register is converted to its
CV-series equivalent.
2. The CV-series PLC memory address is transferred to the specified data
area address.
3. Use the CV-series PLC memory address in the CV-series program.
1182
• CS/CJ-series program • CS/CJ-series program • CV-series program

(Program using indirect Index
Register addressing)
000000 000001 000000
MOV TOCV MOV
S #1234 S IR0 S #1234
D ,IR0 D D00200 D *D00200
In this case, IR0 contains 10001 hex. The In this case, IR0 contains 10001 hex. Transfer contents
data area address corresponding to PLC Since the data area address of D00200 to CV-
memory address 10001 hex is D00001, so corresponding to CS/CJ-series PLC series.
#1234 is transferred to D00001. memory address 10001 hex is D00001,
CS/CJ- TOCV(285) stores the CV-series PLC In the CV-series PLC, the destination of the
series data 10001Hex memory address for D00001 (2001 hex) MOV(021) instruction is indirectly addressed
area in destination word D00200. (in binary mode) through D00200, so #1234 is
CS/CJ-series transferred to D00001.
CS/CJ- #1234
PLC memory data area IR0 10001Hex
series data address: 10001 hex address
area
MOV(021) CS/CJ-series PLC PLC Setup
address:
memory address: Indirect DM data:
#1234 CS/CJ-series When indirect DM addresses are in binary, the
data area D0001 10001Hex
content of the DM word is treated as a PLC
address
memory address and specifies the
Same CV-series PLC corresponding address in I/O memory.
CV-series data
memory address: D00200 2001Hex
2001Hex CV-series data *DM specification
area address D0001 area address CV-series PLC
memory address
CV-series data
CS/CJ-series D00200 2001Hex area address D0001 #1234 2001Hex
data area Transfer contents of
address
D00200 to CV-series.
#1234
3-31-9 DISABLE PERIPHERAL SERVICING: IOSP(287) (CS1-H/CJ1-H/

CJ1M Only)
Purpose Disables peripheral servicing during program execution in Parallel Processing
Mode or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
For details on the Parallel Processing Mode and Peripheral Servicing Priority
Mode, refer to Section 6 Advanced Functions in the CS/CJ PLC Programming
Manual.
Note This instruction is supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units only. It
cannot be used with CS1, CJ1, or CS1D CPU Units.
Ladder Symbol
IOSP(287)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition IOSP(287)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @IOSP(287)

Description Use IOSP(287) in a cyclic task in Parallel Processing Mode (with Synchro-
nous or Asynchronous Memory Access) to disable the following kinds of
peripheral servicing. Peripheral servicing will be enabled again when
IORS(288), the ENABLE PERIPHERAL SERVICING instruction, is executed.
• Event servicing with Special I/O Units
• Event servicing with CPU Bus Units
1183
• Peripheral Port servicing

• RS-232C Port servicing
• Event servicing with Inner Boards (CS-series only)
• Event servicing (including background instruction processing) that uses a
communications port number, i.e., an internal logical port.
Execution condition
IOSP Disables execution of

peripheral servicing.
Execution of peripheral
servicing is disabled
between IOSP(287) and
IORS(288).
IORS Enables execution of

When peripheral servicing has been disabled with IOSP(287), it will remain
disabled until IORS(288) is executed, END(001) is executed, or PLC opera-
tion is stopped.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if IOSP(287) is executed in an interrupt task.
Precautions IOSP(287) cannot be executed in an interrupt task. An error will occur and the
Error Flag will be turned ON if IOSP(287) is executed in an interrupt task.
IOSP(287) cannot disable peripheral servicing in more than one task. If it is
necessary to disable peripheral servicing in more than one task, program
IOSP(287) separately in each task.
1184
Example The following example shows IOSP(287) and IORS(288) used to disable
peripheral servicing in a program section.
W00000 When the PLC is in
Parallel Processing
IOSP Mode, peripheral
servicing is executed in
parallel.
When W00000 is ON,

execution of peripheral
servicing is disabled
between IOSP(287) and
IORS(288).
Enables execution of
IORS When the PLC is in
Parallel Processing
Mode, peripheral
servicing is executed in
parallel.
3-31-10 ENABLE PERIPHERAL SERVICING: IORS(288) (CS1-H/CJ1-H/

CJ1M Only)
Purpose Enables the peripheral servicing during program execution in Parallel Pro-
cessing Mode that was disabled by IOSP(287), the DISABLE PERIPHERAL
SERVICING instruction.
This instruction is supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units only.
Ladder Symbol
IORS(288)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition IORS(288)

Description Use IORS(288) in a cyclic task to release the prohibition on peripheral servic-
ing by IOSP(287), the DISABLE PERIPHERAL SERVICING instruction.
It is not necessary to program IORS(288) with an execution condition.
IORS(288) cannot be executed in an interrupt task. An error will occur and the
Error Flag will be turned ON if IORS(288) is executed in an interrupt task.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if IORS(288) is executed in an interrupt task.
1185
Block Programming Instructions Section 3-32
3-32 Block Programming Instructions

This section describes block programs and the block programming instruc-
tions.
BLOCK PROGRAM BEGIN BPRG 096 1191
BLOCK PROGRAM END BEND 801 1191
BLOCK PROGRAM PAUSE BPPS 811 1193
BLOCK PROGRAM RESTART BPRS 812 1193
CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT EXIT (NOT) 806 1199
(NOT)
IF (NOT) IF (NOT) 802 1196
ELSE ELSE 803 1196
IF END IEND 804 1196
ONE CYCLE AND WAIT (NOT) WAIT (NOT) 805 1202
HUNDRED-MS TIMER WAIT TIMW (BCD) 813 1206
TIMWX (binary) 816
COUNTER WAIT CNTW (BCD) 814 1209
CNTWX (binary) 818
TEN-MS TIMER WAIT TMHW (BCD) 817 1212
TMHWX 815
(binary)
LOOP LOOP 809 1215
LOOP END (NOT) LEND (NOT) 810 1215
3-32-1 Introduction
Block Programs
Up to 128 block programs within the overall user program (all tasks) with the
CS/CJ-series. The execution of each block program is controlled by a single
execution condition. All instructions between BPRG(096) and BEND<801) are
executed unconditionally when the execution condition for BPRG(096) is
turned ON. The execution of all the block programming instructions except for
BPRG(096) is not affected by the execution condition. This allow program-
ming that is to be executed under a single execution condition to be grouped
together in one block program.
Each block is started by one execution condition in the ladder diagram and all
instructions within the block are written in mnemonic form. The block program
is thus a combination of ladder and mnemonic instructions.
Block programs enable programming operations that can be difficult to pro-
gram with ladder diagrams, such as conditional branches and step progres-
sions.
1186
The following example shows two block programs.
Block program area No. 1

1
When CIO 000000 is ON, the contents
of block program 1 will be executed.
The MOV(021) and SET instructions
will be executed unconditionally and
the block program will end.
2 Block program area No. 2

When CIO 000001 is ON, the contents
of block program 2 will be executed. If
CIO 000003 and CIO 000004 are both
ON, the binary addition will be performed
(CIO 0002 + #000A→D00001).
If one or both of these bits is OFF,
#0001 will be moved to D00001. CIO
000015 will then be set unconditionally
and the block program will end.
Tasks and Block Programs

Block programs can be located within tasks. While tasks are used to divide
large programming units, block programs can be used within tasks to further
divide programming into smaller units controlled with a single ladder diagram
Just like tasks, block programs that are that are not executed (i.e., which have
an OFF execution condition) do not require execution time and can thus be
used to reduce the cycle time (somewhat the same as jumps). Also like tasks,
other blocks can be paused or restarted from within a block program.
There are, however, differences between tasks and block programs. One dif-
ference is that input conditions are not used with block programs unless inten-
tionally programmed with IF(802), WAIT(805), EXIT(806), IEND(810) or other
instructions. Also, there are some instructions that cannot be used within
block programs, such as those that detect upward and downward differentia-
tion.
Block programs can be used either within cyclic tasks or interrupt tasks. Each
block program number from 0 to 127 can be used only once and cannot be
use again, even in a different task.
1187
Program
Task 1 Block program 001
Block program n
Task 2
Task n
Using Block Programming Instructions

Basically speaking, IF(802), ELSE(803), and IEND(810) are used for execu-
tion conditions (along with bits) inside block programs.
If “A” or “B” is to be executed then IF A ELSE B IEND are used as shown
below.
Execution
Execution

If “A” or nothing is to be executed, IF A IEND are used as shown below.

Execution
Execution
"A" executed (be-

tween IF and IEND).
If execution is to wait until an execution condition or bit is ON (e.g., for step

progressions), then WAIT(805) is used.
If execution is to wait until for a specified period of time (e.g., for timed step
progressions), then TIMW(813), TIMX(816), TMHW(815), or TMHWX(817) is
used.
If execution is to wait until for a specified count has been reached (e.g., for
step progressions with counters), then CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818) is used.
If execution is to be repeated within part of a block program until a condition is
met, then LOOP(809) and LEND(810) are used.
If execution of the block program is to be ended in the middle based on an
execution condition, the EXIT(806) is used.
If another block program that is being executed is to be paused or restarted
from within a block program, then BPPS(811) and BPRS(812) are used.
1188
Instructions Taking Execution Conditions within Block Programs

The following instruction can take execution conditions within a block pro-
gram.
Instruction type Instruction Mnemonic
name
Block programming instructions IF (NOT) IF(802) (NOT)
ONE CYCLE WAIT(805)
AND WAIT (NOT) (NOT)
EXIT EXIT(806) NOT
LOOP END LEND(810) NOT
Ladder diagram instructions CONDITIONAL CJP(510)
JUMP
CONDITIONAL CJPN(511)
JUMP NOT
Instructions with Application Restrictions within Block Programs

The instructions listed in the following table can be used only to create execu-
tion conditions for IF(802), WAIT(805), EXIT(806), LEND(810), CJP(510, or
CJPN(511) and cannot be used by themselves. The execution of these
instructions may be unpredictable if used by themselves or in combination
with any other instructions.
Mnemonic Name
LD/LD NOT LOAD/LOAD NOT
AND/AND NOT AND/AND NOT
OR/OR NOT OR/OR NOT
UP/DOWN CONDITION ON/CONDITION OFF
>, <,=, >=, <=, <> (S) (L) Symbol Comparison Instruction (not
right-hand instructions)
LD TST/TST NOT LOAD Bit Test Instructions
AND TST/TST NOT AND Bit Test Instructions
OR TST/TST NOT OR Bit Test Instructions
>$, <$,=$, >=$, <=$, <>$ Text String Comparison Instruction
Good Example Bad Example
Used as Cannot be
execution used as
condition execution
for IF. condition
for
MOV(021).
Instructions Not Applicable in Block Programs

The instructions listed in the following table cannot be used within block pro-
grams.
Instruction Mnemonic Name Alternative
group
Sequence OUT OUTPUT Use SET and RSET.
Output OUT NOT OUTPUT NOT
Instructions
DIFU(013) DIFFERENTIATE UP None
DIFD(014) DIFFERENTIATE DOWN None
KEEP(011) KEEP None
1189
Instruction Mnemonic Name Alternative

group
Sequence FOR(512) FOR-NEXT LOOPS Use LOOP(809) and
Control and LEND(810) (NOT).
Instructions NEXT(513)
BREAK(514) BREAK LOOP
IL(002) and INTERLOCK and INTER- Divide the block program
ILC(003) LOCK CLEAR into smaller blocks.
JMP(004)0 Multiple JUMP and Multi- Use JMP(004 and
and ple JUMP END JME(005) (but the jump will
JME(005) 0 be made unconditionally).
END(001) END Use BEND(801).
Timer and TIM and HUNDRED-MS TIMER Use TIMW(813),
Counter TIMX(550) TIMWX(816), TMHW(815),
Instructions TIMH(015) TEN-MS TIMER TMHWX(817),
and CNTW(814), and
TIMHX(551) CNTWX(818). Other
instructions in the block
TMHH(540) ONE-MS TIMER program will not be exe-
and TIM- cuted until the timer times
HHX(552) out or the counter counts
TIMU(541) TENTH-MS TIMER out.
and (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only)
TIMUX(556)
TIMUH(544) HUNDREDTH-MS TIMER
and (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only)
TIMUHX
(557)
TTIM(087) ACCUMULATIVE TIMER
and
TTIMX(555)
TIML(542) LONG TIMER
and
TIMLX(553)
MTIM(543) MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER
and
MTIMX(554)
CNT and COUNTER
CNTX(546)
CNTR(012) REVERSIBLE COUNTER
and CNTRX
(548)
Subroutine SBN(092) SUBROUTINE ENTRY None
Instructions and and SUBROUTINE
RET(093) RETURN
Shift Instruc- SFT(010) SHIFT REGISTER Use other Shift Instruc-
tions tions.
Step Instruc- STEP(008) STEP and STEP NEXT Use WAIT(805).
tions and SNXT
(009)
Data Con- PID(190) PID CONTROL None
trol Instruc-
tions
Diagnostic FPD(269) FAILURE POINT DETEC- None
Instructions TION
Upward and Mnemonics Upward Differentiated None
Downward with @ Instructions
Differenti- Mnemonics Downward Differentiated None
ated Instruc- with % Instructions
tions
1190
3-32-2 BLOCK PROGRAM BEGIN/END: BPRG(096)/BEND(801)

Purpose Define a block programming area. For every BPRG(096) there must be a cor-
responding BEND(801).
Ladder Symbols BLOCK PROGRAM BEGIN
BPRG(096)
N N: Block program number
BLOCK PROGRAM END
BEND(801)
Variations BPRG(096)
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BPRG(096)
BEND(801)
Variations Always Executed in Block Program

(See note.) OK OK OK
Note BPRG(096) is allowed only once at the beginning of each block program.
Operands N: Block Program Number

The block program number must be between 0 and 127 decimal.
(BPRG(096)) Area N
CIO Area ---
Work Area ---
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
1191
Description BPRG(096) executes the block program with the block number designated in
N, i.e., the one immediately after it and ending with BEND(801). All instruc-
tions between BPRG(096) and BEND(801) are executed with ON execution
conditions (i.e., unconditionally).
Block program
Executed when the execu-
tion condition is ON.
When the execution condition for BPRG(096) is OFF, the block program will
not be executed and no execution time will be required for the instruction in
the block program.
Execution of the block program can be stopped using BPPS(811) from within
another block program even if the execution condition for BPRG(096) is ON.
Flags BPRG(096)
Error Flag ER ON if BPRG(096) is already being executed.
ON if N is not between 0 and 127.
ON if the same block program number is used more than
once.
BEND(801)
Error Flag ER ON if a block program is not being executed.
Precautions Each block program number can be used only once within the entire user pro-
gram.
Block programs cannot be nested.
Nesting NOT possible.
If the block program is in an interlocked program section and the execution

condition for IL(002) is OFF, the block program will not be executed.
1192
BPRG(096) and the corresponding BEND(801) must be in the same task.

An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if BPRG(096) is in the mid-
dle of a block program, BEND(801) is not in a block program, N is not between
#0000 and #007F (binary), there is no block program, or if the same block pro-
gram number is used more than once.
Examples When CIO 000000 turns ON in the following example, block program 0 will be
executed. When CIO 000000 is OFF, the block program will not be executed.
Block program 0
The two program sections shown below both execute MOV(021), ++B(594),
and SET for the same execution condition (i.e., when CIO 000000 turns ON).
3-32-3 BLOCK PROGRAM PAUSE/RESTART: BPPS(811)/BPRS(812)

Purpose Pause and restart the specified block program from another block program.
Ladder Symbol
BPPS(811) N N: Block program number
BPRS(812) N
Variations
1193

OK OK OK OK
Note BPRG(096) and BPRS(812) must be used in block programming regions even
within subroutines and interrupt tasks.
Operands N: Block Program Number

The block program number must be between 0 and 127 decimal.
Area N
CIO Area ---
Work Area ---
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Description BPPS(811) is used inside one block program to pause the execution of
another block program specified by N, the block program number. The block
program that is paused with BPPS(811) even if the BPRG(096) for the block
program has an ON execution condition. The block program will not be
restarted until BPRS(812) is executed for it.
BPRS(812) restarts the block program specified by N, the block program num-
ber. Once restarted, the block program will be executed as long as the
BPRG(096) for the block program has an ON execution condition.
to to
BPPS(811) executed BPRS(812) executed
to for block program n. to for block program n.
Block program n. Once Block program n. This block

to paused this block program to program will now be executed
will not be executed even as long as bit "a" is ON.
if bit "a" is ON.
1194
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if BPPS(811) or BPRS(812) is not in a block program.
ON if N is not between 0 and 127.
Precautions An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if BPPS(811) or BPRS(812)
is not in a block program or if N is not between #0000 and #007F (binary).
BPPS(811) can be used to pause the block program that contains it. When
the block program is then restarted using BPRS(812) from another block pro-
gram, the paused block program will restart from the next instruction after
BPPS(811).
If a paused block program contains TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), or
TMHWX(817), the PV of the time will continue to elapse even while the block
program is paused.
Examples The following diagram shows a basic example of pausing a block program.
0
Block program 0
Block program 1 will be paused if CIO 000000

and CIO 000001 are both ON.
1
Block program 1 If the BPPS(811) in block program 0 has
been executed, block program 1 will not be
executed even if CIO 000002 is ON.
Note If the block program that is being paused appears after BPPS(811), it will not
be executed. If the block program appears before BPPS(811), it will be
paused starting the next cycle.
If CIO 000000 is ON, the following program pauses execution of either block
program 1 or block program 2 depending on the status of CIO 000001. The
block program that was paused is then restarted after 10 seconds.

000000 LD 000000
0 000001 BPRG(096) 00
000002 IF(802) 000001
Pauses block program 1 000003 BPPS(811) 01
Pauses block program 2 000004 ELSE(803)
000005 BPPS(811) 02
000006 IEND(804)
Restarts block program 1 000007 TIMW(803) 0000
Restarts block program 2 # 0100
000008 BPRS(812) 1
000009 BPRS(812) 2
000010 BEND(801)
1195
3-32-4 Branching: IF(802), ELSE(803), and IEND(804)

Purpose Branches the block program either based on an execution condition or on the
status of an operand bit.
Ladder Symbol
IF(802) B B: Bit operand
IF(802)
IF(802) NOT B
ELSE(803)
IEND(804)
Variations

OK OK OK OK
Note IF(802), ELSE(803), and IEND(804) must be used in block programming

regions even within subroutines and interrupt tasks.
Area B
A44800 to A95915
Task Flags TK0000 to TK0031
Condition Flags ER, CY, >, =, <, N, OF, UF, >=, <>, <=, ON, OFF, AER
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
1196
Description Operation without an Operand for IF(802)

If an operand bit is not specified, an execution must be created before IF(802)
starting with LD. If the execution condition is ON, the instructions between
IF(802) and ELSE(803) will be executed and if the execution condition is OFF,
the instructions between ELSE(803) and IEND(804) will be executed.
Execution
Execution

If the ELSE(803) instruction is omitted and the execution condition is ON, the
instructions between IF(802) and IEND(804) will be executed and if the execu-
tion condition is OFF, only the instructions after IEND(804) will be executed.
Execution
Execution
"A" executed (be-

tween IF and IEND).
Operation with an Operand for IF(802) or IF NOT(802)

An operand bit, B, can be specified for IF(802) or IF NOT(802). If the operand
bit is ON, the instructions between IF(802) and ELSE(803) will be executed. If
the operand bit is OFF, the instructions between ELSE(803) and IEND(804)
will be executed. For IF NOT(802), the instructions between IF(802) and
ELSE(803) will be executed and if the operand bit is ON, the instructions be
ELSE(803) and IEND(804) will be executed is the operand bit is OFF.
Operand bit
ON?

If the ELSE(803) instruction is omitted and the operand bit is ON, the instruc-
tions between IF(802) and IEND(804) will be executed and if the operand bit
is OFF, only the instructions after IEND(804) will be executed. The same will
happen for the opposite status of the operand bit if IF NOT(802) is used.
1197
Operand bit
ON?
"A" executed (be-

tween IF and IEND).
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the branch instructions are not in a block program.
ON if more than 254 branches are nested.
Precautions Instructions in block programs are generally executed unconditionally. Branch-

ing, however, can be used to create conditional execution based on execution
conditions or operand bits.
Use IF A ELSE B IEND to branch between A and B.
Use IF A IEND to branch between A and doing nothing.
Branches can be nested to up to 253 levels.
A error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if the branch instructions are
not in a block program or if more than 254 branches are nested.
Nesting Branches Up to 253 branches can be nested within the top level branch.
Examples The following example shows two different block programs controlled by
CIO 000000 and CIO 000002.
The first block executes one of two additions depending on the status of
CIO 000001. This block is executed when CIO 000000 is ON. If CIO 000001
is ON, 0001 is added to the contents of CIO 0001. If CIO 000001 is OFF, 0002
is added to the contents of CIO 0001. In either case, the result is placed in
D00000.
The second block is executed when CIO 000002 is ON and shows nesting
two levels. If CIO 000003 and CIO 000004 are both ON, the contents of
CIO 1200 and CIO 0002 are added and the result is placed in D00010 and
then 0001 is moved into D00011 based on the status of CY. If either
CIO 000003 or CIO 000004 is OFF, then the entire addition operation is
skipped and CIO 000301 is turned ON.
1198
000000 Address Instruction Operands

000000 LD 000000
000001 BPRG(096) 00
0
000002 IF(802) 000001
IF(802) 000001 000003 +B(404)
+B(404)
0001
0001
#0001 #0001
D00000
ELSE(803) D00000
+B(404) 000004 ELSE(803)
0001
#0002 000005 +B(404)
D00000
0001
IEND(804)
BEND(801) #0002
000002 D00000
000006 IEND(804)
1 000007 BEND(801)
000008 LD 000002
LD 000003 000009 BPRG(096) 1
AND 000004
IF(802) 000010 LD 000003
+B(404) 000011 AND 000004
1200
0002 000012 IF(802)
D00010
CY
000013 +B(404)
IF(802)
MOV(030) 1200
#0001
D00011 0002
IEND(804) D00010
ELSE(803) 000014 IF(802) A50004
SET(016) 000301
IEND(804) 000015 MOV(030)
BEND(801)
#0001
D00011
000016 IEND(804)
000017 ELSE(803)
000018 SET(016) 000301
000019 IEND(804)
000020 BEND(801)
3-32-5 CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT (NOT): EXIT (NOT)(806)

Purpose Exists the block program (i.e., does not execute any other instruction in the
block program through BEND(801) depending on the status of the operand bit
or on the execution condition. EXIT(806) without an operand bit exits the pro-
gram if the execution condition is ON. EXIT(806) with an operand bit exits the
program if the bit is ON. EXIT NOT(806) must have an operand bit and exits
the program if the bit is OFF.
Ladder Symbol EXIT(806)

EXIT(806) B B: Bit operand
EXIT NOT(806) B
1199
Variations
Variations Always Executed in Block Program EXIT(806)
EXIT(806) B
EXIT NOT(806) B

OK OK OK OK
Note EXIT(806) and EXIT NOT(806) must be used in block programming regions
even within subroutines and interrupt tasks.
Area B
A44800 to A95915
Condition Flags ER, CY, >, =, <, N, OF, UF, >=, <>, <=, ON, OFF, AER
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description Operation without an Operand

EXIT(806) can be executed without an operand. If it is, then an execution con-
dition must be created for it starting with LD. If the execution condition is OFF,
the rest of the block program will be executed normally. If the execution condi-
tion is ON, the rest of the instructions in the block program through
BEND(801) will not be executed.
1200
Execution Execution
condition condition
OFF ON
Execution condition
"B" executed.
Block ended.
Operation with an Operand

If the operand bit, B, is OFF for EXIT(806) the rest of the block program will be
executed normally. If the operand bit is ON for EXIT(806), the rest of the
instructions in the block program through BEND(801) will not be executed. For
EXIT NOT(806), the rest of the block program will be executed for if the oper-
and bit is ON and skipped if the operand bit is OFF.
Operand bit Operand bit
OFF ON
(ON for EXIT (OFF for EXIT
NOT) NOT)
"B" executed.
Block ended.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if EXIT(806) or EXIT NOT(806) is not in a block pro-
gram.
Precautions An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if EXIT(806) or EXIT
NOT(806) is not in a block program.
Examples When CIO 000000 is OFF, the block program is executed. If CIO 000001 is
ON, A is executed and then B is skipped and program control jumps to
BEND(801). Section B of the program will continue to be skipped until
CIO 000001 turns OFF again.
Although EXIT (NOT)(806) is similar to IF-IEND programming, execution time
is normally shorter for EXIT (NOT)(806) because the instructions from EXIT
(NOT)(806) to the end of the block program are not executed at all.
1201
CIO 000001 ON CIO 000001 OFF
Block ended
CIO 000003 and CIO 000003 or

2 CIO 000004 ON CIO 000004 OFF
Block ended
3-32-6 ONE CYCLE AND WAIT (NOT): WAIT(805)/WAIT(805) NOT

Purpose Stops execution of the rest of the block program until an execution condition
turns ON or an operand bit turns ON or OFF.
Ladder Symbol
WAIT(805)
WAIT(805) B B: Bit operand
WAIT(805) NOT B
Variations

OK OK OK OK
Note WAIT(805)/WAIT(805) NOT must be used in block programming regions even

Area B
A44800 to A95915
Condition Flags ER, CY, >, =, <, N, OF, UF, >=, <>, <=ON, OFF, AER
1202
Area B
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description Operation without an Operand

If an operand bit is not specified, an execution must be created before
WAIT(805)/WAIT(805 NOT starting with LD. If the execution condition is ON
for WAIT(805), the rest of the instruction in the block program will be skipped.
In the next cycle, none of the block program will be executed except for the
execution condition for WAIT(805). When the execution condition goes ON,
the instruction from WAIT(805) to the end of the program will be executed.
Execution Execution Execution
condition condition condition
OFF OFF ON
"A"
executed.
Execution "B" executed.

condition

executed. executed.
Wait
1203
Operation with an Operand

An operand bit, B, can be specified for WAIT(805) or WAIT NOT(805). If the
operand bit is OFF (ON for WAIT NOT(805)), the rest of the instructions in the
block program will be skipped. In the next cycle, none of the block program will
be executed except for the execution condition for WAIT(805) or WAIT(805)
NOT. When the execution condition goes ON (OFF for WAIT(805) NOT), the
instruction from WAIT(805) or WAIT(805) NOT to the end of the program will
be executed.
Operand bit Operand bit Operand bit
OFF OFF ON
"A"
executed.
"B" executed.

executed. executed.
Wait
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if WAIT(805) or WAIT(805) NOT is not in a block pro-
gram.
Precautions WAIT(805) and WAIT(805) NOT can be used for step progressions inside
block programs.
An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if WAIT(805) or WAIT(805)
NOT is not in a block program.
Note The program addresses of WAIT instructions with operands specified and the
program addresses of the first instruction creating the execution conditions for
WAIT instructions without operands are recorded in memory to enable execu-
tion to be continued based on the execution condition/bit operand. If online
editing performed from a Peripheral Device, however, the WAIT status will be
cleared and the block program will again be executed from the beginning.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, block program 00 will be
executed. Execution would proceed as follows:
1,2,3... 1. If CIO 000001 is OFF, none of the block program will be executed until
CIO 000001 turns ON. When CIO 000001 turns ON, “A” will be executed.
2. If CIO 000002 is OFF after “A” is executed, the rest of the block program
will not be executed until CIO 000002 turns ON. When CIO 000002 turns
ON, “B” will be executed
3. If CIO 000003 is OFF after “B” is executed, the rest of the block program
will not be executed until CIO 000003 turns ON. When CIO 000003 turns
ON, “C” will be executed and the execution process will be repeated.
1204
CIO 00000
1 ON, CIO 000001,
CIO 00000 CIO 00000 CIO 00002,
CIO 000 1 ON and 2 ON and and
0 001 CIO 00000 CIO 00000 CIO 000003
OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF ON
The following table shown the relationship between the operand bits and block
program execution.
Operand bits Program execution
CIO 000001 CIO 000002 CIO 000003 First cycle CIO 000000 Next cycle Following cycles
is ON
OFF Any status Any status Nothing executed. Nothing executed; wait- When CIO 000001
ing for CIO 000001. turns ON “A” is exe-
cuted and the status of
CIO 000002 is checked.
ON OFF Any status “A” executed. Waiting for CIO 000002. When CIO 000002
turns ON “B” is exe-
cuted and the status of
CIO 000003 is checked.
ON ON OFF “A” and “B” executed. Waiting for CIO 000003. When CIO 000003
turns ON “C” is exe-
cuted
ON ON ON “A,” “B,” and “C” exe- “A,” “B,” and “C” exe-
cuted. cuted.
As shown in this example, WAIT(805) and WAIT(805) NOT can be used to

progressively execute steps within a block program.
Note No block programming instructions will be executed while the input condition
for WAIT(805) is OFF. The other block programming instructions will be exe-
cuted again after the input condition for WAIT(805) turns ON. If, however,
online editing is executed for a task containing a block program, the wait sta-
tus created by WAIT(805) will be cleared and the block program will be exe-
cuted again from the beginning.
1205
3-32-7 HUNDRED-MS TIMER WAIT: TIMW(813) and TIMWX(816)

Purpose Delays execution of the rest of the block program until the specified time has
elapsed. Execution will be continued from the next instruction after
TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816) when the timer times out.
Ladder Symbol PV Refresh Method: BCD
TIMW(813) N N: Timer number
SV SV: Set value
PV Refresh Method: Binary

TIMWX(816) N N: Timer number
SV SV: Set value
Variations

OK OK OK Not allowed.
Note TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816) must be used in block programming regions even

within subroutines.

BCD: 0 to 4095 (decimal)
Binary: 0 to 4095 (decimal)
S: Set Value
BCD: #0000 to #9999 (BCD)
Binary: &0 to &65535 (decimal)
Area N SV
A448 to A959
Timer Area 0000 to 4095 T0000 to T4095
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
1206
Area N SV
Constants --- BCD:
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Binary:
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816) creates an ON-delay countdown timer (100-ms timer

set in SV) between execution of the block program instruction preceding it and
the instructions following. TIMW(813) can time from 0 to 999.9 s with a timer
accuracy of 0 to 0.01 s. TIMWX(816) can time from 0 to 6,553.5 s with a timer
accuracy of 0 to 0.01 s.
Note The timer accuracy for CS1D CPU Units is 10 ms + the cycle time.
The first part of the block program is executed the first time the block program
is entered. When TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816) is reached, the Completion Flag is
reset to OFF, the timer is preset to the SV, and execution of the rest of the
block program will wait until SV has expired.
While the timer is timing down, only TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816) will be executed
to update the timer. When the timer times out, the Completion Flag will turn
ON and the rest of the block program will be executed. Once the entire block
program has been executed, the process will be repeated.
TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816) can be thought of as a WAIT instruction with a timer
for the execution condition and it can thus be used for timed step progres-
sions.
"A"
executed
and SV
preset.
Time elapsed.
"B" executed.
"C" executed.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816) is not in a block program.
ON if an indirect IR designation is used for N in BCD
mode and the address is not for a timer present value.
ON if in BCD mode and SV is not BCD.
1207
Precautions The rest of the block program following timer will be executed if the Comple-
tion Flag for the timer is force set.
If the Completion Flag for the timer is force reset, only TIMW(813)/
TIMWX(816)) will be executed in the block program until the force reset status
is cleared.
on standby.
The timer numbers are also used by the other timer instructions. Operation
will not be predictable if the same timer number is used for more than one
timer instruction. Use each timer number only once. The only way that the
same timer number can be used dependably is if only one of the timers is ever
operating at the same time. An error will occur in the program check if the
same timer number is used in more than one timer instruction.
An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if an indirect IR designation
is used for N in BCD mode and the address is not for a timer present value or
if SV is not BCD.
The timer will not operate correctly if the cycle time is 100 ms or longer.
Note No block programming instructions will be executed after the input condition
for TIMW(813) turns ON until TIMW(813) times out. The other block program-
ming instructions will be executed again after the set time for TIMW(813) has
expired. If, however, online editing is executed for a task containing a block
program, the wait status created by TIMW(813) will be cleared and the block
program will be executed again from the beginning.
Examples In the following example, “B” will be executed 20 seconds after “A” whenever
CIO 000000 is ON.
Timer times out.

000200 LD 000000
000201 BPRG 0
. A .
. .
000210 TIMW 0001
#0200
. B .
. .
000220 BEND ---
1208
Program execution will flow from 2 to 3 to 4 and back to 2 during the 20 s

before “B” is executed, as shown in the following diagram.
1 4
3-32-8 COUNTER WAIT: CNTW(814) and CNTWX(818)

Purpose Delays execution of the rest of the block program until the specified count has
been achieved. Execution will be continued from the next instruction after
CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818) when the counter counts out.

CNTW(814) N N: Counter number
SV SV: Set value
I I: Count input

CNTWX(818) N N: Counter number
SV SV: Set value
I I: Count input
Variations

OK OK OK OK
Note CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818) must be used in block programming regions even


S: Set Value
BCD: #0000 to #9999 (BCD)
1209
Area N SV I
CIO Area --- CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 CIO 000000 to
CIO 614315
Work Area --- W000 to W511 W00000 to
W51115
Holding Bit Area --- H000 to H511 H00000 to
H51115
Auxiliary Bit Area --- A000 to A447 A00000 to
A448 to A959 A44715
A44800 to
A95915
Counter Area C0000 to C0000 to C4095 C0000 to C4095
C4095
Task Flags --- TK0000 to
TK0031
Condition Flags --- ER, CY, >, =, <, N,
OF, UF, >=, <>,
<=, ON,OFF, AER
Clock Pulses --- 0.02 s, 0.1 s, 0.2
s, 1 s, 1 min
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767 ---
EM Area without bank --- E00000 to E32767 ---
EM Area with bank --- En_00000 to En_32767 ---
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM --- @ D00000 to @ D32767 ---
@ En_00000 to @
En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Indirect DM/EM --- *D00000 to *D32767 ---
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- BCD: ---
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Binary:
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818) creates a decrementing counter that delays execu-

tion of the instructions following it in the block program until the counter has
counted out. The set value for CNTW(814) is specified in BCD between 0000
and 9999. The set value for CNTWX(818) is specified in binary between 0000
and FFFF hex.
1210
is entered. When CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818) is reached, the Completion Flag
is reset to 0, the counter is preset to SV, and execution of the rest of the block
program will wait until the counter has counted out. The counter counts pulses
(upward differentiation) on I, the counter input.
While the counter is counting down, only CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818) will be
executed to update the counter. When the counter counts out, the Completion
Flag will turn ON and the rest of the block program will be executed. Once the
entire block program has been executed, the process will be repeated.
CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818) can be thought of as a WAIT instruction with a
counter for the execution condition and it can thus be used for timed step pro-
gressions.
"A"
executed.
SV preset.
Count reached.
"B" executed.
"C" "C" "C"

executed. executed. executed.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818) is not in a block program.
mode and the address is not for a counter present value.
ON if SV is not BCD when BCD mode is set.
Precautions The rest of the block program following CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818) will be exe-
cuted if the Completion Flag for the counter is force set.
If the Completion Flag for the counter is force reset, the only CNTW(814)/
CNTWX(818) will be executed in the block program until the force reset status
is cleared.
The counter numbers are also used by the other counter instructions. Opera-
tion will not be predictable if the same counter number is used for more than
one counter instruction. Use each counter number only once. The only way
that the same counter number can be used dependably is if only one of the
counters is ever operating at the same time. An error will occur in the program
check if the same counter number is used in more than one counter instruc-
tion.
is used for N in BCD mode and the address is not for a counter present value
or if SV is not BCD when BCD mode is set.
1211
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, “A” will be executed and
then execution of the rest of the block program “B” will wait until 7,000 counts
of CIO 000100.
0 CIO 000100
counted.
Updated
Updated
Counter counts out.

000200 LD 000000
000201 BPRG 0
. A .
. .
000210 CNTW 0005
#7000
000100
. B .
. .
000220 BEND ---
Program execution will flow from 2 to 3 to 4 and back to 2 during the 7,000
counts before “B” is executed, as shown in the following diagram.
1 4
3-32-9 TEN-MS TIMER WAIT: TMHW(815) and TMHWX(817)

Purpose Delays execution of the rest of the block program until the specified time has
elapsed. Execution will be continued from the next instruction after
TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817) when the timer times out.
TMHW(815) N N: Timer number
SV SV: Set value

TMHWX(817) N N: Timer number
SV SV: Set value
1212
Variations

OK OK OK Not allowed.
Note TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817) must be used in block programming regions even

within subroutines.

S: Set Value
BCD: #0000 to #9999 (BCD)
Area N SV
A448 to A959
Timer Area 0000 to 4095 T0000 to T4095
DM Area --- D00000 to D32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to
@ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- BCD:
#0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Binary:
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
1213
Description TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817) creates an ON-delay countdown timer (10-ms

timer set in SV) between execution of the block program instruction preceding
it and the instructions following. TMHW(815) can time from 0 to 99.99 s with a
timer accuracy of 0 to 0.01 s. TMHWX(817) can time from 0 to 655.35 s with a
timer accuracy of 0 to 0.01 s.
Note The timer accuracy for CS1D CPU Units is 10 ms + the cycle time.
is entered. When TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817) is reached, the Completion Flag
is reset to OFF, the timer is preset to the SV, and execution of the rest of the
block program will wait until SV has expired.
While the timer is timing down, only TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817) will be exe-
cuted to update the timer. When the timer times out, the Completion Flag will
turn ON and the rest of the block program will be executed. Once the entire
block program has been executed, the process will be repeated.
TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817) can be thought of as a WAIT instruction with a
timer for the execution condition and it can thus be used for timed step pro-
gressions.
"A"
executed.
SV preset.
Time elapsed.
"B" executed.
"C" executed.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817) is not in a block pro-
gram.
mode and the address is not for a timer present value.
ON if in BCD mode and SV is not BCD.
Precautions The rest of the block program following TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817) will be exe-
cuted if the Completion Flag for the timer is force set.
If the Completion Flag for the timer is force reset, the only TMHW(815)/
TMHWX(817) will be executed in the block program until the force reset status
is cleared.
on standby.
The timer numbers are also used by the other timer instructions. Operation
will not be predictable if the same timer number is used for more than one
timer instruction. Use each timer number only once. The only way that the
same timer number can be used dependably is if only one of the timers is ever
1214
operating at the same time. An error will occur in the program check if the
same timer number is used in more than one timer instruction.
is used for N in BCD mode and the address is not for a timer present value or
if SV is not BCD.
The timer will not operate correctly if the cycle time is 100 ms or longer.
Examples In the following example, “B” will be executed 20 seconds after “A” whenever
CIO 000000 is ON.

000221 LD 000001
000222 BPRG 1
. A .
. .
000250 TMHW 0002
#0020
. B .
. .
000281 BEND ---
3-32-10 Loop Control: LOOP(809)/LEND(810)/LEND(810) NOT

Purpose Create a loop that is repeatedly executed until an execution condition turns
ON or OFF or until an execution condition turns ON.
Ladder Symbol
LOOP(809)
LEND(810)
LEND(810) B B: Bit operand
LEND(810) NOT B
Variations

OK OK OK OK
Note LOOP(809), LEND(810), and LEND(810) NOT must be used in block pro-
gramming regions even within subroutines and interrupt tasks.
1215
Area B
A44800 to A95915
Condition Flags ER, CY, >, =, <, N, OF, UF, >=, <>, <=, ON,OFF, AER
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description LOOP(809) designates the beginning of the loop program. LEND(810) or

LEND(810) NOT specifies the end of the loop. When LEND(810) or
LEND(810) NOT is reached, program execution will loop back to the next pre-
vious LOOP(809) until the operand bit for LEND(810) or LEND(810) NOT
turns ON or OFF (respectively) or until the execution condition for LEND(810)
turns ON.
1216
Using an Execution Condition for LEND(810)

LEND(810) can be programmed either with or without an operand bit. If an
operand bit is not specified, an execution must be created before LEND(810)
starting with LD. If the execution condition is OFF, execution of the loop is
repeated starting with the next instruction after LOOP(809). If the execution
condition is ON, the loop is ended and execution continues to the next instruc-
tion after LEND(810).
Execution Execution Execution Execution
condition condition condition condition
ON OFF OFF OFF
Execution condition
Loop repeated
Using a Bit Operand for LEND(810) or LEND(810) NOT

Both LEND(810) and LEND(810) NOT can be programmed with an operand
bit. If the operand bit is OFF for LEND(810) (or ON for LEND(810) NOT), exe-
cution of the loop is repeated starting with the next instruction after
LOOP(809). If the operand bit is ON for LEND(810) (or OFF for LEND(810)
NOT), the loop is ended and execution continues to the next instruction after
LEND(810) or LEND(810) NOT.
Operand Operand Operand Operand
bit ON bit OFF bit OFF bit OFF
LEND R (LEND NOT B)
Loop repeated
Note The status of the operand bit would

be reversed for LEND(810) NOT.
Note 1. Execution inside a loop does not refresh I/O data. If I/O data must be re-
freshed during the loop, use IORF(184).
2. The maximum cycle time can be exceeded if loops are repeated too long.
Design the program so that the maximum cycle time is not exceeded.
1217
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if a Loop Control Instruction is not in a block program.
Precautions Loops cannot be nested within loops.

Incorrect:
LOOP(809)
LOOP(809)
LEND(810)
LEND(810)
Do not reverse the order of LOOP and LEND.
Incorrect:
LEND(810)
:
:
LOOP(809)
Conditional block branching can be used within a loop, but the entire branch
operation must be within the loop.
Correct: Incorrect:
LOOP(809) LOOP(809)
IF(802) IF(802)
IF(802) IF(802)
IEND(804) IEND(804)
IEND(804) LEND(810)
LEND(810) IEND(804)
NOP processing will be performed if LOOP(809) is not executed.
An error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON if a Loop Control Instruction
is not in a block program.
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the block program is exe-
cuted. After “A” is executed, “B” and the IORF(184) after it will be executed
repeatedly until CIO 000001 is ON, at which time C will be executed and the
block program will end.
1218
Execution Execution Execution

condition condition condition
ON OFF OFF
Repeating

000220 LD 000000
000201 BPRG 0
. A .
. .
000210 LOOP ---
. B .
. .
000220 IORF .
.
0000
0000
000221 LEND 000001
. C .
. .
000220 BEND ---
1219
Text String Processing Instructions Section 3-33
3-33 Text String Processing Instructions

This section describes instructions used to manipulate text strings.
MOV STRING MOV$ 664 1221
CONCATENATE STRING +$ 656 1223
GET STRING LEFT LEFT$ 652 1226
GET STRING RIGHT RGHT$ 653 1228
GET STRING MIDDLE MID$ 654 1230
FIND IN STRING FIND$ 660 1233
STRING LENGTH LEN$ 650 1235
REPLACE IN STRING RPLC$ 661 1237
DELETE STRING DEL$ 658 1240
EXCHANGE STRING XCHG$ 665 1242
CLEAR STRING CLR$ 666 1245
INSERT INTO STRING INS$ 657 1246
String Comparison Instructions =$, <>$, <$, <=$, 670 to 675 1250
>$, >=$
WRITE TEXT FILE TWRIT 704 1255
3-33-1 Text String Processing Overview

Data from the beginning until a NUL code (00 hex) is handled as text string
data expressed in ASCII (except for 1-byte, special characters). It is stored
from leftmost to rightmost bytes, and from rightmost to leftmost words.
When there is an odd number of characters, 00 hex (NUL code) is stored in
the available space in the rightmost byte of the final word.
Example: Text string ABCDE
42
=
When there is an even number of characters, 0000 hex (two NUL codes) is
stored in the leftmost and rightmost bytes of the word following the final word.
Example: Text string ABCD
42
=
As shown in the following diagram, a text string can be specified by simply

designating the first word of that string. The text string data up until the next
NUL code (00 hex) will then be handled as a single block of ASCII data.
Example: MOV$ D00000 D00100
Text string processing instructions can be used to execute at a PLC the vari-
ous kinds of text string processing (product data, and so on) that used to be
executed at the host computer.
1220
Text string
processing Host computer Host computer
PLC
Text string Text string
processing
For example, production plan data such as product names can be transferred
from the host computer to the PLC. Various operations such as inserting and
rearranging text strings can be then be performed at the PLC, thereby reduc-
ing the data processing load at the host computer.
ASCII Characters The ASCII characters that can be handled by text string processing instruc-
tions are shown in the following table.
Four leftmost bits
S
P
Four rightmost bits
3-33-2 MOV STRING: MOV$(664)

Purpose Transfers a text string.
Ladder Symbol
MOV$(664)
1221
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MOV$(664)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MOV$(664)

OK OK OK OK

15 0
S Text string data: 4,095 characters max. + NUL
to
S + maximum 2,047 words

15 0
D Text string data: 4,095 characters max. + NUL
to
D + maximum 2,047 words
Note 1. The data from S to S +the maximum 2,047 words and from D to D + the
maximum 2,047 words must be in the same area.
2. The data from S to S + the maximum 2,047 words and from D to D + the
maximum 2,047 words can overlap.
Area S D
A448 to A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
1222
Area S D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description MOV$(664) transfers the text string data designated by S, just as it is, as text
string data (including the final NUL), to D. The maximum number of characters
that can be designated by S is 4,095 (0FFF hex).
Note MOV$(664) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if more than 4,095 characters are designated by S.
Equals Flag = ON if 0000 (hex) is transferred to D.
Precautions If more than 4,095 characters are designated by S, an error will be generated
If 0000 (hex) is transferred to D, the Equals Flag will turn ON.
Example In this example, MOV$(664) is used to transfer the text string ABCDEF.
0
S: D:
3-33-3 CONCATENATE STRING: +$(656)

Purpose Links one text string to another text string.
Ladder Symbol
+$(656)
S1 S1: Text string 1
1223
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition +$(656)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @+$(656)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S1: Text String 1

15 0
S1 Text string data: 4,095 characters max. + NUL
to
S1 + maximum 2,047 words
S2: Text String 2

15 0
to

15 0
to
Note 1. The data from S1 to S1 + the maximum 2,047 words, from S2 to S2 + the
maximum 2,047 words, and from D to D + the maximum 2,047 words must
be in the same area.
2. The data from S2 to S2 + the maximum 2,047 words and from D to D + the
maximum 2,047 words cannot overlap.
Area S1 S2 D
A448 to A959
EM Area with bank En_00000 to 32767
(n = 0 to C)
1224
Area S1 S2 D
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0V to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description +$(664) connects the text string data designated by S1 to the text string data
designated by S2, and outputs the result to D as text string data (including the
final NUL).
The maximum number of characters that can be designated by S1 and S2 is
4,095 (0FFF hex). If there is no NUL until 4,096 characters, an error will be
generated and the Error Flag will turn ON. Moreover, the result of the linkage
can be no more than 4,095 characters (0FFF hex). If the linkage results in
more characters than that, only the first 4,095 characters (with NUL added as
the 4,096th) will be output to D.
If there is a NUL for both S1 and S2, the two NUL characters (0000 hex) will
be output to D.
→ → → →
+
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if more than 4,095 characters are designated by S1
and S2.
Equals Flag = ON if 0000 (hex) is transferred to D.
Precautions If more than 4,095 characters are designated by S1 and S2, an error will be
generated and the Error Flag will turn ON.
If 0000 (hex) is transferred to D, the Equals Flag will turn ON.
Do not overlap the beginning word designated by D with the character data
area for S2. If they overlap, the instruction cannot be executed properly.
1225
Example In this example, +$(656) is used to connect the text strings ABCD and EFG
and output the result to D.
3-33-4 GET STRING LEFT: LEFT$(652)

Purpose Fetches a designated number of characters from the left (beginning) of a text
string.
Ladder Symbol
LEFT$(652)
S1 S1: Text string first word
S2 S2: Number of characters
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition LEFT$(652)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @LEFT$(652)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S1: Text String

15 0
to
S2: Number of Characters (0000 to 0FFF hex or &0 to &4095)

15 0
to
Note 1. The data from S1 to S1 + the maximum 2,047 words and from D to D + the
1226
Area S1 S2 D
A448 to A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #0FFF ---
(binary) or &0 to
&4095
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description LEFT$(652) reads the number of characters designated by S2, from the left
(the beginning) of the first word of the text string designated by S1 until the
NUL code (00 hex), and outputs the result to D (with NUL added at the end).
If the number of characters fetched exceeds the number of characters desig-
nated by S1, the entire S1 text string will be output.
If 0 (0000 hex) is designated as the number of characters to be read, the two
NUL characters (0000 hex) will be output to D.
Note LEFT$(652) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
1227
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if more than 4,095 characters are designated by S1.
ON if more than 4,095 characters (0FFF hex) are desig-
nated by S2.
Equals Flag = ON if 0000 (hex) is output to D.
Precautions The maximum number of characters to be read that can be designated by S2

is 4,095 (0FFF hex). If more than that are designated, an error will be gener-
If 0000 (hex) is output to D, the Equals Flag will turn ON.
Example In this example, LEFT$(652) is used to read four characters.

Text string ABCDE Text string ABCD
S2: D00200
S1: D: D00300
43 44 Four characters
(bytes) read.
D
3-33-5 GET STRING RIGHT: RGHT$(653)

Purpose Reads a designated number of characters from the right (end) of a text string.
Ladder Symbol
RGHT$(653)
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RGHT$(653)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RGHT$(653)

OK OK OK OK
1228

15 0
to

15 0
to
Area S1 S2 D
A448 to A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #0FFF ---
(binary) or &0 to
&4095
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
1229
Description RGHT$(653) reads the number of characters designated by S2, from the left
(the beginning) of the first word of the text string designated by S1 until the
NUL code (00 hex), and outputs the result to D (with NUL added at the end).
If the number of characters to be read exceeds the number of characters des-
ignated by S1, the entire S1 text string will be output.
Note RGHT$(653) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
Flags
nated by S2.

Example In this example, RGHT$(653) is used to read four characters.

Text string ABCDEF Text string CDEF
S2: D00200
S1: D:
Four characters
(bytes) read.
3-33-6 GET STRING MIDDLE: MID$(654)

Purpose Reads a designated number of characters from any position in the middle of a
text string.
Ladder Symbol
MID$(654)
S3 S3: Beginning position
1230
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MID$(654)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MID$(654)

OK OK OK OK

15 0
to

S3: Beginning Position (0001 to 0FFF hex or &1 to &4095)
15 0
to
Area S1 S2 S3 D
A448 to A959 A959
DM Area D00000 to 32767
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
1231
Area S1 S2 S3 D
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #0001 to ---
#0FFF #0FFF
(binary) or (binary) or
&0 to &4095 &1 to &4095
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description Within the text string identified by the first word designated by S1 until the
NUL code (00 hex), MID$(654) reads the number of characters designated by
S2, from the beginning word designated by S3, and outputs the result to D as
text string data (with NUL added at the end).
If the number of characters to be read extends beyond the end of the text
string designated by S1, the string will be output up to the end.
Note MID$(654) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
Flags
nated by S2.
ON if the S3 data is within the range of 1 to 4,095 (0001
to 0FFF hex).
ON if S3 is greater than S1.
Precautions The range for the beginning position designated by S3 is the 1st to the
4,095th character (0001 to 0FFF hex). If the setting is outside of this range, an
1232
The maximum number of characters to be read that can be designated by S2

Example In this example, MID$(654) is used to read three characters.

Text string ABCDEFGHIJ Text string EFG
S2: D00200
S1:
D: D00300
S3: Three characters read.
S3: D00400
From 5th character
(leftmost byte in D00102).
3-33-7 FIND IN STRING: FIND$(660)

Purpose Finds a designated text string from within a text string.
Ladder Symbol
FIND$(660)
S1 S1: Source text string first word
S2 S2: Found text string first word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition FIND$(660)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @FIND$(660)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S1: Source Text String

15 0
to
S2: Found Text String

15 0
to
1233
Note The data from S1 to S1 + the maximum 2,047 words and from S2 to S2 + the
Area S1 S2 D
A448 to A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description FIND$(660) finds the text string designated by S2 from within the text string
designated by S1, and outputs the result (a given number of characters from
the beginning of S1) in binary data to D. If there is no matching text string,
0000 hex is output to D.
Found data
→ → →
Note FIND$(660) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
1234
Flags
or S2.

or S2 is 4,095 (0FFF hex). If more than that are designated, an error will be
Example In this example, FIND$(660) is used to find one character from within a text
string.
Text string: ABCDEF Text string C
S2: D00200
S1: D00100 D: D00300
3-33-8 STRING LENGTH: LEN$(650)

Purpose Calculates the length of a text string.
Ladder Symbol
LEN$(650)
S S: Text string first word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition LEN$(650)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @LEN$(650)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S: Text String

15 0
to
1235
Note The data from S to S + the maximum 2,047 words must be in the same area.
Area S D
A448 to A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description LENS$(650) calculates the number of characters from the first word of the text
string, designated by S, until the NUL code (00 hex), including the NUL code
itself, and outputs the result to D as binary data. If there is a NUL at the begin-
ning of the text string, the result that is calculated will be 0000 hex.
→ 1 2
3 4
5
Note LENS$(650) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
1236
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the calculated result comes to more than 4,095
characters.
Equals Flag = ON if the calculated result is 0.
Precautions The maximum number of characters is 4,095 (0FFF hex). If there are more
than that (i.e., if there is no NUL before the 4,096th character), an error will be
Example In this example, LENS$(650) is used to calculate the number of characters
and output the result.
Text string: ABCDE
S: 41 42 D: D00200
43 44
45 00
3-33-9 REPLACE IN STRING: RPLC$(661)

Purpose Replaces a text string with a designated text string from a designated position.
Ladder Symbol
RPLC$(661) S1: Text string first word
S1 S2: Replacement text string first word
S4 D: First destination word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition RPLC$(661)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @RPLC$(661)

OK OK OK OK
1237

15 0
to
S2: Replacement Text String

15 0
to

15 0
to
2. The data from D to D + the maximum 2,047 words and from either S1 to
S1 + the maximum 2,047 words or from S2 to S2 + the maximum 2,047
words can overlap.
Area S1 S2 S3 S4 D
A448 to A959 A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
1238
Area S1 S2 S3 S4 D
Constants --- #0000 to #0001 to ---
#0FFF #0FFF
&0 to &1 to
&4095 &4095
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description RPLC$(661) replaces part of the text string designated by S1, from the begin-
ning position designated by S4, with the text string designated by S2, and out-
puts the result to D as text string data (with NUL added at the end). The
number of characters to be replaced is designated by S3.
The maximum number of characters in the result is 4,095 (0FFF hex). If the
number is greater than that, only 4,095 characters will be output (with NUL
added as the 4,096th).
From 0 to 4,095 characters (0000 to 0FFF hex) can be replaced. If the number
is 0, then the text string designated by S1 will be output to D just as it is, with
no change. If the S2 text string is NUL, then the operation will be the same as
deleting the designated range of text in S1.
If the S1 text string from beginning to end is replaced by NUL, then two NUL
characters (0000 hex) will be output to D.
Note RPLC$(661) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
Flags
or S2.
nated by S3.
ON if the S4 data is within the range of 1 to 4,095 (0001
to 0FFF hex).
Precautions The maximum number of characters for S1 or S2 is 4,095 (0FFF hex). If there
are more than that (i.e., if there is no NUL before the 4,096th character), an
1239
The range for the beginning position designated by S4 is the 1st to the
If the beginning position designated by S4 is beyond the text string designated
by S1, an error will be generated and the Error Flag will turn ON.
Set the first destination word D so that it does not overlap with the areas set
with the replacement text string first word S2. RPLC$(654) will not work cor-
rectly if these areas overlap.
Example In this example, RPLC$(654) is used to read three characters.

Text string ABCDEFGHI Text string ABCDHI
S3: D00300
S1: D:
Three characters replaced
D2: D00200
Text string M
D4: D00500
From 5th byte.
3-33-10 DELETE STRING: DEL$(658)

Purpose Deletes a designated text string from the middle of a text string.
Ladder Symbol
DEL$(658) S1: Text string first word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DEL$(658)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DEL$(658)

OK OK OK OK

15 0
to
1240

15 0
to
Area S1 S2 S3 D
A448 to A959 A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #0001 to ---
#0FFF #0FFF
&0 to &4095 &1 to &4095
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
1241
Description Within the text string designated by S1, DEL$(658) deletes the number of
characters designated by S2, from the beginning word designated by S3, and
outputs the result to D as text string data (with NUL added at the end).
Note DEL$(658) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
Flags
nated by S2.
ON if the S3 data is within the range of 1 to 4,095 (0001 to
0FFF hex).
ON if S3 is greater than S1.
Equals Flag = ON when 0000 hex is output to D.
Precautions The maximum number of characters for S1 is 4,095 (0FFF hex). If there are
more than that (i.e., if there is no NUL before the 4,096th character), an error
will be generated and the Error Flag will turn ON.
The range for the beginning position designated by S3 is the 1st to the
If the number of words specified for S1 exceeds the length of the text string,
the Error Flag will turn ON.
If the number of characters to be deleted extends beyond the end of the S1
text string, all of the characters up to the end will be deleted. If all of the char-
acters from the beginning of S1 to the end are designated to be deleted, then
000 hex will be output to D.
Example In this example, DEL$(658) is used to read three characters.
Text string ABCDEFGHI Text string ABCDMHI

S2: D00200
S1: D:
Three bytes discarded.
00
S3: D00500
From 5th character.
3-33-11 EXCHANGE STRING: XCHG$(665)

Purpose Replaces a designated text string with another designated text string.
Ladder Symbol
1242
XCHG$(665)
Ex1 Ex1: First exchange word 1
Ex2 Ex2: First exchange word 2
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition XCHG$(665)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @XCHG$(665)

OK OK OK OK
Operands Ex1: First Exchange Word 1

15 0
Ex1 Text string data: 4,095 characters max. + NUL
to
Ex1 + maximum 2,047 words
Ex2: First Exchange Word 2

15 0
Ex2 Text string data: 4,095 characters max. + NUL
to
Ex2 + maximum 2,047 words
Note 1. The data from Ex1 to Ex1 + the maximum 2,047 words and from Ex2 to
Ex2 + the maximum 2,047 words must be in the same area.
2. The data from Ex1 to Ex1 + the maximum 2,047 words and from Ex2 to
Ex2 + the maximum 2,047 words cannot overlap.
Area Ex1 Ex2
(n = 0 to C)
1243
Area Ex1 Ex2

@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description XCHG$(665) exchanges the text string designated by Ex1 with the text string
designated by Ex2. If either Ex1 or Ex2 is NUL, then two NUL characters
(0000 hex) will be output to the other one of them.
Ex1 Ex1
Ex2 Ex2
Note XCHG$(665) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if more than 4,095 characters are designated by Ex1
or Ex2.
ON the Ex1 and Ex2 data overlap.
Precautions The maximum number of characters that can be designated by Ex1 or Ex2 is
4,095 (0FFF hex). If more than that are designated, an error will be generated
If the text string data designated by Ex1 and Ex2 overlaps, an error will be
Example In this example, XCHG$(665) is used to exchange two text strings.
1244
Text strings ABCDE and FG Text strings: FG and ABCDE
Ex1 Ex1: D00100 Ex1: D00100

Ex2 Previous data
remains.
Ex2: D00200 Ex2: D00200
3-33-12 CLEAR STRING: CLR$(666)

Purpose Clears an entire text string with NUL (00 hex).
Ladder Symbol
CLR$(666)
S S: Text string first word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition CLR$(666)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @CLR$(666)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S: Text String First Word

15 0
to
Note The data from S to S + the maximum 2,047 words must be in the same area.
Area S
(n = 0 to C)
1245
Area S
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description CLR$(666) clears with NUL (00 hex) the entire text string from the first word
designated by S until the NUL code (00 hex). The maximum number of char-
acters that can be cleared is 4,096. If there is no NUL before the 4,096 char-
acter, only 4,096 characters will be cleared.
S A B S
C D
NUL
Note CLR$(666) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the Communications Port Enabled Flag for the com-
Example In this example, CLR$(666) is used to clear text string ABCDE.
Text string ABCDE

S
S: S:
3-33-13 INSERT INTO STRING: INS$(657)

Purpose Deletes a designated text string from the middle of a text string.
Ladder Symbol
1246
INS$(657) S1: Base text string first word

S1 S2: Inserted text string first word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition INS$(657)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @INS$(657)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S1: Base Text String

15 0
to
S2: Inserted Text String

15 0
to

15 0
to
maximum 2,047 words cannot overlap. The data from S1 to S1 + the max-
imum 2,047 words and from D to D + the maximum 2,047 words can over-
lap. The data from S1 to S1 + the maximum 2,047 words and from S2 to
S2 + the maximum 2,047 words can also overlap.
1247
Area S1 S2 S3 D
A448 to A959 A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to ---
#0FFF
(binary) or
&0 to &4095
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description Within the text string designated by S1, INS$(657) inserts the text string des-
ignated by S2, after the beginning word designated by S3, and outputs the
result to D as text string data (with NUL added at the end).
The maximum number of characters that can be inserted is 4,095 (0FFF hex).
If there are more than that, only 4,095 characters will be output to D (with NUL
added as the 4,096th character).
If either S1 or S2 is NUL, then the text string designated by the other one of
them will be output to D just as it is. If S1 and S2 are both NUL, then two NUL
characters (0000 hex) will be output to D.
→
→ →
Inserted characters
Note INS$(657) can be processed in the background. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/
1248
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if more than 4,095 characters are designated by S1 or
S2.
ON if S3 exceeds 4,095 (0FFF hex).
Precautions The maximum number of characters for S1 and S2 is 4,095 (0FFF hex). If
there are more than that (i.e., if there is no NUL before the 4,096th character),
an error will be generated and the Error Flag will turn ON.
The range for the beginning position designated by S3 is 0 to 4,095. If the set-
ting is outside of this range, an error will be generated and the Error Flag will
turn ON.
Do not overlap the destination words designated by D with the text string data
designated by S2. If these overlap, the operation will not be executed properly.
Example In this example, INS$(657) is used to insert two characters.

Text string JK
Text string ABCDEFGHI S2: D00200 Text string ABCDEFJKGHI
S3: D00400
S1: D:
1249
3-33-14 String Comparison Instructions (670 to 675)

Purpose Sting comparison instructions (=$, <>$, <$, <=$, >$, >=$) compare two text
strings from the beginning, in terms of value of the ASCII codes. If the result of
the comparison is true, an ON execution condition is created for a LOAD,
AND, or OR.
Ladder Symbol
LD (Load)
Symbol
AND (Series Connection)
Symbol
OR (Parallel Connection)
Symbol
Variations
Variations Creates ON Each Cycle Com- String comparison instructions
parison is True

OK OK OK OK
Operands S1: Text String 1

15 0
to
1250
S2: Text String 2

15 0
to
Note 1. The data from S1 to S1 + the maximum 2,047 words and from S2 to S2 +
the maximum 2,047 words be in the same area.
2. The data from S1 to S1 + the maximum 2,047 words and from S2 to S2 +
the maximum 2,047 words cannot overlap.
Area S1 S2
A448 to A959
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description String comparison instructions compare the text strings designated by S1 and
S2. If the result of the comparison is true, an ON execution condition is cre-
ated in the ladder diagram. The maximum number of characters for either S1
or S2 is 4,095 (0FFF hex).
String comparison instructions are expressed using the 18 different mnemon-
ics listed below. (LD, AND, and OR do not appear in the ladder diagram.)
LD=$, AND=$, OR=$
LD<>$, AND<>$, OR<>$
LD<$, AND<$, OR<$
1251
LD<=$, AND<=$, OR<=$

LD>$, AND>$, OR>$
LD>=$, AND>=$, OR>=$
The following table provides details on these instructions.
Mnemonic (including Name Function
function code)
LD=$(670) LOAD STRING EQUALS True when S1 text string
AND=$(670) AND STRING EQUALS equals S2 text string.
OR=$(670) OR STRING EQUALS
LD<>$(671) LOAD STRING NOT EQUAL True when S1 text string
AND<>$(671) AND STRING NOT EQUAL does not equal S2 text string.
OR<>$(671) OR STRING NOT EQUAL
LD<$(672) LOAD STRING LESS THAN True when S1 text string is
AND<$(672) AND STRING LESS THAN less than S2 text string.
OR<$(672) OR STRING LESS THAN
LD<=$(673) LOAD STRING LESS THAN True when S1 text string is
OR EQUALS less than or equal to S2 text
AND<=$(673) AND STRING LESS THAN string.
OR EQUALS
OR<=$(673) OR STRING LESS THAN
OR EQUALS
LD>$(674) LOAD STRING GREATER True when S1 text string is
THAN greater than S2 text string.
AND>$(674) AND STRING GREATER
THAN
OR>$(674) OR STRING GREATER
THAN
LD>=$(675) LOAD STRING GREATER True when S1 text string is
THAN OR EQUALS greater than or equal to S2
AND>=$(675) AND STRING GREATER text string.
THAN OR EQUALS
OR>=$(675) OR STRING GREATER
THAN OR EQUALS
Comparison Methods
The comparison methods are as follows:
The first character (byte) of each text string is compared with its counterpart
from the other string as ASCII code. If the two ASCII codes are not equal,
then that greater/lesser relationship becomes the greater/lesser relationship
for the two text strings. If the two ASCII codes are equal, the next characters
are compared. If these two ASCII codes are not equal, then, that greater/
lesser relationship becomes the greater/lesser relationship for the two text
strings.
In this manner, the two text strings are compared in order, character by char-
acter. If all of the characters, including the NUL, are equal, then the two text
strings will have an equal relationship.
If the two text strings are of differing lengths, then the NUL (00 hex) will be
added to the shorter of the two strings to fill in the difference, and the compar-
ison will be made on that basis.
Comparison Examples
AD (414400 hex) and BC (424300 hex):
AD < BC, because at the beginning of the text strings 41 (hex) is less than 42
(hex).
1252
ADC (41444300 hex) and B (4200 hex):

ADC < B, because at the beginning of the text strings 41 (hex) is less than 42
(hex).
ABC (41424300 hex) and ABD (41424400 hex):
ABC < ABD, because at the beginning of the text strings the 41s and 42s
match, so the result is determined by 43 being less than 44.
ABC (41424300 hex) and AB (414200 hex):
ABC > AB, because at the beginning of the text strings the 41s and 42s
match, so the result is determined by 43 being greater than 00.
AB (414200 hex) and AB (414200 hex):
AB = AB, because the 41s, the 42s, and the 00s all match.
Continue programming one instruction after another, treating LD, AND, and
OR in the same way. LD and OR instructions can be connected directly to the
bus bar, but AND instructions cannot.
Flags
or S2.
Greater Than > ON if the comparison results in S1 greater than S2.
Greater Than or >= ON if the comparison results in S1 greater than or equal
Equals Flag to S2.
Equals Flag = ON if the comparison results in S1 equal to S2.
Not Equal Flag <> ON if the comparison results in S1 not equal to S2.
Less Than Flag < ON if the comparison results in S1 less than S2.
Less Than or <= ON if the comparison results in S1 less than or equal to
Equals Flag S2.
Note String comparison instructions are used to rearrange the order of text strings
in order of ASCII. For example, the ASCII order from lower to higher is the
order of the alphabet from A to Z, so text strings can be arranged in alphabet-
ical order.
Precautions Please a right-hand instruction after these instructions. The String Compari-
son Instructions cannot appear on the right side of the ladder diagram.
These instructions cannot be used on the last rung of a logic block.
The maximum number of characters that can be compared is 4,095 (0FFF
hex). If that number is exceeded (i.e., if there is no NUL before the 4,096th
character), an error will occur and the Error Flag will turn ON. When this hap-
pens, an OFF execution condition will be output to the next instruction.
Example In this example, string comparison instructions are used to compare data.
1253
Address Mnemonic Operand

> ---
000000
000001
---
000002
000003
<> ---
000004
> = <>
Text string ABCD Text string ABC
Text string ABC Text string ABC
In this example, three text strings are rearranged in alphabetical order. The
original order is as follows:
D00100: Milk
D00200: Juice
D00300: Beer
When rearranged alphabetically, the order changes as follows: beer, juice,
milk.
>$ Two text strings beginning with D00100 and D00200 are compared
in ASCII order from lower to higher. If the text string beginning with
D00100 is higher in ASCII order than the one beginning with
D00200, then the position of the two text strings will be reversed.
>$ Two text strings beginning with D00200 and D00300 are compared
in ASCII order from lower to higher. If the text string beginning with
D00200 is higher in ASCII order than the one beginning with
D00300, then the position of the two text strings will be reversed.
Text string Alphabetical order
D00100: Milk The milk and juice Juice The milk and beer Juice The juice and beer Beer
text strings are text strings are text strings are
D00200: Juice compared and their Milk compared and Beer compared and Juice
D00300: Beer positions are their positions are
Beer reversed because Milk
their positions are
Milk
reversed because reversed because
M > J. M > B. J > B.
In this way, three text strings can be rearranged in alphabetical order.
1254
Task Control Instructions Section 3-34
3-34 Task Control Instructions

This section describes instructions used to control tasks.
TASK ON TKON 820 1255
TASK OFF TKOF 821 1258
3-34-1 TASK ON: TKON(820)

Purpose Makes the specified task executable. Also, causes an interrupt task to operate
as an extra cyclic task. (Extra cyclic tasks are supported by CS1-H, CJ1-H,
and CJ1M CPU Units only.)
Ladder Symbol
TKON(820)
N N: Task number
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TKON(820)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TKON(820)

Operands N: Task number

The allowed range for N depends on the kind of task being specified.
• Cyclic tasks:
N must be a constant between 0 and 31 decimal. (Values 0 to 31 specify
cyclic tasks 0 to 31.)
• Extra cyclic tasks (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units only):
N must be a constant between 8000 and 8255 decimal. (Values 8000 to
8255 specify extra cyclic tasks 0 to 255.)
Area N
CIO Area ---
Work Area ---
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
1255
Area N
Constants 00 to 31 or 8000 to 8255 (decimal)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Description TKON(820) puts the specified cyclic task or extra cyclic task in executable sta-
tus. When N is 0 to 31 (specifying a cyclic task), the corresponding Task Flag
(TK00 to TK31) will be turned ON at the same time.
This instruction can be executed only in a regular cyclic task or an extra cyclic
task. An error will occur if an attempt is made to execute it in an interrupt task.
The cyclic task or extra cyclic task specified in TKON(820) will be also be exe-
cutable in later cycles as long as it is not put in standby status by TKOF(821).
Any task can be made executable from any cyclic task, although the specified
task will not be executed until the next cycle if its task number is lower than
the task number of the local task. The task will be executed in the same cycle
if its task number is higher than the local task’s task number.
The specified task's task number The specified task's task number
is higher than the local task's task is lower than the local task's task
number (m<n). number (m>n).
Task m Task n
Becomes
executable
Becomes
in the next
executable
cycle.
in that cycle.
Task n Task m
TKON(820) will be treated as NOP(000) if the specified task is already execut-

able or the local task is specified.
A task in executable status can be put in standby status with TKOF(821), the
CX-Programmer, or a FINS command.
The terms executable and executing are not interchangeable. Executable
tasks are executed in order of their task numbers during cyclic program exe-
cution. An executable task will not be executed if it is put in standby status
before program execution reaches its task number.
Note 1. The CX-Programmer’s General Properties Tab for each task has a setting
(the Operation start box) that specifies whether the cyclic task will be exe-
cutable at startup. When the Operation start box has been checked, the
corresponding cyclic task will be put in executable status automatically
when the PLC begins operation. All other cyclic tasks will be in non-exe-
cutable status.
1256
(If the memory all clear operation is executed from the Programming Con-
sole, however, cyclic task 0 will automatically be made executable.)
2. If a task is in non-executable status, TKON(820) can executed to put that
task into executable status. Likewise, a cyclic task in executable status can
be put into non-executable status with the TKOF(821) instruction.
3. Cyclic tasks or extra cyclic tasks that were made executable will be put in
executable status in that cycle in task-number order. Consequently, a task
will not be executed if it is put into standby status before the cycle’s pro-
cessing reaches that task as each task is executed in task-number order.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not a constant between 00 and 31 or between
8000 and 8255 (CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units
only).
ON if the task specified with N does not exist.
ON if TKON(820) is executed in an interrupt task.
Name Addresses Operation

Task Flags TK00 to TK31 These flags are turned ON when the corresponding
cyclic task is executable and they are OFF when the
corresponding cyclic task is not executable or in
standby status.
TK00 to TK31 correspond to cyclic task numbers 00
to 31.
Examples Specifying a Later Task

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, task number 3 is made
executable in task number 1. Task number 3 will be executed in the same
cycle when program execution reaches task number 3.
Task 1
03
Task number 3 is executed

in the same cycle.
Task 3
1257
Specifying an Earlier Task

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, task number 1 is made
executable in task number 3. Task number 1 will be executed in the next cycle
when program execution reaches task number 1.
Task 1
Task number 1 is executed

in the next cycle.
Task 3
3-34-2 TASK OFF: TKOF(821)

Purpose Puts the specified cyclic task or extra cyclic task into standby status, i.e., dis-
ables execution of the task. (Extra cyclic tasks are supported by CS1-H, CJ1-
H, and CJ1M CPU Units only.)
Ladder Symbol
TKOF(821)
N N: Task number
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition TKOF(821)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @TKOF(821)

Operands N: Task number

The allowed range for N depends on the kind of task being specified.
• Cyclic tasks:
N must be a constant between 0 and 31 decimal. (Values 0 to 31 specify
cyclic tasks 0 to 31.)
• Extra cyclic tasks (CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units only):
N must be a constant between 8000 and 8255 decimal. (Values 8000 to
8255 specify extra cyclic tasks 0 to 255.)
1258
Area N
CIO Area ---
Work Area ---
Timer Area ---
Counter Area ---
DM Area ---
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in binary
Indirect DM/EM ---
addresses in BCD
Constants 00 to 31 or 8000 to 8255 (decimal)
Data Registers ---
Index Registers ---
Description TKOF(821) puts the specified cyclic task or extra cyclic into standby status
and turns OFF the corresponding Task Flag (TK00 to TK31).
The task specified in TKOF(821) will be also be in standby status in later
cycles as long as it is not put into executable status by TKON(820), a Periph-
eral Device running CX-Programmer, or a FINS command.
A task can be put into standby status from any other regular task, although the
specified task will not be put into standby status until the next cycle if its task
number is lower than the task number of the local task (it would have been
executed already). The task will be in standby status in the same cycle if its
task number is higher than the local task’s task number.
If the local task is specified in TKOF(821), the task will be put into standby sta-
tus immediately and none of the subsequent instructions in the task will be
executed.
Note 1. The CX-Programmer’s General Properties Tab for each task has a setting
(the Operation start box) that specifies whether the cyclic task will be exe-
cutable at startup. When the Operation start box has been checked, the
corresponding cyclic task will be put in executable status automatically
when the PLC begins operation. All other cyclic tasks will be in non-exe-
cutable status.
(If the memory all clear operation is executed from the Programming Con-
sole, however, cyclic task 0 will automatically be made executable.)
2. If a task is in non-executable status, TKON(820) can executed to put that
task into executable status. Likewise, a cyclic task in executable status can
be put into non-executable status with the TKOF(821) instruction.
3. Cyclic tasks or extra cyclic tasks that are in executable status can be put
into standby status by the TKOF(821) instruction.
1259
The specified task's task number The specified task's task number
is higher than the local task's task is lower than the local task's task
number (m<n). number (m>n).
Task m Task n
In standby In standby
status that status the
cycle. next cycle.
Task n Task m
A regular task that has been set to be executed at startup will be put in execut-
able status automatically when the PLC begins operation. All other regular
tasks will be in non-executable status.
A task in executable status can be put in standby status with TKOF(821), a
Peripheral Device running CX-Programmer, or a FINS command.
The terms executable and executing are not interchangeable. Executable
tasks are executed in order of their task numbers during cyclic program exe-
cution. An executable task will not be executed if it is put in standby status
before program execution reaches its task number.
Unlike TKON(820), this instruction can be placed in interrupt tasks as well as
in cyclic tasks.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not a constant between 00 and 31 or between
8000 and 8255 (CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units
only).
ON if the task specified with N does not exist.
ON if TKOF(821) is executed in an interrupt task.
Name Addresses Operation

Task Flags TK00 to TK31 These flags are turned ON when the corresponding
cyclic task is executable and they are OFF when the
corresponding cyclic task is not executable or in
standby status.
TK00 to TK31 correspond to cyclic task numbers 00
to 31.
1260
Model Conversion Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later) Section 3-35
Examples Specifying a Later Task

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, task number 3 is put into
standby status in task number 1. Task number 3 will be not be executed in the
that cycle when program execution reaches task number 3.
Task 1
03
Task number 3 is in standby

status in the same cycle,
i.e., it is not executed in the
current or following cycles.
Task 3
Specifying an Earlier Task

When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, task number 1 is put into
standby status in task number 3. Task number 1 will be not be executed in the
next cycle when program execution reaches task number 1.
Task 1
Task number 1 is in standby

status in the next cycle, i.e.,
it is executed in the current
cycle but not in following
cycles.
Task 3
01
3-35 Model Conversion Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later)

This section describes instructions used when changing PLC models.
BLOCK TRANSFER XFERC 565 1263
SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE DISTC 566 1266
1261

DATA COLLECT COLLC 567 1269
MOVE BIT MOVBC 568 1273
BIT COUNTER BCNTC 621 1275
The model conversion instructions provide the same functionality as other

instructions but use BCD data for the operands, like C-series instructions.
(The CJ/CS-series use binary data for the operands.) There are five model
conversion instructions, as shown in the above table, all of which have a C
added to the end of the mnemonic of the equivalent function for binary oper-
and data.
The model conversion instructions enable converting C-series programs to
CS/CJ-series programs without changing the operand data for these instruc-
tions.
When converting C-series programs to CS/CJ-series programs on CX-Pro-
grammer version 5.0 or higher (see note), these instructions will be automati-
cally used when converting (e.g., XFER will be converted to XFERC),
eliminating the need to correct operand data manually.
When converting C-series programs to CS/CJ-series programs on CX-Pro-
grammer version 4.0 or lower (see note), any operand for which a constant is
specified will be converted from BCD to binary, but any operand data for
which a word address is specified will have to be corrected manually.
Note Conversion is achieved by specifying the CS/CJ Series as the “device type” in
the Change PLC Dialog Box.
Differences from C-series “C Series” includes the C200H, C1000H, C2000H, C200HS, C2000HX/HG/
Instructions HE(-Z), CQM1, CQM1H, CPM1/CPM1A, CPM2C, and SRM1.
Name Model conversion Corresponding Differences from When converting device When converting device
instruction C-series C-series instructions type to CS/CJ with type to CS/CJ with
(Unit Ver. 3.0 or instruction CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0
later) lower or higher
Mnemonic Mnemonic C200H, C200HS,
(function code) (function code) C1000H, or C2000HX/HG/
C2000H HE(-Z), CQM1,
CQM1H,
CPM1/CPM1A,
CPM2C, or
SRM1
BLOCK XFERC(565) XFER(70) Same Same Converted to XFER. If a word XFER is converted to
TRANSFER address is specified for the XFERC. Operands do not
first operand (number of words require correction.
to transfer), it will need to be
corrected manually to binary
data in the program.
SINGLE WORD DISTC(566) DIST(80) Along with data Same Converted to DIST. If a word DIST is converted to
DISTRIBUTE distribution oper- (distribution address is specified for the DICTC. Operands do not
ation, provides operation and third operand (offset data), it require correction.
stack push oper- stack push will need to be corrected man-
ation not previ- operation) ually to binary data in the pro-
ously supported. gram.
DATA COLLECT COLLC(567) COLL(81) Along with data Same Converted to COLL. If a word COLL is converted to
collection opera- (data collection address is specified for the COLLC. Operands do not
tion, provides operation and second operand (offset data), require correction.
stack read oper- stack read it will need to be corrected
ation not previ- operation) manually to binary data in the
ously supported. program.
MOVE BIT MOVBC(568) MOVB(82) Same Same Converted to MOVB. If a word MOVB is converted to
address is specified for the MOVBC. Operands do
second operand (control data), not require correction.
it will need to be corrected
manually to binary data in the
program.
BIT COUNTER BCNTC(621) BCNT(67) Same Same Converted to BCNT. If a word BCNT is converted to
address is specified for the BCNTC. Operands do not
first operand (number of words require correction.
to count), it will need to be cor-
rected manually to binary data
in the program.
1262
Note The operation of the Conditions Flags differs in the following ways. Refer to
the description of the Conditions Flags for each instruction for details.
• The operation of the Conditions Flags differs for all instructions when the
contents of a DM Area words used for indirect addressing is not BCD
(*BCD) or the DM Area addressing range is exceeded.
• For DISTC(566), the operation of the Conditions Flags differs in compari-
son with that for the C200H, C1000H, and C2000H for the stack push
operation.
• For COLLC(567), the operation of the Conditions Flags differs in compari-
son with that for the C200H, C1000H, and C2000H for the stack read
operation.
Differences from Previous CS/CJ-series Instructions

Name Model conversion Corresponding Differences from previous CS/CJ-series instructions
instruction C-series
(Unit Ver. 3.0 or later) instruction
Mnemonic Mnemonic
(function code) (function code)
BLOCK XFERC(565) XFER(70) The data type for the first operand (number of words to transfer) is
TRANSFER BCD (0000 to 9999) instead of binary (0000 to FFFF hex).
SINGLE DISTC(566) DIST(80) A stack push operation is supported in addition to the data distribution
WORD operation.
DISTRIBUTE The data type for the third operand (offset data) is BCD (data distribu-
tion: 0000 to 7999, stack push: 0000 to 9999) instead of binary (0000
to FFFF hex).
DATA COLLC(567) COLL(81) A stack read operation is supported in addition to the data distribution
COLLECT operation.
The data type for the second operand (offset data) is BCD (data distri-
bution: 0000 to 7999, stack read for FIFO: 9000 to 9999, stack read
for LIFO: 8000 to 8999) instead of binary (0000 to FFFF hex).
MOVE BIT MOVBC(568) MOVB(82) The data type for the source and destination bit specifications in the
second operand (control data) is BCD (00 to 15) instead of binary (00
to 0F hex).
BIT BCNTC(621) BCNT(67) The data type for the first operand (number of words to count) is BCD
COUNTER (0000 to 9999) instead of binary (0000 to FFFF hex).
The data type stored for the third operand (count results) is BCD
(0000 to 9999) instead of binary (0000 to FFFF hex).
Note The operation of the Conditions Flags differs in the following ways. Refer to
the description of the Conditions Flags for each instruction for details.
• The Error Flag will turn ON if the data for the above operands is not BCD.
• For DISTC(566), the operation of the Conditions Flags was added for the
stack push operation.
• For COLLC(567), the operation of the Conditions Flags was added for the
stack read operation.
3-35-1 BLOCK TRANSFER: XFERC(565)

Purpose Transfers the specified number of consecutive words.
Ladder Symbol
XFERC(565)
1263
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition XFERC(565)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @XFERC(565)
OK OK OK OK
Operands N: Number of Words

Specifies the number of words to be transferred. The possible range for N is
0000 to 9999 BCD.
Specifies the first source word.
15 0
S
to to
S+(N−1)

Specifies the first destination word.
15 0
D
to to
D+(N−1)
Area N S D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #9999 --- ---
(BCD)
1264
Area N S D
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description XFERC(565) copies N words beginning with S (S to S+(N–1)) to the N words

beginning with D (D to D+(N–1)).
N words
to to
S+(N−1) D+
(N−1)
It is possible for the source words and destination words to overlap, so

XFERC(565) can perform word-shift operations.
XFERC
#0010
&10
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the data in N (the number of words) is not BCD.
Note In C-series PLCs, the BLOCK TRANSFER (XFER) instruction will cause the
Error Flag to go ON if the content of an indirectly addressed DM word (*DM) is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary is exceeded. XFERC(565) will not cause
the Error Flag to go ON in these cases.
Precautions Be sure that the source words (S to S+N–1) and destination words (D to
D+N–1) do not exceed the end of the data area.
Some time will be required to complete XFERC(565) when a large number of
words is being transferred. In this case, the XFERC(565) transfer might not be
completed if a power interruption occurs during execution of the instruction.
The content of N must be BCD. If N is not BCD, an error will occur and the
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 10 words D00100
through D00109 are copied to D00200 through D00209.
XFERC
#0010
10
words
1265
3-35-2 SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE: DISTC(566)

Purpose Transfers the source word to a destination word calculated by adding an offset
value to the base address.
Ladder Symbol
DISTC(566)
S S: Source word
Bs Bs: Destination base address
Of Of: Offset
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition DISTC(566)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @DISTC(566)

OK OK OK OK
Operands Bs: Destination Base Address

Specifies the destination base address. The offset is added to this address to
calculate the destination word.
Of: Offset
• Data Distribution Operation (0000 to 7999 BCD)
This value is added to the base address to calculate the destination word.
The offset can be any value from 0000 to 7999 in BCD, but Bs and Bs+Of
15 0
Bs
to
to
Bs+Of
• Stack Push Operation (9000 to 9999 BCD)

When the leftmost digit of Of is 9, the rightmost 3 digits of Of specify the
number of words in the stack. The offset can be any value from 9000 to
9999 BCD.
Area S Bs Of
1266
Area S Bs Of
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0000 to #FFFF --- #0000 to #7999
(binary) for distribution
#9000 to #9999
for stack operation
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description Data Distribution Operation

DISTC(566) copies S to the destination word calculated by adding Of to Bs.
The same DISTC(566) instruction can be used to distribute the source word
to various words in the data area by changing the value of Of.
S Bs Of
Bs+n
Stack Push Operation

When the leftmost digit (bits 12 to 15) of Of is 9 BCD, DISTC(566) operates a
stack from Bs to Bs+Of-9000. The destination base address (Bs) contains the
stack pointer and the rest of the words in the stack contain the stack data.
DISTC(566) copies S to the destination word calculated by adding the stack
pointer (content of Bs) + 1 to address Bs. The same DISTC(566) instruction
can be used to distribute the source word to various words in the data area by
changing the value of Of.
S is copied to:
Bs + stack pointer + 1.
Stack area
S
Stack
Bs pointer Of 9 m
Bs+1
Bs+ +1
m words
Size of
Stack
data area stack area
Bs+(m-1)
1267
Each time that the content of S is copied to a word in the stack data area, the
stack pointer in Bs is automatically incremented by +1.
Note Use COLLC(567) to read stack data from the stack area.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if Stack Push Operation is specified, but the stack
pointer data in Bs is not BCD.
ON if Stack Push Operation is specified and the stack
pointer indicates a word that exceeds the stack data area.
Note In C-series PLCs, the SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE (DIST) instruction will
cause the Error Flag to go ON if the content of an indirectly addressed DM
word (*DM) is not BCD, or the DM area boundary is exceeded. DISTC(566)
will not cause the Error Flag to go ON in these cases.
Precautions Once DISTC(566) has been executed with Stack Push Operation to allocate a
stack area, always specify the same length stack area in subsequent
DISTC(566) instructions. Operation will be unreliable if a different stack area
size is specified in later DISTC(566) instructions.
Be sure that the offset or stack size specified by Of does not exceed the end
of the data area when added to Bs.
Examples Data Distribution Operation

The leftmost byte of D00300 is 0, so DISTC(566) performs the Data Distribu-
tion Operation.
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the contents of D00100 will
be copied to D00210 (D00200 + 10) if the content of D00300 is 0010 BCD.
The content of D00100 can be copied to other words by changing the offset in
D00300.
S: D00100
DISTC
Copied by DISTC(566).
S
Bs Of:
Bs: 0 0 10
Of
4-digit BCD
Offset +10 words
D00210
Stack Push Operation

The leftmost byte of Of is 9, so DISTC(566) performs the Stack Push Opera-
tion.
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, DISTC(566) allocates a 10
word stack area (since the rightmost 3 digits of Of are #010) between D00200
and D00209. At the same time, the contents of D00100 will be copied to the
word calculated by adding D00200 + stack pointer +1. Finally, the stack
pointer is incremented by +1.
1268
Of 9 010
S: D00100 000F
Allocated stack After 1 st execution After 2 nd execution
Stack
Stack area Push Stack area Stack area
Stack
DISTC Bs: D00200 pointer #0001 #0002
S D00100 D00201 000F 000F
Bs D00260 Stack 000F
data area
Of #9010
D00209
3-35-3 DATA COLLECT: COLLC(567)

Purpose Transfers the source word (calculated by adding an offset value to the base
address) to the destination word.
Ladder Symbol
COLL(081)
Bs Bs: Source base address
Of Of: Offset
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition COLLC(567)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @COLLC(567)

OK OK OK OK
Operands Bs: Source Base Address

Specifies the source base address. The offset is added to this address to cal-
culate the source word.
Of: Offset
The value of Of determines the operation of COLLC(567).
• Data Collect Operation (Of = 0000 to 7999 BCD)
The Of value is added to the base address to calculate the source word.
The offset can be any value from 0000 to 7999 BCD, but Bs and Bs+Of
15 0
Bs
to
to
Bs+Of
• LIFO Stack Read Operation (Of = 8000 to 8999 BCD)

If the leftmost digit of Of is 8, COLLC(567) will operate as a LIFO stack
instruction. The stack begins at Bs with a length specified in the rightmost
3 digits of Of.
1269
• FIFO Stack Read Operation (Of = 9000 to 9999 BCD)

If the leftmost digit of Of is 9, COLLC(567) will operate as a FIFO stack
instruction. The stack begins at Bs with a length specified in the rightmost
3 digits of Of.
Area Bs Of D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants --- #0000 to #7999 for ---
Data Collection
#8000 to #8999 for
LIFO Stack Read
#9000 to #9999 for
FIFO Stack Read
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description Depending on the value of Of, COLLC(567) will operate as a data collection
instruction, FIFO stack instruction, or LIFO stack instruction.
Data Collection Operation (Of = 0000 to 7999 BCD)
COLLC(567) copies the source word (calculated by adding Of to Bs) to the
destination word. The same COLLC(567) instruction can be used to collect
data from various source words in the data area by changing the value of Of.
Bs Of
Bs+n
1270
LIFO Stack Read Operation (Of = 8000 to 8999 BCD)

If the leftmost digit of Of is 8, COLLC(567) will operate as a LIFO stack
instruction (LIFO stands for Last-In-First-Out). In this case, the rightmost 3
digits of Of specify the size of the stack.
COLLC(567) copies the data most recently recorded in the stack to D. The
source word is Bs + the stack pointer (content of Bs). After the data is copied,
the stack pointer is decremented by 1.
Data is copied from
Bs + stack pointer.
Stack area
8 m
Stack
Bs pointer
Bs+1 Size of
m words
stack area
Stack
data area
Note Use DISTC(566) to write stack data to the stack area.

FIFO Stack Read Operation (Of = 9000 to 9999 BCD)
If the leftmost digit of Of is 9, COLLC(567) will operate as a FIFO stack
instruction (FIFO stands for First-In-First-Out). In this case, the rightmost 3
digits of Of specify the size of the stack.
COLLC(567) copies the data from the oldest word recorded in the stack to D.
The source word is Bs + 1. After the data is copied, the stack pointer is decre-
mented by 1.
Data is copied from
Bs + 1. Stack area
Stack
Bs pointer Of 9 m
Bs+1
m words
Size of
Stack
S1+ data area stack area
Note Use DISTC(566) to write stack data to the stack area.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the offset data in Of is not BCD.
ON if LIFO or FIFO Stack Operation is specified, but the
stack pointer data in Bs is not BCD.
ON if LIFO or FIFO Stack Operation is specified and the
stack pointer indicates a word that exceeds the stack data
area.
Note In C-series PLCs, the DATA COLLECT (COLL) instruction will cause the Error
Flag to go ON if the content of an indirectly addressed DM word (*DM) is not
BCD, or the DM area boundary is exceeded. COLLC(567) will not cause the
Error Flag to go ON in these cases.
1271
Precautions Once DISTC(566) has been executed with Stack Push Operation to allocate a
stack area, always specify that same length stack area in the COLLC(567)
instructions. Operation will be unreliable if a different stack area size is speci-
fied in the COLLC(567) instructions.
Be sure that the offset or stack size specified by Of does not exceed the end
of the data area when added to Bs.
The offset data in Of must be BCD.
Examples Data Collection Operation

The leftmost byte of D00200 is 0, so COLLC(567) performs the Data Collec-
tion Operation.
(D00100 + 10) will be copied to D00300 if the content of D00200 is 10 (0010
BCD). The contents of other words can be copied to D00300 by changing the
offset in D00200.
D00200 0 0 1 0
COLLC
Bs: D00100
Bs 4-digit BCD
D00101
Of
Offset +10 words
D
D00110 Copied by COLLC(567).
FIFO Stack Operation

The leftmost byte of Of is 9, so COLLC(567) performs the FIFO Stack Opera-
tion.
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, COLLC(567) allocates a
10 word stack area (since the rightmost 3 digits of Of are #010) between
D00100 and D00109. At the same time, the contents of D00101 (Bs +1) are
copied to D00300. Finally, the stack pointer is decremented by 1.
Of 9 010

FIFO
Stack area Read Stack area Stack area
Stack
COLLC D00100 0002 pointer 0001 0000
Bs D00100 D00101 1234 5678
Stack
Of #9010 D00102 5678 data area
D D00300
D00109
D00300 1234 5678
LIFO Stack Operation

The leftmost byte of Of is 8, so COLLC(567) performs the LIFO Stack Opera-
tion.
When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, COLLC(567) allocates a
10 word stack area (since the rightmost 3 digits of Of are #010) between
D00100 and D00109. At the same time, the contents of the source word
(D00100 + stack pointer) are copied to D00300. Finally, the stack pointer is
decremented by 1.
1272
Of 8 010

LIFO
Stack area Read Stack area Stack area
Stack
COLLC D00100 0002 pointer 0001 0000
Bs D00100 D00101 1234 1234
Stack
Of #8010 D00102 5678 data area
D D00300
D00109
D00300 5678 1234
3-35-4 MOVE BIT: MOVBC(568)

Purpose Transfers the specified bit.
Ladder Symbol
MOVBC(568)
C C: Control word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition MOVBC(568)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @MOVBC(568)

OK OK OK OK

The rightmost two digits of C indicate which bit of S is the source bit and the
leftmost two digits of C indicate which bit of D is the destination bit.
15 8 7 0
C m n
Source bit: 00 to 15
(Two-digit BCD)
Destination bit: 00 to 15
(Two-digit BCD)
Area S C D
1273
Area S C D
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
(binary) only
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –) IR0 to, –(– –) IR15
Description MOVBC(568) copies the specified bit (n) from S to the specified bit (m) in D.
The other bits in the destination word are left unchanged.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if the rightmost and leftmost two digits of C are not
BCD or outside of the specified range of 00 to 15.
Note In C-series PLCs, the MOVE BIT (MOVB) instruction will cause the Error Flag
to go ON if the content of an indirectly addressed DM word (*DM) is not BCD,
or the DM area boundary is exceeded. MOVBC(568) will not cause the Error
Flag to go ON in these cases.
1274
Examples When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, the 5th bit of the source
word (CIO 0200) is copied to the 12th bit of the destination word (CIO 0300) in
accordance with the control word’s value of 1205.
1 2 0 5
3-35-5 BIT COUNTER: BCNTC(621)

Purpose Counts the total number of ON bits in the specified word(s).
Ladder Symbol
BCNTC(621)
R R: Result word
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition BCNTC(621)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @BCNTC(621)

OK OK OK OK

The number of words must be 0001 to 9999 (BCD).
S and S+(N–1) must be in the same data area.
Area N S R
1275
Area N S R
(n = 0 to C)
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants #0001 to #9999 ---
(BCD)
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description BCNTC(621) counts the total number of bits that are ON in all words between
S and S+(N–1) and places the BCD result in R.
N words
Counts the number
to of ON bits.
S+(N–1) BCD result
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if N is not within the range 0001 to 9999 BCD.
ON if result exceeds 9999 BCD.
Note In C-series PLCs, the BIT COUNTER (BITC) instruction will cause the Error
Flag to go ON if the content of an indirectly addressed DM word (*DM) is not
BCD, or the DM area boundary is exceeded. BCNTC(621) will not cause the
Error Flag to go ON in these cases.
Precautions An error will occur if N is not BCD between 0001 and 9999, or the result
exceeds 9,999.
Example When CIO 000000 is ON in the following example, BCNTC(621) counts the
total number of ON bits in the 10 words from CIO 0100 through CIO 0109 and
writes the result to D00100.
1276
000000
BCNTC Counts the number
N #0010 of ON bits (35).
to to
S D100
R D00100
R:D00100 3 5 0035 BCD
3-35-6 GET VARIABLE ID: GETID(286)

Purpose Outputs the FINS command variable type (data area) code and word address
for the specified variable or address. This instruction is generally used to get
the assigned address of a variable in a function block.
Ladder Symbol
GETID(286)
S S: Source data
D1 D1: Variable code
D2 D2: Word address
Variations
Variations Executed Each Cycle for ON Condition GETID(286)
Executed Once for Upward Differentiation @GETID(286)

OK OK OK OK
Operands S: Source data

Specifies the variable or address for which the variable type and word address
will be retrieved.
D1: Variable code
Contains the FINS variable type code (data area code) of the source data.
D2: Word address
Contains the word address of the source data in 4-digit hexadecimal.
Area S D1 D2
(n = 0 to C)
1277
Area S D1 D2
@ En_00000 to @ En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
*En_00000 to *En_32767
(n = 0 to C)
Constants ---
Index Registers ---
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to, –(– –)IR15
Description GETID(286) retrieves the data area address of the specified source variable
or address, outputs the data area code to D1 in 4-digit hexadecimal, and out-
puts the word address number to D2 in 4-digit hexadecimal.
The following table shows the variable type (data area) codes and corre-
sponding address ranges for the PLC’s data areas.
Data area Data Data area code Address
size (Output to D1.) (Output to D2.)
CIO Area CIO Word 00B0 hex 0000 to 17FF hex
(0000 to 6143)
Work Area W 00B1 hex 0000 to 01FF hex
(000 to 511)
Holding Bit Area H 00B2 hex 0000 to 01FF hex
(000 to 511)
DM Area 0082 hex 0000 to 7FFF hex
(00000 to 32767)
EM Area En_ 00A0 to 00AC hex 0000 to 7FFF hex
(Specific bank) (n = 0 to C) (00000 to 32767)
Variables in function blocks are automatically allocated addresses by CX-Pro-

grammer Ver. 5.0 and later systems, unless the AT specification is used. For
example, if it is necessary to indirectly specify the extended parameter set-
tings of a Special Unit such as a Motion Control Unit and a variable is used at
the beginning of the extended parameter settings area, that variable’s address
must be set. In this case, GETID(286) can be used to retrieve the variable’s
data area address.
Flags
Error Flag ER ON if S is not within the allowed range.
1278
Example
Normal Operation
DM Area allocated to Extended parameter
Motion Control Unit settings area
D00100
#0082
&100 Indirect
specifica-
tion
The starting address of the extended parameter set-

tings area is specified by the FINS command variable
type (data area) code and word address. In this exam-
ple, #0082 specifies the DM Area and &100 specifies a
100-word offset from the beginning of the area.
Using Function Blocks

DM Area allocated to Extended parameter
Motion Control Unit settings area
Variable A D00200 Data
m #0082
m+1 &200
Variable A's data area
address is retrieved by
GETID(286).
GETID
A
m
m+1
1279
1280
SECTION 4
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
This section provides instruction execution times and the number of steps for each CS/CJ-series instruction.
4-1 CS-series Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283

4-1-5 Comparison Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
4-1-6 Data Movement Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290
4-1-7 Data Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
4-1-9 Symbol Math Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
4-1-10 Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
4-1-13 Floating-point Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
4-1-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
4-1-15 Table Data Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
4-1-17 Subroutine Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
4-1-21 Serial Communications Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
4-1-22 Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
4-1-24 Display Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
4-1-25 Clock Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
4-1-26 Debugging Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
4-1-27 Failure Diagnosis Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
4-1-30 Text String Processing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
4-1-32 Model Conversion Instructions (CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or later only) . . 1311
4-1-33 Special Function Block Instructions (CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only) 1312
4-2 CJ-series Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
1281
4-2-5 Comparison Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
4-2-6 Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
4-2-7 Data Shift Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
4-2-9 Symbol Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
4-2-10 Conversion Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
4-2-13 Floating-point Math Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
4-2-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
4-2-15 Table Data Processing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
4-2-17 Subroutine Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
4-2-19 High-speed Counter and Pulse Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
4-2-22 Serial Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
4-2-23 Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
4-2-25 Display Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
4-2-26 Clock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
4-2-27 Debugging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
4-2-28 Failure Diagnosis Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
4-2-31 Text String Processing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
4-2-33 Model Conversion Instructions (CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or later only) . . 1346
4-2-34 Special Function Block Instructions (CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only) 1347
4-2-35 Number of Function Block Program Steps
(CPU Units with Unit Version 3.0 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
4-2-36 Guidelines on Converting Program Capacities from
Previous OMRON PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
4-2-37 Function Block Instance Execution Time
(CPU Units with Unit Version 3.0 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349
1282
CS-series Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 4-1
4-1 CS-series Instruction Execution Times and Number of

Steps
The following table lists the execution times for all instructions that are avail-
able for CS-series PLCs.
The total execution time of instructions within one whole user program is the
process time for program execution when calculating the cycle time (See
note.).
Note User programs are allocated tasks that can be executed within cyclic tasks
and interrupt tasks that satisfy interrupt conditions.
Execution times for most instructions differ depending on the CPU Unit used
(CS1H-CPU6@H, CS1H-CPU6@, CS1G-CPU4@H, CS1G-CPU4@) and the
conditions when the instruction is executed. The top line for each instruction in
the following table shows the minimum time required to process the instruc-
tion and the necessary execution conditions, and the bottom line shows the
maximum time and execution conditions required to process the instruction.
The execution time can also vary when the execution condition is OFF.
The following table also lists the length of each instruction in the Length
(steps) column. The number of steps required in the user program area for
each of the CS-series instructions varies from 1 to 7 steps, depending upon
the instruction and the operands used with it. The number of steps in a pro-
gram is not the same as the number of instructions.
Note 1. Program capacity for CS-series PLCs is measured in steps, whereas pro-
series PLCs, was measured in words. Basically speaking, 1 step is equiv-
alent to 1 word. The amount of memory required for each instruction, how-
ever, is different for some of the CS-series instructions, and inaccuracies
will occur if the capacity of a user program for another PLC is converted for
a CS-series PLC based on the assumption that 1 word is 1 step. Refer to
the information at the end of 4-1 CS-series Instruction Execution Times
and Number of Steps for guidelines on converting program capacities from
previous OMRON PLCs.
Most instructions are supported in differentiated form (indicated with ↑, ↓,
@, and %). Specifying differentiation will increase the execution times by
the following amounts.
Symbol CS1-H CPU Units CS1 CPU Units
CPU6@H CPU4@H CPU6@ CPU4@
↑ or ↓ +0.24 +0.32 +0.41 +0.45
@ or % +0.24 +0.32 +0.29 +0.33
2. Use the following times as guidelines when instructions are not executed.
CS1-H CPU Units CS1 CPU Units
CPU6@H CPU4@H CPU6@ CPU4@
Approx. 0.1 Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.1 to 0.3 Approx. 0.2 to 0.4
1283

Instruction Mnemonic Code Length ON execution time (µs) Conditions
(steps) CPU6@H CPU4@H CPU6@ CPU4@
LOAD LD --- 1 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.08 ---
!LD --- 2 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +21.16 Increase for CS
Series
+45.1 +45.1 +45.1 +45.1 Increase for
C200H
LOAD NOT LD NOT --- 1 0.02 0.04 0.04 008 ---
!LD NOT --- 2 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +21.16 Increase for CS
Series
+45.1 +45.1 +45.1 +45.1 Increase for
C200H
AND AND --- 1 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.08 ---
!AND --- 2 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +21.16 Increase for CS
Series
+45.1 +45.1 +45.1 +45.1 Increase for
C200H
AND NOT AND NOT --- 1 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.08 ---
!AND NOT --- 2 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +21.16 Increase for CS
Series
+45.1 +45.1 +45.1 +45.1 Increase for
C200H
OR OR --- 1 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.08 ---
!OR --- 2 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +21.16 Increase for CS
Series
+45.1 +45.1 +45.1 +45.1 Increase for
C200H
OR NOT OR NOT --- 1 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.08 ---
!OR NOT --- 2 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +21.16 Increase for CS
Series
+45.1 +45.1 +45.1 +45.1 Increase for
C200H
AND LOAD AND LD --- 1 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.08 ---
OR LOAD OR LD --- 1 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.08 ---
NOT NOT 520 1 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.08 ---
CONDITION UP 521 3 0.3 0.42 0.46 0.54 ---
ON
CONDITION DOWN 522 4 0.3 0.42 0.46 0.54 ---
OFF
LOAD BIT LD TST 350 4 0.14 0.24 0.25 0.37 ---
TEST
LOAD BIT LD TSTN 351 4 0.14 0.24 0.25 0.37 ---
TEST NOT
AND BIT AND TSTN 351 4 0.14 0.24 0.25 0.37 ---
TEST NOT
OR BIT TEST OR TST 350 4 0.14 0.24 0.25 0.37 ---
OR BIT TEST OR TSTN 351 4 0.14 0.24 0.25 0.37 ---
NOT
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
1284

(steps) CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@ CPU-4@
(See note.)
OUTPUT OUT --- 1 0.02 0.04 0.17 0.21 ---
!OUT --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 Increase for CS
Series
+49.3 +49.3 +49.3 +49.3 Increase for
C200H
OUTPUT NOT OUT NOT --- 1 0.02 0.04 0.17 0.21 ---
!OUT NOT --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 Increase for CS
Series
+49.3 +49.3 +49.3 +49.3 Increase for
C200H
KEEP KEEP 011 1 0.06 0.08 0.25 0.29 ---
DIFFERENTI- DIFU 013 2 0.24 0.40 0.46 0.54 ---
ATE UP
DIFFERENTI- DIFD 014 2 0.24 0.40 0.46 0.54 ---
ATE DOWN
SET SET --- 1 0.02 0.06 0.17 0.21 ---
!SET --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 Increase for CS
Series
+49.3 +49.3 +49.3 +49.3 Increase for
C200H
RESET RSET --- 1 0.02 0.06 0.17 0.21 Word specified
!RSET --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 Increase for CS
Series
+49.3 +49.3 +49.3 +49.3 Increase for
C200H
MULTIPLE SETA 530 4 5.8 6.1 7.8 7.8 With 1-bit set
BIT SET 25.7 27.2 38.8 38.8 With 1,000-bit
set
MULTIPLE RSTA 531 4 5.7 6.1 7.8 7.8 With 1-bit reset
BIT RESET 25.8 27.1 38.8 38.8 With 1,000-bit
reset
SINGLE BIT SETB 532 2 0.24 0.34 --- --- ---
SET !SETB 3 +21.44 +21.54 --- --- ---
SINGLE BIT RSTB 534 2 0.24 0.34 --- --- ---
RESET !RSTB 3 +21.44 +21.54 --- --- ---
SINGLE BIT OUTB 534 2 0.22 0.32 --- --- ---
OUTPUT !OUTB 3 +21.42 +21.52 --- --- ---
1285

(See note.)
END END 001 1 5.5 6.0 4.0 4.0 ---
NO OPERA- NOP 000 1 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.12 ---
TION
INTERLOCK IL 002 1 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.12 ---
INTERLOCK ILC 003 1 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.12 ---
CLEAR
MULTI- MILH 517 3 6.1 6.5 --- --- During interlock
INTERLOCK 7.5 7.9 --- --- Not during inter-
DIFFEREN- lock and inter-
TIATION lock not set
HOLD
(See note 2.) 8.9 9.7 --- --- Not during inter-
lock and inter-
lock set
MULTI- MILR 518 3 6.1 6.5 --- --- During interlock
INTERLOCK 7.5 7.9 --- --- Not during inter-
DIFFEREN- lock and inter-
TIATION lock not set
RELEASE
(See note 2.) 8.9 9.7 --- --- Not during inter-
lock and inter-
lock set
MULTI- MILC 519 2 5.0 5.6 --- --- Interlock not
INTERLOCK cleared
CLEAR 5.7 6.2 --- --- Interlock cleared
(See note 2.)
JUMP JMP 004 2 0.38 0.48 8.1 8.1 ---
JUMP END JME 005 2 --- --- --- --- ---
CONDI- CJP 510 2 0.38 0.48 7.4 7.4 When JMP con-
TIONAL dition is satisfied
JUMP
CONDI- CJPN 511 2 0.38 0.48 8.5 8.5 When JMP con-
TIONAL dition is satisfied
JUMP NOT
MULTIPLE JMP0 515 1 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.12 ---
JUMP
MULTIPLE JME0 516 1 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.12 ---
JUMP END
FOR LOOP FOR 512 2 0.52 0.54 0.12 0.21 Designating a
constant
BREAK BREAK 514 1 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.12 ---
LOOP
NEXT LOOP NEXT 513 1 0.18 0.16 0.17 0.17 When loop is
continued
0.22 0.40 0.12 0.12 When loop is
ended
Note 1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
1286

(See note.)
HUNDRED- TIM --- 3 0.56 0.88 0.37 0.42 ---
MS TIMER TIMX 550 3 0.56 0.88 --- --- ---
TEN-MS TIMH 015 3 0.88 1.14 0.37 0.42 ---
TIMER TIMHX 551 3 0.88 1.14 --- --- ---
ONE-MS TMHH 540 3 0.86 1.12 0.37 0.42 ---
TIMER TMHHX 552 3 0.86 1.12 --- --- ---
ACCUMULA- TTIM 087 3 16.1 17.0 21.4 21.4 ---
TIVE TIMER 10.9 11.4 14.8 14.8 When resetting
8.5 8.7 10.7 10.7 When interlock-
ing
TTIMX 555 3 16.1 17.0 --- --- ---
10.9 11.4 --- --- When resetting
8.5 8.7 --- --- When interlock-
ing
LONG TIMER TIML 542 4 7.6 10.0 12.8 12.8 ---
6.2 6.5 7.8 7.8 When interlock-
ing
TIMLX 553 4 7.6 10.0 --- --- ---
6.2 6.5 --- --- When interlock-
ing
MULTI-OUT- MTIM 543 4 20.9 23.3 26.0 26.0 ---
PUT TIMER 5.6 5.8 7.8 7.8 When resetting
MTIMX 554 4 20.9 23.3 --- --- ---
5.6 5.8 --- --- When resetting
COUNTER CNT --- 3 0.56 0.88 0.37 0.42 ---
CNTX 546 3 0.56 0.88 --- --- ---
REVERSIBLE CNTR 012 3 16.9 19.0 20.9 20.9 ---
COUNTER CNTRX 548 3 16.9 19.0 --- --- ---
RESET CNR 545 3 9.9 10.6 13.9 13.9 When resetting
TIMER/ 1 word
COUNTER 4.16 ms 4.16 ms 5.42 ms 5.42 ms When resetting
1,000 words
CNRX 547 3 9.9 10.6 --- --- When resetting
1 word
4.16 ms 4.16 ms --- --- When resetting
1,000 words
1287

(See note.)
Input Compari- LD, AND, 300 4 0.10 0.16 0.21 0.37 ---
son Instruc- OR +=
tions LD, AND, 305
(unsigned) OR + <>
LD, AND, 310
OR + <
LD, AND, 315
OR +<=
LD, AND, 320
OR +>
LD, AND, 325
OR +>=
son Instruc- OR +=+L
tions (double, LD, AND, 306
unsigned) OR +<>+L
LD, AND, 311
OR +<+L
LD, AND, 316
OR +<=+L
LD, AND, 321
OR +>+L
LD, AND, 326
OR +>=+L
son Instruc- OR +=+S
tions (signed) LD, AND, 307
OR +<>+S
LD, AND, 312
OR +<+S
LD, AND, 317
OR +<=
LD, AND, 322
OR +>+S
LD, AND, 327
OR +>=+S
son Instruc- OR +=+SL
tions (double, LD, AND, 308
signed) OR +<>+SL
LD, AND, 313
OR +<+SL
LD, AND, 318
OR +<=+SL
LD, AND, 323
OR +>+SL
LD, AND, 328
OR +>=+SL
1288

(See note.)
Time Compari- LD, AND, 341 4 25.1 36.4 --- --- ON and OFF
son Instruc- OR +DT execution
tions LD, AND, 342 4 25.2 36.4 --- --- times are the
(See note 2.) OR +<>DT same as given
at the left.
LD, AND, 343 4 25.2 36.4 --- ---
OR +<DT
LD, AND, 344 4 25.2 36.4 --- ---
OR +<=DT
LD, AND, 345 4 25.1 36.4 --- ---
OR +>DT
LD, AND, 346 4 25.2 36.4 --- ---
OR +>=DT
COMPARE CMP 020 3 0.04 0.04 0.17 0.29 ---
!CMP 020 7 +42.1 +42.1 +42.4 +42.4 Increase for
CS Series
+90.4 +90.4 +90.5 +90.5 Increase for
C200H
DOUBLE CMPL 060 3 0.08 0.08 0.25 0.46 ---
COMPARE
SIGNED CPS 114 3 0.08 0.08 6.50 6.50 ---
BINARY COM- !CPS 114 7 +35.9 +35.9 +42.4 +42.4 Increase for
PARE CS Series
+84.1 +84.1 +90.5 +90.5 Increase for
C200H
DOUBLE CPSL 115 3 0.08 0.08 6.50 6.50 ---
SIGNED
BINARY COM-
PARE
TABLE COM- TCMP 085 4 14.0 15.2 21.9 21.9 ---
PARE
MULTIPLE MCMP 019 4 20.5 22.8 31.2 31.2 ---
COMPARE
UNSIGNED BCMP 068 4 21.5 23.7 32.6 32.6 ---
BLOCK COM-
PARE
AREA RANGE ZCP 088 3 5.3 5.4 --- --- ---
COMPARE
DOUBLE ZCPL 116 3 5.5 6.7 --- --- ---
AREA RANGE
COMPARE
1289

(See note.)
MOVE MOV 021 3 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.29 ---
!MOV 021 7 +21.38 +21.40 +42.36 +42.36 Increase for CS
Series
+90.52 +90.52 +90.52 +90.52 Increase for
C200H
DOUBLE MOVL 498 3 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.50 ---
MOVE
MOVE NOT MVN 022 3 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.29 ---
DOUBLE MVNL 499 3 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.50 ---
MOVE NOT
MOVE BIT MOVB 082 4 0.24 0.34 7.5 7.5 ---
MOVE DIGIT MOVD 083 4 0.24 0.34 7.3 7.3 ---
MULTIPLE XFRB 062 4 10.1 10.8 13.6 13.6 Transferring 1
BIT TRANS- bit
FER 186.4 189.8 269.2 269.2 Transferring 255
bits
BLOCK XFER 070 4 0.36 0.44 11.2 11.2 Transferring 1
TRANSFER word
300.1 380.1 633.5 633.5 Transferring
1,000 words
BLOCK SET BSET 071 4 0.26 0.28 8.5 8.5 Setting 1 word
200.1 220.1 278.3 278.3 Setting 1,000
words
DATA XCHG 073 3 0.40 0.56 0.5 0.7 ---
EXCHANGE
DOUBLE XCGL 562 3 0.76 1.04 0.9 1.3 ---
DATA
EXCHANGE
SINGLE DIST 080 4 5.1 5.4 7.0 7.0 ---
WORD DIS-
TRIBUTE
DATA COL- COLL 081 4 5.1 5.3 7.1 7.1 ---
LECT
MOVE TO MOVR 560 3 0.08 0.08 0.42 0.50 ---
REGISTER
MOVE TIMER/ MOVRW 561 3 0.42 0.50 0.42 0.50 ---
COUNTER PV
TO REGIS-
TER
1290

(See note.)
SHIFT SFT 010 3 7.4 10.4 10.4 10.4 Shifting 1 word
REGISTER 433.2 488.0 763.1 763.1 Shifting 1,000
words
REVERSIBLE SFTR 084 4 6.9 7.2 9.6 9.6 Shifting 1 word
SHIFT 615.3 680.2 859.6 859.6 Shifting 1,000
REGISTER words
ASYNCHRO- ASFT 017 4 6.2 6.4 7.7 7.7 Shifting 1 word
NOUS SHIFT 1.22 ms 1.22 ms 2.01 ms 2.01 ms Shifting 1,000
REGISTER words
WORD SHIFT WSFT 016 4 4.5 4.7 7.8 7.8 Shifting 1 word
171.5 171.7 781.7 781.7 Shifting 1,000
words
ARITHMETIC ASL 025 2 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
SHIFT LEFT
DOUBLE ASLL 570 2 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
SHIFT LEFT
ARITHMETIC ASR 026 2 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
SHIFT RIGHT
DOUBLE ASRL 571 2 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
SHIFT RIGHT
ROTATE LEFT ROL 027 2 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
DOUBLE ROLL 572 2 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
ROTATE LEFT
ROTATE LEFT RLNC 574 2 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE RLNL 576 2 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
ROTATE LEFT
WITHOUT
CARRY
ROTATE ROR 028 2 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
RIGHT
DOUBLE RORL 573 2 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
ROTATE
RIGHT
ROTATE RRNC 575 2 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
RIGHT WITH-
OUT CARRY
DOUBLE RRNL 577 2 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
ROTATE
RIGHT WITH-
OUT CARRY
ONE DIGIT SLD 074 3 5.9 6.1 8.2 8.2 Shifting 1 word
SHIFT LEFT 561.1 626.3 760.7 760.7 Shifting 1,000
words
ONE DIGIT SRD 075 3 6.9 7.1 8.7 8.7 Shifting 1 word
SHIFT RIGHT 760.5 895.5 1.07 ms 1.07 ms Shifting 1,000
words
SHIFT N-BIT NSFL 578 4 7.5 8.3 10.5 10.5 Shifting 1 bit
DATA LEFT 40.3 45.4 55.5 55.5 Shifting 1,000
bits
1291

(See note.)
SHIFT N-BIT NSFR 579 4 7.5 8.3 10.5 10.5 Shifting 1 bit
DATA RIGHT 50.5 55.3 69.3 69.3 Shifting 1,000
bits
SHIFT N-BITS NASL 580 3 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
LEFT
DOUBLE NSLL 582 3 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
SHIFT N-BITS
LEFT
SHIFT N-BITS NASR 581 3 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
RIGHT
DOUBLE NSRL 583 3 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
SHIFT N-BITS
RIGHT

(See note.)
INCREMENT ++ 590 2 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
BINARY
DOUBLE ++L 591 2 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
INCREMENT
BINARY
DECREMENT –– 592 2 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
BINARY
DOUBLE DEC- – –L 593 2 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
REMENT
BINARY
INCREMENT ++B 594 2 6.4 4.5 7.4 7.4 ---
BCD
DOUBLE ++BL 595 2 5.6 4.9 6.1 6.1 ---
INCREMENT
BCD
DECREMENT – –B 596 2 6.3 4.6 7.2 7.2 ---
BCD
DOUBLE DEC- – –BL 597 2 5.3 4.7 7.1 7.1 ---
REMENT BCD
1292

(See note.)
SIGNED + 400 4 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.37 ---
BINARY
ADD WITH-
OUT
CARRY
DOUBLE +L 401 4 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.54 ---
SIGNED
BINARY
ADD WITH-
OUT
CARRY
SIGNED +C 402 4 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.37 ---
BINARY
ADD WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE +CL 403 4 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.54 ---
SIGNED
BINARY
ADD WITH
CARRY
BCD ADD +B 404 4 8.2 8.4 14.0 14.0 ---
WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE +BL 405 4 13.3 14.5 19.0 19.0 ---
BCD ADD
WITHOUT
CARRY
BCD ADD +BC 406 4 8.9 9.1 14.5 14.5 ---
WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE +BCL 407 4 13.8 15.0 19.6 19.6 ---
BCD ADD
WITH
CARRY
SIGNED – 410 4 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.37 ---
BINARY
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE –L 411 4 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.54 ---
SIGNED
BINARY
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT
CARRY
SIGNED –C 412 4 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.37 ---
BINARY
SUBTRACT
WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE –CL 413 4 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.54 ---
SIGNED
BINARY
SUBTRACT
WITH
CARRY
1293

(See note.)
BCD SUB- –B 414 4 8.0 8.2 13.1 13.1 ---
TRACT
WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE –BL 415 4 12.8 14.0 18.2 18.2 ---
BCD SUB-
TRACT
WITHOUT
CARRY
BCD SUB- –BC 416 4 8.5 8.6 13.8 13.8 ---
TRACT
WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE –BCL 417 4 13.4 14.7 18.8 18.8 ---
BCD SUB-
TRACT
WITH
CARRY
SIGNED * 420 4 0.38 0.40 0.50 0.58 ---
BINARY
MULTIPLY
DOUBLE *L 421 4 7.23 8.45 11.19 11.19 ---
SIGNED
BINARY
MULTIPLY
UNSIGNED *U 422 4 0.38 0.40 0.50 0.58 ---
BINARY
MULTIPLY
DOUBLE *UL 423 4 7.1 8.3 10.63 10.63 ---
UNSIGNED
BINARY
MULTIPLY
BCD MULTI- *B 424 4 9.0 9.2 12.8 12.8 ---
PLY
DOUBLE *BL 425 4 23.0 24.2 35.2 35.2 ---
BCD MULTI-
PLY
SIGNED / 430 4 0.40 0.42 0.75 0.83 ---
BINARY
DIVIDE
DOUBLE /L 431 4 7.2 8.4 9.8 9.8 ---
SIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
UNSIGNED /U 432 4 0.40 0.42 0.75 0.83 ---
BINARY
DIVIDE
DOUBLE /UL 433 4 6.9 8.1 9.1 9.1 ---
UNSIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
BCD DIVIDE /B 434 4 8.6 8.8 15.9 15.9 ---
DOUBLE /BL 435 4 17.7 18.9 26.2 26.2 ---
BCD DIVIDE
1294

(See note.)
BCD TO BIN 023 3 0.22 0.24 0.25 0.29 ---
BINARY
DOUBLE BINL 058 3 6.5 6.8 9.1 9.1 ---
BCD TO
DOUBLE
BINARY
BINARY TO BCD 024 3 0.24 0.26 8.3 8.3 ---
BCD
DOUBLE BCDL 059 3 6.7 7.0 9.2 9.2 ---
BINARY TO
DOUBLE
BCD
2’S COM- NEG 160 3 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.29 ---
PLEMENT
DOUBLE NEGL 161 3 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.5 ---
2’S COM-
PLEMENT
16-BIT TO SIGN 600 3 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.50 ---
32-BIT
SIGNED
BINARY
DATA MLPX 076 4 0.32 0.42 8.8 8.8 Decoding 1 digit
DECODER (4 to 16)
0.98 1.20 12.8 12.8 Decoding 4 dig-
its (4 to 16)
3.30 4.00 20.3 20.3 Decoding 1 digit
(8 to 256)
6.50 7.90 33.4 33.4 Decoding 2 dig-
its (8 to 256)
DATA DMPX 077 4 7.5 7.9 10.4 10.4 Encoding 1 digit
ENCODER (16 to 4)
49.6 50.2 59.1 59.1 Encoding 4 dig-
its (16 to 4)
18.2 18.6 23.6 23.6 Encoding 1 digit
(256 to 8)
55.1 57.4 92.5 92.5 Encoding 2 dig-
its (256 to 8)
ASCII CON- ASC 086 4 6.8 7.1 9.7 9.7 Converting 1
VERT digit into ASCII
11.2 11.7 15.1 15.1 Converting 4
digits into ASCII
ASCII TO HEX 162 4 7.1 7.4 10.1 10.1 Converting 1
HEX digit
COLUMN LINE 063 4 19.0 23.1 29.1 29.1 ---
TO LINE
LINE TO COLM 064 4 23.2 27.5 37.3 37.3 ---
COLUMN
1295

(See note.)
SIGNED BINS 470 4 8.0 8.3 12.1 12.1 Data format set-
BCD TO ting No. 0
BINARY 8.0 8.3 12.1 12.1 Data format set-
ting No. 1
8.3 8.6 12.7 12.7 Data format set-
ting No. 2
8.5 8.8 13.0 13.0 Data format set-
ting No. 3
DOUBLE BISL 472 4 9.2 9.6 13.6 13.6 Data format set-
SIGNED ting No. 0
BCD TO 9.2 9.6 13.7 13.7 Data format set-
BINARY ting No. 1
9.5 9.9 14.2 14.2 Data format set-
ting No. 2
9.6 10.0 14.4 14.4 Data format set-
ting No. 3
SIGNED BCDS 471 4 6.6 6.9 10.6 10.6 Data format set-
BINARY TO ting No. 0
BCD 6.7 7.0 10.8 10.8 Data format set-
ting No. 1
6.8 7.1 10.9 10.9 Data format set-
ting No. 2
7.2 7.5 11.5 11.5 Data format set-
ting No. 3
DOUBLE BDSL 473 4 8.1 8.4 11.6 11.6 Data format set-
SIGNED ting No. 0
BINARY TO 8.2 8.6 11.8 11.8 Data format set-
BCD ting No. 1
8.3 8.7 12.0 12.0 Data format set-
ting No. 2
8.8 9.2 12.5 12.5 Data format set-
ting No. 3
GRAY GRY 474 4 46.9 72.1 --- --- 8-bit binary
CODE CON- 49.6 75.2 --- --- 8-bit BCD
VERSION
(See note 2.) 57.7 87.7 --- --- 8-bit angle
61.8 96.7 --- --- 15-bit binary
64.5 99.6 --- --- 15-bit BCD
72.8 112.4 --- --- 15-bit angle
52.3 87.2 --- --- 360° binary
55.1 90.4 --- --- 360° BCD
64.8 98.5 --- --- 360° angle
FOUR- STR4 601 3 13.79 20.24 --- ---
DIGIT NUM-
BER TO
ASCII
EIGHT- STR8 602 3 18.82 27.44 --- ---
DIGIT NUM-
BER TO
ASCII
SIXTEEN- STR16 603 3 30.54 44.41 --- ---
DIGIT NUM-
BER TO
ASCII
1296

(See note.)
ASCII TO NUM4 604 3 18.46 27.27 --- ---
FOUR-
DIGIT NUM-
BER
ASCII TO NUM8 605 3 18.46 27.27 --- ---
EIGHT-
DIGIT NUM-
BER
ASCII TO NUM16 606 3 52.31 78.25 --- ---
SIXTEEN-
DIGIT NUM-
BER

(See note.)
LOGICAL ANDW 034 4 0.18 0.20 0.25 0.37 ---
AND
DOUBLE ANDL 610 4 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.54 ---
LOGICAL
AND
LOGICAL OR ORW 035 4 0.22 0.32 0.25 0.37 ---
DOUBLE ORWL 611 4 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.54 ---
LOGICAL OR
EXCLUSIVE XORW 036 4 0.22 0.32 0.25 0.37 ---
OR
DOUBLE XORL 612 4 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.54 ---
EXCLUSIVE
OR
EXCLUSIVE XNRW 037 4 0.22 0.32 0.25 0.37 ---
NOR
DOUBLE XNRL 613 4 0.32 0.34 0.42 0.54 ---
EXCLUSIVE
NOR
COMPLE- COM 029 2 0.22 0.32 0.29 0.37 ---
MENT
DOUBLE COML 614 2 0.40 0.56 0.50 0.67 ---
COMPLE-
MENT
1297

(See note.)
BINARY ROTB 620 3 49.6 50.0 530.7 530.7 ---
ROOT
BCD SQUARE ROOT 072 3 13.7 13.9 514.5 514.5 ---
ROOT
ARITHMETIC APR 069 4 6.7 6.9 32.3 32.3 Designating SIN
PROCESS and COS
17.2 18.4 78.3 78.3 Designating
line-segment
approximation
FLOATING FDIV 079 4 116.6 176.6 176.6 176.6 ---
POINT
DIVIDE
BIT BCNT 067 4 0.3 0.38 22.1 22.1 Counting 1 word
COUNTER

(See note.)
FLOATING TO FIX 450 3 10.6 10.8 14.5 14.5 ---
16-BIT
FLOATING TO FIXL 451 3 10.8 11.0 14.6 14.6 ---
32-BIT
16-BIT TO FLT 452 3 8.3 8.5 11.1 11.1 ---
FLOATING
32-BIT TO FLTL 453 3 8.3 8.5 10.8 10.8 ---
FLOATING
FLOATING- +F 454 4 8.0 9.2 10.2 10.2 ---
POINT ADD
FLOATING- –F 455 4 8.0 9.2 10.3 10.3 ---
POINT SUB-
TRACT
FLOATING- /F 457 4 8.7 9.9 12.0 12.0 ---
POINT
DIVIDE
FLOATING- *F 456 4 8.0 9.2 10.5 10.5 ---
POINT MULTI-
PLY
DEGREES TO RAD 458 3 10.1 10.2 14.9 14.9 ---
RADIANS
RADIANS TO DEG 459 3 9.9 10.1 14.8 14.8 ---
DEGREES
SINE SIN 460 3 42.0 42.2 61.1 61.1 ---
COSINE COS 461 3 31.5 31.8 44.1 44.1 ---
TANGENT TAN 462 3 16.3 16.6 22.6 22.6 ---
ARC SINE ASIN 463 3 17.6 17.9 24.1 24.1 ---
ARC COSINE ACOS 464 3 20.4 20.7 28.0 28.0 ---
ARC TAN- ATAN 465 3 16.1 16.4 16.4 16.4 ---
GENT
1298

(See note.)
SQUARE SQRT 466 3 19.0 19.3 28.1 28.1 ---
ROOT
EXPONENT EXP 467 3 65.9 66.2 96.7 96.7 ---
LOGARITHM LOG 468 3 12.8 13.1 17.4 17.4 ---
EXPONEN- PWR 840 4 125.4 126.0 181.7 181.7 ---
TIAL POWER
Floating Sym- LD, AND, 329 3 6.6 8.3 --- --- ---
bol Compari- OR +=F
son LD, AND, 330
OR +<>F
LD, AND, 331
OR +<F
LD, AND, 332
OR +<=F
LD, AND, 333
OR +>F
LD, AND, 334
OR +>=F
FLOATING- FSTR 448 4 48.5 48.9 --- --- ---
POINT TO
ASCII
ASCII TO FVAL 449 3 21.1 21.3 --- --- ---
FLOATING-
POINT

(See note.)
DOUBLE LD, AND, 335 3 8.5 10.3 --- --- ---
SYMBOL OR +=D
COMPARI- LD, AND, 336
SON OR +<>D
LD, AND, 337
OR +<D
LD, AND, 338
OR +<=D
LD, AND, 339
OR +>D
LD, AND, 340
OR +>=D
DOUBLE FIXD 841 3 11.7 12.1 --- --- ---
FLOATING TO
16-BIT
BINARY
DOUBLE FIXLD 842 3 11.6 12.1 --- --- ---
FLOATING TO
32-BIT
BINARY
1299

(See note.)
16-BIT DBL 843 3 9.9 10.0 --- --- ---
BINARY TO
DOUBLE
FLOATING
32-BIT DBLL 844 3 9.8 10.0 --- --- ---
BINARY TO
DOUBLE
FLOATING
DOUBLE +D 845 4 11.2 11.9 --- --- ---
FLOATING-
POINT ADD
DOUBLE −D 846 4 11.2 11.9 --- --- ---
FLOATING-
POINT SUB-
TRACT
DOUBLE *D 847 4 12.0 12.7 --- --- ---
FLOATING-
POINT MULTI-
PLY
DOUBLE /D 848 4 23.5 24.2 --- --- ---
FLOATING-
POINT
DIVIDE
DOUBLE RADD 849 3 27.4 27.8 --- --- ---
DEGREES TO
RADIANS
DOUBLE DEGD 850 3 11.2 11.9 --- --- ---
RADIANS TO
DEGREES
DOUBLE SIND 851 3 45.4 45.8 --- --- ---
SINE
DOUBLE COSD 852 3 43.0 43.4 --- --- ---
COSINE
DOUBLE TAND 853 3 20.1 20.5 --- --- ---
TANGENT
DOUBLE ARC ASIND 854 3 21.5 21.9 --- --- ---
SINE
DOUBLE ARC ACOSD 855 3 24.7 25.1 --- --- ---
COSINE
DOUBLE ARC ATAND 856 3 19.3 19.7 --- --- ---
TANGENT
DOUBLE SQRTD 857 3 47.4 47.9 --- --- ---
SQUARE
ROOT
DOUBLE EXPD 858 3 121.0 121.4 --- --- ---
EXPONENT
DOUBLE LOGD 859 3 16.0 16.4 --- --- ---
LOGARITHM
DOUBLE PWRD 860 4 223.9 224.2 --- --- ---
EXPONEN-
TIAL POWER
1300

(See note.)
SET STACK SSET 630 3 8.0 8.3 8.5 8.5 Designating 5
words in stack
area
231.6 251.8 276.8 276.8 Designating
1,000 words in
stack area
PUSH ONTO PUSH 632 3 6.5 8.6 9.1 9.1 ---
STACK
FIRST IN FIFO 633 3 6.9 8.9 10.6 10.6 Designating 5
FIRST OUT words in stack
area
352.6 434.3 1.13 ms 1.13 ms Designating
1,000 words in
stack area
LAST IN LIFO 634 3 7.0 9.0 9.9 9.9 ---
FIRST OUT
DIMENSION DIM 631 5 15.2 21.6 142.1 142.1 ---
RECORD
TABLE
SET RECORD SETR 635 4 5.4 5.9 7.0 7.0 ---
LOCATION
GET GETR 636 4 7.8 8.4 11.0 11.0 ---
RECORD
NUMBER
DATA SRCH 181 4 15.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 Searching for 1
SEARCH word
2.42 ms 3.34 ms 3.34 ms 3.34 ms Searching for
1,000 words
SWAP BYTES SWAP 637 3 12.2 13.6 13.6 13.6 Swapping 1
word
1.94 ms 2.82 ms 2.82 ms 2.82 ms Swapping 1,000
words
FIND MAXI- MAX 182 4 19.2 24.9 24.9 24.9 Searching for 1
MUM word
1,000 words
FIND MINI- MIN 183 4 19.2 25.3 25.3 25.3 Searching for 1
MUM word
1,000 words
SUM SUM 184 4 28.2 38.5 38.5 38.3 Adding 1 word
1.42 ms 1.95 ms 1.95 ms 1.95 ms Adding 1,000
words
FRAME FCS 180 4 20.0 28.3 28.3 28.3 For 1-word table
CHECKSUM length
1.65 ms 2.48 ms 2.48 ms 2.48 ms For 1,000-word
table length
STACK SIZE SNUM 638 3 6.0 6.3 --- --- ---
READ
STACK DATA SREAD 639 4 8.0 8.4 --- --- ---
READ
STACK DATA SWRIT 640 4 7.2 7.6 --- --- ---
OVERWRITE
1301

(See note.)
STACK DATA SINS 641 4 7.8 9.9 --- --- ---
INSERT 354.0 434.8 --- --- For 1,000-word
table
STACK DATA SDEL 642 4 8.6 10.6 --- --- ---
DELETE 354.0 436.0 --- --- For 1,000-word
table

(See note.)
PID CON- PID 190 4 436.2 678.2 678.2 678.2 Initial execution
TROL 332.3 474.9 474.9 474.9 Sampling
97.3 141.3 141.3 141.3 Not sampling
LIMIT CON- LMT 680 4 16.1 22.1 22.1 22.1 ---
TROL
DEAD BAND 681 4 17.0 22.5 22.5 22.5 ---
BAND CON-
TROL
DEAD ZONE 682 4 15.4 20.5 20.5 20.5 ---
ZONE CON-
TROL
TIME-PRO- TPO 685 4 10.4 14.8 --- --- OFF execution
POR- time
TIONAL 54.5 82.0 --- --- ON execution
OUTPUT time with duty
(See note 2.) designation or
displayed out-
put limit
61.0 91.9 --- --- ON execution
time with manip-
ulated variable
designation and
output limit
enabled
SCALING SCL 194 4 37.1 53.0 56.8 56.8 ---
SCALING 2 SCL2 486 4 28.5 40.2 50.7 50.7 ---
SCALING 3 SCL3 487 4 33.4 47.0 57.7 57.7 ---
AVERAGE AVG 195 4 36.3 52.6 53.1 53.1 Average of an
operation
291.0 419.9 419.9 419.9 Average of 64
operations
PID CON- PIDAT 191 4 446.3 712.5 --- --- Initial execution
TROL WITH 339.4 533.9 --- --- Sampling
AUTOTUN-
ING 100.7 147.1 --- --- Not sampling
189.2 281.6 --- --- Initial execution
of autotuning
535.2 709.8 --- --- Autotuning
when sampling
1302

(See note.)
SUBROUTINE CALL SBS 091 2 1.26 1.96 17.0 17.0 ---
SUBROUTINE SBN 092 2 --- --- --- --- ---
ENTRY
SUBROUTINE RET 093 1 0.86 1.60 20.60 20.60 ---
RETURN
MACRO MCRO 099 4 23.3 23.3 23.3 23.3 ---
GLOBAL SUBROU- GSBN 751 2 --- --- --- --- ---
TINE CALL
GLOBAL SUBROU- GRET 752 1 1.26 1.96 --- --- ---
TINE ENTRY
GLOBAL SUBROU- GSBS 750 2 0.86 1.60 --- --- ---
TINE RETURN

(See note.)
SET INTERRUPT MSKS 690 3 25.6 38.4 39.5 39.5 ---
MASK
READ INTER- MSKR 692 3 11.9 11.9 11.9 11.9 ---
RUPT MASK
CLEAR INTER- CLI 691 3 27.4 41.3 41.3 41.3 ---
RUPT
DISABLE INTER- DI 693 1 15.0 16.8 16.8 16.8 ---
RUPTS
ENABLE INTER- EI 694 1 19.5 21.8 21.8 21.8 ---
RUPTS

(See note.)
STEP STEP 008 2 17.4 20.7 27.1 27.1 Step control bit
DEFINE ON
11.8 13.7 24.4 24.4 Step control bit
OFF
STEP SNXT 009 2 6.6 7.3 10.0 10.0 ---
START
1303
4-1-20 Basic I/O Unit Instructions

(See note.)
I/O REFRESH IORF 097 3 58.5 63.2 81.7 81.7 1-word refresh (IN)
for C200H Basic
I/O Units
62.6 67.0 86.7 86.7 1-word refresh
(OUT) for C200H
Basic I/O Units
15.5 16.4 23.5 23.5 1-word refresh (IN)
for CS-series Basic
I/O Units
17.20 18.40 25.6 25.6 1-word refresh
(OUT) for CS-
series Basic I/O
Units
303.3 343.9 357.1 357.1 10-word refresh
(IN) for C200H
Basic I/O Units
348.2 376.6 407.5 407.5 10-word refresh
(OUT) for C200H
Basic I/O Units
319.9 320.7 377.5 377.6 60-word refresh
(IN) for CS-series
Basic I/O Units
358.00 354.40 460.1 460.1 60-word refresh
(OUT) for CS-
series Basic I/O
Units
CPU BUS I/O DLNK 226 4 287.8 315.5 --- --- Allocated 1 word
REFRESH
7-SEGMENT SDEC 078 4 6.5 6.9 14.1 14.1 ---
DECODER
DIGITAL DSW 210 6 50.7 73.5 --- --- 4 digits, data input
SWITCH value: 0
INPUT 51.5 73.4 --- --- 4 digits, data input
(See note 2.) value: F
51.3 73.5 --- --- 8 digits, data input
value: 0
50.7 73.4 --- --- 8 digits, data input
value: F
TEN KEY TKY 211 4 9.7 13.2 --- --- Data input value: 0
INPUT 10.7 14.8 --- --- Data input value: F
(See note 2.)
HEXADECI- HKY 212 5 50.3 70.9 --- --- Data input value: 0
MAL KEY 50.1 71.2 --- --- Data input value: F
INPUT
(See note 2.)
MATRIX MTR 213 5 47.8 68.1 --- --- Data input value: 0
INPUT 48.0 68.0 --- --- Data input value: F
(See note 2.)
7-SEGMENT 7SEG 214 5 58.1 83.3 --- --- 4 digits
DISPLAY 63.3 90.3 --- --- 8 digits
OUTPUT
(See note 2.)
1304

(See note.)
INTELLI- IORD 222 4 Read/write times depend on the Special I/O ---
GENT I/O Unit for which the instruction is being exe-
READ cuted.
INTELLI- IOWR 223 4 ---
GENT I/O
WRITE
4-1-21 Serial Communications Instructions

(See note.)
PROTOCOL PMCR 260 5 100.1 142.1 276.8 276.8 Sending 0
MACRO words, receiv-
ing 0 words
134.2 189.6 305.9 305.9 Sending 1 word,
receiving 1 word
TRANSMIT TXD 236 4 68.5 98.8 98.8 98.8 Sending 1 byte
734.3 1.10 ms 1.10 ms 1.10 ms Sending 256
bytes
RECEIVE RXD 235 4 89.6 131.1 131.1 131.1 Storing 1 byte
724.2 1.11 ms 1.11 ms 1.11 ms Storing 256
bytes
TRANSMIT TXDU 256 4 131.5 202.4 --- --- Sending 1 byte
VIA SERIAL
COMMUNI-
CATIONS
UNIT
RECEIVE VIA RXDU 255 4 131 200.8 --- --- Storing 1 byte
SERIAL COM-
MUNICA-
TIONS UNIT
CHANGE STUP 237 3 341.2 400.0 440.4 440.4 ---
SERIAL
PORT SETUP
4-1-22 Network Instructions

(See note.)
NETWORK SEND 090 4 84.4 123.9 123.9 123.9 ---
SEND
NETWORK RECV 098 4 85.4 124.7 124.7 124.7 ---
RECEIVE
DELIVER CMND 490 4 106.8 136.8 136.8 136.8 ---
COMMAND
1305

(See note.)
EXPLICIT EXPLT 720 4 127.6 190.0 --- --- ---
MESSAGE
SEND
(See note 2.)
EXPLICIT EGATR 721 4 123.9 185.0 --- --- ---
GET
ATTRIBUTE
(See note 2.)
EXPLICIT ESATR 722 3 110.0 164.4 --- --- ---
SET
ATTRIBUTE
(See note 2.)
EXPLICIT ECHRD 723 4 106.8 158.9 --- --- ---
WORD
READ
(See note 2.)
EXPLICIT ECHWR 724 4 106.0 158.3 --- --- ---
WORD
WRITE
(See note 2.)
4-1-23 File Memory Instructions

(See note.)
READ DATA FREAD 700 5 391.4 632.4 684.1 684.1 2-character
FILE directory + file
name in binary
836.1 1.33 ms 1.35 ms 1.35 ms 73-character
directory + file
name in binary
WRITE FWRIT 701 5 387.8 627.0 684.7 684.7 2-character
DATA FILE directory + file
name in binary
833.3 1.32 ms 1.36 ms 1.36 ms 73-character
directory + file
name in binary
WRITE TWRIT 704 5 390.1 619.1 --- ---
TEXT FILE
4-1-24 Display Instructions

(See note.)
DISPLAY MSG 046 3 10.1 14.2 14.3 14.3 Displaying mes-
MESSAGE sage
8.4 11.3 11.3 11.3 Deleting dis-
played message
1306
4-1-25 Clock Instructions

(See note.)
CALENDAR CADD 730 4 38.3 201.9 209.5 209.5 ---
ADD
CALENDAR CSUB 731 4 38.6 170.4 184.1 184.1 ---
SUBTRACT
HOURS TO SEC 065 3 21.4 29.3 35.8 35.8 ---
SECONDS
SECONDS TO HMS 066 3 22.2 30.9 42.1 42.1 ---
HOURS
CLOCK DATE 735 2 60.5 87.4 95.9 95.9 ---
ADJUSTMENT
4-1-26 Debugging Instructions

(See note.)
Trace Mem- TRSM 045 1 80.4 120.0 120.0 120.0 Sampling 1 bit
ory Sam- and 0 words
pling 848.1 1.06 ms 1.06 ms 1.06 ms Sampling 31 bits
and 6 words
4-1-27 Failure Diagnosis Instructions

(See note.)
FAILURE FAL 006 3 15.4 16.7 16.7 16.7 Recording
ALARM errors
179.8 244.8 244.8 244.8 Deleting errors
(in order of pri-
ority)
432.4 657.1 657.1 657.1 Deleting errors
(all errors)
161.5 219.4 219.4 219.4 Deleting errors
(individually)
SEVERE FALS 007 3 --- --- --- --- ---
FAILURE
ALARM
FAILURE FPD 269 4 140.9 202.3 202.3 202.3 When executed
POINT 163.4 217.6 217.6 217.6 First time
DETECTION
185.2 268.9 268.9 268.9 When executed
207.5 283.6 283.6 283.6 First time
1307
4-1-28 Other Instructions

(See note.)
SET CARRY STC 040 1 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.12 ---
CLEAR CLC 041 1 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.12 ---
CARRY
SELECT EM EMBC 281 2 14.0 15.1 15.1 15.1 ---
BANK
EXTEND WDT 094 2 15.0 19.7 19.7 19.7 ---
MAXIMUM
CYCLE
TIME
SAVE CON- CCS 282 1 8.6 12.5 --- --- ---
DITION
FLAGS
LOAD CON- CCL 283 1 9.8 13.9 --- --- ---
DITION
FLAGS
CONVERT FRMCV 284 3 13.6 19.9 --- --- ---
ADDRESS
FROM CV
CONVERT TOCV 285 3 11.9 17.2 --- --- ---
ADDRESS
TO CV
DISABLE IOSP 287 --- 13.9 19.8 --- --- ---
PERIPH-
ERAL SER-
VICING
ENABLE IORS 288 --- 63.6 92.3 --- --- ---
PERIPH-
ERAL SER-
VICING
4-1-29 Block Programming Instructions

(See note.)
BLOCK BPRG 096 2 12.1 13.0 13.0 13.0 ---
PROGRAM
BEGIN
BLOCK BEND 801 1 9.6 12.3 13.1 13.1 ---
PROGRAM
END
BLOCK BPPS 811 2 10.6 12.3 14.9 14.9 ---
PROGRAM
PAUSE
BLOCK BPRS 812 2 5.1 5.6 8.3 8.3 ---
PROGRAM
RESTART
CONDI- (Execution 806 1 10.0 11.3 12.9 12.9 EXIT condition
TIONAL condition) satisfied
BLOCK EXIT 4.0 4.9 7.3 7.3 EXIT condition
EXIT not satisfied
1308

(See note.)
CONDI- EXIT (bit 806 2 6.8 13.5 16.3 16.3 EXIT condition
TIONAL address) satisfied
BLOCK 4.7 7.2 10.7 10.7 EXIT condition
EXIT not satisfied
CONDI- EXIT NOT 806 2 12.4 14.0 16.8 16.8 EXIT condition
TIONAL (bit address) satisfied
BLOCK 7.1 7.6 11.2 11.2 EXIT condition
EXIT (NOT) not satisfied
Branching IF (execution 802 1 4.6 4.8 7.2 7.2 IF true
condition) 6.7 7.3 10.9 10.9 IF false
Branching IF (relay 802 2 6.8 7.2 10.4 10.4 IF true
number) 9.0 9.6 14.2 14.2 IF false
Branching IF NOT 802 2 7.1 7.6 10.9 10.9 IF true
(NOT) (relay num- 9.2 10.1 14.7 14.7 IF false
ber)
Branching ELSE 803 1 6.2 6.7 9.9 9.9 IF true
6.8 7.7 11.2 11.2 IF false
Branching IEND 804 1 6.9 7.7 11.0 11.0 IF true
4.4 4.6 7.0 7.0 IF false
ONE WAIT (exe- 805 1 12.6 13.7 16.7 16.7 WAIT condition
CYCLE AND cution condi- satisfied
WAIT tion) 3.9 4.1 6.3 6.3 WAIT condition
not satisfied
ONE WAIT (relay 805 2 12.0 13.4 16.5 16.5 WAIT condition
CYCLE AND number) satisfied
WAIT 6.1 6.5 9.6 9.6 WAIT condition
not satisfied
ONE WAIT NOT 805 2 12.2 13.8 17.0 17.0 WAIT condition
CYCLE AND (relay num- satisfied
WAIT (NOT) ber) 6.4 6.9 10.1 10.1 WAIT condition
not satisfied
COUNTER CNTW 814 4 17.9 22.6 27.4 27.4 Default setting
WAIT 19.1 23.9 28.7 28.7 Normal execu-
tion
CNTWX 818 4 17.9 22.6 --- --- Default setting
19.1 23.9 --- --- Normal execu-
tion
TEN-MS TMHW 815 3 25.8 27.9 34.1 34.1 Default setting
TIMER 20.6 22.7 28.9 28.9 Normal execu-
WAIT tion
TMHWX 817 3 25.8 27.9 --- --- Default setting
20.6 22.7 --- --- Normal execu-
tion
9.3 10.8 --- --- LEND condition
not satisfied
Loop Control LOOP 809 1 7.9 9.1 12.3 12.3 ---
Loop Control LEND (exe- 810 1 7.7 8.4 10.9 10.9 LEND condition
cution condi- satisfied
tion) 6.8 8.0 9.8 9.8 LEND condition
not satisfied
1309

(See note.)
Loop Control LEND (relay 810 2 9.9 10.7 14.4 14.4 LEND condition
number) satisfied
8.9 10.3 13.0 13.0 LEND condition
not satisfied
Loop Control LEND NOT 810 2 10.2 11.2 14.8 14.8 LEND condition
(relay num- satisfied
ber) 9.3 10.8 13.5 13.5 LEND condition
not satisfied
HUNDRED- TIMW 813 3 22.3 25.2 33.1 33.1 Default setting
MS TIMER 24.9 27.8 35.7 35.7 Normal execu-
WAIT tion
TIMWX 816 3 22.3 25.2 --- --- Default setting
24.9 27.8 --- --- Normal execu-
tion
4-1-30 Text String Processing Instructions

(See note.)
MOV STRING MOV$ 664 3 45.6 66.0 84.3 84.3 Transferring 1
character
CONCATE- +$ 656 4 86.5 126.0 167.8 167.8 1 character + 1
NATE character
STRING
GET STRING LEFT$ 652 4 53.0 77.4 94.3 94.3 Retrieving 1
LEFT character from 2
characters
GET STRING RGHT$ 653 4 52.2 76.3 94.2 94.2 Retrieving 1
RIGHT character from 2
characters
GET STRING MID$ 654 5 56.5 84.6 230.2 230.2 Retrieving 1
MIDDLE character from 3
characters
FIND IN FIND$ 660 4 51.4 77.5 94.1 94.1 Searching for 1
STRING character from 2
characters
STRING LEN$ 650 3 19.8 28.9 33.4 33.4 Detecting 1
LENGTH character
REPLACE IN RPLC$ 661 6 175.1 258.7 479.5 479.5 Replacing the
STRING first of 2 charac-
ters with 1 char-
acter
DELETE DEL$ 658 5 63.4 94.2 244.6 244.6 Deleting the
STRING leading charac-
ter of 2 charac-
ters
EXCHANGE XCHG$ 665 3 60.6 87.2 99.0 99.0 Exchanging 1
STRING character with 1
character
CLEAR CLR$ 666 2 23.8 36.0 37.8 37.8 Clearing 1 char-
STRING acter
1310

(See note.)
INSERT INTO INS$ 657 5 136.5 200.6 428.9 428.9 Inserting 1 char-
STRING acter after the
first of 2 charac-
ters
String Com- LD, AND, 670 4 48.5 69.8 86.2 86.2 Comparing 1
parison OR +=$ character with 1
Instructions LD, AND, 671 character
OR +<>$
LD, AND, 672
OR +<$
LD, AND, 674
OR +>$
LD, AND, 675
OR +>=$
4-1-31 Task Control Instructions

(See note.)
TASK ON TKON 820 2 19.5 26.3 26.3 26.3 ---
TASK OFF TKOF 821 2 13.3 19.0 26.3 26.3 ---
4-1-32 Model Conversion Instructions (CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or later only)
(See note.)
BLOCK XFERC 565 4 6.4 6.5 --- --- Transferring 1
TRANSFER word
481.6 791.6 --- --- Transferring
1,000 words
SINGLE DISTC 566 4 3.4 3.5 --- --- Data distribute
WORD DIS- 5.9 7.3 --- --- Stack operation
TRIBUTE
DATA COL- COLLC 567 4 3.5 3.85 --- --- Data distribute
LECT 8 9.1 --- --- Stack operation
8.3 9.6 --- --- Stack operation
1 word FIFO
Read
2,052.3 2,097.5 --- --- Stack operation
1,000 word
FIFO Read
MOVE BIT MOVBC 568 4 4.5 4.88 --- --- ---
BIT BCNTC 621 4 4.9 5 --- --- Counting 1 word
COUNTER 1,252.4 1284.4 --- --- Counting 1,000
words
1311
CJ-series Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 4-2
4-1-33 Special Function Block Instructions (CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later
Only)
(See note.)
GET VARI- GETID 286 4 14 22.2 --- --- ---
ABLE ID
Guidelines on Converting Guidelines are provided in the following table for converting the program
Program Capacities from capacity (unit: words) of previous OMRON PLCs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE,
Previous OMRON PLCs CVM1, or CV-series PLCs) to the program capacity (unit: steps) of the CS-
series PLCs.
Add the following value (n) to the program capacity (unit: words) of the previ-
ous PLCs for instruction to obtain the program capacity (unit: steps) of the
CS-series PLCs.
CS-series steps = “a” (words) of previous PLC + n
Instructions Variations Value of n when Value of n when
converting from converting from
C200HX/HG/HE to CV-series PLC or
CS Series CVM1 to CS
Series
Basic None OUT, SET, RSET, 0
instructions or KEEP(011): –1
Other instructions:
0
Upward Differentiation None +1
Immediate Refreshing None 0
Upward Differentiation and None +2
Immediate Refreshing
Special None 0 –1
instructions Upward Differentiation +1 0
Immediate Refreshing None +3
Upward Differentiation and None +4
Immediate Refreshing
For example, if OUT is used with an address of CIO 000000 to CIO 25515, the
program capacity of a C200HX/HG/HE PLC would be 2 words per instruction
and that of the CS-series PLC would be 1 (2 – 1) step per instruction.
For example, if !MOV is used (MOVE instruction with immediate refreshing),
the program capacity of a CV-series PLC would be 4 words per instruction
and that of the CS-series PLC would be 7 (4 + 3) steps.
4-2 CJ-series Instruction Execution Times and Number of

Steps
The following table lists the execution times for all instructions that are avail-
able for CJ PLCs.
The total execution time of instructions within one whole user program is the
process time for program execution when calculating the cycle time (See
note.).
Note User programs are allocated tasks that can be executed within cyclic tasks
and interrupt tasks that satisfy interrupt conditions.
1312
Execution times for most instructions differ depending on the CPU Unit used
(CJ1H-CPU6@H-R, CJ1H-CPU6@H, CJ1H-CPU4@H, CJ1M-CPU@@
andCJ1G-CPU4@) and the conditions when the instruction is executed. The
top line for each instruction in the following table shows the minimum time
required to process the instruction and the necessary execution conditions,
and the bottom line shows the maximum time and execution conditions
required to process the instruction.
The execution time can also vary when the execution condition is OFF.
The following table also lists the length of each instruction in the Length
(steps) column. The number of steps required in the user program area for
each of the CJ-series instructions varies from 1 to 7 steps, depending upon
the instruction and the operands used with it. The number of steps in a pro-
gram is not the same as the number of instructions.
Note 1. Program capacity for CJ-series PLCs is measured in steps, whereas pro-
series PLCs, was measured in words. Basically speaking, 1 step is equiv-
alent to 1 word. The amount of memory required for each instruction, how-
ever, is different for some of the CJ-series instructions, and inaccuracies
will occur if the capacity of a user program for another PLC is converted for
a CJ-series PLC based on the assumption that 1 word is 1 step. Refer to
the information at the end of 4-1 CS-series Instruction Execution Times
and Number of Steps for guidelines on converting program capacities from
previous OMRON PLCs.
2. Most instructions are supported in differentiated form (indicated with ↑, ↓,
@, and %). Specifying differentiation will increase the execution times by
the following amounts.
Symbol CJ1-H CJ1M CJ1
CPU6@H-R CPU6@H CPU4@H CPU@@ CPU4@
↑ or ↓ +0.24 µs +0.24 µs +0.32 µs +0.5 µs +0.45 µs
@ or % +0.24 µs +0.24 µs +0.32 µs +0.5 µs +0.33 µs
3. Use the following times as guidelines when instructions are not executed.
CJ1-H CJ1M CJ1
CPU6@H-R CPU6@H CPU4@H CPU@@ CPU4@
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.2
0.1 µs 0.1 µs 0.2 µs to 0.5 µs to 0.4 µs

Instruction Mne- Code Length ON execution time (µs) Conditions
monic (steps) CPU6@ CPU6@ CPU4@ CPU4@ CJ1M CJ1M
H-R H H exclud- CPU11/
ing 21
CPU11/
21
LOAD LD --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
!LD --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for immedi-
ate refresh
LOAD NOT LD NOT --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 008 0.10 0.10 ---
!LD NOT --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for immedi-
ate refresh
AND AND --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
!AND --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for immedi-
ate refresh
1313

H-R H H exclud- CPU11/
ing 21
CPU11/
21
AND NOT AND --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
NOT
!AND --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for immedi-
NOT ate refresh
OR OR --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
!OR --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for immedi-
ate refresh
OR NOT OR NOT --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
!OR --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for immedi-
NOT ate refresh
AND LOAD AND LD --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.05 0.05 ---
OR LOAD OR LD --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.05 0.05 ---
NOT NOT 520 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.05 0.05 ---
CONDI- UP 521 3 0.24 0.3 0.42 0.54 0.50 0.50 ---
TION ON
CONDI- DOWN 522 4 0.24 0.3 0.42 0.54 0.50 0.50 ---
TION OFF
LOAD BIT LD TST 350 4 0.11 0.14 0.24 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
TEST
LOAD BIT LD 351 4 0.11 0.14 0.24 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
TEST NOT TSTN
AND BIT AND 351 4 0.11 0.14 0.24 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
TEST NOT TSTN
OR BIT OR TST 350 4 0.11 0.14 0.24 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
TEST
OR BIT OR 351 4 0.11 0.14 0.24 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
TEST NOT TSTN
column in the following table

(See H-R H H exclud- CPU11/
note.) ing 21
CPU11/
21
OUTPUT OUT --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.21 0.35 0.35 ---
!OUT --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +23.07 +28.60 Increase for immedi-
ate refresh
OUTPUT OUT --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.21 0.35 0.35 ---
NOT NOT
!OUT --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +23.07 +28.60 Increase for immedi-
NOT ate refresh
KEEP KEEP 11 1 0.048 0.06 0.08 0.29 0.40 0.40 ---
DIFFEREN- DIFU 13 2 0.21 0.24 0.40 0.54 0.50 0.50 ---
TIATE UP
1314

note.) ing 21
CPU11/
21
DIFFEREN- DIFD 14 2 0.21 0.24 0.40 0.54 0.50 0.50 ---
TIATE
DOWN
SET SET --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.06 0.21 0.30 0.30 ---
!SET --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +23.17 +28.60 Increase for immedi-
ate refresh
RESET RSET --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.06 0.21 0.30 0.30 Word specified
!RSET --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +23.17 +28.60 Increase for immedi-
ate refresh
MULTIPLE SETA 530 4 5.8 5.8 6.1 7.8 11.8 11.8 With 1-bit set
BIT SET 25.7 25.7 27.2 38.8 64.1 64.1 With 1,000-bit set
MULTIPLE RSTA 531 4 5.7 5.7 6.1 7.8 11.8 11.8 With 1-bit reset
BIT RESET 25.8 25.8 27.1 38.8 64.0 64.0 With 1,000-bit reset
SINGLE BIT SETB 532 2 0.19 0.24 0.34 --- 0.5 0.5 ---
SET !SETB 3 +21.44 +21.44 +21.54 --- +23.31 +23.31 ---
SINGLE BIT RSTB 533 2 0.19 0.24 0.34 --- 0.5 0.5 ---
RESET !RSTB 3 +21.44 +21.44 +21.54 --- +23.31 +23.31 ---
SINGLE BIT OUTB 534 2 0.19 0.22 0.32 --- 0.45 0.45 ---
OUTPUT !OUTB 3 +21.42 +21.42 +21.52 --- +23.22 +23.22 ---

(See H-R H H exclud- CPU11
note 1.) ing /21
CPU11/
21
END END 001 1 5.5 5.5 6.0 4.0 7.9 7.9 ---
NO OPER- NOP 000 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.12 0.05 0.05 ---
ATION
INTER- IL 002 1 0.048 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
LOCK
INTER- ILC 003 1 0.048 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
LOCK
CLEAR
MULTI- MILH 517 3 6.1 6.1 6.5 --- 10.3 11.7 During interlock
INTER- 7.5 7.5 7.9 --- 13.3 14.6 Not during interlock
LOCK DIF-
FERENTIAT and interlock not set
ION HOLD 8.9 8.9 9.7 --- 16.6 18.3 Not during interlock
(See note and interlock set
2.)
MULTI- MILR 518 3 6.1 6.1 6.5 --- 10.3 11.7 During interlock
INTER-
LOCK DIF- 7.5 7.5 7.9 --- 13.3 14.6 Not during interlock
FERENTIAT and interlock not set
ION 8.9 8.9 9.7 --- 16.6 18.3 Not during interlock
RELEASE and interlock set
(See note
2.)
1315

note 1.) ing /21
CPU11/
21
MULTI- MILC 519 2 5.0 5.0 5.6 --- 8.3 12.5 Interlock not cleared
INTER- 5.7 5.7 6.2 --- 9.6 14.2 Interlock cleared
LOCK
CLEAR
(See note
2.)
JUMP JMP 004 2 0.31 0.38 0.48 8.1 0.95 0.95 ---
JUMP END JME 005 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
CONDI- CJP 510 2 0.31 0.38 0.48 7.4 0.95 0.95 When JMP condition
TIONAL is satisfied
JUMP
CONDI- CJPN 511 2 0.31 0.38 0.48 8.5 0.95 0.95 When JMP condition
TIONAL is satisfied
JUMP NOT
MULTIPLE JMP0 515 1 0.048 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
JUMP
MULTIPLE JME0 516 1 0.048 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
JUMP END
FOR LOOP FOR 512 2 0.18 0.21 0.21 0.21 1.00 1.00 Designating a
constant
BREAK BREAK 514 1 0.048 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
LOOP
NEXT NEXT 513 1 0.14 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.45 0.45 When loop is contin-
LOOP ued
0.18 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.55 0.55 When loop is ended

monic (steps)
(See CPU6 CPU6 CPU4 CPU4 CJ1M CJ1M
note 1.) @H-R @H @H @ exclud- CPU11
ing /21
CPU11
/21
HUNDRED- TIM --- 3 0.45 0.56 0.88 0.42 1.30 1.30 ---
MS TIMER
TIMX 550 0.45
TEN-MS TIMH 015 3 0.70 0.88 1.14 0.42 1.80 1.80 ---
TIMER
TIMHX 551 0.46 0.56 0.88 0.42 1.30 1.30
ONE-MS TMHH 540 3 0.69 0.86 1.12 0.42 1.75 1.75 ---
TIMER
TMHHX 552 0.46 0.56 0.88 0.42 1.30 1.30
TENTH-MS TIMU 541 3 0.45 --- --- --- --- --- ---
TIMER
TIMUX 556 0.45
(See note 2.)
HUNDREDTH- TMUH 544 3 0.45 --- --- --- --- --- ---
MS TIMER
TMUHX 557 0.45
(See note 2.)
1316

monic (steps) CPU6 CPU6 CPU4 CPU4 CJ1M CJ1M
(See @H-R @H @H @ exclud- CPU11
note 1.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
ACCUMULA- TTIM 087 3 16.1 16.1 17.0 21.4 27.4 30.9 ---
TIVE TIMER 10.9 10.9 11.4 14.8 19.0 21.2 When resetting
8.5 8.5 8.7 10.7 15.0 16.6 When interlocking
TTIMX 555 16.1 16.1 17.0 --- 27.4 --- ---
10.9 10.9 11.4 --- 19.0 --- When resetting
8.5 8.5 8.7 --- 15.0 --- When interlocking
LONG TIMER TIML 542 4 7.6 7.6 10.0 12.8 16.3 17.2 ---
6.2 6.2 6.5 7.8 13.8 15.3 When interlocking
TIMLX 553 7.6 7.6 10.0 --- 16.3 --- ---
6.2 6.2 6.5 --- 13.8 --- When interlocking
MULTI-OUT- MTIM 543 4 20.9 20.9 23.3 26.0 38.55 43.3 ---
PUT TIMER 5.6 5.6 5.8 7.8 12.9 13.73 When resetting
MTIMX 554 20.9 20.9 23.3 --- 38.55 --- ---
5.6 5.6 5.8 --- 12.9 --- When resetting
COUNTER CNT --- 3 0.51 0.56 0.88 0.42 1.30 1.30 ---
CNTX 546 0.51 ---
REVERSIBLE CNTR 012 3 16.9 16.9 19.0 20.9 31.8 27.2 ---
COUNTER CNTRX 548 ---
RESET CNR 545 3 9.9 9.9 10.6 13.9 14.7 17.93 When resetting 1
TIMER/ word
COUNTER 4.16 4.16 4.16 5.42 6.21 6.30 When resetting
ms ms ms ms ms ms 1,000 words
CNRX 547 3 9.9 9.9 10.6 13.9 14.7 17.93 When resetting 1
word
4.16 4.16 4.16 5.42 6.21 6.30 When resetting
1317

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
Input Com- LD, AND, 300 4 0.08 0.10 0.16 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
parison OR +=
Instructions LD, AND, 305
(unsigned) OR + <>
LD, AND, 310
OR + <
LD, AND, 315
OR +<=
LD, AND, 320
OR +>
LD, AND, 325
OR +>=
Input Com- LD, AND, 301 4 0.08 0.10 0.16 0.54 0.35 0.35 ---
parison OR +=+L
Instructions LD, AND, 306 ---
(double, OR +<>+L
unsigned)
LD, AND, 311 ---
OR +<+L
LD, AND, 316 ---
OR +<=+L
LD, AND, 321 ---
OR +>+L
LD, AND, 326 ---
OR +>=+L
Input Com- LD, AND, 302 4 0.08 0.10 0.16 6.50 0.35 0.35 ---
parison OR +=+S
Instructions LD, AND, 307
(signed) OR
+<>+S
LD, AND, 312
OR +<+S
LD, AND, 317
OR +<=
LD, AND, 322
OR +>+S
LD, AND, 327
OR
+>=+S
1318

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
Input Com- LD, AND, 303 4 0.08 0.10 0.16 6.50 0.35 0.35 ---
parison OR
Instructions +=+SL
(double, LD, AND, 308
signed) OR
+<>+SL
LD, AND, 313
OR
+<+SL
LD, AND, 318
OR
+<=+SL
LD, AND, 323
OR
+>+SL
LD, AND, 328
OR
+>=+SL
Time Com- LD, AND, 341 4 25.1 25.1 36.4 --- 18.8 39.6 ---
parison OR +DT
Instructions LD, AND, 342 4 25.2 25.2 36.4 --- 45.6 40.6 ---
(See note 2.) OR
+<>DT
LD, AND, 343 4 25.2 25.2 36.4 --- 45.6 40.7 ---
OR +<DT
LD, AND, 344 4 25.2 25.2 36.4 --- 18.8 39.6 ---
OR
+<=DT
LD, AND, 345 4 25.1 25.1 36.4 --- 45.6 41.1 ---
OR +>DT
LD, AND, 346 4 25.2 25.2 36.4 --- 18.8 39.6 ---
OR
+>=DT
COMPARE CMP 20 3 0.032 0.04 0.04 0.29 0.10 0.10 ---
!CMP 20 7 42.1 42.1 42.1 42.4 +45.2 45.2 Increase for
immediate
refresh
DOUBLE CMPL 60 3 0.064 0.08 0.08 0.46 0.50 0.50 ---
COMPARE
SIGNED CPS 114 3 0.064 0.08 0.08 6.50 0.30 0.30 ---
BINARY !CPS 114 7 35.9 35.9 35.9 42.4 +45.2 45.2 Increase for
COMPARE immediate
refresh
DOUBLE CPSL 115 3 0.064 0.08 0.08 6.50 0.50 0.50 ---
SIGNED
BINARY
COMPARE
TABLE COM- TCMP 85 4 14.0 14.0 15.2 21.9 29.77 32.13 ---
PARE
MULTIPLE MCMP 19 4 20.5 20.5 22.8 31.2 45.80 48.67 ---
COMPARE
1319

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
UNSIGNED BCMP 68 4 21.5 21.5 23.7 32.6 47.93 51.67 ---
BLOCK
COMPARE
EXPANDED BCMP2 502 4 8.4 --- --- --- 13.20 19.33 Number of data
BLOCK words: 1
COMPARE 313.0 --- --- --- 650.0 754.67 Number of data
words: 255
AREA ZCP 88 3 5.3 5.3 5.4 --- 11.53 12.43 ---
RANGE
COMPARE
DOUBLE ZCPL 116 3 5.5 5.5 6.7 --- 11.28 11.90 ---
AREA
RANGE
COMPARE

note.) ing 21
CPU11/
21
MOVE MOV 21 3 0.14 0.18 0.20 0.29 0.30 0.30 ---
!MOV 21 7 21.38 21.38 21.40 42.36 +35.1 43.0 Increase for
immediate refresh
DOUBLE MOVL 498 3 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.50 0.60 0.60 ---
MOVE
MOVE NOT MVN 22 3 0.14 0.18 0.20 0.29 0.35 0.35 ---
DOUBLE MVNL 499 3 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.50 0.60 0.60 ---
MOVE NOT
MOVE BIT MOVB 82 4 0.19 0.24 0.34 7.5 0.50 0.50 ---
MOVE MOVD 83 4 0.19 0.24 0.34 7.3 0.50 0.50 ---
DIGIT
MULTIPLE XFRB 62 4 10.1 10.1 10.8 13.6 20.9 22.1 Transferring 1 bit
BIT TRANS- 186.4 186.4 189.8 269.2 253.3 329.7 Transferring 255
FER bits
BLOCK XFER 70 4 0.29 0.36 0.44 11.2 0.8 0.8 Transferring 1
TRANSFER word
240.1 300.1 380.1 633.5 650.2 650.2 Transferring 1,000
words
BLOCK SET BSET 71 4 0.21 0.26 0.28 8.5 0.55 0.55 Setting 1 word
142.2 200.1 220.1 278.3 400.2 400.2 Setting 1,000
words
DATA XCHG 73 3 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.7 0.80 0.80 ---
EXCHANGE
1320

note.) ing 21
CPU11/
21
DOUBLE XCGL 562 3 0.61 0.76 1.04 1.3 1.5 1.5 ---
DATA
EXCHANGE
SINGLE DIST 80 4 5.1 5.1 5.4 7.0 6.6 12.47 ---
WORD DIS-
TRIBUTE
DATA COL- COLL 81 4 5.1 5.1 5.3 7.1 6.5 12.77 ---
LECT
MOVE TO MOVR 560 3 0.064 0.08 0.08 0.50 0.60 0.60 ---
REGISTER
MOVE MOVR 561 3 0.064 0.42 0.50 0.50 0.60 0.60 ---
TIMER/ W
COUNTER
PV TO REG-
ISTER

note.) ing 21
CPU11/
21
SHIFT SFT 10 3 7.4 7.4 10.4 10.4 11.9 15.3 Shifting 1 word
REGISTER 187.3 433.2 488.0 763.1 1.39 ms 1.43 ms Shifting 1,000
words
REVERS- SFTR 84 4 6.9 6.9 7.2 9.6 11.4 15.5 Shifting 1 word
IBLE SHIFT 399.3 615.3 680.2 859.6 1.43 ms 1.55 ms Shifting 1,000
REGISTER words
ASYN- ASFT 17 4 6.2 6.2 6.4 7.7 13.4 14.2 Shifting 1 word
CHRO- 1.22 ms 1.22 ms 1.22 ms 2.01 ms 2.75 ms 2.99 ms Shifting 1,000
NOUS words
SHIFT REG-
ISTER
WORD WSFT 16 4 4.5 4.5 4.7 7.8 9.6 12.3 Shifting 1 word
SHIFT 171.5 171.5 171.7 781.7 928.0 933.3 Shifting 1,000
words
ARITH- ASL 25 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
METIC
SHIFT LEFT
DOUBLE ASLL 570 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
SHIFT LEFT
ARITH- ASR 26 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
METIC
SHIFT
RIGHT
DOUBLE ASRL 571 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
SHIFT
RIGHT
1321

note.) ing 21
CPU11/
21
ROTATE ROL 27 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
LEFT
DOUBLE ROLL 572 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
ROTATE
LEFT
ROTATE RLNC 574 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
LEFT WITH-
OUT
CARRY
DOUBLE RLNL 576 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
ROTATE
LEFT WITH-
OUT
CARRY
ROTATE ROR 28 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
RIGHT
DOUBLE RORL 573 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
ROTATE
RIGHT
ROTATE RRNC 575 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
RIGHT
WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE RRNL 577 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
ROTATE
RIGHT
WITHOUT
CARRY
ONE DIGIT SLD 74 3 5.9 5.9 6.1 8.2 7.6 12.95 Shifting 1 word
SHIFT LEFT 561.1 561.1 626.3 760.7 1.15 ms 1.27 ms Shifting 1,000
words
ONE DIGIT SRD 75 3 6.9 6.9 7.1 8.7 8.6 15.00 Shifting 1 word
SHIFT 760.5 760.5 895.5 1.07 ms 1.72 ms 1.82 ms Shifting 1,000
RIGHT words
SHIFT N-BIT NSFL 578 4 7.5 7.5 8.3 10.5 14.8 16.0 Shifting 1 bit
DATA LEFT 34.5 40.3 45.4 55.5 86.7 91.3 Shifting 1,000 bits
SHIFT N-BIT NSFR 579 4 7.5 7.5 8.3 10.5 14.7 15.9 Shifting 1 bit
DATA RIGHT 48.2 50.5 55.3 69.3 114.1 119.6 Shifting 1,000 bits
SHIFT N- NASL 580 3 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
BITS LEFT
DOUBLE NSLL 582 3 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
SHIFT N-
BITS LEFT
SHIFT N- NASR 581 3 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
BITS RIGHT
DOUBLE NSRL 583 3 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
SHIFT N-
BITS RIGHT
1322

note.) ing /21
CPU11/
21
INCREMENT ++ 590 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
BINARY
DOUBLE ++L 591 2 0.18 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
INCREMENT
BINARY
DECREMENT –– 592 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
BINARY
DOUBLE – –L 593 2 0.18 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
DECREMENT
BINARY
INCREMENT ++B 594 2 5.7 6.4 4.5 7.4 12.3 14.7 ---
BCD
DOUBLE ++BL 595 2 5.6 5.6 4.9 6.1 9.24 10.8 ---
INCREMENT
BCD
DECREMENT – –B 596 2 5.7 6.3 4.6 7.2 11.9 14.9 ---
BCD
DOUBLE – –BL 597 2 5.3 5.3 4.7 7.1 9.0 10.7 ---
DECREMENT
BCD

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
SIGNED + 400 4 0.18 0.18 0.20 0.37 0.30 0.30 ---
BINARY ADD
WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE +L 401 4 0.18 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
SIGNED
BINARY ADD
WITHOUT
CARRY
SIGNED +C 402 4 0.18 0.18 0.20 0.37 0.40 0.40 ---
BINARY ADD
WITH CARRY
DOUBLE +CL 403 4 0.18 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
SIGNED
BINARY ADD
WITH CARRY
BCD ADD +B 404 4 7.6 8.2 8.4 14.0 18.9 21.5 ---
WITHOUT
CARRY
1323

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
DOUBLE BCD +BL 405 4 9.2 13.3 14.5 19.0 24.4 27.7 ---
ADD WITH-
OUT CARRY
BCD ADD +BC 406 4 8.0 8.9 9.1 14.5 19.7 22.6 ---
WITH CARRY
DOUBLE BCD +BCL 407 4 9.6 13.8 15.0 19.6 25.2 28.8 ---
ADD WITH
CARRY
SIGNED – 410 4 0.18 0.18 0.20 0.37 0.3 0.3 ---
BINARY SUB-
TRACT WITH-
OUT CARRY
DOUBLE –L 411 4 0.18 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
SIGNED
BINARY SUB-
TRACT WITH-
OUT CARRY
SIGNED –C 412 4 0.18 0.18 0.20 0.37 0.3 0.3 ---
BINARY SUB-
TRACT WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE –CL 413 4 0.18 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
SIGNED
BINARY SUB-
TRACT WITH
CARRY
BCD SUB- –B 414 4 7.4 8.0 8.2 13.1 18.1 20.5 ---
TRACT WITH-
OUT CARRY
DOUBLE BCD –BL 415 4 8.9 12.8 14.0 18.2 23.2 26.7 ---
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT
CARRY
BCD SUB- –BC 416 4 7.9 8.5 8.6 13.8 19.1 21.6 ---
TRACT WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE BCD –BCL 417 4 9.4 13.4 14.7 18.8 24.3 27.7 ---
SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
SIGNED * 420 4 0.26 0.38 0.40 0.58 0.65 0.65 ---
BINARY MUL-
TIPLY
DOUBLE *L 421 4 5.93 7.23 8.45 11.19 13.17 15.0 ---
SIGNED
BINARY MUL-
TIPLY
UNSIGNED *U 422 4 0.26 0.38 0.40 0.58 0.75 0.75 ---
BINARY MUL-
TIPLY
DOUBLE *UL 423 4 5.9 7.1 8.3 10.63 13.30 15.2 ---
UNSIGNED
BINARY MUL-
TIPLY
BCD MULTI- *B 424 4 8.3 9.0 9.2 12.8 17.5 19.7 ---
PLY
1324

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
DOUBLE BCD *BL 425 4 12.8 23.0 24.2 35.2 36.3 45.7 ---
MULTIPLY
SIGNED / 430 4 0.29 0.40 0.42 0.83 0.70 0.70 ---
BINARY
DIVIDE
DOUBLE /L 431 4 7.2 7.2 8.4 9.8 13.7 15.5 ---
SIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
UNSIGNED /U 432 4 0.29 0.40 0.42 0.83 0.8 0.8 ---
BINARY
DIVIDE
DOUBLE /UL 433 4 6.9 6.9 8.1 9.1 12.8 14.7 ---
UNSIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
BCD DIVIDE /B 434 4 8.6 8.6 8.8 15.9 19.3 22.8 ---
DOUBLE BCD /BL 435 4 13.1 17.7 18.9 26.2 27.1 34.7 ---
DIVIDE

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
BCD TO BIN 023 3 0.18 0.22 0.24 0.29 0.40 0.40 ---
BINARY
DOUBLE BINL 058 3 6.1 6.5 6.8 9.1 12.3 13.7 ---
BCD TO
DOUBLE
BINARY
BINARY TO BCD 024 3 0.19 0.24 0.26 8.3 7.62 9.78 ---
BCD
DOUBLE BCDL 059 3 6.7 6.7 7.0 9.2 10.6 12.8 ---
BINARY TO
DOUBLE
BCD
2’S COM- NEG 160 3 0.14 0.18 0.20 0.29 0.35 0.35 ---
PLEMENT
DOUBLE NEGL 161 3 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.5 0.60 0.60 ---
2’S COM-
PLEMENT
16-BIT TO SIGN 600 3 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.50 0.60 0.60 ---
32-BIT
SIGNED
BINARY
1325

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
DATA MLPX 076 4 0.32 0.32 0.42 8.8 0.85 0.85 Decoding 1 digit (4
DECODER to 16)
0.98 0.98 1.20 12.8 1.60 1.60 Decoding 4 digits
(4 to 16)
3.30 3.30 4.00 20.3 4.70 4.70 Decoding 1 digit (8
to 256)
6.50 6.50 7.90 33.4 8.70 8.70 Decoding 2 digits
(8 to 256)
DATA DMPX 077 4 7.5 7.5 7.9 10.4 9.4 13.9 Encoding 1 digit
ENCODER (16 to 4)
49.6 49.6 50.2 59.1 57.3 71.73 Encoding 4 digits
(16 to 4)
18.2 18.2 18.6 23.6 56.8 82.7 Encoding 1 digit
(256 to 8)
55.1 55.1 57.4 92.5 100.0 150.7 Encoding 2 digits
(256 to 8)
ASCII CON- ASC 086 4 6.8 6.8 7.1 9.7 8.3 14.6 Converting 1 digit
VERT into ASCII
9.0 11.2 11.7 15.1 19.1 21.8 Converting 4 digits
into ASCII
ASCII TO HEX 162 4 7.1 7.1 7.4 10.1 12.1 15.6 Converting 1 digit
HEX
COLUMN LINE 063 4 16.6 19.0 23.1 29.1 37.0 40.3 ---
TO LINE
LINE TO COLM 064 4 18.4 23.2 27.5 37.3 45.7 48.2 ---
COLUMN
SIGNED BINS 470 4 6.8 8.0 8.3 12.1 16.2 17.0 Data format
BCD TO setting No. 0
BINARY 6.8 8.0 8.3 12.1 16.2 17.1 Data format
setting No. 1
7.1 8.3 8.6 12.7 16.5 17.7 Data format
setting No. 2
7.4 8.5 8.8 13.0 16.5 17.6 Data format
setting No. 3
DOUBLE BISL 472 4 6.9 9.2 9.6 13.6 18.4 19.6 Data format
SIGNED setting No. 0
BCD TO 7.0 9.2 9.6 13.7 18.5 19.8 Data format
BINARY setting No. 1
7.3 9.5 9.9 14.2 18.6 20.1 Data format
setting No. 2
7.6 9.6 10.0 14.4 18.7 20.1 Data format
setting No. 3
SIGNED BCDS 471 4 6.6 6.6 6.9 10.6 13.5 16.4 Data format
BINARY TO setting No. 0
BCD 6.7 6.7 7.0 10.8 13.8 16.7 Data format
setting No. 1
6.8 6.8 7.1 10.9 13.9 16.8 Data format
setting No. 2
7.1 7.2 7.5 11.5 14.0 17.1 Data format
setting No. 3
1326

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
DOUBLE BDSL 473 4 7.6 8.1 8.4 11.6 11.4 12.5 Data format
SIGNED setting No. 0
BINARY TO 6.7 8.2 8.6 11.8 11.7 12.73 Data format
BCD setting No. 1
6.7 8.3 8.7 12.0 11.8 12.8 Data format
setting No. 2
6.9 8.8 9.2 12.5 11.9 13.0 Data format
setting No. 3
GRAY GRY 474 4 46.9 46.9 72.1 --- 80.0 71.2 8-bit binary
CODE 49.6 49.6 75.2 --- 83.0 75.6 8-bit BCD
CONVER-
SION 57.7 57.7 87.7 --- 95.9 86.4 8-bit angle
(See note 61.8 61.8 96.7 --- 104.5 91.6 15-bit binary
2.) 64.5 64.5 99.6 --- 107.5 96.1 15-bit BCD
72.8 72.8 112.4 --- 120.4 107.3 15-bit angle
52.3 52.3 87.2 --- 88.7 82.4 360° binary
55.1 55.1 90.4 --- 91.7 86.8 360° BCD
64.8 64.8 98.5 --- 107.3 98.1 360° angle
FOUR- STR4 601 3 13.79 13.79 20.24 --- 22.16 19.88 ---
DIGIT NUM-
BER TO
ASCII
EIGHT- STR8 602 3 18.82 18.82 27.44 --- 29.55 26.70 ---
DIGIT NUM-
BER TO
ASCII
SIXTEEN- STR16 603 3 30.54 30.54 44.41 --- 48.16 44.10 ---
DIGIT NUM-
BER TO
ASCII
ASCII TO NUM4 604 3 18.46 18.46 27.27 --- 29.13 26.88 ---
FOUR-
DIGIT NUM-
BER
ASCII TO NUM8 605 3 27.27 27.27 40.29 --- 42.69 39.71 ---
EIGHT-
DIGIT NUM-
BER
ASCII TO NUM16 606 3 52.31 52.31 78.25 --- 82.21 74.23 ---
SIXTEEN-
DIGIT NUM-
BER
1327

note.) ing /21
CPU11/
21
LOGICAL ANDW 034 4 0.14 0.18 0.20 0.37 0.30 0.30 ---
AND
DOUBLE ANDL 610 4 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
LOGICAL
AND
LOGICAL OR ORW 035 4 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE ORWL 611 4 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
LOGICAL OR
EXCLUSIVE XORW 036 4 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
OR
DOUBLE XORL 612 4 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
EXCLUSIVE
OR
EXCLUSIVE XNRW 037 4 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
NOR
DOUBLE XNRL 613 4 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
EXCLUSIVE
NOR
COMPLE- COM 029 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
MENT
DOUBLE COML 614 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
COMPLE-
MENT

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
BINARY ROTB 620 3 49.6 49.6 50.0 530.7 56.5 82.7 ---
ROOT
BCD SQUARE ROOT 072 3 13.7 13.7 13.9 514.5 59.3 88.4 ---
ROOT
ARITHMETIC APR 069 4 6.7 6.7 6.9 32.3 14.0 15.0 Designating SIN
PROCESS and COS
17.2 17.2 18.4 78.3 32.2 37.9 Designating line-
segment approxi-
mation
FLOATING FDIV 079 4 116.6 116.6 176.6 176.6 246.0 154.7 ---
POINT DIVIDE
BIT BCNT 067 4 0.24 0.3 0.38 22.1 0.65 0.65 Counting 1 word
COUNTER
1328

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
FLOATING TO FIX 450 3 0.13 10.6 10.8 14.5 16.2 19.5 ---
16-BIT
FLOATING TO FIXL 451 3 0.13 10.8 11.0 14.6 16.6 21.7 ---
32-BIT
16-BIT TO FLT 452 3 0.13 8.3 8.5 11.1 12.2 14.6 ---
FLOATING
32-BIT TO FLTL 453 3 0.13 8.3 8.5 10.8 14.0 15.8 ---
FLOATING
FLOATING- +F 454 4 0.24 8.0 9.2 10.2 13.3 15.7 ---
POINT ADD
FLOATING- –F 455 4 0.24 8.0 9.2 10.3 13.3 15.8 ---
POINT SUB-
TRACT
FLOATING- /F 457 4 0.4 8.7 9.9 12.0 14.0 17.6 ---
POINT DIVIDE
FLOATING- *F 456 4 0.24 8.0 9.2 10.5 13.2 15.8 ---
POINT MULTI-
PLY
DEGREES TO RAD 458 3 8.1 10.1 10.2 14.9 15.9 20.6 ---
RADIANS
RADIANS TO DEG 459 3 8.0 9.9 10.1 14.8 15.7 20.4 ---
DEGREES
SINE SIN 460 3 42.0 42.0 42.2 61.1 47.9 70.9 ---
HIGH-SPEED SINQ 475 8 0.59 --- --- --- --- --- ---
SINE
(See note 2.)
COSINE COS 461 3 31.5 31.5 31.8 44.1 41.8 51.0 ---
HIGH-SPEED COSQ 476 8 0.59 --- --- --- --- --- ---
COSINE
(See note 2.)
TANGENT TAN 462 3 16.3 16.3 16.6 22.6 20.8 27.6 ---
HIGH-SPEED TANQ 477 15 1.18 --- --- --- --- --- ---
TANGENT
(See note 2.)
ARC SINE ASIN 463 3 17.6 17.6 17.9 24.1 80.3 122.9 ---
ARC COSINE ACOS 464 3 20.4 20.4 20.7 28.0 25.3 33.5 ---
ARC TAN- ATAN 465 3 16.1 16.1 16.4 16.4 45.9 68.9 ---
GENT
SQUARE SQRT 466 3 0.42 19.0 19.3 28.1 26.2 33.2 ---
ROOT
EXPONENT EXP 467 3 65.9 65.9 66.2 96.7 68.8 108.2 ---
LOGARITHM LOG 468 3 12.8 12.8 13.1 17.4 69.4 103.7 ---
EXPONEN- PWR 840 4 125.4 125.4 126.0 181.7 134.0 201.0 ---
TIAL POWER
1329

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
Floating Sym- LD, 329 3 0.13 6.6 8.3 --- 12.6 15.37 ---
bol Compari- AND,
son OR
+=F
LD, 330
AND,
OR
+<>F
LD, 331
AND,
OR
+<F
LD, 332
AND,
OR
+<=F
LD, 333
AND,
OR
+>F
LD, 334
AND,
OR
+>=F
FLOATING- FSTR 448 4 48.5 48.5 48.9 --- 58.4 85.7 ---
POINT TO
ASCII
ASCII TO FVAL 449 3 21.1 21.1 21.3 --- 31.1 43.773 ---
FLOATING-
POINT
MOVE FLOAT- MOVF 469 3 0.18 --- --- --- --- --- ---
ING-POINT
(SINGLE)
(See note 2.)
1330

note.) ing /21
CPU11/
21
DOUBLE LD, AND, 335 3 8.5 8.5 10.3 --- 16.2 19.9 ---
SYMBOL OR +=D
COMPARI- LD, AND, 336
SON OR +<>D
LD, AND, 337
OR +<D
LD, AND, 338
OR +<=D
LD, AND, 339
OR +>D
LD, AND, 340
OR +>=D
DOUBLE FIXD 841 3 11.0 11.7 12.1 --- 16.1 21.6 ---
FLOATING TO
16-BIT
BINARY
DOUBLE FIXLD 842 3 10.2 11.6 12.1 --- 16.4 21.7 ---
FLOATING TO
32-BIT
BINARY
16-BIT DBL 843 3 9.9 9.9 10.0 --- 14.3 16.5 ---
BINARY TO
DOUBLE
FLOATING
32-BIT DBLL 844 3 9.8 9.8 10.0 --- 16.0 17.7 ---
BINARY TO
DOUBLE
FLOATING
DOUBLE +D 845 4 11.2 11.2 11.9 --- 18.3 23.6 ---
FLOATING-
POINT ADD
DOUBLE −D 846 4 11.2 11.2 11.9 --- 18.3 23.6 ---
FLOATING-
POINT SUB-
TRACT
DOUBLE *D 847 4 12.0 12.0 12.7 --- 19.0 25.0 ---
FLOATING-
POINT MULTI-
PLY
DOUBLE /D 848 4 23.5 23.5 24.2 --- 30.5 44.3 ---
FLOATING-
POINT DIVIDE
DOUBLE RADD 849 3 11.5 27.4 27.8 --- 32.7 49.1 ---
DEGREES TO
RADIANS
DOUBLE DEGD 850 3 11.2 11.2 11.9 --- 33.5 48.4 ---
RADIANS TO
DEGREES
DOUBLE SINE SIND 851 3 45.4 45.4 45.8 --- 67.9 76.7 ---
DOUBLE COSD 852 3 43.0 43.0 43.4 --- 70.9 72.3 ---
COSINE
1331

note.) ing /21
CPU11/
21
DOUBLE TAN- TAND 853 3 19.8 20.1 20.5 --- 97.9 157.0 ---
GENT
DOUBLE ARC ASIND 854 3 21.5 21.5 21.9 --- 32.3 37.3 ---
SINE
DOUBLE ARC ACOSD 855 3 24.7 24.7 25.1 --- 29.9 42.5 ---
COSINE
DOUBLE ARC ATAND 856 3 19.3 19.3 19.7 --- 24.0 34.4 ---
TANGENT
DOUBLE SQRTD 857 3 47.4 47.4 47.9 --- 52.9 81.9 ---
SQUARE
ROOT
DOUBLE EXPD 858 3 121.0 121.0 121.4 --- 126.3 201.3 ---
EXPONENT
DOUBLE LOGD 859 3 16.0 16.0 16.4 --- 21.6 29.3 ---
LOGARITHM
DOUBLE PWRD 860 4 223.9 223.9 224.2 --- 232.3 373.4 ---
EXPONEN-
TIAL POWER

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
SET STACK SSET 630 3 8.0 8.0 8.3 8.5 14.2 20.3 Designating 5
words in stack
area
231.6 231.6 251.8 276.8 426.5 435.3 Designating
1,000 words in
stack area
PUSH ONTO PUSH 632 3 6.5 6.5 8.6 9.1 15.7 16.4 ---
STACK
FIRST IN FIFO 633 3 6.9 6.9 8.9 10.6 15.8 16.8 Designating 5
FIRST OUT words in stack
area
352.6 352.6 434.3 1.13 728.0 732.0 Designating
ms 1,000 words in
stack area
LAST IN LIFO 634 3 7.0 7.0 9.0 9.9 16.6 17.2 ---
FIRST OUT
DIMENSION DIM 631 5 15.2 15.2 21.6 142.1 27.8 27.1 ---
RECORD
TABLE
SET RECORD SETR 635 4 5.4 5.4 5.9 7.0 12.8 13.2 ---
LOCATION
GET RECORD GETR 636 4 7.8 7.8 8.4 11.0 16.1 18.3 ---
NUMBER
1332

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
DATA SRCH 181 4 15.5 15.5 19.5 19.5 29.1 26.4 Searching for 1
SEARCH word
2.42 2.42 3.34 3.34 4.41 3.60 Searching for
SWAP BYTES SWAP 637 3 12.2 12.2 13.6 13.6 21.0 18.4 Swapping 1 word
1.94 1.94 2.82 2.82 3.65 3.15 Swapping 1,000
ms ms ms ms ms ms words
FIND MAXI- MAX 182 4 19.2 19.2 24.9 24.9 35.3 32.0 Searching for 1
MUM word
2.39 2.39 3.36 3.36 4.39 3.57 Searching for
FIND MINI- MIN 183 4 19.2 19.2 25.3 25.3 35.4 31.9 Searching for 1
MUM word
2.39 2.39 3.33 3.33 4.39 3.58 Searching for
SUM SUM 184 4 28.2 28.2 38.5 38.3 49.5 44.1 Adding 1 word
14.2 1.42 1.95 1.95 2.33 2.11 Adding 1,000
ms ms ms ms ms ms words
FRAME FCS 180 4 20.0 20.0 28.3 28.3 34.8 31.5 For 1-word table
CHECKSUM length
1.65 1.65 2.48 2.48 3.11 2.77 For 1,000-word
ms ms ms ms ms ms table length
STACK SIZE SNUM 638 3 6.0 6.0 6.3 --- 12.1 13.7 ---
READ
STACK DATA SREA 639 4 8.0 8.0 8.4 --- 18.1 20.6 ---
READ D
STACK DATA SWRIT 640 4 7.2 7.2 7.6 --- 16.9 18.8 ---
OVERWRITE
STACK DATA SINS 641 4 7.8 7.8 9.9 --- 18.2 20.5 ---
INSERT 354.0 354.0 434.8 --- 730.7 732.0 For 1,000-word
table
STACK DATA SDEL 642 4 8.6 8.6 10.6 --- 19.3 22.0 ---
DELETE 354.0 354.0 436.0 --- 732.0 744.0 For 1,000-word
table
1333

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
PID CON- PID 190 4 436.2 436.2 678.2 678.2 612.0 552.6 Initial execution
TROL 332.3 332.3 474.9 474.9 609.3 548.0 Sampling
97.3 97.3 141.3 141.3 175.3 162.0 Not sampling
LIMIT CON- LMT 680 4 16.1 16.1 22.1 22.1 27.1 26.1 ---
TROL
DEAD BAND BAND 681 4 17.0 17.0 22.5 22.5 27.4 26.6 ---
CONTROL
DEAD ZONE ZONE 682 4 15.4 15.4 20.5 20.5 28.0 26.4 ---
CONTROL
TIME-PRO- TPO 685 4 10.6 10.6 14.8 --- 20.2 19.8 OFF execution
PORTIONAL time
OUTPUT 54.5 54.5 82.0 --- 92.7 85.1 ON execution
(See note 2.) time with duty
designation or
displayed output
limit
61.0 61.0 91.9 --- 102.5 95.3 ON execution
time with manip-
ulated variable
designation and
output limit
enabled
SCALING SCL 194 4 13.9 13.9 14.3 56.8 25.0 32.8 ---
SCALING 2 SCL2 486 4 12.2 12.2 12.6 50.7 22.3 29.1 ---
SCALING 3 SCL3 487 4 13.7 13.7 14.2 57.7 25.6 30.0 ---
AVERAGE AVG 195 4 36.3 36.3 52.6 53.1 62.9 59.1 Average of an
operation
291.0 291.0 419.9 419.9 545.3 492.7 Average of 64
operations
PID CON- PIDAT 191 4 446.3 446.3 712.5 --- 765.3 700.0 Initial execution
TROL WITH 339.4 339.4 533.9 --- 620.7 558.0 Sampling
AUTOTUNING
100.7 100.7 147.1 --- 180.0 166.1 Not sampling
189.2 189.2 281.6 --- 233.7 225.1 Initial execution
of autotuning
535.2 535.2 709.8 --- 575.3 558.2 Autotuning when
sampling
1334

Instruction Mne- Code Length ON execution time (µs) Condi-
monic (steps) CPU6 CPU6 CPU4 CPU4 CJ1M CJ1M tions
note.) ing /21
CPU11/
21
SUBROUTINE CALL SBS 91 2 0.90 1.26 1.96 17.0 2.04 2.04 ---
SUBROUTINE ENTRY SBN 92 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
SUBROUTINE RET 93 1 0.43 0.86 1.60 20.60 1.80 1.80 ---
RETURN
MACRO MCRO 99 4 23.3 23.3 23.3 23.3 47.9 50.3 ---
GLOBAL SUBROU- GSBN 751 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
TINE CALL
GLOBAL SUBROU- GRET 752 1 0.90 1.26 1.96 --- 2.04 2.04 ---
TINE ENTRY
GLOBAL SUBROU- GSBS 750 2 0.43 0.86 1.60 --- 1.80 1.80 ---
TINE RETURN

Instruction Mne- Code Length ON execution time (µs) Condi-
monic (steps) CPU6 CPU6 CPU4 CPU4 CJ1M CJ1M tions
note.) ing /21
CPU11/
21
SET INTERRUPT MSKS 690 3 25.6 25.6 38.4 39.5 44.7 42.9 ---
MASK
READ INTERRUPT MSKR 692 3 11.9 11.9 11.9 11.9 16.9 15.9 ---
MASK
CLEAR INTERRUPT CLI 691 3 27.4 27.4 41.3 41.3 42.7 44.5 ---
DISABLE INTER- DI 693 1 15.0 15.0 16.8 16.8 30.3 28.5 ---
RUPTS
ENABLE INTER- EI 694 1 19.5 19.5 21.8 21.8 37.7 34.4 ---
RUPTS
1335

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
MODE CON- INI 880 4 --- --- --- --- 77.00 80.4 Starting high-
TROL speed counter
comparison
--- --- --- --- 43.00 43.0 Stopping high-
speed counter
comparison
--- --- --- --- 43.40 48.8 Changing pulse
output PV
--- --- --- --- 51.80 50.8 Changing high-
speed counter
PV
--- --- --- --- 31.83 28.5 Changing PV of
counter in inter-
rupt input mode
--- --- --- --- 45.33 49.8 Stopping pulse
output
--- --- --- --- 36.73 30.5 Stopping
PWM(891) out-
put
HIGH-SPEED PRV 881 4 --- --- --- --- 42.40 43.9 Reading pulse
COUNTER PV output PV
READ
--- --- --- --- 53.40 65.9 Reading high-
speed counter
PV
--- --- --- --- 33.60 30.5 Reading PV of
counter in inter-
rupt input mode
--- --- --- --- 38.80 40.0 Reading pulse
output status
--- --- --- --- 39.30 66.9 Reading high-
speed counter
status
--- --- --- --- 38.30 34.5 Reading
PWM(891) sta-
tus
--- --- --- --- 117.73 145.7 Reading high-
speed counter
range compari-
son results
--- --- --- --- 48.20 48.5 Reading fre-
quency of high-
speed counter 0
1336

note.) ing /21
CPU11
/21
COMPARISON CTBL 882 4 --- --- --- --- 238.0 235.0 Registering tar-
TABLE LOAD get value table
and starting
comparison for 1
target value
--- --- --- --- 14.42 9.97 Registering tar-
ms ms get value table
and starting
comparison for
48 target values
--- --- --- --- 289.0 276.0 Registering
range table and
starting compari-
son
--- --- --- --- 198.0 183.0 Only registering
target value table
for 1 target value
ms ms target value table
for 48 target val-
ues
range table
COUNTER PRV2 883 4 --- --- --- --- 23.03 22.39 ---
FREQUENCY
CONVERT
SPEED OUT- SPED 885 4 --- --- --- --- 56.00 89.3 Continuous
PUT mode
--- --- --- --- 62.47 94.9 Independent
mode
SET PULSES PULS 886 4 --- --- --- --- 26.20 32.9 ---
PULSE OUT- PLS2 887 5 --- --- --- --- 100.80 107.5 ---
PUT
ACCELERA- ACC 888 4 --- --- --- --- 90.80 114.8 Continuous
TION CON- mode
TROL
--- --- --- --- 80.00 122.1 Independent
mode
ORIGIN ORG 889 3 --- --- --- --- 106.13 116.0 Origin search
SEARCH
--- --- --- --- 52.00 102.1 Origin return
PULSE WITH PWM 891 4 --- --- --- --- 25.80 33.0 ---
VARIABLE
DUTY FACTOR
Note Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
1337

note.) ing /21
CPU11/
21
STEP DEFINE STEP 008 2 17.4 17.4 20.7 27.1 35.9 37.1 Step control bit
ON

Instructions For CX Programmer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions For CX Programmer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions For CX Programmer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cat. No.

OMRON Product References

Lot No. Unit version

Lot No. 040715 0000 Ver.3.0

OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN

• CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units manufactured on or before Novem-

The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed.

Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX Ver. @ .@

OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN

• Functions Supported for Unit Version 4.0 or Later

CS1D CPU Units

CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Units

CS1D CPU Units

CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Units

Note 1. As shown above, there is no need to upgrade to CX-Programmer version

After the above message is displayed, a compiling

CS1-H CPU Units CJ2 CPU Units NSJ Controllers

CS1H-CPU@@H CJ2H-CPU@@-@@@ NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-G5D

CS1D Process-control CPU Units

CS-series Special I/O Units CJ-series Special I/O Units

CS-series CPU Bus Units CJ-series CPU Bus Units

CS-series Power Supply Units CJ-series Power Supply Units

NSJ-series Controller Notation

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-

IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii

• Transferring I/O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming

!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to

!Caution Be careful when connecting personal computers or other peripheral devices

4 Operating Environment Precautions

• Locations subject to direct sunlight.

!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in

• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

A Programming Console can, however, be used to edit multitask pro-

standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by

6-3 Conformance to EC Directives

6-4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods

If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, These values, however, vary with the

Power resistance of the inductive load. current.

time lag between the moment the cir-

cuit is opened and the moment the load

When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent

1-1 General Instruction Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1-1 General Instruction Characteristics

• CS1 CPU Units

• CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU Systems

CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems

• CJ1-H CPU Units

• CJ1 CPU Units

• CJ1M CPU Units

1-1-2 Differentiated Instructions

• An upwardly differentiated instruction is executed only once after its exe-

an execution condi- the execution condition is

Input instructions The bit processing (such Upwardly differentiated

Input instructions The bit processing (such Downwardly differentiated 0001